Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

ANSYS, Inc. Release 2024 R1

Southpointe January 2024
2600 Ansys Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317 ANSYS, Inc. and
ansysinfo@ansys.com ANSYS Europe,
Ltd. are UL
http://www.ansys.com registered ISO
(T) 724-746-3304 9001: 2015
(F) 724-514-9494 companies.
Copyright and Trademark Information

© 2024 ANSYS, Inc. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.

ANSYS, Ansys Workbench, AUTODYN, CFX, FLUENT and any and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature
names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries located in the
United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark
of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service and feature names or trademarks are the property
of their respective owners. FLEXlm and FLEXnet are trademarks of Flexera Software LLC.

Disclaimer Notice

THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.

ANSYS, Inc. and ANSYS Europe, Ltd. are UL registered ISO 9001: 2015 companies.

U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).

Third-Party Software

See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, contact ANSYS, Inc.

Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
1. Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely ........................................................................... 1
1.1. Starting Remote Visualization ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1. Steps for Starting the Server ..................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1.1. Port Management ........................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2. Steps For Starting the Remote Visualization Client .................................................................... 3
1.2. Using a Job Scheduler with Remote Visualization .............................................................................. 4
1.3. Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment ................................................................ 4
1.3.1. Adding New Remote Client Connections .................................................................................. 4
1.3.2. Using the Help System ............................................................................................................. 5
1.3.3. Setting Preferences .................................................................................................................. 5
1.3.4. Initializing, Starting, Pausing, and Interrupting the Calculation ................................................... 6
1.3.5. Modifying Solution Settings ..................................................................................................... 7
1.3.6. Graphics Window Interactions and Context Menus ................................................................... 9
1.3.7. Surfaces ................................................................................................................................. 10
1.3.7.1. Point Surfaces ............................................................................................................... 11
1.3.7.2. Line Surfaces ................................................................................................................. 12
1.3.7.3. Rake Surfaces ................................................................................................................ 13
1.3.7.4. Plane Surfaces ............................................................................................................... 14
1.3.7.5. Iso-Surfaces ................................................................................................................... 18
1.3.8. Graphics Objects .................................................................................................................... 22
1.3.8.1. Creating and Displaying Graphics objects ...................................................................... 22
1.3.8.2. Creating and Displaying Plot objects .............................................................................. 23
1.3.8.3. Creating and Displaying Scenes ..................................................................................... 24
1.3.8.4. Saving Pictures of the Graphics Window ......................................................................... 26
1.3.8.5. Modifying the Views ...................................................................................................... 26
1.3.8.6. Synchronizing with the Server ....................................................................................... 26
1.3.9. Messaging and Text Commands ............................................................................................. 27
1.3.10. Saving Case and Data Files .................................................................................................... 28
1.3.11. Disconnecting the Server and Client ..................................................................................... 29
1.3.11.1. Disconnecting from Within the Remote Client Session .................................................. 29
1.3.11.2. Disconnecting from Within the Remote Server Session ................................................. 30
1.3.12. Modifying Preferences .......................................................................................................... 30
1.4. Python, Scripting and Transcripts in the Remote Client ..................................................................... 30
1.4.1. Python Scripting .................................................................................................................... 31
1.4.2. Starting and Stopping a Transcript .......................................................................................... 33
1.5. Remote Visualization Best Practices ................................................................................................. 33
1.6. Remote Visualization Client Environment Variables .......................................................................... 34
1.7. Limitations ..................................................................................................................................... 35
2. Fluent Icing ............................................................................................................................................ 37
2.1. Overview of Fluent Icing ................................................................................................................. 37
2.2. Known Limitations in Fluent Icing 2024 R1 ....................................................................................... 39
2.3. Quick Start ...................................................................................................................................... 40
2.4. Starting Fluent Icing ....................................................................................................................... 42
2.5. Fluent Icing Graphical User Interface Layout .................................................................................... 44
2.5.1. Using the Help System ........................................................................................................... 52
2.6. Creating or Opening a Fluent Icing Project ...................................................................................... 53
2.6.1. Creating a Fluent Icing Project ................................................................................................ 53
2.6.2. Opening a Fluent Icing Project ................................................................................................ 54
2.6.3. Project Library ........................................................................................................................ 55

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iii
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

2.6.4. Project Close .......................................................................................................................... 58

2.7. Creating or Loading a Fluent Icing Simulation .................................................................................. 58
2.7.1. Case File Requirements .......................................................................................................... 58
2.7.2. Fluent Solver and License Requirements ................................................................................. 59
2.7.3. Creating a New Simulation by Importing/Loading a Case File .................................................. 59
2.7.4. Loading a Simulation ............................................................................................................. 61
2.7.5. Use Custom Solver Launch Settings to Load in Solver ............................................................. 62
2.7.6. Disconnecting from a Simulation ............................................................................................ 64
2.7.7. Duplicating a Simulation ........................................................................................................ 65
2.7.8. Loading Multiple Simulations ................................................................................................. 66
2.8. Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation ................................................................................................ 69
2.8.1. Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 69
2.8.1.1. Airflow .......................................................................................................................... 72
2.8.1.2. Particles ........................................................................................................................ 78
2.8.1.3. Ice ................................................................................................................................. 90
2.8.2. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................. 93
2.8.2.1. Inlets ............................................................................................................................. 94
2.8.2.2. Walls ........................................................................................................................... 102
2.8.2.3. Outlets ........................................................................................................................ 108
2.8.3. Solution ............................................................................................................................... 109
2.8.3.1. Airflow ........................................................................................................................ 111
2.8.3.2. Particles ...................................................................................................................... 118
2.8.3.3. Ice ............................................................................................................................... 125
2.8.3.4. Multi-Shot ................................................................................................................... 137
2.8.3.5. CHT ............................................................................................................................. 142
2.8.4. Results ................................................................................................................................. 144
2.8.4.1. Quick-View .................................................................................................................. 148
2.9. Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations ..................................................... 151
2.9.1. Simulation Folder Commands ............................................................................................... 151
2.9.2. Run Folder Commands ......................................................................................................... 154
2.9.3. Case File Commands ............................................................................................................ 156
2.9.4. Solution File Commands ....................................................................................................... 157
2.9.5. The Use of Bold Text in Project View ...................................................................................... 158
2.9.6. Project View Organization Options ....................................................................................... 159
2.10. Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing ............................................................................................... 165
2.10.1. Loading a Dataset Into Post-Analysis ................................................................................... 165
2.10.2. Managing Datasets ............................................................................................................. 167
2.10.3. Graphics Window Commands ............................................................................................. 169
2.10.4. Graphical Objects ............................................................................................................... 172
2.10.5. Case Comparison ............................................................................................................... 178
2.10.6. Solution Sequences ............................................................................................................ 179
2.11. Post Processing with Viewmerical and CFD-Post from Fluent Icing ................................................ 181
2.11.1. Viewmerical ....................................................................................................................... 181
2.11.1.1. Accessing Viewmerical from Quick-View ..................................................................... 182
2.11.1.2. Accessing Viewmerical from Project View ................................................................... 182
2.11.1.3. Comparing Multiple Solutions with Viewmerical ........................................................ 182
2.11.2. CFD-Post ............................................................................................................................ 183
2.11.2.1. Accessing CFD-Post from Quick-View ......................................................................... 183
2.11.2.2. Accessing CFD-Post from Project View ........................................................................ 183
2.11.3. EnSight .............................................................................................................................. 184
2.12. Preferences ................................................................................................................................. 184

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
iv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

2.13. File Types .................................................................................................................................... 186

2.14. Appendix .................................................................................................................................... 189
2.14.1. Python Console .................................................................................................................. 189
2.14.2. Batch Launching ................................................................................................................ 190
2.14.3. Data Structures .................................................................................................................. 191
2.14.4. Project API ......................................................................................................................... 192
2.14.5. Post-Analysis API (Beta) ...................................................................................................... 194
2.14.6. Fluent Journal Commands .................................................................................................. 195
2.14.7. Run Sequence .................................................................................................................... 198
2.14.8. Field Name Mapping .......................................................................................................... 202
2.15. Launch and Run a Fluent Icing Simulation Using Job Scheduler on a Cluster ................................. 204
3. Fluent Aero .......................................................................................................................................... 211
3.1. Overview of Fluent Aero ................................................................................................................ 211
3.2. Known Issues and Limitations in Fluent Aero 2024 R1 .................................................................... 212
3.3. Quick Start .................................................................................................................................... 214
3.4. Starting Fluent Aero ...................................................................................................................... 216
3.4.1. Solver and License Requirements ......................................................................................... 217
3.5. Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface .............................................................................................. 217
3.5.1. Using the Help System .......................................................................................................... 221
3.5.2. Layout Menu ........................................................................................................................ 222
3.5.3. File Menu ............................................................................................................................. 223
3.5.4. Ribbon Commands .............................................................................................................. 224
3.6. Creating or Opening a Fluent Aero Project ..................................................................................... 230
3.6.1. Creating a Fluent Aero Project .............................................................................................. 230
3.6.2. Opening a Fluent Aero Project .............................................................................................. 230
3.6.3. Project Library ...................................................................................................................... 231
3.6.4. Project Close ........................................................................................................................ 233
3.7. Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation ................................................................................ 233
3.7.1. General Case File or Mesh File Requirements ......................................................................... 233
3.7.2. Freestream or WindTunnel Domain Type Requirements ......................................................... 234
3.7.2.1. Freestream .................................................................................................................. 234
3.7.2.2. WindTunnel ................................................................................................................. 236
3.7.3. Creating a New Simulation by Using New Aero Workflow ...................................................... 239
3.7.4. Loading a Simulation ............................................................................................................ 241
3.7.5. Closing a Simulation ............................................................................................................. 241
3.7.6. Duplicating a Simulation ...................................................................................................... 242
3.7.7. Fluent Aero Workspace, the Solver Session, and the Fluent Solution Workspace ...................... 244
3.7.7.1. Preferences Related to the Solver Session and the Solution Workspace ......................... 245
3.8. Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation .............................................................................................. 248
3.8.1. Geometric Properties ........................................................................................................... 248
3.8.2. Airflow Physics ..................................................................................................................... 251
3.8.3. Simulation Conditions .......................................................................................................... 269
3.8.4. Component Groups .............................................................................................................. 292
3.8.4.1. Organizing Component Groups and Boundaries ........................................................... 293
3.8.4.2. Applying Component Zone Specific Boundary Conditions ............................................ 301
3.8.4.3. Boundary Zone Types Supported by Fluent Aero .......................................................... 302
3.8.4.4. Boundary Zone Types Not Directly Supported by Fluent Aero ....................................... 318
3.8.4.5. Managing Component Outputs and Monitors .............................................................. 319
3.8.5. Files ..................................................................................................................................... 321
3.8.6. Solve .................................................................................................................................... 324
3.8.7. Modifying Settings After Results Have Been Calculated ......................................................... 343

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. v
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

3.9. Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation ............................................................................. 345

3.9.1. Convergence Plots in the Graphics Window .......................................................................... 345
3.9.2. Results Menu ....................................................................................................................... 347
3.9.2.1. Tables .......................................................................................................................... 348
3.9.2.2. Graphs ........................................................................................................................ 362
3.9.2.3. Plots ............................................................................................................................ 370
3.9.2.4. Contours ..................................................................................................................... 374
3.9.3. Results Folder ....................................................................................................................... 380
3.10. Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations ................................................... 381
3.10.1. Simulation Folder Commands ............................................................................................. 381
3.10.2. Case File Commands ........................................................................................................... 385
3.10.3. Results Folder Commands and Metadata ............................................................................ 386
3.10.4. Design Point Folder Commands and Metadata .................................................................... 388
3.10.5. Solution File Commands ..................................................................................................... 391
3.10.6. Convergence File Commands ............................................................................................. 393
3.10.7. The Use of Bold in Project View ......................................................................................... 393
3.10.8. Project View Organization Options ................................................................................... 394
3.10.9. Using Columns in Project View ............................................................................................ 395
3.10.10. Hidden Items in Project View .......................................................................................... 398
3.11. AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool ................................................................................................ 401
3.11.1. AET Workflow File Menu and Ribbon Commands ................................................................ 403
3.11.2. AET Workflow Popup Dialog Menus .................................................................................... 408
3.11.3. AET Workflow Project View Structure .................................................................................. 413
3.11.4. Viewing Results of the AET Workflow ................................................................................... 417
3.11.5. Recalculating Airflow Simulation Design Points and Updating the Output Folder ................. 419
3.11.6. Additional Commands for the AET Workflow ....................................................................... 420
3.11.7. AET Workflow – Preparing the Input Geometry File .............................................................. 421
3.11.8. AET Workflow Python Scripting ........................................................................................... 426
3.12. Post-Analysis in Fluent Aero (Beta) ............................................................................................... 428
3.12.1. Loading a Dataset Into Post-Analysis ................................................................................... 428
3.12.2. Managing Datasets ............................................................................................................. 429
3.12.3. Graphics Window Commands ............................................................................................. 432
3.12.4. Graphical Objects ............................................................................................................... 435
3.12.5. Case Comparison ............................................................................................................... 438
3.12.6. Dataset Sequences ............................................................................................................. 439
3.13. Post-processing With CFD-Post and EnSight From Fluent Aero ..................................................... 440
3.13.1. CFD-Post From Fluent Aero ................................................................................................. 440
3.13.2. EnSight From Fluent Aero ................................................................................................... 440
3.13.2.1. View with EnSight From Project View .......................................................................... 441
3.14. Preferences ................................................................................................................................. 441
3.15. Launching Fluent Aero in Batch or on a Cluster using Job Scheduler ............................................. 442
3.15.1. Batch Launching ................................................................................................................ 442
3.15.2. Launch Using Job Scheduler on a Cluster ............................................................................ 444
3.16. Python API and Console .............................................................................................................. 451
3.16.1. Python Console .................................................................................................................. 451
3.16.2. Data Structure Hierarchy ..................................................................................................... 453
3.16.3. Global Functions API .......................................................................................................... 454
3.16.4. Project API ......................................................................................................................... 454
3.16.5. Post Analysis API (Beta) ....................................................................................................... 456
3.17. Appendix .................................................................................................................................... 457
3.17.1. Settings Files: run.settings and projectname.flprj ................................................................. 457

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
vi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

3.17.2. Release Version Compatibility ............................................................................................. 463

3.17.3. Default Properties of Supported Mixtures and Constituent Species in Fluent Aero ............... 464
4. Fluent Materials Processing Workspace .............................................................................................. 497
4.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 497
4.1.1. General Overview of the Workspace ...................................................................................... 498
4.1.2. Program Capabilities ............................................................................................................ 499
4.1.3. Installation and Licensing Requirements ............................................................................... 500
4.1.3.1. License-Specific Capabilities ........................................................................................ 500
4.1.4. Known Limitations ............................................................................................................... 501
4.1.5. Graphical User Interface (GUI) ............................................................................................... 501
4.1.5.1. Using the Ribbon ......................................................................................................... 502
4.1.5.2. Using the Outline View ................................................................................................ 503
4.1.5.3. Using the Properties Window ....................................................................................... 504
4.1.5.4. Using the Graphics Window ......................................................................................... 505
4.1.5.5. Using the Console Window .......................................................................................... 506
4.1.5.6. Setting Preferences for Fluent Materials Processing ...................................................... 507
4.1.5.7. Using the Toolbars ....................................................................................................... 508
4.1.5.7.1. Pointer Tools ....................................................................................................... 508
4.1.5.7.2. View Tools ........................................................................................................... 509
4.1.5.7.3. Viewport Tools .................................................................................................... 510
4.1.5.7.4. Visibility Tool ....................................................................................................... 510
4.1.5.7.5. The Standard Toolbar .......................................................................................... 510
4.1.5.8. Tips for Using the Workspace ....................................................................................... 511
4.1.5.8.1. Adding and Removing Objects in Your Simulation ............................................... 511
4.1.5.8.2. Using Expressions in the Workspace .................................................................... 512
4.1.5.8.2.1. Expressions for Transient Simulations .......................................................... 512
4.1.5.8.2.2. Expressions for Generalized Simulations ..................................................... 517
4.1.5.8.2.2.1. Modeling Compressible Flow Using Generalized Expressions .............. 519
4.1.5.8.2.2.2. Limitations for Using Generalized Expressions .................................... 520
4.1.5.8.2.3. Examples of Common Expressions .............................................................. 520
4.1.5.9. Using the Help System ................................................................................................. 525
4.2. Getting Started ............................................................................................................................. 526
4.3. Starting and Exiting the Workspace ............................................................................................... 527
4.3.1. Starting the Workspace Using the Fluent Launcher ................................................................ 527
4.3.2. Starting the Workspace Using the Command Line ................................................................. 528
4.3.3. Exiting the Workspace .......................................................................................................... 529
4.4. Reading and Writing Files .............................................................................................................. 529
4.5. Choosing Your Simulation Type ..................................................................................................... 530
4.5.1. Modeling Internal Flows ....................................................................................................... 531
4.5.2. Modeling the Prediction of Extrudate Shape (Direct Extrusion) .............................................. 533
4.5.2.1. Understanding Guiding Devices ................................................................................... 535
4.5.2.2. Free Jet Stabilization .................................................................................................... 536
4.5.2.2.1. Constraint on Global Displacement ..................................................................... 536
4.5.2.2.2. Finite-Element Formulation ................................................................................. 537
4.5.2.2.3. Limitations .......................................................................................................... 538
4.5.2.2.4. Compatibility with Specific Geometries and Boundary Conditions ....................... 539
4.5.3. Modeling the Determination of Die Lip Shape (Inverse Extrusion) .......................................... 542
4.5.4. Modeling Blow Molding and Thermoforming ........................................................................ 544
4.5.5. Modeling Pressing ................................................................................................................ 547
4.5.6. Modeling Compounding and Mixing .................................................................................... 549
4.5.7. Modeling Film Casting .......................................................................................................... 551

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.5.8. Modeling Filling ................................................................................................................... 553

4.5.8.1. Theory of Filling ........................................................................................................... 555
4.5.8.1.1. Volume Conservation .......................................................................................... 556
4.5.8.1.2. Time Step Management ...................................................................................... 557
4.5.9. Modeling Foaming ............................................................................................................... 559
4.5.9.1. Foaming Theory .......................................................................................................... 561
4.5.9.2. References ................................................................................................................... 562
4.5.10. Modeling Coextrusion ........................................................................................................ 562
4.5.11. Modeling Fiber Spinning .................................................................................................... 564
4.6. Choosing a Simulation Template ................................................................................................... 566
4.6.1. Using the Internal Flow Template .......................................................................................... 567
4.6.2. Using the Extrusion Template ............................................................................................... 568
4.6.3. Using the Blow Molding & Thermoforming Template ............................................................. 570
4.6.4. Using the Pressing Template ................................................................................................. 570
4.6.5. Using the Compounding & Mixing Template ......................................................................... 570
4.6.6. Using the Film Casting Template ........................................................................................... 571
4.6.7. Using the Filling Template .................................................................................................... 571
4.7. Using the Simulation Wizard ......................................................................................................... 572
4.7.1. Using the Simple Internal Flow Wizard .................................................................................. 573
4.7.1.1. Expected Topology for the Simple Internal Flow Wizard ................................................ 573
4.7.2. Using the Simple Direct Extrusion Wizard .............................................................................. 574
4.7.2.1. Expected Topology for the Simple Direct Extrusion Wizard ............................................ 575
4.7.3. Using the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard ............................................................................ 577
4.7.3.1. Expected Topologies for the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard ....................................... 578
4.7.3.1.1. Fixed/Adaptive/Constant Sections ....................................................................... 578
4.7.3.1.2. Fixed/Adaptive Sections ...................................................................................... 580
4.7.3.1.3. Adaptive/Constant Sections ................................................................................ 582
4.7.3.1.4. Adaptive Sections ............................................................................................... 584
4.7.3.1.5. Constant Sections ............................................................................................... 586
4.7.4. Using the Blow Molding / Thermoforming Wizards ................................................................ 588
4.7.4.1. Expected Topologies for the Blow Molding / Thermoforming Wizards ........................... 591
4.8. Setting Up Your Simulation ........................................................................................................... 593
4.8.1. General Simulation Settings ................................................................................................. 594
4.8.2. Materials .............................................................................................................................. 594
4.8.2.1. Simplified Viscoelastic Properties ................................................................................. 596
4.8.2.2. Differential Viscoelastic Properties ................................................................................ 596
4.8.2.3. Integral Viscoelastic Properties ..................................................................................... 597
4.8.2.4. Reinforcement Properties ............................................................................................ 597
4.8.2.5. Foaming Properties ..................................................................................................... 597
4.8.2.6. Viscosity Laws in Porous Media .................................................................................... 598
4.8.3. Species ................................................................................................................................ 598
4.8.4. Cell Zones ............................................................................................................................ 598
4.8.4.1. Fluid Cell Zones ........................................................................................................... 599
4.8.4.2. Solid Cell Zones ........................................................................................................... 600
4.8.4.3. Porous Region Cell Zones ............................................................................................. 600
4.8.4.4. Fixed Mold Cell Zones .................................................................................................. 600
4.8.4.5. Moving Mold Cell Zones .............................................................................................. 601
4.8.4.6. Restrictor Part Cell Zones ............................................................................................. 602
4.8.4.7. Moving Part Cell Zones ................................................................................................ 602
4.8.5. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................ 603
4.8.5.1. Fluid Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................... 604

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.8.5.1.1. Inflow Fluid Boundary ......................................................................................... 605

4.8.5.1.2. Outflow Fluid Boundary ...................................................................................... 605
4.8.5.1.3. Wall Fluid Boundary ............................................................................................ 606
4.8.5.1.4. Symmetry Fluid Boundary ................................................................................... 607
4.8.5.1.5. Free Surface Fluid Boundary ................................................................................ 607
4.8.5.1.6. Extrudate Exit Fluid Boundary ............................................................................. 608
4.8.5.1.7. Vent Fluid Boundary ............................................................................................ 608
4.8.5.1.8. Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary ............................................................................... 609
4.8.5.1.9. Zero Force Fluid Boundary .................................................................................. 609
4.8.5.1.10. Porous Wall Fluid Boundary ............................................................................... 610
4.8.5.1.11. Force Fluid Boundary ........................................................................................ 610
4.8.5.1.12.Thermal Conditions for Fluid Boundaries ............................................................ 611
4.8.5.1.13. Species Conditions for Fluid Boundaries ............................................................ 611
4.8.5.2. Solid Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................... 611
4.8.5.3. Porous Media Boundary Conditions ............................................................................. 612
4.8.5.4. Contact Boundary Conditions ...................................................................................... 613
4.8.5.5. Mold Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................... 613
4.8.5.6. Part Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................ 614
4.8.5.7. Interface Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................... 614
4.8.5.7.1. Fluid-Fluid Interface Boundary Conditions ........................................................... 615
4.8.5.7.2. Fluid-Solid Interface Boundary Conditions ........................................................... 616
4.8.5.8. Guiding Device Boundary Conditions ........................................................................... 617
4.8.6. Assignments ........................................................................................................................ 618
4.8.6.1. Pressure Assignment ................................................................................................... 618
4.8.6.2. Displacement Assignment ........................................................................................... 619
4.8.7. Mesh Deformations .............................................................................................................. 619
4.8.8. Adaptive Meshing ................................................................................................................ 620
4.8.8.1. Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming Simulations Using the Shell
Model ..................................................................................................................................... 621
4.8.8.1.1. General Properties of Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming
Simulations Using the Shell Model .................................................................................... 621
4.8.8.1.2. Conditions for Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming Simulations
Using the Shell Model ....................................................................................................... 622
4.8.8.1.3. Contact Conditions Based on Angle and Curvature .............................................. 623
4.8.8.1.4. Contact Conditions Based on Curvature ............................................................... 624
4.8.8.1.5. Contact Conditions Based on Distance ................................................................ 625
4.8.8.2. Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases ........................................................... 627
4.8.8.2.1. General Properties of Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases ................. 627
4.8.8.2.2. Conditions for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases ............................ 630
4.8.8.2.2.1. Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Conditions Based on Mesh Quality ....... 630
4.8.8.2.2.2. Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based on
Curvature ................................................................................................................... 631
4.8.8.2.2.3. Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based on Dis-
tance .......................................................................................................................... 632
4.8.8.2.3. Refinement Zones for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases ................ 634
4.8.8.2.3.1. Defining Box-Based Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones ........................... 634
4.8.8.2.3.2. Defining Sphere-Based Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones ...................... 636
4.8.8.2.3.3. Defining Boundary-Based Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones .................. 637
4.8.8.2.3.3.1. Setting Boundary Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones Based on
Curvature ............................................................................................................ 637

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ix
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.8.8.2.3.3.2. Setting Boundary Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones Based on Distance

............................................................................................................................. 638
4.8.8.3. Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Restrictors and Moving Parts ..................................... 640
4.8.8.3.1. General Properties for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Restrictors and Moving
Parts ................................................................................................................................. 640
4.8.8.3.2. Overlapping Conditions for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Restrictors and Moving
Parts ................................................................................................................................. 641
4.9. Setting Solution Options ............................................................................................................... 642
4.9.1. Temperature Initialization ..................................................................................................... 643
4.9.2. Species Initialization ............................................................................................................. 643
4.9.3. Creating Solution Probes ...................................................................................................... 643
4.9.4. Generating Derived Quantities From Your Solution ............................................................... 644
4.9.4.1. Shear Rate ................................................................................................................... 647
4.9.4.2. Viscosity ...................................................................................................................... 647
4.9.4.3. Viscous Heating ........................................................................................................... 647
4.9.4.4. Stress .......................................................................................................................... 647
4.9.4.5. Volume of Liquid ......................................................................................................... 648
4.9.4.6. Tracking of Material Points ........................................................................................... 648
4.9.4.6.1. Calculation for Tracking Material Points ............................................................... 649
4.9.4.7. Mixing Index ............................................................................................................... 649
4.9.4.8. Vorticity ....................................................................................................................... 649
4.9.4.9. Rate of Deformation Tensor .......................................................................................... 650
4.9.4.10. Force ......................................................................................................................... 650
4.9.4.11. Flow Rate ................................................................................................................... 650
4.9.4.12. Heat Flux ................................................................................................................... 651
4.9.4.13. Flow Balance ............................................................................................................. 651
4.9.4.14. Convective Heat ........................................................................................................ 651
4.9.4.15. Residence Time .......................................................................................................... 652
4.9.4.15.1. Residence Time Condition ................................................................................. 652
4.9.4.15.2. Calculation of Residence Time ........................................................................... 652
4.9.4.16. Tracking of a Material Property ................................................................................... 653
4.9.4.17. Extension .................................................................................................................. 654
4.9.4.17.1. Reference Point P .............................................................................................. 655
4.9.4.17.2. Reference Direction D ....................................................................................... 655
4.9.4.18. Self Contact ............................................................................................................... 655
4.9.4.19. Estimated Thickness ................................................................................................... 655
4.9.4.20. Analysing Mesh Quality ............................................................................................. 656
4.9.4.20.1. Element Distortion Check .................................................................................. 657
4.9.4.21. Accessing Solution Methods ...................................................................................... 659
4.9.4.22. Accessing Calculation Activities .................................................................................. 659
4.9.4.22.1. AMF Direct Solver .............................................................................................. 660
4.9.4.22.2. AMF Direct Solver + Secant ............................................................................... 660
4.9.4.22.3. MUMPS Solver .................................................................................................. 661
4.9.4.22.3.1. Recommendations for the MUMPS Solver ................................................. 661
4.9.4.22.4. MUMPS Solver + Secant .................................................................................... 662
4.9.5. Accessing Solution Outputs .................................................................................................. 662
4.9.6. Accessing Solution Monitors ................................................................................................. 663
4.9.7. Running the Calculation ....................................................................................................... 663
4.10. Postprocessing Results ................................................................................................................ 664
4.10.1. Surfaces ............................................................................................................................. 664
4.10.1.1. Point Surfaces ............................................................................................................ 665

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
x of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.10.1.2. Line Surfaces ............................................................................................................. 665

4.10.1.3. Rake Surfaces ............................................................................................................ 666
4.10.1.4. Plane Surfaces ........................................................................................................... 666
4.10.1.5. Iso-Surfaces ............................................................................................................... 667
4.10.1.6. Iso-Clip Surfaces ........................................................................................................ 668
4.10.1.7. Creating Multiple Planes ............................................................................................ 669
4.10.1.8. Creating Multiple Iso-Surfaces .................................................................................... 670
4.10.2. Reports .............................................................................................................................. 671
4.10.2.1. Printing Reports ......................................................................................................... 671
4.10.2.2. Saving Reports .......................................................................................................... 672
4.10.2.3. Plotting Reports ......................................................................................................... 672
4.10.3. Graphics Objects ................................................................................................................ 673
4.10.3.1. LIC Settings ............................................................................................................... 674
4.10.3.2. Mesh Plots ................................................................................................................. 674
4.10.3.3. Contour Plots ............................................................................................................. 675
4.10.3.4. Vector Plots ............................................................................................................... 676
4.10.3.5. Pathline Plots ............................................................................................................. 677
4.10.3.6. Display Settings ......................................................................................................... 678
4.10.3.7. Scenes ....................................................................................................................... 678
4.10.3.7.1. Saving Animations ............................................................................................ 679
4.10.3.8. Mirror Planes ............................................................................................................. 680
4.10.4. Material Assignment ........................................................................................................... 681
4.10.5. Using Plots ......................................................................................................................... 682
4.10.5.1. XY Plots ..................................................................................................................... 682
4.10.5.2. Transient Plots ........................................................................................................... 683
4.11. Rheometry .................................................................................................................................. 684
4.11.1. Material Data Parameters .................................................................................................... 684
4.11.1.1. Overview of Fluid Properties and Flow Characteristics ................................................ 684
4.11.1.2. Generalized Newtonian Model ................................................................................... 687
4.11.1.2.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................... 687
4.11.1.2.1.1. Equations ................................................................................................. 687
4.11.1.2.1.2. Inputs ...................................................................................................... 687
4.11.1.2.2. Shear Rate Dependence of Viscosity .................................................................. 688
4.11.1.2.2.1. Constant .................................................................................................. 688
4.11.1.2.2.2. Bird-Carreau Law ...................................................................................... 689
4.11.1.2.2.3. Power Law ................................................................................................ 691
4.11.1.2.2.4. Bingham Law ........................................................................................... 692
4.11.1.2.2.5. Modified Bingham Law ............................................................................. 694
4.11.1.2.2.6. Herschel-Bulkley Law ................................................................................ 695
4.11.1.2.2.7. Modified Herschel-Bulkley Law ................................................................. 697
4.11.1.2.2.8. Cross Law ................................................................................................. 699
4.11.1.2.2.9. Modified Cross Law .................................................................................. 701
4.11.1.2.2.10. Carreau-Yasuda Law ............................................................................... 702
4.11.1.2.3. Temperature Dependence of Viscosity ............................................................... 704
4.11.1.2.3.1. Arrhenius Law .......................................................................................... 705
4.11.1.2.3.2. Approximate Arrhenius Law ...................................................................... 707
4.11.1.2.3.3. Fulcher Law .............................................................................................. 709
4.11.1.2.3.4. WLF Law ................................................................................................... 711
4.11.1.3. Differential Viscoelastic Model .................................................................................... 714
4.11.1.3.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................... 714
4.11.1.3.1.1. Equations ................................................................................................. 714

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xi
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.11.1.3.1.2. Inputs ...................................................................................................... 714

4.11.1.3.2. Differential Viscoelastic Models ......................................................................... 715
4.11.1.3.2.1. Maxwell Model ......................................................................................... 717
4.11.1.3.2.1.1. Equations ........................................................................................ 718
4.11.1.3.2.1.2. Inputs .............................................................................................. 718
4.11.1.3.2.1.3. Behavior Analysis ............................................................................. 719
4.11.1.3.2.2. Oldroyd-B Model ...................................................................................... 721
4.11.1.3.2.2.1. Equations ........................................................................................ 722
4.11.1.3.2.2.2. Inputs .............................................................................................. 722
4.11.1.3.2.2.3. Behavior Analysis ............................................................................. 723
4.11.1.3.2.3. Phan-Thien-Tanner Model ........................................................................ 724
4.11.1.3.2.3.1. Equations ........................................................................................ 725
4.11.1.3.2.3.2. Inputs .............................................................................................. 725
4.11.1.3.2.3.3. Behavior Analysis ............................................................................. 726
4.11.1.3.2.4. Giesekus Model ........................................................................................ 731
4.11.1.3.2.4.1. Equations ........................................................................................ 732
4.11.1.3.2.4.2. Inputs .............................................................................................. 732
4.11.1.3.2.4.3. Behavior Analysis ............................................................................. 732
4.11.1.3.2.5. FENE-P Model ........................................................................................... 735
4.11.1.3.2.5.1. Equations ........................................................................................ 736
4.11.1.3.2.5.2. Inputs .............................................................................................. 737
4.11.1.3.2.5.3. Behavior Analysis ............................................................................. 738
4.11.1.3.2.6. POMPOM Model [DCPP] ........................................................................... 743
4.11.1.3.2.6.1. Inputs .............................................................................................. 745
4.11.1.3.2.6.2. Behavior Analysis ............................................................................. 746
4.11.1.3.2.7. Leonov Model .......................................................................................... 749
4.11.1.3.2.7.1. Inputs .............................................................................................. 752
4.11.1.3.2.7.2. Identification of Model Parameters and Functions ............................ 753
4.11.1.3.2.7.3. Behavior Analysis ............................................................................. 753
4.11.1.3.3. Temperature Dependence of Viscosity and Relaxation Time ............................... 757
4.11.1.3.4. Multiple Relaxation Times for Differential Viscoelastic Models ............................. 757
4.11.1.4. Integral Viscoelastic Model ......................................................................................... 760
4.11.1.4.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................... 760
4.11.1.4.1.1. Equations ................................................................................................. 760
4.11.1.4.1.2. Inputs ...................................................................................................... 761
4.11.1.4.2. Integral Viscoelastic Models ............................................................................... 762
4.11.1.4.3. Temperature Dependence of Viscosity ............................................................... 762
4.11.1.5. Simplified Viscoelastic Model ..................................................................................... 762
4.11.1.5.1. Equations .......................................................................................................... 763
4.11.1.5.2. Identification of Model Parameters and Functions .............................................. 764
4.11.1.5.3. Inputs ............................................................................................................... 765
4.11.1.5.4. Behavior Analysis .............................................................................................. 766
4.11.2. Rheological Properties ........................................................................................................ 768
4.11.2.1. Steady Simple Shear Flow .......................................................................................... 769
4.11.2.2. Steady Extensional Flow ............................................................................................. 771
4.11.2.3. Oscillatory Shear Flow ................................................................................................ 774
4.11.2.4. Transient Shear Flow .................................................................................................. 774
4.11.2.5. Transient Extensional Flow ......................................................................................... 776
4.11.3. Fitting Material Parameters ................................................................................................. 777
4.11.3.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................. 777
4.11.3.2. Reading and Writing Files ........................................................................................... 778

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.11.3.2.1. Files Written or Read by Fluent Materials Processing ........................................... 778

4.11.3.2.2. Reading Experimental Data ............................................................................... 778
4.11.3.2.2.1. Reading Experimental Data Curves for the Non-Automatic Fitting Meth-
od .............................................................................................................................. 778
4.11.3.2.2.2. Reading Experimental Data Curves for the Automatic Fitting Method ........ 779
4.11.3.2.3. Saving Calculated Rheometric Curves ................................................................ 780
4.11.3.2.4. Reading and Writing Material Data .................................................................... 781
4.11.3.3. Non-Automatic Fitting ............................................................................................... 782
4.11.3.3.1. Steps for Non-Automatic Fitting ........................................................................ 782
4.11.3.3.2. Specifying the Curves to be Calculated .............................................................. 783
4.11.3.3.3. Defining Curves Parameters .............................................................................. 783
4.11.3.3.4. Selecting the Type of Fluid Model ...................................................................... 787
4.11.3.3.5. Specifying the Chart Parameters ........................................................................ 787
4.11.3.3.6. Performing the Fitting Analysis .......................................................................... 787
4.11.3.3.7. Exporting the Results of the Fitting .................................................................... 788
4.11.3.4. Automatic Fitting ....................................................................................................... 788
4.11.3.4.1. Steps for Automatic Fitting ................................................................................ 789
4.11.3.4.2. Selecting the Type of Fluid Model ...................................................................... 789
4.11.3.4.3. Fixing Values for Selected Material Parameters ................................................... 789
4.11.3.4.4. Reading Experimental Curves ............................................................................ 791
4.11.3.4.5. Defining Numerical Parameters ......................................................................... 791
4.11.3.4.6. Drawing the Experimental Curves ...................................................................... 793
4.11.3.4.7. Performing the Automatic Fitting Analysis ......................................................... 794
4.11.3.4.7.1. Evaluating the Automatic Fitting ............................................................... 794
4.11.3.4.7.1.1. Evaluating the Distance Between Two Successive Solutions .............. 794
4.11.3.4.7.1.2. Evaluating the Distance Between Solution and Experimental
Points ................................................................................................................... 795
4.11.3.4.8. Exporting the Results of the Fitting .................................................................... 796
4.11.4. Defining and Plotting Curves .............................................................................................. 796
4.11.4.1. Overview ................................................................................................................... 796
4.11.4.1.1. Definitions of Terms .......................................................................................... 797
4.11.4.2. Working with Curves .................................................................................................. 798
4.11.4.2.1. Format of Experimental Data Curves .................................................................. 798
4.11.4.2.2. Reading Curve Files ........................................................................................... 799
4.11.4.2.3. Deleting a Curve ............................................................................................... 799
4.11.4.2.4. Saving a Curve .................................................................................................. 799
4.11.4.2.5. Modifying Curve Display Attributes ................................................................... 799
4.11.4.3. Cleaning and Modifying Chart .................................................................................... 802
4.11.4.3.1. Cleaning a Chart ............................................................................................... 802
4.11.4.3.2. Modifying the Title and Legend ......................................................................... 803
4.11.4.3.3. Modifying the Axis Attributes ............................................................................ 803
4.11.5. Guidelines for Viscoelastic Models ...................................................................................... 805
4.11.5.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................. 805
4.11.5.2. The Weissenberg Number .......................................................................................... 806
4.11.5.3. Viscometric and Rheometric Measurements ............................................................... 807
4.11.5.3.1. Oscillatory Properties ........................................................................................ 807
4.11.5.3.2. Steady-State Shear Viscosity .............................................................................. 807
4.11.5.3.3. First Normal-Stress Difference ............................................................................ 808
4.11.5.3.4. Transient Uniaxial Elongational Viscosity ............................................................ 808
4.11.5.4. General Strategy for Fitting ........................................................................................ 808
4.11.5.4.1. Weighting Measured Data ................................................................................. 808

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xiii
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.11.5.4.2. Assigning a Value to a Parameter ....................................................................... 808

4.11.5.4.3. Using Identical or Independent Nonlinear Parameters ........................................ 810
4.11.5.4.4. Relaxation Time vs. Relaxation Spectrum in Extrusion, Fiber Spinning, and Film
Casting ............................................................................................................................. 810
4.11.5.4.5. Relaxation Time vs. Relaxation Spectrum in Blow Molding and Thermoforming ... 811
4.11.5.4.6. Relaxation Time vs. Relaxation Spectrum in Pressing .......................................... 811
4.11.5.5. Guidelines for Extrusion ............................................................................................. 811
4.11.5.5.1. Important Effects .............................................................................................. 812
4.11.5.5.1.1. 2D Extrusion ............................................................................................. 812
4.11.5.5.1.2. 3D Extrusion ............................................................................................. 812
4.11.5.5.2. Recommended Experimental Data .................................................................... 812
4.11.5.5.3. Recommended Models and Parameters ............................................................. 812
4.11.5.6. Guidelines for Fiber Spinning ..................................................................................... 813
4.11.5.6.1. Important Effects .............................................................................................. 814
4.11.5.6.1.1. 2D Fiber Spinning ..................................................................................... 814
4.11.5.6.1.2. 3D Fiber Spinning ..................................................................................... 814
4.11.5.6.2. Recommended Experimental Data .................................................................... 814
4.11.5.6.3. Recommended Models and Parameters ............................................................. 815
4.11.5.7. Guidelines for Film Casting ......................................................................................... 816
4.11.5.7.1. Important Effects .............................................................................................. 816
4.11.5.7.2. Recommended Experimental Data .................................................................... 816
4.11.5.7.3. Recommended Models and Parameters ............................................................. 816
4.11.5.8. Guidelines for Blow Molding and Thermoforming ....................................................... 816
4.11.5.8.1. Important Effects .............................................................................................. 817
4.11.5.8.2. Recommended Experimental Data .................................................................... 817
4.11.5.8.3. Recommended Models and Parameters ............................................................. 817
4.11.5.8.3.1. 2D and 3D Blow Molding and Thermoforming ........................................... 817
4.11.5.8.3.2. Blow Molding and Thermoforming with Shell Models ................................ 818
4.11.5.9. Guidelines for Pressing ............................................................................................... 819
4.11.5.9.1. Important Effects .............................................................................................. 819
4.11.5.9.2. Recommended Experimental Data .................................................................... 819
4.11.5.9.3. Recommended Models and Parameters ............................................................. 820
4.11.5.10. Empirical Rules and Principles .................................................................................. 820
4.11.5.10.1. Cox-Merz Rule ................................................................................................. 820
4.11.5.10.2. Gleissle Mirror Relationships ............................................................................ 821
4.11.5.10.3. First Normal Stress Difference Relationships ..................................................... 821
4.11.5.10.4.Time-Temperature Equivalence ........................................................................ 822
4.12. Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide .............................................................. 825
4.12.1. Simulation Setup ................................................................................................................ 825
4.12.1.1. General Properties ..................................................................................................... 825
4.12.1.1.1. Physics Options ................................................................................................. 826
4.12.1.2. Material Properties .................................................................................................... 827
4.12.1.2.1. Density Law ...................................................................................................... 827
4.12.1.2.2. Thermal Properties ............................................................................................ 828
4.12.1.2.3. Elastic Properties ............................................................................................... 829
4.12.1.2.4. Viscosity Law ..................................................................................................... 830
4.12.1.2.4.1. Constant .................................................................................................. 831
4.12.1.2.4.2. Power Law ................................................................................................ 831
4.12.1.2.4.3. Bird-Carreau Law ...................................................................................... 831
4.12.1.2.4.4. Carreau-Yasuda Law ................................................................................. 832
4.12.1.2.4.5. Bingham Law ........................................................................................... 832

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.12.1.2.4.6. Modified Bingham Law ............................................................................. 833

4.12.1.2.4.7. Herschel-Bulkley Law ................................................................................ 833
4.12.1.2.4.8. Modified Herschel-Bulkley Law ................................................................. 834
4.12.1.2.4.9. Cross Law ................................................................................................. 834
4.12.1.2.4.10. Modified Cross Law ................................................................................. 835
4.12.1.2.4.11. Arrhenius Law ........................................................................................ 835
4.12.1.2.4.12. Arrhenius Approximate Law .................................................................... 835
4.12.1.2.4.13. Fulcher ................................................................................................... 836
4.12.1.2.4.14. WLF ........................................................................................................ 836
4.12.1.2.5. Simplified Viscoelastic Law Properties ................................................................ 837
4.12.1.2.5.1. Viscosity Law ............................................................................................ 837
4.12.1.2.5.1.1. Constant .......................................................................................... 837
4.12.1.2.5.1.2. Power Law (Shear) ........................................................................... 837
4.12.1.2.5.1.3. Bird-Carreau (Shear) ......................................................................... 838
4.12.1.2.5.1.4. Carreau-Yasuda (Shear) .................................................................... 838
4.12.1.2.5.1.5. Cross Law (Shear) ............................................................................. 839
4.12.1.2.5.1.6. Modified Cross Law (Shear) .............................................................. 839
4.12.1.2.5.2. First Normal Viscosity Law ......................................................................... 839
4.12.1.2.5.2.1. Constant (FNS) ................................................................................. 840
4.12.1.2.5.2.2. Power Law (FNS) .............................................................................. 840
4.12.1.2.5.2.3. Bird-Carreau (FNS) ........................................................................... 840
4.12.1.2.5.2.4. Carreau-Yasuda (FNS) ....................................................................... 841
4.12.1.2.5.2.5. Cross Law (FNS) ............................................................................... 841
4.12.1.2.5.2.6. Modified Cross Law (FNS) ................................................................. 842
4.12.1.2.5.3. Relaxation Time Law ................................................................................. 842
4.12.1.2.5.3.1. Constant (Relaxation Time) ............................................................... 842
4.12.1.2.5.3.2. Power Law (Relaxation Time) ............................................................ 843
4.12.1.2.5.3.3. Bird-Carreau (Relaxation Time) ......................................................... 843
4.12.1.2.5.4. Thermal Dependency ............................................................................... 843
4.12.1.2.5.4.1. Arrhenius Law .................................................................................. 844
4.12.1.2.5.4.2. Arrhenius Approximate Law ............................................................. 844
4.12.1.2.5.4.3. WLF ................................................................................................. 844
4.12.1.2.6. Differential Viscoelastic Law Properties .............................................................. 845
4.12.1.2.6.1. Mode n .................................................................................................... 845
4.12.1.2.6.2. Thermal Dependency ............................................................................... 847
4.12.1.2.7. Integral Viscoelastic Law Properties ................................................................... 848
4.12.1.2.7.1. Mode n .................................................................................................... 848
4.12.1.2.7.2. Thermal Dependency ............................................................................... 849
4.12.1.2.8. Reinforcement Properties .................................................................................. 849
4.12.1.2.8.1. Reinforcement 1 ....................................................................................... 849
4.12.1.2.8.2. Reinforcement 2 ....................................................................................... 850
4.12.1.2.8.3. Reinforcement 3 ....................................................................................... 851
4.12.1.2.9. Foaming Properties ........................................................................................... 851
4.12.1.2.10. Viscosity Law in Porous Medium Properties ...................................................... 852
4.12.1.2.10.1. Thermal Dependency ............................................................................. 852
4.12.1.2.10.1.1. Arrhenius Law ................................................................................ 853
4.12.1.2.10.1.2. Arrhenius Approximate Law ........................................................... 853
4.12.1.3. Species Properties ..................................................................................................... 853
4.12.1.4. Cell Zone Properties ................................................................................................... 854
4.12.1.4.1. Mesh Superposition .......................................................................................... 855
4.12.1.4.1.1. Initial Displacement .................................................................................. 855

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xv
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.12.1.4.2. Solid Motion ..................................................................................................... 855

4.12.1.4.2.1. Solid Translation Velocity .......................................................................... 856
4.12.1.4.3. Mold Motion ..................................................................................................... 856
4.12.1.4.3.1. Mold Translational Velocity ....................................................................... 856
4.12.1.4.3.2. Initial Velocity ........................................................................................... 856
4.12.1.4.3.3. Mold Translation Force .............................................................................. 857
4.12.1.4.3.4. General Motion ........................................................................................ 857
4.12.1.4.3.4.1. Initial Displacement ......................................................................... 857
4.12.1.4.3.4.2. Initial Rotation ................................................................................. 858
4.12.1.4.3.4.3. Point ............................................................................................... 858
4.12.1.4.3.4.4. Orientation ...................................................................................... 858
4.12.1.4.3.4.5. Angular Velocity ............................................................................... 858
4.12.1.4.3.4.6. Translation Velocity .......................................................................... 858
4.12.1.4.4. Volume Conservation ........................................................................................ 859
4.12.1.4.5. Inflation Pressure .............................................................................................. 859
4.12.1.4.6. Normal Flow Rate .............................................................................................. 859
4.12.1.4.7. Surface Heat Source .......................................................................................... 859
4.12.1.5. Fluid Cell Zone Properties .......................................................................................... 860
4.12.1.5.1. Matrix Reinforcement for Fluid Cell Zones .......................................................... 860
4.12.1.5.2. Foaming Properties for Fluid Cell Zones ............................................................. 861
4.12.1.6. Solid Cell Zone Properties .......................................................................................... 861
4.12.1.6.1. Solid Motion ..................................................................................................... 861
4.12.1.6.1.1. Transport Velocity ..................................................................................... 862
4.12.1.6.2. Solid Deformation ............................................................................................. 862
4.12.1.7. Porous Cell Zone Properties ....................................................................................... 862
4.12.1.7.1. Porous Media .................................................................................................... 862
4.12.1.7.1.1. Tensor Permeability .................................................................................. 862
4.12.1.8. Fixed Mold Cell Zone Properties ................................................................................. 863
4.12.1.9. Moving Mold Zone Properties .................................................................................... 863
4.12.1.9.1. Mold Body Side ................................................................................................. 863
4.12.1.9.2. Mold Motion ..................................................................................................... 863
4.12.1.9.2.1. Translation Velocity ................................................................................... 864
4.12.1.9.2.2. Initial Velocity ........................................................................................... 864
4.12.1.9.2.3. Translation Force ...................................................................................... 864
4.12.1.9.2.4. General Motion ........................................................................................ 865
4.12.1.9.2.4.1. Initial Displacement ......................................................................... 865
4.12.1.9.2.4.2. Initial Rotation ................................................................................. 865
4.12.1.9.2.4.3. Local Rotation Axis Origin ................................................................ 865
4.12.1.9.2.4.4. Local Rotation Axis Direction ............................................................ 866
4.12.1.9.2.4.5. Angular Velocity ............................................................................... 866
4.12.1.9.2.4.6. Translation Velocity .......................................................................... 866
4.12.1.10. Moving Part Zone Properties .................................................................................... 867
4.12.1.10.1. Mesh Superposition ........................................................................................ 867
4.12.1.10.1.1. Motion ................................................................................................... 867
4.12.1.10.1.1.1. Initial Displacement ....................................................................... 867
4.12.1.10.1.1.2. Initial Rotation ............................................................................... 867
4.12.1.10.1.1.3. Rotation Axis Origin ....................................................................... 867
4.12.1.10.1.1.4. Rotation Axis Direction ................................................................... 868
4.12.1.10.1.1.5. Angular Velocity ............................................................................. 868
4.12.1.10.1.1.6. Translation Velocity ........................................................................ 868
4.12.1.10.1.1.7. Flow Condition .............................................................................. 868

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.12.1.10.1.1.8. Thermal Condition ......................................................................... 869

4.12.1.11. Restrictor Zone Properties ........................................................................................ 869
4.12.1.11.1. Mesh Superposition ........................................................................................ 869
4.12.1.11.1.1. Initial Displacement ................................................................................ 869
4.12.1.11.1.2. Motion ................................................................................................... 870
4.12.1.11.1.2.1. Initial Displacement ....................................................................... 870
4.12.1.11.1.2.2. Initial Rotation ............................................................................... 870
4.12.1.11.1.2.3. Rotation Axis Origin ....................................................................... 870
4.12.1.11.1.2.4. Rotation Axis Direction ................................................................... 870
4.12.1.12. Fluid Boundary Zone Properties ............................................................................... 871
4.12.1.12.1. Inflow Fluid Boundary Properties ..................................................................... 871
4.12.1.12.1.1. Inflow Properties .................................................................................... 871
4.12.1.12.1.1.1. Foaming Inflow Conditions ............................................................ 872
4.12.1.12.2. Outflow Fluid Boundary Properties .................................................................. 872
4.12.1.12.2.1. Outflow Properties ................................................................................. 872
4.12.1.12.3. Wall Fluid Boundary Properties ........................................................................ 873
4.12.1.12.3.1. Wall Properties ....................................................................................... 873
4.12.1.12.3.1.1. First Point of Axis ............................................................................ 875
4.12.1.12.3.1.2. Second Point of Axis ....................................................................... 876
4.12.1.12.3.1.3. Angular Velocity ............................................................................. 876
4.12.1.12.3.1.4. Translation Velocity ........................................................................ 876
4.12.1.12.4. Symmetry Fluid Boundary Properties ............................................................... 876
4.12.1.12.4.1. Symmetry Properties .............................................................................. 876
4.12.1.12.5. Free Surface Fluid Boundary Properties ............................................................ 877
4.12.1.12.5.1. Free Surface Properties ........................................................................... 877
4.12.1.12.6. Extrudate Exit Fluid Boundary Properties ......................................................... 877
4.12.1.12.6.1. Extrudate Exit Properties ......................................................................... 877
4.12.1.12.6.1.1. Take Up Velocity ............................................................................. 878
4.12.1.12.6.1.2. Take Up Force ................................................................................ 878
4.12.1.12.7. Vent Fluid Boundary Properties ........................................................................ 878
4.12.1.12.7.1. Vent Properties ....................................................................................... 878
4.12.1.12.8. Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary Properties ........................................................... 879
4.12.1.12.8.1. Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary Properties .................................................. 879
4.12.1.12.9. Zero Force Fluid Boundary Properties .............................................................. 879
4.12.1.12.9.1. Zero Force Fluid Boundary Properties ...................................................... 879
4.12.1.12.10. Porous Wall Fluid Boundary Properties ........................................................... 879
4.12.1.12.10.1. Porous Wall Properties .......................................................................... 879
4.12.1.12.11. Force Fluid Boundary Properties .................................................................... 880
4.12.1.12.11.1. Force Properties .................................................................................... 880
4.12.1.12.12. Thermal Condition Properties ........................................................................ 880
4.12.1.12.13. Species Condition Properties ......................................................................... 881
4.12.1.13. Solid Boundary Zone Properties ............................................................................... 882
4.12.1.13.1. Normal Displacement Condition ...................................................................... 882
4.12.1.13.2. Normal Force Density Condition ...................................................................... 883
4.12.1.13.3. Cartesian Displacement Condition ................................................................... 883
4.12.1.13.3.1. First Point of Axis .................................................................................... 883
4.12.1.13.3.2. Second Point of Axis ............................................................................... 883
4.12.1.13.3.3. Angular Displacement ............................................................................ 883
4.12.1.13.3.4. Translation Displacement ........................................................................ 884
4.12.1.13.4. Force Condition ............................................................................................... 884
4.12.1.13.5. Thermal Condition .......................................................................................... 884

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xvii
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.12.1.14. Porous Boundary Zone Properties ............................................................................ 885

4.12.1.14.1. Pressure Condition .......................................................................................... 885
4.12.1.14.2. Normal Velocity Condition ............................................................................... 885
4.12.1.14.3. Thermal Condition .......................................................................................... 886
4.12.1.15. Mold Boundary Zone Properties ............................................................................... 886
4.12.1.15.1. Normal Displacement Condition ...................................................................... 887
4.12.1.15.2. Normal Force Density Condition ...................................................................... 887
4.12.1.15.3. Thermal Condition .......................................................................................... 887
4.12.1.16. Part Boundary Zone Properties ................................................................................. 887
4.12.1.16.1. Normal Displacement Condition ...................................................................... 888
4.12.1.16.2. Normal Force Density Condition ...................................................................... 888
4.12.1.17. Contact Boundary Zone Properties ........................................................................... 888
4.12.1.17.1. Contact Condition ........................................................................................... 888
4.12.1.17.1.1. Heat Transfer Coefficient vs Contact Time ................................................ 889
4.12.1.17.1.1.1. Dependency Function .................................................................... 889
4.12.1.18. Interface Boundary Zone Properties ......................................................................... 890
4.12.1.19. Fluid-Fluid Interface Boundary Zone Properties ........................................................ 892
4.12.1.20. Fluid-Solid Interface Boundary Zone Properties ........................................................ 894
4.12.1.21. Guiding Device Boundary Zone Properties ............................................................... 897
4.12.1.22. Assign Pressure Properties ....................................................................................... 899
4.12.1.23. Assign Displacement Properties ............................................................................... 900
4.12.1.23.1. Displacement .................................................................................................. 900
4.12.1.23.2. Point ............................................................................................................... 900
4.12.1.24. Deformation Properties ............................................................................................ 901
4.12.1.25. Adaptive Remeshing Properties ............................................................................... 903
4.12.2. Solution Properties ............................................................................................................. 911
4.12.2.1. Temperature Initialization Properties .......................................................................... 911
4.12.2.2. Species Transport Initialization Properties ................................................................... 912
4.12.2.3. Probe Properties ........................................................................................................ 913
4.12.2.4. Derived Quantities Properties .................................................................................... 913
4.12.2.4.1. Flow Balance ..................................................................................................... 915
4.12.2.4.2. Extension .......................................................................................................... 915
4.12.2.4.2.1. Reference Point P ..................................................................................... 915
4.12.2.4.2.2. Reference Direction D ............................................................................... 916
4.12.2.4.3. Self Contact ...................................................................................................... 916
4.12.2.4.4. Convected Heat ................................................................................................ 916
4.12.2.4.5. Residence Time ................................................................................................. 916
4.12.2.4.5.1. Residence Time Condition ........................................................................ 917
4.12.2.4.6. Tracking of a Material Property .......................................................................... 917
4.12.2.4.6.1. Material Property Condition ...................................................................... 917
4.12.2.4.7. Estimated Thickness .......................................................................................... 918
4.12.2.5. Methods Properties ................................................................................................... 919
4.12.2.5.1. DEVSS ............................................................................................................... 920
4.12.2.5.2. Interpolation ..................................................................................................... 921
4.12.2.5.3. FSI Parameters .................................................................................................. 921
4.12.2.5.4. Free Jet Parameters ........................................................................................... 922
4.12.2.5.5. Contact Penetration .......................................................................................... 923
4.12.2.5.6. Distortion Check ............................................................................................... 923
4.12.2.6. Calculation Activities Properties ................................................................................. 924
4.12.2.7. Outputs Properties .................................................................................................... 929
4.12.2.8. Monitors Properties ................................................................................................... 930

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.12.3. Results Properties ............................................................................................................... 931

4.12.3.1. Surfaces .................................................................................................................... 931
4.12.3.1.1. Point Properties ................................................................................................ 931
4.12.3.1.2. Line Properties .................................................................................................. 931
4.12.3.1.3. Rake Properties ................................................................................................. 932
4.12.3.1.4. Plane Properties ................................................................................................ 933
4.12.3.1.5. Iso-Surface Properties ....................................................................................... 934
4.12.3.1.6. Iso-Clip Properties ............................................................................................. 935
4.12.3.2. Reports ..................................................................................................................... 935
4.12.3.2.1. Report Properties .............................................................................................. 935
4.12.3.2.1.1. Surface Reports ........................................................................................ 936
4.12.3.2.1.2. Volume Reports ........................................................................................ 937
4.12.3.3. Graphics .................................................................................................................... 937
4.12.3.3.1. LIC Settings Properties ...................................................................................... 937
4.12.3.3.2. Mesh Properties ................................................................................................ 938
4.12.3.3.3. Contour Properties ............................................................................................ 939
4.12.3.3.4. Vector Properties ............................................................................................... 941
4.12.3.3.5. Pathlines Properties .......................................................................................... 943
4.12.3.3.6. Display Settings Properties ................................................................................ 946
4.12.3.4. Plots .......................................................................................................................... 947
4.12.3.4.1. XY Plot Properties ............................................................................................. 947
4.12.3.4.2. Transient Plot Properties .................................................................................... 951
4.12.3.4.2.1. Exporting Report Files .............................................................................. 953
4.12.3.4.2.2. Managing Report Files .............................................................................. 953

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xix
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xx of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Figures
1.1. Progress Bar with Start Server Option ...................................................................................................... 2
1.2. Progress Bar with Start Client Option ....................................................................................................... 3
1.3. Preferences Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................... 6
1.4. Actions Ribbon Tab ................................................................................................................................. 7
1.5. Run Calculation Properties ...................................................................................................................... 7
1.6. Example Solution Methods ..................................................................................................................... 8
1.7. Example Solution Controls ...................................................................................................................... 8
1.8. Example Residuals Properties .................................................................................................................. 9
1.9. Creating a Contour Via the Context Menu .............................................................................................. 10
1.10. Properties of a Point Surface ................................................................................................................ 11
1.11. Properties of a Line Surface ................................................................................................................. 12
1.12. Properties of a Rake Surface ................................................................................................................ 13
1.13. Properties of a Plane Surface ............................................................................................................... 15
1.14. Create Multiple Planes Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 17
1.15. Properties of an Iso-Surface ................................................................................................................. 18
1.16. Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 20
1.17. Example Graphics Object Properties .................................................................................................... 23
1.18. Example Plot Object Properties ........................................................................................................... 24
1.19. Scene Properties ................................................................................................................................. 25
1.20. Scene Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................ 25
1.21. Viewing Ribbon Tab ............................................................................................................................ 26
1.22. Example of Sending a Command: Changing the Velocity Units to cm/s ................................................. 28
1.23. Writing Case and/or Data from the Client ............................................................................................. 29
2.1. The Fluent Icing Graphical User Interface ............................................................................................... 44
2.2. Hierarchical Structure of a Project Folder ............................................................................................... 53
2.3. Pressure Far Field and Velocity Inlet Properties ....................................................................................... 94
2.4. Mass Flow Inlet and Pressure Inlet Properties ......................................................................................... 95
2.5. Wall Disabled ...................................................................................................................................... 107
2.6. Wall Disabled-Sliding .......................................................................................................................... 107
2.7. Wall Enabled for Icing .......................................................................................................................... 108
2.8. Defined at a Location Close to TE and at the Middle of Z-Span .............................................................. 131
3.1. The Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface ............................................................................................. 218
3.2. New Aero Workflow ............................................................................................................................ 239
3.3. DP, Mach, AoA, Pressure, Temperature .................................................................................................. 292
3.4. DP, Mach, AoA, Pressure, Temperature .................................................................................................. 292
3.5. Section Locations Defined Along the 3D Blade .................................................................................... 405
3.6. 2.5D CAD of Section Profile Extracted From the 3D Blade ..................................................................... 405
3.7. 2.5D Mesh Generated by AET Fluent Meshing Step .............................................................................. 406
3.8. [projectname].flprj File, Detail Showing Portion of aircraft_demo Simulation Folder .............................. 460
3.9. Project Metadata, Detail Showing Portion of aircraft_demo Simulation Folder ...................................... 461
3.10. run.settings File, Detail Showing Portion of Input Conditions of the DP-1 Folder ................................. 462
3.11. [projectname].flprj File, Detail Showing Portion of Input Conditions of the DP-1 Folder ....................... 462
3.12. Project Metadata, Detail Showing Portion of Input Conditions of the DP-1 Folder ............................... 463
3.13. Mixture Properties for air-5species-park93 with the Two-Temperature Model Enabled ............... 465
3.14. Constituent Species of air-5species-park93 ........................................................................................ 466
3.15. Species Properties of Atomic-Nitrogen (n) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ................................... 467
3.16. Species Properties of Atomic-Oxygen (o) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ..................................... 468
3.17. Species Properties of Nitrogen-Oxide (no) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ................................... 469
3.18. Species Properties of Oxygen (o2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ............................................... 470

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxi
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

3.19. Species Properties of Nitrogen (n2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ............................................. 471
3.20. Reaction Mechanisms ....................................................................................................................... 472
3.21. Properties of Reaction - 1 .................................................................................................................. 472
3.22. Properties of Reaction - 2 .................................................................................................................. 473
3.23. Properties of Reaction - 3 .................................................................................................................. 474
3.24. Properties of Reaction - 4 .................................................................................................................. 475
3.25. Properties of Reaction - 5 .................................................................................................................. 476
3.26. Mixture Properties for mars-8species-park with the Two-Temperature Model Enabled ........................ 477
3.27. Constituent Species of mars-8species-park ........................................................................................ 478
3.28. Species Properties of Carbon-Monoxide (co) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ............................... 479
3.29. Species Properties of Carbon (c) Set by the Two-Temperature Model .................................................. 480
3.30. Species Properties of Oxygen (o2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ............................................... 481
3.31. Species Properties of Atomic-Oxygen (o) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ..................................... 482
3.32. Species Properties of Carbon-Dioxide (co2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ................................. 483
3.33. Species Properties of Nitrogen-Oxide (no) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ................................... 484
3.34. Species Properties of Atomic-Nitrogen (n) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ................................... 485
3.35. Species Properties of Nitrogen (n2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model ............................................. 486
3.36. Reaction Mechanisms ....................................................................................................................... 487
3.37. Properties of Reaction - 1 .................................................................................................................. 488
3.38. Properties of Reaction - 2 .................................................................................................................. 489
3.39. Properties of Reaction - 3 .................................................................................................................. 490
3.40. Properties of Reaction - 4 .................................................................................................................. 491
3.41. Properties of Reaction - 5 .................................................................................................................. 492
3.42. Properties of Reaction - 6 .................................................................................................................. 493
3.43. Properties of Reaction - 7 .................................................................................................................. 494
3.44. Properties of Reaction - 8 .................................................................................................................. 495
3.45. Properties of Reaction - 9 .................................................................................................................. 496
4.1. The Properties Window for a Boundary ................................................................................................ 504
4.2. Mesh Display in the Graphics Window ................................................................................................. 505
4.3. Preferences Dialog Box - Materials Processing ...................................................................................... 507
4.4. The Standard Toolbar .......................................................................................................................... 510
4.5. Accessing Expressions for Properties ................................................................................................... 512
4.6. The Define Mesh Unit Dialog ............................................................................................................... 530
4.7. An Example of Internal Flow ................................................................................................................ 531
4.8. An Example of Direct Extrusion ........................................................................................................... 533
4.9. An Extrusion Process Involving a Conveyor Belt ................................................................................... 535
4.10. An Extrusion Process Involving Conveyor Rollers ................................................................................ 536
4.11. Perspective View of a Roller with Geometric Parameters ..................................................................... 536
4.12. Flow Through an Unbalanced Die ...................................................................................................... 537
4.13. Sliced Domain with Force and Torque ................................................................................................ 538
4.14. Constraint on the Starting Coordinate ............................................................................................... 539
4.15. Constraint on Multiple-Jet Problems .................................................................................................. 539
4.16. 2D Geometries .................................................................................................................................. 541
4.17. 3D Geometries .................................................................................................................................. 541
4.18. Example of Inverse Extrusion ............................................................................................................. 542
4.19. Simple Model for an Extrusion Blow Molding Application ................................................................... 544
4.20. Simple Model for an Injection Stretch Blow Molding Application ........................................................ 545
4.21. Simple Model for Thermoforming Application ................................................................................... 545
4.22. Example of Pressing .......................................................................................................................... 547
4.23.Time Evolution of the Glass Blob With Contours of Velocity ................................................................. 548
4.24. Example of a Geometry for a Single-screw Extruder ........................................................................... 549

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.25. Example of Film Casting .................................................................................................................... 551

4.26. An Example of Filling ......................................................................................................................... 554
4.27. A Control Volume Surrounding a Node .............................................................................................. 557
4.28. Extrusion of a Foamed Profile: Domains and Boundaries .................................................................... 559
4.29. Extrusion of a Foamed Profile: Die Lip Shape Prediction and Bubble Radius Distribution ..................... 560
4.30. An Example of Coextrusion ............................................................................................................... 563
4.31. An Example of Fiber Spinning ............................................................................................................ 565
4.32. Creating a New Simulation Using the Ribbon ..................................................................................... 567
4.33. Creating a New Simulation Using the Wizard ..................................................................................... 572
4.34. The Simple Internal Flow Wizard ........................................................................................................ 573
4.35. Boundary Zones for Simple Internal Flow ........................................................................................... 574
4.36.The Simple Direct Extrusion Wizard .................................................................................................... 575
4.37. Zones for Simple Direct Extrusion ...................................................................................................... 576
4.38. Boundary Zones for Simple Direct Extrusion ...................................................................................... 576
4.39. The Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard .................................................................................................. 577
4.40. Zones for Fixed/Adaptive/Constant Sections ...................................................................................... 578
4.41. Boundary Zones for Fixed/Adaptive/Constant Sections ...................................................................... 579
4.42. Zones for Fixed/Adaptive Sections ..................................................................................................... 580
4.43. Boundary Zones for Fixed/Adaptive Sections ..................................................................................... 581
4.44. Zones for Adaptive/Constant Sections ............................................................................................... 582
4.45. Boundary Zones for Adaptive/Constant Sections ............................................................................... 583
4.46. Zones for Adaptive Sections .............................................................................................................. 584
4.47. Boundary Zones for Adaptive Sections .............................................................................................. 585
4.48. Zones for Constant Sections .............................................................................................................. 586
4.49. Boundary Zones for Constant Sections .............................................................................................. 587
4.50. An Example of a Blow Molding / Thermoforming Wizard .................................................................... 588
4.51. Example of Graphical Indicators of Mold Body Orientation ................................................................. 589
4.52. Example of Graphical Indicators of the Inflation Pressure (-1000 Pa) .................................................... 590
4.53. Example of Graphical Indicators of the Inflation Pressure (+1000 Pa) ................................................... 591
4.54. Zones for Blow Molding / Thermoforming ......................................................................................... 592
4.55. General Simulation Properties ........................................................................................................... 594
4.56. Material Properties ............................................................................................................................ 595
4.57. Species Properties ............................................................................................................................. 598
4.58. Fluid Cell Zone Properties .................................................................................................................. 599
4.59. Solid Cell Zone Properties .................................................................................................................. 600
4.60. Porous Media Cell Zone Properties .................................................................................................... 600
4.61. Fixed Mold Cell Zone Properties ........................................................................................................ 601
4.62. Moving Mold Cell Zone Properties ..................................................................................................... 601
4.63. Restrictor Cell Zone Properties .......................................................................................................... 602
4.64. Moving Part Cell Zone Properties ....................................................................................................... 603
4.65. Fluid Boundary Properties ................................................................................................................. 604
4.66. Inflow Fluid Boundary Properties ....................................................................................................... 605
4.67. Outflow Fluid Boundary Properties .................................................................................................... 605
4.68. Wall Fluid Boundary Properties .......................................................................................................... 606
4.69. Symmetry Fluid Boundary Properties ................................................................................................. 607
4.70. Free Surface Fluid Boundary Properties ............................................................................................. 608
4.71. Extrudate Exit Fluid Boundary Properties ........................................................................................... 608
4.72. Vent Fluid Boundary Properties ......................................................................................................... 609
4.73. Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary Properties ............................................................................................ 609
4.74. Zero Force Fluid Boundary Properties ................................................................................................ 609
4.75. Porous Wall Fluid Boundary Properties ............................................................................................... 610

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxiii
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.76. Force Fluid Boundary Properties ........................................................................................................ 611

4.77. Solid Boundary Properties ................................................................................................................. 612
4.78. Porous Media Boundary Properties .................................................................................................... 612
4.79. Contact Boundary Condition Properties ............................................................................................. 613
4.80. Mold Boundary Condition Properties ................................................................................................. 614
4.81. Part Boundary Condition Properties .................................................................................................. 614
4.82. Interface Boundary Condition Properties ........................................................................................... 615
4.83. Fluid-Fluid Interface Boundary Condition Properties .......................................................................... 616
4.84. Fluid-Solid Interface Boundary Condition Properties .......................................................................... 616
4.85. Guiding Device Boundary Condition Properties ................................................................................. 617
4.86. Assign Pressure Properties ................................................................................................................. 618
4.87. Displacement Properties ................................................................................................................... 619
4.88. Mesh Deformation Properties ............................................................................................................ 620
4.89. Properties of Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming Simulations Using the Shell
Model ....................................................................................................................................................... 621
4.90. Contact Condition Properties of Adaptive Meshing Based on Angle and Curvature ............................. 623
4.91. Contact Condition Properties of Adaptive Meshing Based on Curvature ............................................. 624
4.92. Contact Condition Properties of Adaptive Meshing Based on Distance ............................................... 626
4.93. Properties of Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases ............................................................ 627
4.94. Properties of Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based on Curvature .................. 631
4.95. Properties of Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based on Distance ................... 633
4.96. Properties of a Box-Based Refinement Zone ....................................................................................... 635
4.97. Properties of a Sphere-Based Refinement Zone .................................................................................. 636
4.98. Properties of a Boundary Refinement Zone Based on Curvature ......................................................... 638
4.99. Properties of a Boundary Refinement Zone Based on Distance ........................................................... 639
4.100. General Properties for Adaptive Meshing Cases Involving Restrictors and Moving Parts .................... 640
4.101. Properties of an Overlapping Condition for Adaptive Meshing Cases Involving Restrictors and Moving
Parts ......................................................................................................................................................... 641
4.102. Properties of Initialization (Temperature) ......................................................................................... 643
4.103. Properties of Initialization (Species) ................................................................................................. 643
4.104. Properties of Probe ......................................................................................................................... 644
4.105. Properties of Derived Quantities ...................................................................................................... 644
4.106. Contour: Residence Time Distribution for a Steady-State Free Surface Problem ................................. 653
4.107. Bent Quadrilateral and Unit Normal Directions at Vertices ................................................................ 657
4.108. Three Deformation Scenarios ........................................................................................................... 658
4.109. Skewness Values vs. Element Shape ................................................................................................ 659
4.110. Properties of Methods ..................................................................................................................... 659
4.111. Properties of Calculation Activities ................................................................................................... 660
4.112. Properties of Outputs ...................................................................................................................... 663
4.113. Properties of Monitors ..................................................................................................................... 663
4.114. Properties of Run Calculation ........................................................................................................... 663
4.115. Properties of a Point Surface ............................................................................................................ 665
4.116. Properties of a Line Surface ............................................................................................................. 666
4.117. Properties of a Rake Surface ............................................................................................................ 666
4.118. Properties of a Plane Surface ........................................................................................................... 667
4.119. Properties of an Iso-Surface ............................................................................................................. 668
4.120. Properties of an Iso-Clip Surface ...................................................................................................... 668
4.121. Create Multiple Planes Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 669
4.122. Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 670
4.123. Contraction and Expansion Flow ..................................................................................................... 685
4.124. Storage and Loss Moduli Curves ...................................................................................................... 686

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.125. Constant (Shear-Rate-Independent) Viscosity ................................................................................... 689

4.126. Bird-Carreau Law for Viscosity .......................................................................................................... 691
4.127. Power Law for Viscosity ................................................................................................................... 692
4.128. Bingham Law for Viscosity ............................................................................................................... 694
4.129. Modified Bingham Law for Viscosity ................................................................................................. 695
4.130. Herschel-Bulkley Law for Viscosity ................................................................................................... 697
4.131. Modified Herschel-Bulkley Law for Viscosity ..................................................................................... 699
4.132. Cross Law for Viscosity ..................................................................................................................... 701
4.133. Modified Cross Law for Viscosity ...................................................................................................... 702
4.134. Carreau-Yasuda Law for Viscosity ..................................................................................................... 704
4.135. Arrhenius Law for the Temperature Dependence of the Viscosity With Vertical Shift Only .................. 707
4.136. Approximate Arrhenius Law for the Temperature Dependence of the Viscosity With Both Vertical and
Horizontal Shifts ....................................................................................................................................... 709
4.137. Typical Viscosity Curve vs. Temperature ............................................................................................ 711
4.138. Effect of Increasing c2 on the WLF Law for Viscosity .......................................................................... 713
4.139. Effect of Increasing c1 or Ta on the WLF Law for Viscosity .................................................................. 713
4.140. Maxwell Model for a Shear Flow ....................................................................................................... 719
4.141. Maxwell Model for an Extensional Flow ............................................................................................ 720
4.142. Maxwell Model for a Transient Shear Flow ........................................................................................ 721
4.143. Oldroyd-B Model for a Shear Flow .................................................................................................... 723
4.144. Oldroyd-B Model for a Transient Shear Flow ..................................................................................... 724
4.145. PTT Model for a Shear Flow ............................................................................................................. 727
4.146. PTT Model for a Steady Extensional Flow ......................................................................................... 728
4.147. Effect of ξ on the PTT Model for a Shear Flow ................................................................................... 729
4.148. Effect of ξ on the PTT Model for a Steady Extensional Flow ............................................................... 730
4.149. PTT Model in a Transient Shear Flow ................................................................................................ 731
4.150. Giesekus Model for a Shear Flow ...................................................................................................... 733
4.151. Effect of α on the Giesekus Model for an Extensional Flow ................................................................ 734
4.152. Giesekus Model for a Transient Shear Flow ....................................................................................... 735
4.153. Dumbbell Definitions for the FENE-P Model ..................................................................................... 737
4.154. Effect of Small Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Shear Flow ..................................................... 739
4.155. Effect of Large Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Shear Flow ..................................................... 740
4.156. Effect of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Extensional Flow ................................................................... 741
4.157. Effect of Large Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Transient Shear Flow ...................................... 742
4.158. Effect of Mid-Range Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Transient Shear Flow .............................. 743
4.159. Effect of Parameter ξ for Steady Shear Flow ...................................................................................... 747
4.160. Effect of Parameter q on Steady Elongation Viscosity ........................................................................ 748
4.161. Effect of Parameter q on Transient Elongation Viscosity for Different Values of the Elongation Rate .... 749
4.162. Shear Viscosity of the Leonov Model with Parameters G=1000, λ=1, q=1, β=0, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1,
k=n=m=0 (continuous lines). .................................................................................................................... 754
4.163. First Normal Stress Difference of the Leonov Model with Parameters G=1000, λ=1, q=1, β=0, ν=2, γ*=2,
and α=1, k=n=m=0 (continuous lines). ...................................................................................................... 755
4.164. Elongation Viscosity of the Leonov Model with Parameters G=1000, λ=1, q=1, n=1, ν=2, γ*=2, and
α=1, β=k=m=0 (continuous lines). ............................................................................................................. 756
4.165. Transient Shear Viscosity of the Leonov Model Versus Time, at Shear Rates Ranging from 10^-2 to 10,
With Parameters G=1000, λ=1, q=1, n=1,, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, β=k=m=n=0, (continuous lines). ................... 757
4.166. Simple Shear Flow with Multiple Relaxation Times ........................................................................... 758
4.167. Extensional Flow with Multiple Relaxation Times .............................................................................. 759
4.168. Transient Shear Flow with Multiple Relaxation Times ........................................................................ 760
4.169. Example of axisymmetric extrusion simulation for the simplified viscoelastic fluid model through a
cylindrical tube with a unit radius. ............................................................................................................. 767

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxv
Fluent Workspaces User's Guide

4.170. Example of axisymmetric extrusion simulation for the simplified viscoelastic fluid model through a
cylindrical tube with a unit radius. ............................................................................................................. 768
4.171. Steady Simple Shear Flow ................................................................................................................ 769
4.172. Uniaxial Extensional Flow ................................................................................................................ 772
4.173. Biaxial Extensional Flow ................................................................................................................... 772
4.174. Planar Extensional Flow ................................................................................................................... 773
4.175. Transient Shear Flows ...................................................................................................................... 775
4.176. G' and G" vs. Angular Frequency [rad/s] ............................................................................................ 823
4.177. G"/G' vs. Angular Frequency [rad/s] .................................................................................................. 823
4.178. Combining G"/G' Curves .................................................................................................................. 824
4.179. Master Curves for G' and G" vs. Angular Frequency [rad/s] ................................................................ 825

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Tables
1.1. Remote Visualization Client Environment Variables ................................................................................ 34
2.1. Pressure Far-Field, Mapping of Airflow Fluent Icing Boundary Condition into Fluent & FENSAP Boundary
Conditions .................................................................................................................................................. 95
2.2. Velocity Inlet, Mapping of Airflow Fluent Icing Boundary Condition into Fluent & FENSAP Boundary
Conditions .................................................................................................................................................. 96
2.3. Mass Flow Inlet, Mapping of Airflow Fluent Icing Boundary Condition into Fluent & FENSAP Boundary
Conditions .................................................................................................................................................. 97
2.4. Pressure Inlet, Mapping of Airflow Fluent Icing Boundary Condition Into Fluent Boundary Conditions .... 97
3.1. Mixture Mapping Table Between Fluent Aero and Fluent Workspace .................................................... 265
4.1. Expression-Supported Quantities for Transient Simulations .................................................................. 512
4.2. Expression-Supported Properties for Transient Simulations (Materials) ................................................. 515
4.3. Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (General) ...................................................................... 518
4.4. Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (Materials) .................................................................... 518
4.5. Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (Cell Zones) ................................................................... 518
4.6. Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (Boundary Conditions - Thermal) ................................... 519
4.7. Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (Boundary Conditions - Species) .................................... 519
4.8. Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (Species) ....................................................................... 519
4.9. Force and Torque Components for Geometries and Boundary Conditions ............................................ 540
4.10. Available Derived Quantities ............................................................................................................. 644
4.11. Files Written and Read by Fluent Materials Processing ........................................................................ 778

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxvii
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 1: Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent
Remotely
Using the Ansys Fluent Remote Visualization Client you can start a visualization client session that can
be used to connect to up to six interactive or batch (Linux only) solver sessions on remote machines.

From the remote session you can:

• Extract simulation data and visualize results using mesh, contour and vector plots.

• Monitor solution convergence using residual and monitor plots.

• Modify solution settings and start/pause/interrupt the calculation.

• Send any text command to the server.

1.1. Starting Remote Visualization

If you have multiple releases of Ansys products installed on your machine(s), ensure that the server and the
remote visualization client are from the same release, to avoid any unexpected behavior.

1.1.1. Steps for Starting the Server

Before you start and connect a remote client session, the server has to be running.

1. Start the server in the Ansys Fluent session.

a. Launch Ansys Fluent.

b. Start the server.

File → Applications → Server → Start...

2. Specify the name of the server info file and its storage directory. The default name of serv-
er_info-<host process ID>.txt is supplied.

Note:

For clusters with isolated compute nodes, you must use the export REMOTING_SERV-
ER_ADDRESS environment variable to provide an outward facing IP address for the client
to connect to. This environment variable must be defined on both the server and the client.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

Alternate Methods for Starting the Remote Visualization Server

Here are a few more ways that you can start a server session.

• The -sifile=server_info_example_name.txt command line startup option.

Note:

You can specify the location for the server info file prior to the filename, for example
-sifile=D:/example_folder/server_info_example_name.txt. If you do
not provide a file path before the file name and you do not provide a path using the
SERVER_INFO_DIR environment variable, then the file is saved in your working direct-
ory.

• From progress bar by clicking Start Server.

Figure 1.1: Progress Bar with Start Server Option

• Launch Fluent Remote Visualization Client from the start menu. Right-click the RemoteSession-
1 branch of the tree and select Start Server.

• Enter the server/start-server text command into the console of a running Fluent session.

1.1.1.1. Port Management

When launching the server, you have the option specify a range of ports. There must be at least
two ports available from the range you supplied for the server to start, otherwise it will not launch.
Note that using this environment variable is optional, so if it is not declared, the server uses random
ports.

Use the REMOTING_PORTS environment variable to specify the ports for starting the server: RE-
MOTING_PORTS=<start port>/portspan=<num>

• <start port> and <num> must be valid integers

• <num> must be greater than 1

• <start port> must be greater than 0

Example:
If you specify REMOTING_PORTS=2678/portspan=3, then only 3 ports are available: 2678,
2679, 2680.

Each server requires two ports, so 2678 and 2679 are consumed when you launch the server. If
you then try to start another server on the same machine, it will not start as there is only one port
(2680) available.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
2 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Starting Remote Visualization

1.1.2. Steps For Starting the Remote Visualization Client

1. Start the server in the Ansys Fluent session, as described in Steps for Starting the Server (p. 1).

2. Start the Remote Visualization Client (2 options):

• Scenario—Remote Client is on a different machine than the server.

a. (Windows) Launch Fluent Remote Visualization Client from the start menu.

(Linux) Launch the Fluent Remote Visualization Client from installation_drive/Pro-

gram Files/ANSYS Inc/v241/fluent/bin/flremote.

b. Click in the Server Info Filename field (highlighted in yellow in the Properties window),
then click Browse....

c. Select the server information file and click Open.

d. Connect to the server session by clicking Connect in the Actions ribbon tab (Connection
group box).

Actions → Connection → Connect

• Scenario—Remote Client is on the same machine as the server.

Start the remote client from the server session.

File → Applications → Visualization Client

The client will automatically connect to the server by loading the Server Info Filename.

Note:

For clusters with isolated compute nodes, you must use the export REMOTING_SERV-
ER_ADDRESS environment variable to provide an outward facing IP address for the client
to connect to. This environment variable must be defined on both the server and the client.

Important:

The client and server machines must be able to connect by using their IP addresses. You
can confirm that the machines can connect using IP addresses by ensuring that the ping
command works from both server to client and client to server.

Alternate Methods for Starting the Remote Visualization Client

• You can start the client from progress bar by clicking Start client.

Figure 1.2: Progress Bar with Start Client Option

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

Start Client will only appear as an option when there is not a Remote Visualization Client already
connected to the server.

• Enter the server/start-client text command into the console of a running Fluent session.

1.2. Using a Job Scheduler with Remote Visualization

You have the option to use job schedulers in coordination with the Remote Visualization Client and
server. Job schedulers are primarily covered in Setting Parallel Scheduler Options in Fluent Launcher in
the Fluent User's Guide, however, there are some nuances for using a job scheduler with remote visual-
ization.

There are three types of server-client connections that you can make:

• Start the client and server separately

• Start the client from the server

• Start the server from the client

The only type of connection that may require an additional step for remote visualization is when starting
the server from the client. For this case you must define the SERVER_INFO_DIR environment variable
on both the server and the client machines. Set the environment variable to a location that is accessible
for both the server and the client.

(Linux only) Fluent automatically selects the best graphics driver and defaults to using the X11 graphics
driver when it does not detect the required graphics support. You can use the HOOPS_PICTURE envir-
onment variable to force a particular graphics driver, if you feel it is necessary to use an alternate driver.

Note:

SGE does not support starting the server from the client.

1.3. Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

Once you are in the Fluent Remote Visualization Client you can display mesh, contours and vectors,
modify solution settings (as long as the server is not calculating), start, pause, and interrupt calculations,
and send commands.

1.3.1. Adding New Remote Client Connections

From within a connected remote client session you can connect to up to 5 other servers (a single
remote client can be connected to a maximum of 6 servers).

1. Click New Connection... in the Actions ribbon tab (Connections group box).

Actions → Connection → New Connection...

This creates a new branch in the tree for the new remote session connection.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
4 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

2. Connect to the new server—two scenarios:

• Connect to an already-running Fluent server

a. Select the newly created sub-branch in the tree.

b. Click in the Server Info Filename field (highlighted in yellow in the Properties window),
then click Browse....

c. Select the server information file and click Open.

d. Connect to the server session by clicking Connect in the Actions ribbon tab (Connection
group box).

Actions → Connection → Connect

• New server on the same machine as the client

a. Right-click the new sub-branch in the tree and select Start Server.

b. Specify the appropriate settings in the Fluent Launcher and click Start to launch Ansys
Fluent. The new Fluent session is automatically connected to the client.

1.3.2. Using the Help System

Fluent includes an integrated help system that provides easy access to the program documentation.
Through the graphical user interface, you have the entire User's Guide and other documentation
available to you with the click of a mouse button. The Fluent User's Guide and other manuals are
displayed on the Ansys help site, which allows you to use links and search tools and index tools to
find the information you need.

Use the help menu ( ) icon in the upper right-hand corner of the workspace to access its docu-
mentation. Some workspaces even have field-level user assistance that provide information and
guidance about a particular field.

In addition to Online Technical Resources..., and the Product Improvement Program, you can also
obtain information about the version and release of Fluent you are running by selecting the Version...
option in help menu.

1.3.3. Setting Preferences

You can specify global settings that are applied whenever you are operating in the Remote Visualiz-
ation Client. These settings are case-independent and are controlled using the Preferences dialog
box.

File → Preferences...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 5
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

Figure 1.3: Preferences Dialog Box

Note that there is only one Preferences file that applies to all Fluent workspaces. Not all preference settings
are relevant to all workspaces. Refer to Setting User Preferences/Options in the Fluent User's Guide for
additional information.

1.3.4. Initializing, Starting, Pausing, and Interrupting the Calculation

You have the ability to initialize, start, pause, and interrupt a calculation from the Remote Visualization
Client. The buttons for these actions are located in the Actions ribbon tab.

• Initialize—fills the flow field with an initial "guess" for the solution.

• Calculate—begins the process of Fluent calculating the solution.

As soon as Fluent begins calculating, a progress monitor appears that visually indicates solution progress
and the remaining number of time steps/iterations.

• Pause—"pauses" the calculation at the end of the iteration and waits for your input. When you
click Resume, Fluent continues calculating from where it was paused.

For example, if you request 10 iterations and pause at the 4th iteration, when you click Resume,
Fluent will calculate for the remaining 6 iterations.

If you are running from a script/journal file, Pause just "pauses" the run and all remaining commands
will be executed when you click Resume.

Note:

Do not switch from steady-state to transient (or vice versa) or change models when the
calculation is paused.

• Resume—continues Fluent calculating the solution from the point where it was paused.

• Interrupt—stops the calculation and takes the solver out of the iteration loop. You must then click
Calculate after adjusting the remaining iterations/time-steps.

For example, if you request 10 iterations and interrupt at the 4th iteration, when you click Calculate,
Fluent will calculate for 10 additional iterations (14 iterations total).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
6 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

If you are running from a script/journal file, Interrupt will cancel the run and the remaining com-
mands will not be executed.

Figure 1.4: Actions Ribbon Tab

Select the Run Calculation branch in the tree to modify the Properties - RemoteSessionX: Run
Calculation.

Figure 1.5: Run Calculation Properties

Important:

Do not start calculations from the Send Command to Server dialog box—they must be
started using the GUI on the client.

1.3.5. Modifying Solution Settings

When calculations are stopped or paused, you can modify solution methods, solution controls, and
convergence criteria from the Remote Visualization Client.

To modify the solution methods or controls:

1. Select Methods or Controls in the tree. This opens the Properties - Remote SessionX: Methods
or Properties - Remote SessionX: Controls.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 7
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

Figure 1.6: Example Solution Methods

Figure 1.7: Example Solution Controls

2. Modify the solution methods and controls as required. Modified settings are automatically synched
with the server.

To modify convergence conditions:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
8 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

1. Select Residuals in the tree. This opens the Properties - Remote SessionX: Residuals or Properties
- Remote SessionX: Controls.

Figure 1.8: Example Residuals Properties

2. Modify the convergence conditions as required. Modified settings are automatically synched with
the server.

Note:

If you want to enable or disable the plotting of residuals, you must do so from within the
server session. Sending TUI commands to enable or disable residual plotting using the
Send Command to Server dialog box only controls the status of residual plotting in the
server, not in the Fluent Remote Visualization Client.

1.3.6. Graphics Window Interactions and Context Menus

The graphics window lets you interact with and visualize your model. You can use the toolbars
(Toolbars in the Fluent User's Guide) to manipulate the model view and you can use right-click context
menus to create graphics objects, as shown in Figure 1.9: Creating a Contour Via the Context
Menu (p. 10). Refer to Graphics Objects (p. 22) for additional information on creating graphics objects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

Figure 1.9: Creating a Contour Via the Context Menu

Context menus allow you to:

• Print information about the selected surface(s) to the console.

• Edit the currently displayed graphics object(s).

• Copy the currently displayed graphics object(s).

• Create new graphics objects.

• Hide surfaces in the current display.

1.3.7. Surfaces
You can create different types of surfaces to visualize your results, including points, lines, rakes, planes,
and iso-surfaces. Values are interpolated to the smoothed out boundary lines.

Refer to the following sections for more details:

1.3.7.1. Point Surfaces
1.3.7.2. Line Surfaces
1.3.7.3. Rake Surfaces
1.3.7.4. Plane Surfaces
1.3.7.5. Iso-Surfaces

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
10 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

1.3.7.1. Point Surfaces

You may be interested in displaying results at a single point in the domain. For example, you may
want to monitor the value of some variable or function at a particular location. To do this, you must
first create a "point" surface, which consists of a single point. When you display node-value data
on a point surface, the value displayed is a linear average of the neighboring node values. If you
display cell-value data, the value at the cell in which the point lies is displayed.

Results → Surfaces New → Point

To create a point surface, use the Figure 1.10: Properties of a Point Surface (p. 11).

Figure 1.10: Properties of a Point Surface

1. (Optional) Provide a name for the point surface if you do not want to use the default name.

Important:

The surface name that you provide must begin with an alphabetical letter. If the
name of the surface begins with any other character or number, Fluent rejects the
entry.

Note:

The Fluent Name field indicates the name of a surface within the Fluent workspace.

When a surface is created in the standard Fluent workspace, the Name field will
match the Fluent Name field.

Surfaces created in the Remote Visualization Client may end up with a different name
in the Fluent workspace. In this case, refer to the Fluent Name field to see a surface's
name in the Fluent workspace.

2. Specify the location of the point. There are two different ways to do this:

• Enter the coordinates (x, y, z) under Point Settings.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 11
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

• Move the point tool ( ) to the location in the domain where you want the
point surface created. Refer to Using the Point Tool in the Fluent User's Guide for additional
information.

1.3.7.2. Line Surfaces

A line is simply a line that extends up to and includes the specified endpoints; data points will be
located where the line intersects the faces of the cell, and consequently may not be equally spaced.

Results → Surfaces New → Line

To create a line surface, use the Figure 1.11: Properties of a Line Surface (p. 12).

Figure 1.11: Properties of a Line Surface

1. (Optional) Provide a name for the line surface if you do not want to use the default name.

Important:

The surface name that you provide must begin with an alphabetical letter. If the
name of the surface begins with any other character or number, Fluent rejects the
entry.

Note:

The Fluent Name field indicates the name of a surface within the Fluent workspace.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
12 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

When a surface is created in the standard Fluent workspace, the Name field will
match the Fluent Name field.

Surfaces created in the Remote Visualization Client may end up with a different name
in the Fluent workspace. In this case, refer to the Fluent Name field to see a surface's
name in the Fluent workspace.

2. Specify the location of the Start Point.

3. Specify the location of the End Point.

1.3.7.3. Rake Surfaces

A rake consists of a specified number of points equally spaced between two specified endpoints.

Results → Surfaces New → Rake

To create a rake surface, use the Figure 1.12: Properties of a Rake Surface (p. 13).

Figure 1.12: Properties of a Rake Surface

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 13
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

1. (Optional) Provide a name for the rake surface if you do not want to use the default name.

Important:

The surface name that you provide must begin with an alphabetical letter. If the
name of the surface begins with any other character or number, Fluent rejects the
entry.

Note:

The Fluent Name field indicates the name of a surface within the Fluent workspace.

When a surface is created in the standard Fluent workspace, the Name field will
match the Fluent Name field.

Surfaces created in the Remote Visualization Client may end up with a different name
in the Fluent workspace. In this case, refer to the Fluent Name field to see a surface's
name in the Fluent workspace.

2. Set the Number of Points to include in the rake surface.

3. Specify the location of the Start Point.

4. Specify the location of the End Point.

1.3.7.4. Plane Surfaces

To display flow-field data on a specific plane in the domain, you will use a plane surface. You can
create surfaces that cut through the solution domain along arbitrary planes (3D cases only).

There are three types of plane surfaces that you can create:

• Coordinate system-based—the plane is created in the YX, ZX, or XY directions, bounded by the
extents of the domain. You can move the plane to the desired location in the domain using the
plane tool. For example, if you are using the YZ Plane method, you can drag the plane in the
(+) or (-) X direction.

• Point and normal—the plane orientation is determined by selecting a point and specifying a
direction normal to that point. The extents of the plane are the edges of the domain. You have
the option to control the orientation of the plane using the plane tool or you can compute the
normal from a surface.

• Three points—the plane orientation and extents are bounded by three points that you can select.
You also have the option to manipulate the points and orientation of the plane directly in the
graphics window using the plane tool.

Results → Surfaces New → Plane

To create a plane surface, use the Figure 1.13: Properties of a Plane Surface (p. 15).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
14 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

Figure 1.13: Properties of a Plane Surface

The procedure for creating the plane surface varies depending on the method you want to use.

Point and Normal

1. (Optional) Provide a name for the plane.

Important:

The surface name that you enter must begin with an alphabetical letter. If the name
of the surface begins with any other character or number, Fluent rejects the entry.

Note:

The Fluent Name field indicates the name of a surface within the Fluent workspace.

When a surface is created in the standard Fluent workspace, the Name field will
match the Fluent Name field.

Surfaces created in the Remote Visualization Client may end up with a different name
in the Fluent workspace. In this case, refer to the Fluent Name field to see a surface's
name in the Fluent workspace.

2. Drag the plane tool to the desired location, as shown in The Plane Tool for the Point and Normal
Method in the Fluent User's Guide.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 15
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

Alternatively, you can specify Point 0 and the Normal by providing the coordinates of each.

Bounded
1. (Optional) Provide a name for the plane.

Important:

The surface name that you enter must begin with an alphabetical letter. If the name
of the surface begins with any other character or number, Fluent rejects the entry.

Note:

The Fluent Name field indicates the name of a surface within the Fluent workspace.

When a surface is created in the standard Fluent workspace, the Name field will
match the Fluent Name field.

Surfaces created in the Remote Visualization Client may end up with a different name
in the Fluent workspace. In this case, refer to the Fluent Name field to see a surface's
name in the Fluent workspace.

2. Drag the plane tool to the desired location, as shown in The Plane Tool for the Three Points
Method in the Fluent User's Guide.

Alternatively, you can specify Point 0, Point 1, and Point 2 by providing the coordinates.

Three Points
1. (Optional) Provide a name for the plane.

Important:

The surface name that you enter must begin with an alphabetical letter. If the name
of the surface begins with any other character or number, Fluent rejects the entry.

Note:

The Fluent Name field indicates the name of a surface within the Fluent workspace.

When a surface is created in the standard Fluent workspace, the Name field will
match the Fluent Name field.

Surfaces created in the Remote Visualization Client may end up with a different name
in the Fluent workspace. In this case, refer to the Fluent Name field to see a surface's
name in the Fluent workspace.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
16 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

2. Drag the plane tool to the desired location, as shown in The Plane Tool for the Three Points
Method in the Fluent User's Guide.

Alternatively, you can specify Point 0, Point 1, and Point 2 by providing the coordinates.

Multiple Planes
Instead of creating plane surfaces one at a time as described above, you have the option to create
multiple plane surfaces at once using the Figure 1.14: Create Multiple Planes Dialog Box (p. 17).

Results → Surfaces Create Multiple Planes...

Figure 1.14: Create Multiple Planes Dialog Box

To use the Create Multiple Planes dialog box:

1. (Optional) Provide a format for naming the plane surfaces in the Name Format field.

2. Specify how many planes will be created in the Number of Planes field.

3. Select the method for how you want to create the planes in the Option drop-down list.

• Point and Normal—similarly to the process described earlier in this section, you must provide
a point and the direction normal to that point to define the first plane.

• First and Last Point—you define the coordinates for the first and last point, which determines
the orientation of the planes. The spacing is determined by how many planes you specify in
the Number of Planes field.

4. (Point and Normal only) Specify the direction normal (perpendicular) to the plane in the Normal
Specification drop-down list.

5. (Point and Normal only) Specify how far apart the planes are from each other in the Spacing
field.

6. Provide the coordinate for the location of the first plane in the Point on First Plane group box.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 17
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

7. (First and Last Point only) Provide the coordinates for the location of the last plane in the
Point on Last Plane group box.

8. Click Create to create the new plane surfaces.

The new plane surfaces created using the Create Multiple Planes dialog box are added to the
Outline View tree under the Surfaces branch and are now eligible for editing individually. Once
created, the multiple planes cannot be edited as a group.

1.3.7.5. Iso-Surfaces
If you want to If you want to display results on cells that have a constant value for a specified
variable, you will need to create an iso-surface of that variable. Generating an iso-surface based on
, , or coordinate, for example, will give you an , , or cross-section of your domain;
generating an iso-surface based on pressure will enable you to display data for another variable
on a surface of constant pressure. You can create an iso-surface from an existing surface or from
the entire domain. Furthermore, you can restrict any iso-surface to a specified cell zone.

Important:

Note that you cannot create an iso-surface until you have initialized the solution, per-
formed calculations, or read a data file.

Results → Surfaces New → Iso-Surface

To create an iso-surface, use the Figure 1.15: Properties of an Iso-Surface (p. 18).

Figure 1.15: Properties of an Iso-Surface

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
18 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

1. (Optional) Provide a name for the iso-surface.

Important:

The surface name that you enter must begin with an alphabetical letter. If the name
of the surface begins with any other character or number, Fluent rejects the entry.

Note:

The Fluent Name field indicates the name of a surface within the Fluent workspace.

When a surface is created in the standard Fluent workspace, the Name field will
match the Fluent Name field.

Surfaces created in the Remote Visualization Client may end up with a different name
in the Fluent workspace. In this case, refer to the Fluent Name field to see a surface's
name in the Fluent workspace.

2. Click Field to open the Field dialog box and specify the field you want to view.

3. Click OK to confirm your selected field and close the dialog box.

4. Enter the iso-values into the Iso-Value field. You can enter multiple iso-values into the field
separated by spaces.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 19
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

5. Set the range by specifying the Minimum and Maximum.

6. (Optional) Enable Restrict to Specific Surface to only display iso-values on specific surfaces.
Click in the yellow Surfaces list that appears, select the desired surfaces and click OK to confirm
the selection and close the dialog box.

7. (Optional) Enable Restrict to Specific Cell Zones to only display iso-values on specific zones.
Click in the yellow Zones list that appears, select the desired zones and click OK to confirm the
selection and close the dialog box.

Click Delete at the bottom of the iso-surface properties to delete an iso-surface.

Instead of creating iso-surfaces one at a time as described above, you have the option to create
multiple iso-surfaces at once using the Figure 1.16: Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces Dialog Box (p. 20).

Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces

Instead of iso-surfaces one at a time as described above, you have the option to create multiple
iso-surfaces at once using the Figure 1.16: Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces Dialog Box (p. 20).

Results → Surfaces Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces...

Figure 1.16: Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces Dialog Box

To use the Create Multiple Isosurfaces dialog box:

1. (Optional) Provide a format for naming the iso-surfaces in the Name Format field.

2. Select the field that you want to use for creating the iso-surfaces from the Field drop-down list:

• rmse-y-velocity—root mean square error of the y-component of the velocity.

• rmse-x-velocity—root mean square error of the x-component of the velocity.

• rmse-pressure—root mean square error of gauge pressure.

• mean-y-velocity—average of the y-component of the velocity.

• mean-velocity-magnitude—average of the velocity magnitude.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
20 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

• mean-pressure—average gauge pressure.

• y-coordinate—value of the y-coordinate.

• mean-z-velocity—average of the z-component of the velocity.

• total-pressure—value of the total gauge pressure.

• z-coordinate—value of the z-coordinate.

• axial-coordinate—value of the axial-coordinate.

• rmse-z-velocity—root mean square error of the z-component of the velocity.

• y-vorticity—y-component of the vorticity.

• z-velocity—z-component of the velocity.

• velocity-magnitude—magnitude of the velocity.

• x-coordinate—value of the x-coordinate.

• z-vorticity—z-component of the vorticity.

• helicity—the combination of spin and velocity of the flow.

• vorticity-mag—magnitude of the vorticity.

• cell-volume—value of the mesh cell volume.

• viscosity-lam—laminar viscosity.

• x-velocity—x-component of the velocity.

• y-velocity—y-component of the velocity.

• mean-x-velocity—average of the x-component of the velocity.

• dynamic-pressure—value of the dynamic pressure.

• x-vorticity—x-component of the vorticity.

• angular-coordinate—value of the angular coordinate.

• absolute-pressure—value of the absolute pressure.

• pressure—value of the pressure.

• rmse-velocity-magnitude—root mean square error of the velocity magnitude.

• abs-angular-coordinate—absolute value of the angular coordinate.

• density—value of the density.

3. Specify the method you want to use for creating iso-surfaces in the Specify By drop-down list.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 21
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

• First Value, Last Value and Steps—using this method you must specify the First Value for
the quantity that you selected in the Field drop-down list, specify how many iso-surfaces you
want created by entering the number of Steps, and provide the final value for the selected
quantity in the Last Value field.

• First Value, Last Value and Increment—using this method you must specify the First Value
for the quantity that you selected in the Field drop-down list, specify the size of the increments
between the first and last value, which determines the number of iso-surfaces to be created,
and provide the final value for the selected quantity in the Last Value field.

• First Value, Increment and Steps—using this method you must specify the First Value for
the quantity that you selected in the Field drop-down list, specify the size of the increments
from the first value, and provide the total number of steps in the Steps field, which determines
the total number of iso-surfaces to be created.

• Last Value, Decrement and Steps—using this method you must specify the size of the
decrement (negative increment) in the Decrement field, which will go backwards from the
Last Value, provide the total number of steps in the Steps field, which determines the total
number of iso-surfaces, and provide the final value for the selected quantity in the Last Value
field.

4. Click Create to create the new iso-surfaces.

The new iso-surfaces created using the Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces dialog box are added to the
Outline View tree under the Surfaces branch and are now eligible for editing individually. Once
created, the multiple iso-surfaces cannot be edited as a group.

1.3.8. Graphics Objects

The remote client can access, display, and edit graphics objects that are defined on the server. You
can also create local graphics objects on the client.

The following sections describe operations available for graphics objects in the Fluent Remote Visual-
ization Client.
1.3.8.1. Creating and Displaying Graphics objects
1.3.8.2. Creating and Displaying Plot objects
1.3.8.3. Creating and Displaying Scenes
1.3.8.4. Saving Pictures of the Graphics Window
1.3.8.5. Modifying the Views
1.3.8.6. Synchronizing with the Server

1.3.8.1. Creating and Displaying Graphics objects

1. Click New Mesh..., New Contour... New Vector..., New Pathlines..., or New Particle Tracks...
in the Actions ribbon tab (Graphics group box).

Actions → Graphics → New Mesh... | New Contour... | New Vector... | New Pathlines...
| New Particle Tracks...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
22 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

You can also create new graphics objects by right-clicking in the graphics window to open a context
menu (see Graphics Window Interactions and Context Menus (p. 9)) and by right-clicking Meshes,
Contours, Vectors, Pathlines, and Particle Tracks in the tree and selecting New....

2. Specify all of the required fields in the Properties - RemoteSessionX: <graphics object name>.

Figure 1.17: Example Graphics Object Properties

3. Click Display at the bottom of the properties panel

Note:

You can remove a graphics object from the remote client session by right-clicking it in
the Outline View tree and selecting Remove.

1.3.8.2. Creating and Displaying Plot objects

1. Click New XY Plot... Actions ribbon tab (Plots group box).

Actions → Plots → New XYPlot...

You can also create new plots objects by right-clicking XY Plots, in the Outline View tree and selecting
New....

2. Specify all of the required fields in the Properties of RemoteSession-X: <plot object name>.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 23
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

Figure 1.18: Example Plot Object Properties

3. Click Plot at the bottom of the properties panel.

4. (Optional) Click Export Data... to open the Select File dialog and specify a location to save the
plot data.

5. (Optional) Click Save Image... to open the Save Picture Dialog Box in the Fluent User's Guide.

1.3.8.3. Creating and Displaying Scenes

Scenes allow you to display multiple graphics objects within a single window. For example, you
could overlay contours of pressure across a valve with velocity vectors and the mesh at the same
location. Scenes allow you to modify the transparency of each plot so that you can emphasize a
particular plot or view.

To define a scene:

1. Create graphics objects to include in the scene, as described in Creating and Displaying
Graphics objects (p. 22).

2. Right-click Scene in the Outline View tree and click New....

Results → Scene New...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
24 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

Figure 1.19: Scene Properties

3. Click in the Graphics Objects field to open the Scene dialog box.

Figure 1.20: Scene Dialog Box

4. Enable the check boxes (on the left) for each of the graphics objects you want included in the
scene.

5. (Optional) Adjust the transparency of contour and mesh plots using the Transparency slider.

6. Click OK to confirm the selections and close the dialog box.

7. Click Display at the bottom of the properties panel to display your scene in the graphics window.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 25
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

1.3.8.4. Saving Pictures of the Graphics Window

Once you display a postprocessing object such as a contour, XY Plot, or Scene, you may want to
save the image to a file.

To save an image to a file:

1. Open the properties panel for a postprocessing object.

Results → Graphics | Plots → <graphics type> → <graphics object name>

2. Click Save Image... at the bottom of the properties panel to open the Save Picture Dialog Box
in the Fluent User's Guide.

3. Specify your desired settings for saving the image and click Save... to open the Select File
dialog box.

4. Provide the location where you want the image saved and click OK.

1.3.8.5. Modifying the Views

You can change how graphics objects are displayed in the graphics window of the Remote Visual-
ization Client directly in the graphics window and via the Viewing ribbon tab.

Figure 1.21: Viewing Ribbon Tab

1.3.8.6. Synchronizing with the Server

When changes are made to graphics objects on the server or the client, there are options (available
on a right-click of the object in the tree) to:

• Send to server

sends changes made to the selected graphics object in the client to the server.

• Retrieve from server

updates the graphics object in the client to match the state of the same object on the server.

• View differences

prints the differences between the server and client versions of the graphics object to the console.

Arrows next to the graphics object indicate the state of the object. A single upward-pointing arrow
( ) indicates that this graphics object is unique to the client. A downward-pointing arrow paired

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
26 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

with an upward pointing arrow ( ) indicates that the same object has different properties between
the server and the client.

Note:

Changes (new graphics objects and modified object settings) sent from the client to the
server while the server is solving may not appear in the server until after the solving
completes.

1.3.9. Messaging and Text Commands

Fluent communicates with you when you are in the Remote Visualization Client through messages
printed in the Console and the RemoteSession-X tabs. Generally, contents printed in the Console
tab are related to the remote client session, but not necessarily to a specific remote server connection,
whereas the RemoteSession-X tab(s) only apply to the server session that they are connected to. It
is important to check both messaging tabs to ensure that you are getting all the information Fluent
is sharing with you. The Console is also a Python 2.7 interpreter—refer to Python, Scripting and
Transcripts in the Remote Client (p. 30) for additional information.

There are two ways that you can enter text commands from the Fluent Remote Visualization Client.

• Through the console—only controls the client session (no effect on the server) and provides options
to exit the session and modify the views.

• Through the Send Command to Server dialog box—sends commands to the server. This option
offers all of the commands listed in the Fluent Text Command List.

Important:

Do not start calculations from the Send Command to Server dialog box—they must
be started using the GUI on the client.

Note:

If the server is running with the active GUI present, some commands, such as changing
the discretization scheme, may require a refresh of the task page displaying the effected
field on the server (Solution Methods in the example of a modified discretization
scheme) before the change appears in the GUI—the changed field is still applied even
if you do not update the GUI display.

To send text commands to the server:

1. Open the Send Command to Server dialog box by clicking Send Command... in the Actions
ribbon tab (Connection group box).

Actions → Connection → Send Command...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 27
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

2. Enter the text command into the Command text entry box.

Note:

If you want the text command to be run in the background without the client waiting
for it to complete, then you can add an & to the end of the command. For example,
define/units velocity cm/s 0.01&.

Figure 1.22: Example of Sending a Command: Changing the Velocity Units to cm/s

3. Click Send.

Important:

• While Fluent is solving, do not enter any commands that modify Fluent, such as changing
equations, plots, models, and so on, as this could cause errors.

• Ensure that you only enter complete TUI commands in the Send Command to Server
dialog box.

• Confirm that you are sending the command to the intended server if you are connected
to multiple servers. The remote session that is sending the command is listed under
Remote Session Name. Select a remote session in the tree to review its properties,
which includes the name of the host machine (server).

• As noted in the Warning dialog box that appears, commands are executed immediately
in the solver session without confirmation. This could cause a loss of work, if other users
are connected to and modifying the same session as you.

• For any actions sent from the Remote Visualization Client to the server (initialization,
starting calculation, text commands using Send Command to Server), text prompts are
automatically answered. For example, if the question is The current data has not been
saved. OK to discard? Ansys Fluent automatically answers OK to this question and begins
calculating.

1.3.10. Saving Case and Data Files

You can write case and data files from the client.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
28 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Operating in the Fluent Remote Visualization Environment

Actions → Connection → Write Case... | Write Data... | Write Case & Data...

Figure 1.23: Writing Case and/or Data from the Client

Writing a case and/or data file:

1. Click Write Case..., Write Data..., or Write Case and Data....

2. Enter the name and location where the file(s) will be saved in the File name field.

3. (Optional) Enable Write binary files to write binary files instead of text files. Binary files take up
less space and Fluent can read them and write them faster than text files.

4. (Optional) Enable Overwrite file if exist if you want Fluent to write the new case and/or data
files, even if this means overwriting existing files with the same name in the location that you
specified.

5. Click Write to save the file(s).

1.3.11. Disconnecting the Server and Client

If you want to break a server-client connection you can accomplish this in two ways: from within the
client and from within the server.

Note:

If the server is closed unexpectedly, for example, the process is ended from the Windows
Task Manager, the remote visualization client may appear to hang, however after a time
out the client will become responsive again.

1.3.11.1. Disconnecting from Within the Remote Client Session

To disconnect from within the client:

1. Select the RemoteSession-X connection that you want to break in the tree.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 29
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

2. Click Disconnect in the Actions ribbon tab (Connection group box).

Actions → Connection → Disconnect

You can also disconnect the session by right-clicking the RemoteSession-X branch in the tree and
selecting Disconnect.

Important:

Do not try to close the server via the exit command in the Send Command to Server
dialog box, the correct command is (exit-server).

1.3.11.2. Disconnecting from Within the Remote Server Session

To disconnect a client from within the server you must shutdown the server.

Shut down the server by selecting Shutdown Server in the File ribbon tab.

File → Applications → Server → Shutdown

You can also shutdown the server by entering the server/shutdown-server text command in
the console.

1.3.12. Modifying Preferences

You can control system preferences from the Remote Visualization Client in the same manor as de-
scribed in Setting User Preferences/Options in the Fluent User's Guide.

File → Preferences...

In addition to editing preferences through the GUI, you can also modify them through the Python
console. For example, you can set the graphics color theme to Gray Gradient by entering Prefer-
ences.Appearance.GraphicsColorTheme="Gray Gradient" and you can enable
Boundary Markers by entering Preferences.Graphics.BoundaryMarkersEnabled="True".
Refer to Python, Scripting and Transcripts in the Remote Client (p. 30) for additional information on
the Python console.

Note:

If you want to know the valid inputs for a certain field, enter Preferences.<Branch-
Name>.<settingName>.getAttribValue('allowedValues'). For example,
Preferences.Appearance.GraphicsColorTheme.getAttribValue('al-
lowedValues') returns ['Workbench', 'Gray Gradient', 'White',
'Black'].

1.4. Python, Scripting and Transcripts in the Remote Client

This section is split into the following parts:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
30 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Python, Scripting and Transcripts in the Remote Client

1.4.1. Python Scripting

1.4.2. Starting and Stopping a Transcript

1.4.1. Python Scripting

Python commands allow you to query and/or modify some of the solution settings in the remote
session, create new graphics objects, and so on. You can also execute commands to initialize the
solution or calculate in the connected Fluent session. A Python script allows you to accomplish these
same operations by loading a script at startup or through the ReadScriptFile command.

There a multiple ways that you can load a Python script into the Remote Visualization Client:

• At startup, using the -R command line option:

flremote -R <scriptName>

• Through the File menu:

File → Read Script File...

• Through the remote client console:

ReadScriptFile(ScriptFile = "filename")

The console in the Remote Visualization Client can be used as a Python 2.7 interpreter. You can import
any standard Python module and install new modules.

Your model in Fluent is stored in a hierarchy of Model State Objects. Model State Objects provide
functionality to access or modify problem settings.

The types of Model State Objects:

• Parameter—lowest level object, which is used for storing strings, integers, doubles, and so on.

• Singleton—container object that holds a set of child Model State Objects (which can be of any
type).

• Named Object—container object that holds a set of child Model State Objects and is used when
many objects of the same type can exist at a particular level. For example, the top-level RemoteSes-
sion object. An instance of RemoteSession exists for every remote session that is created.

A RemoteSession object is pre-populated in the Python console. Settings for a specific session can
be accessed via the RemoteSession["<session-id>"] object.

Method Action
Gets the child names of obj
obj.get_child_names()
obj.child For a Singleton object, it returns the child Model State object named "child".
obj["name"] For a Named Object, it returns the Model State child object with a display
name or internal name of "name".
obj["name"] = For a Named Object, if a child with the name "name" does not exist, create
state it. Set the child object state to state.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 31
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

Method Action
for child in obj: Iterator interface: Allows you to loop through the Named Object children
do_some- of obj and do some action on the children.
thing(child)
if childName in Check if childName is a Named Object child of obj.
obj: do_something
del obj["name"] Delete the Named Object with name "name".
State Access and Modification
obj.get_state() Return the current state of the object. For container objects, a Python
dictionary is returned.
obj.set_state(state)Set the current state of the object. For container objects, state will be a
Python dictionary with the keys corresponding to the child object names.
obj() Same as obj.get_state().
parentO- Same as parentObj.obj.set_state(state).
bj.obj=state
obj.name() Return the internal name of the object.
obj.display_name() Return the user-specified name of the object.
Commands
obj.get_commands() Get a list of available commands that can be executed on the object.
obj.command(arg1 Execute the command "command" with the specified arguments
= value1, arg2 =
value2, ...)
obj.command.help() Print a basic help about arguments for the specified command. If there are
no arguments, nothing is printed.

Important:

Python commands that modify the Fluent application should be read from a script file
using the File/Read Script File... menu option. This allows for each command to complete
before the next command is executed. This is especially important for interdependent
commands. Typing or pasting a series of Python commands directly into the Remote Client
console could result in undesirable behavior as there is no waiting for the previous command
to complete before the next command is executed.

Note:

• Only a small subset of Fluent settings or actions are exposed in the scripting layer.

• While a script is executing, functions like Calculate() will wait for the command to
complete (whereas the calculation is done in the background if the same command is
entered by typing in the console).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
32 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Remote Visualization Best Practices

Sample Script
The following example is a simple script that connects to session 1, reads a case (elbow) into the
server, initializes, modifies the under-relaxation factor for pressure, specifies the number of iterations,
then begins calculating. Once the calculation is complete, it creates and displays a pressure contour
plot of the results.
session1 = RemoteSession['RemoteSession-1']
session1.ConnectionInfo.ServerInfoFilename = "server_info.txt"
session1.Connect()
session1.ReadCase(FileName="elbow.cas")
session1.Case.Solution.Calculation.Initialize()
session1.Case.Solution.Controls.UnderRelaxationFactors['Pressure'].Value = 0.4
session1.Case.Solution.Calculation.NumberOfIterations = 20
session1.Case.Solution.Calculation.Calculate()
session1.Case.Results.Graphics.createChild("Contour", "contour-1")
session1.Case.Results.Graphics.Contour['contour-1'].Field = "pressure"
session1.Case.Results.Graphics.Contour['contour-1'].Surfaces = ['inlet1', 'inlet2', 'outlet', 'wall']
session1.Case.Results.Graphics.Contour['contour-1'].Display()

Refer to the Python 2.7 documentation to learn more about working with Python.

1.4.2. Starting and Stopping a Transcript

The transcript feature allows you to save the output of the main Remote Visualization console into
a file, which includes the operations that you perform through the GUI.

You can start and stop recording a transcript through the File menu:

File → Start Transcript...

File → Stop Transcript

Or you can use the following Python commands entered into the remote session console to accomplish
the same:

• StartTranscript(TranscriptFile = "filename")

• StopTranscript()

1.5. Remote Visualization Best Practices

This section is a compilation of best practices for remote visualization.

• The remote client immediately fetches data from a running (not solving) Fluent server session. However,
when the solver is running the client cannot fetch data immediately. The remote client can only
communicate with the solving Fluent server when the current iteration is over. For example, if an it-
eration takes 5 seconds, then the remote client will take at least 5 seconds to fetch the data after
you make the request.

• While a remote client can connect to multiple Fluent server sessions, for best performance you should
try to have the connected server machines be running simulations that take a similar amount of time
for calculating.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 33
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

• If a machine has multiple IP addresses, you should set the REMOTING_SERVER_ADDRESS to an

outward facing IP address, both on the client and server machines so that they can communicate
with each other.

• By default, both the remote client and Fluent server session have a 3 minute timer for completing a
communication between the two machines. If the communication is not completed within the 3
minutes, then the remote client and the Fluent server will disconnect from each other. You can re-
connect the session. If the communication timeout persists, you can control the timeout by setting
the REMOTING_CONNECTION_TIME_OUT environment variable.

• For better performance, you should disconnect the Remote Visualization Client from the Fluent
server session, if you are not actively monitoring the solution on the client.

1.6. Remote Visualization Client Environment Variables

In certain circumstances you may have to change certain settings that are controlled by environment
variables. Table 1.1: Remote Visualization Client Environment Variables (p. 34) lists all of the environment
variables that are specific to the Fluent Remote Visualization Client and their uses. You can define the
environment variables in the Environment tab of the Fluent Launcher.

Table 1.1: Remote Visualization Client Environment Variables

Variable Input & Use

REMOTING_CONNECTION_TIME_OUT time in seconds
It is used to define the time out for requests from client
to server and vice versa. The default value is 180
seconds (3 minutes). If a request is not completed by
the server within this time, then the client will show
an error.
REMOTING_LOG_FILE <folder path>/<file name> for example,
E:/Testing/remoting/example_log
It is used to define the log file path. If this variable is
defined, then the client and server will write log files.
REMOTING_MAX_MESSAGE_SIZE size in bytes
It is used to define the maximum message size that
the client and server can exchange.
REMOTING_PORTS <start port>/portspan=<num>
It is used to define the port range. If this variable is
defined, then the remote client will try to start the
server within the specified port range.
REMOTING_SERVER_ADDRESS Public facing IP address
It is used to define the server's IP address. If this
variable is defined, the remote client will not identify
the IP address; it will use the provided address instead.
The address will be written to the log file. Define this
environment variable if the machine has multiple IP
addresses or if the Remote Client is unable to resolve the
IP address.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
34 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Limitations

1.7. Limitations
• While a remote client can connect to up to 6 different remote Fluent server sessions at once, a single
server can only have one remote client connected at a time.

• You cannot rename or delete graphics objects from the remote client

• (Windows only) Starting the server is not supported if Ansys Fluent is launched with either the -g or
-gu options from the command line.

• If a calculation is started on the server-side, the beginning and end of the transcript will be missing
on the client-side.

• For any actions sent from the Remote Visualization Client to the server (initialization, starting calcula-
tion, text commands using Send Command to Server), text prompts are automatically answered.
For example, if the question is A report file already exists with this name in the current directory. Create
a new report file? Ansys Fluent automatically answers yes to this question and begins calculating.

• Do not start calculations from the Send Command... option on the client side- they must be started
using the GUI on the client.

• Plot properties (that is, axis and curve properties) are not transferred to the Remote Visualization
Client. Residuals are always plotted on a logarithmic scale and other plots are on a standard scale.

• Report plots cannot be created or edited from the Remote Visualization Client.

• (Linux only) If a Remote Visualization Client is started from a server, the client will close when the
server that launched it is closed.

• Custom mesh colors can only be set in the server, although they can still be displayed in the client.
However, if the mesh colors include realistic materials, they cannot be rendered in the client.

• When running in parallel, mesh partitions can only be displayed on the server. If you have a mesh
object with Partitions enabled and you display that mesh object on the client, you will not see the
mesh partitions due to this limitation.

• Differences between graphics objects on the server and the connected client will not appear if the
displayed options are not available on the client. For example, if you enable Partitions in a mesh
object on the server, it will not appear as having changed on the client.

• Mesh motion preview will not update automatically on the client. Client mesh displays are only updated
when you click Display.

• Symmetry, Mirror Planes, and Periodic Repeats displays are not supported on the client.

• User-defined colormaps are not available for the client. Any objects on the server using a user-defined
colormap will not display on the client.

• Commands that modify the state of the server (such as initialization), retrieve the latest solver settings
when they are sent to the server using the Send Command to Server dialog box. This could result
in, for example, the number of specified iterations on the client changing to match the number of
iterations specified on the server.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 35
Remote Visualization and Accessing Fluent Remotely

• Addon modules are not supported with the remote client. If you have an addon module enabled on
the server, information regarding the addon module will not be shown on the client. For example,
Adjoint residuals will not display on the client.

• The client cannot display more than 20 windows. If you have more items to plot than 20, consider
including multiple report definitions within a single report plot to reduce the number of windows.
You can also deactivate report plots to allow for new plots without deleting the existing plots.

• To reset the graphics window layout in the client you must delete the .flremote.layout file
from the operating system home directory, then close and reopen the remote client.

• Zoom-to-fit does not work on the remote client when the server is iterating. You can pause the cal-
culation to use the zoom-to-fit functionality.

• If the Reporting Interval in the Run Calculation task page is set to a value greater than 1, residuals
plotted on the remote client will respect that reporting interval and will therefore not appear precisely
the same as the residuals plotted on the server.

• Using a virtual private network (VPN) for remote visualization may not work in some situations due
to certain firewall security measures in place at the server site. Any disruption in the VPN and/or in-
ternet connection may cause an unexpected failure.

• The viewing and display options available in the remote client are based off of the dimensions of the
most recently connected remote session. For example, assume your remote client is connected to
two servers, one 3D and one 2D, and the 2D session was connected second. The available display
options in the client will reflect the available options for the 2D session, even if you are trying to
visualize on the 3D session. To remedy this issue, you can disconnect and reconnect the 3D session,
which will make all of the 3D-related display options available in the client.

• If you want to enable or disable the plotting of residuals, you must do so from within the server
session. Sending TUI commands to enable or disable residual plotting using the Send Command to
Server dialog box only controls the status of residual plotting in the server, not in the Fluent Remote
Visualization Client.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
36 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 2: Fluent Icing
The following sections of this chapter are:
2.1. Overview of Fluent Icing
2.2. Known Limitations in Fluent Icing 2024 R1
2.3. Quick Start
2.4. Starting Fluent Icing
2.5. Fluent Icing Graphical User Interface Layout
2.6. Creating or Opening a Fluent Icing Project
2.7. Creating or Loading a Fluent Icing Simulation
2.8. Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation
2.9. Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations
2.10. Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing
2.11. Post Processing with Viewmerical and CFD-Post from Fluent Icing
2.12. Preferences
2.13. File Types
2.14. Appendix
2.15. Launch and Run a Fluent Icing Simulation Using Job Scheduler on a Cluster

2.1. Overview of Fluent Icing

Fluent Icing is a workspace that incorporates the in-flight icing simulation technology of Ansys FENSAP-
ICE with Fluent in a seamless fashion within a single user interface. FENSAP-ICE modules DROP3D for
droplet and ice crystal impingement and ICE3D for surface water runback and ice accretion are accessed
by Fluent as built-in solver libraries. In addition to reaching parity with FENSAP-ICE, Fluent Icing will
leverage sophisticated models of Fluent (turbulence, DPM, shell conduction, VBM, porous media, etc.)
and will become the mainstream icing simulation tool provided by Ansys.

Note:

To leverage the full capabilities of the Fluent Icing environment, the following packages
should be included in your Ansys installation.

• FENSAP-ICE (Required for remeshing and Viewmerical & CFD-Post post-processing)

• EnSight (Required for the Post-Analysis feature)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 37
Fluent Icing

Fluent Icing incorporates the three principal aspects of in-flight icing simulations, airflow, particles
(droplet and ice crystal impingement limits and shadow zones), and ice accretion. It has no geometric
limitations and is applicable to aircraft, UAVs, nacelles, probes, detectors, etc.

Important:

The current version of Fluent Icing exposes only a subset of the full in-flight icing capabilities
and modules of FENSAP-ICE. In this version, the FENSAP-ICE modules exposed are, FENSAP
for airflow (as an alternative to Fluent), DROP3D for particles and ICE3D for ice. More complete
information regarding these modules can be found in the FENSAP-ICE online documentation.

The following types of icing analysis can be performed with the current release of Fluent Icing

• Particles

– Standard droplets, SLD (break-up, splashing and bouncing) and crystals

– Transport of vapor

– Appendices C, O and D icing environments

– Predefined droplet size distributions

→ Langmuir A (Monodispersed) to E

→ Appendix O Distributions

– User-defined droplet and crystal size distributions

Ice

• – Rime, glaze and mixed icing calculations

– Single & multiple quasi-steady shots called multi-shots

– Automatic mesh deformation and remeshing using Fluent Meshing during multi-shot calculations

Note:

The following features are not displayed inside Fluent Icing’s graphical environment. However,
if they are present and set-up appropriately in the case file, they will be supported by Fluent
Icing and its respective solvers.

• Gravity

• Cell Zones - Frame Motion

Translational Velocity is not supported. Moreover, if multiple cell zones are used, all cell
zones must use the same rotation-axis origin/direction and the same rotational velocity.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
38 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Known Limitations in Fluent Icing 2024 R1

2.2. Known Limitations in Fluent Icing 2024 R1

The following lists the current known limitations inside Fluent Icing.

• UDF support in Fluent Icing has the following limitations:

– UDFs cannot access DROP3D and ICE3D solver variables and therefore cannot influence the models
contained in these modules.

– Fluent workspace UDFs can still control the Fluent flow solver in Fluent Icing as long as they are
inside a simulation folder.

– UDFs need to be compiled by opening the Fluent workspace.

– UDF source files need to be present in the simulation directory.

• Linux: Fluent now uses Intel MPI 2021 by default, enabling compatibility with newer platforms.
However, this newer MPI library might cause issues on older clusters (related to the UCX library version
bundled by the system). On some machines, this will cause the Particles solver to suspend execution
in the solver step.

Two workarounds are possible for this issue:

– Use the environment variable FLUENT_INTEL_MPI_VERSION=2018 to switch to the same MPI

library as used in 2022 R1. This should work on all platforms compatible with Intel MPI 2018.

– Use the environment variable FI_PROVIDER=verbs to revert Intel MPI 2021 to an alternate, more
compatible, communication mechanism.

Note:

The FI_PROVIDER option is only applicable to clusters and cannot be used on a single
machine without InfiniBand. The environment variable can either be set globally in the
user account or specified in the Environment tab of the Fluent Launcher.

• In some cases, Fluent might reorder the nodes inside its case file. For instance, this can happen when
a case file, that contains mapped interfaces, is loaded using a different set of CPUs. Fluent Icing will
now detect this change in node order and indicate to you that nodes have been reordered and that
prior icing solutions are no longer compatible with the case file. If this occurs, load the case with the
same number of CPUs that it was saved with.

• Fluent Icing does not support the following mesh types:

– Mesh with polyhedral cells, mesh with adapted (hanging nodes) cells.

– Domains with a subset of cell zones disabled.

– Non-matching interfaces..

– Shell elements.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 39
Fluent Icing

• On Windows, network changes or power saving events might affect the connection between the
Icing client and the Fluent solver. In the case of a disconnection, the session can be relaunched and
the settings/results of the latest run can be loaded to restore its previous state.

• The Fluent / k-omega model and Multi-shot / Settings will display (Beta) options even when beta
mode is not enabled in Fluent Icing. The WJ-BSL-EARSM model is a 2 equations hybrid RSM that allows
the capture of secondary flow motion driven by turbulence anisotropies or to better represent flows
with strong swirl or streamline curvature. This requires prior enabling of the beta options in the Fluent
Solution workspace.

• Post-Analysis is a beta feature that currently includes some important limitations to be aware of:

– Using Post-Analysis with Fluent solution files (.dat.h5) will display some surface variables as
unavailable, and large solutions may have a long loading time.

• If a calculation is paused, due to a temporary disconnection of the license server, the calculation will
not automatically resume when the license server reconnects. In the case of multi-shot computations,
they can be manually restarted using the Set Restart Shot option. (539807)

• Multi-shot

– Fluent report files are not supported when running multishot remeshing simulations. Disable these
report files from your .cas[.h5] files using a Fluent Solution workspace.

Refer to the Known Limitations in Ansys Fluent 2024 R1 in the Fluent User's Guide for other issues that
could affect your Fluent Icing simulation.

2.3. Quick Start

Note:

A complete work procedure, with example datasets and conditions is available under Fluent
Icing in the Fluent Tutorial Guide.

To Set-up a Case for Icing Simulations

• Launch Fluent on your computer. In the Fluent Launcher window, set the Capability Level to En-
terprise and then select the Icing workspace. Set an appropriate number of Solver Processes and
click Start to launch Fluent Icing.

• In the Project ribbon, select Project → New…, choose an appropriate name and location for the
Project file, and click OK.

• Go to Simulation → Import Case and select a suitable case (.cas, .cas.h5) file.

Note:

The case must contain a 3D mesh without polyhedral or adapted elements. The reference
conditions and material type (Air) should be suitable for icing conditions. Use the tutorial
of Fluent Icing to get familiar with the typical airflow, particle and icing settings.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
40 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quick Start

• A new simulation is created. When prompted, choose an appropriate name for the new simulation,
and select Yes. A simulation folder with the chosen name is then created inside the project, and a
remote solver session is loaded with the number of CPUs set earlier and listed in Preferences.

• Once Fluent is started, the mesh is displayed and the Outline View panel presents the available
settings for your simulation. Use Fluent Icing to review the conditions and solver settings:

– Outline View → Setup

Enable the type of simulation to conduct such as Airflow, Particles and Ice. All modules must be
enabled for a complete icing simulation.

– Setup → Airflow

Review the airflow conditions and configure them if necessary.

– Setup → Particles → Droplets

Set the conditions and default settings, which will be used for the particles simulation.

– Setup → Ice

Set the conditions and default settings, which will be used for the ice simulation.

– Setup → Boundary Conditions → Walls→ wall

Set temperature to adiabatic + 10 by using the Temp. Adiabatic+10 button at the bottom of the
panel for each wall subject to icing. Activate High roughness for Icing in Wall Roughness within
its properties window.

• In Outline View → Solution:

– In the Solution → Airflow mode, the number of iterations for the Airflow solver can be configured.

→ Use the Calculate button at the bottom of the Airflow panel.

→ A window will appear. Provide an appropriate name for the new Airflow run. A run folder of
this name will appear in the Project View inside the current simulation folder.

→ The Airflow solver runs and produces an airflow solution.

– The number of iterations for the Particles solver can be configured in the Solution → Particles.

→ Use the Calculate button at the bottom of the Particles panel.

→ A window will appear. Provide an appropriate name for the new Particles run. A run folder of
this name will appear in the Project View inside the current simulation folder.

→ The Particles solver runs and produces a droplet solution.

– Use the ribbon and click Results → Quick-View → Contour → Collection efficiency (walls) option
to view the water catch on the walls, the solution is displayed in the Graphics window.

– In the Solution → Ice node, the total time of ice accretion can be configured.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 41
Fluent Icing

→ Use the Calculate button at the bottom of the Ice panel.

→ A window will appear. Provide an appropriate name for the new Ice run. A run folder of this
name will appear in the Project View inside the current simulation folder.

→ The Ice solver runs and produces an ice solution, which is composed of scalar values on walls
and the ice shape.

– Use the ribbon and click Results → Quick-View → Ice Cover options to view the scalars of the ice
solution as well as the ice shape using CFD-Post.

2.4. Starting Fluent Icing

Typically, Fluent Icing is launched from the Fluent Launcher. In the Fluent Launcher window, select
Capability Level → Enterprise → Icing. Set an appropriate number of Solver Processes and click Start
to launch Fluent Icing.

The Fluent Launcher can be accessed in the 2024 R1 package:

• Windows

From the Windows Start menu (Fluent 2024 R1)

or

fluent/ntbin/win64/fluent.exe

• Linux

fluent/bin/fluent

Note:

Fluent Icing is an application covered by the Enterprise feature set of Fluent. The Fluent
solver will require and consume a license key with this capability level (CFD Solve Level 3).

Any post-processing tool (Viewmerical, CFD-Post, EnSight) also consumes a license key (CFD
PrepPost). When using a single seat license, it is not possible to launch at the same time the
solver (Fluent) and the post-processor. However, when a post-processor is launched from
Fluent Icing, it will share a license context with the solver, and a side-by-side operation is
possible. Additional concurrent post-processors will require their own additional license key.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
42 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Starting Fluent Icing

Scheduler Options

The Scheduler tab allows you to select a queuing system to use. Fluent Icing itself is launched on the
current machine, but the Fluent workspace process can be launched on a remote machine using these
options. The Fluent workspace process is launched later, when creating or loading a simulation within
a project.

Note:

For details on how to start Ansys Fluent, see Starting and Executing Ansys Fluent in the Fluent
User's Guide.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 43
Fluent Icing

2.5. Fluent Icing Graphical User Interface Layout

Figure 2.1: The Fluent Icing Graphical User Interface

The Fluent Icing graphical user interface (Figure 2.1: The Fluent Icing Graphical User Interface (p. 44))
consists of the following components:

• File (Top-Left)

Consists of file management commands (Open Project..., Import Case to Project..., Save Case, Start
Journal..., etc.)

Preferences... → Icing offers options to enable Beta Features and Advanced Settings.

• Ribbon (Top)

Provides access to

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
44 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Icing Graphical User Interface Layout

– Project

→ Project management commands

→ Simulation management commands

→ Workspace management commands

– Results

→ Post-processing commands and quick-view actions

• Project View (Left)

– Initially, the Project panel contains the Project Library, the list of recently used projects. Once a
project is opened, this view contains a list of all simulations, runs and output files contained in
your Fluent Icing project.

→ Simulation Folders

The Project View will display a list of simulation folders, which are created when the Import
Case option is used. If a Fluent session is currently connected, (loaded) will be displayed next
to the corresponding simulation folder name.

→ Run Folders

A list of run folders that have been created will be displayed inside each simulation folder. All
output files of a run will be contained within the run folders.

• Outline View (Center)

This view contains the settings for the currently loaded case. The case is tied to a Fluent workspace
and provides access to:

– Filter Text

Perform wildcard and regular expression searches in the tree using the Filter Text entry box at
the top of the Outline View where you can search and organize a list using a text string. For more
details, see Filtering Lists and Using Wildcards in the Fluent User's Guide.

– Setup

Model and conditions settings for each module of the icing sequence.

– Solution

Execution controls of the solvers.

– Results

Post-processing data for the current Fluent session.

– Post-Analysis

Post-processing datasets loaded from the Project View.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 45
Fluent Icing

• Properties Panel (Below Outline View)

Contains the settings of a selected item in the Outline View.

• Graphic Window (Right)

Displays mesh and post processed data. This window can contain two sub-windows

– Graphics (Fluent live results & mesh)

– Post-Analysis (Datasets loaded from the Project View)

• Plot Window (Right)

As computations are launched, the Plot window will display residuals and other reports already
defined inside the case file.

• Console Window (Bottom-Right)

Displays the progress of your simulation and allows scripting of commands. The Fluent Icing console
is a Python console.

By default, a single console contains both the local console and the Solution workspace transcript.

The Solution workspace transcript is prefixed by | and displayed in gray. If multiple simultaneous
workspaces are connected, the colors and the prefix will vary 1|, 2|, etc.

The Solution workspaces can be set to their own individual consoles by enabling Use Separate
Consoles for Sessions under Preferences → Icing. The color of the Solution workspace transcript,
when combined to the main console, can also be set in the preferences.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
46 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Icing Graphical User Interface Layout

Note:

To send a text command to the solver, right-click the simulation case in the Outline View
and choose Send Command.... Alternately the fcmd(“command”) python command
can be used from the Console to send a command to the current remote workspace.

Layout Menu
The top-right corner of the main window contains a layout menu, this menu allows you to toggle
between different main window panel distributions. Upon startup, Fluent Icing will set up these panels
using to the view that has been previously selected.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 47
Fluent Icing

• Default

Fluent Icing's default view. (Project View, Outline View, Properties, Graphics, Console)

• Widescreen

This option enables a view for larger screens. Outline View and Properties are in separate columns
(Project View, Outline View, Graphics, Console).

• Stacked

This option allows for a more compact view. Project View and Outline View are stacked in the same
panel (Project View, Outline View, Properties, Graphics, Console).

• Console - In Message Window

When enabled, the console is hidden, and accessible through the message window. To access the

message window, click the message indicator at the bottom right of the main window .

The indicator icon changes if there are warning or errors.

When disabled, the console panel is displayed again.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
48 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Icing Graphical User Interface Layout

File Menu

• New Project...

Creates a new Fluent Icing project.

• Open Project...

Opens an existing project.

• Close Project

Closes a project.

• Import Case to Project…

Imports a Fluent case or FENSAP grid file, creates a new simulation, and loads a solver session.

• Save Case

Saves the current settings to the Fluent case file stored in the simulation.

• Save Case as…

Saves the current settings to a new case file. The new case file must be stored in the same simulation
folder and will become the default case file of the simulation. To create a new simulation from the
current case file state, it is recommended to duplicate the current simulation using the Simulation
→ Duplicate Simulation.

• Import File…

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 49
Fluent Icing

Copy a file external to the project, in the current simulation folder. From the file suffix (*.dat,
*.droplet, *.crystal, etc.), the appropriate file style will be associated.

• Read Script File...

Selects a python script file to execute, see Python Console (p. 189)

• Read Run Sequence...

Imports a .csv file that contains a list of runs and executes them in sequence and modifies settings
between runs without any user intervention. For more details, see Run Sequence (p. 198).

• Start Journal.../End Journal

Selects a python script file to write, and to start/stop writing commands, see Python Console (p. 189).

• Preferences…

Opens the Fluent preference window. The Icing window is specific to Fluent Icing. See Prefer-
ences (p. 184).

• Exit

Exits Fluent Icing.

Important:

All solver sessions will also be terminated.

Ribbon Commands
There are three ribbon commands, Project, Simulation and Workspaces.

• Project

– New...

Creates a new Fluent Icing project.

– Open…

Opens an existing project. The Open button is available when no projects are currently opened.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
50 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Icing Graphical User Interface Layout

– Close

Closes a project and returns you to the Project Library. The Close button is available when a
project is currently opened.

– View Options

Provides options to change the display of the Project View.

– Refresh

Refreshes the Project View.

• Simulation

– Import Case

Imports a Fluent case, creates a new simulation, and loads a solver session.

– Load Simulation

Loads the simulation that has been selected in the Project View panel.

– Close Simulation

Closes a simulation.

– Duplicate Simulation

Duplicates a simulation.

– Save Case

Saves the current settings to the Fluent case file stored in the simulation.

• Workspaces

– Solution

Displays the Fluent solver window.

– Options

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 51
Fluent Icing

Settings related to the Fluent solver workspace.

→ Use Custom Solver Launch Settings

When enabled, the Import Case or Load Simulation command will first open a Fluent Launcher
window, where additional settings can be applied to determine how the solver is launched. This
allows you to load the solver on a different machine than where Fluent Icing is open, or to use
a job scheduler to launch the solver on a cluster with a queuing system or with a different
number of CPUs than what is specified as default. This option is also accessible in the Preferences
panel.

→ Show Solution Workspace on Launch

The Fluent solver window will be shown as the solver is launched.

→ Enable Solution Workspace Graphics

With this option enabled, the Fluent window will also have a graphics window.

→ Interrupt Process

This terminates the current Fluent solver and stops any process on the local or remote machine.

• Results

– Dataset

This panel lists the loaded graphical datasets, including the loaded fluent simulation and any Post-
Analysis dataset. The Surface/Graphics/Plots/Dataset - Sequence ribbon commands are applied
on the currently selected dataset. Additional datasets can be loaded from the Project View (View
Results) command or from another disk location by using Load Dataset.

– Quick-View

Accesses the post-processing shortcuts, see Quick-View (p. 148).

– Surface, Graphics, Plots

Creates new post-processing objects. See Basic Graphics Generation.

2.5.1. Using the Help System

Fluent includes an integrated help system that provides easy access to the program documentation.
Through the graphical user interface, you have the entire User's Guide and other documentation
available to you with the click of a mouse button. The Fluent User's Guide and other manuals are
displayed on the Ansys help site, which allows you to use links and search tools and index tools to
find the information you need.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
52 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Opening a Fluent Icing Project

Use the help menu ( ) icon in the upper right-hand corner of the workspace to access its docu-
mentation. Some workspaces even have field-level user assistance that provide information and
guidance about a particular field.

In addition to Online Technical Resources..., and the Product Improvement Program, you can also
obtain information about the version and release of Fluent you are running by selecting the Version...
option in help menu.

2.6. Creating or Opening a Fluent Icing Project

The Fluent Icing project framework is used to organize simulations and runs and to allow their easy
access from within the user interface.

Figure 2.2: Hierarchical Structure of a Project Folder

2.6.1. Creating a Fluent Icing Project

Upon startup, Fluent Icing has no project loaded, and presents an empty project window.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 53
Fluent Icing

Project → New… or File → New Project… creates a new project. A window will appear prompting
you to set a location and name for the new project folder. A project file (projectname.flprj)
and folder (projectname.cffdb/) is then written to the disk in the location selected, and the
new project opens in Fluent Icing. Since this is a new project, Project View remains empty. Once the
project is open, the Simulation commands become available.

2.6.2. Opening a Fluent Icing Project

Project → Open… or File → Open Project… opens a preexisting Fluent Icing project. A window
appears allowing you to navigate to and select a preexisting project file (projectname.flprj).
All simulations contained within the project will be displayed in the left-side Project View.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
54 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Opening a Fluent Icing Project

2.6.3. Project Library

Project Library displays a list of projects that were previously opened in Fluent Icing. Double-clicking
a project in this list opens it.

In the project Library, newly opened projects are added to the Recent folder.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 55
Fluent Icing

The following options are available when right-clicking a given project in the project Library window:

• Open

Opens the project.

• Rename

Renames the project on disk.

• Move to New Folder....

Creates a new folder in the project library, and moves the project to that folder. The project location
on the disk is unchanged.

• Remove From List

Removes the project from the project library list. The project is not erased.

• Remove Invalid Icons

If a project is moved or erased on the disk, it will display as a broken icon, which is an invalid icon.
This command will remove all invalid project references from the project library.

• Open in File Explorer

Opens a Windows file explorer at the project location.

• Edit Notes

Opens the Properties panel for the selected item in the Notes section. The Notes section allows
you to record text notes for a project item. If a project item has a note attached to it, it will display
with a * in the file name suffix. Pressing Ctrl and double-clicking simultaneously also allows you
to display the Notes panel directly.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
56 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Opening a Fluent Icing Project

• Properties

Opens a window that shows the project location in the disk. This window also allows you to write
some notes for future reference.

Project Library Folders

The Project Library will list the recent projects in the Recent folder as ordered by date of access.
Additionally, separate folders (virtual folders) can be created and used to store projects. These new
folders affect only the layout of the project library to help organization. They are not created on the
disk, and projects inside them are not relocated in the disk.

• Create Subfolder

Adds a new folder, allowing projects to be moved in the new folder using drag-and-drop.

• Rename

Renames the folder.

• Remove Folder

Removes the folder (if empty).

• Sort by Name

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 57
Fluent Icing

Sorts the folder content

Library Management

• Drag and drop projects from one folder to another, to move them across categories. The project
is added at the top of the list.

• Drag and drop with the Alt key, to reorder projects.

• The contextual menu (right-click) of folders that contain projects allows you to sort the folder
content by Sort by Name.

Note:

The Project Library from previous releases will be initially imported as a new folder titled
-Imported- in the existing Project Library. Each release uses its own Project Library.

2.6.4. Project Close

To close a currently open project, select Project → Close or File → Close Project…

2.7. Creating or Loading a Fluent Icing Simulation

In order to create a simulation, a Fluent .cas(.h5) file or a FENSAP grid file must be loaded. Fluent
Icing is mainly focused on computing particles and ice simulations from an airflow simulation case file.
Therefore, it is strongly recommended to set-up your Airflow case file in a Fluent Solution workspace
before launching Fluent Icing. If available, an airflow solution (.dat or .dat.h5) can also be loaded
with the case file.

Note:

To set-up a Fluent case file for icing calculations, consult Recommendations to Set up a Fluent
Calculation.

Similar to the Fluent Remote Client, it is possible to add multiple cases, connected to local
or remote solver sessions. However, each loaded case requires a separate Fluent license &
CPUs

2.7.1. Case File Requirements

The Fluent mesh must respect the following properties:

• 3D only

2D Fluent mode is not supported. 2D geometries are supported via 2.5D meshes with symmetry
planes.

• Grids with polyhedral elements or adapted grids with hanging nodes are not supported.

• Grids must not have deactivated zones.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
58 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Icing Simulation

2.7.2. Fluent Solver and License Requirements

When you load a case file into Fluent Icing, the solver launches using the number of CPUs that you
specified. This uses the following license keys:

• CFD solver level 3 (Enterprise)

• HPC tokens linked to the number of CPUs requested

The Fluent Icing application does not consume license keys and can be used to invoke external
postprocessors. A single post-processor can be launched from Fluent Icing and share the license seat
as the Fluent solver. Additional post-processing tools will consume their own license seat.

If multiple case files are simultaneously loaded (see Loading Multiple Simulations (p. 66)), each addi-
tional session will require one additional set of license keys.

2.7.3. Creating a New Simulation by Importing/Loading a Case File

If a new project has been created, Fluent Icing will have no cases loaded and display an empty Project
View window.

A new Fluent Icing simulation can be created by importing (copy) a case file.

Import Case

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 59
Fluent Icing

Select Simulation → Import Case to import a case file.

Note:

Fluent Icing allows the modification of boundary condition types to those supported by
Fluent Icing. A list of boundary condition types supported by Fluent Icing is provided in
Boundary Conditions (p. 93). Boundary condition types can also be modified from the
Solution workspace session that is connected to Fluent Icing. These changes can be viewed
in Fluent Icing by right-clicking any boundary condition type inside the Outline View and
selecting Refresh BC List. Only supported boundary condition types are shown in Fluent
Icing.

After a case file has been selected, a window will appear requesting a name for the new simulation.
Clicking OK will create a new simulation in the currently open project folder. The case file will be
copied into the new simulation folder and will be used as the primary case file for that simulation.

• Load in Solver

If enabled, the solver is loaded with the selected case file. This solver is loaded on your local machine
using the default number of CPU processes. If disabled, the solver is not loaded, and you can choose
to load the solver at a later time.

• Import Airflow Solution (.dat)

This option is visible if there exists a .dat or .dat.h5 file with the same root name as the
.cas(.h5) file. If enabled, the data file is imported alongside the case file.

• Use Custom Solver Launch Settings

This option will show the Fluent Launcher and therefore enabling to configure the number of CPUs,
queuing system and other start-up options for Fluent solver. If this option is disabled, the options
provided in the initial Fluent Launcher will apply (Solver Processes and Scheduler options, if any).

When the case import is complete, the new simulation folder appears in your Project View. This
folder contains the case file that has been imported. If you selected Load in Solver, a solver session
is loaded in the background, and the simulation folder is listed with (loaded) next to its name.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
60 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Icing Simulation

The simulation that is currently selected will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the Fluent Icing
window, next to the currently opened project.

2.7.4. Loading a Simulation

From the Project View, you can load a simulation by right clicking a simulation folder and selecting
Load in Solver, by double-clicking it or by using Project → Simulation → Load Simulation.

Load in Solver

By default, Load in Solver will launch a solver on the same machine where Fluent Icing is open with
your default number of CPUs. Once the simulation is loaded, (loaded) will appear next to the simulation
folder name in your Project View, and the Fluent Icing ribbon will switch to the Simulation tab and
display the Outline View on the left-side panel.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 61
Fluent Icing

The latest solution files will be loaded upon the simulation load, and they will be shown in bold
characters.

2.7.5. Use Custom Solver Launch Settings to Load in Solver

Use Custom Solver Launch Settings

By default, when you create or load a simulation using Import Case or Load in Solver, the Fluent
Icing simulation will load a solver in the background on the same machine and with the same number
of processes you used to launch Fluent Icing. However, it is also possible to use different settings to
launch the solver on a different machine or with a different number of processes.

To do this, go to File → Preferences..., select Icing and check to enable Use Custom Solver Launch
Settings. Alternately, use Project → Workspaces → Options → Use Custom Solver Launch Settings.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
62 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Icing Simulation

If Use Custom Solver Launch Settings is enabled, the Import Case or Load in Solver command
will first open a Fluent Launcher window, where additional settings can be applied to determine
how the solver is launched. This allows you to load the solver on a different machine than where
Fluent Icing is open, or to use a job scheduler to launch the solver on a cluster with a queuing system
or with a different number of CPUs than what is specified in the initial launcher used to start Fluent
Icing. If this option is disabled, the options provided in the initial Fluent Launcher will apply (Solver
Processes and Scheduler options, if any).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 63
Fluent Icing

Inside the Fluent Launcher settings, it is required to enable Dimension → 3D and Options → Double
Precision. It is not possible to use Load ACT, Start Server or Solver GPGPUs per Machine.

2.7.6. Disconnecting from a Simulation

From the Project View, you can close a simulation and its associated solver by right-clicking a simu-
lation folder and selecting Close Solver.

From the Outline View, you can close a simulation and its associated solver by right-clicking a simu-
lation folder and selecting Close Solver.

In both cases, the solver and the simulation will be closed and (loaded) will no longer appear next
to the simulation folder.

Simulation Commands
The contextual menu from the simulation object in the Outline View provides options to interact
with the solver process:

• Show Solution Workspace

By default the Fluent Solution workspace window associated with the background solver is hidden.
In order to access advanced Fluent options it can be displayed by using this command. Enabling
the Preferences → Icing → Show Solution Workspace option.

changes the default behavior so that the Fluent Solution workspace window is displayed by default
when the solver is loaded.

• Enable Solution Workspace Graphics

The graphics in the Fluent Solution workspace window (if shown) are disabled by default, and
neither the graphical mesh display nor the residual curves are displayed in the Fluent Solution
workspace window. Selecting this option enables the graphics of the Fluent Solution workspace
window. The Preferences → Icing → Enable Solution Workspace Graphics changes the default
behavior so that the Fluent Solution workspace window has it’s graphics enabled by default.

• Send Command...

allows you to send a journal, text (Text User Interface) or scheme command to the solver session.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
64 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Icing Simulation

• Close Solver

Closes a simulation and its associated solver.

• Delete

Deletes a simulation.

• Hide Unused Items

This command enables you to hide unused graphics objects in the list. For example, if only a mesh
object has been created, Hide Unused Items will reduce the list of objects under the dataset to
show only the Meshes object. This can be helpful to reduce visual clutter when working with many
datasets. Selecting Show Unused Items will reveal the unused hidden objects.

2.7.7. Duplicating a Simulation

Fluent Icing allows you to create a new simulation by duplicating another simulation.

Duplicate

First, select the simulation folder that you would like to duplicate. Next, select Simulation → Duplicate
Simulation in the Project ribbon tab. Alternatively, right-click a simulation and select Duplicate.

A New simulation window appears requesting a name for the new simulation, as well as other du-
plicate options.

• Set Active Run

This option is only available when duplicating a simulation that is currently loaded. If enabled, the
new simulation will be connected to your currently open background Fluent solver session, and

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 65
Fluent Icing

(loaded) will be listed next to the new simulation folder. Any new run will be saved in this new
simulation folder.

Note:

The new folder becomes the current directory for the Fluent session. However, the current
fluent transcript log file (if enabled) will continue to be updated at its original location.

• Results

– No action

The simulation will be duplicated along with its primary case file. No results or runs will be copied.

– Link as restart

The simulation will be duplicated along with its primary case file. Links will be created to all
current result files from the duplicated simulation. When you load this simulation, the result files
that are linked to will be loaded. The runs will not be copied.

– Copy as restart

The simulation will be duplicated along with its primary case file. All Current result files from
the duplicated simulation will be copied into a Restart folder in the new simulation. When you
load this simulation, the results files in the Restart folder will be loaded. The runs will not be
copied.

2.7.8. Loading Multiple Simulations

It is possible to use Fluent Icing to load multiple simulations at a time. When multiple simulations
are loaded, Fluent Icing will have the following functionality and limitations:

• Each simulation that is loaded will display (loaded) next to its name in the Project View and each
will load to its own background solver session.

• Each simulation that is (loaded) will consume its own license and CPU processes. For example, if
two simulations are loaded with 4 CPU processes each, two licenses will be used and 8 CPU processes
will be used.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
66 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Icing Simulation

• Enable Use Custom Solver Launch Settings to configure the CPUs to use for each session.

• Each simulation that is loaded will have its own object tree displayed in the Outline View, and
(loaded) will appear next to its name.

• If any part of the object tree of a simulation is selected, that simulation will become the currently
selected simulation.

• The name of the simulation that is currently selected will be shown in the bottom left corner of
the Fluent Icing window, next to the name of the project that is currently open.

For example, in the image below, Particles is selected in the Simulation_1 object tree. Therefore,
Simulation_1 becomes the currently selected simulation, and Project01 : Simulation_1 is listed
in the bottom left corner of the Fluent Icing window.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 67
Fluent Icing

• All Fluent Icing user interface operations will function on the simulation that is currently selected
in the Outline View.

For example, if you use the Load command to load an out.dat result file, this result file will be
loaded into memory as the current state of the simulation that is currently selected.

• When running multiple computations in parallel (each in a different simulation session), only the
residual convergence plots for the latest computations are displayed.

• Care should be taken when using Fluent Icing if multiple simulations are loaded to ensure any
operation that is performed is working on the intended simulation.

Note:

For details on the parallel-processing features of Ansys Fluent, see Parallel Processing in
the Fluent User's Guide.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
68 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

2.8. Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Once a simulation is loaded, a simulation tree appears in the Outline View. The name of the simulation
you have loaded appears at the top of the tree along with the text (loaded). Underneath the name of
the simulation, the tree is composed of three main branches.

Setup, Solution and Results.

Setup

Defines the type of simulation, the in-flight icing conditions, the physical models and the boundary
conditions to use in your simulation.

Solution

Defines the solver settings of your in-flight icing simulation including monitoring, initialization and
output files.

Results

Allows post-processing of your in-flight icing results.

2.8.1. Setup

Simulation Type
To start your simulation, you must define its type. Three types are provided when selecting the Setup
branch.

• Airflow

The airflow solver. Two solvers are supported (Fluent and FENSAP).

• Particles

The particle impingement solver, in this case DROP3D. Vapor transport can also be enabled as part
of the Particles solution. An airflow solution is required to conduct this simulation.

• Ice

The ice accretion solver, in this case ICE3D. An airflow and particles solution are required to conduct
this simulation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 69
Fluent Icing

• CHT

Conjugate heat transfer (CHT) module that couples Fluent’s intrinsic CHT with the icing solver. A
converged dry air CHT, particle and initial ice solution are required to conduct this simulation.

Therefore, five combinations of simulation types are supported:

• Stand-alone Airflow simulation

• Stand-alone Particles simulation, with an airflow solution already loaded.

• Stand-alone Ice simulation, an Airflow and Particles solution already loaded.

• An Airflow + Particles simulation. Each simulation is run in sequence.

• An Airflow + Particles + Ice simulation. Each simulation is run in sequence. This combination allows
the simulation of single and multiple quasi-steady (multi-shot) ice accretion calculations.

• Stand-alone CHT simulation, with an Airflow, Particles, and Ice solution already loaded.

Disabling a Simulation Type from the Setup window will hide its relevant settings from the Outline
View.

Airflow conditions are used by all four simulation types and Particles conditions are required for
Ice.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
70 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Icing Domain
A Fluent case might contain multiple cell zones (fluid or solid) or domains. By default, Fluent Icing
will consider all cell zones as the icing domain. To specify the correct fluid cell zones in the multiple
cell zones scenario, enable the CHT checkbox and select the desired ones from the zone list.

For simulations with rotating components like propellers and engine rotors, the Reference Frame
should be set to Rotating. This will activate the rotational frame formulation for the equations of
motion in all solvers, applying a rotation vector defined as revolutions per minute (rpm) along the
axis specified in this panel. If there are static walls in the domain (shrouds, splitters, etc.), they will
have to be given the opposite rotation speed in their respective boundary condition section.

Once the domain is selected, use the Load Domain button to properly set the domain.

• The list of Boundary Conditions is restricted to the zones enclosing the selected domains

• Mesh and nodal solutions used by the Icing solvers will be restricted to the selected domains.

• The Icing Domain selection does not affect a Fluent airflow calculation launched from Fluent Icing.

• Post-processing of particles and icing solutions using Viewmerical or CFD-Post will only be done
on the selected domains.

Note:

Solutions obtained on a different subset of domains cannot be loaded.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 71
Fluent Icing

2.8.1.1. Airflow

The Airflow window defines the airflow solver, the airflow conditions and the direction of the icing
simulation.

General

Choose between Fluent and FENSAP as the Airflow solver. Your choice will appear in the Outline
View as an Airflow branch under Setup. Clicking this branch will allow the set-up of the air prop-
erties and physical models of either Fluent or FENSAP.

Conditions

These are the reference airflow conditions used by all simulation types. By default, its values are
copied from the Reference Conditions of the case file.

The table below connects these variables to FENSAP-ICE or Fluent variables.

Fluent Icing FENSAP-ICE Fluent

Characteristic Length [m] Characteristic length Length
Speed [m/s] Air velocity Velocity
Temperature [K] Air static temperature Temperature

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
72 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Fluent Icing FENSAP-ICE Fluent

Pressure [Pa] Air static pressure (FENSAP Reference Pressure
only supports absolute pressure
(Corresponds to the quantities).
absolute air static pressure
of FENSAP and is the sum
of the Operating Pressure
and the Reference Pres-
sure in Fluent.
Operating Pressure Operating Pressure

Note:

When modifying the Pressure [Pa] in Fluent Icing you are modifying the Reference
Pressure in Fluent while the Operating Pressure remains equal to the original value
from the case file. If you wish to modify the Operating Pressure, you will need to update
the other pressure values at the boundaries or in the Initialization section at the same
time within the Fluent workspace.

Direction

Two approaches to specify the orientation of the reference airflow are supported.

• Cartesian components

The direction is specified by assigning velocity components in X, Y and Z.

• Angle of attack

The direction of the flow is specified via two angles, AoA [deg.] and Yaw [deg.] and its velocity
magnitude by Velocity magnitude [m/s]. The planes on which these two angles are defined are
obtained by selecting the coordinate axis of lift (Lift Direction) and drag (Drag Direction) for a
zero degree AoA. The AoA is defined on the plane consisting of the Drag Direction as the primary
axis and the Lift Direction as the secondary axis, while the Yaw angle is defined on the plane
consisting of the Drag Direction as the primary axis and the result of the cross product of Drag
Direction x Lift Direction as the secondary axis.

For instance, if the Drag Direction is set to X+ and the Lift Direction is set to Y+, the flow dir-
ection will be defined by the X+ axis if you set the AoA [deg.] and Yaw [deg.] to 0 degree. If
the AoA [deg.] is set to 90 degrees and the Yaw [deg.] is set to 0 degree, the flow will be entirely
in the Y+ direction. If the AoA [deg.] is set to 0 degree and the Yaw [deg.] is set to 90 degrees,
the flow will be entirely in the Z+ direction.

Fluent Airflow Solver

If Fluent has been selected as the Airflow solver in the Airflow window, the Fluent window appears
if you click Setup → Airflow → Fluent. In this window, you can specify the material properties of
air and the most common physical models of air used for icing simulations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 73
Fluent Icing

For more information regarding recommendations on how to set-up air properties and physical
models in Fluent, consult Recommended Settings (p. 76).

• Materials

Set the same air properties as the ones coming from the loaded case file (Fluid set to Case set-
tings) or set new air properties (Fluid set to Air).

The parameters shown below Fluid are the Fluent parameters and they only appear if Fluid is
set to Air. For icing simulations, you should set Density to Ideal gas and the remaining properties
using the Recommended Settings (p. 76). Alternatively, this could be done by right-clicking Fluent
in the Outline View and then by selecting Set to Default Air Properties.

• Models

The parameters shown in Models are the Fluent parameters under Setup → Models. Only the
physical models recommended in Recommendations to Set up a Fluent Calculation are provided.
Follow Recommended Settings (p. 76) to select the appropriate models for icing calculations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
74 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

The Other flag is displayed next to Turbulence when the case file contains a viscous model that
is different than the ones supported by Fluent Icing (k-Omega 2-eqn and Transition SST 4-eqn).

Although viscous heating and energy appear as options here to be compatible with standard
Fluent setup, they must be enabled for icing simulations otherwise heat transfer coefficients used
in the ice accretion model will not be calculated correctly.

• Solver

Select which Fluent solver type to use: Pressure-based or Density-based. Refer to Overview of
Using the Solver in the Fluent User's Guide for more information about these solver types.

Commands

Access the following commands by right-clicking Fluent, located in Setup → Airflow → Fluent.

• Set to Default Air Properties

Changes the current material to Air and will set the air material properties to the Recommended
settings for icing simulations, see Recommended Settings (p. 76).

• Set to Default Models

Enable the Recommended settings for models. See Recommended Settings (p. 76).

• Update with Solution Workspace Settings

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 75
Fluent Icing

Use this option to synchronize your Solution workspace or background solver session changes
with Fluent Icing.

Note:

Changes made to Fluent Icing are automatically synchronized with simulation

workspace.

Recommended Settings
When performing icing simulations using Fluent as the airflow solver, the following Material settings
for Air are recommended. These can be automatically set by right-clicking the Fluent node under
Airflow and choosing Set to Default Air Properties.

• Set the Density - Option to ideal-gas

• Set Cp [J/kg-K] to 1004.688. This value is equal to γ/(γ-1)*R, where γ = 1.4 and the gas constant
R = 287.05376 J/kg-K.

• Set the Thermal Conductivity - Option to Constant and set Thermal Conductivity [W/m-K]
to an appropriate value for the condition. To compute its value, refer to the thermal conductivity
equation below.

• Set the Dynamic Viscosity - Option to Constant, and set Dynamic Viscosity [kg/m-s] to an
appropriate value for the condition. To compute its value, refer to the viscosity equation below.

Use the following equations to compute the thermal conductivity and dynamic viscosity, respect-
ively.

Furthermore, the following Model settings are recommended.

– Energy must be enabled for icing simulations.

– The Turbulence model K-Omega 2-eqn with SST is recommended for icing simulations.

– Viscous Heating and Turb. Production Limiter must be enabled for icing simulations.

FENSAP Airflow Solver

If FENSAP is selected as the airflow solver in the Airflow window, the following FENSAP window
appears when selecting Setup → Airflow → FENSAP.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
76 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

In this new window, you can specify the most common physical models of air used in icing simula-
tions.

The most common airflow properties of FENSAP for icing simulations are the ideal gas properties
with constant thermal conductivity and dynamic viscosity as specified in the Recommended Set-
tings (p. 76).

Model

In Fluent Icing, the momentum equations are always set to Navier-Stokes and three options are
available for Energy.

Full PDE, Constant enthalpy and Energy only. Full PDE is the most common option for icing
applications. By default, FENSAP solves the energy equation in non-conservative form which results
in robust convergence especially when the momentum and energy systems are uncoupled. To solve
the energy equation in conservative form, enable Conservative. The conservative formulation im-
proves heat flux accuracy for transonic speeds and above, but may require a lower CFL number to
converge.

For more information regarding these settings, consult The Energy Equation.

Turbulence

All turbulence and transition models of FENSAP are supported in Fluent Icing. The default settings
(SA with no transition) are the most common for ice accretion simulations. For more information
regarding these models, consult section Turbulent Flows and Transition to Turbulence.

Note:

Default numerical convergence settings are applied to all turbulence models of FENSAP.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 77
Fluent Icing

2.8.1.2. Particles

The Particles window defines the type of particles to simulate and the activation of the particle
thermal equation that models the temperature and phase change of particles. The particle thermal
equation would be important when solving flows with hot exhausts, and internal flows in turboma-
chinery components.

Note:

Air/particle momentum coupling is modeled 1-way where air is not affected by particles.
In general, icing cloud particle volume fraction is in the order of 1e-6, making this a dilute
particle flow problem. Therefore, in in-flight icing simulations particle flow computations
are done segregated from the air flow. This simplifies the modeling process and makes
it more cost efficient.

The thermal coupling between air and particles can be significant, and requires 2-way
coupling of the energy equations plus vapor transport. In FENSAP-ICE, this is done by
solving in Air + Droplets mode with the energy-only mode for airflow. This option is
currently not available in Fluent Icing.

Type

Three particle types are supported:

• Droplets

Supercooled water droplets that are still in liquid form at lower ambient temperatures. They
typically accrete ice on external aircraft surfaces.

• Crystals

Ice crystals are solid ice particles of various shapes and sizes that are suspended in air. They
bounce off cold external aircraft surfaces but typically accrete on warm internal surfaces (engine
components) where they can melt and stick.

• Vapor

Water vapor pressure determines the evaporation rate on icing surfaces, which is a strong thermal
flux that leads to ice formation. Water vapor also acts as a mode of energy transport where warm
droplets can shed heat in the form of evaporated mass which can be recovered later in the form

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
78 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

of condensation onto particles. For external icing problems inclusion of vapor transport in the
modeling process makes very little difference in the results.

Vapor transport model features a simplified nucleation model where any vapor mass greater
than local saturation point is considered to have nucleated. This limits the maximum observable
relative humidity to 100% in the solution domain, and clips the maximum vapor pressure to
local saturation pressure. In FENSAP-ICE, thermal coupling with the airflow solver transfers the
released latent heat of evaporation to the air. Since Air+Droplets mode is currently not available
in Fluent Icing, this energy source is ignored.

These particle types can be selected concurrently and therefore can all be simulated simultaneously
within the same Particle simulation.

Enabling a particle Type from the Particles window will create its corresponding branch under
Particles as well as any other relevant setting related to this particle type in Boundary Conditions
and Solution.

Model

• Particle Thermal Equation

By default, continuity and momentum equations of droplets and crystals, and continuity equations
of vapor are always solved when these particles are selected in Type. These are the typical
equations needed to study external in-flight icing physics. For more information regarding these
equations, consult The Particle Transport System and Supercooled Large Droplets (SLD).

To activate the energy transfer between particles as well as their respective phase change, the
Particle Thermal Equation must be enabled. You should enable this option when studying in-
ternal in-flight icing physics, for example, inside engines.

• Reinjection

When either Droplets or Crystals particle types are selected, external reinjection can be solved.
The primary solution will be used to evaluate the mass of particles which splashes (droplets) or
bounces (crystals) at the walls.

• Number of Subdivisions

When Particle Reinjection is enabled, the wall conditions are split into a Number of subdivisions.
A new independent particle run will be solved for each of these subdivisions to account for the
crossing of reinjected particles trajectories.

• Maximum Reinjection Loops

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 79
Fluent Icing

When Particle Reinjection is enabled, reinjected particles can hit the wall several times before
exiting the domain. The particle wall interaction will be solved until no reinjected particle hits
the wall or the specified Maximum reinjection loops is reached.

Droplets
If Droplets is selected as a particle Type in the Particles window, the following Droplets window
appears when you click Setup → Particles → Droplets.

In this window, you can specify the ambient/reference conditions of water droplets, the type and
size distribution, and the drag model.

Droplet Conditions

The main physical parameters describing the droplets are:

• LWC [kg/m3]

• The Liquid Water Content (LWC) is the concentration of water droplets in the air.

• Droplet Diameter [microns]

Spherical droplets are assumed to be of a single, uniform size, usually equal to the median volume
diameter (MVD) of the sample size distribution. In Particles, the droplet diameter is the MVD.

• Water Density [kg/m3]

This is the density of the water droplets. By default, its value is set to 1,000 kg/m3.

• SLD

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
80 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Supercooled Large Droplets (SLD) options allow the set-up of extra physical models when water
droplets exceed a MVD of ~40 microns.

Note:

When particle reinjection is enabled, SLD is automatically selected.

• Appendix Conditions

Appendix conditions are recognized droplet cloud environments that linked ambient conditions
to average droplet sizes and concentrations. Select the appropriate Appendix Conditions drop-
down, then use the Edit... button located to the right of the Appendix Conditions menu. This
will automatically set LWC [kg/m3] and Droplet Diameter [microns] to use in your simulation.

Note:

The altitude in the Appendix Conditions panel is computed from the absolute pressure
defined under Setup → Airflow → Conditions. If the altitude is modified, a new
Pressure [Pa] value is automatically computed and imposed under Setup → Airflow
→ Conditions. However, this is not the case for the boundary conditions. It is therefore
recommended to manually update Pressure [Pa] at the inlet and outlets of your farfield
domain by first setting the boundary under Setup → Airflow → Conditions to Edit....
You can then either copy the new reference pressure inside Pressure [Pa] at the
boundary, or by click the Import ref. conditions button located at the bottom of your
boundary condition panel.

The following droplet appendices are supported:

– Appendix C

In general, valid for droplet sizes below 40 microns.

– Appendix O (SLD)

In general, valid for droplet sizes that exceed 40 microns. To use Appendix O, SLD must be
enabled.

Inside each Appendix panel, ambient conditions such as air temperature and altitude are taken
from the Conditions submenu inside the Airflow panel. In this case, altitude and absolute
pressure follow the U.S. Standard Atmosphere (1976).

Note:

Only one Appendix can be activated at a time. For more information regarding these
appendices, consult Appendix C and Appendix O - Supercooled Large Droplets.

Particle Distribution

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 81
Fluent Icing

Only built-in droplet size distributions are currently supported by Fluent Icing. These distributions
can be selected in the Droplet Distribution pull-down menu.

• Monodispersed

Indicates that a calculation is performed using a single diameter. This diameter is specified in the
Droplet diameter box and corresponds to the MVD.

• Langmuir B to E

If one of these is selected, water droplets are simulated by computing the droplet concentration
and speed for each individual diameter of the discrete distribution, which are subsequently
automatically weight-averaged at the end of the simulation. Fluent Icing always uses 7 droplet
diameters to represent a Langmuir B to E distribution. The various Langmuir diameter distributions
and their corresponding weights are pre-defined in FENSAP-ICE. To learn more about these dis-
tributions and their respective weights, consult Droplets Reference Conditions. The distribution
can be viewed by using the View button on the right side of the distribution menu.

• Custom

An arbitrary droplet diameter distribution can be set by using the View button on the right side
of the distribution menu.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
82 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

The Particles Distribution panel allows you to edit the weight/diameter distribution table.

– Edit: The Edit button is for read-only distributions (Langmuir or Appendix O (SLD)) and permit
to toggle the distribution in Edit mode, the distribution setting is then set to Custom.

– Resize: Change the number of rows in the particles distribution table.

– Import / Export: Reads or writes a .csv file with the following format, for example for the
equivalent distribution of a Langmuir D with a MVD of 20 microns:
Weight,Diameter
0.05,44.4
0.1,34.8
0.2,27.4
0.3,20
0.2,14.2
0.1,10.4
0.05,6.2

The Particles Distribution must be defined as following:

– Droplet Diameter (microns): Diameters ordered in increasing or decreasing order.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 83
Fluent Icing

– Weight (%): Sum of weights adding up to 100%.

If an individual value or a whole column is invalid, it will be highlighted in yellow.

• Appendix O

If the Appendix Conditions is set to Appendix O (SLD), the Droplet Distribution can be either
Appendix O – FAA AC 25-28 or Appendix O (Refined). See Appendix O - Supercooled Large
Droplets in the Ansys FENSAP-ICE User Manual for more details.

The selected distribution can be viewed using the View button, right side of the distribution
menu. The Appendix O (SLD) distribution depends on the environment (freezing drizzle, freezing
rain) or diameter range (larger or lower than 40 microns) selected in its Particles Distribution
panel.

Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
84 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

In this submenu, different water droplet physical models can be enabled to better represent their
behavior for higher Weber numbers. Some of these models are only available when the SLD option
is enabled under Droplet Conditions.

• General Models

– Droplet Drag Model

These models correspond to drag correlations. Four choices are available (Water, Water -Stokes
law, Water – extended Reynolds, Snowflakes). The default drag model is set to Water, which
is the drag model used in almost all our water droplet validation cases. For more information
regarding these models, consult Particle Drag Correlations.

• SLD-Only Models

– Break-up Model

Models the process by which a large droplet is broken up into smaller droplets due to aerody-
namic forces. To enable this model, select Pilch & Erdman, the only break model supported
in FENSAP-ICE. If selected, an extra governing equation is solved for droplet diameter. For more
information regarding this model, consult Droplet Break-Up. This option is automatically selected
when external reinjection is enabled.

– Splashing and Bouncing

Only the By post-processing with three splashing models (Mundo, Honsek and Wright) are
supported in Fluent Icing. These are the most validated models used in SLD splashing &
bouncing simulations, with a preference for Mundo, default Splashing Model setting. They
modify the droplet collection efficiency on the surface by predicting if water droplets bounce
or splash. Droplets that bounce or splash are not re-introduced into the computational domain.
For more information regarding these models, consult Splashing and Bouncing by Post-Pro-
cessing, Mundo Model, Honsek-Habashi Model and Wright-Potapczuk Model in the Ansys
FENSAP-ICE User Manual. If reinjection is enabled, the selected splashing model is used to
evaluate the mass of reinjected droplets.

– Terminal Velocity

This option enables supercooled large droplets to fall without exceeding their terminal velocity.
This option will alter the transport of droplets and therefore its impingement. The direction
and the magnitude of the gravity vector must be specified in the case file. For more information
regarding this model, consult Terminal Velocity. Pay attention to the gravity direction specific-
ation with respect to the mesh coordinate system. An aircraft at level flight usually has a small
positive angle of attack which has to be factored into the gravity direction. An aircraft during
climb has a positive vertical speed component in addition to a significant angle of attack with

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 85
Fluent Icing

respect to that flight direction, both of which should be considered when specifying the
gravity vector.

Crystals
If Crystals has been selected as a particle Type in the Particles window, the following Crystals
window appears when you click Setup → Particles → Crystals.

In this window, you can specify the ambient/reference conditions of crystals.

Note:

Only one drag model of crystals has been implemented and it follows the oblate
spheroidal drag correlation formulated by Pitter. For more information regarding this
model, consult Ice Crystal Drag Correlations.

Crystal Conditions

The main physical parameters describing the ice crystals are:

• Ice Crystal Content [kg/m3]

The Ice Crystal Content (ICC) is the concentration of crystals in the air.

• Crystal Diameter [microns]

Ice crystals are assumed to be of a single, uniform size. In this case, the crystal diameter corres-
ponds of the semi-major axis length of a thin oblate spheroid.

• Crystal Density [kg/m3]

This is the density of the ice that forms the ice crystal. By default, its value is set to 917 kg/m3.

• Crystal Aspect Ratio

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
86 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

This is the aspect ratio (E=b/a) of an oblate spheroid, where b is the semi-major axis length and
a is the semi-minor axis length.

Note:

Icing wind tunnel experiments with glaciated droplets usually lead to aspect ratios
around 1. Increasing the aspect ratio increases the drag of the crystals and make them
follow the air more closely, decreasing their collection efficiency.

• Appendix Conditions

Only one recognized cloud environment type condition for crystals is supported in Fluent Icing,
it is Appendix D (Crystals). If this option is enabled, use the Configure Appendix D… button
located at the bottom of the property panel. This will automatically set the ICC and the LWC to
use in your simulation since Appendix D defines the Total Water Content (TWC).

Inside the Appendix D panel, ambient conditions such as air temperature and altitude are taken
from the Conditions submenu inside the Airflow panel. In this case, altitude and absolute
pressure follow the U.S. Standard Atmosphere (1976).

Note:

Only one Appendix can be activated at a time. For more information regarding Ap-
pendix D, consult Appendix D - Ice Crystals.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 87
Fluent Icing

Crystal Distributions

If Crystals are the only particles type enabled (Droplets are not enabled), the Particles Distribution
panel is available and allows you to configure a Custom diameter distribution.

• Monodispersed

Indicates that a calculation is performed using a single diameter. This diameter is specified in the
Crystal Diameter (microns) box and corresponds to the MVD.

• Custom

An arbitrary crystal diameter distribution can be set by using the View button on the right side
of the distribution menu. Similar to Custom under Particles Distribution.

A custom crystal distribution allows you to define both Crystal Diameter (microns), and Crystal
AR (Aspect Ratio).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
88 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

The .csv file format for Import / Export contains that extra aspect ratio column, such as:
Weight,Diameter,Aspect Ratio
25,100,5.0e-02
25,80,5.0e-02
25,60,5.0e-02
25,40,5.0e-02

Vapor

If Vapor has been selected as a particle Type in the Particles window, the following Vapor window
appears when you click Setup → Particles → Vapor. In this window, you can specify the ambi-
ent/reference conditions of vapor.

Conditions

The main physical parameters describing vapor are:

• Relative Humidity [%]

This option is enabled if selected under Vapor Initialization. This option corresponds to the
ambient relative humidity and ranges from 0 to 100 %. It is defined as the ratio of partial vapor
pressure to the saturation vapor pressure.

• Vapor Concentration [kg/m3]

This option is enabled if selected under Vapor Initialization. This option corresponds to the
ambient vapor concentration.

• Turbulent Schmidt Number

If Advanced Settings are enabled through File → Preferences... → Icing, Turbulent Schmidt
Number can also be specified. The default value is 0.7.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 89
Fluent Icing

2.8.1.3. Ice
The Ice window defines the icing conditions and the icing physical models to use during the ice
accretion simulation.

Ice Accretion Conditions

The main physical parameters describing the ice accretion process are:

• Recovery Factor

The recovery factor is used to introduce the effect of the energy losses due to friction when
computing the adiabatic/recovery temperature at the wall. This is a factor that is used to compute
the convective heat transfer coefficients in FENSAP-ICE for ambient/reference or icing temperatures.
Its default value is 0.9 (~Pr1/3) is observed on flat plate experiments. This is the value used in
FENSAP-ICE ice shape validation cases. On wing and airfoil stagnation points, the value of the
recovery factor is closer to 1. Using 1 instead of 0.9 will increase the amount of water film runback.

• Specify Icing Air Temperature

The Icing Air Temperature [K] is the static temperature at which ice accretion is computed. This
temperature can therefore be different than the ambient air temperature specified in the Airflow
window or inside your inlet boundary conditions. If the energy equation of particles is enabled,
the icing air temperature must be the ambient air temperature specified in the Airflow window.
This option cannot be used in multi-shot computations. It is automatically disabled for multi-shot
ice accretion.

• Relative Humidity [%]

This is the relative humidity expressed in percentage value. For atmospheric clouds, this value
should be set to 100%. If Vapor is enabled in Particles, this parameter is disabled, and ignored.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
90 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

The vapor pressure field computed in the vapor transport model is used on walls when calculating
the rate of water film evaporation.

For more information regarding these parameters, consult Icing Conditions.

Model

The main physical models describing the ice accretion process are:

• Icing Model

The icing models solve the surface water film continuity and energy equations using an explicit
unsteady 3D finite volume scheme (see Governing Equations) in different forms.

– Glaze

Glaze icing model is meant for glaze and mixed type ice shapes including water runback and
evaporation. This is the most comprehensive model that can operate above and below freezing
temperatures and produce rime ice with no water film, glaze ice with water film at 0° C, and
all water above freezing temperature that can form in anti-icing and de-icing scenarios.

– Water film

This model engages the pure water film mode where the energy equation is used to calculate
water temperature instead of ice accretion rate. It is meant for water film runback simulations
at above freezing conditions.

– Rime

In rime mode, no runback is assumed, and the continuity equation simply dictates the rate of
icing. The energy equation is used to compute the below freezing ice temperature.

• Beading

When enabled, the beading model calculates variable surface roughness evolution on iced walls.
The resultant roughness is expressed as equivalent sand-grain roughness. During a multi-shot
simulation this sand-grain roughness affects the convective heat fluxes and therefore the local
cooling effects over iced surfaces. Most importantly, it eliminates the guess work of choosing a
constant wall roughness which would be applied to the entire wall uniformly. You should activate
this model to obtain accurate multi-shot results.

• Heat Flux

This option is only visible if the Airflow Solver is set to FENSAP, and Advanced Settings are
enabled through File → Preferences... → Icing. This option allows the selection of two types of
convective heat flux produced by FENSAP to conduct an ice accretion simulation.

– Classical

Convective heat fluxes computed using temperature gradients on the walls. This method is
2nd order accurate and is the default option when Advanced Settings is disabled.

– Gresho

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 91
Fluent Icing

Convective heat fluxes computed based on Gresho’s Consistent Galerkin formulation. Gresho
fluxes tend to exhibit oscillations when the surface grid is uneven or coarse and therefore it
is less robust than Classical.

• Ice Shedding

This option enables ice stress and crack propagation analysis in single-shot icing simulations.
Currently, it is only meant for rotating components where loads on the ice are primarily due to
the centrifugal forces. With this feature, you can simulate the natural ice shedding phenomenon
on aircraft components like propellers and engine fans. For more information on the model, see
Ice Shedding on Rotating Components.

When enabled, additional ice properties will be listed below that are required for the ice stress
and crack propagation analysis.

Crystals

Bouncing appears in the Ice window if Crystals has been selected in the Particles window.
Bouncing enables the contribution of crystals to the icing calculation, otherwise, Ice assumes that
all crystals bounce off the surface, No bouncing. Two bouncing models are available.

• NTI Bouncing Model

This model determines the amount of crystals that stick based on local surface conditions, such
as impact velocity, crystal size and film height. The model also includes an optional feature to
account for crystal Erosion effects on ice accreting surfaces.

• NRC Bouncing Model

This model calculates the sticking faction based on the LWC to TWC ratio hitting the surface.

Ice Properties

• Ice Density Type

There are five models to specify the ice density in Fluent Icing (Constant, Macklin, Jones Glaze,
Jones Rime and Impact Ice Density (beta)). By default, a constant value of 917 kg/m3 is set. This
value has been used in many ice shape validation cases and it is therefore recommended to use
this option and value. The other density types are correlations that uses the local ice surface
temperature and other icing conditions. For more information regarding these ice density correl-
ations, consult Ice Density.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
92 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

The Impact Ice Density model uses local droplet impact angle and freezing fraction to vary the
density from 917 kg/m3 to 200 kg/m3. Perpendicular impact and low freezing fraction increase
the density of ice which is closer to glaze ice, and the opposite reduces the density resembling
feathery ice observed near the impingement limits of aircraft surfaces. This model is currently
included as beta, pending further calibration and validation.

2.8.2. Boundary Conditions

Partial differential equations are solved for each Fluent Icing module. Therefore, each module requires
a set of suitable boundary conditions. The options shown in each boundary condition type reflect
the simulation type, conditions and physical models selected/enabled in Airflow, Particles and Ice.

Note:

Fluent Icing offers the option to modify boundary condition types to those supported by
Fluent Icing. Only a couple of boundary condition types are currently supported by Fluent
Icing. Boundary condition types can also be modified from the background solver session
that is connected to Fluent Icing (by using Show Solution Workspace on Launch). These
changes can be viewed in Fluent Icing by right-clicking any boundary condition type inside
the Outline View and selecting Refresh BC List. Only supported boundary condition types
are shown in Fluent Icing.

The right-click menu for each boundary offers options to rename, refresh, change type,
and reset to custom settings if needed.

Only a couple of Fluent boundary condition types are currently supported by Fluent Icing.

• Inlets

– Pressure-far-field

– Velocity Inlet

– Mass-flow Inlet

– Pressure Inlet

• Walls

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 93
Fluent Icing

• Outlets

– Pressure Outlet

• Symmetry

• Periodic

In the next sections, a brief description of the content of Inlets, Outlets and Walls is provided.
Symmetry and periodic types do not require a specific set-up for icing applications and therefore are
not describe here.

2.8.2.1. Inlets
Ice accretion simulations require inlet airflow and particles boundary conditions. Four types of Fluent
boundary conditions are supported to simulate the Airflow module of Fluent Icing. Since the
Particles module only supports Dirichlet boundary conditions, particle concentration and velocity
conditions are specified on all Fluent boundary types.

The following figures show each Inlet boundary type supported by Fluent Icing when all particles
type are enabled.

Figure 2.3: Pressure Far Field and Velocity Inlet Properties

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
94 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Figure 2.4: Mass Flow Inlet and Pressure Inlet Properties

Airflow
To simplify set-up of the Airflow solver, it is possible to automatically define the boundary conditions
for all the Inlet types by selecting one of the two options under Conditions.

• Case settings

With this option, inlet boundary conditions are automatically taken from your case file. Therefore,
this is only available if a case file has been set up beforehand with the Fluent Solution workspace.

• Edit

With this option, you can define boundary conditions that are different than those contained in
the original case file or in the Airflow settings.

The following tables map the Fluent Icing airflow boundary conditions to Fluent and FENSAP airflow
boundary conditions when Edit is selected.

Table 2.1: Pressure Far-Field, Mapping of Airflow Fluent Icing Boundary Condition into Fluent
& FENSAP Boundary Conditions

Fluent Icing Fluent FENSAP

Type: Pressure-far-field Type: Type: Supersonic
Pressure-far-field or Far-field
Temperature [K] Temperature (k) Temperature

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 95
Fluent Icing

Fluent Icing Fluent FENSAP

Pressure [Pa] (Absolute) Gauge Pressure Pressure
(pascal)
Velocity mode
Speed [m/s] --------- ---------
Mach number Mach number ---------
Direction mode ---------
Vector ---------
Components
Flow direction X X-Component of Velocity X
Flow Direction
Flow direction Y Y-Component of Velocity Y
Flow Direction
Flow direction Z Z-Component of Velocity Z
Flow Direction
Vector Angle
Alpha (X-Y) [deg] --------- ---------
Beta (X-Z) [deg] --------- ---------

Table 2.2: Velocity Inlet, Mapping of Airflow Fluent Icing Boundary Condition into Fluent &
FENSAP Boundary Conditions

Fluent Icing Fluent FENSAP

Type: Velocity Inlet Type: Velocity Type:
Inlet Subsonic
Temperature [K] Temperature Temperature
(k)
Pressure [Pa] (Absolute) Supersonic / ---------
Initial Gauge
Pressure
(pascal)
Velocity Mode
Speed [m/s] Velocity ---------
Magnitude
(m/s)
Mach number --------- ---------
Normal to the boundary Magnitude, ---------
Normal to
Boundary
Direction
Vector Components
Flow direction X-Component Velocity X
X of Flow
Direction

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
96 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Fluent Icing Fluent FENSAP

Flow direction Y-Component Velocity Y
Y of Flow
Direction
Flow direction Z-Component Velocity Z
Z of Flow
Direction
Vector Angle
Alpha (X-Y) --------- ---------
[deg]
Beta (X-Z) --------- ---------
[deg]

Table 2.3: Mass Flow Inlet, Mapping of Airflow Fluent Icing Boundary Condition into Fluent
& FENSAP Boundary Conditions

Fluent Icing Fluent FENSAP

Type: Mass Flow Inlet Type: Mass Flow Type: Mass Flow
Inlet
Temperature [K] Total Temperature Static
(k) Temperature
Pressure [Pa] (Absolute) Supersonic / --------
Initial Gauge
Pressure (pascal)
Direction mode --------- --------
Direction Vector
Mass Flow [kg/s] Mass Flow Rate Mass Flow
(kg/s)
Flow direction X X-Component of Alpha & Beta
Flow Direction
Flow direction Y Y-Component of
Flow Direction
Flow direction Z Z-Component of
Flow Direction
Normal to Boundary
Mass Flow [kg/s] Mass Flow Rate --------
(kg/s)

Table 2.4: Pressure Inlet, Mapping of Airflow Fluent Icing Boundary Condition Into Fluent
Boundary Conditions

Fluent Icing Fluent

Type: Pressure Inlet Type: Pressure Inlet
Temperature [K] Total Temperature (k)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 97
Fluent Icing

Fluent Icing Fluent

Total Pressure [Pa] (Absolute) Supersonic / Initial Gauge Pressure
(pascal)
Normal to the boundary Normal to Boundary
Flow direction X-Component of Flow Direction
X
Flow direction Y-Component of Flow Direction
Y
Flow direction Z-Component of Flow Direction
Z

Note:

Reference Frame allows the inlets to be defined relative to a cell zone motion or in
absolute reference frame. This does not apply to fixed cell zones. However, if a rotating
domain is defined, the inlet properties (for example, Flow Direction) can be defined
relative to the domain motion.

Velocity Mode allows the use of Speed [m/s] or Mach Number as a boundary condition
when the Inlet is a pressure-far-field or a velocity-inlet.

Normal to the Boundary defines the flow direction using the normal vectors of the
boundary surface. If selected, the Direction options do not appear. This option only
appears when the inlet is a velocity-inlet.

Direction allows the specification of three types of flow direction at the inlet of a pres-
sure-far-field or velocity-inlet.

• Vector Components

If selected, the orientation of the inlet flow is defined by the following unit vector
components, Flow Direction X, Flow Direction Y and Flow Direction Z.

• Vector Angle

If selected, the orientation of the inlet flow is defined by the following angles, Alpha
(X-Y) [deg] and Beta (X-Z) [deg].

• Case settings

If selected, the orientation of the inlet flow is defined by the orientation used in the
case file.

Direction Mode allows the definition of two types of flow direction at the inlet of a
Mass Flow Inlet.

• Direction Vector

If selected, the orientation of the inlet flow is defined by the following normalized
flow components, Flow Direction X, Flow Direction Y and Flow Direction Z.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
98 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

• Normal to Boundary

If selected, the orientation of the inlet flow is defined by the normal vectors of the
boundary surface.

Italic Fluent and FENSAP boundary conditions shown in the mapping tables highlight conditions
that do not have a perfect counterpart in Fluent Icing.

• Fluent

– X/Y/Z-Component of Flow Direction

The Flow orientation in Fluent can be defined by a non-unitary vector. However, when using
Fluent Icing, this orientation must be provided as a normalized vector.

– Total Temperature [K]

When using Fluent as the Airflow solver in Fluent Icing, write the total temperature of a mass
flow or pressure inlet boundary condition type inside Temperature.

• FENSAP

– Alpha and Beta angles

These angles are not supported by Fluent Icing. In FENSAP, Alpha is the angle in the X-Y plane
and Beta is the angle in the X-Z plane. Transform these angles to normalized vector components
and impose them as boundary conditions inside Direction Mode → Direction Vector.

Currently, the Fluent Icing user interface only supports turbulence boundary conditions when
using Fluent as the airflow solver.

There are two options available in the current implementation: Case settings and Intensity and
Viscosity Ratio. When loading a case file, Fluent Icing will automatically set the Turbulence
Specification method to Intensity and Viscosity Ratio and use the constant values associated
with the turbulent intensity and viscosity ratio if they are specified in the case file. Only these
turbulence models are currently supported during the import: K-Omega 2-eqn Standard, SST,
Wj-BSL-EARSM (Beta) and Transition SST 4-eqn. For Transition SST 4-eqn, only the intermittency
parameter constant value is imported.

If any of the above-mentioned conditions are not satisfied, Fluent Icing will set the Turbulence
Specification method to Case settings. The turbulence settings in the case file will be used. You
can verify them from the Solution workspace. If you change Case settings to Intensity and
Viscosity Ratio within Fluent Icing, the turbulence settings that appear in the Fluent Icing
properties panel of will be applied to the Solution workspace.

Note:

Only constant values can be set from the Boundary Conditions properties panel
in Fluent Icing.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 99
Fluent Icing

If FENSAP is selected as the Airflow solver, it is not possible to specify turbulence parameters
at the boundary condition; default turbulence boundary conditions are imposed.

– SA

Eddy/laminar viscosity ratio of 1e-5

– kw-SST

Eddy/laminar viscosity ratio of 1 and Turbulence intensity of 0.01.

– To change these default values, use the text commands, Fluent Journal Commands (p. 195), in
the Fluent Console window. For instance, to change the Eddy/laminar viscosity ratio to 1e-3
and the turbulence intensity to 1e-4, type the following commands:

→ /icing/settings/set flow/turb_eddy_lam_ratio 1e-3

→ /icing/settings/set flow/turb_intensity 1e-4

A zero value to these settings will revert them to their default value. Such text commands can
also be sent from Fluent Icing by using the Send Command action, in the contextual menu
of the case file.

Note:

To learn more about these Fluent Inlet boundary conditions, consult Pressure Far-Field
Boundary Conditions, Velocity Inlet Boundary Conditions, Mass-Flow Inlet Boundary
Conditions and Pressure Inlet Boundary Conditions under Boundary Conditions in the
Fluent User's Guide. To learn more about FENSAP Inlet boundary conditions supported
in Fluent Icing, consult Inlets and Far-fields – 1000-BCs.

Particles
To simplify set up of the Particles solver, it is possible to automatically define the boundary condi-
tions at the Inlet by checking From Ref. conditions. In this case, the Particles window settings
are applied as boundary conditions and it is assumed that particles and airflow share the same inlet
velocity.

The following lists the boundary conditions of all types of Particles when the From Ref. conditions
option is unchecked.

• Droplet Boundary Conditions

Droplet boundary conditions are available if Droplets has been selected in Setup → Particles

– Droplet LWC [kg/m3]

Set the water droplet concentration at the Inlet.

– Droplet Diameter

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
100 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Set the MVD of the spherical particle that represents a cloud of water droplets at the Inlet.
This option is available when the Break-up model has been activated inside Setup → Particles
→ Droplets.

– Droplet Temperature [K]

Set the temperature of the cloud of water droplets at the inlet. This option is available when
the Particle Thermal Equation is enabled in Setup → Particles.

– Droplet Velocity Vector

When enabled, this option allows the specification of an inlet droplet velocity that is different
than the airflow velocity at the inlet. In this case, set the velocity components (Droplet X Ve-
locity [m/s], Droplet Y Velocity [m/s], Droplet Z Velocity [m/s]) of the water droplet cloud.

• Crystal Boundary Conditions

Crystal boundary conditions are available if Crystals has been selected in Setup → Particles.

– Crystal ICC [kg/m3]

Set the ice crystal concentration at the Inlet.

– Crystal Temperature [K]

Set the temperature of the cloud of ice crystals at the inlet. This option is available when
the Particle thermal equation is enabled in Setup → Particles.

– Crystal Melt Fraction

Set the crystal melt fraction at the inlet if the crystal temperature is equal to the freezing
temperature (273.15 K). The crystal melt fraction is automatically set to 0 or 1 if the crystal
temperature is lower or higher than 273.15K respectively. This option is available when
the Particle thermal equation is enabled in Setup → Particles.

– Crystal Velocity Vector

When enabled, this option allows the specification of an inlet ice crystal velocity that is
different than the airflow velocity at the inlet. In this case, set the velocity components
(Crystal X Velocity [m/s], Crystal Y Velocity [m/s], Crystal Z Velocity [m/s]) of the ice
crystal cloud.

• Vapor Boundary Conditions

Vapor boundary conditions are available if Vapor has been selected in Setup → Particles.

– Vapor Condition Mode

Set the type of vapor boundary condition to impose at the inlet.

– Relative Humidity [%]

Set the relative humidity at the inlet. This value is defined as the ratio of partial vapor pressure
to the saturation vapor pressure.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 101
Fluent Icing

– Vapor Concentration [kg/m3]

Set the vapor concentration at the inlet.

Note:

In the case of Inlet boundaries that share inlet and outlet cells, the Particles solver will
identify the cells that are inlets based on the velocity components of droplets and crystals
that have been specified under Particles.

Built-in Inlet type commands are available by right-clicking the inlet type icon in the Outline View
or by pressing on the buttons located at the bottom of the Inlet properties window. Two commands
are currently supported.

• Import Ref. Conditions

Copies the Airflow settings into the Airflow submenu of the Inlet window when Edit is selected
in Conditions.

• Display

Displays the surface mesh of the Inlet type selected in the Graphics window.

2.8.2.2. Walls
Ice accretion simulations require appropriate airflow, vapor and icing wall boundary conditions.
The following figure shows each Wall boundary type supported by Fluent Icing.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
102 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Airflow
In the current version of Fluent Icing, all walls with no slip condition unless otherwise specified in
the original case file. The no slip condition is a requirement for computing heat transfer coefficients
on walls that are to be enabled for ice accretion.

The following table maps the Fluent Icing airflow wall boundary conditions to Fluent wall boundary
conditions.

Mapping of Airflow Fluent Icing Wall Boundary Conditions into Fluent & FENSAP
Boundary Conditions.

Fluent Icing Fluent FENSAP

Thermal Conditions ---------
Temperature [K] Temperature (k) Temperature
Heat Flux [W/m2] Heat Flux (w/m2) Heat Flux
Wall Roughness ---------
High roughness for Icing High Roughness (Icing) / Specified Sand-grain
Roughness roughness

Thermal Conditions allows the specification of three types of energy equation boundary conditions
at the wall.

• Temperature [K]

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 103
Fluent Icing

If selected, specify a temperature at the wall. For ice accretion simulations over a wall, set a
temperature that is equal to the adiabatic stagnation temperature + 10K. This temperature is
used to compute convective heat transfer coefficients in the Ice module. Therefore, the Ice
module will provide the actual temperature profile over the wall.

• Heat Flux [W/m2]

If selected, specify a heat flux at the wall. If all walls of your computational domain are set to
adiabatic conditions (zero heat flux), Fluent Icing will automatically activate EID. EID is a feature
that improves the accuracy of icing calculations for high Mach number flows, important to accur-
ately predict beak ice phenomenon. For more information regarding this model, consult Compute
EID (Extended Icing Data) .

• Case Settings

If selected, the thermal condition specified in the Fluent case file is used. For more information,
consult Thermal Boundary Conditions at Walls within the Fluent User's Guide.

Wall Roughness allows you to specify two types of roughness properties at the wall.

• High Roughness for Icing

If selected, specify a Roughness Height (m) at the wall. By default, Fluent Icing sets a Roughness
Constant of 0.5 in Fluent. This value describes a uniform sand-grain roughness distribution. In
FENSAP, the Roughness height (m) parameter always applies a constant roughness distribution
and therefore the Roughness Constant parameter is not required. For ice accretion simulations
over a specific wall, you should set the roughness height to 0.0005 m which is a value commonly
used during validation exercises. When running a multi-shot calculation, this value will either be
replaced by the roughness distribution computed by the beading model at the previous shot, if
selected in Setup → Ice, or remain constant during the entire multi-shot calculation. For more
information regarding the High Roughness model, consult Additional Roughness Models for Icing
Simulations in the Fluent User's Guide.

• Case Settings

If selected, the wall roughness condition specified in the Fluent case file is used. For more inform-
ation, consult Setting the Roughness Parameters in the Fluent User's Guide.

Rotating Wall can be used to assign a rotation rate. Enabling this option will display the following
rotation settings.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
104 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

If the rotating domain contains static walls such as engine shrouds and bypass splitters, these walls
should be configured to have zero velocity in the absolute reference frame. This can be done by
setting Reference Frame as Absolute and setting Speed [rev/min] to 0 or Relative to Cell Zone
with speed being the exact opposite of the domain rotation rate. This is equivalent to setting walls
as counter rotating in FENSAP-ICE.

If the domain is rotating, then the walls can only have the same rotation axis and origin as the
domain. Otherwise if the domain is fixed, it is possible to apply rotation to walls that are aligned
with any axis and position.

For the steady state physics to be valid, walls set as Rotating Wall must be axisymmetric.

Particles
• Vapor Wet Wall

Among all Particles type, the vapor model provides a wall boundary condition option that allows
the walls to stay at 100% relative humidity and enables evaporation at these walls. To set this
boundary condition check the Vapor Wet wall condition. This condition is usually not used in
icing calculations. It is a useful feature to observe rates of evaporation and consequent vapor
trail computed by the vapor transport PDE.

• Reinjection

When the external reinjection model is enabled, the wall conditions involved in the reinjection
process must be selected.

Note:

It is required to select at least one wall for crystal bouncing.

Ice
Ice is computed over the walls of the computational domain. Two options are provided under Ice.
The first Icing can be used to disable certain walls and exclude them from the computations. This
could be used to enable an aircraft surface like the wing and/or the tail, while excluding the fuselage.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 105
Fluent Icing

The other option, Specify Heat Flux, allows setting a heat flux on a wall to examine its impact on
the ice accretion process. The latter could be used to quickly assess the amount of heat required
to prevent ice formation, for instance.

Icing, just under Ice, is divided into five options:

• Enabled

This is the default setting under Icing and it allows the wall to be part of the computational do-
main for icing.

• Disabled

If selected, it will exclude the wall from icing calculations.

• Enabled - Sliding

If selected, the wall will be included in the solution of surface water film continuity and energy
equations, but ice displacement will be deactivated. The wall will act as a sliding support surface
for adjoining surfaces that could displace and slide against it following a contact boundary con-
dition.

• Disabled - Sliding

If selected, it will remove this wall from the continuity and energy system while using it as a
sliding support surface for adjoining ice accreting walls to slide against. A typical use of this option
is the handling of hub and shroud walls of an engine stator while the blade accretes ice.

Note:

The examples below illustrate how the options of Disabled, Disabled-Sliding, and
Enabled are affecting the results of icing calculations at the corner of the shroud and
a guide vane attached to it. Figure 2.5: Wall Disabled (p. 107) shows the case where
the shroud is disabled, and ice is only allowed to grow on the blade. This anchors the
blade/shroud intersection nodes in place, and forces a tight concave space to form
between the ice and the shroud. This can become a problem for multi-shot icing
simulations if the remeshing algorithm cannot establish a good quality mesh at this
region. Figure 2.6: Wall Disabled-Sliding (p. 107) shows the case where the shroud is
set to Disabled-Sliding, which allows the blade/shroud intersection nodes to slide
across the shroud surface. This method has better success in remeshing during multi-
shot icing simulations. Figure 2.7: Wall Enabled for Icing (p. 108) shows case where both
the shroud and the blade are Enabled for icing calculations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
106 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Figure 2.5: Wall Disabled

Figure 2.6: Wall Disabled-Sliding

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 107
Fluent Icing

Figure 2.7: Wall Enabled for Icing

• Sink

If selected, liquid water film will not be allowed to enter the wall and will act as an exit.

Built-in wall commands are available by right-clicking the Wall icon in the Outline View or by
pressing on the buttons located at the bottom of the Wall properties window. Two commands are
currently supported.

• Temp. Adiabatic+10

Sets a temperature to the wall that is equal to the adiabatic stagnation temperature inside the
Airflow settings panel, plus 10 K. In this manner, inside the Airflow submenu of the Wall prop-
erties panel, the Thermal Conditions will automatically switch to Temperature and the appro-
priate temperature will be shown next to Temperature [K].

• Display

Displays the surface mesh of the wall selected in the Graphics window.

2.8.2.3. Outlets
Pressure Outlet is currently the only outlet type supported by Fluent Icing.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
108 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Three fields can be modified through the properties window of that boundary condition. The Ref-
erence Frame, Backflow Total Temperature [K] and Pressure [Pa]. Reference Frame allows the
outlets to be defined relative to a cell zone motion or in absolute reference frame. This does not
apply to fixed cell zones. However, if a rotating domain is defined, the outlet properties can be
defined relative to the domain motion. Temperature then controls the backflow air properties when
reversed flow occurs and pressure corresponds to the absolute pressure at the outlet, the absolute
pressure is the result of adding the operating pressure to the gauge pressure in Fluent. The absolute
pressure is equal to the static pressure variable used in FENSAP to specify a subsonic outlet.

Note:

If more Pressure Outlet settings are required, for instance more settings are needed to
define flow reversal conditions at the outlet, you can add them inside the original case
file or through the Fluent session connected to Fluent Icing.

If turbomachinery domains such as fan and compressor rows are being simulated, Radial
Equilibrium option is recommended for more realistic physics. This can be enabled in
the Fluent workspace for that particular boundary, and in Fluent Icing the boundary
condition should be set to Case settings. If Conditions is set to Edit, it can be reverted
to Case settings through the right-click menu.

Built-in outlet type commands are available by right-clicking the outlet type icon in the Outline
View or by pressing on the buttons located at the bottom of the Outlet properties window. Two
commands are currently supported.

• Import Ref. Conditions

Copies the Airflow settings into the Airflow submenu of the Outlet.

• Display

Displays the surface mesh of the Inlet type selected in the Graphics window.

2.8.3. Solution
In Solution, you will define the solver settings of your Fluent Icing simulation including monitoring,
initialization and output files for each of its Fluent Icing modules (Airflow, Particles and Ice). These

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 109
Fluent Icing

solver settings will allow you to conduct the five simulation scenarios mentioned in Setup (p. 69) as
long as they have been properly selected in the Setup window.

The Solution window provides the multi-shot and general settings for all Fluent Icing modules.

• Multi-shot

The Multi-shot menu under Solution is only available when all three solver types have been selected
in the Setup window. See Multi-Shot (p. 137). The total time of icing will be the sum of individual
icing times set for each shot. By default, this is a uniform distribution and the per-shot time is
entered in Solution → Ice. The shot time distribution can be modified by updating Settings from
Uniform to Custom (beta). It is possible to restart from a step of a shot, by right-clicking an already
partly or fully completed shot on the project panel and choosing Set Restart Shot:

• Global Settings

This submenu sets the common output and monitoring settings of all Fluent Icing modules.

– Log Verbosity

Controls the amount of convergence and execution information displayed (Minimal, Complete,
Detailed) inside the Console window. Its content varies for each Fluent Icing module. Minimal
is the default and will display a simplified convergence log (one line per iteration).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
110 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

– Plotting

Controls plotting of the residuals and any report set in the case file. Three options are supported.

→ Default will display the residual curves and any reports in the Plot window at every iter-
ation.

→ Disabled will disable all plotting.

Fluent Icing components shown under Solution in the Outline View window are accompanied by
an icon to their left. This icon reports if a solution file has been loaded or computed. The following
table shows these icons.

Airflow Particles Ice

Solution not loaded or
computed
Solution loaded or
computed
Only marked as
loaded/computed if all
the currently active
phases (droplet/crys-
tal/vapor) are available.

To run a multi-shot calculation, first complete the set-up of all the Fluent Icing modules under Solution,
then right-click the Solution icon in the Outline View and select Run Multi-Shot.

2.8.3.1. Airflow
The Airflow window under Solution allows the configuration of the airflow solver, monitor and
output parameters. Depending on the Airflow solver selected in Setup, the Airflow window will
show either Fluent or FENSAP parameters. Only steady-state airflow simulations are supported in
Fluent Icing.

Fluent Airflow
In this window, the Number of Iterations to run a steady calculation is supported.

• Time Integration

Select the solution control method used by Fluent:

– Case settings: Uses the current settings from the case file.

– Pseudo Time: Sets the solution control to Pseudo Time method with the option to set the
time scale factor.

– CFL: Sets the solution control to CFL method with the option to set the Courant Number.

– Steering: Sets the solution control to Steering method with the option to set the Initial
Courant Number, the Maximum Courant Number, First to High Order Blending [%] and

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 111
Fluent Icing

the Explicit Under-Relaxation Factor. (Steering is only supported for the Density-based
solver)

Note:

Pseudo Time is the recommended time integration scheme, with a time scale factor
of 0.001 – 0.01. If using CFL, it is recommended to not exceed a CFL of 10.

• Initialization

Select the initialization method to be used by Fluent:

– Case settings: Uses the current initialization settings from the case file.

– Standard: Performs the standard initialization by setting the Initial Values to the options below.

→ From Ref. Conditions: The reference conditions defined in Setup → Airflow → Conditions.

→ From Inlet BC: Values coming from an inlet boundary condition.

→ Edit: User-defined initial values.

– Hybrid: Performs hybrid initialization.

→ Standard hybrid initialization of Fluent which computes an area weighted average of surface
temperatures and applies it to the whole domain.

→ In Fluent Icing, this behavior is modified by patching the volume with the reference temper-
ature after hybrid initialization is complete.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
112 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

– FMG: Performs the FMG initialization with the specified FMG Courant Number.

Note:

If FMG residuals are not decreasing, the initial solution will not be ideal to begin
with. You can try lower values for the FMG Courant Number such as 0.2 to improve
convergence.

See Fluent User's Guide in the Fluent User's Guide for more information about different initialization
methods.

Moreover, it is also possible to specify the type solution output by selecting one of the three options
inside Post-processing Output.

• Disabled

Default option. A Fluent solution (.dat, .dat.h5) is written and can be used to restart sub-
sequent computations.

• Enabled

A Fluent solution and Post solution (.dat.post) are written.

• Post-Processing only

Only a Post solution is written. No restart solution is written.

The Post solution file is used for post-processing purposes only. It can be read by the Post-Analysis
module, EnSight and CFD-Post. It does not contain all the information that it is necessary to resume
a calculation and therefore it is considered to be lightweight to load when compared to a .dat
or .dat.h5 file. When selecting Enabled or Post-Processing only in Write Post-processing Files,
several options are provided in order to define the content of the Post solution.

• Zones

– All Volumes

The post solution file is written using the full 3D domain.

– Selected Surfaces

Only selected surfaces (in the Surface Selection option below) are written to the file, leading
to smaller file sizes but with no volumetric information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 113
Fluent Icing

• Post Variable List

Select the list of variables written to the post file. Three options are available.

– Minimal

Velocity, Density, Temperature, Pressure, Heat Flux and Shear Stress fields are written.

– Default

Adds Mach Number, Viscosity, Thermal Conductivity, Cp, Wall Distance, Total Pressure, Total
Temperature, Effective Viscosity and Pressure Coefficient to the post file.

– Custom

Select the variables to be written to the post file from the list of variables that are available in
Fluent post processing dataset.

An additional option, Roughness from Beading, is available in this window when an Ice solution
with beads has been previously run and loaded to your Fluent Icing simulation.

By enabling this option, the roughness distribution computed by the beads model will be applied
as a boundary profile on all walls where the High roughness for Icing model has been enabled.
The Roughness Height [m] of these walls will be updated to ICE3D Roughness file, which uses
the ROUGHNESS boundary profile, the sand-grain beads profile, computed by Ice.

FENSAP Airflow Window

In this case, the Airflow window contains the most common steady-state solver and monitoring
settings of the FENSAP airflow solver.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
114 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

The Time Integration submenu allows the set-up of the pseudo time step number, CFL, as well
as the Number of Iterations to use during the simulation. If convergence problems are encountered,
reduce the CFL or activate the CFL Ramping Iterations option and specify a number of CFL
Ramping Iterations. This option gives access to a mechanism that linearly increases the CFL
number from 1, at the start of the simulation, to its full value at the end of the CFL Ramping Iter-
ations.

The Output submenu allows the creation of numbered solution files and of the most common
monitoring variables to track in order to guarantee full convergence of the FENSAP solver.

• Forces

By default, No lift and drag coefficients are outputted during the simulation. However, if Forces
is set to Drag-Custom direction, the resultant lift, drag and moment coefficients (on all walls)
will be monitored during the simulation. These aerodynamic coefficients are computed using
the Conditions defined in Setup → Airflow and the following parameters.

– Lift Axis

Provide the positive orientation of lift along the positive or negative X, Y and Z axis. FENSAP
will obtain its true direction based on this information and the drag direction.

– Drag – X, Drag – Y, Drag – Z

Provide the non-dimensional direction of drag in Cartesian coordinates.

– Reference Area

Specify a reference area in m2 that is used to compute the aerodynamic coefficients.

– Moment – X, Moment – Y, Moment – Z

Specify a point in the computational domain that will act as the moment center to compute
the aerodynamic moment coefficient.

• Monitor - Total Heat

If selected, monitors the total convective heat flux using all the walls of the computational domain.

• Monitor -Mass Flow

If selected, monitors the mass inflow, outflow and deficit of air inside the computational domain.

• Monitor -Heat Flux

If selected, monitors the total enthalpy inflow, outflow and deficit of the computational domain.

The Roughness from Beading is an additional option is available in this window when an Ice
solution with beads has been previously run and loaded to your Fluent Icing simulation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 115
Fluent Icing

By enabling this option, the roughness distribution computed by the beads model will be applied
as a boundary profile on all walls where the High roughness – Icing model has been enabled. The
Roughness Height (m) of these walls will be updated to ICE3D Roughness file, which uses the
ROUGHNESS boundary profile, sand-grain beads profile computed by Ice.

Airflow Commands

Built-in airflow commands are available by right-clicking the Airflow icon under Solution in the
Outline View. The following commands are currently supported.

• Initialize

Executes an initialization of the airflow solver using the Initialization settings of Fluent. Initialize
is not available for FENSAP. Initialize will also remove the green check mark next to the Airflow
module icon and unbold the current airflow solution in the Project View.

• Calculate

Launches the simulation of the Airflow module. If a solution is loaded, the simulation will con-
tinue from that loaded solution. Otherwise, Calculate will first Initialize and then use this solution
to solve the PDEs of the Airflow module.

If a run has already been performed in the simulation, a window will appear asking if you would
like to continue the current run. If Yes, the calculation will continue in the current run folder.
Once complete, a new solution file will overwrite the previous solution.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
116 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

If No is selected, a window appears asking for a Name of the new run. If OK is selected, a new
run folder is created inside the simulation folder. This new folder contains a run settings file and
all future solution files will be written in it.

If a solution is loaded in memory, the simulation will use it as an initial solution. Otherwise, Cal-
culate will first Initialize and then compute the Airflow module.

Once the Airflow module begins to run, (running) will be displayed next to the Airflow module
in the object tree. This state will change to (ended) if the Airflow module completes properly,
or (interrupted) if the run is interrupted.

• Interrupt

Stops the execution of the airflow solver at the end of the next iteration. The solution is kept in
memory. This option is only available if Airflow is currently running.

• Load

Loads an airflow solution file into memory.

• Save

Saves the airflow solution that’s in memory to a file.

• Reset

Removes the airflow solution from memory. Reset will also remove the green check mark next
to the Airflow icon and unbold the current Airflow solution in the Project View.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 117
Fluent Icing

2.8.3.2. Particles

The Particles panel contains the most common steady-state solver, initialization and monitoring
settings of the Fluent Icing Particles solver, DROP3D.

The Run Settings submenu allows the set-up of the Number of Iterations to conduct during the
iterative simulation. A different Reinj. Number of Iterations is used to solve the reinjection loops.

The Solver submenu is divided into three points, the pseudo time step, the artificial viscosity and
the convergence criteria.

• CFL

The recommended values for the CFL range between 10 and 20. If convergence problems are
encountered, reducing the CFL might help.

• Artificial Viscosity Coef.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
118 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

The Particles module uses the Streamline upwind (SU) technique to stabilize the PDEs. This scheme
is complemented with a user-set crosswind diffusion. Its default value is 1e-5 and has been ex-
tensively used in a large number of validation cases. In the case of structured grids, you can in-
crease this value to 1e-4 if you experience oscillations of LWC within the shadow zone. Its impact
to collection efficiency is generally minimal. Crosswind dissipation scales with mesh size, similar
to the upwind scheme, and is lower with finer grids.

• Residual Cut-Off

The Residual cut-off is the stopping criterion of the overall residual of the Particles governing
equations. Lower the default value of 1e-8, especially if you are interested in capturing shadow
zones.

• Change in Total Beta

This parameter is the difference in total collection efficiency of all walls between two consecutive
iterations. It is therefore a measure of convergence of the number of particles (droplets or crystals)
that hit the walls of the computational domain. Lower the default value of 1e-10 if you see dif-
ferences in collection efficiency between printouts.

Note:

Both the Residual Cut-Off and Change in Total Beta thresholds can be increased a
few orders to let DROP3D complete its runs quicker. Using 1e-6 and 1e-8 respectively
can reduce the overall runtime significantly, while producing similar collection efficiency
results. This is especially effective when running particle size distributions with large
number of bins. You should verify the difference at least on a few sample cases before
incorporating higher thresholds in your workflow.

The Initialization submenu allows the initialization of the particle concentration and particle velocity
fields.

• Velocity

Two initialization choices are offered for the velocity field.

– From Airflow Conditions

If selected, the Speed and Direction inside of Setup → Airflow are used as the initial velocity
of all types of particles at all nodes in the computational domain.

– Cartesian components

If selected, specify the velocity components (X velocity [m/s], Y velocity [m/s] and Z velocity
[m/s]) that will be assigned as the initial velocity for all particles inside the computational do-
main.

• Dry Initialization

If selected, sets the particle concentration (LWC, ICC or Vapor Humidity) to zero everywhere inside
the computational domain except at the inlet, where Particles boundary conditions are defined.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 119
Fluent Icing

Otherwise, the Particles concentration specified in Setup → Particles will be used to initialize
the computational domain.

The Output submenu contains the following options:

• Distribution Restart Mode

Select this option to initialize the solution fields of a droplet size with the results from the previ-
ously solved size. Depending on the case, this can decrease or increase the number of iterations
needed to converge the droplet equations. For purely external flows, restarting from the previous
diameter can be beneficial in reaching total beta convergence quicker. For flows with internal
cavities, restarting from a previous solution may lead to some incorrect LWC that would have to
be cleared with many iterations before reaching convergence. This is a case specific setting that
should be studied before incorporating into the workflow of an analysis.

• Save Distribution Solutions

Select this option if you would like to save all the solutions of a distribution simulation. The
solutions will be numbered from 1 to the total number of particles sizes that define this distribu-
tion. The number 1 will be assigned to the largest particle size and the last number to the smallest
particle size.

Note:

This option is only available when a Particles or Crystal Distribution is selected under
Setup → Particles → Droplets → Droplet Distribution, or Particles → Crystals →
Crystal Distribution.

The folder structure for a particles distribution run will contain one result per diameter. The last
result, not within a folder, is the combined solution obtained by mass-averaging the results of
individual droplet size solutions.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
120 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

The Monitors submenu allows the tracking of convergence of surface integral quantities such as
collection efficiency, mass deficit and vapor condensation.

• Total Beta

– If selected, monitors the total collection efficiency computed on all walls of the computa-
tional domain.

• Change in Total Beta

– If selected, monitors the difference in total collection efficiency of all walls between two con-
secutive iterations.

• Mass Deficit

– If selected, monitors the mass inflow, outflow and deficit of particles inside the computational
domain.

• Vapor Condensation

– If selected, monitors the total vapor condensation on all the walls of the computational domain.

Note:

In a particle distribution simulation, each particle size simulation is executed in sequence.

The residuals graph is displayed at the end of the execution and will present a summary
of the convergence of each calculation.

The Global - Particles residual graph is a combined plot of all the residual plots in a
single sequence.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 121
Fluent Icing

Particles Commands

Built-in particles commands are available by right-clicking the Particles icon under Solution in the
Outline View. The following commands are currently supported.

• Calculate

Executes the Particles module.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
122 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

If a run has already been performed in the simulation, a window will appear asking if Calculate
should continue in the current run folder. If Yes is selected, the calculation will continue in the
current run folder, and once complete, a new solution file will overwrite the previous solution.

If No is selected, a window appears asking for a Name of the new run. If OK is selected, a new
run folder is created inside the simulation folder. This new folder contains a run settings file and
all future solution files will be written in it.

If a solution is loaded before Calculate is selected, the simulation will continue from that loaded
solution. Otherwise, Calculate will first initialize and then solve Particles.

Once the Particles module begins to run, (running) will be displayed next to the Particles in
the object tree. This state will change to (ended) if the Particles module completes properly, or
(interrupted) if the run is interrupted.

• Interrupt

Stops the execution of the particles solver at the end of the next iteration. The solution is kept
in memory.

• Load Droplets

Loads a particles droplets solution, with suffix .droplet, in memory.

• Load Crystals

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 123
Fluent Icing

Loads a particles crystals solution, with suffix .crystal, in memory.

• Load Vapor

Loads a particles vapor solution, with suffix .vapor, in memory.

• Save Droplets

Saves only the water droplet solution files of your Particles simulation. This droplet solution file
will contain the suffix .droplet.

• Save Crystals

Saves only the ice crystal solution file of your Particles simulation. The crystal solution file will
contain the suffix .crystal.

• Save Vapor

Saves only the vapor solution file of your Particles simulation. The vapor solution file will contain
the suffix .vapor.

• Reset

Unloads the Particles solution from memory. Reset will also remove the green check mark next
the Particles icon and unbold the current Particles solution in the Project View.

• Hide Unused Items

This command enables you to hide unused graphics objects in the list For example, if only a
Mesh object has been created, Hide Unused Items will reduce the list of objects under the
dataset to show only the Meshes object. This can be helpful to reduce visual clutter when
working with many datasets. You can select Show Unused Items to reveal the unused hidden
objects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
124 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

2.8.3.3. Ice

The Ice window contains the most common solver settings of ICE3D to obtain the new 3D compu-
tational domain over the ice shape.

The Time submenu allows the set-up of the Total Time of Ice Accretion [s] and the type of time
step.

• Total Time of Ice Accretion [s]

This is the icing time per shot.

• Automatic Time Step

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 125
Fluent Icing

By default, this option is checked. The stable time step for an explicit time integration scheme
depends on fluid speed and local mesh sizing. For time accurate problems, all control volumes
must use the same time step. Automatic time stepping removes the guess work of specifying a
stable time step. This option computes the optimal time step for each grid/film speed combination
and largely reduces your computational time. If disabled, a Time step [s] option appears, where
you can define a stable time step for the Ice simulation. For components with extremely small
mesh size (turbomachinery blade tip section) the stable time step can be as low as 1e-6 seconds
or less. If the time step is indeed too large for a certain mesh element, then a film flux limiting
will be applied to explicitly retard the rate of water mass flow in that region to maintain stability.

• Disable EID Preprocessing

This option is visible if Advanced Settings is enabled through File → Preferences... → Icing.
Extended Icing Data (EID) preprocessing extracts heat transfer coefficients (HTC) from a flow
solution with adiabatic walls using a proprietary technology. In some scenarios related to adia-
batic walls (see Boundary Conditions (p. 93), Inlets (p. 94), Airflow (p. 72) and Heat Flux
Ice (p. 90)), the EID pre-processing will be executed automatically, prior to computing ice accretion.
If this option is enabled, the EID preprocessing will be skipped. If the EID was already computed
for the current airflow, the Ice simulation will use this EID solution. If EID does not exist, the Ice
simulation will use the solution without the pre-processing, and heat transfer coefficients will be
incorrect.

Note:

The EID preprocessing is mandatory for simulations incorporating vapor transport.

The Mesh submenu allows the set-up of the numerical method to represent the volumetric mesh
around the new ice shape. Two approaches are offered under Remeshing.

• Disabled

This option allows the update of the volumetric mesh by displacing/deforming the walls and the
surrounding cells of the original mesh to account for the new ice shape. In this case, the mesh
topology of the original mesh is preserved. However, even if this method is significantly faster
than remeshing, not updating the grid topology has several limitations. Since the number of
nodes remains constant, this method tends to coarsen the surface grid as ice accretes. In a multi-
shot simulation, due to fixed mesh topology between shots, this method is not very effective in
capturing complex glaze ice shapes. Due to these limitations, this approach often requires
manual remeshing after a certain number of shots to maintain appropriate mesh and solution
quality.

• Fluent Meshing

Using Fluent Meshing, this option allows the automatic reconstruction of a volumetric unstructured
mesh, composed of tetrahedra and prisms, around the iced surface while preserving the other
boundaries of the original mesh. A surface mesh is first obtained around the new iced surface
using a wrapping approach. Then, a volumetric mesh is constructed around the wrapped surface.
Therefore, when this option is selected, wrapping and remeshing parameters are available under
the Remeshing submenu and control the surface mesh resolution and the mesh quality of the

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
126 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

volumetric mesh around the iced surface. To activate remeshing with Fluent Meshing, click Set-
up remeshing at the bottom of the Ice panel.

Note:

– Wrapping and remeshing parameters set in the Remeshing submenu remained

fixed when conducting multi-shot calculations. As ice builds up, the mesh size
at each shot increases and more computing time and memory is required to
solve the airflow, particle, and ice solvers. Special attention should be given to
these meshing parameters to obtain cost-effective multi-shot solutions at each
shot. To take into account the increase in computing cost per shot, one could
gradually increase the number of cores per shot. This can be done by stopping
and restarting your multi-shot calculations. Refer to Multi-Shot (p. 137). Altern-
atively, one could start a multi-shot simulation with a larger number of cores
than would be typically required. Furthermore, different airflow solvers may
require different mesh settings to produce mesh independent results, and these
settings can be case specific. Therefore, restarting multi-shot calculations will
also allow you to tailor the convergence settings of the airflow and droplet
solvers to improve the quality and the precision of the overall multi-shot simu-
lation.

– Walls should be separated into different zones at corners or joints. Doing so

will ensure that sharp edges of the geometrical model will be preserved after
wrapping. For example, if the tip cap of a wing is placed in the same boundary
family as the rest of the wing, the corners will be smoothed during the wrapping
operation, which should be avoided.

The Remeshing submenu is visible when Fluent Meshing is selected in the Mesh submenu. This
submenu allows the set-up of the wrapping and meshing parameters to generate the mesh around
the iced surface. Fluent Meshing performs three main steps, surface meshing, volume meshing,
and 2.5D extrusion (optional), during mesh generation. The list below links each Fluent Meshing
parameter to one of these steps.

1. Surface Meshing

• Material Point

• Global Sizing - Min/Max and Growth Rate)

• Curvature/Proximity Sizing (Min/Max, Normal Angle, Cells per Gap, and Growth Rate)

• Wrap – Resolution factor

• Wrap – Max Length (if applicable)

• Periodic – Translational/Rotational (if applicable)

2. Volume Meshing

• Prisms (First Cell Height, Last Cell Ratio, and Number of Layers)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 127
Fluent Icing

– The recommended values for Prism - First Cell Height and Prism - Last Cell Ratio are 1e-
6 meters (1 micron) and 10 (percent) respectively.

– These values are used for ice shape validations.

– Increasing the number of layers increases the accuracy of the boundary layer and heat
transfer coefficients. For most problems, a layer count between 20-30 should lead to accurate
results. If unsure, a parametric study could be done to check prism layer mesh convergence
and multishot ice shapes for a particular problem.

• Cell Sizing (Size Field, or Geometric)

3. 2.5D Extrusion (if applicable)

• Extrusion – Z Thickness

Note:

Fluent Meshing will use the parameters of the surface meshing step to compute a virtual
Size Field throughout the domain before generating the wrapped surface mesh.

The figure below shows a layout where these meshing parameters are applied inside the computa-
tional domain.

Below is a brief description of the parameters that are exposed in Fluent Icing. If a parameter requires
more than one entry, separate each entry by a comma and add brackets around them (example:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
128 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

[x, y, z]). For more information regarding these parameters, consult Size Functions and Scoped
Sizing in the Fluent User's Guide.

• Additional Options

Allows you to control the following expert parameters:

– Proximity Sizing – Growth Rate

– Proximity Sizing – Cells per Gap

– Curvature Sizing – Normal Angle

– Wrap – Resolution Factor

– Cell Sizing

– Cell Sizing – Growth Rate

– Wrap – Max Length

• Global Sizing – Min/Max

Minimum and maximum global cell size of triangles or tetrahedra used during wrapping and
mesh creation.

• Global Sizing – Growth Rate

Growth rate of triangles or tetrahedra between the minimum and maximum cell size inside the
computational domain used during wrapping and mesh creation.

• Proximity Sizing – Min

Minimum cell size used in the proximity of the surface. This is used for wrapping and surface
mesh creation.

• Proximity Sizing – Growth Rate

Growth rate of cell size in the proximity of the surface. This is used for wrapping and surface
mesh creation.

• Proximity Sizing – Cells per Gap

Number of cells are filled between two proximal surfaces. This parameter is useful when you
have a blunt trailing edge in your geometry. It will assign the given number of mesh cells over
the blunt surface of the trailing edge. The figure below shows four Cells per Gap assigned to a
wing’s blunt trailing edge surface.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 129
Fluent Icing

It’s also applied to close some small gaps inside the complex iced surface.

• Curvature Sizing – Min/Max

Minimum and maximum cell size used to capture the curvature of wall surfaces. This is used for
wrapping and surface mesh creation.

• Curvature Sizing – Growth Rate

Growth rate of the cell size used to capture the curvature of wall surfaces. This is used for wrapping
and surface mesh creation.

• Curvature Sizing – Normal Angle

Difference between the normal angle of two neighboring wall cells. This value is used to identify
curved locations where the minimum cell size should be applied. The default value of 5 is suitable
for most icing simulations. A range between 2 to 10 is recommended.

Note:

The Curvature Sizing – Min and Normal Angle are key factors to properly represent
the computed ice shape throughout multi-shot simulations.

• Prism – Number of Layers

Number of prism layers to generate around wall boundaries.

• Prism – First Cell Height

Height of the first prism layer just above the wall boundaries.

• Prism – Last Cell Ratio

The ratio of the top layer prism height as a percent of the tetrahedron height just above. Default
Fluent Meshing value for this parameter is 40%. However, for aerodynamic problems and ice
shape validations, the recommended value is 10%.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
130 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

• Material Point

A point located in the area where you would like to create the volume mesh. Specify its location
using cartesian coordinates, example [x, y, z]. Fluent Meshing will use the material point to define
the domain, around which a surface mesh will be created and 3D cells will be filled. In the case
of 2.5D meshes, the material point must be defined at a location close to the trailing edge and
at the middle of the z-span.

Figure 2.8: Defined at a Location Close to TE and at the Middle of Z-Span

• Wrap – Resolution Factor

Controls the resolution of the surface during wrapping. A value of 0 will capture all features
present in the ice shape. A higher value will smooth discontinuities present in the ice shape
produced by ICE3D. A default value of 0.75 was selected based on 3D validation cases. Reducing
the resolution factor will cause wrapping to use a finer background mesh for feature capturing,
which will increase the time and memory cost of the wrapping operation.

• Cell Sizing

This parameter is used to generate 3D cells inside the domain. It has two sub options, Size Field
and Geometric. These options determine how these 3D cells grow from the existing surface
mesh to the outer boundaries of the domain.

1. Size Field

When this option is selected, Fluent Meshing will use the existing virtual Size Field to determ-
ine the size of the cells inside the domain.

2. Geometric

When this option is selected, Fluent Meshing will use the existing surface mesh, ignoring the
virtual Size Field, together with the Cell Sizing – Growth Rate to determine the size of the
cells inside the domain.

Note:

The Cell Sizing → Geometric option with Growth Rate of 1.2 is set by default. To
modify these values, enable Additional Options.

• Cell Sizing – Growth Rate

Controls the cells growth from the existing surface mesh to the outer boundaries of the domain.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 131
Fluent Icing

• Dimension

Specify if the original mesh is a full 3D mesh or a 2.5D mesh. A 2.5D mesh has a span of one cell.
When 2.5D is selected, the remeshing process has the following requirements for the original
mesh:

– The span of the geometry must be placed along the Z-axis;

– The span direction must be Z+ and the source symm plane must be placed at Z = 0;

– Paired symmetry-z planes must be defined. Therefore, individual symmetry-z BC must be

merged into one symmetry-z BC as “symmetry” type. The same goes for translational periodic
planes.

– The material point must be defined at a location that is close to the trailing edge and at half-
span.

The original 2.5D mesh can be any of the following cases:

– 2.5D regular (farfield + Z-symmetry + one airfoil element)

– 2.5D + multi-element airfoil

– 2.5D + multiple symm planes

– 2.5D + translational periodicity in an off-symm direction

Note:

If the original mesh has additional symmetry or translational periodic planes in X, Y,

or any other direction that do not represent the span of the geometry, these planes
can remain unpaired.

• Periodicity

Respectively, select Disabled, Translational or Rotational if the original mesh contains no

periodicity, translational periodicity or rotational periodicity. If Translational or Rotational is
selected, extra parameters will appear under Periodicity and should be specified.

If Translational

– Translation

The translational periodic vector in cartesian system [vx, vy, vz] m.

– Periodic Zones

The Zone name of the translational periodic surfaces in the original mesh.

If Rotational

– Angle

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
132 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

The rotational periodic angle of the original mesh, which is the rotation angle between the
periodic and its shadow zone.

– Axis

The axis of the periodic zone of the original mesh in cartesian system [vx, vy, vz] m.

Note:

Periodic center will be taken as 0, 0, 0, since the rotation axis has to be one of the
primary coordinates.

– Periodic Zones

The Zone name of the rotational periodic surfaces in the original mesh.

Note:

1. Paired periodic zones that shared the same vector or rotational Angle/Axis
should be merged into one BC zone.

2. Zone5998 and Zone5999 are reserved zone names of Fluent Icing and are
used during the remeshing process. Avoid employing these names in the
original mesh.

After completing an icing calculation or loading an icing solution into Fluent Icing, the following
icon will be displayed next to Solution → Ice in the Outline View.

Note:

If the icing solver step does not result in ice formation, a warning message will appear
inside the log panel of Fluent Icing. This will not stop a multi-shot simulation.

The Shedding Outputs submenu will be visible if Ice Shedding is enabled in the Setup → Ice
panel. In this case, the Shedding Interval [s] determines when the single-shot ice shape will be
analyzed for stress distribution and crack propagation. Stress analysis is a relatively expensive process
and does not need to be done at every ice accretion time step. At each shedding interval, the
single-shot ice shape will be filled with a volume mesh that uses the existing surface mesh topology,
and will be sent to the intrinsic solid mechanics solver of the Ice module. Crack propagation iterations
will take place, and if there are any ice fragments detected to break off, they will be removed from
the ice shape as well as the Ice Growth solution field. The numbered solution output will write
a different ice.grid and swimsol file for each interval, numbered with the interval count.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 133
Fluent Icing

Output files for a shedding analysis will not be readily visible in the file tree view under the Project
View. To see these files, you can right-click Name under Project View and check Show all files.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
134 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Example 2.1: List of Files That Will Be Saved

• *.shed* files are the FENSAP format ice grid files after the ice shape has been retracted to ac-
count for shedding.

• *.iceshed.log file contains information about the fragmented ice shapes, mass loss, etc. per
ice shedding interval.

• *.swimsol.shed* files contain the Ice Growth field that is modified by removing the shed
ice mass from each mesh point. Additional solution fields are provided that are relevant to the
ice shedding process, like fragment ID, principal stresses, shed ice mass, etc.

• *max_ice_shed_piece* is the FENSAP format mesh file for the largest ice fragment that
shed at each shedding analysis interval.

Currently, the Fluent Icing user interface does not provide a direct method to view these additional
files. You can do so by navigating to the run directory and launching FENSAP-ICE → Viewmerical
with the grid and solution file names.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 135
Fluent Icing

Ice Commands

Some built-in commands are available by right-clicking the Ice icon under Solution in the Outline
View.

• Calculate

Executes the Ice module.

After clicking Calculate, a window appears asking for a Name of the new run. If OK is selected,
a new run folder is created inside the simulation folder. This new folder contains a run settings
file and all future solution files will be written in it.

Calculate will execute the Ice module using null values for ice accretion rate and water film
height and adiabatic wall temperatures as initial quantities.

Once Ice begins to run, (running) will be displayed next to Ice in the object tree. This state will
change to (ended) if Ice completes properly, or (interrupted) if the run is interrupted.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
136 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

• Update Grid

Once ice simulation is conducted, the Update grid becomes available. This allows the creation
of a 3D mesh by displacing/deforming the walls and the surrounding cells of the original mesh
to account for the new ice shape. The next step in this process would be to run the airflow
solver on this new grid to obtain the local airflow conditions and properties around the new ice
shape. Further calculations (particles and ice) should then be obtained on this updated mesh.
The case file will then contain the new ice shape and a Save As would be required to avoid
overwriting the original un-iced case file.

Note:

In a multi-shot simulation, the iced surface and the volume mesh surrounding it is
updated at the end of each shot using Lagrangian displacement or complete
remeshing.

• Interrupt

Stops the execution of the ice solver at the end of the next iteration. The solution is kept in
memory.

• Load

Loads an Ice solution in memory. Ice restart capabilities are not supported.

• Save

Saves all Ice solution files of your simulation. The name of these files contain the suffixes
ice.grid, .map.grid and .swimsol. For more information regarding these output files,
consult Results (p. 144).

• Reset

Unloads the Ice solution. Reset will also remove the green check mark next the Ice component
icon and un-Bold the text of the current Ice solution in the Project View.

• Setup Remeshing

Activates remeshing with Fluent Meshing.

2.8.3.4. Multi-Shot
A multi-shot run executes the three solvers (Airflow, Particles, Ice) in sequence.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 137
Fluent Icing

This option allows the control of the number of quasi-steady shots to simulate and saving output
files of Airflow, Particles and Ice at each shot, if needed.

• Number of Shots

This option allows you to control the number of quasi-steady shots to simulate, which is one in-
stance of Airflow – Particles – Ice calculation. Grid displacement is executed at the end of each
shot and used as an input for the next step.

• Save Files at Each Shot

Enabled by default, all the solution files for each solver step (Airflow, Particles, Ice and Mesh
Update are saved to the run folder.

If disabled, only the Ice solution files are saved at each shot and can be post-processed. The final
Case file (mesh with the final ice shape using grid displacement or remeshing) is also saved. If
Save Files at Each Shot is disabled, the Restart Shot feature cannot be used, as the required
restart files are not present.

• Airflow Restart

This option controls the initial solution of the airflow at each shot. Two options are available,
Reinitialize and Continue. Reinitialize will use the default settings of the initial case file at each
shot. Continue will use the interpolated airflow solution of the previous shot as the initial airflow
solution for the next shot.

Note:

Restarting from an interpolated solution demands large amounts of free memory in

addition to what’s already taken by the parallel Fluent processes. Insufficient memory
will lead to error state at the time of processing the interpolation file.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
138 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

• Settings

This option allows the control of the number of iterations for the first shot. Depending on the
simulation at hand and the type of initial solutions specified in Airflow Restart, it is possible
that the first shot requires more or less iterations than the next shots. Two options are available:
Uniform and First shot custom.

Uniform will use the same amount of solver iterations across all shots. First shot custom allows
for a different number of iterations in the first shot. The remaining shots will use the settings
from the Solution panels.

Multi-Shot Commands

Built-in multi-shot commands are available by right-clicking the Solution icon in the Outline View.
The following commands are currently supported.

• Run Multi-Shot

Executes the multi-shot sequence for Number of Shots. The grid file is displaced with the ice
shape at the end of each shot.

The current state of the execution is displayed in the Outline View. While the multi-shot calcu-
lation is running, the currently running shot step will be displayed next to Solution, and (running)
will be displayed next to the module that is currently running, as shown below.

Once all shots are complete, the final shot number will be displayed as ended, and multi-shot
complete will be specified.

After the final shot has ended, the grid file of the first shot will be re-loaded, and will be specified
next to Solution, as shown below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 139
Fluent Icing

After a multi-shot simulation completes successfully, the shot 1 grid is always re-loaded to make
sure you will start from the initial grid if you continue to run another multi-shot computation.

Note:

In addition to using the Run Multi-Shot command, A multi-shot sequence can be

manually set by executing the Airflow, Particles, Ice solvers one after the other. In
this case, do not forget to click Update grid in Solution → Ice to account for ice
shape updates within the 3D grid and, if the Beading model is used, activate
Roughness from beading in Solution → Airflow to consider the impact of the sand-
grain roughness produced by the beads onto the airflow.

• Interrupt

Stops the multi-shot computation at the current step. The solution is saved at the current state.
This option is only available when the multi-shot simulation is running.

After interrupting a multi-shot computation, the loaded grid and solutions will remain at their
present position. Hence, if the grid has already been displaced to account for the growth of ice,
that grid will currently be loaded. At this point, if you would like to run another simulation, in
order to make sure you start from the initial clean grid for the new run, you must use the Reset
Multi-Shot command to load the initial grid in memory.

• Reset

Resets and unloads all solutions. This is equivalent to executing Reset on each Airflow, Particles
and Ice tree nodes. The grid that is currently loaded in memory is not reset by this operation.
Reset will also remove the green check mark next to the Airflow, Particles, and Ice module
icons and unbold the text of the current Airflow, Particles and Ice solutions in the Project View.

• Reset Multi-Shot

Reloads the initial grid, and resets and unloads all solutions. This is equivalent to executing the
Load command on the out.cas(.h5) of the current multishot run, as well as executing Reset
on each Airflow, Particles and Ice tree nodes. Reset Multi-Shot will also remove the green
check mark next to the Airflow, Particles, and Ice icons and unbold the text of the current Airflow,
Particles and Ice solutions in the Project View.

Note:

The multi-shot morphs the grid with the iced wall surfaces at each shot. The Reset
operation will reset solutions, but will not load the original grid. To revert to the initial
state that you had at the beginning of the multi-shot run, use the Reset multishot
command. Alternatively, to revert to a specific shot, right-click the appropriate case

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
140 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

file and select Load Case, or use the File → Open menu and select the appropriate
case file to load. Loading a case file will also load its settings in Fluent Icing.

Multi-shot Restart

It is possible to restart an interrupted multi-shot run from a specific step. To accomplish this,

• In the Project View, right-click the shot of interest and select Set Restart Shot.

• A restart step within that shot can be selected from the Solution panel. The active shot is also
displayed in bold in the Project View.

Note:

This is not available for computations executed with Save Files at Each Shot disabled.

– Restart at Shot

Displays the selected shot for the restart.

– Restart Time [s]

Indicates the icing time reached at the start of that shot.

– Step

Selects the solver step at which to resume the computation (Airflow, Particles, Ice, Mesh Up-
date).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 141
Fluent Icing

• Once the step to restart the calculations has been selected, use the Run multishot command to
continue the computation.

Note:

When restarting a multi-shot calculation, it is strongly recommended to keep physical

models, conditions, and boundary conditions unchanged. All parameters that are ex-
posed inside Setup in the Outline View of Fluent Icing should remain constant when
restarting a multi-shot calculation, otherwise these new simulations will produce results
that will be different than the uninterrupted calculation. Only parameters that are
exposed inside Solution should be modified as they only affect the convergence,
stability and mesh refinement (remeshing) of simulations. Moreover, the original settings
of the multi-shot run can be loaded from the Project View by right-clicking the re-
spective multi-shot run and then selecting Load Settings.

• Load Shot is not used for multishot restarts. Instead, it is used to load all of the solutions from
that shot (Case file, Airflow solution, Particles and Ice solutions) into Fluent Icing. Post-processing
tools of Fluent can be used on that loaded solution. To save that new case state in the project
and reuse it in a simulation, use Save Case As (to save in the current simulation) or Duplicate
Simulation (to save in a new simulation) since Save Case would update and overwrite the ori-
ginal case file with the new mesh state.

2.8.3.5. CHT
The CHT section defines the control and output of the CHT anti-icing simulation.

• Equations

This delineates the system of equations to be tackled by the Fluent solver. The Full Navier-Stokes
option incorporates momentum, turbulence, and energy equations, whereas the Energy Only
option exclusively solves the energy equation while maintaining the stagnation of the momentum
and turbulence equations. This approach can lead to a reduction in computational time, operating
under the assumption that the airflow's momentum and turbulence solutions remain relatively

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
142 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

unchanged with the introduction of ice cooling and anti-icing heat supply. Case settings will
remain the original settings from the case file.

• Number of CHT Loops

This is the total number of CHT loops. The calculation will terminate once it reaches the total
number of loops. During a CHT loop, the model equations are solved and thermal boundary
conditions are exchanged and updated between the domains. At the end of each CHT loop,
Fluent’s airflow and icing solver will exchange information at the icing surfaces.

• Iterations per CHT Loop

This represents the upper limit of solver iterations within each CHT loop. The computation can
advance to the subsequent CHT loop provided that the residual meets the desired convergence
threshold, even if the iteration count doesn't reach the maximum threshold.

• Output Interval

This denotes the frequency at which the CHT solution is written. The CHT solution encompasses
a collection of solutions involving airflow and icing.

Note:

Anti-icing CHT is a steady-state solution method where the model inputs heating power
and flow and droplet boundary conditions are kept constant. The solution is expected
to reach a converged state. The rate of convergence and success is a combined function
of the CFL number or the pseudo time step setting in Fluent, the solver iterations per
CHT loop and the total number of CHT loops. Providing a best practice on these individual
settings is not possible since the performance will be case specific. Ensure the residuals
sufficiently drop during each CHT loop, with a proper combination of solver time stepping
and iterations per CHT loop. For some problems, using only 1 iteration per CHT loop
could theoretically work if the CFL number is low enough.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 143
Fluent Icing

2.8.4. Results

The Results branch in the Outline View provides access to the core Fluent post-processing options
as presented in the Remote Visualization Client and offers the same options as in Fluent’s user in-
terface.

Note:

All post-processing performed using the options available in Outline View → Results, or
in the top ribbon, Results → Quick-View, are performed using the solutions currently
loaded in memory. The View Results command in the Project View loads the Post-Ana-
lysis feature and allows to load file sequences and to combine complex scenes with multiple
datasets, see Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing (p. 165). Alternately all solution files can
be post processed using Viewmerical, CFD-Post or EnSight by right-clicking the file in
Project View and selecting the appropriate option, as described in Using the Project View
to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations (p. 151).

The different object types offered under Results → Graphics are:

• Surfaces

Create cutting planes or other post-processing surfaces from the mesh.

• Meshes

Displays the current mesh surfaces.

• Contours

Displays contours of solution fields over surfaces. The results of Fluent Icing are listed in the Icing
variable category. The list of available Fluent Icing fields will depend on the solution files currently
loaded (airflow, droplets, crystals, vapor, ice). All Fluent Icing fields are solutions defined at the
nodes.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
144 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

• Vectors

Displays vector solution fields in the entire computational domain or on selected surfaces. Only
supported for Fluent airflow solution variables. Use Viewmerical or CFD-Post to post-process FENSAP
Particles and Ice vector solutions.

• Pathlines

Displays flow and particle paths within the computational domain. Only supported for Fluent airflow
solution variables. Use CFD-Post or EnSight to post-process Particles and Ice pathlines.

• Volume Renderings

Displays all 3D elements at once, drawing each element semi-transparently according to the value
of a variable using user-selected x, y, and z dimensions to control the number of elements passed
up to the client.

• Periodic Instances

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 145
Fluent Icing

Creates repeating copies, or periodic instances, of selected boundaries in the workspace.

• Mirror Planes

Create 2D XY plots of your results for analyzing one variable with respect to another variable. For
more details on Mirror Planes, see Mirror Planes.

Some mesh and common Fluent Icing fields can be viewed quickly by using Quick-View. See Quick-
View (p. 148) for more details.

To create and display a new graphic object:

• Right-click the object type of interest (Meshes, Contours, etc.), and select New

or use the command buttons in the Results window of the Ribbon.

• In the mesh-1 window, set up the graphical object options, and choose the Surfaces to display.
A description on how to generate these object types can be found inside Basic Graphics Generation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
146 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

• Select Display in the contextual menu of the new object to output the result in the Graphics
window.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 147
Fluent Icing

• Scenes

Combine multiple graphical objects (mesh, contours, etc.) in the graphic window.

Note:

For details on image saving, see Save Picture Dialog Box in the Fluent User's Guide.

2.8.4.1. Quick-View

Quick-View allows you to easily output the most common Fluent Icing fields on walls and other
boundary surfaces. A Fit to Window view is applied in all cases by default.

Note:

Quick-View will use the solution data of the currently selected Fluent case file. To output
the solution of another Fluent case within the Outline View, select the desired case
before running Quick-View.

Three object types are supported in Quick-View.

Mesh

• All Boundaries

Displays the boundary surface meshes of computational domain (inlet, outlet, wall, symmetry)

• Walls Only

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
148 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting-up a Fluent Icing Simulation

Only the wall surfaces are displayed.

• Mesh – Viewmerical

Opens Viewmerical with the mesh currently loaded in memory.

• Mesh – CFD-Post

Opens CFD-Post with the mesh currently loaded in memory.

Contour

• Airflow

– FENSAP/Fluent

→ • Temperature (Walls)

Displays the temperature distribution on all walls.

• Heat flux (Walls)

Displays the convective heat flux distribution on all walls.

• Velocity Magnitude

Displays the airflow speed on all boundary surfaces.

– FENSAP format only

→ View With Viewmerical

Opens Viewmerical with the mesh and the airflow solution currently loaded in memory.

→ View With CFD-Post

Opens CFD-Post with the mesh and the airflow solution currently loaded in memory.

• Particles

– Droplets / Crystals

→ Collection Efficiency (Walls)

Displays the collection efficiency of the droplets or crystals on all walls.

→ LWC / ICC

Displays the LWC or ICC on all boundary surfaces.

→ View With Viewmerical

Opens Viewmerical with the mesh and the droplet or crystal solution currently loaded in
memory.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 149
Fluent Icing

→ View With CFD-Post

Opens CFD-Post with the mesh and the droplet or crystal solution currently loaded in memory.

→ View With EnSight

Opens EnSight with the mesh and the droplet or crystal solution currently loaded in memory.

• Vapor

– Vapor Concentration

Displays vapor concentration on all boundary surfaces.

– Vapor Condensation

Displays vapor condensation on all walls.

– View With Viewmerical

Opens Viewmerical with the mesh and the vapor solution currently loaded in memory.

– View With CFD-Post

Opens CFD-Post with the mesh and the vapor solution currently loaded in memory.

– View With EnSight

Opens EnSight with the mesh and the vapor solution currently loaded in memory.

• Ice

– Ice Thickness

Displays the ice thickness on all walls.

– View With Viewmerical

Opens Viewmerical with the surface mesh (map.grid) and the ice solution (swimsol) currently
loaded in memory.

– View With CFD-Post

Opens CFD-Post with the surface mesh (map.grid) and the ice solution (swimsol) currently
loaded in memory.

– View With EnSight

Opens EnSight with the surface mesh (map.grid) and the ice solution (swimsol) currently
loaded in memory.

Ice Cover

• Ice Cover – Viewmerical / CFD-Post

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
150 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations

Displays the 3D ice shape over the original surface. In the case of CFD-Post, the display of the
ice shape is done by executing the Ice Cover – 3D-View icing macro. Once in CFD-Post, Ice
Cover – 2D-Plot icing macro can be also enabled.

• Multi-shot Ice Cover - CFD-Post

Displays the 3D ice shapes obtained during each shot over the original surface. The display of
all ice shapes is done by executing the Ice Cover – 3D-View icing macro. Once in CFD-Post, Ice
Cover – 2D-Plot icing macro can be also enabled.

A single quick-view item can be displayed at a time in the Graphics window and will replace the
previous item displayed. To store multiple items in different windows, use the Results node in the
Outline View as detailed in Results (p. 144).

Selecting a Quick-View will reset the current view. To update the current Quick-View with the
latest solution, use the Display command from the contextual menu in the Outline View.

For more information regarding Viewmerical and CFD-Post, consult Post Processing with Viewmer-
ical and CFD-Post from Fluent Icing (p. 181).

2.9. Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations
The following section describes the options available to interact with your simulations, runs and results
files from the Project View.

2.9.1. Simulation Folder Commands

When a simulation is not yet loaded, the following options are available:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 151
Fluent Icing

• Load in Solver

Loads the simulation. This will load the solver in the background. (See Loading a Simulation (p. 61)).
Also, it is possible to use Load in Solver to connect to multiple simulations at a time (see Loading
Multiple Simulations (p. 66) for more information). Double-clicking the simulation entry will also
query if Load in Solver should be triggered.

• New Folder

Create a new category group in the simulation, individual run folders can be moved with drag-and-
drop to this subfolder. Such folders can be used to categorize runs and simplify the project structure
when many runs are stored. The run folders are not moved on disk, such folders are only in the
Project View.

• Duplicate

Duplicates the simulation (See Duplicating a Simulation (p. 65)) folder along with all its run folders.

• Delete

Deletes the simulation folder. This will remove the simulation from the Project View and delete
all child files and folders from the disk.

• Clean-up Folder

Erases all simulation files such as cleanup-*, serverinfo-*.

• Open in File Explorer

Opens a File Explorer window (Linux: xdg-open) at the folder location of the simulation.

• Stop Solver Processes

Executes all cleanup-* scripts in the folder.

• Sort by Name

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
152 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations

Sorts all files in the simulation alphabetically by name. By default the simulation files are initially
sorted by time of creation.

• Edit Notes

Access the Notes panel. Notes are stored in the project.

• Properties

Opens a Properties window showing the Metadata and properties of a simulation. The figure below
shows an example of the Properties window.

In the above figure,

– The Name of the simulation and its URL path are shown at the top of the Item tab.

– Current shows the most current solution files associated with the simulation. When the
simulation is loaded, the solution files listed in Current will be loaded as well.

– Input shows the input .cas file used in the simulation.

– The Notes tab can be used to write any notes that you would like to add to better describe
this simulation. A file with notes is displayed with the * suffix in the Project View.
Ctrl-double-click can be used to open the Notes panel directly from the Project View.

When a simulation is loaded, the following additional options are available:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 153
Fluent Icing

• Close Solver

Closes a simulation and its corresponding Fluent solver located in the background.

• View Case Settings

Switches to the Outline View so that the simulation settings can be viewed.

• Stop Solver Processes

Launches a script to clean up any solver processes that may have become disconnected. (See also
Project → Workspaces → Options → Interrupt Process)

2.9.2. Run Folder Commands

• Load Settings

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
154 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations

Loads the settings of the selected run into the current settings of the simulation.

• View Results

Loads the result sequence into the built-in Post-Analysis mode, see Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent
Icing (p. 165). (Multi-shot only)

• View Results With CFD-Post

Load the result sequence in CFD-Post. (Multi-shot only)

• Set Current Run

Set the selected run as being the current one, the current run is used for some post-processing
operations in the Results ribbon tab.

• View Convergence

Displays the residual plots of the run.

• Rename

Renames the run folder, the folder is also renamed on the disk.

• Delete

Deletes the run. This will remove the run from the Project View and delete all files from the disk.

• Open in File Explorer

Opens a windows file explorer (Linux: xdg-open) at the folder location of the simulation.

• Sort by Name

Sorts all files in the run alphabetically by name. By default, the simulation files are initially sorted
by time of creation.

• Edit Notes

Access the Notes panel. Notes are stored in the project.

• Properties

Opens a Properties window showing the Metadata and properties of a run. A run’s properties will
contain descriptions of the Airflow, Particles, and Ice properties used to compute the run.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 155
Fluent Icing

2.9.3. Case File Commands

• View Case

Loads the case in the integrated Post-Analysis module, see Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent
Icing (p. 165).

• View Case With... Viewmerical

Opens a Viewmerical postprocessing session in a new window and loads the selected case file. (see
Viewmerical (p. 181))

• View Case With... CFD-Post

Opens a CFD-Post postprocessing session in a new window and loads the selected case file. (See
CFD-Post (p. 183) for more info)

• View Case With... EnSight

Opens an EnSight postprocessing session in a new window and loads the selected case file.

• Load Mesh

Loads only the mesh from the case file into memory, and does not load the case file settings. This
replaces any mesh currently loaded in memory and therefore will reset all loaded solutions (airflow,
particles and ice) as they will not be compatible with the new mesh. This option is only available
when a simulation is loaded.

• Load Case

Loads the case file into memory. This replaces any case file currently loaded in memory and
therefore, it will reset all loaded solutions (airflow, particles and ice) as they will not be compatible
with the new mesh. This option is only available when a simulation is loaded.

Note:

The Load Case command should only be used with case files that contain the same grid
topology (i.e. boundary condition types) as the case that is currently loaded. Use this

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
156 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations

option with extreme care as this operation might compromise links between runs and
simulation folders (i.e. erroneous post-processing).

• Edit Notes

Access the Notes panel. Notes are stored in the project.

• Properties

Opens a Properties window showing the Metadata and properties of the case file.

2.9.4. Solution File Commands

• Load

This replaces in memory any solution of the same type if one is currently loaded.

Note:

The Load command should only be used with solution files that are resulting from
the same grid topology as the case file that is currently loaded.

• View Results – Fluent Solution, View Results – Post Solution

Loads the result in the integrated Post-Analysis module, see Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent
Icing (p. 165). For Airflow solutions, the option offered (Fluent solution and/or Post solution) depends
on the Post solution output settings in the Airflow panel. Post solutions should be preferred, as
they are faster to load and can be customized.

• View Results With... Viewmerical

Opens a Viewmerical post processing session in a new window and loads the selected solution.
(see Viewmerical (p. 181) for more info)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 157
Fluent Icing

• View Results With... CFD-Post

Opens a CFD-Post post processing session in a new window and loads the selected solution. (See
CFD-Post (p. 183) for more info)

• View Results With... EnSight

Opens an EnSight post processing session in a new window and loads the selected solution. View
with EnSight is only available for Fluent solution (.dat or .dat.h5) files.

• View Convergence (when available)

Displays the residual plots of the phase related to this solution file and solution step.

• Delete

Deletes the selected solution file.

• Edit Notes

Access the Notes panel. Notes are stored in the project.

• Properties

Opens a Properties window showing the Metadata and properties of a run.

2.9.5. The Use of Bold Text in Project View

The Project View window will make use of Bold text to provide additional information on simulations,
runs and results files.

A simulation that is currently loaded and connected to a Fluent solver session will have its name be
displayed in Bold with (loaded) listed next to the name.

The top-level Case file that is currently being used for the simulation will be displayed in Bold.

The most recent run that was performed in your simulation will have its name be displayed in Bold
with (current) listed next to the name.

If a multi-shot restart is enabled, the selected Shot is displayed in bold.

All results files that are currently loaded in memory will be displayed in Bold. These results files will
also be listed as the current solutions in the hidden item Current folder.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
158 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations

When a Reset or Initialize command is used on a Solution component in the Outline View, the
results files associated with that component will no longer be in bold to signify that these files are
not currently loaded in memory.

Multi-shot is an exception. When running a Multi-shot simulation, the results files will not be displayed
in Bold, and no results files will be listed in the hidden item Current folder.

2.9.6. Project View Organization Options

The Project View window can be sorted in various ways to help with file organization. By default,
the Project View only displays the Name column in the Project View file organization panel. Right-
clicking the Name column header will display additional file organization settings. The same menu
is available in Project → Project → View Options.

• Select Columns…

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 159
Fluent Icing

Opens a window that allows you to select the information to display in the Project View. Alternat-
ively, this option can be selected by choosing Display → Columns from the Project ribbon. See
Using Columns in Project View (p. 160) for more info.

• Show Hidden Items

Shows additional folders and files that exist inside the simulation folder and its run folders. See
Hidden Items in Project View (p. 162) for more info.

• Show filenames

Shows the actual filename on disk.

• Show All Files

Allows you to explore the full content of the simulation and run folders, including temporary files,
error files, etc.

• Expand All Items

Expands all items in the Project View.

• Collapse All Items

Collapses all items in the Project View.

• Sort by Column

Sorts all files by the selected Column. If the Name column is selected, the files will be sorted alpha-
betically.

Note:

By default, the files in the Project View are sorted by order of creation.

• Alt-drag to Reorder Files

In addition to the sorting options described above, all files can be moved up or down in the Project
View by Alt-selecting the file and dragging it to a new position. This operation can only be done
on the default file organization view.

• Reset View Settings

Resets the Project View to its initial settings. This will display only the Name column, and all files
will be sorted by order of creation.

Using Columns in Project View

Sortable columns are available in the Project View window to show additional information and to
help organize simulations, runs and solution files.

By default, Project View only displays the Name column, which displays the Name of each item.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
160 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations

Right-click the Name column header and choose Select columns… to open the column display
window. Alternatively, this window can be accessed by selecting Display → Columns in the Project
ribbon menu.

A window appears showing the list of metadata settings that can be selected to display as a column
in the Project View. For example, Droplets::D-Diam and Droplets::LWC can be selected to display
the Droplet Diameter and Liquid Water Content associated with a run.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 161
Fluent Icing

The selected information will then be displayed in a new column to the right of the Name column.
If the file contains a value associated with a displayed column, the value will be shown in the associated
cell. If the file does not contain a property associated with a displayed column, the associated cell
will be empty. In the image below, the columns show that 3 particle ran with different droplet dia-
meters (20, 30 and 40 microns), but with the same Liquid Water Content (0.0001 kg/m3).

Hidden Items in Project View

By default, the Project View only displays a selected list of case files, simulation folders, run folders
and results files. Most of the time, these are the only files that you need to interact with.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
162 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Icing Simulations

However, there are additional files associated with a project that you may want to interact which are
hidden by default. To display these files, right-click the Name column header and select Show hidden
items.

Hidden folders and files will be shown. Hidden folders will be displayed in grey.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 163
Fluent Icing

Some of the hidden files include the following:

• Current Folder

This folder contains links to all the current solutions, which typically will be the solution file
of each type that was most recently obtained from a run, or was most recently loaded using
the Load command. When you use Load in Solver to open a simulation, the solutions listed
in the Current folder will be loaded. Each simulation folder contains a hidden Current folder.

• Input Folder

This folder contains links to all case files or solution files that were used as an input to the
simulation or run. Each simulation folder will contain a hidden Input folder.

• run.settings File

This file contains the Fluent Icing settings used to perform a given run. You can load the
run.settings of a run into the current simulation by right-clicking the run folder of interest
and then by selecting Load settings. Each run folder will contain a run.settings file.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
164 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing

2.10. Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing

The Post-Analysis module is a comprehensive tool that displays, compares and performs queries onto
meshes and solution files located in the Project View inside the framework of Fluent Icing.

Note:

Post-Analysis uses the EnSight renderer. Therefore, the EnSight package must be included
in the Ansys installation to leverage this capability and a post-processing license is required.

When the Post Analysis feature is first activated, a Post-Analysis node will appear in the Outline View
where detailed post-processing can be performed. In general, it can be used to create more custom
post-processing objects or obtain more detailed solution data than what is otherwise available from
the quick post-processing objects available in the Results node of a simulation.

• Fluent results supported:

– Case File (.cas, .cas.h5)

– Solution (.dat, .dat.h5)

– Post Solution (.dat.post)

Optional (see Solution (p. 109), Airflow (p. 111), and Fluent Airflow under Airflow (p. 111) for more
details), fast and compact, enables to post-process an arbitrary selection of variables.

• Icing solutions supported:

– FENSAP Airflow

– Particles (Droplets, Crystals, Vapor)

– Ice (Ice solution, Ice cover)

Note:

Some icing solution field names displayed in EnSight will differ from Viewmerical or CFD-
Post, refer to Field Name Mapping (p. 202).

For more information on Post-Analysis, see Fluent Post-Analysis Workspace.

2.10.1. Loading a Dataset Into Post-Analysis

Datasets can be loaded into the Post-Analysis tool in two ways: by accessing the files in the Project
View, or by using the Load Dataset command in the Results ribbon.

In the Project View, select a solution or case file and choose View Results in the contextual menu.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 165
Fluent Icing

A solution file is loaded along its matching case or grid file.

To load a solution file that is not visible in the Project View, go to the Results ribbon and select
Load Dataset....

In this mode, browse to the location in the disk where the solution file is located and select its corres-
ponding case and solution files.

Typically, in a regular Fluent simulation, the .cas file is alongside the .dat file with a similar name.
Whereas, in a Fluent Icing project folder, the simulation folder contains the master case (.cas) file.
The run subfolders of Airflow type contains the Fluent Solution (.dat) file only. If the run has the
Post Solution (.dat.post) output mode enabled, it will also contain the Post Case (.cas.post)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
166 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing

to be used as the solution file for quick post-processing. In the case of Particles and Ice solution files,
they should be loaded through the Project View of Fluent Icing by selecting View Results.

See File Types (p. 186) for more details.

Multiple solutions or datasets can be loaded and appended to the Post-Analysis module of Fluent
Icing. This can be done by selecting them through View Results or Load Dataset. All solutions and
datasets loaded into the Post-Analysis module are located inside the Outline View.

Note:

Each additional dataset that is loaded will consume memory.

To remove an existing solution or dataset from Post-Analysis, right-click the location of

the solution inside Datasets and select Delete.

2.10.2. Managing Datasets

Once all datasets are loaded into Post-Analysis, each dataset can be post-processed separately by
selecting the dataset of interest through the ribbon Dataset → Select Active Dataset menu or by
selecting it in the Outline View.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 167
Fluent Icing

As datasets or results are selected in the Outline View, the active dataset is updated in the ribbon.

Moreover, each additional dataset is loaded in the same EnSight instance and will consume additional
memory.

The following commands are available when left-clicking a Dataset name:

• Delete

Datasets can be released and unloaded through the Delete command. All graphical objects related
to this dataset, and Scene entries, will be removed.

• Copy Objects to Other Datasets…

This command enables you to copy the state of one dataset to another, including its list of graph-
ical objects and their settings. This enables easy dataset comparison, especially if each dataset is
shown in a separate viewport.

• Hide Unused Items

This command enables you to hide unused graphics objects in the list For example, if only a Mesh
object has been created, Hide Unused Items will reduce the list of objects under the dataset to
show only the Meshes object. This can be helpful to reduce visual clutter when working with many
datasets. You can select Show Unused Items to reveal the unused hidden objects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
168 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing

2.10.3. Graphics Window Commands

The following graphics display control icons are available at the left side of the Post-Analysis graphics
window:

• Set Layout

This menu can be used to split the graphics window into multiple viewports

• Set Active Viewport

This menu can be used to select the active viewport for graphical operations. Alternatively, the
display or addition to a specific viewport can be set from the contextual menu on the graphical
item by choosing Display In → Viewport-#

• Link Viewports

This menu is used to synchronize the camera angles and movements of all viewports

Alternatively, the display or the addition of the selected graphical object to a specific viewport can
be set from the contextual menu on the graphical item:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 169
Fluent Icing

• Display (Case Comparison)

Displays the graphics object for the selected datasets side-by-side, in the Graphics window using
the viewport layout specified under the Case Comparison node.

• Display

Displays the graphics object for the selected datasets in the Graphics window.

• Display In

Displays the selected Graphics object within the viewport.

• Add To

Adds the selected Graphics object to the viewport.

• Save Image...

Opens the Save Picture dialog box allowing you to save an image file of the object in the
Graphics window.

• Delete

Deletes the selected Graphics object.

For quick access to commonly used commands, a context-sensitive menu is available when right-
clicking within the Graphics window:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
170 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing

• Save Image...

Opens the Save Picture dialog box allowing you to save an image file of the object in the
Graphics window.

• Save Animation...

Opens the Save Animation dialog box allowing you to save an animation file.

Note:

This setting is active only for transient datasets.

• Save As New Scene Object

Saves the Graphics window content as an object under Scenes.

• Save to Scene Object

Saves the Graphics window content to an existing Scene object.

• Add to Viewport

Adds the selected Graphics object to the viewport.

• Display in Viewport

Displays the selected Graphics object within the viewport.

• Remove from Viewport

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 171
Fluent Icing

Removes the selected Graphics object from the viewport.

• Display Scene

Displays the selected Scene object in the viewport.

• Display (Full Window)

Displays your model to take maximum advantage of the Graphics window’s width and height.

• Fit to Viewport

Adjusts the overall size of your model to take maximum advantage of the viewport’s width and
height.

• Set View

Contains a drop-down of views, allowing you to display the model from the direction of the vector
equidistant to all three axes, as well as in different axes orientations.

• Set Viewport Layout

Allows you to select from a collection of viewport arrangements.

• Link Viewports…

Synchronizes the display of the selected viewports.

2.10.4. Graphical Objects

In this section, the most relevant graphical objects to post-process icing results using Post-Analysis
are presented. For more information regarding the graphical objects of Post-Analysis, consult Graphics
Objects.

Each loaded dataset will have the following graphical objects available in Post-Analysis:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
172 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing

• Surfaces

Generate new geometric surfaces or lines which can be used as selected surface zones when creating
a mesh, contour or vector display.

• Difference Fields

Generate objects to display the difference of certain data fields.

• Meshes

Generate mesh objects to display all or part of the mesh.

• Contours

Generate colored contour plots of solution variables contained in the solution file.

• Vectors

Generate vector plots of directional variables contained in the solution file.

• Pathlines

Generate pathlines along surfaces using directional variables in the solution file.

• Volume Rendering

Draw vectors in the entire domain, or on selected surfaces. By default, one vector is drawn at the
center of each cell (or at the center of each facet of a data surface), with the length and color of
the arrows representing the velocity magnitude. The spacing, size, and coloring of the arrows can
be modified, along with several other vector plot settings.

• Periodic Instances

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 173
Fluent Icing

Generate periodic instances objects to display repeated periodic surfaces.

• XY Plots

Generate XY plots of solution data along 1D objects in the domain.

• Mirror Planes

Create 2D XY plots of your results for analyzing one variable with respect to another variable. For
more details on Mirror Planes, see Mirror Planes.

Ice Cover
The Ice cover of a single or multi-shot icing solution can be viewed by selecting View Ice from the
standalone Ice solution or from View Results from the multi-shot run in the Project View.

The display of the Ice Cover is a Scene (The Scene object is named icecover-*) containing:

• Original Surface (Map Mesh Object Named Mesh Outline)

Wall zones of the original grid, in gray.

In a multi-shot, the original surface mesh is the original case file (input of multi-shot step #1).

• Ice Surface (Ice Mesh Object Named Icecover)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
174 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing

Wall zones that contain the ice layer that is displayed by default in white. Only the iced surface is
displayed. Surfaces with near zero ice growth are not displayed. The shading properties of the ice
can be configured in the icecover mesh object.

– The threshold used to display the iced surface is configured in the Iso-Clip surface iceclip.

Surfaces with a Field value lower than the minimum are not displayed.

The Surface Grid and the Ice surface are then combined into a Scene.

See Graphics Objects for more information on contours, vectors, pathlines and more.

XY Plots
XY Plots work on a 1D graphical object. Two main ways to create a line or curve (1D Surface) that
will be used to create an XY Plot are presented below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 175
Fluent Icing

• Surfaces → New → Line…

Allows to create an arbitrary line in the volume.

• Surfaces → New → Iso-Surface...

Creates a curve by intersecting an iso-surface to a list of Surfaces.

In the example above, a Z cutting plane (Iso-Surface) is selected at the middle of the domain and
intersects a list of walls that represent an airfoil. This creates a curve that is located at the center
of the airfoil.

In the XY plot panel, select the 1D Surfaces to display, the Field, and the X / Y / Z Plot Direction.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
176 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing

You can select multiple items in the Outline View to perform a bulk function (such as using Delete
to remove multiple surfaces at a time).

For more information on graphical objects, see Graphics Objects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 177
Fluent Icing

2.10.5. Case Comparison

When multiple results can be loaded into Post-Analysis concurrently, the Case Comparison feature
can be used to easily create side by side comparisons of different datasets.

• Display (Case Comparison)

When more than one dataset is loaded into Post-Analysis, create a graphics object, for example a
contour, in one of the datasets. Right-click that object and select Display (Case Comparison). The
graphics object will automatically be copied to all datasets, and Scenes → Current Scenes will
be automatically adjusted such that the graphics window will display a side by side comparison of
the datasets.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
178 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis (Beta) in Fluent Icing

A maximum of 4 datasets will be displayed at a time. The Case Comparison object can be used
to adjust datasets that are currently selected.

2.10.6. Solution Sequences

A Multi-Shot simulation produces a sequence of solutions of the same type. This sequence of solutions
can be loaded, through the Project View, by using the View Results command of a multi-shot run.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 179
Fluent Icing

This command will offer the choice to load one of the available solution groups:

Air might offer two choices, Fluent Solution or Post Solution. This will depend on the Post-pro-
cessing Output selected in the Solution → Airflow panel. See Airflow (p. 72) of this manual for more
details.

In the case of Ice, Ice Solution or Ice Cover can be selected. Ice Solution is the ice solution mapped
on the input mesh at the start of a shot. Ice Cover is the ice solution mapped on the output mesh
at the end of a shot.

When a sequence of solutions is loaded, use the Dataset - Sequence ribbon to display each solution
of the sequence. In the case of a multi-shot solution, Shot #1 corresponds to time step 0.

The selection of a graphic object (Mesh, Contour, etc.) or Scene containing an item that is part of a
sequence of solutions enables the possibility to create an animation using the Save Animation...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
180 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post Processing with Viewmerical and CFD-Post from Fluent Icing

button. This option is available at the bottom of the Properties panel for the selected graphical object
or scene.

The animation feature (Saving Animations) enables you to save a movie file with a frame for each
sequence step of the dataset.

2.11. Post Processing with Viewmerical and CFD-Post from Fluent Icing
In addition to the post processing options available directly from the Outline View/Quick-View (as
described in Results (p. 144)) the external tools Viewmerical and CFD-Post can be also used to post
process simulation results that are present in the Project View.

2.11.1. Viewmerical

Viewmerical is the post-processor of FENSAP-ICE and can read icing solutions directly. Its usage is
described in detail in Post-Processing.

There are two ways to open Viewmerical from Fluent Icing; from the Quick-view ribbon menu, or
from the Project View. Each method has a slightly different usage and is described in the following
sections. In both cases, Viewmerical always reads a grid and solution file in FENSAP format. Therefore,
*.cas(.h5) and *.dat(.h5) files are first converted to FENSAP format files, *.grid or *.soln
files respectively, before they are loaded in Viewmerical.

Note:

Use the CFD-Post icing macros to automatically post-process an entire set of multi-shot
icing solutions. This can be selected from the ribbon of Fluent Icing. See CFD-Post (p. 183)
& Quick-View (p. 148).

Launching Viewmerical requires a post-processing license token and the installation of the
FENSAP-ICE package. FENSAP-ICE is part of the default Fluids installation package of Ansys.
Launching it requires the AWP_ROOT*** environment variable to be set-up. This is auto-
matically done on Windows during the installation process. See Ansys, Inc. Installation
Guide for Windows for details.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 181
Fluent Icing

2.11.1.1. Accessing Viewmerical from Quick-View

When using the Quick-View → Contour → View With Viewmerical command, accessible from the
Results ribbon menu, the last written solution of the selected type is loaded into Viewmerical. If
an Ice solution is currently loaded, the Ice Cover can also be viewed through the Quick-View →
Ice Cover → Ice Cover - Viewmerical command.

2.11.1.2. Accessing Viewmerical from Project View

It is also possible to launch Viewmerical from the Project View panel by right-clicking any solution
file and selecting View Results With… → Viewmerical. Viewmerical is then launched from the
simulation folder. If the selected solution file is already written in FENSAP format (as is the case
with ice and particle solutions), the solution file is loaded directly from its respective run folder. If
the solution file is not in written in FENSAP format (as is the case with Fluent airflow solutions),
first, the file is converted to FENSAP format in a temporary file stored in the simulation folder
(tmp.view.* files).

2.11.1.3. Comparing Multiple Solutions with Viewmerical

It is possible to compare multiple solutions using a single Viewmerical post-processing window
launched from the Project View panel of Fluent Icing. To do this, first launch Viewmerical by right-
clicking a solution file that you would like to use in your comparison and selecting View Results
With… → Viewmerical. Then, right-click the second solution that you would like to compare and
select View Results With… → Viewmerical. A dialog will appear.

Choosing Append will add the solution to the most recently opened Viewmerical window, in this
case, your first solution. It is therefore possible to add multiple solutions to the same Viewmerical
window by right-clicking solution files and appending them to Viewmerical.

Choosing New Instance will open the solution in a new Viewmerical window. This new instance
will be used for future Append operations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
182 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post Processing with Viewmerical and CFD-Post from Fluent Icing

2.11.2. CFD-Post

CFD-Post is a general post-processor for Ansys Fluids and can read icing solutions directly via a
command file. Usage is detailed in CFD-Post User's Guide.

CFD-Post is launched with special icing macros enabling the generation of figures and animations of
ice shapes and field contours in 3D (Ice Cover – 3D-View) as well as 2D Plots (Ice Cover – 2D-Plot).
Their usage is detailed in CFD-Post Macros.

There are two ways to open CFD-Post from Fluent Icing; from the Quick-View ribbon menu, or from
the Project View. Each method has a slightly different usage and is described in the following sections.
In both cases, CFD-Post will read a grid and solution file in FENSAP format as well as a command file.

Note:

CFD-Post is installed by default with any Ansys Fluids product and uses a Post-processing
license token.

2.11.2.1. Accessing CFD-Post from Quick-View

When using the Quick-View → Contour → View with CFD-Post command, that is accessible from
the View ribbon menu, the last written solution of the selected type is loaded into CFD-Post. If an
Ice solution is currently loaded, the Ice cover can also be viewed through the Quick-View → Ice
Cover → Ice Cover – CFD-Post command.

2.11.2.2. Accessing CFD-Post from Project View

It is also possible to launch CFD-Post from the Project View by right-clicking a solution file and
selecting View Results With… → CFD-Post. CFD-Post is then launched from the simulation folder.
If the selected solution file is already written in FENSAP format (as is the case with ice and particle
solutions), an cmd.view.*.fsp command file is written as a CFD-Post input file point to the
solution. If the solution file is written in Fluent format (as is the case with fluent airflow solutions)
the solution will be loaded directly with CFD-Post.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 183
Fluent Icing

2.11.3. EnSight

EnSight is a general post-processor for Ansys Fluids and can read icing solutions directly via a command
file or by selecting the files in its own Open File dialog. Usage is detailed in the Ansys EnSight User
Manual.

EnSight can be launched on any case or solution file from the Project View by selecting the solution
file and then View Results with… → EnSight.

Note:

Some icing solution field names displayed in EnSight will differ from Viewmerical or CFD-
Post, refer to Field Name Mapping (p. 202).

To visualize a Fluent Icing solution with EnSight, the latter should be installed along side
the Ansys Fluids product. EnSight uses a Post-processing license token.

2.12. Preferences
The Icing preferences are available from the File → Preferences... menu.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
184 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Preferences

Fluent Icing launch options are set up in this window:

• Use Custom Solver Launch Settings

Enables the usage of a Fluent Launcher when loading or creating a new simulation. This allows you
to launch calculations using a different number of CPUs, a different machine or a queuing system.

• Display After Case Load

Defines the initial boundary surfaces to be shown in the display window when a new simulation is
loaded. Walls, All boundaries and Off are the only options that can be selected.

• Show Solution Workspace

When the solver is loaded, the Fluent Solution workspace is hidden by default. Enabling this option
will display the Fluent Solution workspace window at the same time the solver is loaded.

• Enable Solution Workspace Graphics

The Fluent Solution workspace window displayed with the graphics panel is disabled by default.
Enable this option to have the graphics enabled at start-up.

• Use Separate Consoles for Sessions

By default, a single Fluent Icing console contains both the local Fluent Icing transcript in black text
and the Solution workspace transcript in gray text prefixed by |. Enabling this option will send the
Solution workspace transcript to its own individual console window.

• Font Color for Remote Session

Change the font color of the Solution workspace transcript.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 185
Fluent Icing

• Force Local Connection Only

Enable this option to force Fluent Icing to use the localhost address (127.0.0.1) to establish the con-
nection between the Fluent Icing client and the background Fluent Solution workspace server. This
option should only be used if you are launching and running Fluent Icing on a single machine. It can
be useful to avoid issues with network or VPN changes that may occur on your local machine while
you are using Fluent Icing.

• Beta Features

Enables Icing solvers beta features.

• Advanced Settings

Enables Advanced Settings through the user interface.

2.13. File Types

The following describes the type of files generated/loaded/imported by Fluent Icing:

• Starting Input File

*.cas

Fluent case file. Contains the grid and configuration of your Fluent/Fluent Icing simulation.

*.cas.gz (compressed case file) and *.cas.h5 (HDF / CFF case file) can also be used.

• Airflow

*.dat

*.dat.h5 (the same format as the original case file is used)

An Airflow file is tied to a case file. Moreover, multiple .dat files can be connected to a single ori-
ginal case file. This occurs when a simulation contains multiple airflow runs.

• *.soln

FENSAP solver solution file. Associated to a FENSAP format mesh (*.grid) file.

• Airflow - Post

*.cas.post

*.dat.post

• Particles

*.droplet

Water droplet solution file. Associated to a FENSAP format mesh (*.grid) file.

*.crystal

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
186 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 File Types

Ice crystal solution file. Associated to a FENSAP format mesh (*.grid) file.

*.vapor

Vapor solution file. Associated to a FENSAP format mesh (*.grid) file.

• Ice Accretion

*.swimsol

Ice solution file (can be viewed with map.grid or ice.grid).

*.map.grid

Surface mesh of walls that have been enabled for icing.

*.ice.grid

Surface mesh of the ice shape produced by walls that have been enabled for icing

• FENSAP Legacy Files vs CFF Files

By default particles and icing solution written by Fluent Icing follow the FENSAP-ICE file format. This
format can be read directly by Viewmerical and CFD-Post. A conversion of those files in CFF format
is done before post-processing these solutions with Post-Analysis or EnSight.

Once written in CFF format, meshes have the .cas.fsp suffix, while the solution files are written
with the .dat.fsp suffix.

• Ice Accretion – extra files.

*.swimsol.s2g

Mapping file to load a swimsol (areal solution) in Fluent. Automatically loaded/saved alongside a
swimsol file. Required for Fluent Icing.

*.rough

Roughness profile when beading is enabled.

*.disp

Displacement profile that represents the volumetric accretion of ice.

• Residuals (if Save Convergence to file is enabled in Solution).

*.fconverg

FENSAP airflow convergence.

*.fgmres

FENSAP airflow GMRES residuals.

*.pconverg

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 187
Fluent Icing

Particles convergence.

• FENSAP grid (if Write FENSAP... grid is selected under File → Export).

*.grid

FENSAP grid file. This grid can be used in Viewmerical or CFD-Post to view Particles solution files.

• multishot

*.01.*

Files related to the first shot.

*.02.*

Files related to the second shot.

And so on.

• Control files

*.abort

Batch mode computation interruption file. See Interrupting a Computation under Fluent Journal
Commands (p. 195).

cleanup-fluent-*.bat / cleanup-fluent-*.sh

Script file enabling a kill of the Fluent process and sub processes. This is not required in regular exe-
cution mode.

cleanup-flicing-*.bat / cleanup-flicing-*.sh

Script file enabling a kill of the Fluent Icing process.

• Temporary files – Can be safely erased after execution

fluent-*-error.log

Temporary log files for Fluent error conditions.

serverinfo.*

File used to connect Fluent Icing to the Fluent server, also generated by running File → Applications
→ Icing or File → Applications → Server → Start in Fluent main application.

.cmd.3dview*, *.3dtmp

Cache files used by Viewmerical.

*.fsp

Command file used to launch CFD-Post.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
188 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

*.tmp.*

Temporary grid & solution files used to launch Viewmerical or CFD-Post.

2.14. Appendix

2.14.1. Python Console

Many of the icing features and settings can be accessed and changed through the Console window,
using python commands.

Many of the commands and settings present in the Fluent Icing panels can be recorded using python
commands from the File → Start Journal menu. These journal files can also be executed through
the File → Read Script File… menu.

Python Console & Operations

The Console window at the bottom right corner of Fluent Icing allows you to enter commands inter-
actively. The following sections describe commands available in the python console

dir() and the command/attribute list

dir()

Display the list of global commands and top-level objects.

'AddSession', 'Project', 'ReadScriptFile', 'Sim', 'StartTranscript', 'StopTranscript', 'csim', 'current-

Simulation'

dir(object)

Display the list of commands & attributes of the object.

Example 2.2: Entering Commands Interactively

(Assuming test1.cas is already loaded)

dir(Sim[“case_file”])

'Case', 'Connect', 'ConnectionInfo', 'IcingSimulation', 'StartServer'

r = currentSimulation()

A temporary variable can be used to simplify command lines.

dir(r.Case.App.Particles)

'Crystals', 'Droplets', 'Model', 'Type', 'Vapor'

dir(r.Case.App.Particles.Droplets.Particles.Droplets.Conditions)

' Appendix', 'Diameter', 'LWC', 'SLDFlag', 'WaterDensity'

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 189
Fluent Icing

Accessing/Changing Values

The () operator will return the current value of the attribute.

r.Case.App.Particles.Conditions.LWC()

Result: 0.001

r.Case.App.Particles.Conditions.LWC = 0.00344

Commands

If an item listed in dir() is a verb, it is a command.

For example

r.Case.App.Solution.AirflowRun.Initialize()

Sample Script
c = csim()

# Droplets: Configure
c.Particles.Droplets.Conditions.Diameter = 16
c.Solution.ParticlesRun.Solver.CFL = 10
c.Solution.ParticlesRun.RunSettings.NumIterations = 140
# Setup boundary conditions bc =
bc = c.BC["velocity-inlet-4"]
bc.ParticlesInlet.AutoBC = False
bc.ParticlesInlet.DropletDiameter = 16
bc.ParticlesInlet.DropletTemperature = 270
bc.ParticlesInlet.DropletVelocityFlag = True
bc.ParticlesInlet.DropletVelZ = 40.

2.14.2. Batch Launching

Batch Launching Arguments

Fluent Icing can be launched in batch mode by executing the bin/icing (Linux) or bin/icing.bat
(Windows) executable file, and by using the following arguments.

• -R file.py

– After launching Fluent Icing, this option reads and executes the file.py python script.

– By default, the python script will be exited and then the application will be exited (the exit status
code of the application will be non-zero if the Python script has thrown an exception or some
other error occurred).

• -I

– Runs Fluent Icing in interactive batch with-GUI mode (the graphical user interface will be displayed)

– When using this argument, the application will not exit after completion of the python script.

• -N

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
190 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

– Runs Fluent Icing in full batch no-GUI mode (the graphical user interface will not be displayed).

• -g

– Runs Fluent Icing in full batch no-GUI mode (the graphical user interface will not be displayed).

– In this mode, background graphics objects will not be generated, preventing you from accessing
many post-processing or image creation operations.

• -wait

– Waits until execution of the file.py script is complete before continuing batch execution.

• -t CPUs

– Launches the solver using the specified number of CPUs.

Python Commands Relevant for Batch Execution

• enableScriptEventLoop()

– When executing bin/icing using only the -R file.py argument, this command should be
specified at the beginning of the file.py script to ensure the script waits for the execution to
finish. Using this command is an alternative to adding the -I -wait command line options.

Batch Launching Examples

The following sections show a few complete command line usage examples on Linux or Windows:

Linux

bin/icing -R file.py -t 4

• Executes Fluent Icing and runs the file.py python script in interactive batch (with-GUI) mode
using 4 CPUs.

• This method replicates the standard user experience of Fluent Icing.

bin/icing-R file.py -N -t CPU -4

• Executes Fluent Icing and runs the file.py python script in full batch (no-GUI) mode using 4
CPUs.

Windows

• The functionality is the same as the above Linux commands, except that executable should be re-
placed with bin/icing.bat.

2.14.3. Data Structures

Hierarchy
• RemoteSession (Simulation)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 191
Fluent Icing

– Case

→ App

• Airflow

• Particles

• Ice

• BC

• Solution

– AirflowRun

– ParticlesRun

– IceRun

• Project

• PostAnalysis

Global Functions
• currentSimulation()

Returns the current RemoteSession. If multiple Fluent connections exist, the current is related
to the current selection in the outline view.

• csim()

Returns the currentSimulation().Case.App

2.14.4. Project API

A simulation is loaded once a project is created or opened. Project operations are defined in the
Project object. If an operation fails, it will throw an exception.

• Project

– new("filename")

Create a new project file in the specified path/filename, the path must be available. For example
Project.new("/tmp/DEMO") will create /tmp/DEMO.flprj and /tmp/DEMO.cffdb/

– open("filename")

Open an existing project file.

– close()

Close the current project.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
192 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

– erase("filename")

Erase the specified project, filename.flprj and filename.cffcb folder recursively.

– isOpen()

Returns True if a project is currently opened.

– getURL()

Returns the project file (.flprj) with with full path.

– getFolder()

Returns the full path of the project folder (cffdb).

– openSimulation("name")

Load the specified simulation, by name, from the current project. Fluent is launched with the
default.

– importCase("file.cas")

Create a new simulation, importing the case file (.cas or .cas.h5, with path) to the project.
This is equivalent to using the ribbon option Import Case, with default options.

– saveCase()

Save the current settings to the case file (similar to File → Save Case)

– newRun("flow","name",iterations)

newRun("particles","name",iterations)

newRun("ice","name",time)

newRun("multishot","name",iterations)

Create a new run in the current simulation, of the following type, flow, particles, ice or multishot.
The new run name is specified, and is executed for the specified number of iterations (for ice,
the number is a floating point for the time value).

Example 2.3: New Run Operation

Project.erase("demoProject")
Project.new("demoProject")
Project.importCase("grid.cas")

Project.newRun("flow","runA",12)
Project.newRun("particles","runB",12)
Project.newRun("ice","runC",0.001)

Project.close()

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 193
Fluent Icing

2.14.5. Post-Analysis API (Beta)

When using graphical mode (not in pure batch mode), the python environment provides full access
to the graphical capabilities of the Post-Analysis module. In this case, the Post-Analysis python module
offers the related services.

Note:

Journaling capabilities for Post-Analysis are limited, and not all graphical operations will
be recorded (camera configuration and movements, viewports, etc.)

Example 2.4: Sample Usage

m = PostAnalysis.LoadCase(Filename=”naca.01.cas.h5”)
d = PostAnalysis.LoadResult(Filename1=”naca.01.cas.fsp”,Filename2=”naca.01.dat.fsp”,FieldName=”Mach”)

PostAnalysis.DisplaySettings.RestoreView(ViewName="bottom")
PostAnalysis.Dataset[m].Case.Results.Graphics.Mesh["Mesh1"].Options.Edges = True
PostAnalysis.Dataset[m].Case.Results.Graphics.Mesh["Mesh1"].Display()

PostAnalysis.DisplaySettings.RestoreView(ViewName="front")
PostAnalysis.Dataset[d].Case.Results.Graphics.Mesh["Contour1"].Display()

• PostAnalysis

– Init()

Initialize the post-processing framework (this will open the EnSight process and consume a post-
processing license). Automatically invoked as required if LoadCase or LoadResult are used.

– LoadCase(Filename="file.cas.h5”)

Loads the specified case or mesh file. The return value is the identifier of the newly loaded
dataset and can be used as a key in the PostAnalysis.Dataset[key] index. .cas, .cas.h5
and .cas.fsp can be loaded.

– LoadResult(Filename1="file.cas.h5”,Filename2=”file.dat.h5”)

LoadResult(Filename1="file.cas.h5”,Filename2=”file.dat.h5”,FieldName=”Fieldname”)

Loads the specified case and result. The return value is the identifier of the newly loaded dataset
and can be used as a key in the PostAnalysis.Dataset[key] index. .cas/.dat
.cas.h5/.dat.h5 .cas.fsp/.dat.fsp must be loaded in matching pairs. If a FieldName
is provided, the specified field.

– Dataset

Dictionary of loaded datasets

→ keys()

Returns the list of dataset identifiers

– Dataset[key].Case.Results

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
194 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Object containing the dataset’s graphical elements and their settings. Use the () operator to
query the content.

– DisplaySettings

Object containing the viewports and their display settings. Use the () operator to query the
content, and dir() to get the list of available commands.

– GlobalScene

Object containing the scenes and their display settings. Use the () operator to query the content.

2.14.6. Fluent Journal Commands

Once a case is configured in Fluent Icing and saved, it can be used in batch mode scenarios where
a regular Fluent journal file is used. For batch mode execution of Fluent Icing commands, Fluent must
be started with the -license=enterprise command line flag.

Note:

This mode is for advanced users. This mode will not store files in a project folder and has
a limited feature set. Python scripting of Fluent Icing should be preferred.

Use regular Fluent journal file commands to execute standard Fluent operations:

• Load/save the case file

• Load/save the data file (.dat)

• Initialize/Iterate the Fluent airflow solution

• Etc.

In a case file where icing was set-up with Fluent Icing, the text command environment will provide
the icing/ submenu and commands:

• icing/

– file/

– settings/

– flow/

– drop/

– ice/

– multishot/

• file/ commands

– load-file / save-file

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 195
Fluent Icing

→ Load or save a single solution file, of a specified type

– load-all / save-all

→ Load or save all solution files associated with a .cas(.h5)

For FILE.cas(.h5), the default output filename is the filename without the suffix (FILE).

The command would write FILE.droplet, FILE.swimsol, etc.

– reset-file

→ Unload a specific solution type

– reset-all

→ Unload from memory all icing solutions (FENSAP airflow, particles, ice)

– status

→ List the currently loaded icing solutions, and their type

• settings/

– get variable

– set variable value

→ Individual icing settings can be accessed and changed through these commands.

Note:

Advanced users: The settings are the rpvar name without the fensapice/ prefix

– auto-save?

→ Toggle the auto-save feature, which is writing solutions to files at the end of any icing solver
run (airflow, particles, ice). The file is written alongside the case file (FILE.cas(.h5) will
have FILE.droplet, etc.)

– save-converg? save-gmres?

→ Toggle to save the convergence detail of icing solvers in text files alongside the case file

– verbosity

→ Set the log output verbosity for icing solvers. Default is 0 (minimal), set to 1 (Complete) to
get additional information on the solver execution.

• flow/ commands (FENSAP only. Use Fluent text commands for the Fluent airflow solver).

– init

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
196 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

→ Starts and initialize the solver.

→ This is automatically done when running calculate() for the first time, or by running
calculate() after running the solver from another mode (FENSAP airflow, particles, ice or
grid displacement).

– calculate

→ Calculate FENSAP airflow for the number of iterations currently set-up in the flow/niter variable.

→ Multiple calculate commands can be executed, continuing the computation already started.

→ Example 2.5: Use the Icing/Settings/Set Command to Set the Number of Iterations

Icing/settings/set flow/niter 250

→ end

Release solver memory

• drop/ commands (Particles solver)

– init, calculate, end (Similar to flow/ commands)

→ The number of iterations is in drop/niter setting.

• ice/ commands

– run

→ Runs the icing solver (and/or grid displacement)

The total time is in the setting ice/ice_total_time

– end

→ Release solver memory

• multishot/ commands

– run

→ Runs the currently configured multi-shot

If icing settings are not part of your original case file, the command (load-fensapice) can be used to
enable the icing solver commands and to display the icing/ menu. A case file set-up with Fluent
Icing will automatically load the icing module when it is read.

Note:

The full set-up and execution of the icing settings through text commands is possible since
all the icing settings are stored as rpvars and thread variables.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 197
Fluent Icing

Interrupting a computation

On the interactive terminal of FENSAP, Ctrl+C will stop the computation at the end of the current it-
eration. When running in batch mode, the abort file (*.abort) can be used. The abort file is a simple
text file containing the “stop” keyword.

For example, for casefilename.cas

echo stop > casefilename.abort

This will interrupt the solver at the end of the current time step, this will not trigger a journal file error
and the execution will continue to the next steps.

2.14.7. Run Sequence

This feature makes it possible to prepare several runs with different settings and execute them in
sequence without having to manually change settings between runs. It is available if Advanced
Settings is enabled through File → Preferences... → Icing, and activated by selecting File → Read
Run Sequence…. A Select File dialog will open allowing you to select the spreadsheet that contains
the list of runs. The spreadsheet must be in .csv format and follow a certain structure to be read
correctly by Fluent Icing.

Spreadsheet Format
The .csv file must follow the following format:

Keywords Keyword 1 … Keyword n

Simulation Run Solver Setting 1 … Setting n

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
198 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Run 1 Solver choice Value … Value

Run 2 Solver choice Value … Value
Run 3 Solver choice Value … Value

• Run

Name of the run to be executed.

• Solver

Type of solver used for the run. Solver has to be either:

– Flow

– Particles

– Ice

– Multishot

• Settings

This corresponds to the setting you would like change between runs. It has to correspond to a
parameter present in Fluent Icing's Outline View minus the parameter dimension in brackets. For

example, when using Roughness Height [m] as the setting

to be changed between runs, you would omit [m].

Example 2.6: This spreadsheet will execute 2 flow simulations and change the roughness
height at the walls between them, all the other settings are kept as per the case file.

Keywords
Simulation Run Solver Roughness
Height
flow_clean flow 0
flow_rough flow 0.0005

Important:

The setting to be changed needs to be available in the Outline View. For example,
Roughness Height [m] is available if Wall Roughness is set to High roughness
for Icing. You can either specify this setting directly in the Outline View or add a
column in the spreadsheet to set Wall Roughness to High roughness for Icing.
The values can be numbers, strings or logicals depending on the type of the setting.

• Keywords

Keywords are used to filter settings. When a setting is written without a keyword similar to the
previous example, all elements in the Outline View that contain this setting name will be modified.
For example, Temperature appears under:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 199
Fluent Icing

Setup → Airflow → Reference Conditions → Temperature [K]

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlets → pressure-far-field → Temperature [K]

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Walls → wall → Temperature [K]

Keywords can be used to specify which elements are to be modified. Keywords correspond to dif-
ferent sections in the Outline View and can be any of the following:

– Setup Airflow

– Setup Particles

– Setup Ice

– BC (will apply to all boundary conditions)

– Solution Airflow

– Solution Particles

– Solution Ice

– Solution Multishot

– Walls

– Inlets

– Outlets

– The name of a specific boundary condition (example: wall-1, leading-edge or pressure-far-field-

11)

Example 2.7: The Temperature column sets the temperature everywhere in the Outline View
(including airflow reference conditions, inlets, walls). The second column will apply a different
temperature to walls only.

Keywords Walls
Simulation Run Solver Roughness Temperature Temperature
Height
flow_clean flow 0 262.3 280.454
flow_rough flow 0.0005 272.3 290.454

• Simulation

Refers to the simulation used for the given run. If the field is empty, the simulation that is currently
opened is used. If a simulation is entered, the sequence will verify that it is currently loaded. Should
it not be currently load, the sequence will close and open the proper simulation. The simulation
must be present in the project.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
200 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Example 2.8: After the creation of a project, 2 different case files were imported to create a
clean and iced simulation. Angle-of-Attack sweeps for both cases can be set up as shown
below:

Keyword Inlets Inlets

Simulation Run Solver Vector AoA Direction Alpha (X-Y)
Mode
grid_clean clean_AoA_m2deg
flow "Angle of -2 "Vector -2
attack" Angle"
grid_clean clean_AoA_0deg
flow "Angle of 0 "Vector 0
attack" Angle"
grid_clean clean_AoA_2deg
flow "Angle of 2 "Vector 2
attack" Angle"
grid_clean clean_AoA_4deg
flow "Angle of 4 "Vector 4
attack" Angle"
grid_clean clean_AoA_6deg
flow "Angle of 6 "Vector 6
attack" Angle"
grid_clean clean_AoA_8deg
flow "Angle of 8 "Vector 8
attack" Angle"
grid_ice ice_AoA_m2deg
flow "Angle of -2 "Vector -2
attack" Angle"
grid_ice ice_AoA_0deg flow "Angle of 0 "Vector 0
attack" Angle"
grid_ice ice_AoA_2deg flow "Angle of 2 "Vector 2
attack" Angle"
grid_ice ice_AoA_4deg flow "Angle of 4 "Vector 4
attack" Angle"
grid_ice ice_AoA_6deg flow "Angle of 6 "Vector 6
attack" Angle"
grid_ice ice_AoA_8deg flow "Angle of 8 "Vector 8
attack" Angle"

Note:

When executing run sequences that will switch between different simulations, you should
close Fluent Icing after setting up the simulations. Re-open Fluent Icing and your project
and load the simulation corresponding to the first run in the spreadsheet.

Python/TUI Commands
It is possible to execute python or TUI commands between runs by entering python-command or
tui-command in the Solver column and the actual command in the Run column.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 201
Fluent Icing

Example 2.9: After running two particles simulations with different distributions, the first result
is loaded to be the baseline for the following icing simulation

Run solver
flow_rough flow
droplets_mvd particles
droplets_langd particles
Project.loadParticlesResult("droplets_mvd") python-command
ice_mvd ice

Restart Capabilities
When using Run Sequence, Fluent Icing lets you choose between the following options if one or
several runs, defined in your .csv file, share the same name as existing runs in your project.

• Overwrite All

Delete the existing runs and run them again from the .csv file.

• Skip All

Keep the existing runs as is and only execute the runs from the file that do not exist in the project.

• Configure…

Pop up a list of the existing runs to choose which to overwrite.

2.14.8. Field Name Mapping

Solution files that are written using the CFF file format (.dat.fsp files, as loaded by EnSight and
the Post-Analysis module) will display field names that are different than solution files that are written
using the FENSAP format and opened with Viewmerical or CFD-Post. The CFF format field names have
been normalized to common quantities across different Phases (air, droplets, crystals, vapor, ice). The
following table maps the solution field names displayed in Viewmerical (FENSAP format) to the solution
field names inside Post-Analysis (CFF format).

Viewmerical displayed Name Phase Post-Analysis & EnSight

displayed name
Density (kg/m^3) air Density
Pressure (N/m^2) air Pressure
V1-velocity (m/s); Velocity air Velocity u
V2-velocity (m/s) air Velocity v
V3-velocity (m/s) air Velocity w
Static temperature (K) air Temperature
laminar viscosity (kg/m s) air Laminar Viscosity
turbulent viscosity (kg/m s) air Turbulent Viscosity
y-plus air Yplus

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
202 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

u-plus air Uplus

nutilde (m^2/s) air Spalart-Allmaras nuTilda
kay (m^2/s^2) air Turbulent Kinetic Energy
omega (1/s) air Turbulent Eddy Frequency
epsilon (m/s^2) air Turbulent Eddy Dissipation
Classical heat flux (W/m^2) air Wall Heat Flux
Gresho heat flux (W/m^2) air Gresho Heat Flux
shear stress (Pa) air Wall Shear u
shear stress (Pa) air Wall Shear v
shear stress (Pa) air Wall Shear w
roughness height (m) air Roughness Height
wall distance (m) air Wall Distance
Droplet LWC (kg/m^3) droplets Concentration
Droplet V1 (m/s); Velocity droplets Velocity u
Droplet V2 (m/s) droplets Velocity v
Droplet V3 (m/s) droplets Velocity w
Droplet diameter (m) droplets Particle Size
Droplet Temperature (K) droplets Temperature
Droplet Specific Energy(J/kg) droplets Specific Internal Energy
Collection efficiency-Droplet droplets Collection Efficiency
Crystal ICC (kg/m^3) crystals Concentration
Crystal V1 (m/s); Velocity crystals Velocity u
Crystal V2 (m/s) crystals Velocity v
Crystal V3 (m/s) crystals Velocity w
Crystal Diameter (m) crystals Particle Size
Crystal Temperature (K) crystals Temperature
Crystal Specific Energy(J/kg) crystals Specific Internal Energy
Crystal Meltfraction crystals Melt Ratio
Collection efficiency-Crystal crystals Collection Efficiency
Vapor Concentration (kg/m^3) vapor Concentration
Vapor Condensation (kg/m^2s) vapor Condensation Rate
Saturation Vapor Pressure(Pa) vapor Saturation Pressure
Vapor Pressure (Pa) vapor Partial Pressure
Relative Humidity % vapor Relative Humidity
Vapor Diffusivity (m^2/s) vapor Diffusivity
Wet-bulb Temperature (K) vapor Wet Bulb Temperature
Mass Caught (kg/m^2s) ice Mass Caught
Film Thickness (micron) ice Film Thickness
Instant. Ice Growth (kg/m^2s) ice Growth Rate

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 203
Fluent Icing

Ice Growth (kg/m^2) ice Accumulation

Wall Temperature (C) ice Temperature
Ice Density (kg/m^3) ice Density
Cfx; Velocity ice Film Velocity u
Cfy (m/s) ice Film Velocity v
Cfz (m/s) ice Film Velocity w
Instant. Mass Evaporation ice Evaporation Rate
FLOW SOLVER Convective Flux ice Wall Heat Flux
Ch ice Heat Transfer Coefficient
Current Convective Heat Flux ice Current Convective Heat Flux
Anti-Icing Heat Flux ice Anti-Icing Heat Flux
Ice thickness (m) ice Thickness
Evaporative Heat Flux ice Evaporative Heat Flux
Anti-Icing Wall Temp. (K) ice Anti Icing Wall Temperature
Bead Height (m) ice Bead Height

2.15. Launch and Run a Fluent Icing Simulation Using Job Scheduler on
a Cluster
The Fluent Icing workspace uses the remote client/solver framework to maintain a connection to a
background Fluent Solution workspace when connected to and calculating a Fluent Icing simulation.
When connected to a simulation, both workspaces are active.

1. Fluent Icing workspace (client)

• The user interface where you interact with the simulation.

• Typically active on a local machine, or a visualization machine.

2. Fluent Solution workspace (solver)

• Hidden by default

• Where the solver is calculated

• Can be active on a local machine, or on compute nodes on a cluster

• Can be shown at any time by selecting Workspaces → Solution from the Project ribbon, allowing
you to modify settings that are not available in Fluent Icing.

The client/solver framework allows for three options for launching Fluent Icing on a cluster using Job
Scheduler:

• Option 1: (Interactive)

Fluent Icing running on visualization node, and Fluent Solution running on the compute nodes, using
the Fluent Launcher user interface panel to specify launching options.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
204 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Launch and Run a Fluent Icing Simulation Using Job Scheduler on a Cluster

• Option 2: (Batch Mode)

Fluent Icing running on a visualization node, with Fluent Solution running on compute nodes, using
command line options in Fluent Icing to specify the queuing system options.

• Option 3: (Expert – not fully supported)

Fluent Icing and Fluent solver both running on compute nodes, using a custom script to specify
launching options.

Note:

Linux clusters

A newer version of Intel MPI is used and might encounter issues on inter-node (more than
one compute node) computations, on clusters with outdated UCX libraries. A typical
symptom of this issue would be a freeze of the computation, midway in the solver process.
The workaround for this issue are either to:

– Ensure the latest UCX libraries are used on the system.

– Use a different MPI mode than intelmpi, or by specifying the FLUENT_INTEL_MPI_VER-

SION=2018 environment variable.

– Use the FI_PROVIDER=verbs environment variable, to switch to an alternate commu-

nication method.

– This environment variable is not suitable for all environments.

In the following sections, a step-by-step process for each method will be shown.

Option 1: Interactive
• Fluent Icing workspace is running on a visualization node.

• Fluent Solution workspace is running on the compute nodes.

• Fluent Launcher user interface panel is used to specify launching options.

1. Open the Fluent Launcher window (/fluent/bin/fluent) and select Icing to launch Fluent
Icing on your visualization node

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 205
Fluent Icing

2. Specify the appropriate options for the following settings:

a. Solver Processes.

b. Open the Scheduler tab.

c. Enable Use Job Scheduler.

d. Select the queue type (LSF, SGE, PBS or Slurm).

e. Set up the Slurm Submission Host, Slurm Partition, Slurm Account, etc…

The following image shows a typical setup for a Slurm type queue.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
206 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Launch and Run a Fluent Icing Simulation Using Job Scheduler on a Cluster

3. Click Start.

4. Fluent Icing is started on the current machine.

5. Once a simulation is created or loaded, the Fluent workspace will be allocated in the queuing system.
You will then be in queue for the cluster compute nodes. Once the nodes are made available to
you, the solver process will start, and the simulation will be shown in the Outline View.

Option 2: Batch Mode

• Fluent Icing workspace is running on a visualization node.

• Fluent Solution workspace is running on the compute nodes.

• Command line options are used to specify solver launching options.

1. From the Project ribbon, select Workspaces → Options and ensure to disable Use Custom Solver
Launch Settings.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 207
Fluent Icing

2. Launch the icing executable with the same command line argument as when running Fluent in
batch mode.
fluent/bin/icing -t28 -scheduler=slurm -scheduler_queue=partition-name
-scheduler_account=account-name

This can be combined with batch mode arguments to execute a python script, for example -R
test.py -N. See Python Console (p. 189).

3. Create or Open a Fluent Icing project.

4. Create or load a simulation. The Fluent Launcher panel will be skipped (it will not appear), instead,
the solver will be launched using the arguments that were specified when launching icing in the
command line.

5. You will now be in queue for the cluster compute nodes. Once the nodes are made available to
you, the solver process will start, and the simulation will be shown in the Outline View.

Option 3: (Expert - Unsupported)

• Fluent Icing workspace is running on the compute node.

• Fluent Solution workspace is running on the compute nodes.

• A custom script file is used to specify the launching options.

While this is not the initial intended usage of the client/solver framework, expert users could construct
a script to launch the Fluent Icing workspace (client) in a distributed manner over the compute nodes
of a cluster, and furthermore, have the Fluent Solution workspace (solver) also running on the same
compute nodes of the cluster. When constructing the script, the following conditions should be met:

• The custom launching script should launch the Fluent Icing workspace using the icing executable
(/fluent/bin/icing) on the cluster queue directly.

• Once Fluent Icing has been launched on the available compute nodes, the machine file should be
used to define the PRJAPP_FLUENT_PARAMS environment variable. In this way, when the solver is
launched, the machine file will be used to load it on the same machines.

export PRJAPP_FLUENT_PARAMS=”-cnf $MACHINES”, where $MACHINES contains the list of

machines used to launch Fluent Icing.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
208 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Launch and Run a Fluent Icing Simulation Using Job Scheduler on a Cluster

• From the top ribbon, Workspaces → Options → Use Custom Solver Launch Options must be dis-
abled, so that the environment variable above is used.

• The compute nodes must be graphics enabled for this to work properly.

Important:

This is not fully supported by Fluent Icing and should only be attempted by expert users.

The following image below shows an example custom script file used to launch Fluent Icing on a Slurm
type machine. This is only shown as an example, as each machine may need its own custom script.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 209
Fluent Icing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
210 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 3: Fluent Aero
The following sections of this chapter are:
3.1. Overview of Fluent Aero
3.2. Known Issues and Limitations in Fluent Aero 2024 R1
3.3. Quick Start
3.4. Starting Fluent Aero
3.5. Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface
3.6. Creating or Opening a Fluent Aero Project
3.7. Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation
3.8. Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation
3.9. Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation
3.10. Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations
3.11. AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool
3.12. Post-Analysis in Fluent Aero (Beta)
3.13. Post-processing With CFD-Post and EnSight From Fluent Aero
3.14. Preferences
3.15. Launching Fluent Aero in Batch or on a Cluster using Job Scheduler
3.16. Python API and Console
3.17. Appendix

3.1. Overview of Fluent Aero

Fluent Aero allows you to easily explore the aerodynamic performance of aircraft from a wide range of
flight regimes, from subsonic to hypersonic conditions, all within a dedicated Fluent Application Client
environment. A streamlined workflow guides you through the creation of a matrix of flight conditions
or design points where single and multiple flight parameters, such as angle of attack, Mach number,
altitude, etc., can vary. Most common models, solvers and convergence settings of Fluent are tuned
using the latest best practices for external aerodynamic problems and are available in Fluent Aero's
user interface. Simulations can then be conducted in a quicker and more user-friendly environment.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 211
Fluent Aero

Furthermore, the full capabilities of the Fluent Solution workspace remain accessible when its session
is displayed through the Fluent Aero ribbon’s Workspaces → Solution button.

Note:

To leverage the full capabilities of the Fluent Aero workspace, EnSight (required for the Post-
Analysis feature) should be included in your Ansys installation.

Note:

Fluent Aero is intended for use in simulating external flow around aerodynamic objects, with:

• air as the fluid material

• steady-state flow

• viscous, Navier-Stokes flow

• stationary (non-dynamic) meshes

• a flow domain modeling freestream flow, or flow inside a wind tunnel

Therefore, the features that are available in the Fluent Aero workspace are selected based
on their applicability for such purposes. When calculating a solution, many of these features
make use of the relevant feature in the connected (and normally hidden) Fluent Solution
workspace. The Fluent Solution workspace, however, contains many more features that are
intended for a broader range of applications. There may be some features that can be accessed
in the Fluent Solution workspace that may not be relevant to the Fluent Aero workspace,
so care should be taken when modifying settings from the Fluent Solution workspace. To
learn more about how the Fluent Aero workspace is connected to the Fluent Solution
workspace, go to Fluent Aero Workspace, the Solver Session, and the Fluent Solution Work-
space (p. 244).

3.2. Known Issues and Limitations in Fluent Aero 2024 R1

• Disabling the Initialize Between DPs option in the Custom Convergence Settings is not working
as expected. The solution will still be initialized between each design point calculation. The workaround
is to:

1. Disable Initialize Between DPs.

2. Select Update to update all design points.

3. Select Interrupt after the first design point has been initialized and calculated for at least
one iteration.

4. Select Continue.

The first design point calculation will continue, and all subsequent design points will not be initialized,
instead calculating from the previous design point solution. (931950)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
212 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Known Issues and Limitations in Fluent Aero 2024 R1

• When adding a new monitor and restarting the calculation for a design point, the existing residuals
for that design point will be lost. To preserve the residual history from previous iterations, create a
copy of the .fconverg file for that design point before restarting the calculation. (854394)

• AET Workflow: If the twist angle of a section defined in the input 3D blade CAD is close to or above
90 degrees, the leading edge and trailing edge position of the section may not be determined correctly.
(877628)

• The cfd_hsf library files and license increment are required to use the Two Temperature model,
which can improve the accuracy of hypersonic flow simulations. If you would like to use this feature,
please check for the availability of the cfd_hsf license increment in your license file and contact
your Ansys representative to add this increment if needed.

• Linux: Fluent now uses Intel MPI 2021 by default, enabling compatibility with newer platforms.
However, this newer MPI library might cause issues on older clusters (related to the UCX library version
bundled by the system).

Two workarounds are possible for this issue:

– Use the environment variable FLUENT_INTEL_MPI_VERSION=2018 to switch to the same MPI

library as used in 2022 R1. This should work on all platforms compatible with Intel MPI 2018.

– Use the environment variable FI_PROVIDER=verbs to revert Intel MPI 2021 to an alternate, more
compatible, communication mechanism.

Note:

This FI_PROVIDER option is only applicable to clusters and cannot be used on a single
machine without InfiniBand. The environment variable can either be set globally in the
user account or specified in the Environment tab of the Fluent Launcher.

• The Post-Analysis (Beta) feature is a beta feature that currently includes some important limitations
(528941):

– Using Post-Analysis with Fluent solution files (.dat.h5) will display some surface variables as
unavailable, and large solutions may have a long loading time.

– Some Post-Analysis operations will not be recorded as journal commands, such as the reorientation
of the graphics display window.

• Fluent Aero requires an Enterprise license. If an Enterprise level license is not available when con-
necting to a simulation, Fluent Aero will either display the following error message, This applic-
ation is unable to checkout a license, or perpetually remain in a Waiting to
connect state with no error message given. You can press the Stop button to exit this state. On
Linux machines, you can look at the recent licdebug files inside the .ansys directory of your ac-
count to determine if the license check failed. (913505)

• If a calculation is paused due to a temporary disconnection of the license server, the calculation will
not automatically resume if a license server reconnects. However, once the license resumes, you can
continue by pressing the Continue button. (539807)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 213
Fluent Aero

• 2D plots of surface data (for example, Pressure Coefficient plots along wing sections) created using
Results → Plots may contain extra lines that connect non-neighbouring solution values. (543369)

• Performing an initialize or iterate command from the Solution workspace (for example, under Solution
→ Calculation Activities → Execute Commands) is not supported while using Fluent Aero, and doing
so may have unintended consequences on your Fluent Aero simulation.

Refer to Known Limitations in Ansys Fluent 2024 R1 in the Fluent User's Guide for other issues that could
affect your Fluent Aero simulation.

3.3. Quick Start

Complete work procedures, with example dataset and conditions, are available as a separate tutorial
guide - Fluent Aero Tutorials.

To Set-up and Run Simulations with Fluent Aero

• Launch Fluent on your computer. In the Fluent Launcher window that appears, set the Capability
Level to Enterprise. Select Aero from the left panel. Set the number of Solver Processes, and click
Start.

• In the Fluent Aero user interface, in the Project ribbon, select Workspaces → Options. A drop down
menu will appear. For a typical run on your local machine, ensure that all options are disabled. Spe-
cifically, if you would like to calculate your simulations on your local machine, ensure that Use Custom
Solver Launch Settings is disabled.

– These options and more are also available from File → Preferences... within the Preferences
window, in Fluent Aero's main menu.

• In the Project ribbon, select Project → New, and choose an appropriate name and location for the
project file, and click OK.

• Go to Simulations → New Aero Workflow, and select a suitable (.cas, .cas.h5) file.

Note:

This case file must:

– Contain a 3D mesh that is oriented such that the geometry is aligned with a cartesian
axis.

– For a Freestream type domain, contain a pressure-farfield or a pressure-farfield with a

pressure outlet type boundary to define the main flow inlet/outlet boundary conditions.

– For a WindTunnel type domain, contain mass-flow-inlet or a velocity-inlet to define

the main flow inlet boundary conditions and a pressure-outlet type boundary to define
the main flow outlet boundary conditions of the test section in the tunnel, and wall,
symmetry, or periodic type boundary conditions to define the side boundaries of this
test section. Name these boundaries windtunnel-inlet, windtunnel-outlet,
windtunnel-wall*, windtunnel-symm* and windtunnel-periodic* to ensure
that the automatic domain type setup works properly.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
214 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quick Start

– Be set to material type (Air.)

• A new simulation is created. When prompted, choose an appropriate name for the new simulation.
Enable Load in Solver and select OK. A simulation folder with the chosen name is then created inside
the project, and the case file is loaded into a remote solver session.

• Once the solver is loaded, the Project ribbon view will be displayed. Use the aero application to review
and apply the conditions and settings.

– Geometric Properties

→ Ensure the correct domain type for your geometry has been selected (Freestream or WindTunnel).

→ Define the geometric grid orientation with respect to the cartesian axis, and the reference length
and area.

– Airflow Physics

→ Solver: Choose between Pressure-based or Density-based Fluent solver types.

→ Models: Choose the Viscous model. If the Density-based solver is selected, the Two Tem-
perature model becomes available.

→ Materials: Select the fluid materials for your simulation.

– Simulation Conditions

→ Choose the input Parameter types and set up the atmospheric Flight Conditions to use in your
simulation for each Design Point.

→ Choose a Distribution for each parameter

• Constant: Specify conditions that will be common to all Design Points.

• Uniform: Specify conditions that will vary uniformly per Design Point.

• Custom: Specify conditions that will vary non-uniformly per Design Point.

→ Use the Input: Design Points table to set the custom input values for each design point.

– Component Groups

→ Organize the domain’s boundary zones into aircraft Component Groups, such as Wing, Engine,
Fuselage, etc., to help the setup of boundary conditions and the analysis of individual aircraft
components.

→ Ensure that the Freestream or WindTunnel group correctly defines the external boundary of
your domain.

→ Specify zone specific boundary conditions (such as a mass flow on an engine exhaust).

– Files

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 215
Fluent Aero

→ Select which types of output files to save per design point. Reduce the amount of disk space
the consumed by large simulations by disabling Write Case Files and Write Solution Files. Al-
ternatively, choose to Autosave Intermediate Solution Files or Write Post Files to obtain ad-
ditional solutions to post process your results.

– Solve

→ Set the number of Iterations to run for each design point.

→ Keep Convergence Settings to Default or Robust to use Fluent Aero’s default CFD solver
parameters. Set Convergence Settings to Custom if you would like to change the default value
of various CFD solver parameters.

• Once the appropriate conditions and settings are applied, click Solve and then click Update to start
the calculations.

• Once the simulation has started, monitor them using the Convergence window. A Results node
becomes available in the Outline View tree – use the various Tables, Graphs, Plots and Contours
options to investigate the results.

3.4. Starting Fluent Aero

Fluent Aero can be started from either:

• The Fluent Launcher

– Launch Fluent. In the Fluent Launcher window, set Capability Level to Enterprise, and select
Aero. Set an appropriate number of Solver Processes and click Start to launch Fluent Aero.

• The Fluent Launcher can be accessed in the from your Ansys installation folder:

– Windows

fluent/ntbin/win64/fluent.exe in the Ansys Inc/v241 folder.

– Linux

fluent/bin/fluent in the ansys_inc/v241 folder.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
216 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface

Note:

If more advanced launching options are required, additional options can be accessed
from the other tabs. For example, the Scheduler tab can be used to setup a job
scheduler to run Fluent Aero calculations on a cluster. For more information on these,
refer to Launch Using Job Scheduler on a Cluster (p. 444).

3.4.1. Solver and License Requirements

When you load a case file into Fluent Aero, the solver launches using the number of CPUs that you
specified. This uses the following license keys:

• CFD solver level 3 (Enterprise)

• HPC tokens linked to the number of CPUs requested

The Fluent Aero application does not consume license keys and can be used to invoke external
postprocessors. A single post-processor can be launched from Fluent Aero and share the license seat
as the Fluent solver. Additional post-processing tools will consume their own license seat.

3.5. Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface

The Fluent Aero graphical user interface consists of the following components.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 217
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.1: The Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface

• File (Top-Left)

Consists of file management commands (Open Project..., Save Case, Import file..., etc.)

• Ribbon (Top)

– Project

→ Project management commands

→ Simulation management commands

→ Workspaces management commands

→ AET Workflow management commands

– Design Points

→ Design point table management commands

→ Design point status management commands

– Results

→ Select post-processing commands and quick-view actions

• Project View (Left)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
218 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface

The left side panel shows the Project View by default. Before opening a project, this view shows
available and recent projects that can be opened. Once a project is open, this view contains a list of
all simulations, runs and output files contained in your Fluent Aero project.

– Simulation Folders

The Project View will display a list of simulation folders, which are created when the New Aero
Workflow… option is used. If a solver session is currently loaded, (loaded) will be displayed next
to the corresponding simulation folder name.

– Results Folder

→ If a simulation has been calculated, a Results folder will appear inside the simulation folder. All
output files of a particular run will be contained within the Results folder.

• Outline View (Top-Center)

The Outline View is displayed in the top-center of the user interface, towards the upper right of the
Project View by default. This view contains the currently loaded case. A loaded case is connected
to a loaded solver session and provides access to:

– Filter Text

Perform wildcard and regular expression searches in the tree using the Filter Text entry box at
the top of the tree where you can search and organize a list using a text string. For more details,
see Filtering Lists and Using Wildcards in the Fluent User's Guide.

– Setup

Contains steps to setup and organize your geometry and specify reference parameters and simulation
conditions.

→ Geometric Properties

Settings to define the geometry orientation and reference sizes.

→ Airflow Physics

Settings to define various airflow physics models to use in your simulation, including solver type,
turbulence model, and air properties.

→ Simulation Conditions

Settings to define the freestream flight conditions of each design point of your aerodynamic
simulation (such as altitude, Mach number, etc.)

→ Component Groups

Settings to organize your mesh boundary zones into groups of aircraft components (such as
Engine, or Wing components) and to define group or boundary zone specific conditions (such
as engine exhaust temperature and mass flow).

– Solution

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 219
Fluent Aero

Contains steps to setup your CFD solver parameters.

– → Solve

Settings to define and start the calculation process including default and robust proposed
settings as well as custom and case settings solver and convergence parameters, if necessary.

– Results

Access to quick post-processing features to explore the results of each design point.

– Post-Analysis (Beta)

Access to detailed post-processing features to explore the results of each design point, including
side by side comparison of solution files of different design points.

• Properties Window (Bottom-Center)

Contains the settings of a selected item in the Outline View.

• Graphics Window (Right)

Displays mesh, numerical, post-processed and monitoring data.

• Console Window (Bottom-Right)

Displays the progress of your simulation and allows scripting of commands. The Fluent Aero console
is a Python console.

By default, a single console contains both the local console and the Solution workspace transcript.

The Solution workspace transcript is prefixed by | and displayed in gray. If multiple workspaces are
connected simultaneously, the colors and the prefix will vary 1|, 2|, etc.

The Solution workspaces can be set to their own individual consoles by enabling Use Separate
Consoles for Sessions under Preferences → Aero. The color of the Solution workspace transcript,
when combined to the main console, can also be set in the preferences.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
220 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface

When entering a python command into the Console, it is applied directly to the Fluent Aero workspace.
To send a text command to the Fluent Solution workspace and solver, right-click the simulation case
in the Outline View and choose Send Command...

Alternatively, you can go to the Solution workspace directly using the Workspaces → Solution
button in the Project ribbon to reveal the Solution workspace and enter the commands in that
window directly.

3.5.1. Using the Help System

Fluent includes an integrated help system that provides easy access to the program documentation.
Through the graphical user interface, you have the entire Fluent User's Guide and other documentation
available to you with the click of a mouse button. The Fluent User's Guide and other manuals are
displayed on the Ansys help site, which allows you to use links and search tools and index tools to
find the information you need.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 221
Fluent Aero

Use the help menu ( ) icon in the upper right-hand corner of the workspace to access its docu-
mentation. Some workspaces even have field-level user assistance that provide information and
guidance about a particular field.

In addition to Online Technical Resources..., and the Product Improvement Program, you can also
obtain information about the version and release of Fluent you are running by selecting the Version...
option in help menu.

3.5.2. Layout Menu

The top-right corner of the main window contains a layout menu. This menu permits to toggle
between different panel distributions. Upon start-up, Fluent Aero will set up these panels using the
view that was previously selected.

• Default: The default view of the panels of Fluent Aero. Using this layout, the Project View will be
displayed as a column on the left, and the Outline View will be displayed above the Properties
panel as a single column to the right of the Project View.

• Widescreen: Using this layout, the Project View will be displayed as a column to the left, the
Outline View will be displayed as a column to the right of the Project View, and the Properties
panel will be displayed to the right of the Outline View.

• Stacked: Using this layout, the Project View will be displayed as a column to the left, the Outline
View will be displayed as a column to the right of the Project View, and the Outline View will be
stacked in the same area behind the Project View. You can switch between displaying the Outline
View and the Project View by selecting their associated tab. The Properties panel will be displayed
to the right of the stacked Project View / Outline View.

• Console – In Message Window: If enabled, the console is hidden, and accessible through the
message window. To access the message window, click the message indicator at the bottom right
of the main window.

The indicator icon changes if there are warning or error messages. If disabled, the console panel
is displayed again.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
222 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface

• Console – Minimize: Show or minimize the console panel. When minimized, a panel is displayed
in the left drawer.

3.5.3. File Menu

The Fluent Aero File menu consists of the following options.

• New Project...: Creates a new Fluent Aero project.

• Open Project...: Opens an existing project.

• Close Project: Closes a project.

• New Aero Workflow...: Imports a Fluent case or mesh file, creates a new simulation, and loads a
solver session.

• Save Case: Saves the current settings to the Fluent case file stored in the simulation.

• Save Case As…: Saves the current settings to a new case file. The new case file must be stored in
the same simulation folder and will become the default case file of the simulation.

• AET Workflow: Access the AET Workflow management commands.

• Import File…: Copy a file external to the project, into the current simulation folder.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 223
Fluent Aero

• Read Script File...: Selects a python script file to execute.

• Start Journal…/ End Journal: Selects a python script file to record and write a journal file of sup-
ported commands / stops writing.

• Preferences…: Opens the Preferences window. The Aero preference window is specific to Fluent
Aero.

• Exit: Exits Fluent Aero. All solver sessions will also be terminated.

3.5.4. Ribbon Commands

There are three ribbon commands: Project, Design Points and Results.

• Project

– Project

→ New…: Creates a new Fluent Aero project.

→ Open…: Opens an existing project. Command is available if no project is open.

→ Close: Closes a project. Command is available if a project is open.

→ View Options: Provides options to change the display in the Project View.

→ Refresh: Refreshes the Fluent Aero user interface.

– Simulations

→ New Aero Workflow: Imports a new case file and begins a new aero workflow simulation.

→ Load Simulation: Loads the simulation that has been selected in the Project panel. Command
is available if no simulation is open.

→ Close Simulation: Closes the simulation that has been selected in the Project panel. Command
is available if a simulation is open.

→ Duplicate Simulation: Duplicates the simulation that has been selected in the Project panel.

→ Save Case: Saves the current settings to the Fluent case file stored in the simulation.

– Workspaces

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
224 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface

→ Solution: Displays the Fluent Solution workspace solver window.

→ Options: Settings related to the Fluent solver workspace.

• Use Custom Solver Launch Settings:

When enabled, New Aero Workflow or Load Simulation will first open a Fluent Launcher
window, where additional settings can be applied to determine how the solver is launched.
This allows you to load the solver on a different machine than where Fluent Aero is open,
or to use a job scheduler to launch the solver on a cluster with a queuing system or with a
different number of CPUs than what is specified as default. This option is also accessible in
the Preferences panel.

• Show Solution Workspace on Launch:

The Fluent solver window will be shown as the solver is launched.

• Enable Solution Workspace Graphics:

With this option enabled, the Fluent window will also have a graphics window.

• Interrupt process:

This terminates the current Fluent solver and stops any process on the local or remote ma-
chine.

– AET Workflow

→ New…:

Opens the New AET Workflow dialog.

→ Continue…:

Opens the Continue AET Workflow dialog.

→ Interrupt:

Interrupts any currently running step of the AET workflow.

→ View Input Geometry:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 225
Fluent Aero

Loads the input 3D blade geometry into a separate SpaceClaim window where the geometry
can be viewed and edited.

• Design Points

– Input Table: Manages design point entries

→ Add DP: Add a new design point.

→ Delete DP: Delete an existing design point.

→ Import / Export DP: Import or export design points from or to a .csv file.

→ Reload Design Points: Reload the design points table from Results. If Results have already
been computed, this command will reload their respective design point table values, thereby
removing any changes that may have been made since then.

– Solve: Quickly launches a set of design points based on their status or predefined criteria.

→ Update: Update all design points that are set to Needs Update, Continue To Update, or
Initialize in the Input:Design Points table.

→ Initialize…, Update… and Continue…: Allows you to quickly initialize, update or continue
a set of design points without manually setting their status in the Input:Design Points table.
These options share the same drop-down menu as shown below.

• All DPs: Initialize, update or continue to update all design points.

• Current DP: Initialize, update or continue to update only the current design point.

• DPs – Conv. Criteria: Initialize, update or continue to update the design points that do not
satisfy the convergence criteria that was set. See image below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
226 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface

– Status: Set or refresh the status of design points.

→ Set Status: Set the status of a group of design points. This command will open a panel where
you can employ various filters to set the status of multiple design points simultaneously. This
panel can be used to create a personalized set of design points to update, initialize or to save.

• Select DPs: Controls which design point will be selected. Different types of selections are
provided.

– All: Changes the status of all design points.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 227
Fluent Aero

– Custom: Changes the status of a custom list of design points. To create this list, enter the
design point numbers of interest in the List of DPs. Use commas (,) and hyphens (-) to
separate and create a group of design points within this list.

– Convergence Criteria: Changes the status of the design points based on their convergence
criteria. In Filter By, choose a convergence criterion. These criteria also appear in the
Table:Summary of Fluent Aero under the Conv. Criteria Met? column.

– Status: Changes the status of the design points based on the Filter By status, as shown
by the Status column in the Table:Summary.

Note:

Waiting … groups all the statuses that start with Waiting.

• Choose a Status: Controls the new status that will be set to the design points selected.
Press Apply to set the new status of these design points.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
228 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Aero Graphical User Interface

→ Refresh Status: Refreshes the Status of each design point to the value that was obtained at
the end of your most recent calculation or to Needs Update, if no calculation has been per-
formed or if simulation conditions have been modified after the calculation. This option is
similar to the Refresh Status command in the Design Points → Status ribbon area.

• The second part of the Status section is a text area that shows the current number of design
points that have a given status.

– Updating (0) becomes Updating (DP-xx) during a calculation and shows the design
point that is being updated. The corresponding status is Updating.

– Queued (xx) shows the number of design points that are waiting to be updated. The
status of these design points starts with Waiting To in the Input:Design Points table.

– Updated (xx) is the number of design points that have been updated or initialized. The
corresponding status is either Updated or Initialized.

– To Update (xx) shows the number of design points that are to be updated. This represents
design points with Needs Update, Continue To Update, or Initialize statuses.

– Failed/Interrupted (xx) shows the number of design points that diverged, failed or were
interrupted. Therefore, this covers Interrupted or Failed statuses.

– Other (xx) shows the number of design points that have other types of status.

• Results

– Dataset: Selects the currently active dataset, which will apply to the other Results ribbon options.
The list contains any currently loaded Post-Analysis datasets, and one entry for any currently
loaded Fluent simulation. A Post-Analysis dataset can be loaded from disk by using the Load
Dataset... command.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 229
Fluent Aero

– Quick-View: Accesses the post-processing shortcuts.

– Surface, Graphics: Creates new post-processing objects for the Post-Analysis tool. These options
are only available when the active dataset is set to a Post-Analysis dataset.

– Plots: Create new line plots of post-processed data. New XY Plot… can be used to generate an
XY Plot of solution data from the active dataset. New Parametric Plot… can be used to generate
a graphical comparison of selected input and output variables across all design points in a sim-
ulation folder.

– Dataset - Sequence: Select and sequence through the active datasets in the Post-Analysis tool.

3.6. Creating or Opening a Fluent Aero Project

3.6.1. Creating a Fluent Aero Project

Upon startup, the Fluent Aero application has no project loaded, and presents an empty project
window.

Project → New… or File → New Project… creates a new project. A window will appear prompting
you to set a location and name for the new project folder. A project file (projectname.flprj)
and folder (projectname.cffdb/) is then written to the disk in the location selected, and the
new project opens in Fluent Aero. Since this is a new project, Project View remains empty. Once the
project is open, the simulation commands become available.

3.6.2. Opening a Fluent Aero Project

Project → Open… or File → Open Project… opens a preexisting Fluent Aero project. A window
appears allowing you to navigate to and select a preexisting project file (projectname.flprj).
All simulations contained within the project will be displayed in the left-side Project View.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
230 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Opening a Fluent Aero Project

After opening a Project, the project name will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the Fluent
Aero window.

3.6.3. Project Library

Project → Library displays a list of projects that were previously opened in Fluent Aero. Double-
clicking a project in this list opens it.

In the Project Library, newly opened projects are added to the Recent folder.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 231
Fluent Aero

The following options are available when right-clicking a given project in the Project Library window:

• Open: Opens the project.

• Rename: Renames the project.

• Move to New Folder...: Creates a new folder in the Project Library, and moves the project to that
folder. The project location on the disk is unchanged.

• Remove From List: Removes the project from the Project Library list. The project is not erased.

• Remove Invalid Icons: If a project is moved or erased on the disk, it will display as a broken icon,
which is an invalid icon. This command will remove all invalid project references from the Project
Library.

• Open in File Explorer: Opens a Windows file explorer to the project location.

• Edit Notes: Opens the Properties panel for the selected item in the Notes section. The Notes
section permits to record text notes for a project item. If a project item has a note attached to it,
it will display with a * in the file name suffix. Ctrl double-click also permits to display the Notes
panel directly.

• Properties: Opens a window that shows the project location in the disk. This window also allows
you to write some notes for future reference.

• Library Management:

– Drag and drop projects from one folder to another, to move them across categories. The project
is added at the top of the list.

– Drag and drop with the Alt key, to reorder projects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
232 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation

– The contextual menu (right-click) of folders that contain projects permits you to sort the folder
content by Sort by Name.

Note:

Each release uses its own Project Library to track it’s recently used projects. However,
the Project Library from the previous releases will be initially imported as a new
folder called -Imported- in the Project Library, so that older projects can be easily
accessed.

3.6.4. Project Close

To close a currently open Project, select Project → Close or File → Close Project…

3.7. Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation

To create a simulation, a Fluent .cas[.h5] or a Fluent .msh[.h5] file must be loaded. This file has
certain requirements to be compatible with a Fluent Aero simulation.

3.7.1. General Case File or Mesh File Requirements

The Fluent .cas[.h5] or .msh[.h5] file must respect the following requirements:

• 3D Only

2D Fluent mode is not supported. 2D geometries are supported via 3D meshes with symmetry or
periodic planes.

• If you would like to simulate a Freestream type domain, a pressure-farfield boundary type or a
pressure-farfield with pressure-outlet boundary type should be used to define the main farfield
flow boundary. See more details in Freestream or WindTunnel Domain Type Requirements (p. 234).

• If you would like to simulate a WindTunnel type domain, a mass-flow-inlet or velocity-inlet

boundary type should be used to define the inlet flow and a pressure-outlet boundary type should
be used to define the outlet flow. See more details in Freestream or WindTunnel Domain Type
Requirements (p. 234).

Note:

It is beneficial for the boundary zone names and types to be set up properly inside a
Fluent Solution workspace or a Fluent Meshing workspace before importing the

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 233
Fluent Aero

.cas[.h5] or .msh[.h5] file into Fluent Aero. Doing so will help Fluent Aero auto-
matically set up the domain type as it imports the domain.

Note:

Fluent Aero is intended for use in simulating external flow around aerodynamic objects,
with:

• Air as the fluid material

• Steady-state flow

• Viscous, Navier-Stokes flow

• Stationary (non-dynamic) meshes

• A flow domain modeling freestream flow, or flow inside a wind tunnel

Therefore, the features that are available in the Fluent Aero workspace are selected based
on their applicability for such purposes. When calculating a solution, many of these features
make use of the relevant feature in the connected (and normally hidden) Fluent Solution
workspace. The Fluent Solution workspace, however, contains many more features that
are intended for a broader range of applications. There may be some features that can be
accessed in the Fluent Solution workspace that may not be relevant to the Fluent Aero
workspace, so care should be taken when modifying settings from the Fluent Solution
workspace. To learn more about how the Fluent Aero workspace is connected to the Fluent
Solution workspace, go to Fluent Aero Workspace, the Solver Session, and the Fluent
Solution Workspace (p. 244).

3.7.2. Freestream or WindTunnel Domain Type Requirements

Fluent Aero supports two domain types, Freestream and WindTunnel, each with a different set of
requirements for the input mesh or case file. Furthermore, if the boundary zones are set up as recom-
mended, Fluent Aero will be able to automatically determine the domain type and automatically set
up the simulation and its associated Freestream or WindTunnel component group.

3.7.2.1. Freestream
A Freestream domain type is used to simulate the airflow around an aircraft during typical in-flight
conditions. The computational domain is setup such that its external boundaries are located far
enough away from the aircraft model so that their presence does not impact the computational
solution near the aircraft model. Typically, the distance between the aircraft model surface and the
external boundaries is recommended to be at least 30 times the characteristic length of the aircraft.

Freestream Domain Type Requirements

Fluent Aero requires the following restrictions for the external boundary zones:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
234 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation

• At least one pressure-far-field type boundary zone must be used to define the external
freestream boundary of the domain.

• A pressure-outlet type boundary zone may be used to define the general outlet flow region
of the freestream domain. However, it must be attached to a pressure-far-field.

• A symmetry type boundary zone may be used to represent a symmetric geometry.

In the images below, a hemispherical pressure-far-field type boundary zone (red) with a circular
symmetry type boundary zone surrounds the wall zones (grey) defining and aircraft geometry. In
this case, no pressure-outlet type boundary zone is used to define the freestream domain.

Automatically Setup of a Freestream Group

Once Fluent Aero loads a mesh or case file, it will attempt to automatically determine if a Freestream
domain type is being used.

• First, it will search for a pressure-far-field type boundary zone that defines the freestream
boundary of the domain. If one is found, Fluent Aero will determine that you are importing a
Freestream type domain, and the pressure-far-field zone will be added to the Freestream group.

• Next, it will search for a pressure-outlet boundary that is attached to the pressure-far-field, and
if found, this boundary will also be added to the Freestream group.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 235
Fluent Aero

A console message will appear to summarize the auto domain type setup. If there were any issues
in setup, a warning will be printed, and you will have the opportunity to modify the Freestream
group manually.

The Domain Type will be set to Freestream in the Geometric Properties step.

And, the pressure-far-field type zone and pressure-outlet type zones will be added to the
Freestream group under Component Groups.

3.7.2.2. WindTunnel
A WindTunnel domain type is used to simulate the airflow around an aircraft model inside an ex-
perimental wind tunnel test section. The computational domain is setup such that its external
boundaries appropriately match those used for an experimental wind tunnel test, which may be
located close enough to the aircraft model so that their presence has some impact on the compu-
tational solution near the aircraft model. The object of such a simulation would be to match as
closely as possible the wall-effects associated with the wind tunnel test.

WindTunnel Domain Type Requirements

Fluent Aero requires the following restrictions for the external boundary zones:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
236 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation

• A mass-flow-inlet or velocity-inlet type boundary zone must be used to define the wind
tunnel inlet flow upstream of the aircraft model. It is recommended that this boundary be
named windtunnel-inlet so that the automatic setup can register the boundary.

– The inlet boundary zone should be normal to the direction of the flow, as the flow will
be automatically set to be Normal to Boundary.

• A pressure-outlet type boundary zone may be used to define the wind tunnel outlet flow
downstream of the aircraft model. It is recommended that this boundary be named wind-
tunnel-outlet so that the automatic setup can register this boundary.

• wall, symmetry or periodic type boundary zones may be used to represent the wind tunnel
walls. It is recommended that this boundary be named windtunnel-wall*, windtunnel-
symmetry* or wall-periodic* so that the automatic setup can register these bound-
aries.

In the images below, a velocity-inlet type boundary zone (blue), a pressure-outlet type boundary
zone (red), wall type (grey) and periodic type (teal) boundary zones define the wind tunnel domain
while additional wall type (grey) boundary zones define an airfoil inside the test section.

Automatic Setup of a WindTunnel Group

Once Fluent Aero loads a mesh or case file, it will attempt to automatically determine if a WindTun-
nel domain type is being used.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 237
Fluent Aero

• First, it will search for any boundary that has windtunnel in its name (case insensitive and can
include “ - “ in the name). If a boundary is found, Fluent Aero will determine that the WindTunnel
Domain Type is being used.

• Next, it will search for a velocity-inlet with windtunnel in its name, and add that boundary to
the WindTunnel group.

• Next, it will search for a pressure-outlet with windtunnel in its name, and add that boundary
to the WindTunnel group

• Finally, it will search for any wall or symmetry type boundaries with windtunnel in its name,
and add those boundaries to the WindTunnel group.

A console message will appear to summarize the auto domain type setup. If there were any issues
in setup, a warning message will be printed, and you will have the opportunity to modify the
WindTunnel group manually.

The Domain Type will be set to WindTunnel in the Geometric Properties step.

And, the windtunnel-* named zones will be added to the WindTunnel group under Component
Groups.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
238 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation

3.7.3. Creating a New Simulation by Using New Aero Workflow

If a new project has been created, the Fluent Aero application has no case loaded and presents an
empty Project View window. A new Fluent Aero simulation can be created by clicking the New Aero
Workflow button.

Figure 3.2: New Aero Workflow

Select Simulation → New Aero Workflow to import a case file and create a new simulation. A window
will appear where a case file (.cas, .cas.h5) or mesh file case file (.msh, .msh.h5) can be selected.

After a case file has been selected, a window will appear requesting a name for the new simulation.
Clicking OK will create a new simulation in the currently open project folder. The case file will be
copied into the new simulation folder and will be used as the primary case file for that simulation.

• Load in Solver: If enabled, the solver is loaded with the selected case file. If disabled, the solver is
not loaded, and you can choose to load the solver at a later time.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 239
Fluent Aero

• Use Custom Solver Launch Settings: If disabled, the solver will be loaded on your local machine
and no further input will be required. However, if enabled, a Fluent Launcher window will appear.
If so, set the appropriate number of Solver Processes, and, if necessary, specify the Remote machine
or Scheduler and click Start.

When the case import is complete, the new simulation folder appears in your Project View. This
folder contains the case file that has been imported. If Load in Solver was selected, a solver session
opens in the background, and the simulation folder is listed with (loaded) next to its name.

The currently selected simulation will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the Fluent Aero window,
next to the currently opened project.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
240 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation

3.7.4. Loading a Simulation

From the Project View, you can load a simulation by right-clicking a simulation folder and selecting
Load in solver, by double-clicking it, or by using Project → Simulations → Load Simulation.

By default, Load in Solver will launch a solver either on the same machine where Fluent Aero is open
with your default number of CPUs, or on the requested machine using any other options provided
in the initial Fluent Launcher (such as Use Job Scheduler, if any). Alternatively, if Use Custom Solver
Launch Options has been enabled in the Preferences, a Fluent Launcher window will appear allowing
the specification of different options to launch the solver.

Once the simulation is loaded, (loaded) will appear next to the simulation folder name in your Project
View, and the Fluent Aero Setup and Solution branches will be displayed in the Outline View.

3.7.5. Closing a Simulation

From the Project View, you can close a simulation by right-clicking a simulation folder and selecting
Close Solver.

From the Outline View, you can close a simulation by right-clicking a simulation folder and selecting
Close Solver. From the Project ribbon, you can close a simulation by clicking Close Simulation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 241
Fluent Aero

In both cases, the solver and the simulation will be closed and (loaded) will no longer appear next
to the simulation.

A panel may appear asking if you would like to save the case file before closing. Selecting Yes is
generally recommended, as it ensures that your simulation’s case file will be updated using any recent
changes to the simulation.

3.7.6. Duplicating a Simulation

You can duplicate a simulation by right-clicking a simulation folder in the Project View and selecting
Duplicate, or by selecting Duplicate Simulation in the Project ribbon. A simulation may be duplicated
if you would like to setup and calculate a new set of results starting from the same settings of your
original simulation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
242 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation

It is only possible to duplicate a simulation when no simulations are currently loaded. When Duplicate
is selected, a window will appear where you can enter the name for the new simulation. If Set Active
Simulation is enabled, the newly duplicated simulation will be loaded after the duplication is per-
formed.

A duplicated simulation will contain all the current settings of the original simulation folder, including
all the settings applied in the Outline View (Geometric Properties, Simulation Conditions, Com-
ponent Groups, Solve) and all the settings in the Input: Design Points folder. However, the Results
folder will not be copied and none of the solution files will be copied.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 243
Fluent Aero

3.7.7. Fluent Aero Workspace, the Solver Session, and the Fluent Solution
Workspace
The image below visually represents the interaction between the Fluent Aero workspace, the solver
session and the Fluent Solution workspace.

When you first open Fluent Aero, the user interface window that is presented is the Fluent Aero
workspace. However, when you create or load a Simulation using New Aero Workflow or Load in
Solver, a solver session will be loaded. By default, this solver session will be launched and your case
file will be loaded in the background on your local machine – the same machine where your Fluent
Aero workspace (or client session) is located. However, it is also possible to launch the solver on a
different machine or with a different number of processes. In this way, it is possible for you to have
the lightweight Fluent Aero workspace (where the majority of the user interaction takes place) located
on a local machine with a more capable graphics display, but have the solver session (where the
majority of the computational work takes place), located on the compute node of a cluster, which
may have more CPU power and memory, but not have access to a graphics display. If you would like
to launch the solver on a different machine, you may do so by enabling Use Custom Solver Launch
Options. This option can be found in Project → Workspaces → Options or from File → Preferences
→ Aero.

Furthermore, just like the Fluent Aero workspace represents the graphical user interface for the client
session, the Fluent Solution workspace represents the graphical user interface for the solver session.
Typically, the Fluent Solution workspace is hidden, because its interface is not required to setup and
interact with Fluent Aero simulations. However, if you would like to interact with the Fluent Solution

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
244 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation

workspace, for example to setup more advanced settings that are not available from within the Fluent
Aero workspace, you may do so by clicking Project → Workspaces → Solution.

Note:

By default, a single Console contains both the local Fluent Aero console transcript (displayed
in black text), and the connected solver setting’s Fluent Solution workspace transcript (in
gray text). All commands entered into the Fluent Aero console will be used locally in the
Fluent Aero client. To send a text command to the solver session, right-click the simulation
in the Outline View and choose Send Command...

3.7.7.1. Preferences Related to the Solver Session and the Solution Workspace
Preferences related to the solver session and the Solution workspace are available in Project →
Workspaces and in File → Preferences... → Aero.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 245
Fluent Aero

• Use Custom Solver Launch Settings

By default, when you create or load a Simulation using New Aero Workflow or Load in Solver,
the Fluent Aero Simulation will load a solver session that is launched in the background on
either:

a. The same machine and with the same number of processes you used to launch Fluent
Aero.

b. On any machine using any other settings specified in the initial Fluent Launcher, such
as Use Job Scheduler, if any.

However, it is also possible to use different settings to launch the solver on a different machine
or with a different number of processes.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
246 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating or Loading a Fluent Aero Simulation

To do this, go to File → Preferences..., select Aero, and enable Use Custom Solver Launch
Settings.

If Use Custom Solver Launch Settings is enabled, the New Aero Workflow or Load in Solver
command will first launch a Fluent Launcher window, where additional settings can be applied
to determine how the solver is launched. This allows you to load the solver session on a different
machine than where Fluent Aero is open, or to specify the Remote Machine or use a Job
Scheduler (within Scheduler) to launch the solver on a cluster with a queuing system or with a
different number of CPUs than what is specified as default.

When using Use Custom Solver Launch Settings to Load in Solver, it is required to set the
following settings in the Fluent Launcher that appears:

– Mode → Solution

→ The solver session must be launched in Solution mode, as Fluent Aero is expecting to connect
to a Solution workspace solver session in the background.

– Dimension → 3D

– Options → Double Precision

Note:

When Fluent Aero is launched using the bin/aero (linux) or bin/aero.bat

(windows) file, the Fluent Launcher will always appear when using New Aero

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 247
Fluent Aero

Workflow or Load in solver regardless of the setting specified in the Preferences

panel.

• Solution (button) or Show Solution Workspace

When this option is disabled, the Fluent Solution workspace associated with the solver session
will be hidden. Enabling this option will cause a Solution workspace window to be shown, allowing
the use of advanced settings that may not be available in the standalone Fluent Aero workspace.

• Enable Solution Workspace Graphics

When this option is disabled, the Fluent Solution workspace associated with the solver session
will have its post-processing graphics window disabled. Enabling this option will cause a Solution
workspace graphics window to be shown, allowing you to make post-processing graphical plots
within the Solution workspace window.

3.8. Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Once a simulation is loaded, a simulation tree appears in the Outline View. The name of the simulation
you have loaded appears at the top of the tree along with the text (loaded). Underneath the name of
the simulation, the Outline View tree is displayed.

The Outline View tree contains steps that guide you through the setup of Fluent Aero simulation. These
steps should be worked through sequentially to completely set up the problem. In the typical workflow,
this tree is composed of six steps. Four steps under Setup (Geometric Properties, Airflow Physics,
Simulation Conditions, Component Groups), and two steps under Solution (Files, Solve).

3.8.1. Geometric Properties

The first step in the Fluent Aero workflow is to define geometric properties, including orientation and
reference sizes.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
248 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

• Domain Type

This setting is used to describe the type of computational domain that surrounds your object of
interest. There are two available settings: Freestream or WindTunnel. If you follow the guidelines
for name and boundary type outlined in Freestream or WindTunnel Domain Type Require-
ments (p. 234), this setting may be set automatically upon importing a case file. This setting cannot
be changed after a calculation has been performed.

• Domain Dimension

This setting should be used to define whether the domain consists of a full 3D geometry (3D), or
a 2D geometry that has been extruded to construct a 1 cell thick 3D mesh (2.5D)

• Lift Direction at AoA = 0 Degrees

This setting defines the cartesian direction that corresponds to the direction of the Lift vector when
the geometry is operating at a 0-degree angle of attack. This setting provides Fluent Aero with an
orientation, allowing for the correct application of the Angle of Attack and Angle of Sideslip input
variables, and ensuring the accuracy of aero forces calculations in both the supported body-fixed
and wind-fixed coordinate systems. The geometry must be oriented as aligned with a cartesian
axis such that a cartesian direction can be selected.

• Drag Direction at AoA = 0 Degrees

This setting defines the cartesian direction that corresponds to the direction of the Drag vector
when the geometry is operating at a 0-degree angle of attack. This setting provides Fluent Aero
with an orientation, allowing for the correct application of the Angle of Attack and Angle of
Sideslip input variables, and ensuring the accuracy of aero forces calculations in both the supported
body-fixed and wind-fixed coordinate systems. The geometry must be oriented as aligned with a
cartesian axis such that a cartesian direction can be selected.

• Pitching Moment Direction

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 249
Fluent Aero

This setting defines which cartesian direction corresponds to the direction of the Pitching Moment.
It is setup automatically depending on the Lift and Drag direction settings.

• Moment Center: X-, Y-, Z- Positions [m]

These settings define the position in meters of the Pitching Moment using the cartesian coordinates
of the mesh.

• Reference Length [m]

This setting defines the reference length in units of meters, which is used for the computation of
aerodynamic coefficients.

• Reference Area [m^2]

This setting defines the reference length in units of square meters, which is used for the computation
of aerodynamic coefficients.

• Compute Projected Area

Enabling this option opens the Projected Surface Areas tool window that allows you to compute
the reference area of your geometry. Set the Projection Direction and select the Walls that you
would like to use for the reference area computation. Click Compute. If you are satisfied with the
value that appears in the Area [m^2] box, click Use as Ref. Area to fill the Reference Area [m^2]
box with this value.

The Geometric Properties step also contains the following optional command:

• Refresh Boundaries from Solver

As described in the Case File Requirements, it is recommended that the boundary types of a
.cas[.h5] file have been setup properly in a Fluent Solution workspace or a Fluent Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
250 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

workspace before it is imported into Fluent Aero. However, if the boundary types of a .cas[.h5]
file have not yet been setup before loading into Fluent Aero, the Show Solution Workspace
command can be used to open the background solver window, where the boundary types can be
redefined. These boundary types can then be updated in Fluent Aero by right-clicking Geometric
Properties and selecting Refresh Boundaries from Solver.

Once the geometric properties have been defined, you can continue to the next step.

3.8.2. Airflow Physics

The second step in the Fluent Aero workflow is to define the solver type, the viscous model and the
air properties and to enable or disable reactions and the two temperature model during simulations.

If Advanced Settings is enabled under File → Preferences → Aero, the Transitional Regime
Threshold of the Knudsen Number Criterion under Models can be specified.

• Solver

– Type

This setting defines the RANS solver formulation to use during calculations. Density based is
set by default while Pressure based can be selected. Depending on the solver type, some options
will be visible inside the Outline View Properties panels. For more information regarding these
options, consult Using the Solver in the Fluent User's Guide.

• Models

– Viscous

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 251
Fluent Aero

This setting defines the viscous model. Unless otherwise specified, default viscous model constants
from the Fluent workspace are applied to each model. For more information regarding these
turbulence models, consult Viscous Model Dialog Box in the Fluent User's Guide and Modeling
Turbulence in the Fluent User's Guide.

→ K-Omega SST

This is the default setting. By selecting this model, the viscous heating and production limiter
will be activated in the background solver session.

→ K-Omega SST Intermittency Transition

The same turbulence model as above, but with intermittency transition included. By selecting
this model, the Transition Model will be set to gamma-transport-eqn. Moreover, the viscous
heating, production Kato-Launder and production limiter will be activated in the background
solver session.

→ Transition SST

When selected, viscous heating and Transition SST Roughness Constant correlation are applied
by default. The Transition SST Roughness Constant will appear as an input option. This value
will have a significant effect on the laminar to turbulent transition location. Selecting this
model will also cause viscous heating and production limiter to be activated in the background
solver session.

→ K-Omega WJ-BSL-EARSM (Beta)

This is a more advanced turbulence model that is available as a beta option. This model is a
2 equations hybrid RSM that allows you to capture secondary flow motion driven by turbulence
anisotropies or to better represent flows with strong swirl or streamline curvature. By selecting
this model, the viscous heating and production limiter will be activated in the background
solver session.

→ Laminar

This option allows you to specify laminar flow with the viscous heating enabled in the back-
ground solver session.

→ Case Settings

When selected, Fluent Aero will not apply settings to the turbulence model. Instead, it will use
the turbulence model settings in the initial case file, or from the Solution workspace window
(Models → Viscous). This option allows you to have full access to the list of advanced turbu-
lence models inside the Fluent Solution workspace. To make advanced changes to the turbu-
lence model, while the case file is already loaded, use the Show Solution Workspace command,
and in the window that appears, make the appropriate changes in the Viscous panel.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
252 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Reactions

This setting allows you to enable or disable reactions as needed. When reactions are enabled,
the Two Temperature model will be automatically set to Enabled and you can choose a mixture
model under Materials → Air Properties to account for the species transport and reactions
phenomena. The species model settings of the Solution workspace shown below will be applied.

In the above image, the Setup → Models → Species (Species Transport, Reactions) option
within Fluent allows the use of a mixture to model the transport of multiple chemical species in
a fluid flow. The Reactions → Volumetric option enables modeling of reactions occurring within
the fluid volume. The Chemistry Solver allows you to specify the chemistry model. As for the
density-based solver, the recommended option is None – Direct Source due to the strong
coupling between the chemistry source terms and species mass equations. Fluent Aero uses the
default reaction mechanisms of the selected mixture. To use them, the Turbulence-Chemistry
Interaction is set to Finite-Rate/No TCI. Refer to Modeling Hypersonic Flows Using the Two-
Temperature Model for more information on default reaction mechanisms.

– Two Temperature

This setting controls the Two Temperature model in your Fluent Aero simulations, which can
improve the accuracy when performing hypersonic flow simulations. This model is only available

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 253
Fluent Aero

if Solver Type is set to Density based. For more information regarding this model, consult
Modeling Hypersonic Flows Using the Two-Temperature Model in the Fluent User's Guide.

Note:

The cfd_hsf license increment and the hsf library are required to use this model.
Contact your Ansys representative to check for the availability of both the license in-
crement and the hsf library. If either of these are not available, the Two Temperature
will be set to Disabled.

→ Automatic

When selected, Fluent Aero uses the Flow Range for each design point to determine if the
Two Temperature model is enabled or disabled. If the Mach number for the design point is
greater than or equal to 4.5, Fluent Aero will register that the Flow Range is hypersonic, and
will activate the Two Temperature model. If the Mach number for the design point is less
than 4.5, Fluent Aero will register that the Flow Range is not hypersonic, and will disable the
Two Temperature model.

When the two-temperature model is activated in Fluent Aero, its default spatial discretization
scheme and under-relaxation factor for the two-temperature model will be applied. The Flow,
Turbulence and Two-Temperature model equations under Solution → Controls → Equations...
in the Solution workspace will be resolved. Refer to the Materials → Air Properties section
under Airflow Physics (p. 251) for the material properties set in Fluent Aero when the two
temperature model is activated.

→ Enabled

When selected, Fluent Aero will ensure that the Two Temperature model is enabled for all
design point calculations. The settings imposed by Fluent Aero are the same as when Two
Temperature is set to Automatic.

→ Disabled

When selected, Fluent Aero will ensure that the Two Temperature model is disabled for all
design point calculations.

→ Case Settings

When selected, Fluent Aero will not apply settings to the Two Temperature model. Instead,
it will use the Two Temperature model settings in the initial case file, or from the Solution
workspace window (Models → General). If the Two Temperature model is set to Case settings,
the Air Properties must also be set to Case settings.

– Knudsen Number Criterion

This setting controls the application of the Knudsen Number Criterion. This criterion defines
the flow regime (above this number) at which the continuum hypothesis no longer provides a
reasonable representation of the fluid’s behavior and where rarefied gas conditions to prevail.
Above this number, the airflow transitions from the continuum hypothesis to the free molecular
regime, which is estimated to occur at Knudsen number (Kn) of 0.2. Fluent Aero will automatically
apply appropriate viscous models and wall shear conditions to improve the reliability of the

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
254 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

RANS model. Fluent Aero automatically calculates the Knudsen number for each design point
based on the reference length, material properties, and simulation conditions. The RANS model
may not be appropriate at Kn >= 0.2 even with the application of the Knudsen Number Criterion.
For more information on the Knudsen number and conditions for rarefied gases, refer to Partial
Slip for Rarefied Gases in the Fluent User's Guide.

→ Enabled

When selected, laminar flow and partial slip wall conditions will be automatically applied to
design points with a Knudsen number above the threshold. For other design points, the viscous
model specified in Models → Viscous and no-slip wall boundary conditions will be applied.
By default, partial slip wall conditions are set on all walls but can be disabled on specific walls.
The latter can be done by locally disabling Knudsen Number Criterion per wall under Com-
ponent Groups. The default threshold value of the Knudsen number for the transitional
(continuum to rarefied) regime is 0.01.

→ Disabled

When selected, the viscous model specified in Models → Viscous and no-slip wall condition
will be applied on all walls for all design points.

– Transitional Regime Threshold

This setting is accessible when Advanced Settings is activated. It allows you to adjust the
Knudsen number threshold, indicating the start of the transitional regime for rarefied gases. The
default value is 0.01, and you can modify the threshold within the range of 0.002 to 0.05.

• Materials

– Air Properties

In Fluent Aero, different options are available for Air Properties. This mainly depends on
the activation of Reactions. When Reactions are disabled, Air Properties can be set to Air
default or Mars – CO2, representing Earth and Mars atmosphere, respectively. Two types
of Air Properties are supported for Air default and for Mars – CO2 and are dependent on
the activation of the Two Temperature model. When the Two Temperature model is activ-
ated, material properties such as specific heat, thermal conductivity and viscosity with
higher temperature bounds are used and are more appropriate for hypersonic flows. For
more information, refer to Air Default and Mars CO2 sections under Airflow Physics (p. 251).
When Reactions are enabled, species transport and reactions will be accounted for in your
simulation. Moreover, you can select Air – 5 Species, Air - 11 Species (Park) or Mars – 8
Species as Air Properties, which represent Earth and Mars atmospheres, respectively. These
options correspond to the air-5species-park93, air-11species-park93 and mars-8species-
park mixtures available in the Solution workspace. Additionally, if the Advanced Settings
is enabled, Air – 11 Species (Gupta) becomes available.

The diagram below provides an illustration of the different Air Properties that are available
in Fluent Aero, depending on whether reactions are enabled using species and both the
Two Temperature model and Case settings are selected.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 255
Fluent Aero

All default air properties inside Fluent Aero follow the ideal gas law assumption. Isentropic
relations are used to link total to static pressures and temperatures. Moreover, air properties
should respect the following specific heat definition.

When Air default is selected:

When Mars – CO2 is selected:

When a mixture material or Case settings is selected as Air Properties in Fluent Aero,
is calculated based on the mass fraction of each species in Fluent Aero or the material settings
defined in the case file.

→ Air Default

When selected, Fluent Aero will set an appropriate material property for air that depends
on the activation of the Two Temperature model. Fluent Aero’s typical default air prop-
erties, when the Two Temperature model is disabled, are shown below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
256 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 257
Fluent Aero

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
258 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Fluent Aero’s alternate default air properties, when the Two Temperature model is en-
abled, is shown below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 259
Fluent Aero

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
260 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

For more information regarding these air property equations, consult Specific Heat Capacity
as a Function of Temperature in the Fluent User's Guide and Modeling Hypersonic Flows
Using the Two-Temperature Model in the Fluent User's Guide.

→ Mars – CO2

When selected, Fluent Aero will set an appropriate material property for CO2 that depends
on the activation of the Two Temperature model. Fluent Aero’s typical default fluid
properties, when the Two Temperature model is disabled, are shown below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 261
Fluent Aero

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
262 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Fluent Aero’s alternate default air properties, when the Two Temperature model is en-
abled, is shown below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 263
Fluent Aero

For more information regarding these air property equations, consult Specific Heat Capacity
as a Function of Temperature in the Fluent User's Guide and Modeling Hypersonic Flows
Using the Two-Temperature Model in the Fluent User's Guide.

→ Air – 5 Species, Air – 11 Species (Park), Air – 11 Species (Gupta) or Mars – 8 Species

These Air Properties options are available only when both Reactions and Two Temper-
ature are set to Enabled. Additionally, the Advanced Settings for Air – 11 Species
(Gupta) must be activated. When one of these species option is selected (see
Table 3.1: Mixture Mapping Table Between Fluent Aero and Fluent Workspace (p. 265)),
Fluent Aero will set its equivalent name in the Fluent workspace as the air mixture repres-
entation of the atmosphere and will use it as the fluid cell zone material. Only Air – 11
Species (Park) and Air – 11 Species (Gupta) account for ionization effects. Mixture and
species properties are set by the two-temperature model and can be viewed in the
background solver session. Only material properties for air-5species-park93 and mars-

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
264 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

8species-park are summarized in the appendix. For more information, consult Modeling
Hypersonic Flows Using the Two-Temperature Model in the Fluent User's Guide.

Table 3.1: Mixture Mapping Table Between Fluent Aero and Fluent Workspace

Fluent Aero Fluent

Air - 5 Species air-5species-park93
Air - 11 Species (Park) air-11species-park93
Air - 11 Species air-11species-gupta
(Gupta)
Mars - 8 Species mars-8species-park

Note:

To use this feature in Fluent Aero, the Two Temperature model must be En-
abled. This model is only available if you have access to the cfd_hsf license
increment and the hsf library. If either your cfd_hsf license increment or
hsf library is unavailable, a message will be printed to your console log. Contact
your Ansys representative to add this increment or library if needed.

→ Case Settings

When selected, Fluent Aero will not apply its default settings to the Air Properties. Instead,
it will use the Material Properties for Air as setup in the initial case file, or from the
Solution workspace window (Materials → Fluid → air). If the Two Temperature model
is set to Case settings, then the Air Properties is also set to Case settings.

Note:

You should be aware that Fluent Aero does not monitor changes made to the
settings under Case settings. For instance, after Results have been calculated
with Air Properties set to Case settings, the status of all the design points
will be set to Updated. If some material properties are modified inside the
Fluent Solution workspace, the status of all design points will remain to Up-
dated instead of Needs Update.

– Mass Fractions

When a mixture is selected in Air Properties, this option sets the mass fraction of each species
of the mixture.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 265
Fluent Aero

To modify the Mass Fractions, click Edit…. A new panel will open where you can set the mass
fraction for each species. The mass fraction of the last species will be computed automatically.
The sum of species’ mass fractions must equal one. These will be applied at the inlets of the
Freestream or WindTunnel groups.

– Air Properties Used During the Conversion of Flight Conditions to Boundary Conditions

Fluent Aero supports different Flow Speed input parameters: Mach, Mass Flow Rate, and True
Airspeed. Depending on which parameter is used in the definition of the underlying boundary
condition in the Solution workspace (Mach, velocity, or mass flow rate), a conversion between
them may be required. In addition, Reynolds number, total pressure, and total temperature can
also be imposed as input parameters. These parameters must be converted to static pressure
and static temperature before applying them as Dirichlet boundary conditions at the inlet of the
computational domain. Proper conversion of these conditions must also consider the type of air

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
266 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

properties that have been selected as these properties should be consistent between boundary
surfaces and the remaining cells that compose the computational domain. For example, when
using a mixture in Fluent Aero, the material properties such as density and specific heat ratio of
the mixture are calculated by taking into account the mass fractions. If Air Properties is set to
Case settings, these properties will be computed using the material settings in the case file.

The following describes the process and equations used to perform some typical conversions
while accounting for air properties.

→ Equations to Convert Flow Speed Parameters

Mach number and mass flow rate definitions are used to convert Flow Speed parameters to
velocity, Mach and mass flow rate inlet boundary conditions of the Solution workspace.

with being the normal area of the inlet boundary surface.

For instance, in a WindTunnel simulation, if Mach was selected as the Flow Speed parameter,
a conversion to mass flow rate will occur since a mass-flow-inlet boundary condition is applied
at the inlet of a wind tunnel simulation in Fluent Aero. Replacing the speed term in the mass
flow rate definition by the Mach number definition, an expression of the mass flow rate with
respect to Mach number is obtained therefore allowing its conversion.

→ Equations to Convert Pressure & Temperature Parameters

The definition of Reynolds number and isentropic relations are used to convert Reynolds
number, total pressure, and total temperature quantities to static pressure and static temper-
ature inlet/outlet boundary conditions in the Solution workspace.

For instance, in a far-field simulation, if the Reynolds number is selected as the Pressure and
Temperature parameter, this parameter is automatically converted to static pressure by
combining the equation state with the Reynolds number definition and imposed at the pres-
sure-far-field of the computational domain. The following steps describe how this conversion
is done when default air properties have been selected and the Two Temperature model is
disabled.

• Firstly, the static pressure can be expressed through the equation of state of the ideal gas.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 267
Fluent Aero

• Secondly, the density is computed from the definition of the Reynolds number. The molecular
viscosity is obtained using the Sutherland’s law which is the default viscosity model when
the two-temperature model is disabled. The velocity is either given or converted from
the Mach number or mass flow rate.

• Finally, the static pressure can be expressed as

Another example, if Air default is selected in Air Properties and total quantities are selected
in the Pressure and Temperature parameters, these parameters are automatically converted
to static pressure and temperature. These values are then imposed at the inlet or outlet of the
computational domain. The following steps describe how total conditions are converted to
static pressure and temperature when default air properties have been selected and the two-
temperature model is disabled.

• Firstly, an initial approximation for a specific heat ratio of 1.4 is used to obtain an estimate
of the static temperature based on isentropic law.

• Secondly, substitute the estimated into the piecewise-polynomial model of the specific
heat to obtain a more accurate value of which is then used to compute a new specific
heat ratio,

• Thirdly, substitute the value of the specific heat ratio into the isentropic relation of temper-
ature. Fluent Aero iterates up to 5 times the steps described above. If after 5 cycles, a 0.5 K
tolerance is not reached between cycles, a warning message will appear in the console. The
final value of the static temperature is then used to compute the specific heat, and finally
the static pressure is obtained from the isentropic relation of pressure.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
268 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

3.8.3. Simulation Conditions

In this step, you define a matrix of flight or wind tunnel conditions (referred to in Fluent Aero as
design points). For each design point, Fluent Aero will calculate and post processing an aerodynamic
CFD solution.

Note:

The conditions applied in this section will be applied to the inlet and outlet boundary
zones that are part of the Freestream or Wind Tunnel component groups.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 269
Fluent Aero

• Design Points

– Number of Design Points

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
270 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

The single simulation mode is used to investigate the results of a simulation of a single design
point using a single flight condition. The Number of Design Points entered here will determine
the number of rows in the Input: Design Points table.

• Flight Conditions

This section contains inputs to define the conditions used to perform your aerodynamic simulations.
Settings applied in this section will control the inlet and outlet boundary zones that are part of the
Freestream or Wind Tunnel component groups.

There are four categories that are used to input these conditions settings: Flow Speed, Flow Dir-
ection, Pressure and Temperature and Turbulence. Each category contains Parameter settings
where the specific input parameter associated with that category can be selected, a Distribution
setting - where the value used for the input can be defined as Constant for all design points or
varied with a Uniform distribution or Custom distribution for all Design points.

– Using the Distribution Setting in Flight Conditions

The Distribution setting works similarly for all three categories of flight conditions, and is de-
scribed below.

→ Distribution: Constant

If a Distribution is set to Constant, an input is revealed to enter the constant value of selected
parameter to be used for all design points. This is shown in the image below using the Flow
Speed → Parameter → Mach as an example.

→ Distribution: Uniform (Single Parameter)

If a Distribution is set to Uniform, inputs are revealed to enter the Minimum Mach Number
and Maximum Mach Number value as well as the Number of Points to use for the selected
parameter. These values will be used to fill the Input: Design Point table that appears above
the graphics window in the user interface. Furthermore, the Number of Design Points setting
will be greyed out and automatically set to match the Number of Points set for the uniform
distribution of the selected parameter.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 271
Fluent Aero

→ Distribution: Uniform (Multiple Parameters)

If the Distribution of multiple input parameters are set to Uniform, the Input: Design Point
table will be generated to contain design points for every combination of inputs from each
parameter that is set to use a uniform distribution. Furthermore, the Number of Design Points
setting will be updated to match the number generated by using multiple uniform input
parameters. In the image below, both Mach and AoA are set to use a Distribution → Uniform,
and a total of six design points are generated.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
272 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

→ Distribution: Piecewise-Uniform

This option is only available for the Distribution: Angle of Attack setting.

If the Distribution is set to Piecewise-Uniform, a Number of Points input is revealed which

gives a summary of the number of points used in the currently defined distribution.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 273
Fluent Aero

To modify the Piecewise-Uniform Distribution, click Edit.... The Set Piecewise Uniform
Distribution dialog opens.

The following options are available:

• Variable

– Select the input variable for which the piecewise uniform distribution will be applied. For
now, only the Angle of Attack [deg] variable can be used.

• Number of Segments

– Choose the number of uniformly distributed segments that will be used to define your
piecewise-uniform distribution. Each segment defines a set of uniformly distributed points.
All segments combined make up the total set of points that define the Piecewise-Uniform
distribution.

• Active

– When enabled, this segment will be active, and its points will be created in the Input:
Design Points table.

• Minimum

– Set the minimum value of the uniformly distributed segment.

• Maximum

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
274 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Set the maximum value of the uniformly distributed segment. The maximum value can
be set to 0 when creating a single point segment.

• Points

– Choose the number of points to use on the uniformly distributed segment. If a value of
1 is used, a single point segment will be created with a value equal to the Minimum
value.

• Step Size

– This value displays the step size between each point on the uniformly distributed segment.

→ Clicking Apply will cause the Piecewise-Uniform distribution to generate the list of design
points in the Input: Design Points table. If the selected segments contain any overlapping
values (for example, two segments produce the same value), then only one point will be
generated in the table.

Furthermore, the Input: Design Points table will generate design points for every combination
of parameters that is set to Uniform or Piecewise-Uniform. For example, the following Input:
Design Points table was generated with the Piecewise-Uniform distribution on AoA and a
Uniform distribution on Mach.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 275
Fluent Aero

→ Distribution: Custom

If a Distribution is set to Custom, empty cells are generated in the Input: Design Points table
where you can enter a custom value for each design point.

– Flow Speed

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
276 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

This section contains inputs to define the flow speed of the ambient flight conditions used to
perform your aerodynamic simulations. Settings applied in this section will be applied to the
Inlet boundary zones that are part of the Freestream or WindTunnel component groups.

→ Parameter

This setting defines the type of input parameter that will be used to define the flow speed of
the condition. Mach number or True Airspeed (m/s) can be selected.

• Mach

Mach number is used to define the speed condition for each design point.

• True Airspeed

True Airspeed [m/s] is used to define the speed condition for each design point. If True
Airspeed is used as the Flow Speed Parameter, only Static or Altitude Parameter can be
specified in the Parameter section of Pressure and Temperature.

• Mass Flow Rate

Mass Flow Rate [kg/s] is used to define the inlet flow rate for each design point. This input
parameter is only available if your Domain Type is set to WindTunnel. If Mass Flow Rate
is used only Static or Altitude Parameter can be specified in the Parameter section of
Pressure and Temperature.

Note:

Depending on the parameter used in Flow Speed (Mach, True Airspeed or Mass
Flow Rate), a conversion may be required if this parameter is not directly suppor-
ted by the inlet boundary type present in the case file. For example,if a WindTun-
nel simulation is being set up using Mach as input parameter in Fluent Aero, this
Mach number will be converted to a mass flow rate since the boundary type of
the case file will be set to mass-flow-inlet. Refer to Airflow Physics (p. 251) for
more details about how these conversions are performed and the airflow proper-
ties that are used.

→ Distribution

This setting defines how the value of the input parameter selected above is distributed across
each design point. Constant, Uniform or Custom can be selected. Refer to Using the Distribu-
tion Setting in Flight Conditions under Simulation Conditions (p. 269) for a more complete
description of how this setting is used.

→ Parameter and Distribution Specific Input Values

Depending on what is selected for Parameter and Distribution, further inputs to control the
values to use for the Flow Speed input parameter will be revealed under Flow Speed or in
the Input Design Point table.

– Flow Direction

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 277
Fluent Aero

This section contains inputs to define the flow direction of each condition. Settings applied in
this section will be applied to the Inlet boundary zones that are part of the Freestream or
WindTunnel component groups.

→ Parameter

This setting defines the type of input parameter that will be used to define the flow direction.
AoA, AoS and AoA+AoS can be selected. This setting is only available for a Freestream Do-
main Type. The Flow Direction is fixed to a 0 Angle of Attack [degrees] and Angle of
Sideslip [degrees] when using a WindTunnel Domain Type.

• AoA

Angle of attack (degrees) is used to define the flow direction for each design point. Increasing
the angle of attack will increase the pitch of the aircraft with respect to the incoming flow.

• AoS

Sideslip angle (in degrees) is used to define the flow direction for each design point. Increas-
ing the sideslip angle will increase the yaw of the aircraft with respect to the incoming flow.
If you would like to use a non-zero value for sideslip angle, you must ensure that you do
not use a symmetry boundary to define their domain.

• AoA+AoS

Both angle of attack and sideslip angle (in degrees) are used to define the flow direction
for each design point. Increasing the angle of attack will increase the pitch of the aircraft
with respect to the incoming flow. Increasing the sideslip angle will increase the yaw of the
aircraft with respect to the incoming flow. If you would like to use a non-zero value for
sideslip angle, you must ensure that you do not use a symmetry boundary to define their
domain.

→ Distribution

This setting defines how the value of the input parameters selected above is distributed across
each design point. Constant, Uniform or Custom can be selected. If the Parameter is set to
AoA, Piecewise-Uniform can also be selected. If the Parameter is set to AoA+AoS, a Distri-
bution setting is revealed and must be defined for both inputs. For example, in the image
below, a Constant distribution is used for angle of attack, and a Uniform distribution is used
for the sideslip angle.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
278 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Refer to Using the Distribution Setting in Flight Conditions under Simulation Conditions (p. 269)
for a more complete description of how this setting is used.

→ Parameter and Distribution Specific Input Values

Depending on what is selected for Parameter and Distribution, further inputs to control the
values to use for the Flow Speed input parameter will be revealed under Flow Speed or in
the Input Design Point table.

– Pressure and Temperature

This section contains inputs to define the static pressure and temperature to perform your
aerodynamic simulations. Settings applied in this section will be applied to the Inlet and Outlet
boundary zones that are part of the Freestream or WindTunnel component groups.

→ Parameter

This setting defines the type of input parameters that will be used to define the static pressure
and temperature at each design point. Static, Total, Altitude and Reynolds can be selected.

• Static

Static Pressure [Pa] and Static Temperature [K] are directly used to define the condition
at each design point.

• Total

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 279
Fluent Aero

Total Pressure [Pa] and Total Temperature [K] are used to define the static pressure and
static temperature of the condition for each design point. When selected, only Mach number
is available in the Flow Speed Parameter section.

The value computed for the Atmospheric Static Pressure [Pa] and Atmospheric Static
Temperature [K] will be displayed in the Pressure and Temperature section of the Prop-
erties panel or in the Input Design Points table. Refer to the Air Properties section under
Airflow Physics (p. 251) for more details about how the static temperature and the static
pressure are computed from the total temperature, total pressure and Mach number.

For example, in the image below, both distributions are set to Constant, and therefore the
computed values of Static Pressure and Static Temperature are listed in grey in the
Pressure and Temperature of the Properties panel.

In the next example, both distributions are set to Custom, and therefore the computed
values of Static Pressure and Static Temperature are listed in grey inside the Input Design
Points table.

• Altitude

– Earth Air Properties

Using the International Standard Atmosphere, Flight Altitude [m] is used to define
the Atmospheric Static Pressure [Pa] and Atmospheric Static Temperature [K] of

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
280 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

the ambient flight conditions for each design point. Depending on each parameter’s
Distribution setting, the value computed for the Atmospheric Static Pressure [Pa]
and Atmospheric Static Temperature [K] will be displayed in the Pressure and
Temperature section of the Properties panel or in the Input Design Points table.

Currently, this option is supported for the following atmospheric regions: Troposphere,
Stratosphere, Mesosphere and Thermosphere, up to a maximum of 108,000 meters.
Within these regions, static pressure and temperature are obtained using the correl-
ations described in http://www.braeunig.us/space/atmmodel.htm.

– Mars Air Properties

Viking lander reentry profiles, covering altitudes from -1.49 to 120km, have been
used to create analytical altitude profiles of pressure and temperature, as in http://
www.braeunig.us/space/atmmodel.htm. As Mars lacks oceans to fill its lowest eleva-
tions, negative surface elevations exist. Therefore, the current implementation covers
altitudes from -8km to 75km.

Using these analytical profiles, Flight Altitude [m] is used to define the Atmospheric
Static Pressure [Pa] and Atmospheric Static Temperature [K] of the ambient flight
conditions for each design point. Depending on each parameter’s Distribution setting,
the value computed for the Atmospheric Static Pressure [Pa] and Atmospheric
Static Temperature [K] will be displayed in the Pressure and Temperature section
of the Properties panel or in the Input:Design Points table.

Note:

The specific heat for CO2 and the species of Mars - 8 Species is modeled
by the nasa-9-polynomial correlations which consider the specific heat as
a function of temperature. However, these correlations have a lower bound
at T=200K. Since the static temperature at altitudes between 16 to 75 km
is below 200K, the specific heat of all species including C02 is set to their
lower bound.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 281
Fluent Aero

• Reynolds

Reynolds number is used to define the Atmospheric Static Pressure [Pa] and Atmospheric
Static Temperature [K] of the ambient flight conditions for each design point. When
Reynolds is selected, Reynolds number and Atmospheric Static Temperature [K] should
be specified in the Pressure and Temperature section and only Mach number is available
inside the Flow Speed Parameter section.

The value computed for the Atmospheric Static Pressure [Pa] and Atmospheric Static
Temperature [K] will be displayed in the Pressure and Temperature section of the Prop-
erties panel or in the Input Design Points table. Refer to the Air Properties section under
Airflow Physics (p. 251) for more details about how the Atmospheric Static Pressure [Pa]
is computed from Reynolds number and Atmospheric Static Temperature [K].

– Distribution

This setting defines how the value of the input parameters selected above is distributed across
each design point. Constant, Uniform or Custom can be selected. If the Parameter is set to
Static, Total or Reynolds, a Distribution setting is revealed and must be defined for multiple
inputs. For example, in the image below, the Parameter is set to Static and a Constant distribu-
tion is used for Pressure, and a Custom distribution is used for Temperature.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
282 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Refer to Using the Distribution Setting in Flight Conditions under Simulation Conditions (p. 269)
for a more complete description of how this setting is used.

– Parameter and Distribution Specific Input Values

Depending on what is selected for Parameter and Distribution, further inputs to control the
values to use for the Flow Speed input parameter will be revealed under Flow Speed or in the
Input Design Point table.

– Turbulence

This section contains inputs to define the inflow turbulence of your aerodynamic simulations.
Settings in this section will be applied to the Inlet boundary zones that are part of the Freestream
or WindTunnel component groups.

→ Parameter

This setting defines the turbulence specification method. Intensity and Viscosity Ratio, and
Intensity and Length Scale can be selected.

• Intensity and Viscosity Ratio

Turbulent Intensity [%] and Turbulent Viscosity Ratio are used to define the inflow tur-
bulence conditions. If a turbulence model with Transition is selected, Intermittency will
also be available.

• Intensity and Length Scale

Turbulent Intensity [%] and Turbulent Length Scale [m] are used to define the inflow
turbulence conditions. If a turbulence model with Transition is selected, Intermittency will
also be available.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 283
Fluent Aero

→ Distribution

This setting defines how the value of the input parameters selected above is distributed across
each design point. Constant, Uniform or Custom can be selected. If the Parameter is set to
Intensity and Length Scale [m], a Distribution setting is revealed and must be defined for
both inputs. For example, in the image below, Constant distributions are used for both Tur-
bulent Intensity [%] and Turbulent Length Scale [m].

• Wall Conditions

This section contains inputs to define the conditions on all the wall zones if the Apply to All Walls
option is enabled. By disabling this option, you are able to set different wall conditions for each
wall inside the Component Groups step.

Note:

Currently, only wall thermal conditions can be specified in Fluent Aero.

– Thermal Conditions

→ Parameter

This setting specifies the thermal conditions method. Heat Flux and Temperature can be se-
lected.

→ Distribution

This setting defines how the value of the input parameters selected above is distributed across
each design point. Constant, Uniform or Custom can be specified. If the Parameter is set to
Temperature, a Distribution setting of Temperature is revealed and must be defined. For

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
284 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

example, in the image below, Constant distribution is used for Temperature, and its value
will be applied to all wall zones in all design points.

• Custom Input and Output Parameters

– Use Custom Input Parameter

This option allows the use of custom input parameters to vary at each design point. When this
option is enabled, a window appears with a list of all custom inputs available. Select the Inputs
you would like to use, and click Update. The selected input will appear as a fillable data column
entry in the Input:Design Points table. If previous Results have already been created in your
simulation, clicking Reload from Results will reset the custom input selection to be consistent
to what was used in the previous results.

The list of custom input parameters will be filled by any input parameters defined in the initial
case file using the Fluent Solution workspace’s parameter expression framework. If you would
like to add another custom input parameter to your current Fluent Aero session, you can use
the Workspaces → Solution button to go to the Solution Workspace window and add new
Parameter Expressions that are set to Use as Input Parameter. The image below shows an
example Parameter Expression defined in Fluent Solution workspace that works correctly as
a custom input in Fluent Aero.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 285
Fluent Aero

– Customize Output Parameters

This option allows the use of custom output parameters to vary at each design point. When this
option is enabled, a window appears with a list of all custom outputs available. Select the outputs
you would like to use, and click Update. When your Results are calculated, a custom output
table will be produced listing the value of each selected custom output for each design point.
If previous Results have already been created in your simulation, clicking Reload from Results
will reset the custom output selection to be consistent to what was used in the previous results.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
286 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

The list of custom output parameters will be filled with both the custom outputs available in
Fluent Aero by default, and by any output parameters defined in the initial case file using the
Fluent Solution workspace’s Parameter Expression framework. The following default custom
outputs are available in Fluent Aero:

→ dragPress

The pressure component of the total drag force.

→ dragVisc

The viscous component of the total drag force.

→ liftPress

The pressure component of the total lift force.

→ liftVisc

The viscous component of the total lift force.

→ maxWallTemp

The maximum wall temperature that occurs on all walls in the domain.

If you would like to add another custom output parameter to your current Fluent Aero session,
you can use the Show Solution Workspace button to go to the Solution workspace window
and add new Parameter Expressions that are set to Use as Output Parameter.

• Input:Design Points Table

When you modify the settings of Simulation Conditions, an Input: Design Points table will be
generated in the top-right area of the Fluent Aero user interface and modified to match the settings
you have selected. This table will consist of a row for each design point you have requested to

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 287
Fluent Aero

update, and a column for each input parameter that will be varied. In this table, the first column
lists the design point number, the middle columns list the variable input parameters, and the last
column list the Status of each design point calculation. The input variables in the middle columns
can be edited by double clicking a cell and entering a value. The Status of the final column can be
changed by selecting an item from the drop down list. In the image below, there are 5 design
points that feature a range of input Pressure and Temperature values and each Design Point
Status is currently set to Needs Update, signifying that these design points have not yet been
updated.

– Design Point Status

The Status column of the Input:Design Point table is an important way of assessing and inter-
acting with the calculation of each design point. This column enables you to check if a design
point has been updated successfully or not, and to request changes to the design point calculation.
The following design point statuses are possible:

→ Needs Update

The Status will be set to Needs Update when either:

• The design point has not yet been updated.

• A setting in the Geometric Properties, Airflow Physics, Simulation Conditions or Com-

ponent Groups steps has changed since the last time the design point has been updated,
or

• The input values used in the Input:Design Points table have changed since the last time
the design point has been updated.

Notably, changes to the Solve step will not cause the Status to change to Needs Update.
This is because you may want to change the Solve settings midway through a design point
calculation before continuing with the calculation.

Lastly, you can manually set a Design Point Status to Needs Update, even if the above
mentioned settings have not been changed.

Any Design Point whose Status is set to Needs Update will be updated when you click the
Updated command, and any previous solutions that may have existed for that design point
will not be used.

→ Updated

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
288 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

The Status will be set to Updated when a design point has been updated successfully, and
a solution has been obtained.

Any Design Point whose Status is set to Updated will not be updated when you click the
Update command.

→ Interrupted

The Status will be set to Interrupted if you have used the Interrupt command during the
calculation of a design point.

Any Design Point whose Status is set to Interrupted will not be updated when you click the
Update command.

Note:

When a design point calculation is interrupted, by default, the results files

(out.0*.dat[.h5] and out.0*.cas[.h5]) are not saved, and the values in
the results tables (Table:Summary, Table:Coefficients, Table:Residuals) are not
updated. If you would like to save your current solution to the results files and up-
date the results tables, the Save Results command should be used.

→ Error

The Status will be set to Error if an error occurs during the calculation of a design point that
causes the calculation to stop.

Any Design Point whose Status is set to Error will not be updated when you click the Update
command.

Note:

If you experience an error during calculation, the Console output, or the .trn file
located in the simulation folder, can be investigated to find more information on
the cause of the error.

→ Do Not Update

You can set the Status of a Design Point to Do No Update when you do not want to update
a given design point after clicking the Update command.

→ Continue to Update

You can set the Status to Continue to Update if you would like to continue the calculation
of a previously updated design point. Any Design Point whose Status is set to Continue to
Update will load and continue calculating from the previous solution file (out.0*.dat[.h5])
when you click the Update command.

→ Initialize

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 289
Fluent Aero

Set the Status of a Design Point to Initialize to only initialize the solution at a given design
point after pressing Update.

Any Design Point whose Status is set to Initialize will be initialized and no solver iterations
will be performed. This allows you to investigate the Initial solution of a design point before
continuing on with the full calculation.

→ Initialized

The Status will be set to Initialized when a design point has been initialized successfully, and
an initial solution has been obtained.

Any Design Point whose Status is set to Initialized will continue to be calculated from the
current initial solution when you click Update.

• Commands Available from Simulation Conditions

A number of commands are available from the Simulation Conditions step. These can be accessed
either from the buttons at the bottom of the Properties panel, or by right-clicking Simulation
Conditions in the Outline View panel. Most of these commands are used to interact with the Input
Design Points table.

– Create Design Points Table

This command can be used to generate the Input: Design Points table in the top-right area of
the Fluent Aero user interface. Typically, this table is generated automatically, however, this option
can be used if the table is not generated as expected.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
290 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Reload DP Table or Reload Design Points Table from Results

If Results have already been computed for your simulation, this command will reload the design
point table values from the previously generated results, thereby removing any changes that
may have been made by yourself.

– Add Design Point

This command will add a design point to the bottom of the Input: Design Points table.

– Delete Design Point

This command will delete a design point from the Input:Design Points table. A panel will appear,
allowing you to enter the Design Point Number that you would like to delete. The design point
will then be removed from the table.

If previous results have been calculated, all files associated with that design point and listed in
the DP-# folder shown in the Project View will be deleted (including .cas, .dat and .fcon-
verg files, as well as any .csv plot files that were generated). The numbering of all other design
point folders and files will be readjusted such that they remain sequential. For example, if the
previous Results included three design point folders (DP-1, DP-2 and DP-3), and Design Point
2 is deleted, the previous DP-2 folder and all its contents will be removed, and the previous DP-
3 folder will be renamed to DP-2 to ensure that sequential numbering of folders and files is
maintained.

– Refresh Status or Refresh Input Table Status

This command will refresh the Status of each Design Point to the value that was obtained at
the end of your most recent calculation, or to Needs Update if no calculation has been performed,
thereby removing any changes that may have been made by yourself.

– Set DPs Status or Set Status of Design Points

This command can be used to set the Status of a group of Design Points and also appears in
the ribbon of Fluent Aero under Design Points. For more information regarding this command,
consult Status under Ribbon Commands (p. 224).

– Save Status of Design Points

This command can be used to save the status of a group of design points. When selected, the
currently selected Status of each Design Point in the Input: Design Points table will be saved.
Use this command to force certain design points to be set to Needs Update. Since the status
will be saved, you are required to update the design point again to get the status back to Up-
dated.

– Import Data File to DP Table

This command can be used to fill the contents of your Input:Design Points table by importing
a comma separated value (.csv) file. The first row of this file should contain a header line, which
should either start with a comma separated list of the variables used in the file or start with a #
comment symbol followed by a brief description of the contents of the file. The remaining rows
should contain the design point number and all values you would like to fill in the table, separated
by commas. These variable values should all exist in your Input:Design Points table, after you
have set the variables of interest to Custom. All variables should be in SI units.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 291
Fluent Aero

If you have included a comma separated list of variables in the header (as shown in the figure
below), the values will be imported into the appropriate column.

Figure 3.3: DP, Mach, AoA, Pressure, Temperature

If only a comment line was used (as shown in the figure below), the values will be imported se-
quentially in order of appearance. For example, if Mach, AoA, Static Pressure and Static Tem-
perature are all set to Custom, the order of each line of the file should be:

Figure 3.4: DP, Mach, AoA, Pressure, Temperature

– Export DP Table to Data File

This command can be used to export the contents of your Input:Design Points table to a comma
separated values (.csv) file.

– Show Knudsen Number/Hide Knudsen Number

These commands allow you to show or hide the Knudsen Number column in the Input:Design
Points table. The Knudsen Number column will automatically appear when the Knudsen number
of any design point exceeds the Knudsen Number Criterion (Transitional Regime Threshold)
and cannot be hidden. The Knudsen number is highlighted in orange for transitional regime
(Transitional Regime Threshold<=Kn<0.2) and in red for free molecular regime (Kn>=0.2).

Once the goals have been specified, you can continue to the next step.

3.8.4. Component Groups

In this step, two important setup tasks are performed:

• The boundary zones of the geometry and mesh can be organized into groups of zones that represent
entire aircraft components. This allows you to focus more on interacting with the aircraft geometry,
rather than interacting with an unorganized list of boundary zones. It can help facilitate simulation
setup and post processing. For example, an engine intake, exhaust and nacelle wall boundaries
can be organized into an Engine Component.

• Any boundary zone or component specific boundary conditions can be applied. For example, the
engine exhaust mass flow, which may change per design point, can be setup.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
292 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

For simple geometries, where no organization of boundary zones is required, this step is not required
and can be skipped.

Note:

It is highly recommended to ensure the organization of Component Groups and the se-
lection of boundary zones names and types is completed before calculating any design
point. If changes are made to any boundary zone type or boundary zone name after any
Results have been calculated, this will be registered as a substantial change to the setup
of the simulation, and the Status of all design points will be set to Needs Update. Further-
more, the run.settings file, which stores the component specific boundary condition
setup, will be deleted. After this, a Save Case command or Update command must be
performed so that an updated run.settings file is saved.

3.8.4.1. Organizing Component Groups and Boundaries

The first setup task that the Component Groups step is capable of is to organize the boundary
zones of the geometry into groups of zones that represent aircraft components. Organizing
boundary zones in this way will make interacting with the geometry and mesh more intuitive during
setup and post processing.

Default Component Groups

By default, there are at least two Component Groups present when you first creating a new simu-
lation. They are:

• A Freestream or WindTunnel group that should contain all external boundaries of your compu-
tational mesh. This group is either automatically detected and setup when you first connect to
your case file, or is modified and created manually. Refer to Freestream or WindTunnel Domain
Type Requirements (p. 234) for more details.

• An Other group that should contain all other boundaries.

The image below shows an example of Freestream Domain Type setup where the pressure-far-
field type zone called farfield is part of the Freestream group and all other walls are part of the
Other group.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 293
Fluent Aero

Further organization of these boundaries can be done by right-clicking the Component Groups
step and by using the Component Manager panel.

Using the Boundary Zone Right-Click Commands

The following boundary zone organization commands are available by right-clicking a boundary
in the Component Groups list.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
294 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

• Copy Conditions to ...

Copy boundary conditions from one zone to other zones of the same type.

• Rename

Renames the selected boundary. This is only available for boundaries in the Other group.

• Type

Allows you to change the boundary type of the selected boundary. It is only possible to change
the Type of a boundary zone when it is inside the Other group.

• Move to

Allows you to move the selected boundary to another Component Group.

• Refresh BC list

This command will refresh the boundary list. This should update the Fluent Aero’s boundary
conditions list if any boundaries have been changed from inside the Fluent Solution workspace.

• Reset to Custom Settings

If the Conditions setting of a boundary zone is set to Edit mode, this command will change the
Conditions setting back to Case settings. This allows you to go to the Fluent Solution workspace,
and enter custom settings to the zone. This process is shown in the images below.

In this example, the Conditions setting of the engine-inlet boundary zone is currently set to
Edit, and Constant value of Static Pressure applied.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 295
Fluent Aero

You can right-click the engine-inlet zone and select Reset to Custom Settings to change the
Conditions setting to Case settings.

Next, you can go to the Fluent Solution workspace using the Workspaces → Solution button
in the Project ribbon.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
296 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

From the Solution workspace window that appears, you can change the engine-inlet boundary
conditions to any custom settings that are required for the simulation. Since the engine-inlet
Conditions is set to Case settings, Fluent Aero will use the settings that are defined in the
Solution workspace when calculating the solution.

Note:

Once the Conditions is set to Edit in the Properties panel, the setting can no longer
be changed from the Properties panel. Instead, as described above, you must use
the Reset to Custom Settings command to change the setting back to Case settings.
However, because the setting was previously set to Edit, the Case settings conditions
may have been updated. Go to the Solution workspace and verify the intended settings
are used on that boundary before proceeding with the calculation.

• Display

Displays the selected boundary in the Graphics panel.

Manage Components Using the Component Manager

The Component Manager panel can be used to create groups of components and reorganize
boundary zones into these groups. It can be accessed by clicking the Manage Components com-
mand button at the bottom of the Properties – Components Groups panel, or by right-clicking
Component Groups and selecting Manage Components.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 297
Fluent Aero

After selecting the command, a Component Manager panel will appear. There are four main areas
of the Component Manager:

• New Component (top-left), which contains options to create a new component, including selecting
the Type and setting the Name of the new component.

• Existing Components (top-right), which contains a selectable list of existing components, as

well as commands to Delete or Rename existing components.

• Available Zones (bottom-left), which shows a selectable list of zones that can be added to a
component using the Add>> button.

• Component Parts (bottom-right), which shows the list of zones that are contained within the
currently selected Existing Component to. Depending on the type of component selected, this
list of zones will be organized into specific Component Parts that only allow specific boundary
types. Zones can be removed from a component group by selecting the zone in Component
Parts and using the Remove>> button.

The image below shows the Component Manager panel after it has been used to setup Engine,
Fuselage and Wing components in addition to the Freestream and Other components that are
listed by default. A complete walkthrough of how to set up the components can be found in Intro-
duction to Aircraft Component Groups and Computing Aerodynamic Coefficients on an Aircraft at
Different Flight Altitudes and Engine Regimes.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
298 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

The image below shows the corresponding Outline View list of Components, after the Component
Manager was used to organize the boundary zones.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 299
Fluent Aero

Types of Components
Currently, there are three available Types of Components, General, Wing and Engine.

• General

A General type component has no specific requirements. It features a single component part
called All, to which any type of Fluent Aero supported boundary zone can be added.

The Component Parts of the General type component called fuselage from the example above
is shown in the image below:

• Wing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
300 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

A Wing type component contains the following Component Parts with the following require-
ments:

– Walls: this component part must contain wall type boundary zones.

The Component Parts of the Wing type component called wing-01 from the example above is
shown in the image below:

• Engine

An Engine type component contains the following Component Parts with the following require-
ments:

– Exhaust: This component part must contain a mass-flow-inlet or pressure-inlet type

boundary zone.

– Intake: This component part must contain a pressure-outlet or mass-flow-outlet type

boundary zone.

– Nacelle: This component part is not required but may only have wall -type boundary zones.

The Component Parts of the Engine type component called engine-01 from the example above
is shown in the image below:

3.8.4.2. Applying Component Zone Specific Boundary Conditions

The second setup task that the Component Groups step is capable of is to apply specific boundary
conditions to component zones.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 301
Fluent Aero

While the Simulation Conditions step is used to apply Freestream or WindTunnel Inlet and
Outlet conditions that represent flight or wind tunnel conditions of the aircraft, the zone specific
boundary conditions of a Component Groups allows you to apply boundary conditions onto aircraft
components. These boundary conditions may be constant or varying (custom) for each design point
simulation. The mass flow rate of the engine exhaust is an example of a type of boundary condition
that will be applied in the Component Groups step.

The zone specific boundary conditions setup options provided in the Component Groups step is
only available on Fluent Aero’s supported boundary types and only for certain supported boundary
variables. To setup zone specific boundary conditions on unsupported boundaries, the Use Custom
Input Parameter functionality provided by the Simulation Conditions step can be used.

3.8.4.3. Boundary Zone Types Supported by Fluent Aero

Zones using a type that is directly supported from inside Fluent Aero’s user interface will appear
with a black square with gold cross icon next to its zone name inside.

The following boundary zone types are supported by Fluent Aero.

• Inlets

– mass-flow-inlet

– pressure-inlet

– pressure-far-field (special case – only supported as part of the Freestream group)

– velocity-inlet (special case – only directly supported as part of the WindTunnel group)

• Outlets

– pressure-outlet

– mass-flow-outlet

• Other Boundary Types

– wall

– symmetry

– periodic

For some supported zone type, Fluent Aero may display some common boundary variables that
can be controlled directly from inside Fluent Aero.

Note:

To control any variable that is not displayed directly from inside Fluent Aero, use the
Workspaces → Solution button to show the Fluent Solution workspace and modify

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
302 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

the setting there, and/or use the Simulation Conditions → Use Custom Input Parameter
functionality to modify the variable per design point.

Inlets
In this section, the settings available in Fluent Aero of supported inlet boundary zones are described.

Note:

All the supported inlets that are not part of the Freestream or WindTunnel group have
the same Turbulence Specification and Mass Fractions setting options which are de-
scribed at the end of the current section. For inlets in the Freestream or WindTunnel
group, the turbulence and mass fractions settings will not be displayed in its properties
panel as they are defined in the Simulation Conditions step.

• Mass-flow-inlet

– Conditions

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 303
Fluent Aero

Setting Conditions to Edit will cause Fluent Aero to reveal the list of settings available. Setting
Conditions to Case settings will cause Fluent Aero to use the zone settings that were setup
in the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

Note:

If Conditions is set to Edit in the Properties panel, its setting can no longer be
modified from the Properties panel. Instead, you must use the Reset to Custom
Settings command to change the setting back to Case settings. However, because
the setting was previously set to Edit, the Case settings conditions may have been
updated. Go to the Solution workspace and verify that the intended settings are
used on that boundary before proceeding with the calculation.

– Static Pressure

Set the Static Pressure specification method to either Constant, Custom or Case settings.
Setting to Constant allows you to specify a constant value that will be used in all design points.

Setting to Custom inserts an extra column in the Input: Design Points table where a custom
static pressure can be specified for each design point, as shown below.

Setting to Case settings will force Fluent Aero to use the Static Pressure setting that is defined
in the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

– Static Pressure [Pa]

Sets a constant pressure in Pascal to use on this boundary condition for all design points.

– Parameter Name (Static Pressure)

If Static Pressure is set to Custom, this option is revealed. In this case, you can set the name
of the custom variable that is used to control the static pressure of the mass flow inlet zone.
The default name of the expression uses the following format: zone_name_P.

– Total Temperature

Set the Total Temperature specification method to either Constant, Custom or Case settings.
Setting to Constant allows you to specify a constant value that will be used in all design points.

Setting to Custom inserts an extra column in the Input: Design Points table where a custom
total temperature can be specified for each design point.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
304 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Setting to Case settings will allow Fluent Aero to use the Total Temperature setting that is
defined in the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

– Total Temperature [K]

Sets a constant total temperature in Kelvin to use on this boundary condition for all design
points.

– Parameter Name (Total Temperature)

If Total Temperature is set to Custom, this option is revealed. In this case, you can set the
name of the custom variable that is used to control the total temperature of the mass flow
inlet zone. The default name of the expression uses the following format: zone_name_T0.

– Mass Flow Rate

Set the Mass Flow specification method to either Constant, Custom or Case settings.

Setting to Constant allows you to specify a constant value that will be used in all design points.

Setting to Custom inserts an extra column in the Input: Design Points table where a custom
mass flow can be specified for each design point.

Setting to Case settings will force Fluent Aero to use the Mass Flow Rate setting that is
defined in the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

– Mass Flow [kg/s]

Sets a constant mass flow in kilograms per second to use on this boundary condition for all
design points.

– Parameter Name (Mass Flow)

If Mass Flow is set to Custom, this option is revealed. In this case, you can set the name of
the custom variable that is used to control the mass flow of the mass flow inlet zone. The default
name of the expression uses the following format: zone_name_massflow.

– Turbulence Specification

The Turbulence Specification options are common to all inlet boundary conditions that are
not in the Freestream or WindTunnel group. For more details, see Turbulence Specification at
Inlets at the end of the current Inlets section under Boundary Zone Types Supported by Fluent
Aero (p. 302).

– Mass Fractions

When a mixture is selected in Air Properties, mass fractions for each species can be applied.
This setting is common to all inlet boundary conditions that are not in the Freestream or
WindTunnel group. For more details, see Mass Fractions at Inlets at the end of the current Inlets
section under Boundary Zone Types Supported by Fluent Aero (p. 302).

– Mass-flow-inlet settings that may be automatically setup by Fluent Aero

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 305
Fluent Aero

When a mass-flow-inlet boundary is used, Fluent Aero may automatically setup some back-
ground settings which are not shown directly in Fluent Aero, but can be seen from the back-
ground Solution workspace session:

→ If the mass-flow-inlet is a member of the WindTunnel group, Mass Flow Specification

Method will be set to Mass Flow Rate and Direction Specification Method will be set to
Normal to Boundary.

The example image below shows the background Solution workspace settings of an example
mass-flow-inlet boundary called windtunnel-inlet that is part of a WindTunnel type group.

Note:

The Mass Flow Specification Method is set to Mass Flow Rate and the Direction
specification Method is set to Normal to Boundary, as described above.

• Pressure-inlet

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
306 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Conditions

Setting Conditions to Edit will cause Fluent Aero to reveal the list of settings available that
you can directly specify inside the properties panel. Setting Conditions to Case settings will
cause Fluent Aero to use the zone settings that were setup in the initial case file or from
within the Fluent Solution workspace.

Note:

If Conditions is set to Edit in the Properties panel, its setting can no longer be
modified from the Properties panel. Instead, you must use the Reset to Custom
Settings command to change the setting back to Case settings. However, because
the setting was previously set to Edit, the Case settings conditions may have been
updated. Go to the Solution workspace and verify the intended settings are used
on that boundary before proceeding with the calculation.

– Total Pressure

Set the Total Pressure specification method to either Constant, Custom or Case settings.

Setting to Constant allows you to specify a constant value that will be used in all design points.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 307
Fluent Aero

Setting to Custom will insert an extra column in the Input: Design Points table where a custom
total pressure can be specified for each design point, as shown in the image below.

Setting to Case settings will force Fluent Aero to use the Total Pressure setting that is defined
in the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

– Total Pressure [Pa]

Sets a constant total pressure in Pascal to use on this boundary condition for all design points.

– Parameter Name (Total Pressure)

If Total Pressure is set to Custom, this option is revealed. In this case, you can set the name
of the custom variable that is used to control the total pressure of the pressure inlet zone. The
default name of the expression uses the following format: zone_name_P0.

– Supersonic/Initial Pressure

Set the Supersonic/Initial Pressure specification method to either Constant, Custom or Case
settings.

Setting to Constant allows you to specify a constant value that will be used in all design points.

Setting to Custom will insert an extra column in the Input: Design Points table where a custom
supersonic/initial pressure can be specified for each design point.

Setting to Case settings will force Fluent Aero to use the Supersonic/Initial Pressure setting
that is defined in the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

– Supersonic/Initial Pressure [Pa]

Sets a constant supersonic/initial pressure in Pascal to use on this boundary condition for all
design points.

– Parameter Name (Supersonic/Initial Pressure)

If Supersonic/Initial Pressure is set to Custom, this option is revealed. In this case, you can
set the name of the custom variable that is used to control the static pressure of the pressure
inlet zone. The default name of the expression uses the following format: zone_name_P.

– Total Temperature

Set the Total Temperature specification method to either Constant, Custom or Case settings.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
308 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Setting to Constant allows you to specify a constant value that will be used in all design points.

Setting to Custom will insert an extra column in the Input: Design Points table where a custom
total temperature can be specified for each design point.

Setting to Case settings will force Fluent Aero to use the Total Temperature setting that is
defined in the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

– Total Temperature [K]

Sets a constant total temperature in Kelvin to use on this boundary condition for all design
points.

– Parameter Name (Total Temperature)

If Total Temperature is set to Custom, this option is revealed. In this case, you can set the
name of the custom variable that is used to control the total temperature of the mass flow
inlet zone. The default name of the expression uses the following format: zone_name_T0.

– Turbulence Specification

The Turbulence Specification settings options are common to all inlet boundary conditions
that are not in the Freestream or WindTunnel group. For more details, see Turbulence Specific-
ation at Inlets at the end of the current Inlets section under Boundary Zone Types Supported
by Fluent Aero (p. 302).

– Mass Fractions

When a mixture is selected in Air Properties, mass fractions for each species can be applied.
This setting is common to all inlet boundary conditions that are not in the Freestream or
WindTunnel group. For more details, see Mass Fractions at Inlets at the end of the current Inlets
section under Boundary Zone Types Supported by Fluent Aero (p. 302).

• Pressure-far-field (special case – only supported as part of the Freestream group)

A pressure-far-field type boundary is only supported by Fluent Aero when it is used as part of
the Freestream group.

– Conditions

Fluent Aero will automatically set Conditions to Edit and automatically apply the far-field
conditions defined inside the Simulation Conditions step for each design point.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 309
Fluent Aero

• Velocity-inlet (special case – only directly supported as part of the WindTunnel group)

A velocity-inlet type boundary is only directly supported by Fluent Aero when it is used as part
of the WindTunnel group, specifically to define the WindTunnel Inlet boundary. If a velocity-
inlet type boundary is used outside of a WindTunnel group, only the Turbulence Specification
settings can be defined from Fluent Aero. Other settings cannot be set from Fluent Aero and
their settings in the Solution workspace will be applied.

– Conditions

Setting Conditions to Edit will cause Fluent Aero to reveal the list of settings available to
specify directly inside the properties panel.

– Turbulence Specification

The Turbulence Specification settings are common to all inlet boundary conditions that are
not in the Freestream or WindTunnel group. For more details, see Turbulence Specification at
Inlets at the end of the current Inlets section under Boundary Zone Types Supported by Fluent
Aero (p. 302).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
310 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Mass Fractions

When a mixture is selected in Air Properties, mass fractions for each species can be applied.
This setting is common to all inlet boundary conditions that are not in the Freestream or
WindTunnel group. For more details, see Mass Fractions at Inlets at the end of the current Inlets
section under Boundary Zone Types Supported by Fluent Aero (p. 302).

• Turbulence Specification at Inlets

Turbulence conditions can be specified at the inlets that are not in the Freestream or WindTunnel
group of the computational domain.

Three options are available: Case settings, Intensity and Viscosity Ratio and Intensity and
Length Scale. When loading a case file that contains constant values of Turbulent Intensity
[%], Turbulent Viscosity Ratio or Turbulent Length Scale and Intermittency (available when
a turbulence model with transition is used), the Turbulence Specification method will be auto-
matically set to Intensity and Viscosity Ratio or Intensity and Length Scale and their values
are automatically copied to Fluent Aero. Only these turbulence models are currently supported
during the import: k-Omega SST (without transition model), k-Omega WJ-BSL-EARSM (Beta)
(without transition model), Transition SST and K-Omega SST Intermittency Transition. If any of
the above-mentioned conditions are not satisfied, Fluent Aero will set the Turbulence Specific-
ation method to Case settings and the turbulence settings in the case file will be used.

If you change Case settings to Intensity and Viscosity Ratio or Intensity and Length Scale
from Fluent Aero, then Turbulent Intensity [%] and Turbulent Viscosity Ratio or Turbulent
Length Scale can be set from Fluent Aero and will be applied to the Solution workspace if the
Turbulence model is not set to Case Settings. Only constant values can be set from the
boundary conditions properties panel in Fluent Aero. However, it is possible to use Custom Input
Parameters, located under Simulation Conditions, to add an equation to describe the turbulence
condition at the farfield or wind tunnel inlet of a design point.

• Mass Fractions at Inlets

When a mixture is selected for Air Properties, Mass Fractions condition can be specified at the
inlets that are not in the Freestream or WindTunnel group of the computational domain.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 311
Fluent Aero

To modify the Mass Fractions, click on the Edit… button beside the Mass Fractions display
box. A new panel will open where you can set the mass fraction for each species, and the mass
fraction of the last species will be computed automatically. Note that constant mass fractions
will be applied to all design points and the sum of species’ mass fractions must equal one.

Outlets
In this section, the settings available in Fluent Aero of the supported outlet boundary conditions
are described.

• Pressure-outlet

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
312 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Conditions

Setting Conditions to Edit will cause Fluent Aero to reveal the list of settings available to
specify directly inside the properties panel. Setting Conditions to Case settings will cause
Fluent Aero to use the zone settings that were setup in the initial case file or from within the
Fluent Solution workspace.

Note:

If Conditions is set to Edit in the Properties panel, its setting can no longer be
modified from the Properties panel. Instead, you must use the Reset to Custom
Settings command to change the setting back to Case settings. However, because
the setting was previously set to Edit, the Case settings conditions may have been
updated. Go to the Solution workspace and verify the intended settings are used
on that boundary before proceeding with the calculation.

– Static Pressure

Set the Static Pressure specification method to either Constant, Custom or Case settings.

Setting to Constant allows you to specify a constant value that will be used in all design points.

Setting to Custom will insert an extra column in the Input: Design Points table where a custom
static pressure can be specified for each design point.

Setting to Case settings will force Fluent Aero to use the Static Pressure setting that is defined
in the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

– Static Pressure [Pa]

If the Static Pressure specification method is set to Constant, a constant pressure in Pascal
should be specified on this boundary condition for all design points.

– Parameter Name (Static Pressure)

If the Static Pressure specification method is set to Custom, several options appear. In this
case, you can set the name of the custom variable that is used to control the static pressure
of the pressure-outlet zone. The default name of the expression uses the following format:
zone_name_P.

Pressure-outlet settings that may be automatically setup by Fluent Aero

When a pressure-outlet boundary is used, Fluent Aero may automatically setup some back-
ground settings which are not shown directly in Fluent Aero, but can be seen from the back-
ground Solution workspace session:

→ If Conditions is set to Edit or Automatic:

• Prevent Reverse Flow will be enabled, Average Pressure Specification will be enabled.

• If the Solver Type is set to Density based and the pressure-outlet is a member of the
Freestream or WindTunnel group, the Averaging Method will be set to Strong.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 313
Fluent Aero

• If the Solver Type is set to Density based and the pressure-outlet is not a member of
the Freestream or WindTunnel group, the Averaging Method will be set to Weak.

→ If Conditions is set to Case settings

• No automatic setup is done to the pressure-outlet settings.

The example image below shows the background Solution workspace settings of an example
pressure-outlet boundary called engine-intake that is part of an Engine type group, used in
a Density based solver type calculation, with a custom input for the pressure value. In the image
below, see that Prevent Reverse Flow is enabled and the Average Pressure Specification is
enabled, with Averaging Method set to Weak, as described above.

• Mass-flow-outlet

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
314 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Conditions

Setting Conditions to Edit will cause Fluent Aero to reveal the list of settings available to
specify directly inside the properties panel. Setting Conditions to Case settings will cause
Fluent Aero to use the zone settings that were setup in the initial case file or from within the
Fluent Solution workspace.

Note:

Once the Conditions is set to Edit in the Properties panel, the setting can no longer
be changed from the Properties panel. Instead, you must use the Reset to Custom
Settings command to change the setting back to Case settings. However, because
the setting was previously set to Edit, the Case settings conditions may have been
updated. Go to the Solution workspace and verify the intended settings are used
on that boundary before proceeding with the calculation.

– Mass Flow

Set the Mass Flow specification method to either Constant, Custom or Case settings.

Setting to Constant allows you to specify a constant value that will be used in all design points.

Setting to Custom will insert an extra column in the Input: Design Points table where a
custom mass flow can be specified for each design point.

Setting to Case settings will force Fluent Aero to use the mass flow rate setting that is defined
in the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

– Mass Flow [kg/s]

Sets a constant mass flow in kilograms per second to use on this boundary condition for all
design points.

– Parameter Name (Mass Flow)

If Mass Flow is set to Custom, this option is revealed. In this case, you can set the name of
the custom variable that is used to control the mass flow of the mass flow inlet zone. The default
name of the expression uses the following format: zone_name_massflow.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 315
Fluent Aero

Other Boundary Types

• Wall

If the Apply to All Walls option is disabled in the Simulation Conditions step, you will be able
to customize wall conditions on each individual wall.

– Conditions

Setting Conditions to Edit will cause Fluent Aero to reveal the list of settings available to
specify directly inside the properties panel. In the current version of Fluent Aero, only certain
thermal conditions and Knudsen number related conditions can be specified. Moreover, mo-
mentum conditions specified in the case file will not be modified. Setting Conditions to Case
settings will cause Fluent Aero to use the zone settings that were setup in the initial case file
or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

Note:

Once Conditions is set to Edit in the Properties panel, the setting can no longer
be changed from the Properties panel. Instead, you must use the Reset to Custom
Settings command to change the setting back to Case settings. However, because
the setting was previously set to Edit, the Case settings conditions may have been
updated. Go to the Solution workspace and verify the intended settings are used
on that boundary before proceeding with the calculation.

– Thermal Conditions

Select the type of Thermal Conditions to apply: Heat Flux, Temperature or Case settings.
If Case settings is selected, the thermal conditions defined in the initial case file, or from the
Solution workspace window will be applied.

– Heat Flux

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
316 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

This option appears if Thermal Conditions is set to Heat Flux. The specification method for
Heat Flux can be either Constant, Custom or Case settings.

Setting to Constant allows you to specify a constant value that will be used in all design points.

Setting to Custom will insert an extra column in the Input: Design Points table where a custom
mass flow can be specified for each design point.

Setting to Case settings will force Fluent Aero to use the heat flux setting that is defined in
the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution workspace.

– Heat Flux [W/m2]

Sets a constant heat flux to use on this boundary condition for all design points.

– Parameter Name (Heat Flux)

If Heat Flux is set to Custom, this option is revealed. In this case, you can set the name of the
custom variable that is used to control the heat flux of the wall zone. The default name of the
expression uses the following format: zone_name_q.

– Temperature

This option appears if Thermal Conditions is set to Temperature. The specification method
for Temperature can be either Constant, Custom or Case settings. Setting to Constant allows
you to specify a constant value that will be used in all design points. Setting to Custom will
insert an extra column in the Input: Design Points table where a custom mass flow can be
specified for each design point. Setting to Case settings will force Fluent Aero to use the
temperature setting that is defined in the initial case file or from within the Fluent Solution
workspace.

– Temperature [K]

Sets a constant temperature to use on this boundary condition for all design points.

– Parameter Name (Temperature)

If Temperature is set to Custom, this option is revealed. In this case, you can set the name of
the custom variable that is used to control the temperature of the wall zone. The default name
of the expression uses the following format: zone_name_T.

– Knudsen Number Criterion

This option is only available when Knudsen Number Criterion in Airflow Physics is enabled.
If this option is unchecked, no-slip condition will replace the partial slip condition on the current
wall for design points with a Knudsen number above the specified threshold. Otherwise, partial-
slip wall conditions will prevail.

• Symmetry

No settings are available for boundary zones of symmetry type.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 317
Fluent Aero

• Periodic

Periodic boundaries can be used in Fluent Aero. However, they must be setup inside the Fluent
Solution workspace.

3.8.4.4. Boundary Zone Types Not Directly Supported by Fluent Aero

Zones using a type that is not directly supported inside Fluent Aero’s UI will appear with a grey
square icon next to its zone name inside.

Also, a note will appear in the Properties panel specifying that the zone is not yet supported, along
with recommendations on how to modify the input values on this boundary zone type, if needed.

For any zone type that is not directly supported by Fluent Aero, the boundary conditions that are
already defined on this zone in the case settings will be used. If you would like to modify these

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
318 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

settings, you can do so by selecting the Workspaces → Solution button from the top ribbon.
Furthermore, to setup custom settings per design point, the Simulation Conditions → Use Custom
Input Parameters functionality can be used.

3.8.4.5. Managing Component Outputs and Monitors

The final setup task that the Component Groups step is capable of is to enable component specific
output parameters. This allows you to collect certain standard outputs from different Component
Groups, depending on their type.

Manage Outputs
The Manage Component Outputs panel can be used to enable component specific output para-
meters, depending on what you may require for post processing. It can be accessed by clicking
Manage Outputs at the bottom of the Properties – Components Groups panel, or by right-
clicking Component Groups and selecting Manage Component Outputs and Monitors.

After selecting the command, a Manage Component Outputs panel will appear.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 319
Fluent Aero

A row will appear for each Component listed in your Component Groups step. The following options
are available:

• Active

Enable this option to cause the component specific outputs to be shown for that component.

• Component

The name of the component.

• Type

The component type.

• Outputs

A list of component specific outputs that will be generated if active for that component. Each
Type of Component features a different list of available component outputs that can be selected.
The following default outputs are available:

1. AeroIO Type Component

– MassBalance: The mass balance of the airflow taking into account the Freestream or
WindTunnel velocity-inlet boundaries that define the external boundaries of the domain.

2. General Type Component

– Lift: the total Lift force acting upon the component.

– Drag: the total Drag force acting upon the component.

3. Wing Type Component

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
320 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Lift: the total Lift force acting upon the component.

– Drag: the total Drag force acting upon the component

4. Engine Type Component

– Thrust(x,y,z): the thrust vector produced by the engine group. The following equation is
used to compute each component of the thrust of the engine group:

Note:

Currently, the pressure contribution is not included in the thrust calculation.

– MassBalance: the mass balance of airflow taking into account the engine inlet and exhaust
boundaries

• Monitor?

Enable this option to cause the component specific outputs to be monitored so that they can
be tracked in the Convergence panel.

Once the solution has been calculated, if any Component Outputs are Active, the values of the
Component Outputs will be listed in the Table:Component Outputs

3.8.5. Files
In this step, you control the output files that are written per design point. Clicking Files will reveal
the Properties - Files window.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 321
Fluent Aero

• Case Files

– Write Case Files

If this setting is Enabled, Fluent Aero will write case files (.cas[.h5]) for each design point.
These files will be shown inside the DP-* folders in the Project View. While these case files are
not necessary to launch a Fluent Aero simulation, they may be useful if you want to load and
recall the exact case settings used for each design point, or if you would like to export and use
this case file in a separate calculation inside the Fluent Solution workspace.

• Solution Files

– Write Solution Files

If this setting is Enabled, Fluent Aero will write solution files (.dat[.h5]) for each design point.
These files will be shown inside the DP-* folders in the Project View. Disable this option to
prevent writing these design point solutions. This could be useful if you have limited data storage
and/or are only interested in automatically post processed information (like table of coefficients).

– Autosave Intermediate Solution Files

Enable this option to write intermediate solution files while calculating each design point. This
can be useful to view/analyze simulation progress or to prevent losing simulation work if an error
occurs during calculation.

When this feature is enabled, an out.000X.autosave.flprj project file will be written to

the simulation Results folder for each design point. This project file will contain all the information
about which solution files are autosaved. The autosaved solution files will be written alongside

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
322 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

this project file, also inside the Results folder. The image below shows an example of collection
of files written in the Results folder associated with design point 1.

Inside Fluent Aero’s Project View, this out.000X.autosave.flprj file will be displayed as
a hidden file inside the design point folder.

This feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled, additional settings are revealed to control
when intermediate solutions are autosaved. These are described below.

– Save Solution Every (Iterations)

Define the number of iterations between which an intermediate solution is saved. This option
is shown if Autosave Intermediate Solution Files is Enabled.

– Retain Only Most Recent Files

If Disabled, all intermediate solution files will be maintained on disk.

If Enabled – All DP, for all design points that are being updated, only the most recent interme-
diate solution files defined in Maximum Intermediate Solution Files will be maintained on disk.

If Enabled – Current DP, for the last Design Point being updated, only the most recent interme-
diate solution files defined in Maximum Intermediate Solution Files will be maintained on disk.

– Maximum Intermediate Solution Files

Define the number of most recent intermediate files that will be maintained on disk. This will
appear if Retain Only Most Recent Files was enabled.

• Post-Processing Output

– Write Post Files

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 323
Fluent Aero

If this setting is Enabled, Fluent Aero will write post files (.cas.post,.dat.post) for each
design point. These files can then be used to aid post-processing using Post-Analysis and/or
EnSight. The files contain a subset of solution variables including some surface variables that are
directly supported by Post-Analysis/EnSight. If these files have been printed, they can be viewed
in Post-Analysis by right-clicking the DP folder in the Project View and selecting View Results
– Post Solution.

– Zones

Select the zones you would like to save in the post-processing solution files (.post). This setting
is only available if Write post-processing Files is enabled.

– Post Variable List

Select the subset of variables that you would like to save in the post-processing solution files
(.post). Three settings are available: Default, Minimal and Custom.

→ Minimal: Velocity, Density, Temperature, Pressure, Heatflux and Shear Stress.

→ Default: Adds to Minimal the Mach Number, Viscosity, Thermal Conductivity, Cp, Wall Distance,
Total Pressure, Total Temperature, Effective Viscosity and Pressure Coefficient.

→ Custom: A fully configurable list of variables from Fluent’s available post-processing datasets.

This setting is only available if Write Post Files is enabled.

– Additional Variables

Select any additional custom variables that you would like to save in the post-processing solution
files (.post). This setting is only available if Write Post Files is enabled.

3.8.6. Solve
In this step, you instruct Fluent Aero to calculate the design points specified in the previous steps.
Clicking Solve will reveal the Solve properties window.

• Iterations

This setting defines the maximum number of solver iterations that will be performed for each
design point. If Convergence Settings is set to Default, the default number of iterations is 1000.
If Convergence Settings is set to Robust, the default number of iterations is 2000 when the
conducting 3D simulations or 5000 for 2.5D simulations. If the calculation of a single design point
reaches the maximum solver iterations or satisfies all convergence criteria, the calculation will stop,
and the next design point will be automatically simulated.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
324 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

• Convergence Settings

This global setting instructs Fluent Aero on which type of default Solve settings to use. This global
setting will affect all other Solve panel settings (those shown when Custom is selected). Default,
Robust, Custom, and Case settings can be selected.

– Default

When Default is selected, Fluent Aero’s standard default solver settings will be used to update
the design points. This should be used for the majority of Fluent Aero simulations.

When Default is selected, many other settings in the Solve panel (those shown when Custom
is selected) will be hidden by default, and their default values will be applied. The values used
for each of these settings may change depending on the selected Domain Dimension, and
Solver Type and the Flow Range associated with each design point. These settings have been
tuned using the latest best practices of Fluent over a wide array of test cases with the goal of
making the majority of simple external aero simulations converge successfully.

Below are a few major points that describe, in general, Fluent Aero’s default settings:

→ If the Solver Type is set to Density based, the Steering method will be used for the Solution
Control.

→ If the Solver Type is set to Pressure based, the Pseudo Time method will be used for the
Solution Control.

→ If the Solver Type is set to Pressure based, and Domain Dimension is set to 2.5D, the Length
Scale Method will be set to User-Specified and the Length Scale will be set to the Reference
Length specified in Geometric Properties. However, if the Domain Dimension is set to 3D,
the Length Scale Method will be set to Conservative. Refer to Pseudo Time Settings for the
Calculation for more information.

→ When Steering is used, more aggressive Steering settings will be used for the lower Flow
Range, such as Subsonic, than for the higher Flow Range, such as Hypersonic. For more in-
formation, see Steering at the end of the current Inlets section under Boundary Zone Types
Supported by Fluent Aero (p. 302).

You can explore Fluent Aero’s default settings by first selecting the appropriate Domain Dimen-
sion and Solver Type and then using the Show Default Settings function accessible by right-
clicking on Solve in the Outline View (refer to Show Default Settings under Solve (p. 324) for more
information).

– Robust

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 325
Fluent Aero

When Robust is selected, a more robust version of Fluent Aero’s solver settings will be used to
update the design points. These settings may provide a more stable but slower convergence
than the standard default solver settings. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the number
of iterations to comply with the convergence criteria. This can be used for cases or design points
that do not converge well using the default settings.

In the current release, Robust is only available if Solver Type is set to Density based and the
Domain Dimension is set to 3D.

When Robust is selected, many other settings in the Solve panel (those shown when Custom
is selected) will be hidden by default, and their robust values will be applied. The values used
for each of these settings may change depending on the selected Domain Dimension, and
Solver Type and the Flow Range associated with each design point. These settings have been
tuned using the latest best practices of Fluent over a wide array of test cases with the goal of
making more difficult external aero simulations converge successfully.

Fluent Aero’s Robust Convergence Settings follow the same general principles of the default
settings, except that more relaxed values are used. For example, Courant Number and Time
Scale Factor will be lower than, and iteration numbers will be longer than when Default Con-
vergence Settings are used.

You can explore Fluent Aero’s Robust settings by first selecting the appropriate Domain Dimen-
sion and Solver Type and then using the Show Robust Settings function accessible by right-
clicking on Solve in the Outline View. Refer to Show Robust Settings under Solve (p. 324) for more
information.

– Case Settings

When Case settings is selected, none of Fluent Aero’s default solver settings will be applied or
used to update the design points. In this situation, the user must ensure that a good set of
solver settings has already been setup in the Fluent Solution workspace (such as Solution →
Methods, Solution → Controls, etc.). Therefore, this setting should only be used by advanced
users.

– Custom

When Custom is selected, additional options are revealed in the Solve panel. These additional
settings represent other solver settings that can be useful to improve the convergence while

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
326 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

updating the design points. These additional settings are described in detail in the following
sections.

• Solution

– Solver Methods

This setting defines the solver settings used to perform the calculations.

→ Default

When Default is selected, Fluent Aero will apply a subset of default solution methods to
the background solver session. Some of these settings will change depending on if Solver
Type is set to Density based or Pressure based, or on other features of the grid or sim-
ulation setup.

• When Solver Type is set to Density based, the following default Solution Methods
will be applied:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 327
Fluent Aero

• When Solver Type is set to Pressure based, the following default methods will be
applied:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
328 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

• The following options may be enabled depending on various features of the mesh or
simulation setup:

– High Speed Numerics will be enabled when the density based solver type is used,
except when the flow range is subsonic, then it will be disabled.

– Warped Face Gradient Correction will always be enabled when the density-based
solver is used. For the pressure-based solver, it will be enabled if the mesh contains
any polyhedral or hexahedral cells. It will be disabled if it does not.

– Legacy Boundary Treatment will be used in most cases, with the exception of design
points that are simulated with a hypersonic flow range and a density based solver
type, where Extended Boundary Treatment will be used.

– Poor Mesh Numerics will be enabled for all cases, with cell quality based method
disabled.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 329
Fluent Aero

→ Case settings

When Case settings is selected, Fluent Aero will not apply any settings to the solution
methods of the background solver session. The solution methods already specified in the
background solver session will be used. This option allows an advanced user to have full
access to the list of solution methods available of the solver. To make changes to the
solution methods to the background solver session, use the Show Solution Workspace
command, and in the window that appears, make the appropriate changes in the Methods
panel.

– Flow Range

This option only appears if Solver Type is set to Density based.

This setting allows you to specify the expected flow range. By default, this is set to Auto-
matic, which will use the design point conditions to set the flow range for each design
point. In Automatic mode, the inlet Mach number will be used to select the flow range
associated with each design point, using the following criteria:

→ 0.0 < M <= 0.6 → Subsonic

→ 0.6 < M <= 1.4 → Transonic

→ 1.4 < M <= 2.5 → Low-Supersonic

→ 2.5 < M <= 4.5 → High-Supersonic

→ 4.5 < M → Hypersonic

However, you can manually set the flow range to either Subsonic, Transonic, Low-Super-
sonic, High-Supersonic, and Hypersonic if you know that their design points operate in a
given flow regime. For instance, at high AoAs, a condition at Mach number 0.5 can produce
a shock on the suction side of a wing. In this case, the Flow Range can be manually set to
Transonic in order to improve convergence. Therefore, this option will help Fluent Aero
tune various solver options for each type of simulation.

– Solution Control

This setting is used to select the solver convergence strategy. The default option is Steering,
but Pseudo Time, CFL and Case settings can also be selected. Steering is not available if
the Solver Type is set to Pressure based. If Case settings is selected, the solver strategy
setup in the initial case file, or from the Solution workspace window, will be used. Depending
on the selection, a number of other settings may be revealed.

→ The following settings appear when Solution Control is set to Pseudo Time:

Time Scale Factor: Controls the speed of convergence. Lower values result in a slower
convergence speed but also potentially a better stability. The default value is 0.5. See
Using the Solver for more information.

→ The following settings appear when Solution Control is set to CFL:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
330 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Courant Number: Controls the speed of convergence. Lower values result in a slower
convergence speed but also potentially a better stability. The default value is 5. See Using
the Solver for more information.

→ The following settings appear when a specific Flow Range is selected and Solution
Control is set to Steering:

First to Higher Order Blending [%], Steering Stage 1 Iterations, Steering Stage 2
Update CFL After, Steering Stage 2 Update CFL Interval, Initial CFL, Maximum CFL,
and Explicit Under-Relaxation Factor all control the speed and aggressiveness of con-
vergence. The default values will change based on the selection made for the Flow Range.
See Using the Solver for more information.

Note:

When encountering more challenging simulations that lead to divergence,

there are several settings that could be adjusted to try to achieve better con-
vergence. First, inspect the quality of your initial solution. For instance, the use
of FMG initialization might require changes to its CFL and the number of
multigrid levels and iterations to guarantee a smooth initial CFD solution before
steering. If the quality of the initial solution is fine and if divergence occurs in
stage 1, reduce the Initial CFL without going below 0.25 (suggestion) and in-
crease the Steering Stage 1 Iterations without exceeding 250 (suggestion).
If the above fails, then try to reduce the Explicit Under-Relaxation Factor
without going below 0.4 (suggestion). If divergence occurs early in stage 2,
reduce the Maximum CFL without going below 5 (suggestion) and/or increase
the number of iterations of Steering Stage 2 Update CFL After or Steering
Stage 2 Update CFL Interval without exceeding 200 and 40 respectively. If
the above did not improve convergence, examine where divergence occurs in
your computational domain. If divergence occurs near the surface, try to reduce
the value of the CASM Cutoff without going below 25 (suggestion) and/or
reduce the under-relaxation factors of the turbulence model. The latter can be
accessed through the Fluent Solution workspace in Solution → Controls.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 331
Fluent Aero

– CASM Cutoff

This setting is used to select the cut-off multiplier for the Convergence Acceleration for
Stretched Meshes (CASM) method. When a non-zero value is set, the enhanced CASM for-
mulation will be applied whereas entering a value of 0 here will completely disable CASM.
This option is only available when Solver Type is set to Density based. Refer to Convergence
Acceleration for Stretched Meshes (CASM) in the Fluent User's Guide for more information
on this setting.

– HOTR Relaxation Factor

This setting is used to select the Relaxation Factor for the High Order Term Relaxation
method. Refer to High Order Term Relaxation (HOTR) in the Fluent User's Guide for more in-
formation on this setting. Entering a value of 0 here will completely disable HOTR.

– Spatial Discretization Limiter

This setting is used to select the gradient limiter and is only available with the density-based
solver. Refer to Selecting Gradient Limiters in the Fluent User's Guide for more information
on this setting.

→ Cell to Face

This is the default option. When selected, Fluent Aero will set the Limiter Type to
Standard and enable Cell to Face Limiting in the background solver session. The Apply
Limiter Filter option is not directly enforced with this selection but is dependent on the
activation of the high-speed numerics that is only available with the density-based solver.

→ Cell to Node

When selected, Fluent Aero will set the Limiter Type to Standard and enable Cell to
Node Limiting and disable Apply Limiter Filter in the background solver session.

→ Case settings

When Case settings is selected, Fluent Aero will not apply any settings to the gradient
limiter of the background solver session.

• Initialization

– Initialization Method

This setting defines the method to initialize the simulation. Currently, FMG, Hybrid, Standard,
and Case settings are available. The default setting is FMG.

→ FMG

FMG initialization utilizes the Ansys Fluent FAS Multigrid technology to obtain the initial
solution. Starting from a uniform solution (after performing standard initialization), the
FMG initialization procedure constructs the desired number of geometric grid levels, and
then performs an initialization on each level starting from the coarsest grid level and
ending with the finest grid level. More information on this method can be found in
Overview of FMG Initialization.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
332 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Selecting FMG initialization will reveal the FMG Courant Number and FMG Viscous set-
tings in the Solve panel.

Many other FMG initialization settings, including the Number of Multigrid Levels, and
the Number of Cycles per Level, are specified automatically by Fluent Aero and will vary
depending on if Convergence Settings is set to Default, Robust or Custom. In general,
a higher number of cycles per level will be used for higher flow range, and in the Robust
mode.

After initializing a design point, you can view the settings that were automatically applied
by going to the Solution workspace and viewing these settings in the appropriate text
user interface option or graphical user interface panel. To modify these settings to be
different than those automatically applied by Fluent Aero, first setting Initialization
Method to Case settings, and then modify these values from the Solution workspace.

→ Hybrid

Hybrid initialization will initialize the solution with a collection of recipes and boundary
interpolation methods. It solves Laplace’s equation to determine the velocity and pressure
fields. All other variables, such as temperature and turbulence, will be automatically
patched based on domain averaged values or a particular interpolation recipe. By default,
the number of iterations associated with the hybrid initialization will be set to 10 and the
Use External Aero Favorable Settings option will be enabled.

→ Standard

Standard initialization will initialize the pressure, velocity, turbulence and temperature
fields of the entire domain with constant initial values based on the Simulation Conditions
used and applied to the Freestream or WindTunnel domain boundaries.

→ Case settings

If Case settings is selected, the initialization method setup in the initial case file, or from
the Solution workspace window, is used.

Note:

Because of various limitations in the Fluent Solution workspace, in some specific

situations, such as when the Solver Type is set to Pressure based, or when the
Solution Control is set to Pseudo Time, an FMG initialization will only occur if
you manually trigger the initialization using a text user interface command.
Therefore, in such cases, it may not be possible to get the FMG initialization to
execute for all design points when using the Case settings option. A workaround
is to use an Initialization Journal File.

– FMG Courant Number

This setting can be used to set the Courant Number associated with the FMG initialization.
This setting is only visible if Initialization Method is set to FMG.

– FMG Viscous

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 333
Fluent Aero

This setting is used to enable the viscous mode of the FMG initialization. This setting is only
visible if Initialization Method is set to FMG.

– FMG Species

By default, the FMG initialization solves the transport species equations, but neglects volu-
metric reaction terms. This setting is used to enable species volumetric reactions during the
FMG initialization. This setting is available only when density-based solver and a mixture
Air Properties are selected in Airflow Physics and Initialization Method is set to FMG.

Note:

If the initial solution produced by FMG does not improve as you reduce its
Courant Number, conduct more iterations at each multigrid level. To increase
these numbers, go to the Fluent Solution workspace and, in its Console (text
user interface), type the following command: solve->initialize->set-
fmg-initialization and follow the steps described in Steps in Using FMG
Initialization in the Fluent User's Guide. Next, to have Fluent Aero use these new
settings, change Initialization Method to Case settings. ln general, residuals
below 1e-2 at end of level 1 (last multigrid level) will produce a suitable initial
solution.

– Initialize Between Design Points

This setting is enabled by default. In this case, an Initialization will be performed at the be-
ginning of the calculation of each design point. When unchecked, the current design point
will begin to calculate using the results of the previous design point simulation.

• Journals

This section allows you to setup Fluent journal (.jou) files that can be used to add extra control
and setup to the Fluent solver at various points within the design point calculation process. These
journal files will be read by the Fluent solver directly so they can only include settings that would
affect the Fluent Solution workspace. The journal files cannot be used to change any settings that
are located inside the Fluent Aero workspace. The default location to put these journal files is inside
the Simulation folder (alongside the simulation case file).

Note:

The journal files referred to by these options are scheme format .jou journal files that
will be read and used by the Fluent solver to perform setup operations in the Fluent
Solution workspace at various stages in the solution process. Fluent scheme commands
or Fluent text user interface console commands can be used in these files. These are
not the same as the python journal files that are read and used by Fluent Aero to perform
setup operations in the Fluent Aero workspace.

There are three types of journal files, Run Journal, Design Point Journal and Initialization
Journal, and each are applied at different steps in the settings application process.

– Run Journal

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
334 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

This setting allows you to execute a journal file at the beginning of a run, after you press the
Update command, and after all Fluent Aero’s default solver setup has been applied, but before
design point specific settings and initialization settings are applied and before the initialization
or calculation of any design point has been carried out. The default name to use for this journal
file is run.jou. When enabled, the setting Run Journal File will appear, where you can enter
the name and path to the journal file. The default name and path ./run.jou implies that there
is a run journal file called run.jou located inside the simulation folder. All code inside this
journal file should be in scheme format, and will be executed by the solver.

– Design Point Journal

This setting allows you to execute a journal file before the initialization settings are applied and
the initialization and calculation of each design point is carried out. The default name to use for
this journal file is designpoint.jou. When enabled, the setting Design Point Journal File
will appear, where you can enter the name and path to the journal file. The default name and
path ./designpoint.jou implies that there is a design point journal file called design-
point.jou located inside the simulation folder. All code inside this journal file should be in
scheme format, and will be executed by the solver.

– Initialization Journal

This setting allows you to execute a journal file to replace the initialization routine that Fluent
Aero would use for a design point. When this setting is Enabled, the Initialization Method
setting will be set to Journal file. The default name to use for this journal file is initializa-
tion.jou. When enabled, the setting Initialization Journal File will appear, where you can
enter the name and path to the journal file. The default name and path ./initializa-
tion.jou implies that there is a initialization journal file called initialization.jou located
inside the simulation folder. All code inside this journal file should be in scheme format, and will
be executed by the solver.

The figure below shows the order of operations Fluent Aero uses to apply settings after you click
Update and before the calculation starts, including where the three journal file types are applied,
if enabled.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 335
Fluent Aero

• Convergence Criteria

This setting defines the convergence criteria of your simulation in Fluent Aero. The following options
can be selected:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
336 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Default

When Default is selected, Fluent Aero’s default convergence criteria will be used to check the
convergence status of each design point. The following settings are only visible when Custom
is selected, but their default values will be set in the background solver session.

→ Residuals Convergence Cutoff

This setting defines the convergence residual value at which the calculation of a design point
will stop if all the solver residuals drop below this value. By default, the convergence cutoff is
set to 1e-5. The convergence condition is reached only when both Residuals Convergence
Cutoff and Aero Coeff. Conv. Cutoff are satisfied.

→ Aero Coeff. Conv. Cutoff

This setting defines the convergence cutoff for the lift and drag coefficients. The default value
is 2e-5 in most cases, except when the Solver Type is Pressure based and the Domain Di-
mension is 2.5D. In this case, the default is set 1e-4. The convergence condition is reached
only when both Residuals Convergence Cutoff and Aero Coeff. Conv. Cutoff are satisfied.

→ Aero Coeff. Conv. Previous Values

This setting defines the number of iterations prior to the current iteration to be considered to
estimate the convergence of lift and drag coefficients. The default value is 10. The coefficient
of the current iteration will be compared with each of the last 10 values and the maximum
difference will be used to compare with the cutoff setting.

Note:

This maximum difference is normalized by the value of the current iteration.

– Disabled

When selected, the convergence criteria will be disabled. The solver will run until the number
of iterations specified for each design point has been met.

– Custom

When selected, the convergence settings descripted in the Default section above will become
available and you can customize their values.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 337
Fluent Aero

The following command buttons are available at the bottom of the Solve → Properties panel.

• Update

Note:

The Update command button is available when Fluent Aero is waiting for you to start
the calculation.

Once all the parameters and variables are set, Fluent Aero calculations can be started by clicking
the Update button which is located on the bottom of the Solve panel, or by right-clicking Solve
in the Outline View tree and selecting the Update command.

When the calculation starts, Fluent Aero will refer to the Input: Design Points table Status column
to determine if and how a particular design point will be updated.

– Design Points with Status set to Needs Update will be updated starting from the beginning,
including initialization.

– Design Points with Status set to Continue to Update or Initialized will be updated starting
from the previously written solution file (out.0*.dat[.h5]) associated with that design point.

– Design Points with Status set to Initialize will only be initialized and no solver iterations will
be updated.

– Design Points with Status set to Updated, Do Not Update, Interrupted or Error will not be
updated.

The following Interrupt command button is available when Fluent Aero is calculating:

• Interrupt

While the calculation is being performed, an Interrupt button appears at the bottom of the Solve
panel. If Interrupt is selected, the calculation will be interrupted at the next iteration.

Important:

Interrupting a calculation does not save the results files (out.0*.dat[.h5] and
out.0*.cas[.h5]) to the Design Point folder, and does not update the values in
the results tables (Table:Summary, Table:Coefficients, Table:Residuals). If you would
like to save your current solution to the results files and update the results tables, select
Save Results.

After the calculation is complete or interrupted, additional commands will appear in the Solve
panel.

The following command buttons are available after a calculation has been interrupted:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
338 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

• Continue

By clicking the Continue button, Fluent Aero will continue the interrupted design point calculation
from their previous state. The solution will not be initialized, and an additional set of iterations will
be performed.

Before a Continue is performed, any setting in the Solve panel can be adjusted, and these settings
will be applied to the calculation. For example, you can change the Time Scale Factor allowing
this new Time Scale Factor to be used for the remainder of the continued calculation.

However, while using the Continue command, you cannot make any changes to the Geometric
Properties, Simulation Conditions, Component Groups panel, or the Input Design Points table,
as changes to these settings will set the Design Point Status to Needs Update, and therefore will
require a full update from a new initial solution.

• Save Results

When the calculation of a design point is interrupted, the data solution file is not saved and the
tabulated results values are not computed or filled. If you want to save the results of the design
point at the interrupted location, clicking Save Results will cause the data file to be saved and the
tabulated results to be computed and filled.

• Run Next DPs

This command will move on from the current design point that was interrupted, and cause the
next design points in the sequence to be updated. The data solution file and the tabulated results
of the current design point will not be saved, unless you select the Save Results command described
above.

The following right-click commands are available by right-clicking the Solve step.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 339
Fluent Aero

Note:

Commands such as Update and Interrupt, which are also available as command buttons,
are instead described in Simulation Conditions (p. 269).

• Initialize Current DP

This command will initialize the current design point only. If there has not yet been any design
points updated, the first design point will be initialized. No iterations will be calculated. This allows
you to verify if the initialization procedure is working well for a single design point before continuing
with the calculation.

The current design point is typically the most recent design point that was updated or loaded, and
will have its .dat[.h5] file shown in bold in the Project View. It is also possible to see the current
design point by right-clicking the simulation folder, selecting Properties to view the simulation
metadata, and finding the current key.

• Initialize All DPs

This command will initialize all design points. No iterations will be calculated. This allows you to
verify if the initialization procedure is working well for all design points before continuing with the
calculation.

• Apply Solver Settings

In a typical workflow, when the Update command is used, Fluent Aero will first setup all settings
in the solver and Solution workspace and then initialize and update the design points. If you would
instead like to first verify what solver settings are setup inside the Solution workspace before
continuing with the calculation, this Apply Solver Settings command can be used. By selecting

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
340 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

this command, Fluent Aero will immediately setup all solver settings inside the Solution workspace,
allowing you to open the Solution workspace to verify the settings before calculating.

• Apply Convergence Criteria

In a typical workflow, when the Update command is used, Fluent Aero will first create all conver-
gence monitors and set up the convergence criteria in the solver and Solution workspace and
then initialize and update the design points. If you would instead like to first verify what convergence
monitors are setup inside the Solution workspace before continuing with the calculation, this
Apply Convergence Criteria command can be used. By selecting this command, Fluent Aero will
immediately setup all convergence monitors and criteria inside the Solution workspace, allowing
you to open the Solution workspace to verify the settings before calculating.

• Show Default Settings

When Convergence Settings is set to Default, Fluent Aero will automatically apply default solver
settings to use when calculating design points. These settings may change depending on the
Solver Type, Domain Dimension and Flow Range used for each design point. However, this will
all happen in the background, without necessarily showing the user which settings are being used.

If you would like to quickly view which settings are used when Convergence Settings is set to
Default, you can use the Show Default Settings command. Clicking this will open a window,
where the Flow Range default settings can be selected.

Clicking Apply will set the Convergence Settings to Custom (which will show all the underlying
Solve settings), and set each setting to its default value based on the selected Flow Range. This
option can be used to slightly modify the Default settings if convergence difficulties are experienced.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 341
Fluent Aero

• Show Robust Settings

When Convergence Settings is set to Robust, Fluent Aero will automatically apply robust solver
settings to use when calculating design points. These settings may change depending on the
Solver Type, Domain Dimension and Flow Range used for each design point. However, this will
all happen in the background, without necessarily showing the user which settings are being used.

If you would like to quickly view which settings are used when Convergence Settings is set to
Robust, you can use the Show Robust Settings command. Clicking this will open a window, where
the Flow Range default settings can be selected.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
342 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting up a Fluent Aero Simulation

Clicking Apply will set the Convergence Settings to Custom (which will show all the underlying
Solve settings), and set each setting to its default value based on the selected Flow Range. This
option can be used to slightly modify the Robust settings if convergence difficulties are experienced.

In the current release, Show Robust Settings is only available if Solver Type is set to Density
based and the Domain Dimension is set to 3D.

3.8.7. Modifying Settings After Results Have Been Calculated

After Results have been calculated, you may go back and modify settings inside Setup (Geometric
Properties, Simulation Conditions, Component Groups), Solution (Solve) or in the Input: Design
Point table. Depending on which settings are modified, the Results may no longer be up to date,
and the status of the design points may change.

Modifying settings that define all design points will cause all design points to be set to Needs
Update.

Modifying any of the following settings will cause the Status of all design points to be set to Needs
Update.

• Most settings in the Geometric Properties step will cause all design points to be set to Needs
Update, except for the following exceptions:

– Domain Type cannot be changed after Results have been calculated.

– Changing Reference Length and Reference Area trigger a special dialog, which is described in
an upcoming section.

• Changing any setting in the Airflow Physics will cause all design points to be set to Needs Update,
with one exception:

– Adjusting the Transitional Regime Threshold will only affect the design points that transitioned
into a different flow regime. For instance, if the threshold is decreased, some design points might
shift into the rarefied flow regime, and only those will be set to Needs Update.

• Changing any input Parameter type in Simulation Conditions will cause all design points to be
set to Needs Update.

• Changing the constant value of any parameter that is set to Distribution → Constant in Simulation
Conditions will cause all design points to be set to Needs Update.

• Changing the constant value of any input parameter defined on a specific zone in Component
Groups will cause all design points to be set to Needs Update.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 343
Fluent Aero

• Changing the name of any custom input parameter defined on a specific zone in Component
Groups will cause all design points to be set to Needs Update.

• Changing the zone type or renaming any zone listed in Component Groups will cause all design
points to be set to Needs Update. This procedure will also trigger additional changes, such as a
deletion of the run.settings file, as described in an upcoming section.

Modifying settings in the Input Design Point Table will cause an individual Design Point to be
set to Needs Update.

Changing an input value in the Input Design Point table that represents a single design point will
cause the Status of that design point to be set to Needs Update. If you would like to refresh the
values of the design point table to match those that were calculated, you may use the Reload DP
Table command.

Modifying settings Solution → Solve will not change the status of a design point.

Modifying any settings in the Solve panel will not change the status of any design point. This is because
you may want to calculate a design point simulation using a preliminary set of solver settings, then
modify the settings and continue the calculation in order to follow a specific convergence method.
You must take care of ensuring that the settings used to calculate each design point are as intended.
To load the most recent Solve settings used to calculate an individual design point, you can right-
click a design point folder in the Project View and select the Load Design Point Solve Settings
command.

Modifying Reference Length and Reference Area

The Reference Length and Reference Area has no impact on the CFD solution itself (.dat[.h5]
file), but does have an impact on the aerodynamic coefficients because they are used to non-dimen-
tionalize the forces. Therefore, if you modify the Reference Length or Reference Area after calculating
any Results, a procedure allows you to update these coefficients only without having to recalculate
any design point solution.

If Reference Length or Reference Area are modified, a panel will appear.

If you select Yes, Fluent Aero will immediately update all Aerodynamic Coefficients and the Reynolds
number in all results tables or files. If any relevant custom output is used, Fluent Aero will also load
the solution file for every design point, and recompute the custom output value before updating the
tables (this process may take some time).

If you select No, Fluent Aero will not yet update the Aerodynamic Coefficients, and the Status of all
design points will be set to Reference Values Modified. When you are ready to update these values,

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
344 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

you should use the Update Results command button located in the Results tables properties panel.
This will update the values of the aerodynamic coefficients, Reynolds number and relevant custom
outputs and set the status of each design point back to Updated. It is important to update the results
before you close a simulation to ensure that the values are updated appropriately.

Modifying a Zone Type or Name

Generally, you should set up the full zone names and types before calculating any Results. If you
modify the type or name of any zone listed in Component Groups after calculating Results, the
following will occur:

• The run.settings file, which contains the list of all zones, their names, types and their zone
specific settings, will be deleted.

• The Status of all design points will be set to Needs Update. Furthermore, in this case, the status
will also be saved to the design point folders, and therefore the Status cannot be refreshed by using
the Refresh Status or Reload DP Table command.

• The following message will be printed to the console.

You must then re-save the run.settings to re-sync it with the case file by doing one of the fol-
lowing:

• Selecting File → Save Case, or

• Clicking Update, or

• Clicking Yes when asked to save the case after closing the solver.

If you changed a zone type or name after calculating the results, it is important to re-save the
run.settings file in one of the above recommended ways. Failing to do so could cause issues the
next time you load your simulation.

3.9. Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

The following section describes the possible ways to interact with and postprocess the results of a
Fluent Aero simulation.

3.9.1. Convergence Plots in the Graphics Window

During and after the Fluent Aero simulation, the Convergence window can be used to display the
convergence plots of Residuals as well as any monitors such as Lift, Drag and Moment. The Conver-
gence window is shown by default when you begin a calculation. It is located in the same location
as the Graphics window, and can be accessed at any time by selecting the Convergence tab.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 345
Fluent Aero

The image below shows a Convergence window showing the Residuals of Design Point 2.

There are two items that can be used to control the content displayed in the Convergence plot
window:

• Dataset

Select the Design Point that you would like to see the Residuals or Convergence Monitors. Any
Design Point that has been simulated will appear in the list of selectable Design Points.

• Curve

Select the Residuals or Convergence Monitors of the selected. Residuals, lift-coefficient, drag-
coefficient, and pitch-, yaw- and roll-moment-coefficient are always available as selections in
this menu when using Fluent Aero. Individual solver residuals and other solution monitors may
also be available depending on your settings. For example, if a mixture has been selected for Air
Properties, the residuals of each species will be available.

The convergence plots can be interacted with in the following ways:

• Display the value of a point on the curve

The value of a point on a curve can be displayed by clicking a curve near the point of interest.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
346 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

• Zoom into a part of the curve

A section of the curve can be investigated further by zooming onto it using a Shift+Left-
Click+Mouse-Drag.

3.9.2. Results Menu

Once a Fluent Aero simulation begins to calculate, a Results component menu will appear at the end
of the Outline View tree. The Results component menu contains four sub-components that can be
used to post-process the results; Tables, Graphs, Plots, and Contours.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 347
Fluent Aero

3.9.2.1. Tables
The Tables component contains commands to display tabulated results of a simulation. These
commands are accessible by right-clicking Tables in the Outline View window, or by using a se-
lectable dropdown list or buttons in the Properties - Tables window.

• Create Results Table

This function will create a set of results tables called Table:Summary, Table:Coefficients,
Table:Forces, Table:Residuals, and if required, Table:Custom Output in the same area as the
Graphics window. This table presents selected input and output values associated with each
design point that was calculated in the simulation.

• Export Results Tables to CSV

This function will export the results tables using comma separated values files Table-Coeffi-
cients.csv, Table-Forces.csv, Table-Residuals.csv and Table-Summary.csv
located in a Summary folder inside Results.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
348 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

The following figure shows an example of Table-Summary.csv file to illustrate the file format
used.

• Export Results to VBM Input File

This function will export the results of aerodynamic coefficients to a .dat file which can be used
as an input to describe the aerodynamic performance of an airfoil section of Fluent’s Virtual Blade
Model (VBM).

After exporting this file, the file will be displayed in the Simulation → Results → Summary folder
in the Project View, and stored in the Simulation → Results folder on disk.

File Format

The following image shows an example of the VBM input file created by Fluent Aero and annotated
for clarity.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 349
Fluent Aero

– Header

→ At the top of the file, there is a short header, which contains:

• The section name.

• The number of tables inside the file.

– Tables

→ Below the header is a cl and cd table for each combination of Mach and Reynolds number
representing a group of design point results used in the simulation. Each table consists of
the following:

• cl or cd to specify which output values are contained in the subsequent table, representing
a group of design point results.

• The Reynolds number associated with the group of design point results.

• The Mach number associated with the group of design point results.

• The number of design points in the group of design point results.

• Multiple lines containing the input angle of attack in degrees and output aerodynamic
coefficient (cl or cd) for each design point in the group of design point results

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
350 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

– File Requirements and Recommendations:

→ Fluent Aero will export results of a simulation using only the design points that are available
in the simulation. However, care should be taken to ensure the simulation contains sufficient
results to produce a viable VBM input file.

• The data file must contain results for the full sweep of angles of attack, from -180 to 180
degrees for each group of design point results.

Note:

Since an angle of attack of -180 degrees is equivalent to +180 degrees, only

one of these should be calculated for each group of design points. The results
will automatically fill both positions in the design point table.

• A higher concentration of design points is recommended for angles of attack that could
more commonly be used in VBM simulations or feature more significant changes in results
with small increments in angle of attack.

• Export Results to STK Aviator (Beta)

This function will export the results of aerodynamic coefficients to a simple format .aero file
supported by STK Aviator. This file can be used to define the aerodynamic performance of an
aircraft during an AGI STK Aviator simulation.

This is currently a Beta feature, and it’s documentation can be found here Fluent Aero – Export
Results to STK Aviator.

Refer to the STK Help at https://help.agi.com/stk/ for more information on how a .aero file can
be used in STK Aviator.

• Display Aero Forces

This function will display the Table:Forces and Table:Coefficients tables based on the coordinate
system selected by the user. Currently, the body-fixed and wind-fixed coordinate systems are
supported for displaying aero forces and moments, along with their coefficients. The body-fixed
axes are attached to the object and move with it; however, the wind-fixed axes are fixed with
respect to the surrounding air. In both body-fixed and wind-fixed coordinate systems, the origin
is the same; however, their orientations differ from each other due to the angle of attack and
sideslip.

– Default

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 351
Fluent Aero

This option displays the lift and drag forces and coefficients in the wind-fixed coordinate system,
and moment forces and coefficients in the body-fixed coordinate system. Typically, moments
are calculated in the body-fixed axes. Therefore, body-fixed axes moments have been added
to the default table in addition to the lift and drag. Gray color is used to differentiate the body-
fixed axes coefficients from the wind-fixed axes coefficients.

Note:

The lift and drag forces, along with the rolling, pitching, and yawing moments, have
been computed within the Fluent Solution workspace during the simulation because
these parameters are used to monitor the convergence.

– Body-Fixed Axes

This option displays all forces and moments, along with their coefficients, in the body-fixed
coordinate system.

To obtain the body-fixed axial, side, and normal forces, the global x-, y-, and z-force components
will be projected onto the axial, side, and normal force directions. Specifically, the axial direction
will be derived from the user’s input of the drag direction at an AoA of 0 degrees. The normal
direction will be determined by the user’s input of the lift direction at an AoA of 0 degrees.
These directions are defined under Geometric Properties panel based on the orientation of
the geometry. Additionally, the side force direction will be obtained by applying the right-hand
rule to the cross-product of the normal and axial directions.

– Wind-Fixed Axes

This option displays forces and moments, along with their coefficients, in the wind-fixed co-
ordinate system.

In addition to the lift and drag forces, the crosswind force will be determined by projecting
the global x-, y-, and z-force components onto the crosswind direction. To obtain the wind-
fixed rolling, pitching, and yawing moments, the global x-, y-, and z-moment components will
be projected onto the drag, crosswind, and lift force directions. The drag, crosswind, and lift
directional vectors will be obtained from the global-to-body-fixed axes transformation matrix
and then from the body-fixed-to-wind-fixed axes transformation matrix, which is called the
directional cosine matrix (DCM) and is given by the following expression:

In the transformation matrix T, α is angle of attack and β is sideslip angle.

– Body-Fixed+Wind-Fixed Axes

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
352 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

This option displays forces and moments, along with their coefficients, in both the body-fixed
and wind-fixed coordinate systems simultaneously.

Note:

The displayed tables of forces and moments on the screen, along with their coeffi-
cients, will be written to the files Table-Coefficients.csv and Table-
Forces.csv when right-clicking on Tables in the Outline View window and se-
lecting the Export Results Tables to CSV option.

• Update Results

If you have changed a workflow setting that effects some of the tabulated results or has added
a new custom output parameter, Update Results can be used to update all the results inside
these tables without re-calculating each design point. For example, if you would like to change
the Reference length of a group of design point solutions that have already been obtained in
order to update the aerodynamic coefficients, you can simply change the Reference Length inside
Geometric Properties and use Update Results to update these coefficients such that they are
computed with the new value of Reference Length.

Note:

Clicking Update Results after adding a new custom output parameter will cycle
through each design point and load each solution file, so this process could take
some time to complete, especially for larger cases.

There are four tables produced by Fluent Aero to help post-process the results: Table:Summary,
Table:Coefficients, Table:Forces, Table:Residuals, and if required, Table:Custom Outputs and
Table:Component Outputs.

• Table:Summary

An example of Table:Summary is provided below along with a description of each item in the
table.

– DP

The design point number associated with the row in the table.

– Mach

The Mach number used to calculate the design point.

– AOA [deg.]

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 353
Fluent Aero

The angle of attack used to calculate the design point.

– P [Pa]

The static pressure used to calculate the design point.

– T [K]

The static temperature used to calculate the design point.

– Reynolds

The Reynolds number associated with design point flight conditions.

– Avg. Coeff. Conv.

This value is the average of the convergence of the lift coefficient, drag coefficient and moment
coefficient at the final iteration computed for the design point.

– Avg. Residual

This value is the average of all residuals (from Table:Residuals) at the final iteration computed
for the design point.

– Criteria Met?

This value will list yes if the Cl and Cd Coefficients Convergence (Cl. Conv. and Cd. Conv.)
(from Table:Coefficients) and all Residuals (from Table:Residuals) meet their respective
convergence conditions specified in Solve → Advanced Settings → Aero Convergence Cutoff
(default 1e-5) and Aero Coeff. Convergence Cutoff (default 2e-5). It will list no if these condi-
tions have not been met, partially if some of the conditions have been met, and diverged if
the design point calculation stopped early due to divergence of a calculation.

Note:

The convergence of the Cm-y, Cm-p, and Cm-r values (partially reported in the Max.
Cm Conv. column) are not used to determine if the convergence criteria is met. If
interested, you should investigate these values manually with the Max. Cm Conv.
value in the table or using the Convergence graphs.

• Table:Coefficients

An example of Table:Coefficients is provided below along with a description of each item in

the table when the Default option has been selected under Display Aero Forces. Gray color is
used to differentiate the body-fixed axes coefficients from the wind-fixed axes coefficients.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
354 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

– DP

The design point number associated with the row in the table.

– Cl

The Lift Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient considers the pressure and
shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cd

The Drag Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient takes into account the
pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cm-y

The body-fixed Yaw Moment Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient con-
siders the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cm-p

The body-fixed Pitch Moment Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient takes
into account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cm-r

The body-fixed Roll Moment Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient considers
the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cl Conv.

A value measuring the convergence of the lift coefficient at the final iteration computed in
the simulation of the design point. This value is computed using the following equation,

where

is the lift coefficient at the final iteration, and

is the lift coefficient that produces the maximum difference when compared to

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 355
Fluent Aero

from among the most recent previous iterations. By default, the 10 most recent iterations are
used, and this can be specified in Solve → Advanced Settings → Aero Conv. Coeff Previous
Values.

Note:

In some situations, when the absolute value of is very low (for example, when
simulating a symmetrical airfoil at an angle of attack of 0 degrees), the value of Cl
Conv. as computed in the above equation would be high, even when the solution
is well converged. To give a more meaningful value of Cl Conv. for these situations,
if the value of is less than Solve → Convergence Criteria → Aero Coeff Conv.
Cutoff, the following equation is used instead:

– Cd Conv.

A value measuring the convergence of the drag coefficient at the final iteration computed in
the simulation of the design point. This value is computed using the following equation,

where

is the drag coefficient at the final iteration, and

is the drag coefficient that produces the maximum difference when compared to

from among the most recent previous iterations. By default, the 10 most recent iterations are
used, and this can be specified in Solve → Advanced Settings → Aero Conv. Coeff Previous
Values.

– Max Cm Conv.

A value measuring the convergence of the moment coefficients at the final iteration in the
simulation of the design point. This value is computed using the following equation,

(Cmy, Cmp, Cmr) is each moment coefficient at the final iteration, and each

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
356 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

is the moment coefficient that produces the maximum difference when compared to each

from among the most recent previous iterations. Therefore, the Max Cm Conv. value in the
table will show the moment coefficient with the highest value. By default, the 10 most recent
iterations are used, and this can be specified in Solve → Show Advanced Settings → Aero
Conv. Coeff Previous Values.

An example of Table:Coefficients is provided below along with a description of each item in

the table when the Body-Fixed Axes option has been selected under Display Aero Forces.

– DP

The design point number associated with the row in the table.

– Ca

The Axial Force Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient considers the
pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cs

The Side Force Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient takes into account
the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cn

The Normal Force Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient takes into account
the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cm-y

The body-fixed Yaw Moment Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient con-
siders the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cm-p

The body-fixed Pitch Moment Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient takes
into account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cm-r

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 357
Fluent Aero

The body-fixed Roll Moment Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient considers
the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

An example of Table:Coefficients is provided below along with a description of each item in

the table when the Wind-Fixed Axes option has been selected under Display Aero Forces.

– DP

The design point number associated with the row in the table.

– Cl

The Lift Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient considers the pressure and
shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cd

The Drag Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient takes into account the
pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cc

The Crosswind Force Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient takes into ac-
count the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cm-y

The wind-fixed Yaw Moment Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient con-
siders the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cm-p

The wind-fixed Pitch Moment Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient takes
into account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Cm-r

The wind-fixed Roll Moment Coefficient computed for the design point. This coefficient considers
the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

• Table:Forces

An example of Table:Forces is provided below along with a description of each item in the table
when the Default option has been selected in the dropdown list of Display Aero Forces. Gray
color is used to differentiate the body-fixed axes data from the wind-fixed axes data.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
358 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

– DP

The design point number associated with the row in the table.

– Lift [N]

The total Lift force computed for the design point. This force takes into account the pressure
and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Drag [N]

The total Drag force computed for the design point. This force takes into account the pressure
and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Mom. Yaw [N.m]

– The body-fixed total Yaw Moment force computed for the design point. This force takes into
account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Mom. Pitch [N.m]

The body-fixed total Pitch Moment force computed for the design point. This force takes into
account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Mom. Roll [N.m]

The body-fixed total Roll Moment force computed for the design point. This force takes into
account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

An example of Table:Forces is provided below along with a description of each item in the
table when the Body-Fixed Axes option has been selected under Display Aero Forces.

– DP

The design point number associated with the row in the table.

– Axial Force [N]

The total Axial Force computed for the design point. This force takes into account the pressure
and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 359
Fluent Aero

– Side Force [N]

The total Side Force computed for the design point. This force takes into account the pressure
and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Normal Force [N]

The total Normal Force computed for the design point. This force takes into account the
pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Mom. Yaw [N.m]

The body-fixed total Yaw Moment force computed for the design point. This force takes into
account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Mom. Pitch [N.m]

The body-fixed total Pitch Moment force computed for the design point. This force takes into
account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Mom. Roll [N.m]

The body-fixed total Roll Moment force computed for the design point. This force takes into
account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

An example of Table:Forces is provided below along with a description of each item in the
table when the Wind-Fixed Axes option has been selected under Display Aero Forces.

– DP

The design point number associated with the row in the table.

– Lift [N]

The total Lift force computed for the design point. This force takes into account the pressure
and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Drag [N]

The total Drag force computed for the design point. This force takes into account the pressure
and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Crosswind Force [N]

The total Crosswind Force computed for the design point. This force takes into account the
pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
360 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Mom. Yaw (W) [N.m]

The wind-fixed total Yaw Moment force computed for the design point. This force takes into
account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Mom. Pitch (W) [N.m]

The wind-fixed total Pitch Moment force computed for the design point. This force takes into
account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

– Mom. Roll (W) [N.m]

The wind-fixed total Roll Moment force computed for the design point. This force takes into
account the pressure and shear forces on all walls in the geometry.

• Table:Residuals

An example of Table:Residuals is shown below. The residual names listed may change depending
on the models that are used in your simulation.

• Table:Custom Outputs

An example of Table:Custom Outputs is shown below. The custom ouputs listed will change
depending the custom outputs selected in the Simulation Conditions → Use Custom Output
Parameters panel.

• Table:Component Outputs

An example of Table:Component Outputs is shown below. The component ouputs listed will
change depending the group types that are used in Component Groups and the outputs selected
in the Manage Component Outputs panel. The names of the component outputs in the table
header will contain both the group name and the variable name.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 361
Fluent Aero

3.9.2.2. Graphs
The Graphs component contains commands to display aerodynamic coefficient plots using the
results of your simulations inside the Graphics window. These commands are accessible by right-
clicking Graphs in the Outline View, or as buttons located at the bottom of the Graphs properties
window.

• Plot Coefficients / Show Aerodynamic Coefficient Graphs

This function will cause the graphics window to present the Graphs window showing the aero-
dynamic coefficients with respect to the design point number for all design points that were
calculated in the simulation. The Dataset will be set to Aero Coefficients, which uses data stored
in the Tables-Coefficients.csv file in the simulation’s Results folder.

An example of Graphs panel showing a Coefficient graph is shown below. The y-axis definition
can be modified by making a selection from the Curve selection box at the top of the graph. Cl,
Cd, Cm, and Cl/Cd can be selected.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
362 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

• Plot Drag Polar / Show Drag Polar Graph

This function will cause the graphics window to present the lift coefficient with respect to the
drag coefficient for all design points that were calculated in the simulation. The Dataset will be
set to Drag Polar, which uses the Table-ClCd.csv file in the simulation’s Results folder. An
example of Graphs panel showing a Drag Polar, Cl vs. Cd graph is shown below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 363
Fluent Aero

• Plot Other Variables / Show Other Variables Graphs

This function will cause the graphics window to present the Graphs window where you create
a graph of any input or output parameters (including custom inputs and outputs) that were used
in the simulation. The Dataset will be set to the Table-All.csv file in the simulation’s Results
folder. In this mode, it is useful to use the […] options selection panel to have additional control
over the x-axis and y-axis variables for example, you could plot the Cl vs. Angle of Attack using
this plot set.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
364 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

• Plot Ref. Data

This function will open a file navigation window where a comma separated value (.csv) file
containing reference data can be selected. This file will be then read and its content added to
the active graph panel.

The .csv file must be formatted such that the first line contains the x-axis value (either AOA,
Mach or DP) and the y-axis value (either Cl, Cd, Cm or Cl/Cd) separated by a comma. The remaining
lines of the file can contain the reference data points. An example .csv reference data file and
associated Graphs panel is shown below.

Note:

The file should be formatted such that there are no spaces between each header
variable or data value.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 365
Fluent Aero

• Save Plot

This function will save the content of the Graphs panel to a .png image file on the disk.

• Parametric Graph

This function will open a Parametric Graph panel, where you can setup and plot a parametric
plot using the outputs for each design point. The Parametric Graph panel contains additional
controls that are useful for creating graphs to compare more complex datasets with larger
numbers of design points.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
366 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

Once you select the Parametric Graph settings, and click Plot, a new plot will appear in the
Graphs panel. The settings in the above image could result in a plot similar to the below:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 367
Fluent Aero

The following options can be used to construct a Parametric Graph:

– Plot Name

→ Name

Set the name of the parametric graph.

– Plot Variables

→ Group by

Select the variable to use to group the outputs parameters into groups of curves. For each
different value of the Group, a curve group will be created in the parametric plot. For example,
if Group by is set to Mach, and 3 different Mach numbers were used in the input design
points, there will be 3 groups of curves shown in the parametric plot, each labeled by their
respective Mach number.

→ x-variable

Select the variable to plot on the x-axis of the parametric graph.

→ y-variable

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
368 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

Select the variable to plot on the y-axis of the parametric graph.

– Options

→ Exclude DPs

Select certain design points to exclude from the plot. design points can be excluded by the
convergence status (Not Converged, Not/Partially Converged), as shown in the Criteria
Met? column of the input table. Alternatively, a Custom set of design points can be excluded.

→ List of DPs

Select a range of custom design points to be excluded. Commas (,) and hyphens (-) can be
used to control the range of design points to be excluded. For example, entering 1,3-5,10
will exclude design points 1, 3, 4, 5 and 10.

→ Number of Filters

Set a number of filters to use to filter in and out design points with certain parameter values
from the Parametric Graph.

Each filter can be controlled using the Active, Variable, Value and Tolerance settings. Set
a filter to Active to enable that specific filter. Set the Variable to the parameter for which
you would like to filter the results. Set the Value and Tolerance to control the range of
values for that parameter that you would like to include in the plot.

For example, if you enter an Active filter using the Variable set to Mach, the Value set to
1.0 and the Tolerance set to 0.1, only design points with an input Mach number between
0.9 and 1.1 will be included in the Parametric Graph.

– Curve Settings

→ Line/Scatter Style: Set a line or scatter plot style to use in the Parametric Graph.

→ Color: Set the color pallet to use in the Parametric Graph.

– Plot: Select this to plot the requested Parametric Graph in the Graphs window.

– Plot Ref. Data: This function will open a file navigation window where a comma separated
value (.csv) file containing reference data can be selected. This file will be then read, and its
content added to the active graph panel.

The .csv file should be formatted such that at least all variables selected for the Group by x-
variable and y-variable are included in the file. The first line header should contain the variable
names, separated by commas. The remaining lines of the file can contain the reference data
points. Only the variables with a first line header name that is the same as any referenced in
the Parametric Plot control panel will be used. However, the file can contain additional variables,
but they will not be used in the plot.

Note:

The file should be formatted such that there are no spaces between each header
variable or data value.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 369
Fluent Aero

3.9.2.3. Plots
The Plots component contains commands to display 2D surface cut plots of results of a simulation
in the Graphics window.

By default, the plane used to create the surface cut plots will be oriented coplanar with the Lift
and Drag Direction Axis, as setup in the Grid Properties step.

Clicking the Plots item will cause the Plots properties window to appear.

• Surfaces

Defines the surface to use on which to display the surface cut 2D plot values. Choosing Walls
plots on all walls of the domain. Choosing Selected Surfaces will reveal another option where
individual surfaces can be selected to use for the plot.

• Surface Cut Normal Direction

Set the normal direction of the cut plane surface.

• Number of Surface Cuts

Cuts currently, only 1 surface cut plot can be created at a time, so this item is not editable.

• Surface Cut Position Min [m]

This value specifies the minimum global grid position, in meters, available in the direction normal
to the plane that can be used to create the surface cut plot.

• Surface Cut Position [m]

Specify the global grid position, in meters, where a surface cut plot will be plotted.

• Surface Cut Position Max [m]

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
370 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

This value specifies the maximum global grid position, in meters, available in the direction normal
to the plane that can be used to create the surface cut plot.

• Field

Specify the field value to plot.

Note:

When the two-temperature model is enabled or a mixture is selected for Air Properties,
extra variables concerning the concentration of each species and the two-temperature
model will become available.

• Design Point

Specify the design point solution to use for the plot. If this value is changed to a different design
point solution than is currently loaded, the solution will be first loaded when Show Cut Plot is
selected.

• Plot

This command will create the 2D surface cut plot in the Graphics window. If the design point
number listed in the selection box is different than the solution that is currently loaded, the ap-
propriate solution will be loaded before the plot is created.

An example Plot is shown below.

When Plot is used, a comma separated value file is also created with the x-y data used to generate
the plot. This file will be saved to a Data folder inside the design point folder associated with
the solution used to generate the plot.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 371
Fluent Aero

The graphics window will switch to the Plots tab, and the requested plot will be shown. At the
top, the Dataset selection will show the name of the plot just generated (example: DP-72: Plot-
01), starting with the design point number, and ending with the plot number. If multiple plots
have been generated, one can click the drop-down list to select and display previously generated
plots. The Curve selection will show the Y-axis variable that was used to generate the plot.

Additionally, a Plot Options window will appear which allows you to modify the line and the
point plot display format to use for the plot. Modify any setting and click the Plot button in the
Plot Options window to update the plot format.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
372 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

Additional controls of the Plot display can be performed using the […] options button located
to the right of the dataset name. These controls can be used to save a picture of the plot to disk,
change the X- and Y-Axis properties, add additional data to the plot, change the curve types, set
plot titles, and more.

• Plot Ref. Data

This function will open a file navigation window where a comma separated value (.csv) file
containing reference data can be selected. The reference data will then be added to the active
and representative graph panel.

The .csv file must be formatted such that the first line header contains the cartesian axis used
to plot the data – x, y, or z – followed by the y-axis variable (use the same name as it is listed in
the y-axis of the plot) separated by a comma. The remaining lines of the file can contain the
reference datapoints. An example of .csv reference data file and associated Graphs panel is
shown below.

Note:

The file should be formatted such that there are no spaces between each header
variable or data value.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 373
Fluent Aero

• Save Plot

This function will save the content of the Graphs panel to a .png image file on the disk.

3.9.2.4. Contours
The Contours component contains commands to display 3D contour plots of results of a simulation
in the Graphics window.

Clicking the Contours item will cause Properties - Contours to appear. The first setting in the
Properties - Contours is Surfaces, which has two possible options: Walls, and Cutting Plane. The
settings and functions available in the Contour category will change depending on which of these
options is selected.

• Surfaces – Walls

When Surfaces is set to Walls in Properties - Contours, the following options are available:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
374 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Contours: Surfaces

This option specifies the Surfaces to use for the 3D contour plots. In this section, Walls is se-
lected. The Walls option will cause the contour to be plotted on all wall boundaries in the
domain.

– Field

This option specifies the solution field that will be plotted.

Note:

When the two-temperature model is enabled or a mixture is selected for Air Prop-
erties, extra variables concerning the concentration of each species and the two-
temperature model will become available.

– Design Point

Specify the Design Point solution to use for the contour. If this value is changed to a different
design point solution than is currently loaded, the solution will be first loaded when Plot Wall
Contour is selected.

– Auto-Compute Range

Enabling this option will cause the contour to automatically compute the min and max range
for the contour plot based on the solution that is shown.

– Minimum Value, Maximum Value

Defines the minimum and maximum range for the contour to display. These settings are
automatically computed if Auto-Compute Range is enabled.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 375
Fluent Aero

– Draw Mesh

Enabling this option will cause the mesh lines to be drawn on top of the contour plot.

– Color Map

Expanding this option reveals additional settings related to the color map that can be applied
to contours.

– Visible

Shows the additional options available related to the Color Map.

– Color Map

This setting controls the color map type that is used to display the gradient of a variable on
the Contour displayed in the Graphics panel.

– Automatically Skip Labels

Let the number of contour labels to be automatically determined. Some labels will be automat-
ically skipped so that a more manageable number of labels is shown.

• Surfaces – Component Group

When Surfaces is set to Component Group in Properties- Contours, one extra option is available
where you can Select Component Groups to be displayed:

• Contours: Surfaces – Cutting Plane

When Surfaces is set to Cutting Plane in Properties - Contours, the following options are
available:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
376 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Surfaces

This option specifies the Surfaces to use for the 3D contour plots. In this section, Cutting
Plane is selected. The Cutting Plane option will cause the contour to be plotted on a cutting
plane in the Graphics window. This cutting plane will be coplanar to the lift and drag direction
vectors setup in Geometric Properties.

– Cutting Plane Position Min [m]

This value shows you the minimum grid position the cutting plane can be set to.

– Cutting Plane Position [m]

This option is used to specify the grid position of the cutting plane that will be used for contour
plotting.

– Cutting Plane Position Max [m]

This value shows you the maximum grid position the cutting plane can be set to.

– Field

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 377
Fluent Aero

This option specifies the solution field that will be plotted.

Note:

When the two-temperature model is enabled or a mixture is selected for Air

Properties, extra variables concerning the concentration of each species and
the two-temperature model will become available.

– Design Point

Specify the Design Point solution to use for the contour. If this value is changed to a different
design point solution than is currently loaded, the solution will be first loaded when Plot
Cutting Plane Contour is selected.

– Auto-Compute Range

Enabling this option will cause the contour to automatically compute the min and max range
for the contour plot based on the solution that is shown.

– Minimum Value, Maximum Value

Defines the minimum and maximum range for the contour to display. These settings are
automatically computed if Auto-Compute Range is enabled.

– Draw Mesh

Enabling this option will cause the mesh lines to be drawn on top of the contour plot.

– Color Map

Expanding this option reveals additional settings related to the color map that can be applied
to contours.

– Visible

Shows the additional options available related to the Color Map.

– Color Map

This setting controls the color map type that is used to display the gradient of a variable on
the Contour displayed in the Graphics panel.

– Automatically Skip Labels

Let the number of contour labels to be automatically determined. Some labels will be automat-
ically skipped so that a more manageable number of labels is shown.

The following Contours command options are available as command buttons or as right-click
commands:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
378 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Viewing the Results of a Fluent Aero Simulation

– Plot, Plot Surface Contour, Plot Cutting Plane Contour

These commands will plot the contour requested as setup in Properties - Contours. If the
design point number listed in the selection box is different than the solution that is currently
loaded, the appropriate solution will be loaded before the contour is created.

– Views...

Opens a panel where a graphics window view orientation can be selected, recalled, or saved.

– Save Image...

Opens a panel where you can save the content of the graphics window into a picture file. The
panel includes several format options that can be used to generate the picture. It also includes
a Save All Updated DPs check box, which when enabled, will cause Fluent Aero to output a
picture file using the same contour plot setup for every design point that has a Status of Up-
dated.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 379
Fluent Aero

After clicking the Save… button, a Select File dialog will appear.

Note:

You must enter the full file path into Hardcopy File to the image you would
like to output. Clicking OK will save the image to the desired location.

3.9.3. Results Folder

Once a Fluent Aero simulation is complete, clicking the Project View will now display a Results folder
inside the Simulation folder. The Results folder will contain subfolders corresponding to each simu-
lated design point, and each of these subfolders will contain associated case (.cas[.h5]), data
(.dat[.h5]) and convergence (.fconverg) files. The .fconverg file contains the output of the
residuals and monitors and is used to create the Convergence plots.

The image below shows an example of a Results folder.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
380 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations

3.10. Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations
The following section describes the options available to interact with your simulations, runs and results
files from the Project View.

3.10.1. Simulation Folder Commands

When a simulation is not yet loaded, the following options are available:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 381
Fluent Aero

• Load in Solver

Loads the simulation. This will launch the solver session in the background. (See Loading a Simula-
tion (p. 241) for more information).

• Import Settings...

Enables you to import settings from other simulations into the current simulation. Selecting this
command will open a browser where you can navigate to and select a Fluent Aero run.settings
file to import settings from. Any relevant settings from that file will be imported and used in the
Outline View and Input: Design Point table of the current simulation. If the imported settings file
contains items that are not relevant to the current simulation (including different boundary zones
or custom input parameters that do not exist in the current simulation) these irrelevant settings
will not be imported.

• Delete

Deletes the simulation folder. This will remove the simulation from the Project View and delete
all child files and folders from the disk.

• Clean-up Folder

Erases all simulation files such as cleanup-*, and serverinfo-*.

• Copy Settings to All New Simulations in Project

• This command will copy the run.settings of the selected simulation to all other new simulations
in the project that do not already contain results. This command can be useful to apply a standard
group of settings to many simulations inside a project, without having to import settings to each
one individually.

• View Convergence of All Simulations in Project

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
382 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations

When selected, a Convergence window will appear where the convergence history of all the design
points of all simulations in the project are displayed. The dataset will show the simulation name
followed by the design point id (for example, Simulation01:DP-01) so that each convergence curve
can be easily identified.

• Open in File Explorer

Opens the simulation directory in the file explorer of the local operating system.

• Sort by Name

Sorts all files in the simulation alphabetically by name. By default, the simulation files are initially
sorted by time of creation.

• Edit Notes

Opens a Properties window, showing the Notes panel, where you can add text notes to the selec-
tion. If a text note is added, the item inside the project view will be displayed with a * icon next
to its name, signifying a note has been added.

• Properties

Opens a Properties window showing the Metadata and properties of a simulation. The figure below
shows an example of the contents of a simulation Properties window.

In the above figure,

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 383
Fluent Aero

– The Name of the simulation and its URL path are shown at the top of the Item tab.

– Input shows the input case file used in the simulation.

– The Notes tab can be used to write any notes that you would like to add to better describe this
simulation.

When a simulation is loaded, the following additional options are available:

• Close Solver

Closes the simulation and closes the background solver session if enabled.

• View Case Settings

Shows the Outline View window associated with the simulation, where the simulation settings
can be investigated.

• Stop Solver Processes

Launches the cleanup-fluent-* script file associated with the simulation, which will close the asso-
ciated background solver session.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
384 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations

3.10.2. Case File Commands

• View Case

Opens the case for post processing using the Post-Analysis tool. A Post-Analysis node will appear
in the Outline View and the selected case file will be loaded.

• View Case With... → CFD-Post

Opens a CFD-Post postprocessing session in a new window and loads the selected case file.

• View Case With… → EnSight

Opens an EnSight postprocessing session in a new window and loads the selected case file.

• Load Mesh

Load the mesh from the selected .cas[.h5] file.

• Load Case

Loads the selected .case[.h5] file.

• Edit Notes

Opens a Properties window showing the Notes panel, where you can add text notes to the selection.
If a text note is added, the item inside the project view will be displayed with an * icon next to its
name, signifying that a note has been added.

• Properties

Opens a Properties window showing the Metadata and properties of the case file.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 385
Fluent Aero

3.10.3. Results Folder Commands and Metadata

• Load Settings from Results

Loads the active settings of the Aero workflow steps from the Results folder Metadata (Settings
→ Results, Setup, Solution). These settings are generally those that are consistent with the most
recent settings that were active when Update was last used.

• View Results

Loads the sequence of all design point solutions in the Results directory for post processing using
the Post-Analysis tool. A Post-Analysis node will appear in the Outline View and all
out.*.dat[.h5] files will be loaded. The Dataset - Sequence slider in the Results ribbon can
then be used to quickly navigate between each design point.

• Delete

Deletes the selected case file.

Note:

The Delete command becomes active when using File → Import file...

Caution:

If you delete the case file that is used as the input case for the simulation, the simulation
can no longer be loaded.

• Open in File Explorer

Opens the Results directory in the file explorer of the local operating system.

• Sort by Name

Sorts all files in the Results folder alphabetically by name. By default, the simulation files are sorted
by time of creation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
386 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations

• Edit Notes

Opens a Properties window showing the Notes panel, where you can add text notes to the selection.
If a text note is added, the item inside the project view will be displayed with an * icon next to its
name, signifying that a note has been added.

• Properties

Opens a properties window showing the Metadata and properties of the Results. The figure below
shows an example of the contents of a Results properties window.

– Hidden contains flags used by the datamodel to know when to expose certain elements of the
user interface. This information should not generally be required by you.

– Input contains metadata that specifies the location of the input .cas[.h5] file used to generate
the Results folder.

– Run contains metadata that specifies the number of design points contained within the Results
folder, and the CurrentOutput directory, related to the most recent design point that was calcu-
lated.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 387
Fluent Aero

– Settings → Setup → Geometric Properties contains metadata that stores the settings used in
the Geometric Properties step when the Results were calculated. This metadata is used to restore
the settings when loading a simulation.

– Settings → Setup → Simulation Conditions contains metadata that stores the settings used in
the Simulation Conditions step when the Results were calculated. This metadata is used to
restore the settings when loading a simulation.

– Settings → Solution → Solve contains metadata that stores the settings used in the Solve step
when the Results were calculated. This metadata is used to restore the settings when loading
a simulation.

3.10.4. Design Point Folder Commands and Metadata

• Initialize + Calculate

Initializes and then calculates the selected design point. This is equivalent to using the Solve →
Update command from the Outline View with the respective design point Status in the In-
put:Design Points table set to Needs Update. This option will execute a fresh start of your calcu-
lation. Any solution file that is already present will not be loaded – it will be deleted and will not
be used as an initial solution. The calculation will take into account any changes in settings that
were made to the Aero workflow steps in the Outline View.

• Initialize

Initializes the selected design point. This is equivalent to using the Solve → Update command
from the Outline View with the respective design point Status in the Input:DesignPoints table
set to Initialize. Any solution file that is already present will not be loaded – it will be deleted and

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
388 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations

will not be used as an initial solution. The initialization will take into account any changes in settings
that were made to the Aero workflow steps in the Outline View.

• Continue

Continues to calculate the selected design point. This is equivalent to using the Solve → Update
command from the Outline View with the respective design point Status in the Input:Design
Points table set to Continue to Update. This calculation will first load any previous solution file
and continue the calculation from this previous solution. The calculation will take into account any
changes in settings that were made to the Aero workflow steps in the Outline View.

• Delete Design Point

Deletes the selected design point folder along with all the files contained within it. The remaining
design point folder numbers and their files will be renamed to ensure that the project continues
to have complete and sequential numbering. For example, if DP-2 is deleted, the previously named
DP-3 folder and its content will be renamed to DP-2. This is equivalent to using the Simulation
Conditions → Delete Design Point command from the Outline View.

• Save Solution Data to Design Point

This command will save the current state of the solution in memory to the .dat file of the selected
DP folder. This allows you to perform custom operations in the Solution workspace to prepare a
data file, which can then subsequently save to a design point folder of choice. This may be helpful,
for example, if you would like to prepare a solution with a custom initialization routine, before using
Continue to Update to continue the design point calculation from that state. This option is only
recommended for advanced users of Fluent Aero.

• Import Solution File to Design Point

This can be used to select a solution file and load it into the design point folder, replacing the
current solution (out.000X.dat.h5). The Status in the Input:Design Point table will be set to
Needs Update, as the contents of the tables will be out of date. To fill the tables with the values
of coefficients and residuals associated with the new solution file, you must Continue to Update
for 1 iteration.

• Load Design Point Solve Settings

Load all Properties - Solve panel settings from the design point Metadata (Settings → Solution
→ Solve) and populates the Solve step (including anything listed in Show Advanced Settings)
with these settings. This is useful if you want to revert back to use Solve settings that were used
for that particular design point.

• Load Solution

Loads the design point solution file to memory and shows the solution file as bold in the Project
View. This allows the selected solution to be post-processed from the Results node in the Outline
View.

• View Results – Post Solution

Opens the Post solution files (out.*.cas.post, out.*.dat.post) in a Post-Analysis post-

processing session inside the Fluent Aero user interface. An object tree for Post-Analysis will be
loaded in the Outline View and a Post-Analysis viewer will be loaded inside the Fluent Aero

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 389
Fluent Aero

graphics window. The Post solution files are used only by post-processor tools and contain a
sculpted subset of variables extracted from the standard Fluent solution files (out.*.cas[.h5]
and out.*.dat[.h5]) allowing more lightweight post processing with surface variables appro-
priate for use with the Post-Analysis tool.

• View Results – Fluent Solution

Opens the Fluent solution files (out.*.cas[.h5] and out.*.dat[.h5]) in a Post-Analysis

post-processing session inside the Fluent Aero user interface. An object tree for Post-Analysis will
be loaded in the Outline View and a Post-Analysis viewer will be loaded inside the Fluent Aero
graphics window.

Note:

In general, it is preferred to use the Post solution files with the Post-Analysis post-pro-
cessing tool, if available. They are quicker to load by the post processor and contain a
wider range of surface variables.

• View Convergence

Load the convergence file of that design point in the convergence Plots window, using the Dataset:
Custom. This allows you to conveniently investigate the convergence of a particular design point
calculation directly from the Project View.

• Sort by Name

Sorts the design point folders alphabetically by name.

• Edit Notes

Opens a Properties window showing the Notes panel, where you can add text notes to the selection.
If a text note is added, the item inside the project view will be displayed with an * icon next to its
name, signifying that a note has been added.

• Properties

Opens a properties window showing the Metadata and properties of the design point. The figure
below shows an example of the contents of a Design Point properties window.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
390 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations

– DP: Inputs contains the input parameters associated with the design point. These values are
used to generate the Table:Summary accessible from the Tables → Create Results Tables in
the Outline View.

– DP: Inputs: CustomInputs contains the custom input parameter names and values associated
with the design point. This will only be shown if Simulation Conditions → Use Custom Input
Parameters is Enabled, and a custom input parameter is defined.

– DP: Inputs: CustomInputsBC contains the boundary specific custom input parameter names
and values associated with the design point. This will only be shown if any boundary specific
input parameters are set to Custom in the Component Groups boundary list.

– DP: Outputs contains the output parameters associated with the design point. These values are
used to generate the Table:Coefficients, and Table:Forces accessible from the Tables → Create
Results Tables in the Outline View.

– DP: Outputs: CustomOutputs contains the custom output parameter names and values associated
with the design point. This will only be shown if Simulation Conditions → Use Custom Output
Parameters is Enabled, and a custom output parameter is defined. These values are used to
generate the Table:Custom Outputs accessible from the Tables → Create Results Tables in
the Outline View.

– DP: Residuals contains the final residual values achieved at the final iteration calculated for the
design point. These values are used to generate the Table:Residuals accessible from the Tables
→ Create Results Tables in the Outline View.

– All Settings: GeometricProperties, SimulationConditions, and Solve metadata will generally

be the same as contained in it’s parent Results folder. However, if any of these settings were
modified and a recalculate Selected Design Point was performed, these settings will be locally
updated on the design point folder to correspond to these settings changes. If the metadata is
the same as that of its parent Results folder, the text will be in italic font. If the metadata is dif-
ferent than that of its parent Results folder, the text will be in standard font.

3.10.5. Solution File Commands

• Load

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 391
Fluent Aero

Loads the selected solution file to memory, and shows the solution file as bold in the Project View
menu. This allows the selected solution to be post-processed from the Results menu in the Outline
View.

• View Results – Post Solution

Opens the Post solution files (out.*.cas.post, out.*.dat.post) in a Post-Analysis post-

processing session inside the Fluent Aero user interface. An object tree for Post-Analysis will be
loaded in the Outline View and a Post-Analysis viewer will be loaded inside the Fluent Aero
graphics window. The Post solution files are used only by post-processor tools and contain a
sculpted subset of variables extracted from the standard Fluent solution files (out.*.cas[.h5]
and out.*.dat[.h5]) allowing more lightweight post processing with surface variables appro-
priate for use with the Post-Analysis tool.

• View Results – Fluent Solution

Opens the Fluent solution files (out.*.cas[.h5] and out.*.dat[.h5]) in a Post-Analysis

post-processing session inside the Fluent Aero user interface. An object tree for Post-Analysis will
be loaded in the Outline View and a Post-Analysis viewer will be loaded inside the Fluent Aero
graphics window.

Note:

In general, it is preferred to use the Post solution files with the Post-Analysis post-pro-
cessing tool, if available. They are quicker to load by the post processor and contain
more surface variables.

• View Results With… → CFD-Post – Post Solution

Opens a CFD-Post post-processing session in a new window and loads the out.*.dat.post file
associated with the selected file. This option is only available if the Post files have been written.

• View Results With… → CFD-Post – Fluent Solution

Opens a CFD-Post post-processing session in a new window and loads the selected file.

• View Results With… → EnSight – Post Solution

Opens an EnSight post-processing session in a new window and loads the out.*.dat.post file
associated with the selected file. This option is only available if the Post files have been written.

• View Results With… → EnSight – Fluent Solution

Opens an EnSight post-processing session in a new window and loads the selected file.

• Delete

Deletes the selected file.

• Edit Notes

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
392 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations

Opens a Properties window showing the Notes panel, where you can add text notes to the selection.
If a text note is added, the item inside the project view will be displayed with an * icon next to its
name, signifying that a note has been added.

• Properties

Opens a Properties window showing the Metadata and the properties of the case file.

3.10.6. Convergence File Commands

• View Convergence

Load the convergence file in the convergence Plots window, using the Dataset: Custom. This allows
you to conveniently investigate the convergence of a particular design point calculation directly
from the Project View.

• Edit Notes

Opens a Properties window showing the Notes panel, where you can add text notes to the selection.
If a text note is added, the item inside the project view will be displayed with an * icon next to its
name, signifying that a note has been added.

• Properties

Opens a Properties window showing the Metadata and properties of the convergence file.

3.10.7. The Use of Bold in Project View

The Project View window will make use of bold text to provide additional information on Simulations,
Case and Data file status.

• A Simulation that is currently loaded and connected to a solver session will have its name be
displayed in Bold with (loaded) listed next to the name.

• The .cas[.h5] and .dat[.h5] files that are currently loaded will be displayed in bold. These files
will also be specified as the Current files in the Simulation properties metadata window.

The image below shows an example of a Project View window that shows that the simulation
wing_simulation is currently loaded, along with its case file wing.cas.h5, and its design point data
file out.02.dat.h5.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 393
Fluent Aero

3.10.8. Project View Organization Options

The Project View window can be sorted in various ways to help with file organization. By default,
the Project View only displays the Name column in the Project View file organization panel. Right-
clicking the Name column header will display additional file organization settings.

• Select Columns…

Opens a window that allows you to select the information to display in the Project View. Alternat-
ively, this option can be selected by choosing Display → Columns from the Project ribbon. See
Using Columns in Project View (p. 395) for more info.

• Show Hidden Items

Shows additional folders and files that exist inside the Simulation and Results folders. See Hidden
Items in Project View (p. 398) for more info.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
394 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations

• Show Filenames

Shows the exact file names used on disk for each item in the Project View.

• Show All Files

Shows the full content of the Simulation and Results folders, including temporary files, log files,
etc.

• Expand All Items

Expands all items in the Project View

• Collapse All Items

Collapses all items in the Project View

• Sort by Column

Sorts all files by the selected Column. If the Name column is selected, the files will be sorted alpha-
betically. By default, the files in the Project View are sorted by order of creation.

• Sorting by Alt-select-drag

In addition to the sorting options described above, all files can be moved up or down in the Project
View by Alt -selecting the file and dragging it to a new position. This operation can only be per-
formed on the default file organization view.

• Reset View Settings

Resets the Project View to its initial settings. This will display only the Name column, and all files
will be sorted by order of creation.

3.10.9. Using Columns in Project View

Sortable columns are available in the Project View window to show additional information and to
help organize simulations, results and solution files.

By default, Project View only displays the Name column, which displays the Name of each item.

Right-click the Name column in the header and choose Select columns… to open the column display
menu. Alternatively, this window can be accessed by selecting Display → Columns in the Project
ribbon menu.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 395
Fluent Aero

A window appears showing the list of metadata settings that can be selected to display as a column
in the Project View. For example, DP::Inputs:Conditions::AOA and DP::Outputs:Conditions::Coef-
ficientLift can be selected to display the Angle of Attack and Lift Coefficient associated with each
design point.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
396 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations

The selected information will then be displayed in a column to the right of the Name column. If the
file contains a value associated with a display column, the value will be shown in the associated cell.
If the file does not contain a property associated with a displayed column, the associated cell will be
empty. In the image below, the columns show that 4 design points were calculated with different
Angles of Attack (0, 3.33, 6.66 and 10 degrees) and resulted in a range of Lift Coefficients.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 397
Fluent Aero

3.10.10. Hidden Items in Project View

By default, the Project View only displays a selected list of case, result and convergence files as well
as Simulation, Results and Design Point folders.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
398 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Project View to Interact with Fluent Aero Simulations

However, there are additional files associated with a project that you may want to interact with that
are hidden by default. To display these files, right-click the Name column header and select Show
hidden items.

Hidden folders and files will be shown.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 399
Fluent Aero

Some of the hidden folders include the following:

• run.settings file

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
400 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

This file contains all the Fluent Aero settings used to run the calculation and obtain the results for
the simulation. This file is generated when you press Update. Whenever you reconnect to a simu-
lation, this file is loaded and used to repopulate the Outline View settings and the Input: Design
Points table settings.

• Post Files

The Post solution files (out.*.cas.post and out.*.dat.post) are used only by post-processor
tools and contain a sculpted subset of variables extracted from the standard Fluent solution files
(out.*.cas[.h5] and out.*.dat[.h5]) allowing more lightweight post processing with
surface variables appropriate for use with the Post-Analysis tool. These files will be present if
Solution → Solve → Files → Write Post-processing Files is set to Enabled.

• Current Folder

This folder contains links to all the current solutions, which typically will be the solution file that
was most recently obtained from a calculation, or which was most recently loaded using a load
command. When Load in solver is used to open a simulation, the solutions listed in the current
folder will be loaded and displayed in bold in the Project View menu.

• Input Folder

This folder contains links to all case files or solution files that were used as an input to the simulation
or results.

3.11. AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

The Aerodynamic Extraction Tool (AET) is an automated workflow intended to extract the performance
characteristics of a rotor blade, and to produce airfoil performance definition files that can be used to
define the rotor performance in Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model (VBM).

Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model (VBM) is a Blade Element Theory based approach to efficiently model rotating
blades in a time-averaged manner in the context of a 3D simulation of an aircraft geometry. You can
find out more detail about the Virtual Blade model in Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model in the Fluent User's
Guide. To set up the model, VBM requires airfoil performance lookup tables to define the performance
of each airfoil shape used in the rotor geometry, which include the lift and drag characteristics across
a range of Angle of Attack, Mach and Reynolds numbers. These performance characteristics may be
unavailable or difficult to obtain, they may not contain a sufficient set of conditions, or the airfoil shapes
may be unknown. The AET workflow is designed specifically to alleviate these challenges, and to provide
an automatic procedure to build these performance tables using CFD calculations.

The AET workflow leverages the AnsysFluent Aero workspace project and simulation capabilities, along
with the CAD capabilities of Ansys SpaceClaim, and the meshing capabilities of Ansys Fluent Meshing
to automatically extract airfoil section CAD geometries, construct meshes, calculate and post-process
solutions of spanwise airfoil sections of a 3D blade geometry using a wide range of conditions. The
workflow guides you through the following steps:

• Import Blade Geometry:

– Select the 3D blade CAD geometry of the rotor blade that will be analyzed.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 401
Fluent Aero

– Alternatively, AET can select a 2D points definition file of a single airfoil section to extract the per-
formance of this airfoil.

• Extract airfoil section CADs (using SpaceClaim):

– Perform multiple spanwise cuts of the 3D blade CAD to extract multiple airfoil sections using Ansys
SpaceClaim as a background process.

• Create Airfoil Section Meshes (using Fluent Meshing):

– Generate 2.5D meshes of each airfoil section using Ansys Fluent Meshing as a background process.

• Calculate Aerodynamic Performance of Airfoil Sections:

– Calculate the aerodynamic performance of each airfoil using a range of conditions using Ansys
Fluent Aero’s simulations and design points.

• Output Performance Lookup Table Files:

– Output and save performance lookup table files containing coefficients of lift and drag computed
over a wide range of Mach, Reynolds and AoA. These files will be in a format that can be used to
define a rotor directly in Ansys Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
402 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

3.11.1. AET Workflow File Menu and Ribbon Commands

The primary AET workflow commands are available from either File or Project.

The following set of commands are available in the File menu:

The following set of commands are available under AET Workflow:

AET Workflow → New...

After creating a new project, the New... command will be made available. After selecting New..., a
dialog will appear where you can select the mode (3D Blade or 2D Points) and the steps of the
workflow you would like to complete.

• Input CAD Mode

– If 2D Points is selected:

→ A Select File dialog will appear where you can select an airfoil data points file (.txt).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 403
Fluent Aero

→ When CAD Generation is enabled, a single 2.5D CAD will be generated from the input airfoil
data points file.

→ When Setup Airflow Simulations is enabled, a dialog panel will appear where you can specify
the general settings to use for the Airflow Simulations.

– If 3D Blade is selected:

→ A Select File dialog will appear where you can select a rotor CAD file (.scdoc).

→ When CAD Generation is enabled, a dialog will appear where the rotor section positions can
be selected and the selected number of 2.5D section CADs will be generated from the blade
geometry file.

→ When Setup Airflow Simulations is enabled, a dialog panel will appear where you can specify
the general settings to use for the Airflow Simulations.

• Execute the Following Steps

Select the AET workflow steps to execute.

– 1: Select Input Geometry

This step is used to define input geometry to the AET Workflow. This must always be selected.
After clicking OK, a Select File dialog will appear where the input geometry can be selected. If
Input CAD Mode is set to 3D Blade, a rotor CAD file (.scdoc/.iges/.pmdb/.part) can be
selected. If Input CAD Mode is set to 2D Points, an airfoil data points file (.txt/.dat) can be
selected. Once the workflow starts, an Input file folder will appear in the Project View and the
selected geometry file will be imported into that folder.

– 2: CAD Generation

This step is used to construct the 2D CAD files of the airfoil sections that will be simulated in the
AET workflow. Ansys SpaceClaim is used as a background scripted process to perform this step.

→ In 2D Points mode:

A single CAD will be constructed from an airfoil data points file. The airfoil will be scaled to
unit length.

→ In 3D Blade mode:

Multiple CADs will be constructed by extracting blade sections from a 3D blade geometry file.
The airfoils will all be scaled to unit length. A Define Blade Sections dialog will appear where
the blade section positions can be defined. If any of the selected blade sections share the
same airfoil shape, only one CAD file will be generated to represent these sections.

→ In both modes, Ansys SpaceClaim is launched in batch mode to perform the 2: CAD Generation
step. Once the workflow starts, a CAD folder will be created in the Project View, and the input
geometry file will be converted into 2D airfoil section CAD files (.pmbd) using a batch scripted
Ansys SpaceClaim process.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
404 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

→ Both the 2D Points and 3D Blade CAD must meet certain conditions for use in the AET
workflow. Refer to AET Workflow – Preparing the Input Geometry File (p. 421) for more inform-
ation.

Note:

Since this step uses Ansys SpaceClaim, which is only available on Windows, this step
can only be performed on a Windows machine.

The two images below show selected blade sections extracted along a 3D blade geometry, and
the resulting CAD that is produced for each section.

Figure 3.5: Section Locations Defined Along the 3D Blade

Figure 3.6: 2.5D CAD of Section Profile Extracted From the 3D Blade

– 3: Mesh Generation

This step is used to construct the 2.5D Mesh files of the airfoil sections that will be simulated in
the AET workflow. Ansys Fluent Meshing is launched in batch mode to perform the Mesh Gener-
ation step. The number of mesh files created will match the number of CAD files created in the
CAD Generation step. Once the workflow starts, a Mesh folder will be created in the Project
View, and the airfoil mesh files (.msh.h5) will be created.

Each mesh will consist of about 135k prism and hexahedral cells. A 2.5D mesh refers to a 2D
mesh that is extruded to be 1 layer thick in the spanwise direction. The limits of the computa-
tional domain are defined by a cylindrical boundary that acts as a pressure farfield and a flat

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 405
Fluent Aero

circular boundary defined as a symmetry plane in the Z direction. Mesh refinement is made in
all directions away from the airfoil to capture wakes produced by all possible AoAs from 0 to
360 degrees.

Figure 3.7: 2.5D Mesh Generated by AET Fluent Meshing Step

– 4: Setup Airflow Simulations

This step is used to create the Airflow Simulations associated with each airfoil. The number of
airflow simulation folders will match the number of airfoil mesh files created in the Mesh Gener-
ation step. A Define Airflow Simulation Settings dialog will appear where you can specify
various general airflow simulation settings, such as the range of input Mach, Reynolds and AoA
to simulate as design points, and the umber of iterations to solve for each design point. Once
the workflow starts, an Airflow simulation folder will be created for each airfoil mesh file.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
406 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

– Run Airflow Simulations

This step is used to calculate all design points of all airflow simulations on each airfoil. Once the
workflow starts, Fluent Aero will sequentially connect to each airflow simulation in the Project,
and calculate every design point that requires update.

– Output Files

This step is used to post process the airflow simulations for all airfoils, and to export a txt file
(.dat) for each airfoil that contains the airfoil performance data in a friendly format for Fluent’s
VBM.

AET Workflow → Continue...

The Continue... command can be used to restart or continue an already created AET workflow. This
command will become available as long as a new AET workflow project was created and at least the
Input CAD was imported.

• Restart from Step

Select the step from which the AET workflow will be restarted. All later steps that have already
been calculated will be cleaned up and deleted. Any step that is enabled with a check box using
the Execute the Following Steps will also be executed.

• Execute the Following Steps

Select the AET workflow steps to execute after pressing OK.

AET Workflow → Interrupt...

This will immediately interrupt the current AET workflow step that is being executed. After interrupting,
you may continue the AET workflow step again starting from the step that was interrupted.

AET Workflow → View Input Geometry

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 407
Fluent Aero

This command can be used to view the input 3D CAD geometry in a separate SpaceClaim window.
After clicking this command, a separate SpaceClaim window will open and the 3D blade geometry
will be loaded in that window. This new window can be used to view the geometry, make measure-
ments (to determine where to place the section cuts, for example), or to cleanup, repair and save
updates to the input geometry. This command is only available in 3D Blade mode and if the input
geometry has already been imported.

3.11.2. AET Workflow Popup Dialog Menus

For each AET workflow step that is executed, an associated popup dialog menu may appear to allow
you to specify relevant settings to that step. The dialogs are described below.

Define Blade Sections

This dialog box will appear if a 3D blade geometry is used, and if step 2: CAD Generation is selected.
It is used to select the airfoil sections to be extracted from a 3D blade geometry.

• Section Distribution

If Uniform is selected, the section positions will be automatically computed. If Custom is selected,
the positions can be entered manually.

• Number of Sections

Choose the number of sections to use to represent the blade.

• Active

Enables or disables the specific section position to be considered by the AET workflow.

• Section

The relevant section number associated with the position. This entry is not editable.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
408 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

• Position [%]

The radial position of the section in %. A 100% value refers to the position of the tip of the blade.
A 0% value refers to the position of the point of rotation (this is likely not aligned with any airfoil
section of the blade geometry).

Note:

When selecting the radial positions to extract the airfoils of the 3D blade, it is important
to ensure that the minimum radial position is located at a point where the blade geo-
metry exists. If the radial position on the 3D blade geometry does not contain an airfoil
section, there will not be any section extracted from the CAD and the workflow will stop
and output a warning identifying the issue. In this case, you should restart the AET
workflow from the CAD Generation step and must select a section within the blade.

Mesh Generation

This dialog box will appear if 3: Mesh Generation has already been attempted in the project,
AET Workflow → Continue... is used and only 3: Mesh Generation is selected. This dialog is used
to remesh a selected number of airfoil sections.

The following options are available:

• Remesh

– Airfoil

Select the airfoil sections that you would like to remesh. Select All to remesh all the airfoil sections.
Select From to remesh any airfoil sections that are greater or equal to the number entry in the
Index box. Select Custom to set a custom list of airfoil sections to remesh in the Index box.

– Index

This option is revealed if Remesh → Airfoil is set to From or Custom. Enter either the starting
section to remesh From or a list of comma separated Custom remesh sections.

This panel is useful if you would like to restart a previously failed mesh generation step (for example,
if the tool crashed or if the mesh generation of a certain section was unsuccessful).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 409
Fluent Aero

Furthermore, if you would like to change the mesh settings used to remesh an airfoil section, advanced
users could edit the mesh control files before performing the remesh operation. The following files
could be edited:

• airfoil*-2D-remeshing.jou: The journal file that controls the airfoil section mesh creation
process.

• airfoil*-2D-meshingSizes.scm: A definition file that defines various mesh sizes used to

create the airfoil section mesh.

Note:

Fluent Meshing will use the parameters inside the mesh settings file to compute a virtual
Size Field throughout the domain and generate the 2.5D mesh. The file contains two
parts, the header and mesh settings. The header indicates the section information on
which Fluent Meshing will generate the 2.5D mesh. It then refers to a list of parameters
located within the file which are used as inputs. The mesh settings are parameters used
by Fluent Meshing to compute a virtual Size Field throughout the domain and generate
the 2.5D mesh. Below is a brief description of this list of parameters:

– Header

→ currentSection – Section name.

→ currentSectionFile – Input section's 2.5D CAD.

→ chord – Chord length of the input section’s 2.5D CAD. Keep the recommended
default of 1 m.

→ scaleFactorCAD – Scale factor of the output 2.5D mesh. Keep the recommended
default value of 1.

→ currentOutput – Output mesh file’s name.

– Mesh Settings

→ z-span – Spanwise length of the input 2.5D CAD. Keep the recommended default
of 0.05 m.

→ mpx/y/z – Coordinates of the material point defined within the 2.5D domain.

→ globmin/max – Minimum and maximum global cell size of triangles or tetrahedra

used during the wrapping and mesh creation.

Important:

Any other surface mesh sizes defined within this file must be within
this range or else the mesh operation will fail.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
410 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

→ curvmin/max – Minimum and maximum cell size used to capture the curvature
of wall surfaces. This is used for surface mesh creation.

→ curvgrowth – Growth rate of the cell size used to capture the curvature of wall
surfaces. This is used for surface mesh creation.

→ curvangle – Difference between the normal angle of two neighboring wall cells.
This value is used to identify curved locations where the minimum cell size should
be applied. The default value of 1 is suitable for most airfoil geometries.

→ db01 – Cell size applied to the outmost body of influence (BOI), which is a geometry
surrounding the 2.5D airfoil and is provided as a template.

→ db02 – Cell size applied to the inner body of influence (BOI), which is a geometry
surrounding the 2.5D airfoil and is provided as a template.

→ dbte – Cell size applied to the body of influence (BOI), which is a geometry sur-
rounding the 2.5D airfoil’s trailing edge (TE) and is provided as a template.

→ prismFirstHeight – First layer height of the prisms which will be generated

and attached to the 2.5D airfoil’s wall.

→ prismGrowthRate – Prism’s growth ratio from the wall surface, starting from the
first layer.

→ prismNum – Total number of prism layers to be generated.

→ proxmin – Minimum cell size used in proximity of the surface. This is used for the
surface mesh creation when a blunt trailing edge is present in your 2.5D airfoil
geometry.

→ proxNum – Number of cells filled between two proximal surfaces. This parameter
is useful when you have a blunt trailing edge in your geometry. It will assign a
given number of mesh cells over the blunt surface of the trailing edge.

After remeshing a particular airfoil section, the AET workflow will identify if the old mesh associated
with that airfoil section was previously used to create an Airflow simulation folder using that old
mesh. If an Airflow simulation folder was identified using that old mesh, the simulation will be deleted
and a new simulation folder will be created with the new mesh of that airfoil section. To recompute
the airflow simulation using this new mesh, you can use AET Workflow → Continue... and
select 5: Run Airflow Simulations.

Define Airflow Simulation Settings Dialog

This dialog box is used to define some common initial settings to be used in all Airflow simulations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 411
Fluent Aero

• Select Distribution of Airflow Conditions

The settings in this section are used to define the matrix of freestream conditions to use as design
points. Mach Number, Reynolds Number and Angle of Attack [degrees] conditions can be
provided. For each input parameter, Select Distribution can be used to set the distribution to a
Constant value or Uniform distribution. Specifically for the Angle of Attack [degrees], a Piecewise-
Uniform distribution can be selected. Depending on the distribution type selected, the content of
the associated gray box below will be adjusted. Once the entries are specified into the gray box,
the final list of input values is displayed next to List of Mach Numbers, List of Reynolds Numbers
and List of AoA [degrees]. The final design point list used for each airflow simulation will contain
every combination of the values of these three input variables.

• Select Models and Solver Settings

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
412 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

Select some common solver settings to use for all airflow simulations, such as Turbulence Model,
Convergence Settings, Number of Iterations and Aero. Coeffs. Averaging.

3.11.3. AET Workflow Project View Structure

The Project View directory structure can be used to keep track of the progress of the AET workflow.
Each folder created in the Project View is associated with a particular step in the workflow.

Input

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 413
Fluent Aero

This folder is associated with 1: Select Input Geometry which is used to import the input geometry
for the AET Workflow. After completion of this step, this folder will contain an imported geometry
file, the type of which depends on the selected Input CAD Mode.

• In 3D Blade mode, this will be a .scdm/.pmdb/.part CAD file of a single rotor blade, oriented
along the z axis.

• In 2D Points mode, this will be a .txt/.dat points file to describe an airfoil section.

CAD

This folder is associated with 2: CAD Generation, which uses Ansys SpaceClaim in batch mode to
generate 2D CAD files of the selected airfoil sections.

• In 3D Blade mode, the 3D rotor geometry will be imported into Ansys SpaceClaim, and multiple
2D airfoil sections will be extracted. The inputs to define the airfoil sections are set in the Define
Blade Sections dialog. If any of the selected blade sections share the same airfoil shape, only one
CAD file will be generated to represent these sections.

• In 2D Points mode, the 2D Points file will be imported into Ansys , and a 2D geometry will be
created.

Important:

This step can only be executed on a Windows machine.

Once this step is complete, a CAD folder will appear in the Project View containing the individual
airfoil section CAD files and other .txt files to describe these sections.

– 2D-section-meshing-params.txt

Specifies the mode, number of sections, section names, and section chord lengths of the 2D
section CADs produced.

– 2D-section-geometry-params.csv

Descriptive geometry information about the blade and defined sections. This can be used as a
reference for later steps.

– OUT-TMP-WORK.scdoc

Temporary SpaceClaim CAD file used to store intermediate steps of the CAD generation process.
This file is not used in later steps.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
414 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

– airfoil-0#.pmdb

2.5D section CAD file produced by the step in .pmdb format. This is used in the subsequent
meshing step.

– airfoil-0#.scdoc

2.5D section CAD file produced by the step in .scdoc format. This is not used in the subsequent
meshing step.

Additional files may appear in the disk location of this folder but are not shown in the Project
View. These include:

– sc-script.scdoc

Temporary Ansys SpaceClaim CAD file used to store intermediate steps of the CAD generation
process. It contains all geometries throughout the SpaceClaim process. This file is not used in
later steps.

– sc-script.log

Log output of all Ansys SpaceClaim operations performed during this step.

– sc-script.png

In 3D Blade mode, this file will contain a picture showing the position of each extracted airfoil
section overlaid on top of the input 3D blade geometry. In 2D Points mode, this file will contain
a picture showing the 2D airfoil constructed from your input 2D Points file.

Mesh
This folder is associated with 3: Mesh Generation, which uses a separate Ansys Fluent Meshing process
in batch mode to generate 2.5D Mesh files of the selected airfoil sections. Each section CAD that was
constructed in the previous step will be meshed, resulting in the same number of airfoil-
0#.msh.h5 files as there were airfoil-0#.pmdb files produced in the prior step.

Once this step is complete, a virtual Mesh folder will appear in the Project View with the individual
section Mesh files, as shown below.

The files produced are briefly described below:

• airfoil-0#.msh.h5

2.5D section mesh file produced by the step. This is used in the subsequent Setup Airflow Simu-
lations step.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 415
Fluent Aero

Additional files may appear in the disk location of this folder but are not shown in the Project View.
These include:

• airfoil-0#-fluentMeshing.log

Transcript output file of all Ansys Fluent Meshing operations performed while constructing this
airfoil mesh.

Airflow
These folders are created when 4: Setup Airflow Simulations is performed. An Airflow.airfoil-0#
simulation folder will be created for each airfoils-0#.msh.h5 that was created in the previous
step.

These Airflow simulation folders are the same as typical airflow simulations that one would create
when using Fluent Aero’s New Aero Workflow… command. However, the default settings used in
these airflow simulations are partially defined by the Define Airflow Simulation Settings dialog that
appears when 4: Setup Airflow Simulations is selected.

If the default settings are used, each simulation will contain a large number of design points. After
these airflow simulations are created using 4: Setup Airflow Simulations, you can decide to connect
to these simulations manually and adjust their settings as needed.

The results for these simulations are calculated when 5: Run Airflow Simulations is executed. When
executing this step, Fluent Aero will sequentially connect to each Airflow simulation and calculate
all design points. Since it is possible to use a large number of airfoil sections and a large number of
design points for each airfoil, you may decide to use a compute cluster to perform these calculations.
When performing the 5: Run Airflow Simulations step, only the design points that have not already
been updated (for example, their Status is not Updated) will be calculated.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
416 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

Output
This folder is associated with 6: Output Files. In this folder, you will find a summary of the convergence
of the simulation design points of all airfoil simulations and data files summarizing each airfoils per-
formance which can be used to define a rotor in Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model (VBM).

The files produced are briefly described below:

• Geometry.airfoil-0#.dat

Airfoil performance data files, containing the lift and drag lookup tables associated with design
point calculations of each Airflow simulation. These files are in a format such that they can be used
to define airfoil section performance in Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model (VBM) when defining a VBM
rotor.

• Table-All-DPs-Summary.csv

This file summarizes the input flight conditions, calculation residuals and convergence of all design
points in each Airflow simulation. The content of this file is similar to the Table-Summary.csv
file that is produced by each individual simulation. However, since it combines the results of all
simulations, it contains an additional column specifying the Airflow simulation name.

Furthermore, after the 6: Output Files step is performed, three new panels will appear above the
Graphics panel that summarize the convergence of all simulations and design points.

1. Convergence

2. Table: All DPs Summary

3. Table: Simulations Summary

3.11.4. Viewing Results of the AET Workflow

Convergence
Once 6: Output Files has been executed, a Convergence panel will appear above the Graphics
panel which provides access to view the convergence history of any design point in any simulation.
The Dataset drop-down selection can be used to select the simulation name and design point
number.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 417
Fluent Aero

Table: All DPs Summary

Once 6: Output Files has been executed, a Table: All DPs Summary panel will appear above the
Graphics panel. For every design point, a summary of input parameters, residual averages and con-
vergence criteria will be displayed. This information is also outputted to the Table-All-DPs-
Summary.csv file shown in the Output folder of the Project View.

Table: All Simulations Summary

Once 6: Output Files has been executed, a Table: All Simulations Summary panel will appear above
the Graphics panel. A summary of how many DPs have met, partially met, or not met the default

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
418 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

convergence criteria will be shown. This information can be helpful in identifying the design points
that should be recalculated to obtain more reliable results.

3.11.5. Recalculating Airflow Simulation Design Points and Updating the

Output Folder
The goal for the AET workflow is to allow you to work through the steps in a sequential fashion
automatically without the need to go back and perform previous steps. However, one step in partic-
ular that might require more attention is 5: Run Airflow Simulations. If there are design points that
have not converged sufficiently to provide an accurate/precise solution, you may need to go back
and simulate that design point again with more robust solver settings before re-creating the Output
files. The steps below provide a typical example of this workflow.

Note:

There are many ways one could manually interact with the airflow simulations to improve
the convergence of design points. The steps shown below are simply a useful example of
a possible way to do this. However, whenever a design point calculation is updated, you
must afterwards ensure to also update the Output folder so that the new results are used
and properly saved for its correct usage by Fluent’s VBM.

Example 3.1: Example Steps to Improve the Convergence of a Specific Design Point

1. You have completed a full run of the AET workflow.

2. After 6: Output Files has been run.

d. Go to Table: All Simulations Summary. The summary shows that most design points have
either met or partially met the convergence criteria. However, DP-5 from Airflow.airfoil-01
has not met the convergence criteria.

e. Go to Table: All DPs Summary. Notice that AoA [deg] associated with this design point is
20 degrees. This is a high angle of attack and the solution might yield to a transient solution
or to near stall condition.

f. Go to the Convergence panel and set the Dataset to Airflow.airfoil-01:DP-5. Select lift-
coefficient. Notice that the value of lift-coefficient is oscillating with a substantial amplitude,
suggesting that the solution is unstable. This is preventing the convergence criteria from
being met.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 419
Fluent Aero

g. You could either improve the convergence of this design point or delete the design point
from the dataset before recreating the output files. The following steps will show an example
of how to potentially improve the convergence.

3. In the Project View, right-click the Airflow.airfoil-01 simulation folder and select Load in
Solver.

4. Once the simulation is loaded, set the Status of DP-5 to Needs Update in the Input:Design
Points table.

5. Go to Solution → Solve. Change the Convergence Settings to different settings that you
believe will improve the convergence of this design point. For example, change Convergence
Settings from Default to Robust or to Custom and edit the advanced parameters that are dis-
played. You can also increase the Iterations from 1000 to 2000.

6. Next, select Simulation Conditions Save Status of Design Points. This will cause the
status of DP-5 to be saved to the project as Needs Update.

7. Close the simulation and click Yes to save the case and settings.

8. Select File → AET Workflow → Continue.... In the panel that appears, set the Restart
from Step to 5: Run Airflow Simulations and ensure both 5: Run Airflow Simulations and 6:
Output Files are selected. Click OK.

9. When 5: Run Airflow Simulations is executed, Fluent Aero will identify that the Airflow.airfoil-
01 simulation has a single design point that requires update and it will connect to that simulation
and recalculate that particular design point. Since no other design points require update, no
other design points will be recalculated.

10. When 6: Output Files is executed, the Output files will be recreated and the Summary and
Convergence tables will appear. Investigate these tables to ensure Airlfow.airfoil-01:DP-5 has
now converged.

Note:

Alternatively, instead of using 5: Run Airflow Simulations to recalculate the design

point, you could recalculate it manually while connected to the simulation right after
you edit the Solve settings. If you take this approach, you should ensure to recreate
the output files manually using File → AET Workflow → Continue... and setting
Restart from Step to 6: Output Files.

3.11.6. Additional Commands for the AET Workflow

• Copy Settings to All New Simulations in Project

Right-click an Airflow simulation folder to use this command. When selected, the settings of the
simulation (as contained in the run.settings file) will be copied to all other simulations in the project
that do not yet have any results calculated. After the airflow simulations have been created using

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
420 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

4: Setup Airflow Simulations, this command can apply custom settings to all airflow simulations
by performing:

– Load one of the airflow simulations.

– Use the Outline View to modify any settings under Setup or Solve.

– Close the simulation and selecting Yes to save the settings.

– Right-click the simulation and select Copy Settings to All New Simulations in Project. The
settings of the selected airflow simulation will be copied to all others in the project that do not
contain results.

• View Convergence of All Simulations in Project

Right-click an Airflow simulation folder to use this command. When selected, a Convergence
window will appear where the convergence histories of all the design points of all simulations in
the project will be displayed. This command is available even if a user does not have a simulation
loaded.

• Save Status of Design Points

Right-click Simulation Conditions in the Outline View to use this command. When selected, the
currently selected Status of each Design Point in the Input:Design Points table will be saved. Use
this command to force certain design points to be set to Needs Update such that they will be
calculated when 5: Run Airflow Simulations is used.

• aetSetLogLevel(level)

Type aetSetLogLevel(level) into the python console to use this command. Use this to set
the amount of log information you want displayed in the Fluent Aero Console from the SpaceClaim
and Fluent Meshing steps. Regardless of the selection, the full log for each step can still be found
under Mesh/fluentMeshing.log and CAD/sc-script.log files.

– evel = 1 (default) - Show a reduced log output, to show all log lines containing Info:
and Error – typically resulting in about 10-20 lines of log information shown.

– level = 2 – Show the full log output, typically resulting in hundreds of lines of log information
shown.

– level = 1 – Show no log output of the Fluent Meshing and SpaceClaim subprocesses. Setting
this will also skip the error checking/management, which will allow each subprocess to continue,
even if an error message appears in the process.

3.11.7. AET Workflow – Preparing the Input Geometry File

The input geometry file, whether it is a 2D Points file or a 3D Blade file, must be prepared to meet
certain conditions to be supported by the AET workflow.

2D Points File Requirements

• The file must be a text file with two columns, one for the X position and one for the Y position,
with a space in between the columns.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 421
Fluent Aero

• The file should be plain text format and should use the .txt or .dat suffix.

• The coordinates must be in unit length.

• The file must contain the coordinates of the airfoil only.

• The file must consist of either one or two curves of data points. One curve is recommended.

– If one curve is used, the data points should start from the trailing edge, then wrap around the
airfoil up to the leading edge and finally back to the trailing edge at the end.

– If two curves are used, each curve should start at the leading edge and end at the trailing edge.
An empty line should be placed between the two curves. The script used in 2: CAD Generation
will combine these two curves into a single curve before proceeding with the next step.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
422 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

3D Blade File Requirements

• The file should be in .scdoc, .pmdb, .iges or .part format. The Ansys SpaceClaim .scdoc
format is recommended.

• Only one rotor blade should be included in the file. The blade geometry can be either in one body
object or several separated surface objects as shown below:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 423
Fluent Aero

The SpaceClaim script will automatically select all objects inside the input CAD file to merge into
the final blade geometry.

• The blade should be positioned such that the center of rotation of the rotor is at the global origin.

• The blade span, or rotation radius line (R) of the blade, should be aligned with the +Z axis.

• The rotation axes of the blade should be aligned with the +Y axis.

Best Practices for Preparing the 3D Blade

1. The 3D blade geometry is required to be orientated such that the span is positioned along the
+Z axis, the chord is positioned along the +X axis, and the blade is rotating around the +Y axis,
with the center of rotation located at the point of origin, as shown below:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
424 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

2. In addition to orienting the blade to the required position, your blade CAD should be cleaned
up to ensure a water-tight geometry. Some guidelines are described below:

• In the most ideal case, all blade surfaces should align at common edges, without overlapping
and without gaps, as shown in the image below.

• It’s sometimes not possible to ensure a perfect CAD, so the AET workflow is able to automat-
ically repair small gaps between two connecting surfaces. Any gaps with a local tolerance of
0.5% chord length will be automatically closed. However, if there is any gap larger than 0.5%
of the local chord length existing in your geometry, the blade CAD should be cleaned up
manually to ensure your geometries’ surfaces are watertight.

• The AET workflow is also able to automatically repair slight overlapping surfaces. However, if
two surfaces are overlapping in a particularly complex manner, it is recommended to clean
the blade geometry to remove these overlapping surfaces.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 425
Fluent Aero

• Complex shapes used to describe the trailing edge (TE) may cause difficulty for the AET
workflow. Therefore, the input blade should not capture too much detail or contain messy
CAD definition of its TE geometry. Try to clean up the blade’s TE so that the TE has a simple
shape, such as simple sharp, blunt, or rounded shape.

3. Finally, after you have prepared the 3D blade CAD, you should consider defining the airfoil section
cuts you will use in the AET workflow. An overall view of 9 section cuts is shown below:

• Avoid defining a section at exactly the maximum R value, which represents the blade tip. The
highest section cut should be defined far enough away from the blade tip such that a complete
airfoil section is obtained.

• Avoid defining a section at the blade root, where a geometry may exist for mechanical purposes
but does not represent an airfoil shape. Typically, such section should not contribute substan-
tially to the rotor disk load.

3.11.8. AET Workflow Python Scripting

Python commands are available by either:

a. Launching each individual step of the AET workflow (one command line for each step).

b. Launching the entire AET workflow (one command line for all steps).

Both of these commands can be easily launched using journal files to record your actions from the
AET workflow to a python script file.

File → Start Journal...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
426 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 AET: Aerodynamic Extraction Tool

See below for example python commands used to launch the AET workflow using one command line
per step (with some additional lines to control sequencing if launched simultaneously):

• Project.aetCleanup('step1Input') • Project.aetInputFiles('3D Blade',

'T2-Blade.scdoc')

• Project.aetBladeToCAD_SC('True', 'Custom', '3', '0.3,0.8,0.8001')

• Project.aetCADToMesh_FM('True', ‘True’, ‘False’, ‘False’)

• import os, time

• prjFolderPath = "/path/to/aetproject.cffdb/"

• while not os.path.exists(os.path.join(prjFolderPath, 'Mesh', 'proc.e')):

time.sleep(2)

• Project.aetSetupSims(['Constant,0.7,False,False'], ['Con-
stant,2000000,False,False'], ['Piecewise-Uniform,"-20,-
90,180","20,90,0","3,2,1"'], ['10,Default,K-Omega SST,Enabled'])

• Project.aetRunSim('Airflow.airfoil-01')

• Project.saveCase()

• waitFalse(csim().Solution.RunState.ClientProcessRunning)

• Project.aetCloseSim('Airflow.airfoil-01')

• Project.aetRunSim('Airflow.airfoil-02')

• Project.saveCase()

• waitFalse(csim().Solution.RunState.ClientProcessRunning)

• Project.aetCloseSim('Airflow.airfoil-02')

• Project.aetOutputFiles(True)

See below for example of a python command used to launch the entire AET workflow using a single
command:

• Project.runAETWorkflow('T2-Blade.scdoc', '3D Blade',

'[True,True,True,True,True,True]', '[True,\"Cus-
tom\",3,[0.3,0.8,0.8001]]', , ‘()‘, '[[\"Airflow\",[[\"Mach\",[\"Con-
stant\",[0.7]]],[\"Reynolds\",[\"Con-
stant\",[2000000]]],[\"AoA\",[\"Piecewise-Uniform\", [[-20,90,-
180],[20,90,0],[3,2,1]]]]]],[\"Solve\",[[\"Turbulence Model\",\"K-Omega
SST\"],[\"Convergence Settings\",\"Default\"],[\"Itera-
tions\",1000],[\"Aero. Coeffs. Averaging\",\"Enabled\"]]]]')

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 427
Fluent Aero

Limitation
Ensure to use only one escape character (\) per instance of a quotation mark (“) in this single line
implementation.

3.12. Post-Analysis in Fluent Aero (Beta)

Post-Analysis allows you to view, compare, and post-process any case or data files located in or imported
to the project.

Note:

Post-Analysis makes use of the EnSight post-processing functionality and is directly displayed
in the Fluent Aero workspace window.

This feature includes some important limitations to be aware of:

• Using Post-Analysis with Fluent Solution files (.dat.h5) will display some surface variables
as unavailable, and large solutions may have a long loading time.

• Some Post-Analysis operations will not be recorded as journal commands, such as the re-
orientation of the Graphics window.

• Complex Scenes and Viewports may not update completely in some scenarios.

When the Post-Analysis feature is first activated, a Post-Analysis node will appear in the Outline View
where detailed post-processing can be performed. In general, it can be used to create more custom
post-processing objects or obtain more detailed solution data than what is otherwise available from
the quick post-processing objects available in the Results node of a simulation.

Note:

The Post-Analysis feature uses the EnSight renderer, therefore, the EnSight package must be
included in the Ansys installation to use this feature inside Fluent Aero.

The following section gives some information on Post-Analysis commands that are available in Fluent
Aero. For more detailed information on Post-Analysis, see Fluent Post-Analysis Workspace.

3.12.1. Loading a Dataset Into Post-Analysis

Datasets can be loaded into the Post-Analysis tool in two ways:

1. In the Project View, select a DP folder or solution file and choose View Results – Post
Solution or View Results – Fluent Solution.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
428 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis in Fluent Aero (Beta)

2. From the Results ribbon, select Dataset → Load Dataset.... Browse to and select a matching
case file and data file.

3.12.2. Managing Datasets

The current dataset can be selected through the Dataset menu or through a selection in the Outline
View.

Note:

Datasets marked with the prefix Fluent : refer to the currently active dataset associated
with the currently loaded simulation, and are not loaded in the Post-Analysis viewer.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 429
Fluent Aero

In the example shown in the images below, two datasets are currently loaded into the Post-Analysis
tool: Results – out.0002 (which was loaded by selecting View Results – Post Solution on the DP2
folder in the Project View) using the Project View and out.0001 (which was loaded using the Load
Dataset… command in the Results ribbon).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
430 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis in Fluent Aero (Beta)

The Dataset entry will update as a specific dataset is highlighted in the Post-Analysis area of the
Outline View, or if the Results node of a simulation is selected. Each additional dataset loaded to
Post-Analysis is loaded using the same background EnSight instance, and will consume additional
memory.

The following commands are available when left-clicking a Dataset name:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 431
Fluent Aero

• Delete

Datasets can be released and unloaded through the Delete command. All graphical objects related
to this dataset and its Scene entries will be removed.

• Copy Objects to Other Datasets…

This command enables you to copy the state of one dataset to another, including its list of graph-
ical objects and their settings. This enables easy dataset comparison, especially if each dataset is
shown in a separate viewport.

• Hide Unused Items

This command enables you to hide unused graphics objects in the list. For example, if only a Mesh
object has been created, Hide Unused Items will reduce the list of objects under the dataset to
show only the Meshes object. This can be helpful to reduce visual clutter when working with many
datasets. Selecting Show Unused Items will reveal the unused hidden objects.

3.12.3. Graphics Window Commands

The following graphics display control icons are available at the left side of the Post-Analysis graphics
window:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
432 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis in Fluent Aero (Beta)

• Set Layout

This menu can be used to split the graphics window into multiple viewports

• Set Active Viewport

This menu can be used to select the active viewport for graphical operations. Alternatively, the
display or addition to a specific viewport can be set from the contextual menu on the graphical
item by choosing Display In → Viewport-#

• Link Viewports

This menu is used to synchronize the camera angles and movements of all viewports

Alternatively, the display or the addition of the selected graphical object to a specific viewport can
be set from the contextual menu on the graphical item:

• Display (Case Comparison)

Displays the graphics object for the selected datasets side-by-side, in the Graphics window using
the viewport layout specified under the Case Comparison node.

• Display

Displays the graphics object for the selected datasets in the Graphics window.

• Display In

Displays the selected Graphics object within the viewport.

• Add To

Adds the selected Graphics object to the viewport.

• Save Image...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 433
Fluent Aero

Opens the Save Picture dialog box allowing you to save an image file of the object in the
Graphics window.

• Delete

Deletes the selected Graphics object.

For quick access to commonly used commands, a context-sensitive menu is available when right-
clicking within the Graphics window:

• Save Image...

Opens the Save Picture dialog box allowing you to save an image file of the object in the
Graphics window.

• Save Animation...

Opens the Save Animation dialog box allowing you to save an animation file.

Note:

This setting is active only for transient datasets.

• Save As New Scene Object

Saves the Graphics window content as an object under Scenes.

• Save to Scene Object

Saves the Graphics window content to an existing Scene object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
434 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis in Fluent Aero (Beta)

• Add to Viewport

Adds the selected Graphics object to the viewport.

• Display in Viewport

Displays the selected Graphics object within the viewport.

• Remove from Viewport

Removes the selected Graphics object from the viewport.

• Display Scene

Displays the selected Scene object in the viewport.

• Display (Full Window)

Displays your model to take maximum advantage of the Graphics window’s width and height.

• Fit to Viewport

Adjusts the overall size of your model to take maximum advantage of the viewport’s width and
height.

• Set View

Contains a drop-down of views, allowing you to display the model from the direction of the vector
equidistant to all three axes, as well as in different axes orientations.

• Set Viewport Layout

Allows you to select from a collection of viewport arrangements.

• Link Viewports…

Synchronizes the display of the selected viewports.

3.12.4. Graphical Objects

Each loaded dataset will have the following graphical objects available in Post-Analysis:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 435
Fluent Aero

• Surfaces

Generate new geometric surfaces or lines which can be used as selected surface zones when creating
a Meshes, Contours or Vectors.

• Difference Fields

Generate objects to display the difference of certain data fields.

• Graphics

– LIC Settings

Integrate a vector over a part surface to provide a uniform visualization of the flow of a vector
over a surface.

– Meshes

Generate mesh objects to display all or part of the mesh.

– Contours

Generate colored contour plots of solution variables contained in the solution file.

– Vectors

Generate vector plots of directional variables contained in the solution file.

– Pathlines

Generate pathlines along surfaces using directional variables in the solution file.

– Volume Rendering

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
436 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis in Fluent Aero (Beta)

Draw vectors in the entire domain, or on selected surfaces. By default, one vector is drawn at
the center of each cell (or at the center of each facet of a data surface), with the length and
color of the arrows representing the velocity magnitude. The spacing, size, and coloring of the
arrows can be modified, along with several other vector plot settings.

– Periodic Instances

Generate periodic instances objects to display repeated periodic surfaces.

• XY Plots

Generate XY plots of solution data along 1D objects in the domain.

Note:

To generate XY Plots, it is first required to generate a 1D graphical object on from the

XY plot can collect its data. You can use Surface → New → Line… to generate an arbitrary
line in the volume. Alternatively, you can use Surfaces → New → Iso-Surface to create
a line resulting from the intersection of a list of surfaces. To do this, create an Iso-Surface
on a coordinate Iso-Value, and Restrict to Specific Surfaces, as shown in the image
below:

In this example, a Z cutting plane is selected at the middle of the domain and restricted
to the walls of the domain, leading to a line along the airfoil surface where solution
variables may be obtained for an XY Plot.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 437
Fluent Aero

• Mirror Planes

Create 2D XY plots of your results for analyzing one variable with respect to another variable. For
more details on Mirror Planes, see Mirror Planes.

3.12.5. Case Comparison

When multiple results can be loaded into Post-Analysis concurrently, the Case Comparison feature
can be used to easily create side by side comparisons of different datasets.

• Display (Comparison)

When more than one dataset is loaded into Post-Analysis, create a graphics object, for example a
contour, in one of the datasets. Right-click that object and select Display (Comparison). The
graphics object will automatically be copied to all datasets, and the Scenes → Current Scene will
be automatically adjusted such that the graphics window will display a side-by-side comparison of
the datasets.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
438 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Post-Analysis in Fluent Aero (Beta)

A maximum of 4 datasets will be displayed at a time. The Case Comparison object can be used
to adjust datasets that are currently selected.

3.12.6. Dataset Sequences

The entire sequence of design point solutions can be loaded by selecting the Results folder in the
Project View and choosing View Results.

Depending on which solution files are available, the command will offer a choice to load either the
Post Solution or the Fluent Solution. In general, it is preferred to load the Post Solution, as these files
contain selected variables and are quicker to load into Post-Analysis.

When a full results folder’s sequence of design point solutions is loaded into Post-Analysis, the
Dataset – Sequence ribbon section permits you to change the currently displayed item in the se-
quence.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 439
Fluent Aero

3.13. Post-processing With CFD-Post and EnSight From Fluent Aero

The following sections of this chapter are:
3.13.1. CFD-Post From Fluent Aero
3.13.2. EnSight From Fluent Aero

In addition to the post-processing options available directly from the Outline View, the external tools
CFD-Post and EnSight can also be used to post-process the simulation results that are present in the
Project View.

3.13.1. CFD-Post From Fluent Aero

CFD-Post is a general post-processor for Ansys Fluids and can read Fluent case and data files. Usage
is detailed in CFD-Post User's Guide.

CFD-Post can be opened from Fluent Aero by clicking a case or solution file in the Project View and
selecting View with… → CFD-Post. CFD-Post is then launched from the simulation folder, a new
CFD-Post window will appear, and the selected solution file will be loaded.

Note:

CFD-Post is installed by default with any Ansys Fluids product and uses a post-processing
license token. Launching it requires the AWP_ROOT*** environment variable to be set-
up. This is automatically done on Windows during the installation process. See Ansys, Inc.
Installation Guides.

3.13.2. EnSight From Fluent Aero

EnSight is a general post-processor for Ansys Fluids and can read icing solutions directly via a command
file or by selecting the files in its own Open File dialog. Usage is detailed in the Ansys EnSight User
Manual.

EnSight can be opened from Fluent Aero by clicking a case or solution file in the Project View and
selecting View with… → EnSight. EnSight is then launched from the simulation folder, a new EnSight
window will appear, and the selected solution file will be loaded.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
440 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Preferences

There are two ways to open EnSight from Fluent Aero; by using View with EnSight from the Project
View, or by using EnSight viewer (Beta) from the Project View. Each method has a slightly different
usage and is described in the following sections.

Note:

EnSight is installed by default with any Ansys Fluids product and uses a Post-processing
license token. Launching it requires the AWP_ROOT*** environment variable to be set-
up. This is automatically done on Windows during the installation process. See the Ansys,
Inc. Installation Guides for more details.

3.13.2.1. View with EnSight From Project View

Launch EnSight from the Project View by right-clicking a solution file, and selecting View with
EnSight. EnSight is then launched from the Simulation folder, a new EnSight window will appear,
and the selected solution file will be loaded. Use the EnSight window’s selectable options to further
post process the solution file.

3.14. Preferences
The Aero preferences are available from the File → Preferences... menu.

Fluent Aero launch options are set up in this window:

• Use Custom Solver Launch Settings

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 441
Fluent Aero

Enables the usage of a Fluent Launcher when loading or creating a new simulation. This allows you
to launch calculations using a different number of CPUs, a different machine or a queuing system.

• Show Solution Workspace

When the solver is loaded, the Fluent Solution workspace is hidden by default. Enabling this option
will display the Fluent Solution workspace window at the same time the solver is loaded.

• Enable Solution Workspace Graphics

The Fluent Solution workspace window displayed with the graphics panel is disabled by default.
Enable this option to have the graphics enabled at start-up.

• Use Separate Consoles for Sessions

By default, a single Fluent Aero console contains both the local Fluent Aero transcript in black text
and the Solution workspace transcript in gray text prefixed by |. Enabling this option will send the
Solution workspace transcript to its own individual console window.

• Font Color for Remote Session

Change the font color of the Solution workspace transcript. In the Fluent Aero Console, all log in-
formation originating from the Fluent Aero will be in black and all log information originating from
the Fluent Solution workspace will be in the color selected here, allowing you to distinguish them.

• Force Local Connection Only

Enable this option to force Fluent Aero to use the localhost address (127.0.0.1) to establish the con-
nection between the Fluent Aero client and the background Fluent Solution workspace server. This
option should only be used if you are launching and running Fluent Aero on a single machine. It can
be useful to avoid issues with network or VPN changes that may occur on your local machine while
you are using Fluent Aero.

• Beta Features

Enables Fluent Aero solvers beta features.

• Advanced Settings

Enables advanced settings.

3.15. Launching Fluent Aero in Batch or on a Cluster using Job Scheduler

3.15.1. Batch Launching

Batch Launching Arguments

Fluent Aero can be launched in batch mode by executing the aero (Linux) or aero.bat (Windows)
executable file, and by using the following arguments.

• -R file.py

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
442 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Launching Fluent Aero in Batch or on a Cluster using Job Scheduler

– After launching Fluent Aero, this option reads and executes the file.py python script.

– By default, the python script will be executed and then the application will be exited. (the exit
status code of the application will be non-zero if the Python script has thrown an exception or
some other error occurred).

• -N

– Runs Fluent Aero in full batch no-GUI mode (the graphical user interface will not be displayed).

• -g

– Runs Fluent Aero in full batch no-GUI mode (the graphical user interface will not be displayed).

– In this mode, background graphics objects will not be generated, preventing you from accessing
some post-processing or image creation operations.

• -I

– Runs Fluent Aero in interactive batch with-GUI mode (the graphical user interface will be dis-
played).

– When using this argument, the application will not exit after completion of the python script.

– It is suggested to use both –I –wait together for any interactive batch mode runs in Fluent
Aero.

• -wait

– Waits until execution of the file.py script is complete before continuing batch execution.

– It is suggested to use both –I –wait together for any interactive batch mode runs in Fluent
Aero.

• -t CPUs

– Launches the solver using the specified number of CPUs.

Python Commands Relevant for Batch Execution

• enableScriptEventLoop()

– When executing aero using only the -R file.py argument, this command should be specified
at the beginning of the file.py script to ensure the script waits for the execution to finish.
Using this command is an alternative to adding the -I -wait command line options.

Batch Launching Examples

The following sections show command line usage examples on Linux or Windows:

Linux

• bin/aero -R file.py -I -wait -t 4

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 443
Fluent Aero

– Executes Fluent Aero and runs the file.py python script in interactive batch (with-GUI) mode
using 4 CPUs.

– The file.py script will be completely executed before any additional batch commands are
called.

– This method replicates the standard user experience of Fluent Aero.

• bin/aero -R file.py -N -t CPU -4

– Executes Fluent Aero and runs the file.py python script in full batch (no-GUI) mode using 4
CPUs.

Windows

The functionality is the same as the above Linux commands, except that the executable should be
replaced with bin/aero.bat.

3.15.2. Launch Using Job Scheduler on a Cluster

The Fluent Aero workspace uses the remote client/solver framework to maintain a connection to a
background Fluent Solution workspace when connected to and calculating a Fluent Aero simulation.
When connected to a simulation, both workspaces are active.

The image below visually represents the interaction between the Fluent Aero workspace (client), and
the Fluent Solution workspace (solver).

1. Fluent Aero Workspace (client)

• The user interface where you interact with the simulation.

• Typically active on a local machine, or a visualization machine.

2. Fluent Solution workspace (solver)

• Hidden by default

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
444 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Launching Fluent Aero in Batch or on a Cluster using Job Scheduler

• Where the solver is calculated

• Can be active on a local machine, or on compute nodes on a cluster

• Can be shown at any time by selecting Workspaces → Solution from the Project ribbon, allow-
ing you to modify settings that are not available in Fluent Aero.

The client/solver framework allows for three options for launching Fluent Aero on a cluster using Job
Scheduler:

• Option 1: (Interactive)

Fluent Aero running on a visualization node, and Fluent Solution running on the compute nodes,
using the Fluent Launcher user interface panel to specify launching options.

• Option 2: (Batch Mode)

Fluent Aero running on a visualization node, with the Fluent Solution running on the compute
nodes, using command line options in Fluent Aero to specify the queuing system options.

• Option 3: (Expert – not fully supported)

Fluent Aero and the Fluent solver both running on compute nodes, using a custom script to specify
launching options.

Note:

Linux clusters

Queued job submission requires the ksh shell to be available on the submission node.

A newer version of Intel MPI is used and might encounter issues on inter-node (more than
one compute node) computations, on clusters with outdated UCX libraries. A typical
symptom of this issue would be a freeze of the computation, midway in the solver process.
The workaround for this issue are to either:

• Ensure the latest UCX libraries are used on the system

• Use a different MPI mode than intelmpi, or by specifying the FLUENT_INTEL_MPI_VER-

SION=2018 environment variable.

• Use the FI_PROVIDER=verbs environment variable, to switch to an alternate commu-

nication method. This environment variable is not suitable for all environments.

In the following sections, a step-by-step process for each method will be shown.

Option 1: Interactive
• Fluent Aero workspace is running on a visualization node.

• Fluent Solution workspace is running on the compute nodes.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 445
Fluent Aero

• Fluent Launcher user interface panel is used to specify launching options.

1. Open the Fluent Launcher window (/fluent/bin/fluent) and select Aero to launch Fluent
Aero on your visualization node.

2. Specify the appropriate options for the following settings:

a. Solver Processes

b. Go to the Scheduler tab.

c. Enable Use Job Scheduler.

d. Select the queue type (LSF, SGE, PBS or Slurm).

e. Set up the Slurm Submission Host, Slurm Partition, Slurm Account, etc…

The following image shows a typical setup for a Slurm type queue.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
446 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Launching Fluent Aero in Batch or on a Cluster using Job Scheduler

3. Click Start

4. Fluent Aero is started on the current machine.

5. Once a simulation is created or loaded, the Fluent workspace will be allocated in the queuing
system. You will then be in queue until computer nodes from the cluster become available. Once
available, the solver process will start, and the simulation will be shown in the Outline View.

Option 2: Batch Mode

• Fluent Aero workspace is running on a visualization node.

• Fluent Solution workspace is running on the compute nodes.

• Command line options are used to specify solver launching options.

1. From the Project ribbon, select Workspaces → Options and disable Use Custom Solver Launch
Settings.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 447
Fluent Aero

2. Launch the aero executable with the same command line argument as when running Fluent in
batch mode:
fluent/bin/aero-t28 -scheduler=slurm -scheduler_queue=partition-name -scheduler_account=account-name

This can be combined with batch mode arguments to execute a python script, for example -R
test.py -N. See Python Console (p. 451).
export PRJAPP_FLUENT_PARAMS=”-t28 -scheduler=slurm -scheduler_queue=partition-name
-scheduler_account=account-name -schduler_headnode=visualisation-node-name

3. Create or open a Fluent Aero project.

4. Create or load a simulation. The Fluent Launcher panel will be skipped (it will not appear). Instead,
the solver will be launched using the arguments that were specified when launching aero in the
command line.

5. You will now be in queue for the cluster compute nodes. Once the nodes are made available to
you, the solver process will start, and the simulation will be shown in the Outline View.

Option 3: (Expert - Unsupported)

• Fluent Aero workspace is running on the compute node.

• Fluent Solution workspace is running on the compute nodes.

• A custom script file is used to specify the launching options.

While this is not the initial intended usage of the client/solver framework, expert users could construct
a script to launch the Fluent Aero workspace (client) in a distributed manner over the compute nodes
of a cluster, and furthermore, have the Fluent Solution workspace (solver) also running on the same
compute nodes of the cluster. When constructing the script, the following conditions should be met:

• The custom launching script should launch the Fluent Aero workspace using the aero executable
(/fluent/bin/aero) on the cluster queue directly.

• Once Fluent Aero has been launched on the available compute nodes, the machine file should be
used to define the PRJAPP_FLUENT_PARAMS environment variable. In this way, when the solver
is launched, the machine file will be used to load it on the same machines.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
448 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Launching Fluent Aero in Batch or on a Cluster using Job Scheduler

– Example: export PRJAPP_FLUENT_PARAMS=”-cnf $MACHINES”, where $MACHINES contains

the list of machines used to launch Fluent Aero.

The list of machines can either be a comma separated list of machines (suitable for short lists
only), or more typically a filename referencing a file with one machine per line. The filename
should be provided with a full path, as the job submission folder will not be the same as the
one used to launch Fluent.

• From the top ribbon, Workspaces → Options → Use Custom Solver Launch Options must be
disabled, so that the environment variable above is used.

• The compute nodes must be graphics enabled for this to work properly.

Note:

This is not fully supported by Fluent Aero, so this option should only be attempted by
expert users.

The following image below shows an example custom script file used to launch Fluent Aero on a
Slurm type machine. This is only shown as an example, as each machine may need its own custom
script.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 449
Fluent Aero

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
450 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Python API and Console

3.16. Python API and Console

3.16.1. Python Console

Many of Fluent Aero's features and settings can be accessed and changed from the console using
Python commands.

Many of the commands and settings done in Fluent Aero panels can be recorded to python commands,
by using the File → Start Journal menu, and can also be executed through the File → Read Script
File… menu.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 451
Fluent Aero

The same commands can then be used to automate Fluent Aero, by launching it in batch mode, as
described in Batch Launching (p. 442).

Python Console & Operations

The Console window at the bottom right of Fluent Aero permits you to enter commands interactively.
The following sections describe example commands available in the Python console.

dir() and the command/attribute list

dir()

Display the list of global commands and top-level objects.

'AddSession', 'Project', 'ReadScriptFile', 'Sim', 'StartTranscript', 'StopTranscript', 'csim'

dir(object)

Display the list of commands & attributes of the object.

Example 3.2: Entering Commands Interactively (Assuming airfoil-demo is already loaded)

dir(Sim[“airfoil-demo”])

dir(Sim[“airfoil-demo”])

'AeroWorkflow', 'Connect', 'ConnectionInfo', 'Disconnect', ‘SendCommand’

r= csim()

A temporary variable can be used to simplify command lines.

dir(r.AeroWorkflow.Setup.GeometricProperties)

'DomainType', 'DragDir', 'LiftDir', ‘RefArea', 'RefLength', `RefreshBCs’

Accessing/Changing values

The () operator will return the current value of the attribute.

Result: 1

The= operator will set the current value of the attribute.

r.AeroWorkflow.Setup.GeometricProperties.RefArea= 0.05

Commands

If an item listed in dir() is a verb, it is a command. For example:

r.AeroWorkflow.Setup.GeometricProperties.RefreshBCs()

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
452 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Python API and Console

Sample Script

Note:

The following two lines are equivalent when connected to a single simulation, therefore,
csim() can be used as a shorthand operation:

• r = RemoteSession[“RemoteSession1”]

• r = csim()

3.16.2. Data Structure Hierarchy

Fluent Aero’s object data structure (accessible from the python console) is organized similarly to the
object nodes shown in the Outline View. The first level is the simulation session id (example: “Re-
moteSession1”, or r=RemoteSession[“RemoteSession1”], or r=csim()], followed by
the Fluent Aero workflow container object [example: r.AeroWorkflow()]. After that, most of the
objects and commands are organized exactly like shown in the Outline View, following the structure:

• RemoteSession (Simulation)

– AeroWorkflow

→ Setup

• GeometricProperties

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 453
Fluent Aero

• AirflowPhysics

• SimulationConditions

• ComponentGroups

→ Solution

• Files

• Solve

→ Results

• Project

• PostAnalysis

3.16.3. Global Functions API

• croot ()

Returns the current RemoteSession. If multiple Fluent connections exist, the current is related
to the current selection in the Outline View.

• csim()

Returns the croot().Case.App of the current simulation.

• fcmd(cmd)

Execute a command in the current remote Fluent session. This can be used to execute Fluent style
Text User Interface commands in the Fluent solver.

Example: fcmd("/define/beta-feature-access yes ok")

• feval(cmd)

Execute a command in the current remote Fluent session and return the result. This can be used
to execute Fluent style Text User Interface commands in the Fluent solver.

3.16.4. Project API

The project framework is the top level container for all your simulation data, and it is the first thing
that must be accessed after opening Fluent Aero. A project must first be created or loaded before
any simulation is created, loaded or run. These operations can be preformed from the File menu, or
the Project ribbon. However, they can also be performed by using the Project API commands, which
can be typed directly into the python console, or loaded from a python journal file. Project operations
are defined in the Project object. To use a project API, type Project followed by the command
name, [example: Project.close()]. If an operation fails, it will throw an exception. Below is a list
of some of the most common Project API commands that can be used.

• Project

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
454 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Python API and Console

– new("filename")

Create a new project file in the specified path/filename, the path must be available. For
example, Project.new("/tmp/DEMO") will create /tmp/DEMO.flprj and
/tmp/DEMO.cffdb/

– open("filename")

Open an existing project file.

– close()

Close the current project.

– erase("filename")

Erase the specified project, filename.flprj and filename.cffcb folder recursively.

– isOpen()

Returns True if a project is currently opened.

– getURL()

Returns the project file (.flprj) with full path.

– getFolder()

Returns the full path of the project folder (cffdb).

– openSimulation("name")

Load the specified simulation, by name, from the current project. Fluent is launched with the
default.

– newAeroWorkflow("file.cas")

Create a new simulation, importing the case file (.cas or .cas.h5, with path) to the project.
This is equivalent to using the ribbon option New Aero Workflow, with default options.

– saveCase()

Save the current settings to the case file (similar to File → Save Case)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 455
Fluent Aero

3.16.5. Post Analysis API (Beta)

When using Fluent Aero in graphical mode (not in pure batch mode), the python environment provides
full access to the graphical capabilities of the Post-Analysis module. The PostAnalysis python
module offers the related services.

Note:

Journaling capabilities for Post-Analysis are limited, and not all graphical operations will
be recorded (camera configuration and movements, viewports, etc.)

Sample Usage
m = PostAnalysis.LoadCase(Filename=”naca.01.cas.h5”)
d = PostAnalysis.LoadResult(Filename1=”out.0001.cas”,Filename2=”out.0002.dat”,FieldName=”Mach”)
PostAnalysis.DisplaySettings.RestoreView(ViewName="bottom")
PostAnalysis.Dataset[m].Case.Results.Graphics.Mesh["Mesh1"].Options.Edges = True PostAnalysis.Dataset[m].Case.Resu
PostAnalysis.DisplaySettings.RestoreView(ViewName="front") PostAnalysis.Dataset[d].Case.Results.Graphics.Mesh["Con

• PostAnalysis

– Init()

Initialize the post-processing framework (this will open the EnSight process and consume a post-
processing license). Automatically invoked as required if LoadCase or LoadResult are used.

– LoadCase(Filename="file.cas.h5”)

Loads the specified case or mesh file. The return value is the identifier of the newly loaded
dataset and can be used as a key in the PostAnalysis.Dataset[key] index. .cas, and
.cas.h5 can be loaded.

– LoadResult(Filename1="file.cas.h5”,Filename2=”file.dat.h5”)

LoadResult(Filename1="file.cas.h5”,Filename2=”file.dat.h5”,FieldName=”Fieldname”)

Loads the specified case and result. The return value is the identifier of the newly loaded dataset
and can be used as a key in the PostAnalysis.Dataset[key] index. The .cas / .dat,
.cas.h5 / .dat.h5, .cas.fsp /.dat.fsp must be loaded in matching pairs. If a FieldName
is provided, the specified field Dataset (Dictionary of loaded datasets - keys() returns the
list of dataset identifiers.

– Dataset[key].Case.Results

Object containing the dataset’s graphical elements and their settings. Use the () operator to
query the content.

– DisplaySettings

Object containing the viewports and their display settings. Use the () operator to query the
content, and dir() to get the list of available commands.

– GlobalScene

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
456 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Object containing the scenes and their display settings. Use the () operator to query the content.

3.17. Appendix

3.17.1. Settings Files: run.settings and projectname.flprj

Two files are used to store the simulation and design point settings; the run.settings file and
the projectname.flprj. The following section describes the breakdown of which settings that
are included in each file.

run.settings File Stored Settings

Inside the Results folder of every Fluent Aero simulation is a run.settings file that contains settings
related to the setup of the boundary zones and the Component Groups step. The run.settings
file includes the following settings:

• Datamodel settings used by the Geometric Properties, Airflow Physics, Simulation Conditions,
Component Groups and Solve steps associated with the Results folder in each simulation.

– These settings will be saved to the [projectname].flprj project file when calculating
results.

– The settings contained in this file will then be used to re-populate the datamodel settings
for each of these steps in the Outline View when reconnecting to a previous simulation.

– These values will be used by Fluent Aero to check to see if any design points need to be
set to Needs Update when the datamodel step input value has changed.

• Datamodel settings used by the Geometric Properties, Simulation Conditions, Component

Groups and Solve steps, all table values in the Input: Design Points table, and all table values
used to fill the output tables such as the Table:Coefficients and Table:Forces, etc, associated with
the Results folder in each simulation.

– These settings will be saved to the run.settings file when calculating results.

– The settings contained in this file will then be used to re-populate all datamodel settings in the
Outline View and all values in the Input: Design Points table when reconnecting to a previous
simulation.

– The settings contained in this file will also be used to re-populate any relevant metadata in the
Project View and projectname.flprj file when reconnecting to a previous simulation.

– These values will be used by Fluent Aero to see if any design points needs to be set to Needs
Update when any input parameter have changed.

– Notably, if you change the name or type of a zone after Results have been calculated, the
run.settings file will be deleted, and should be re-saved. See Modifying a Zone Type or Name
under Modifying Settings After Results Have Been Calculated (p. 343) for more information.

A few portions of an example run.settings file that was opened using a text editor, is shown in
the image below. Some relevant information that can be found in the file:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 457
Fluent Aero

1. AeroWorkflow:

Contains the settings taken directly from the Datamodel of the Outline View, including the
Geometric Properties, Simulation Conditions, and Solve nodes.

2. BC:BC#:

Boundary Condition objects which contain settings associated with each Boundary shown in the
Component Groups step of the Outline View.

3. DP:DP#:

Design point objects which contain settings associated with each design point, including their
input and output parameters, which are shown in the Input: Design Points table and the output
tables such as Table:Coefficients and Table:Forces.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
458 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 459
Fluent Aero

[projectname].flprj file stored settings

Every Fluent Aero project is defined by a project folder [projectname].cffdb, which is a directory
that contains all the simulation folders and files, and a project file [projectname].flprj, which
is an XML format file that contains information about the files contained in the project folder including
their dependencies, location, and additional metadata useful to each item.

Settings contained within the project file metadata can be considered one of the following two types:

1. Project management settings, such as settings related to the file structure, file dependencies, release
information, and historical information, etc., associated with each object.

• These settings are solely contained and managed within the [projectname].flprj file.

• This information is used to judge file order or connections as necessary when different types
of actions are performed, such as post-processing or continuing to calculate, where file depend-
encies become important.

An example of some project management settings associated with a simulation folder called Air-
craft_Demo, as shown in the [projectname].flprj file and in the Project View Properties
panel, is shown below.

Figure 3.8: [projectname].flprj File, Detail Showing Portion of aircraft_demo Simulation

Folder

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
460 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.9: Project Metadata, Detail Showing Portion of aircraft_demo Simulation Folder

2. Simulation settings, such as settings related to the simulation and design point conditions, settings,
inputs and outputs.

• These settings are primarily contained within the run.settings file, but are also shown in
the [projectname].flprj file to allow you to easily view these items from the project
metadata by selecting the Properties of an item in the Project View.

• When reconnecting to a simulation, the run.settings file will be used to overwrite the values
in the [projectname].flprj file, so that they are always consistent.

An example of some simulation settings associated with a DP folder called DP-1, as shown in the
run.settings file, the [projectname].flprj file and in the Project View Properties
panel, is shown below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 461
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.10: run.settings File, Detail Showing Portion of Input Conditions of the DP-1 Folder

Figure 3.11: [projectname].flprj File, Detail Showing Portion of Input Conditions of the DP-1
Folder

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
462 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.12: Project Metadata, Detail Showing Portion of Input Conditions of the DP-1 Folder

3.17.2. Release Version Compatibility

In the Properties panel and metadata of each Fluent Aero simulation, a ReleaseID is stored which
shows the release that was used to create the simulation. Furthermore, if a development version was
used to create the simulation, a PatchID may also be present.

In the image below, the example simulation was created using the Fluent Aero 2022 R1 release, and
therefore, a ReleaseID of 22.1 is shown.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 463
Fluent Aero

Forward Compatibility Is Not Supported

Fluent Aero simulations are not forward compatible, for example, a Fluent Aero project and a simulation
created in a more recent version of Fluent Aero cannot be opened or loaded in an older version of
Fluent Aero, as it is possible that the data structure has changed between release versions.

Backward Compatibility: Upgrading and Loading an Old Simulation in a New Re-

lease Version
Fluent Aero simulations that were created in a previous version of Fluent Aero may need to be up-
graded to support new data structures of new versions. When you try to load a Fluent Aero simulation
created in an older release, a window may appear asking if you would like to upgrade the simulation
to the new release version.

After the upgrade is complete, the simulation may be used in the new release version. Since unintended
changes could take place to a simulation, it is always advisable to first create a backup copy of the
simulation files before performing the upgrade.

In situations where a significant version upgrade is not required, a popup may not appear.

3.17.3. Default Properties of Supported Mixtures and Constituent Species

in Fluent Aero
When either Air – 5 Species, Air – 11 Species (Park), Air – 11 Species (Gupta) or Mars – 8 Species
is selected, Fluent Aero will enable species, set the default species model settings in the Solution

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
464 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

workspace and import the air-5species-park93, air-11species-park93, air-11species-gupta or

mars8species-park mixture. Mixture and species properties are set by the two-temperature model
and can be viewed in the background solver session, within the Create/Edit Materials dialog under
Setup → Materials after selecting a mixture in Fluent Aero. In this case, only the material prop-
erties of air-5species-park93 and mars-8species-park are summarized.

Properties of air-5species-park93 and Its Constituent Species

The following describes the properties of the air-5species-park93 when the Two Temperature
model is Enabled. See Figure 3.13:Mixture Properties for air-5species-park93 with the Two-Tem-
perature Model Enabled (p. 465)

Figure 3.13: Mixture Properties for air-5species-park93 with the Two-Temperature Model Enabled

The air-5species-park93 mixture contains 5 fluid-phase species: atomic-nitrogen (n), oxygen (o2),
atomic-oxygen (o), nitrogen-oxide (no) and nitrogen (n2), as shown in Figure 3.14: Constituent
Species of air-5species-park93 (p. 466). The properties of each species are shown in these figures:

• Figure 3.15: Species Properties of Atomic-Nitrogen (n) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 467)

• Figure 3.16: Species Properties of Atomic-Oxygen (o) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 468)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 465
Fluent Aero

• Figure 3.17: Species Properties of Nitrogen-Oxide (no) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 469)

• Figure 3.18: Species Properties of Oxygen (o2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 470)

• Figure 3.19: Species Properties of Nitrogen (n2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 471)

Figure 3.14: Constituent Species of air-5species-park93

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
466 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.15: Species Properties of Atomic-Nitrogen (n) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 467
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.16: Species Properties of Atomic-Oxygen (o) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
468 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.17: Species Properties of Nitrogen-Oxide (no) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 469
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.18: Species Properties of Oxygen (o2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
470 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.19: Species Properties of Nitrogen (n2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Reaction Mechanisms

The default reaction mechanisms of the air-5species-park93 mixture are used by Fluent Aero. These
are shown in:

• Figure 3.20: Reaction Mechanisms (p. 472)

• Figure 3.21: Properties of Reaction - 1 (p. 472)

• Figure 3.22: Properties of Reaction - 2 (p. 473)

• Figure 3.23: Properties of Reaction - 3 (p. 474)

• Figure 3.24: Properties of Reaction - 4 (p. 475)

• Figure 3.25: Properties of Reaction - 5 (p. 476)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 471
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.20: Reaction Mechanisms

Figure 3.21: Properties of Reaction - 1

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
472 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.22: Properties of Reaction - 2

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 473
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.23: Properties of Reaction - 3

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
474 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.24: Properties of Reaction - 4

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 475
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.25: Properties of Reaction - 5

Properties of mars-8species-park and Its Constituent Species

The following describes the properties of the mars-8species-park when the Two Temperature
model is Enabled, Figure 3.26: Mixture Properties for mars-8species-park with the Two-Temperature
Model Enabled (p. 477).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
476 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.26: Mixture Properties for mars-8species-park with the Two-Temperature Model Enabled

The mars-8species-park mixture contains 8 fluid-phase species: carbon-monoxide (co), oxygen (o2),
carbon (c), atomic-oxygen (o), carbon-dioxide (co2), nitrogen-oxide (no), atomic-nitrogen (n) and
nitrogen (n2), as shown in Figure 3.27: Constituent Species of mars-8species-park (p. 478). The prop-
erties of each species imposed by the two-temperature model are shown in the following figures:

• Figure 3.28: Species Properties of Carbon-Monoxide (co) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 479)

• Figure 3.30: Species Properties of Oxygen (o2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 481)

• Figure 3.29: Species Properties of Carbon (c) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 480)

• Figure 3.31: Species Properties of Atomic-Oxygen (o) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 482)

• Figure 3.32: Species Properties of Carbon-Dioxide (co2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 483)

• Figure 3.33: Species Properties of Nitrogen-Oxide (no) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 484)

• Figure 3.34: Species Properties of Atomic-Nitrogen (n) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 485)

• Figure 3.35: Species Properties of Nitrogen (n2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model (p. 486)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 477
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.27: Constituent Species of mars-8species-park

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
478 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.28: Species Properties of Carbon-Monoxide (co) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 479
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.29: Species Properties of Carbon (c) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
480 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.30: Species Properties of Oxygen (o2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 481
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.31: Species Properties of Atomic-Oxygen (o) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
482 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.32: Species Properties of Carbon-Dioxide (co2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 483
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.33: Species Properties of Nitrogen-Oxide (no) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
484 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.34: Species Properties of Atomic-Nitrogen (n) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 485
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.35: Species Properties of Nitrogen (n2) Set by the Two-Temperature Model

Reaction Mechanisms

The default reaction mechanisms of the mars-8species-park mixture are used by Fluent Aero. These
are shown in:

• Figure 3.36: Reaction Mechanisms (p. 487)

• Figure 3.37: Properties of Reaction - 1 (p. 488)

• Figure 3.38: Properties of Reaction - 2 (p. 489)

• Figure 3.39: Properties of Reaction - 3 (p. 490)

• Figure 3.40: Properties of Reaction - 4 (p. 491)

• Figure 3.41: Properties of Reaction - 5 (p. 492)

• Figure 3.42: Properties of Reaction - 6 (p. 493)

• Figure 3.43: Properties of Reaction - 7 (p. 494)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
486 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

• Figure 3.44: Properties of Reaction - 8 (p. 495)

• Figure 3.44: Properties of Reaction - 8 (p. 495)

• Figure 3.45: Properties of Reaction - 9 (p. 496)

Figure 3.36: Reaction Mechanisms

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 487
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.37: Properties of Reaction - 1

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
488 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.38: Properties of Reaction - 2

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 489
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.39: Properties of Reaction - 3

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
490 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.40: Properties of Reaction - 4

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 491
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.41: Properties of Reaction - 5

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
492 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.42: Properties of Reaction - 6

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 493
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.43: Properties of Reaction - 7

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
494 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Appendix

Figure 3.44: Properties of Reaction - 8

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 495
Fluent Aero

Figure 3.45: Properties of Reaction - 9

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
496 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 4: Fluent Materials Processing Workspace
You are able to simulate various types of polymer material processes (for example, extrusion and
blowmolding) within the Fluent Materials Processing workspace environment.

This chapter describes the Fluent Materials Processing workspace. Information is organized into the
following sections:
4.1. Introduction
4.2. Getting Started
4.3. Starting and Exiting the Workspace
4.4. Reading and Writing Files
4.5. Choosing Your Simulation Type
4.6. Choosing a Simulation Template
4.7. Using the Simulation Wizard
4.8. Setting Up Your Simulation
4.9. Setting Solution Options
4.10. Postprocessing Results
4.11. Rheometry
4.12. Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Note:

There are several tutorials and several examples available that illustrate how to use the
workspace.

4.1. Introduction
The Fluent Materials Processing workspace is a means to explore manufacturing applications of highly
viscous materials such as polymer extrusion, blowmolding, fiber spinning, etc. within the Fluent envir-
onment. Many of the models and concepts in this workspace are based onFluent Materials Processing,
details of which can be found in the Fluent Materials Processing documentation (Polyflow User's Guide).
4.1.1. General Overview of the Workspace
4.1.2. Program Capabilities
4.1.3. Installation and Licensing Requirements
4.1.4. Known Limitations
4.1.5. Graphical User Interface (GUI)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 497
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.1.1. General Overview of the Workspace

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace is a finite-element program primarily designed for the
analysis of industrial flow processes dominated by nonlinear viscous phenomena and viscoelastic effects
under various conditions. The work environment provides an easy access to most of the features
available intoFluent Materials Processing software of which it is the successor.

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace is used in a wide variety of applications, including polymer
and rubber processing, food rheology, glass pressing, and many other cases involving the flow of
non-Newtonian fluids. These several applications, steady or transient, are essentially described by
means of appropriate geometry, material models and suitable boundary conditions, and can be
combined with thermal effects.

• Geometry

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace allows you to setup both 2D, 3D and shell cases,
where the geometric context is specified by providing a finite element mesh with the required
dimension. Providing a 2D mesh in the XY-plane enables several possibilities. Indeed, next to
the usual 2D planar and 2D axisymmetric cases, a 2D mesh can also be the geometric support
for 2D channel and swirling cases, that is, cases involving three velocity components depending
on two space variables. If the workspace detects a surface in the space, a (transient) shell
model will be activated.

• Rheology - Fluid Properties

In terms of fluid models, the theoretical foundation of the workspace is provided by the gen-
eral principles of continuum mechanics, together with phenomenological or kinetic theoretical
models for describing the rheological behaviour of the fluid. More precisely, processed mater-
ials are usually characterised by shear-thinning, and it is often the primary property to be
considered. Other properties may develop, and they may have a more or less visible effect on
the flow, depending on the context; one may mention here the first normal stress difference
which develops in shear flows, the elongation viscosity, which develops in stretching deform-
ations, and whose visible consequence is often strain hardening. For describing these properties,
a relatively broad spectrum of fluid models is available in the workspace, and encompasses
the generalized Newtonian inelastic fluid models as well as viscoelastic models.

Summarily, the generalized Newtonian inelastic models are available for all applications; differ-
ential viscoelastic models as well as the simplified viscoelastic model are available for 2D and
3D cases, but do not support support flows with restrictors; eventually integral viscoelastic
models are available for blow moulding and thermoforming applications when the shell
model is involved. At this level, you have the opportunity to read a material file from a library
of fluid models, or to specify your own material and possibly to save it into a local library of
material data files.

In addition, there are a few other flow models, such as foaming, coextrusion, or reinforcements,
etc. that are introduced in the appropriate sections.

• Heat Transfer

All setups can also be defined under thermal conditions. In this case, thermal properties will
also be specified, as well as temperature dependence of fluid properties. Conjugated heat
transfer between fluid and the fixed or moving solid can also be calculated.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
498 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

• Boundary Conditions

In terms of boundary conditions, the workspace offers a broad spectrum of possibilities, enabling
the description of several applications. For fluid flows, the most typical boundary conditions
are inlets, outlets, fixed or moving walls with or without slipping along the wall, free surfaces,
plane of symmetry.

Under thermal conditions, thermal boundary conditions such as assigned temperature or heat
flux can be imposed.

• Convergence Strategies

When modeling industrial flows of rheologically complex materials, you often face non-linear-
ities that have multiple origins. The most often encountered non-linearities originate from:

– the rheology with the dependence of properties with respect to the local kinematic,

– the thermal effects with viscous heating and transport of temperature, and

– the free surface boundary condition that dictates the deformation of an extrudate and
leads to an interaction between velocity and shape.

Other sources of non-linearities do exist, while you should note that these many non-
linearities are often combined.

Handling non-linearities is often challenging. Hence, for facilitating the setup and for allowing
you to focus on the flow model, convergence strategies are made available. You simply have
to enable them as appropriate. Application-specific usage of such strategies is provided in the
corresponding sections.

All these components, geometry, material model, boundary conditions, define a given application.
The Fluent Materials Processing workspace is purposely designed to take these components and to
assist you in setting up a simulation. The sections below describe the different applications that can
be set up with the workspace and also specifies the context and the limitations.

4.1.2. Program Capabilities

The workspace supports the following features:

• Extrusion / Coextrusion / Fiber spinning

• Blow Molding / Thermoforming

• Pressing / Forming

• Film Casting

• Filling

The supported geometry types include:

• 2D planar, 2D axisymmetric, 2D channel, 2D swirl, and 2D film

• Shell

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 499
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• 3D

The supported model attributes include the following:

• Generalized Newtonian (isothermal & thermal)

• Viscoelasticity

• Foaming

The supported solver attributes include the following:

• Steady-state

• Time-dependent / Transient

• Continuation

4.1.3. Installation and Licensing Requirements

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace requires the following components.

• CFD-Enterprise, CFD-Premium, or CFD-Pro license

• Ansys Polyflow

• Ansys EnSight

• A valid %HOME% environment variable assignment

4.1.3.1. License-Specific Capabilities

Fluent Materials Processing is available at three different licensing levels, controlling the availability
of various features and functionalities:

• Enterprise—full access to all capabilities (along with those CFD Premium and CFD Pro features),
including:

– Mesh Superposition Technique (MST)

– Volume of Fluid (VOF)

– Filling

– Viscoelasticity & all material models with yield stress

– Porous media

– 2D & 3D contact

• Premium—full access to the following capabilities:

– Extrusion/coextrusion (interface and species)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
500 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

– Blow molding

– Thermoforming

– Film Casting

– Constant viscosity and generalized non-Newtonian models (excludes Bingham, modified

Bingham, Herschel-Bulkley, modified Herschel-Bulkley)

– Link to Mechanical

– Temperature

– Material fitting

– Shell contact

– Starting from initial results

– Free surface boundary conditions

• Pro—(equivalent to Premium)

4.1.4. Known Limitations

Note:

The following limitations are known for the Fluent Materials Processing workspace:

– Foaming cannot be combined with multiple materials and/or transport of species

and/or generalized expressions defined on material properties.

– If an expression is defined on density, you cannot impose a mass flow rate at the
inlets and/or the outlets.

• When using a limited Academic License, you cannot load a mesh containing more than 1,000,000
elements.

4.1.5. Graphical User Interface (GUI)

The graphical user interface (GUI) of Fluent Materials Processing is very similar to the solution mode
of Fluent, in that:

• it includes a ribbon, an outline view, a graphics window, a console, toolbars, dialog boxes, and
quick search (as described in GUI Components in the Fluent User's Guide).

• it can be modified (as described in Customizing the Graphical User Interface in the Fluent User's
Guide).

• it can be set to match your preferences (as described in Setting User Preferences/Options in the
Fluent User's Guide). Preferences specific to the Fluent Materials Processing workspace are described
in Setting Preferences for Fluent Materials Processing (p. 507).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 501
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• it has access to the help system (as described in Using the Help System in the Fluent User's Guide).

When setting up your simulation, the majority of your actions will start by performing actions in the
Ribbon or the Outline View, and the associated Properties panels.

4.1.5.1. Using the Ribbon

The workspace Ribbon represents a horizontal workflow, and is structured similarly to, and interacts
with, elements of the Outline View. As you progress from left to right, creating or editing objects
(such as create a New... or Edit... an existing object from the Fluid Boundary Condition item),
elements of the ribbon become available, and objects become visible in the Outline View.

In the Ribbon, the simulation can be defined by adding objects from the Setup section of the ribbon.

Solution-specific options are accessible from the Solution section

Data from a complete simulation can be analyzed by adding objects in the Results section. This
includes predefined, Quick-view postprocessing objects such as Velocity, Pressure, or Temperature
(if applicable) contour plots. In addition, for shell and film applications, Thickness is also available
as a quick-view postprocessing object such that, if there are several layers present, you can show
the total thickness of all layers, and if there is only a single layer, you can easily plot its thickness.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
502 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

4.1.5.2. Using the Outline View

In the Outline View, the simulation can be defined by adding objects to the Setup section of the
tree, solution-specific options are accessible from the Solution section, while the data from a sim-
ulation can be analyzed by adding objects in the Results section.

You can perform wildcard and regular expression searches in the tree using the filter text entry box
at the top of the tree where you can search and organize a list using a text string. The text string
can include wildcards and regular expressions, which allow you to perform pattern matching. For
example, searching *let* finds surfaces such as inlets and outlets, including those with longer
names, such as "upper-inlet-5". If you have walls separated by a number, you can search example-
wall-?-23, which would show example-wall-1-23, example-wall-2-23, and so on. Fil-
tering begins as soon as you enter text. Clicking Enter expands any sub-branches containing matches
to the entered string.

Icons help you visualize the status of an object in the Outline View. For instance, represents

the state of an object whose inputs are fully defined, whereas represents the state where an
object still requires attention, providing you with a quick visualization of the state of your simulation
setup. In addition, under Solution indicates that the solution must be calculated.

Right-click an item in the Outline View and use the menu that opens to perform a function (such
as create a New... object from the Fluid Boundary Condition item); and you can left-click an item
to open a related Properties window.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 503
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.1.5.3. Using the Properties Window

The Properties windows are similar to task pages or dialog boxes, in that they allow you to define
settings, run the calculation, and postprocess results. Note that your settings are saved as you define
them in a Properties window, unlike dialog boxes (which you may open from the Outline View
or settings in the Properties window) which require you to click an Ok button.

Figure 4.1: The Properties Window for a Boundary

Properties that require your attention will be highlighted in red. Valid inputs will be highlighted in
green.

In most cases, explanatory text and/or informational messages can appear at the top of the property
window in order to guide you through your workflow.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
504 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

Note:

Field-level user assistance (available by hovering next to a field and clicking on the
field's exposed help icon - ) is available for many fields of the workspace, however,
it is not available on Linux, or when using ACT.

4.1.5.4. Using the Graphics Window

The graphics window lets you visualize the mesh that you have read into the Fluent Materials Pro-
cessing workspace. Depending on the task, the graphics window will be updated to show relevant
information. For example, when you are setting flow boundary conditions, the mesh outline will
be shown and the selected boundary set will change color.

Figure 4.2: Mesh Display in the Graphics Window

Use the toolbars to manipulate the model view and to change various sub-window (or viewport)
settings (see Using the Toolbars (p. 508)). You can also use the mouse to manipulate the view of

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 505
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

the model in the graphics window. Graphics window colors and mouse mappings can be customized
to your liking using preferences (see Setting Preferences for Fluent Materials Processing (p. 507)).

Additional visual indicators are employed to convey even more information, if applicable, such as:

• Zone highlighting and identification when hovering over and/or selecting a zone

• Arrows (also known as boundary markers) indicating flow direction. For instance, red arrows
indicate flow direction for outlets, blue arrows indicate flow direction for inlets, and gray
arrows indicate the side of the mold body for shell geometries. In addition, blue darts on
fluid cell zones for shell geometries indicate the direction of the applied inflation pressure.

• Small, semi-transparent spheres indicating the location of the probes, pressure assignment,
displacement assignment

• Semi-transparent planes, along the boundary line (for shell geometries with symmetry planes)
or at a specified point (for guiding devices such as conveyors), oriented following the specified
normal

• Semi-transparent boundaries, boxes, or spheres for adaptive meshing zones, depending on

their type, size, and location.

4.1.5.5. Using the Console Window

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace provides a console window that displays useful inform-
ation about your setup and solution, such as licensing details, your working directory, messages,
and other details related to your work, in addition to access to Python scripting.

Note:

The console window in the Fluent Materials Processing workspace does not provide access
to a text user interface (TUI) as it does in the Fluent Solution workspace

Note:

While you can enter Python commands directly in the console, ideally, you should instead
read Python commands directly from a journal file, as this allows for each command to
complete before the next command is executed. This is especially important for interde-
pendent commands. Typing or pasting a series of Python commands directly into the
console could result in undesirable behavior, as there is no waiting for the previous
command to complete before the next command is executed.

The console window provides configurable access to warning and error messages, as described in
The Console in the Fluent User's Guide for the Fluent Solution workspace.

Use the "arrange the workspace" drop-down ( ) in the upper-right of the workspace window
to dock (minimize) or tab the console within a separate dialog:

• Dock or minimize the console by selecting the Console>Minimize option

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
506 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

• Tab the console alongside warning and errors tabs in the Messages dialog box by selecting
the Console> In Message Window option.

Access the Messages dialog box using the icon ( ) located in the lower right hand corner
of the workspace.

4.1.5.6. Setting Preferences for Fluent Materials Processing

You can specify global settings that are applied whenever you are operating in Fluent Materials
Processing. These settings are case-independent and are controlled using the Preferences dialog
box.

File → Preferences...

Figure 4.3: Preferences Dialog Box - Materials Processing

Preferences specific to the Fluent Materials Processing workspace can be found under Materials
Processing.

• The Automatic focus on part of the outline view option, enabled by default, automatically
collapses the Outline View for the other nodes when they are not in focus. For instance, if
you are navigating through the Setup node of the tree, then the Solution and Results node
are automatically collapsed for easier viewing of overly-populated tree structures.

• The More verbosity option lets you increase the level of detail present in messages and
informational text displayed the transcripts generated by the workspace.

• The Beta features option exposes features that are not yet fully supported.

• The Tracking outputs option

• The Mesh options drop-down list lets you determine an optimal method for managing
mesh objects. You can choose to use

– Standard naming, creates and displays mesh objects in the Outline View using a
standard naming convention format (for example, mesh-1, mesh-2, mesh-3, and so
forth).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 507
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

– Topology based naming (default), creates and displays mesh objects in the Outline
View using a naming convention based on the topology names found in the mesh
file, with a maximum of 40 characters (for example inlet, outlet, freesurface+wall,
and so forth).

– User meshes only, displays only your own mesh objects in the Outline View and
makes them available for use in scenes, etc. (with the exceptions the Mesh Outline
and the Mesh Boundaries Selection mesh objects).

• The Check Expressions group contains the available variables that can be used in expressions,
and default values that can be adjusted accordingly.

Important:

The following Mouse Mappings settings (under Navigation) are not supported by the
Fluent Materials Processing workspace:

• Select Toggle

• Box Select Toggle

• Probe

• Box Select Add

• Box Select

• Set View Center

• Show Menu or Probe

Note:

Many of the preferences apply to the Fluent Solution workspace, and some apply to the
Meshing workspace, while still others apply to their specific workspaces or workflows
within Fluent. Other preferences, such as themes and generated file locations can be
applied to all workspaces. For more general information about Fluent preferences, see
Setting User Preferences/Options

4.1.5.7. Using the Toolbars

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace includes toolbars located within the application window.
These toolbars provide shortcuts to performing common tasks in the workspace.

4.1.5.7.1. Pointer Tools

The pointer tools allow you to modify the way in which you view your model or select objects
in the graphics window. The following is a description of each of the pointer tools:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
508 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

• Rotate View lets you rotate your model about a central point in the graphics window.
For more information, see Controlling the Mouse Button Functions.

• Pan allows you to pan horizontally or vertically across the view using the left mouse
button. For more information, see Controlling the Mouse Button Functions.

• Zoom In/Out allows you to zoom in to and out of the model by holding the left mouse
button down and moving the mouse down or up. For more information, see Controlling the
Mouse Button Functions. You can also roll the view by holding the left mouse button down
and moving the mouse left or right.

• Zoom to Area allows you to focus on any part of your model. After selecting this option,
position the mouse pointer at a corner of the area to be magnified, hold down the left mouse
button and drag open a box to the desired size, and then release the mouse button. The en-
closed area will then fill the graphics window. Note that you must drag the mouse to the right
in order to zoom in. To zoom out, you must drag the mouse to the left. For more information,
see Controlling the Mouse Button Functions.

4.1.5.7.2. View Tools

The view tools allow you to modify the way your model is displayed in the graphics window. The
following is a description of each of the view tools:

• Perspective or Orthographic View shows the 3D object on your 2D screen approximately

how your eye would see it in real life. This button is only available when running the workspace
in 3D.

shows 3D objects to scale, ignoring perspective view. When enabled, it makes it so the
ruler is accurate. This button is only available when running the workspace in 3D.

• Fit to Window adjusts the overall size of your model to take maximum advantage of the
graphics window’s width and height.

• Last View allows you to revert to the displayed object's previous location and orientation
in the graphics window.

• Next View allows you to proceed to the displayed object's next location and orientation
in the graphics window, given a collection of views provided by the use of the Last View tool

( ).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 509
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• Set view contains a drop-down of views, allowing you to display the model from the
direction of the vector equidistant to all three axes, as well as in different axes orientations.

4.1.5.7.3. Viewport Tools

The graphics window in the Fluent Materials Processing workspace consists of one or more
viewports where you can visualize your model and your results. A single viewport can be duplicated
and each can be arranged in different layouts, presenting different views of the same model, all
in a single graphics window. The following is a brief description of the available viewport arrange-
ment tools:

• Set Layout allows you to select from a collection of viewport arrangements.

• Set Active Viewport allows you to select a viewport and make it active.

• Link Viewports synchronizes the display of the selected viewports.

4.1.5.7.4. Visibility Tool

The visibility tool allow you to modify the appearance of objects in the graphics window. The
following is a brief description of the available visibility tool:

• Axes Visibility turns the axes display on and off.

4.1.5.7.5. The Standard Toolbar

The standard toolbar (Figure 4.4: The Standard Toolbar (p. 510)) contains options for getting help,
arranging the graphical user interface, and visiting the Ansys website.

Figure 4.4: The Standard Toolbar

The following is a brief description of each of the standard toolbar options:

• Help allows you to access the Fluent User's Guide for help topics. For more information,
see Using the Help System (p. 525).

• Arrange the workspace provides you with several application window layout options.
For example, you can choose to hide certain windows or have the graphics window be much
larger than the other elements. These options also allow you to return to a standard layout if
you accidentally rearrange (by dragging and dropping, or closing elements) the workspace in
an undesirable manner.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
510 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

• Link to the Ansys Website opens a link to the Ansys home page in your default
browser.

4.1.5.8. Tips for Using the Workspace

The following topics outline useful information about using the workspace.
4.1.5.8.1. Adding and Removing Objects in Your Simulation
4.1.5.8.2. Using Expressions in the Workspace

4.1.5.8.1. Adding and Removing Objects in Your Simulation

As you proceed to define your simulation setup, you will often need to add objects to refine the
simulation. Often, there are several ways to add objects to your simulation, whether it is using
the Outline View, the Ribbon, or the Properties panel.

For instance, to create a new condition for adaptive meshing, you can use either of the following
approaches:

• Using the Properties panel, at the bottom of the Adaptive Meshing properties, select the
Add a Condition button.

Setup → Adaptive Meshing

• Using the Outline View, with the context menu:

Setup → Adaptive Meshing Add a condition

or without the context menu:

Setup → Adaptive Meshing → Conditions → condition-1

• Using the Ribbon:

Setup → Adaptive Meshing → Condition → New

Of course, with the ability to add objects, you can also remove objects from your simulation using
the corresponding Delete option/button.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 511
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.1.5.8.2. Using Expressions in the Workspace

Fluent expressions are available when using the Fluent Materials Processing workspace. As de-
scribed in Fluent Expressions Language, Fluent expressions are an interpreted, declarative language
based on Python, enabling you to specify complex boundary conditions and/or model settings.

Note:

Units should not be included in any expressions used in the Fluent Materials
Processing workspace.

Note:

When using time as a variable in an expression, the variable must be called

"time" (in lower case) and cannot be abbreviated (say to use "t" instead).

You can customize the behavior of a quantity or property using expressions. If you are able to
apply an expression to a quantity or property in the workspace, a drop-down menu provides you
the choice of selecting a constant value or an expression. If you select expression, then you
are able to enter an expression using the Fluent expression language.

Figure 4.5: Accessing Expressions for Properties

4.1.5.8.2.1. Expressions for Transient Simulations

For transient simulations, expressions are allowed for the following scenarios, and for the fol-
lowing quantities:

Table 4.1: Expression-Supported Quantities for Transient Simulations

Condition Category Quantity Available Available Available

for for for
Transient? Continuation?
Volume
of
Fluid?
Solid cell Transport Vx yes
zone Velocity Vy yes
Vz yes
Mold cell Translation Vx yes
zone Velocity Vy yes
Vz yes
General Omega yes
Motion Vx yes

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
512 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

Condition Category Quantity Available Available Available

for for for
Transient? Continuation?
Volume
of
Fluid?
Vy yes
Vz yes
Fluid cell zone Volume Initial Fluid yes
Conservation Volume
Inflation Pressure Time yes
Dependency
Normal Flow Rate Volume Flow yes yes
Condition Rate
General Gravity Vector Gx yes yes
Gy yes yes
Gz yes yes
Inflow Volume Flow yes yes yes
Rate
Mass Flow yes yes yes
Rate
Normal yes yes yes
Velocity
Outflow Volume Flow yes yes yes
Rate
Mass Flow yes yes yes
Rate
Normal yes yes yes
Velocity
Pressure yes yes yes
Wall (partial Navier Law Friction yes yes yes
slip) Coefficient
Generalized Friction yes yes yes
Navier Law Coefficient
Threshold First Friction yes yes yes
Law Coefficient
Second yes yes yes
Friction
Coefficient
Generalized First Friction yes yes yes
Threshold Coefficient
Law Second yes yes yes
Friction
Coefficient

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 513
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Condition Category Quantity Available Available Available

for for for
Transient? Continuation?
Volume
of
Fluid?
Asymptotic Friction yes yes yes
Law Coefficient
Temperature Ea/R yes yes yes
Dependence
Extrudate exit Take-up Force per yes yes
Unit Area
Take-up Vx yes yes
Velocity Vy yes yes
Vz yes yes
Take-up Force Fx yes yes
Fy yes yes
Fz yes yes
Porous Wall Temperature Ea/R yes yes yes
Dependence
Thermal (for Temperature yes yes yes
fluid, solid, Heat Flux yes yes yes
and porous
boundary Heat Transfer yes yes yes
conditions) Coefficient
Convection yes yes yes
Temperature
Fluid/Solid Navier Law Friction yes yes yes
Interface Coefficient
Generalized Friction yes yes yes
Navier Law Coefficient
Threshold First Friction yes yes yes
Law Coefficient
Second yes yes yes
Friction
Coefficient
Generalized First Friction yes yes yes
Threshold Coefficient
Law Second yes yes yes
Friction
Coefficient
Asymptotic Friction yes yes yes
Law Coefficient

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
514 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

Condition Category Quantity Available Available Available

for for for
Transient? Continuation?
Volume
of
Fluid?
Temperature Ea/R yes yes yes
Dependence

Table 4.2: Expression-Supported Properties for Transient Simulations (Materials)

Property Category Quantity Available Available Available

for for for
Transient? Continuation?
Volume
of Fluid?
Viscosity Shear Power law Power Law yes yes yes
Law Dependency Index
Bird-Carreau Power Law yes yes yes
Law Index
Carreau-Yasuda Power Law yes yes yes
Law Index
Bingham Law Critical Shear yes yes yes
Rate
Modified Critical Shear yes yes yes
Bingham Law Rate
Herschel-Bulkley Power Law yes yes yes
Law Index
Critical Shear yes yes yes
Rate
Modified Power Law yes yes yes
Herschel-Bulkley Index
Law Critical Shear yes yes yes
Rate
Cross law Cross Law yes yes yes
Index
Modified Cross Cross Law yes yes yes
Law Index
Temperature Arrhenius Ea/R yes yes yes
dependence Approximate Ea/R yes yes yes
Arrhenius
Fulcher F2 yes yes yes
WLF C1 yes yes yes
Simplified Weighting yes yes yes
Viscoelastic Coefficient
Properties Shear Rate Power law Power Law yes yes yes
Dependency Index

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 515
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Property Category Quantity Available Available Available

for for for
Transient? Continuation?
Volume
of Fluid?
Bird-Carreau Power Law yes yes yes
Law Index
Carreau-Yasuda Power Law yes yes yes
Law Index
Cross law Cross Law yes yes yes
Index
Modified Cross Cross Law yes yes yes
Law Index
First Power law Power Law yes yes yes
Normal Index
Viscosity Bird-Carreau Power Law yes yes yes
Law Index
Carreau-Yasuda Power Law yes yes yes
Law Index
Cross law Cross Law yes yes yes
Index
Modified Cross Cross Law yes yes yes
Law Index
Relaxation Power law Expor yes yes yes
Time Law Bird-Carreau Expor yes yes yes
Law
Thermal Arrhenius Ea/R yes yes yes
Dependence Approximate Ea/R yes yes yes
Arrhenius
WLF C1 yes yes yes
Thermal Thermal A/K yes yes yes
Properties conductivity
Heat Capacity A / Cp yes yes yes
Viscosity Temperature Arrhenius Ea/R yes yes yes
Law in Dependence Approximate Ea/R yes yes yes
Porous Arrhenius
Medium
Integral Temperature Arrhenius Ea/R yes
Viscoelastic Dependence Approximate Ea/R yes
Properties Arrhenius
WLF C1 yes
Differential Temperature Arrhenius Ea/R yes yes yes
Viscoelastic Dependence Approximate Ea/R yes yes yes
Properties Arrhenius
WLF C1 yes yes yes

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
516 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

4.1.5.8.2.2. Expressions for Generalized Simulations

Often material properties are nonlinear algebraic functions of the primary field variables, such
as temperature, pressure, and chemical species, to name a few. The Fluent Materials Processing
workspace allows you to customize the definition of material properties by defining one or
more functions. This can be done by defining a Fluent expression on such properties (for ex-
ample, the heat capacity can be written as Cp = 200 + x * (T-300) * 10.

Generalized expressions can be functions of the following variables:

Variable Definition
Name
time Time
x, y, z The components of coordinates.
T Temperature
P Pressure
u, v, w The components of velocity.
cdot The first invariant of tensor D (compression rate).
gdot The second invariant of tensor D (the shear rate).
edot The third invariant of tensor D (the extension rate).
vorticity The magnitude of the vorticity tensor (the antisymmetric part of
the velocity gradient) is given by:

(4.1)

Giesekus The Giesekus function is defined as:

(4.2)

and ranges between -1 (rigid rotation) and 1 (pure extension). It equals 0

for a pure shear flow.
Dvv The magnitude of D in the direction of the velocity vector.

Note:

Variable names used in expressions should not be used as species nicknames.

Note:

Default values for these expression variables are provided in the Preferences dialog
box, (see Setting Preferences for Fluent Materials Processing (p. 507)) and can be
adjusted accordingly.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 517
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Generalized expressions (applicable to steady, transient, continuation and VOF simulations) can
be defined for the following properties:

Table 4.3: Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (General)

Category Quantity Available for Available Available Available

Steady? for for for
Transient? Continuation?
Volume
of
Fluid?
Gravity Gx yes yes yes yes
Gy yes yes yes yes
Gz yes yes yes yes

Table 4.4: Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (Materials)

Property Category Quantity AvailableAvailableAvailableAvailable

for for for for
Steady? Transient?Continuation?
Volume
of
Fluid?
Viscosity Law Constant Law Viscosity yes yes yes yes
Density Law Density yes yes yes yes
Simplified Viscosity Law / Viscosity yes yes yes yes
Viscoelastic Constant Law
Properties
Thermal Properties Thermal A/K yes yes yes yes
Conductivity
Heat Capacity A / Cp yes yes yes yes

Table 4.5: Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (Cell Zones)

Category Quantity Available Available Available Available

for for for for
Steady? Transient? Continuation?Volume of
Fluid?
2D Film / 2D Shell Heat Transfer yes yes yes yes
Coefficient
Convective yes yes yes yes
Temperature

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
518 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

Category Quantity Available Available Available Available

for for for for
Steady? Transient? Continuation?Volume of
Fluid?
Other Geometry Heat Source per yes yes yes yes
Types Unit Volume

Table 4.6: Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (Boundary Conditions - Thermal)

Category Quantity Available Available Available Available

for for for for
Steady? Transient? Continuation?Volume of
Fluid?
Fluid, Solid, Heat Transfer yes yes yes yes
Porous, Mold Coefficient
Convective yes yes yes yes
Temperature

Table 4.7: Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (Boundary Conditions - Species)

Category Quantity Available Available Available Available

for for for for
Steady? Transient? Continuation?Volume of
Fluid?
Fluid Transfer yes yes yes yes
Coefficient
Reference Species yes yes yes yes

Table 4.8: Generalized Expression-Supported Properties (Species)

Category Quantity Available Available Available Available

for for for for
Steady? Transient? Continuation?Volume of
Fluid?
Transport Source term yes yes yes yes
Scalar diffusivity yes yes yes yes

Note:

You should not define an expression on density for a solid, a porous medium, (fluid
and solid fractions), or a mold. If present, the workspace will detect such an expres-
sion while checking the simulation setup.

4.1.5.8.2.2.1. Modeling Compressible Flow Using Generalized Expressions

An expression can be applied to density to model a compressible flow. For such flows with
variable overall density, one has to solve the mass conservation equation. The overall density
is either treated as an additional variable or algebraically substituted. The treatment used de-
pends on the nature of the term to be evaluated: if a gradient must be computed, then the

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 519
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

density is considered as a variable; if an algebraic relationship must be computed, then the

density is simply substituted. The resulting formulation is a mixed method with an increase in
the number of unknown variables. This solution procedure, however, has several advantages.
The implementation is rather easy and, most importantly, it allows you to model an equation
of state of any kind while still keeping the Newton-Raphson rate of convergence. When the
density varies, velocity is no longer divergence-free, as it is for incompressible flows. Since mass
is conserved, the flow kinematics as well as the volume of the material may change dramatically.
For example, consider a problem in which the density decreases as chemical reactions proceed.
In a confined geometry, the fluid will accelerate; in a free surface problem, large swelling ratios
will be observed, and it may be useful to consider a gradual solution strategy using a continu-
ation technique to introduce this nonlinearity

Note:

If you define an expression for density, you must also define:

• an average density in the density law, to be used for initializing the calcula-
tions,

• the density at the inlet(s) of the flow simulation.

4.1.5.8.2.2.2. Limitations for Using Generalized Expressions

• If the fluid cell zone includes multiple materials, then the cell zone cannot be combined with
foaming and/or transport of species and/or generalized expressions defined on material
properties.

• If the fluid cell zone includes foaming, then the cell zone cannot be combined with multiple
materials and/or transport of species and/or generalized expressions defined on material
properties.

• If an expression is defined on density, you cannot impose a mass flow rate at the inlets and/or
the outlets.

4.1.5.8.2.3. Examples of Common Expressions

While expressions can be written and tested in the Fluent Expressions Editor, the editor's in-
clusion of units can be an issue when used in the Fluent Materials Processing workspace. Most
expressions employ a syntax similar to Excel such that an expression can be written and tested
in Excel to ensure proper syntax. This section discusses some common types of expressions
that you can easily re-use in your simulation.

Note:

Function names included in expressions must be lower case.

The following list contains a collection of expressions that can be useful when working in the
Fluent Materials Processing workspace.

• Linear function of time

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
520 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

Description:
function = value * time

Example:
0.001 * time

• Function of inverse of time

Description:
function = value / time

Note:

Time cannot be equivalent to 0.

Example:
0.001 / time

• Polynomial function of time

Description:
function = value * ( a + b*time + c*time^2 + d*time^3 + e*time^4 )

Example:
0.001 * (0.1+0.2*time+0.3*time^2+0.4*time^3+0.5*time^4)

• Ramp function of time

Description:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 521
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

function = IF(time <= time1,value1,

IF(time>=time2,value2,
value1+(value2-value1)/(time2-time1)*(time-time1)
)
)

Example:
IF(time <= 0.8, 0.1,
IF(time >= 0.9, 0.2, 0.1+(0.2-0.1)/(0.9-0.8)*(time-0.8)
)
)

• Cosine function of time

Description:
function = value * ( a + cos(b*time + c) + d + e*time )

Example:
0.001 *(0.1*cos(0.2*time+0.3)+0.4+0.5*time)

• Power function of time

Description:
function = value * ( a *time^b + c*time^d )

Example:
0.001 *(0.1*time^0.2+0.3*time^0.4)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
522 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

• Exponential function of time

Description:
function = value * ( a *exp(b*time) + c + d*time )

Example:
0.001 *(0.1*exp(0.2*time)+0.3+0.4*time)

• Double ramp function of time

Description:

function = IF(time <= time1,value1,

IF(time<=time2,value2, value1+(value2-value1)/(time2-time1)*(time-time1)
IF(time<=time3,value2,
IF(time>=time4,value3, value2+(value3-value2)/(time4-time3)*(time-time3)
(
)
)
)

Example:
IF(time <= 1.1, 0.1,
IF(time <= 1.2,0.1+(0.2-0.1)/(1.2-1.1)*(time-1.1),
IF(time<=1.3,0.2,
IF(time>=1.4,0.3,
0.2+(0.3-0.2)/(1.4-1.3)*(time-1.3)))))

• Piecewise function of time

Description:
function = IF(time <= time1,value1,
IF(time<=time2, value1+(value2-value1)/(time2-time1)*(time-time1)
IF(time<=time3, value2+(value3-value2)/(time3-time2)*(time-time2),
IF(time<=time4, value3+(value4-value3)/(time4-time3)*(time-time3),value4)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 523
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

)
)
)

Example:
IF(time <= 1.1, 0.1,
IF(time <= 1.2,0.1+(0.2-0.1)/(1.2-1.1)*(time-1.1),
IF(time<=1.3,0.2+(0.3-0.2)/(1.3-1.2)*(time-1.2),
IF(time<=1.4,0.3+(0.4-0.3)/(1.4-1.3)*(time-1.3),0.4))))

• Heaviside unit function of time

Description:
function = IF(time < time1,0,1)

Example:
IF(time < 1.1, 0.,1.)

• Range function of time

Description:
function = IF(time <= time1,0,
IF(time>=time2,0,1))

Example:
IF(time <= 1.1,0.,IF(time >= 1.2,0.,1.))

• Gaussian function of time

Description:
function = a * exp(-((time-b)/c)^2)

Example:
0.1*exp(-((time-0.2)/0.3)^2)

• Power function of 2 fields

Description:
function = a * X1^b * X2^c

Example:
0.1*X1^0.2*X2^0.3

• Polynomial function of 2 fields

Description:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
524 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Introduction

function = X1*(a+b*X2+c*X2^2+d*X2^3)

Example:
X1*(0.1+0.2*X2+0.3*X2^2+0.4*X2^3)

• Exponential function of inverse

Description:
function = a*exp ( b / (X1 + c) )

Example:
0.1*exp(-200./ (X1-0.2))

• Natural logarithm

Description:
function = a*log ( b * (X1 + c) )

Example:
0.1*log(0.2*(X1*0.3))

• Decimal logarithm

Description:
function = a*log10 ( b * (X1 + c) )

Example:
0.1*log10(0.2*(X1*0.3))

4.1.5.9. Using the Help System

Fluent includes an integrated help system that provides easy access to the program documentation.
Through the graphical user interface, you have the entire User's Guide and other documentation
available to you with the click of a mouse button. The Fluent User's Guide and other manuals are
displayed on the Ansys help site, which allows you to use links and search tools and index tools to
find the information you need.

Use the help menu ( ) icon in the upper right-hand corner of the workspace to access its docu-
mentation. Some workspaces even have field-level user assistance that provide information and
guidance about a particular field.

In addition to Online Technical Resources..., and the Product Improvement Program, you can
also obtain information about the version and release of Fluent you are running by selecting the
Version... option in help menu.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 525
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.2. Getting Started

Before you begin your CFD analysis using the Fluent Materials Processing workspace, careful consider-
ation of the following issues will contribute significantly to the success of your modeling effort. Also,
when you are planning a CFD project, be sure to take advantage of the customer support available to
all Ansys Fluent users.

The primary workflow for using the Fluent Materials Processing workspace is as follows:

1. Define your modeling goals.

2. Create a compatible mesh to represent the material processing domain (fluids, solids, and/or molds,
etc.) by using meshing applications (such as the meshing capabilities in SpaceClaim, Ansys Meshing
or Fluent Meshing) to generate a mesh in the Polyflow or Fluent format.

3. Start the workspace. See Starting and Exiting the Workspace (p. 527) for details.

4. Read in a mesh file. See Reading and Writing Files (p. 529) for details. You can also read in an existing
journal or Fluent Materials Processing session file.

5. Setup your simulation (for example, simulation type/goals, cell zone definitions, material properties,
boundary condition settings, solution constraints, and so on) using either of the following methods.

• Manually create and define objects (using the Ribbon or the Outline View) to define all aspects
of the simulation based on your requirements.

• Use a specialized template that automatically defines most of your simulation objects based on
key simulation type/goals. You can then revisit the settings and edit them as needed. See
Choosing a Simulation Template (p. 566)).

• Use a specialized wizard that can set up a simulation (and optionally calculate a solution) once
you provide a few key inputs (applicable for simple direct extrusion, inverse extrusion, and blow
molding problems). See Using the Simulation Wizard (p. 572) for more information.

6. Compute the solution. Use default solution settings, or adjust them accordingly, in order to obtain
an accurate CFD solution. Convergence strategies are helpful in adjusting your solution. See Calcu-
lation Activities Properties (p. 924) for a listing of calculation-related controls and convergence
strategies.

7. Examine and save the results. Use graphical analysis tools (such as contour plots, vector plots, and
pathline plots) to better visualize your simulation results.

8. Consider revisions to the setup, if necessary.

The details of these steps are covered in the sections that follow.

Note:

You can also save and later open session case files (*.mprcas) that contain a simulation's
current settings. Transcripts of your work (*.trn) within a session can also be saved. In ad-
dition, you can record and later run journal files (.py).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
526 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Starting and Exiting the Workspace

4.3. Starting and Exiting the Workspace

You can start and exit the workspace as described in the following sections:
4.3.1. Starting the Workspace Using the Fluent Launcher
4.3.2. Starting the Workspace Using the Command Line
4.3.3. Exiting the Workspace

4.3.1. Starting the Workspace Using the Fluent Launcher

1. Open the Fluent Launcher. Refer to Starting Ansys Fluent Using Fluent Launcher in the Fluent User's
Guide for additional information on opening the Fluent Launcher.

2. Select an option from the Capability Level drop-down list.

Note:

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace is available at the Enterprise, Premium,

and Pro licensing levels. See License-Specific Capabilities (p. 500) for more inform-
ation.

3. Select Materials Processing from the list of workspaces.

4. Click Start to start the workspace.

Alternatively, by selecting from the Read drop-down list, you can also:

• Select an existing Session file (*.mprcas). These files contain the commands needed to
repopulate the workspace with your previous simulation settings.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 527
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• Select a Polyflow or Fluent Mesh file.

Note:

Make sure that the mesh file you select exists in a folder where you have write
permissions, otherwise, the Fluent Materials Processing workspace, having already
set this folder to be the working folder, will be unable to save files properly as
a result.

• Select a Script file.

• Select an item in the Recent Files list (after you have used the workspace).

If you use one of these methods, click Start With Selected Options to start the workspace.

As the workspace initializes, the Ansys splash screen shows its progress and displays the workspace
once it is ready.

4.3.2. Starting the Workspace Using the Command Line

To start Fluent Materials Processing from the command line, enter the following in a command prompt
window:

../fluent/bin/matpro [-prj] | [-R] | [-msh] <file-name> [-g] [-wdir

WORKINGDIR] [-N, -gu] [-I] [-license LICENSETYPE]

where

-prj

Use this option when <file-name> is a session file.

-R

Use this option when <file-name> is a journal file.

-msh

Use this option when <file-name> is a Polyflow or Fluent mesh file.

-g

Use this option to run the workspace without graphics and without the graphical user interface.
This option is useful if you want to submit a batch job.

-wdir

Use this option to set the session's working directory to that specified by WORKINGDIR.

-N, -gu

Use this option to run the workspace without the graphical user interface.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
528 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Reading and Writing Files

-I

Use this option to run the workspace interactively, keeping the application open.

-license

Use this option to run the workspace using a license level specified by LICENSETYPE.

Note:

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace is available at the Enterprise, Premium,

and Pro licensing levels. See License-Specific Capabilities (p. 500) for more information.

As the workspace initializes, the Ansys splash screen shows its progress and displays the workspace
once it is complete.

4.3.3. Exiting the Workspace

You can exit Fluent Materials Processing by selecting Exit in the File ribbon tab or by clicking the
button in the top right corner of the application. For the latter, a Question dialog box will open to
confirm if you want to proceed and will then allow you to save the session.

You can exit the workspace without saving your work by selecting Abort in the File menu. You are
required to confirm if you want to proceed, and if so, your work will not be saved.

4.4. Reading and Writing Files

Depending on your goals, you can read and write various types of files using the workspace. You have
access to reading and writing files from the File menu or from the Setup properties panel.

• Reading Mesh Files

To get started with a simulation in the workspace, you will need to read in a mesh (either a Fluent
or a Polyflow mesh file).

Note:

Make sure that the mesh file you select exists in a folder where you have write permissions,
otherwise, the Fluent Materials Processing workspace, having already set this folder to be
the working folder, will be unable to save files properly as a result.

Note:

When the Fluent Materials Processing workspace reads in a mesh, all topological names
are changed to lower case.

If prompted, use the Define Mesh Unit dialog to specify the Mesh Length Unit for the selected
mesh's length units.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 529
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.6: The Define Mesh Unit Dialog

Note:

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace always performs the setup and the calcu-
lations in MKS. If the mesh is provided in other units, then the coordinates are conver-
ted to meters prior to the calculation.

Note:

If you choose to read in a Fluent mesh, the workspace will not display the Define
Mesh Unit dialog box, and assumes that the mesh is defined in meters.

• Reading Session Files

You can open existing session case files (*.mprcas) that contain your simulation settings.

• Reading Transcript and Journal Files

In addition to the session files, you can also read transcripts of your work (*.trn) within a session.
Also, you can read Python-based journal script files (.py).

• Writing Session Files

You can save and later open session case files (*.mprcas) that contain your simulation settings.

• Writing Transcript and Journal Files

In addition to the session file, you can save transcripts of your work (*.trn) within a session. Also,
you can record and later run Python-based journal script files (.py).

4.5. Choosing Your Simulation Type

Depending on your requirements, there are several types of simulations you can perform using the
workspace.
4.5.1. Modeling Internal Flows
4.5.2. Modeling the Prediction of Extrudate Shape (Direct Extrusion)
4.5.3. Modeling the Determination of Die Lip Shape (Inverse Extrusion)
4.5.4. Modeling Blow Molding and Thermoforming

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
530 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

4.5.5. Modeling Pressing

4.5.6. Modeling Compounding and Mixing
4.5.7. Modeling Film Casting
4.5.8. Modeling Filling
4.5.9. Modeling Foaming
4.5.10. Modeling Coextrusion
4.5.11. Modeling Fiber Spinning

4.5.1. Modeling Internal Flows

The simulation of an internal flow is probably one of the easiest applications of the Fluent Materials
Processing workspace. Here, one typically calculates velocity, pressure, possibly temperature fields
which develop in the flow in a non-deformable closed domain or in a confined flow through a domain
with entry and exit.

Figure 4.7: An Example of Internal Flow

Figure 4.7: An Example of Internal Flow (p. 531) illustrates internal flow in a confined domain with one
entry and four exits, with the geometry (left) and typical temperature distributions on the inlet, outlets,
and central symmetry plane (right). The flow domain is a distributor with one entry on the top and
four exits below. In general, such a calculation provides useful output such as, but not limited to,
pressure and temperature. Important components are the following:

i. the geometry with at least one zone and at least one boundary for the flow in a closed domain,
and at least three boundaries otherwise (inlet, wall, exit),

ii. appropriate material data,

iii. boundary or operating conditions, such as flow rate, behaviour along the die wall, condition
at the exit.

• Rheological Models

For setting up the calculation of an internal flow, all generalized Newtonian fluid models, differential
viscoelastic models, as well as the simplified viscoelastic model can be invoked, under both iso-

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 531
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

thermal ands non-isothermal conditions. However, the confined character of the flow is such that
viscoelasticity can often be discarded, and you can focus on the viscosity properties. Default values
are assigned to the several parameters, but you are encouraged to confirm the settings. There are
also material data files available in the Extrusion and Miscellaneous categories in the available
materials library.

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

The calculation domain must contain at least one zone.

As can be seen in Figure 4.7: An Example of Internal Flow (p. 531), the calculation domain for the
confined flow with entry and exit a is surrounded by at least three boundaries:

i. the inlet where a flow rate is usually assigned,

ii. the fixed die wall where slipping can be specified, and

iii. the exit of the calculation domain.

Sometimes, additional boundaries are needed: this is typically the case when symmetry planes exist
and need to be taken into account, or for example, as suggested in Figure 4.7: An Example of In-
ternal Flow (p. 531), when there are several exits.

• Additional Modeling Features

There are some possibilities for expanding the model used for calculating an internal flow.

– Thermal effects can be considered and requires selecting appropriate material data such as
thermal conductivity, heat capacity, as well as possible temperature dependence of material
properties. Thermal effects, including possible conjugated heat transfer with the solid die,
also requires assigning thermal boundary conditions and specifying appropriate temperature
initialization.

– Restrictors can be embedded in the die, but they cannot be combined with viscoelasticity.

– Foaming is not relevant here.

• Convergence Strategies

The main sources of non-linearity in the setup for the calculation of an internal flow originate from
the material properties and possibly from thermal effects. For facilitating the calculation, convergence
strategies have been implemented and made available and you must select them in accordance
with the setup. While a convergence strategy for rheology and slipping is often recommended,
you can also invoke convergence strategies for thermal flows.

• Additional Information

There are additional resources for exploring this type of simulation:

– To use a template to calculate internal flow, see Using the Internal Flow Template (p. 567).

– To use a wizard to calculate internal flows, see Using the Simple Internal Flow Wizard (p. 573).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
532 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

– For an example of internal flow, see Thermal Simulation of the Internal Flow of a Fluid in a
Channel with One Entry and Four Exits.

4.5.2. Modeling the Prediction of Extrudate Shape (Direct Extrusion)

The prediction of extrudate shape (also known as direct extrusion) is one of the flagship applications
of the Fluent Materials Processing workspace. Most often, it concerns materials such as molten polymer
or uncured rubber. The definition of this application is easy: considering a die with given shape and
dimensions, it provides information on the extrudate, based on material properties and boundary
conditions.

Figure 4.8: An Example of Direct Extrusion

Figure 4.8: An Example of Direct Extrusion (p. 533) illustrates a realistic model for the simulation of an
extrusion flow assisted by a conveyor belt. From left to right, the melt (grey) enters the die channel
(green), flows through the channel, exits the die, and is subsequently conveyed by a belt (brown) on
which it lays due to the effect of gravity. It is important to mention that the use of a conveyor belt
is not mandatory, while gravity does not necessarily play a visible role. All of these are more or less
case specific, however, the important components are the following:

i. the geometry contains at least two zones (one for the flow within the die, one for the extrud-
ate) and at least four boundaries (inlet, wall, free surface, exit),

ii. appropriate material data,

iii. boundary or operating conditions, such as flow rate, behaviour along the die wall, condition
at the exit.

The following components are important to consider for this type of simulation:

• Rheological Models

For setting up the prediction of extrudate shape, all generalized Newtonian fluid models, differential
viscoelastic models, as well as the simplified viscoelastic model can be invoked, under both iso-
thermal and thermal conditions. Default values are assigned to the several parameters, but it is always

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 533
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

a good idea to check them. There are also material data files available in the Extrusion and Miscel-
laneous categories in the available materials library.

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

The calculation domain must contain at least two zones. One zone is needed for the calculation of
the flow within the die, another zone is needed for the calculation of the extrudate that deforms
from the die exit until the exit of the calculation domain. A mesh deformation algorithm is applied
on this latter zone.

As can be seen in Figure 4.8: An Example of Direct Extrusion (p. 533), the calculation domain is sur-
rounded by at least four boundaries:

– the inlet where a flow rate is usually assigned,

– the fixed die wall where slipping can be specified,

– the outer border of the extrudate where free surface conditions are imposed, and

– the exit of the calculation domain. On this latter border, a take-up force or velocity can be
imposed. A stress free condition is also possible.

Sometimes, additional boundaries are needed. This is typically the case when symmetry
planes do exist and are taken into account. This can also be the case when you want to
define a moving wall that mimics a wire or a metal insert, for example, in a coating process.

• Additional Modeling Features

There are some possibilities for expanding the model used for calculating a direct extrusion.

– The present simple model for extrudate shape prediction can be expanded by adding a few
more features, such as foaming or thermal effects. Thermal effects requires selecting appro-
priate material data such as thermal conductivity, heat capacity, as well as possible temper-
ature dependence of material properties. Thermal effects, including conjugated heat transfer
with the solid die, also requires assigning thermal boundary conditions and specifying ap-
propriate temperature initialization.

– Restrictors can be embedded in the die, but they cannot be combined with viscoelasticity
and foaming.

– Specific features can be selected for the extrudate. A take-up force or velocity can be assigned
at the exit of the computational domain. For small profiles, that is, when gravity effects can
be neglected, it is often useful to invoke the free jet stabilization when the profile lacks
symmetry. For heavier profiles, that is, when gravity effects play a visible role, it is a good
idea to define a conveyor belt or a roller conveyor, as is most likely present in the actual
process.

• Convergence Strategies

A model for extrudate shape prediction can involve several non-linearities originating from the
geometry, the rheology and the boundary conditions. For facilitating the calculation, convergence
strategies have been implemented and made available. While a convergence strategy for free surfaces
and moving interfaces is often recommended, you can also invoke convergence strategies for
thermal flows, rheology and slipping, and/or foaming.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
534 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

• Additional Information

There are additional resources for exploring this type of simulation:

– To use a template to calculate the prediction of extrudate shape, see Using the Extrusion Tem-
plate (p. 568).

– To use a wizard to calculate the prediction of extrudate shape, see Using the Simple Direct Extru-
sion Wizard (p. 574).

– For a tutorial that demonstrates the prediction of extrudate shape, see 3D Polymer Extrusion.

4.5.2.1. Understanding Guiding Devices

Some industrial extrusion applications involve the use of conveyor devices. This is typically the case
for profiles whose dimensions and weight require such a guiding device. An illustrative example is
the rubber tire tread extrusion process: downstream of the die exit, the profile is sustained by a
series of rotating conveyor cylinders or by a moving conveyor belt, at a speed that matches the
extrusion line speed.

Some geometric details of the conveyor belt or conveyor cylinders are discarded: instead, they are
defined in simple geometric terms and by their role in the extrusion process, or more precisely,
within the scope of the extrusion model. Since such a device (either a belt or roller) guides the ex-
trudate profile at a given location and at a given speed, it will be described by means of those
quantities. On one hand, a conveyor is represented by a plane defined by a point and an outward
direction perpendicular to it, that is, oriented towards the extrudate; while a velocity is assigned.
On the other hand, a conveyor roller is represented by a cylinder defined by a radius, an axis direction
and a point of the axis, while a rotating velocity is assigned; quite obviously, several conveyor rollers
can be involved.

Figure 4.9: An Extrusion Process Involving a Conveyor Belt (p. 535) illustrates a basic extrusion case
involving the use of a conveyor belt. As suggested, the conveyor belt is a plane described by a
conveniently selected point P, an outward normal direction N to the plane and a velocity V.

Figure 4.9: An Extrusion Process Involving a Conveyor Belt

Similarly, Figure 4.10: An Extrusion Process Involving Conveyor Rollers (p. 536) illustrates an extrusion
case involving a series of rollers. A conveyor roller is a cylinder defined by its radius R, two points
P1 and P2 specifying an oriented axis D, as well as a (signed) angular velocity around the axis.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 535
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.10: An Extrusion Process Involving Conveyor Rollers

In addition, Figure 4.11: Perspective View of a Roller with Geometric Parameters (p. 536) illustrates
the geometric details of the roller.

Figure 4.11: Perspective View of a Roller with Geometric Parameters

From the deformation of the extrudate as suggested in both Figure 4.9: An Extrusion Process Involving
a Conveyor Belt (p. 535) and Figure 4.10: An Extrusion Process Involving Conveyor Rollers (p. 536), it
is understood that gravity plays a role in the process: the guiding device will prevent further
downward deformations. Also, the extrudate is obviously pulled at the end of the computational
domain: a velocity must be imposed at the exit section, and this is anyway preferable than imposing
a normal force that is a priori unknown. Some guiding devices purposely drag the extrudate, in
which case the relative tangential velocity between the extrudate and the device is controlled by
a slipping coefficient, after the fashion of the Navier’s slipping law. A frictionless guiding device
(for example, an air cushion) is a specific case where the friction coefficient is set to zero.

4.5.2.2. Free Jet Stabilization

4.5.2.2.1. Constraint on Global Displacement
For steady-state extrusion simulations that do not involve any implicit constraints on the extrudate
(for example, plane of symmetry, slip conditions, or guiding devices), the Fluent Materials Pro-
cessing workspace will apply a global displacement constraint if the problem satisfies certain
conditions, which are described later in this section.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
536 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

To avoid excessive global displacement, the model allows the addition of a force and a torque
on the free jet (or a portion of it). The computed force and torque can be interpreted as those
produced by a guide used to prevent deviations in the extrudate shape. In a well-balanced die,
the deviation of the extrudate is small and the force and torque are also small. An unbalanced
die, however, will have very large deviations. Consider the unbalanced die illustrated in Fig-
ure 4.12: Flow Through an Unbalanced Die (p. 537).

The extrusion of such a profile leads, in general, to a large deviation in the extrudate due to the
differences in velocity. The deviation of the jet is produced by a nonzero average transverse ve-
locity (ATV) in the cross-section (for example, at the die exit).

Figure 4.12: Flow Through an Unbalanced Die

To avoid large displacements (translation and rotation) of the free jet, the Fluent Materials Pro-
cessing workspace applies a force and a torque on all or part of the extrudate, if the problem
satisfies certain conditions described later in this section.

The force and torque actually act as distributed quantities in the equation of motion. The
values of the force and torque components are computed by the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace precisely so as to obtain a zero averaged transverse velocity (or rotation). When the
large displacements are avoided, convergence of the solution becomes much easier.

4.5.2.2.2. Finite-Element Formulation

The mesh is sliced along the extrusion direction according to the definition of the mesh deform-
ation algorithm. On each node slice (that is, group of all nodes belonging to the same slice), the
force and torque are assumed to be constant, as shown in Figure 4.13: Sliced Domain with Force
and Torque (p. 538).

Furthermore, the component of the force in the flow direction and the component of the torque
in the transverse direction have imposed values of zero. Since the force and torque are constant
in each slice, their effect on the shape of the extrudate section is small.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 537
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.13: Sliced Domain with Force and Torque

4.5.2.2.3. Limitations
The following limitations apply to the free jet stabilization:

• It is available only for non-axisymmetric extrusion problems. (Axisymmetry implicitly involves

a free jet stabilization around the axis.)

• The extrusion direction must be aligned with the , , or direction. When Optimesh 3D or
streamwise mesh deformation algorithms are used, the Fluent Materials Processing workspace
will check that the inlet and outlet sections are real planes and are perpendicular to the , ,
or direction.

• Optimesh, the streamwise method, the method of spines (2D) must be used as the mesh de-
formation algorithm, so that slicing is available.

• Although the Elastic deformation method with torsion control does not formally require a
sliceable mesh, the constraint on the free jet requires such a mesh. Hence, you will be able to
apply free jet stabilization when using this mesh deformation algorithm, if the mesh is at least
sliceable. If the mesh is not sliceable on the extrudate, the Fluent Materials Processing workspace
stops on an error message.

• The plane passing by the relative starting coordinate and perpendicular to the extrusion direction
must not cross any slice (that is, the force or torque must either apply on an entire slice or not
apply at all on the slice). If this condition is violated, the solver will not converge. Figure 4.14: Con-
straint on the Starting Coordinate (p. 539) illustrates correct and incorrect positions for the
starting coordinate.

• For multiple-jet simulations, the extrusion direction must be the same for all jets. The force
and torque on each jet will, however, be computed separately. Figure 4.15: Constraint on Mul-
tiple-Jet Problems (p. 539) illustrates multiple-jet problems for which the constraint can and
cannot be applied.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
538 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

Figure 4.14: Constraint on the Starting Coordinate

Figure 4.15: Constraint on Multiple-Jet Problems

4.5.2.2.4. Compatibility with Specific Geometries and Boundary Conditions

The free jet stabilization is not compatible with velocity boundary conditions on the extrudate
(for example, plane of symmetry: ; belt conveyor: , ). These velocity conditions are

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 539
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

sufficient to avoid global displacements, so no additional constraints are required. For this reason,
some force or torque components can be set to zero. Table 4.9: Force and Torque Components
for Geometries and Boundary Conditions (p. 540) identifies the force and torque components for
different cases as computed (C), equal to zero (0), or not computed (N) because they are incom-
patible with the boundary conditions. In this table, the flow direction is for non-axisymmetric
2D geometries, and for axisymmetric and 3D geometries.

The table tells you which component of the force or torque will be non-zero when the free jet
stabilization is used. If you specify an inconsistent constraint, the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace will warn you.

Table 4.9: Force and Torque Components for Geometries and Boundary Conditions

Geometry Boundary Conditions

2D axisym (Figure 4.16: 2D line of axisymmetry N – 0 – – –
Geometries (p. 541) a)
2D planar (Figure 4.16: 2D no plane of symmetry C 0 – – – –
Geometries (p. 541) b)
2D planar (Figure 4.16: 2D plane of symmetry, N 0 – – – –
Geometries (p. 541) c)
2D planar (Figure 4.16: 2D , N – – – – –
Geometries (p. 541) d)
3D (Figure 4.17: 3D Geometries (p. 541) no plane of symmetry C C 0 0 0 C
a)
3D (Figure 4.17: 3D Geometries (p. 541) one plane of symmetry, C 0 0 0 0 0
b)
3D (Figure 4.17: 3D Geometries (p. 541) two planes of symmetry, 0 0 0 0 0 0
c)
or

This information must come either from your knowledge of the process being modeled or from
your observation of large deviations in a previous simulation.

• For 2D geometries, there is no torque and or is zero. Axisymmetric geometries (Fig-

ure 4.16: 2D Geometries (p. 541) a) are incompatible with the constraint on global displacement.

• For a 2D geometry without velocity boundary conditions on the free jet (Figure 4.16: 2D Geo-
metries (p. 541) b), there is only one component of force that is computed. 2D geometries with
a symmetry plane (Figure 4.16: 2D Geometries (p. 541) c) or with normal (to the extrusion axis)
velocity imposed (Figure 4.16: 2D Geometries (p. 541) d) are incompatible with the constraint
on global displacement.

• For 3D geometries without velocity boundary conditions on the free jet (Figure 4.17: 3D Geo-
metries (p. 541) a), the transverse components of the force are computed in order to avoid the
displacement in the transverse direction, and the force component in the flow direction is
equal to zero; the torque components in the flow direction is computed in order to avoid ex-
trudate rotation, and the other torque components are equal to zero.

• For 3D geometries with one plane of symmetry (Figure 4.17: 3D Geometries (p. 541) b), extrudate
rotation is not possible, so the torque is not taken into account. Since displacement in the

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
540 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

direction perpendicular to the symmetry plane is not allowed, the force in this direction is im-
posed to be zero.

Figure 4.16: 2D Geometries

Figure 4.17: 3D Geometries

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 541
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• For a 3D geometry with two planes of symmetry or other velocity boundary conditions (Fig-
ure 4.17: 3D Geometries (p. 541) c), the transverse and rotation displacements of the free jet are
not possible, so the force and torque are not taken into account.

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace detects these situations automatically and sets the
appropriate force and torque components to zero. If you try to use the constraint on global dis-
placement when it is incompatible with the boundary condition, the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace will inform you of the incompatibility in an error message.

4.5.3. Modeling the Determination of Die Lip Shape (Inverse Extrusion)

The determination of die lip shape is another application of the Fluent Materials Processing workspace,
also known as inverse extrusion. This application most often concerns materials such as molten
polymer or uncured rubber. It can be defined as follows: consider a given extrudate profile with
specific dimensions, the application provides indications toward the design of die lips needed, based
on material properties and boundary conditions.

Figure 4.18: Example of Inverse Extrusion

The left hand side of Figure 4.18: Example of Inverse Extrusion (p. 542) displays a sketch of a realistic
model for the determination of die lip shape for the extrusion of a given profile. From left to right,
the melt (blue) enters the die channel (grey), flows through the channel, and exits the die (symmetry
is suggested by the black line). The right hand side of Figure 4.18: Example of Inverse Extrusion (p. 542)
displays a comparison between the required extrudate shape (blue) and the calculated die lips (black
line). All this is case specific, and there are indeed several possible topological scenarios when determ-
ining the die lip shape: calculation of a constant die land only, of a converging die land only, a com-
bination of both, etc. Important components, however, are the following:

i. the geometry contains at least two zones (one for the flow within the die, one for the extrud-
ate) and at least four boundaries (inlet, wall, free surface, exit),

ii. appropriate material data,

iii. boundary or operating conditions, such as flow rate, behaviour along the die wall, condition
at the exit.

• Rheological Models

For setting up the prediction of die lip shape, all generalized Newtonian fluid models, differential
viscoelastic models, as well as the simplified viscoelastic model can be invoked, under isothermal
or thermal conditions. Default values are assigned to the several parameters, but it is always a good

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
542 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

idea to check them. There are also material data files available in the Extrusion and Miscellaneous
families in the Library of Materials.

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

The calculation domain must contain at least two zones. One zone is needed for the calculation of
the flow within the die, and another zone is needed for the calculation of the extrudate which de-
forms from the die exit until the exit of the computational domain. Zones can be added to the die
when a converging section and a fixed section are involved. A mesh deformation algorithm is applied
on all but the fixed section.

As seen in Figure 4.18: Example of Inverse Extrusion (p. 542), the calculation domain is surrounded
by at least four boundaries:

– the inlet where a flow rate is usually assigned,

– the fixed die wall where slipping can be specified,

– the outer border of the extrudate where free surface conditions are imposed, and

– the exit of the calculation domain. On this latter border, a take-up force can be imposed. A
stress free condition is also possible.

Sometimes, additional boundaries are needed, for example, when symmetry planes do exist
and are taken into account. This can also be the case when one wants to define a moving
wall which mimics a wire or a metal insert, for example, in a coating process.

• Additional Modeling Features

The present simple model for determining die lip shape can be expanded by adding a few more
features. Foaming can be included. Thermal effects, including conjugated heat transfer with the
solid die, can be considered. This requires selecting appropriate material data such as thermal
conductivity, heat capacity, as well as possible temperature dependence of material properties, in
addition to assigning thermal boundary conditions and specifying appropriate temperature initial-
ization.

Specific features can be selected for the extrudate. A take-up force can be assigned at the exit of
the computational domain. Also, when the profile lacks symmetry, it is useful to invoke the free jet
stabilization.

Restrictors can be embedded in the fixed section of the die only, but they cannot be combined
with viscoelasticity and foaming. Eventually, the determination of die lip shape cannot be combined
with the use of guiding devices.

• Convergence Strategies

A model for determining the die lip shape involves several non-linearities originating from the
geometry, the rheology and the boundary conditions. For facilitating the calculation, convergence
strategies have been implemented and made available. In addition to a recommended convergence
strategy for free surfaces and moving interfaces, you can also invoke convergence strategies for
rheology and slipping, for thermal flows and for foaming. The required convergence strategies are
automatically activated when using a wizard; when using a template or performing a manual setting,
you must select convergence strategies in accordance with the setup.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 543
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• Additional Remarks

To some extent, this virtual analysis may replace a first real experiment. The solution quality is
subjected to several factors, such as the available data, the assumptions made, etc. As for many
applications, common sense and validations are certainly welcome in the design process.

• Additional Information

There are additional resources for exploring this type of simulation:

– To use a template for applications that determine die lip shape, see Using the Extrusion Tem-
plate (p. 568).

– To use a wizard for applications that determine die lip shape, see Using the Simple Inverse Extru-
sion Wizard (p. 577).

– For a tutorial that demonstrates determining die lip shape, see 3D Inverse Extrusion.

4.5.4. Modeling Blow Molding and Thermoforming

Blow molding is a manufacturing process for forming hollow polymer parts.

There are two main types of blow molding: extrusion blow molding and injection blow molding. In
the first process, molten polymer is extruded into a hollow tube, a parison. This tube is closed by
pinching it in a mold and is finally blown into the desired hollow part. In the second process, a preform
is injection molded and transferred into another mold in which it is inflated into the final article shape.
When the inflation of the preform is assisted by a plunger, the process is also called injection stretch
blow molding.

Figure 4.19: Simple Model for an Extrusion Blow Molding Application

Figure 4.19: Simple Model for an Extrusion Blow Molding Application (p. 544) displays a simple model
for extrusion blow molding simulation. Likewise, Figure 4.20: Simple Model for an Injection Stretch
Blow Molding Application (p. 545) displays an injection stretch blow molding application.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
544 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

Figure 4.20: Simple Model for an Injection Stretch Blow Molding Application

Thermoforming refers to the forming of a polymer sheet into a 3D shape by using a mold, heat, va-
cuum/pressure and/or a plunger. Thermoforming is used in a wide variety of applications, such as
cups, blisters, trays and covers, packaging items, dash panels, refrigerator liners, etc. Figure 4.21: Simple
Model for Thermoforming Application (p. 545) displays a simple model for the thermoforming of a
pharmaceutical blister.

Figure 4.21: Simple Model for Thermoforming Application

Blow molding and thermoforming simulations make use of the same tools: a shell model for polymer
parison/sheet, contact detection when the fluid meets the mold and/or the plunger, the large deform-
ations of the fluid material that renders mesh adaption quite necessary, the geometrical details of
the mold that must be captured and the thermal effects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 545
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

This section focuses on methods using the shell element that can be used when the thickness of the
fluid layer is small compared to other dimensions. When this assumption is not valid or for 2D cases,
standard volume elements must be used (in such cases, see Modeling Pressing (p. 547)).

• Rheological Models

Since stretching is the main deformation of the polymer parison/sheet, you should consider a
model that exhibits some amount of strain hardening, or at least no thinning in extension. So, the
simplest rheological model is a pure Newtonian model with a constant viscosity. A second option
is a multi-mode integral viscoelastic model. An attractive option is the use of a strain-dependent
viscosity while an orthotropic material model can also be used when the polymer is reinforced by
oriented fibers. In all cases, isothermal and thermal conditions can be defined

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

In the simplest configuration, two zones are sufficient, one for the fluid and one for the mold. For
more complex cases, several molds and/or plungers can be defined.

For the boundaries, a single boundary for the fluid domain might be sufficient but additional
boundaries must be defined for planes of symmetry.

A single boundary is usually sufficient for a mold or a plunger.

• Additional Modeling Features

In many cases, the motion of the plunger(s) is not constant and expressions must be used to define
the velocity components of the displacement as function(s) of time (see Using Expressions in the
Workspace (p. 512) for more information about expressions).

In some cases, especially injection stretch blow molding ones, it is necessary to allow contact release.
This makes the fluid able to detach from the plunger.

It is also possible to define a fluid sheet/parison made of several layers. Each layer is made of a
different material and has its own specific thickness. The fluid shell's behavior is then a result of
the combination of the different layers.

Thermal effects can be considered, and require additional material data as well as assigning thermal
boundary conditions and specifying temperature initialization. Heat transfer with the mold(s) and
plungers is also possible.

• Related Notes

– As a mold/plunger is represented by a shell, it is important to specify on which side of this

shell the solid body is located.

– As the fluid domain is a shell in the 3D space, planes of symmetry must be defined by spe-
cifying their normal.

– As for any simulation involving large deformations, adaptive meshing is highly recommended.
In the case of shells, the mesh adaptation is performed via subdivision of the original ele-
ments.

• Additional Information

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
546 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

There are additional resources for exploring this type of simulation:

– To use a template for the blow molding / thermoforming applications, see Using the Blow
Molding & Thermoforming Template (p. 570).

– For a tutorial that demonstrates injection stretch blow molding, see Injection Stretch Blow
Molding (ISBM).

4.5.5. Modeling Pressing

Pressing is a forming process where a force is applied to a material to deform it to match the size
and shape of a die usually consisting of a fixed mold and a moving plunger. Pressing is much used
to produce glassware.

Figure 4.22: Example of Pressing (p. 547) displays a sketch of a simple model for glass pressing simula-
tion, where two planes of symmetry have been taken into account.

Figure 4.22: Example of Pressing

The important components of such simulations are the contact detection when the fluid meets the
mold and/or the plunger, the large deformations of the fluid material that renders mesh adaption
quite necessary, the geometrical details of the mold that must be captured and the thermal effects,
especially in the case of glass.

Figure 4.23: Time Evolution of the Glass Blob With Contours of Velocity (p. 548) displays the fluid domain
at four different instants of the pressing process. The velocity contours allows you to observe that
the fluid is pushed down in a first stage but is pushed up between the plunger and the mold in a
second stage. Note the mesh adaptation that allows you to cope with the large deformations of the
material.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 547
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.23: Time Evolution of the Glass Blob With Contours of Velocity

• Rheological Models

For setting up the simulation of pressing, all generalized Newtonian fluid models may be used,
under isothermal and thermal conditions. Differential viscoelastic models are not recommended
and would lead to very important calculation times.

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

The calculation domain usually contains three zones, one for the fluid, one for the mold, and one
for the plunger. If several molds and/or plungers are necessary, a zone must be defined for each
of them.

For the boundaries, a single boundary for the fluid domain might be sufficient but additional ones
must be defined for planes of symmetry.

A mold or a plunger usually has two boundaries, one for the contact with the fluid, and a second
one for the rest of its border. A larger number of boundaries is nevertheless permitted if you want
to define several contact boundaries or to clearly identify planes of symmetry and/or different
thermal boundary conditions.

In many cases, the motion of the plunger(s) is not constant and expressions must be used to define
the velocity components of their displacement as functions of time.

In some cases, it is necessary to allow contact release. This makes the fluid able to detach from the
mold/plunger.

In addition or in replacement of the plunger, a pressure can be applied to deform the gob of fluid.
This allows you to simulate blow molding with volume elements.

Thermal effects can be considered, and require additional material data as well as assigning thermal
boundary conditions and specifying temperature initialization. Heat transfer with the mold(s) and
plungers is also possible.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
548 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

• Additional Remarks

Volume conservation is activated by default. This guarantees that, despite the numerous remeshings,
the mass of fluid remains constant.

To assist in keeping a suitable mesh, refinement zones can be defined. They can be boxes or spheres
in which the size of elements are prescribed, they also can be a refinement along boundaries where
geometrical details must be captured. In the latter case, the required element size can be function
of the distance to contact or function of the curvature of the contact surface.

Refinement along boundaries are especially useful in non-isothermal calculations where thermal
boundary layers must be captured

• Additional Information

There are additional resources for exploring this type of simulation:

– To use a template for pressing applications, see Using the Pressing Template (p. 570).

– For an example that demonstrates tire molding, see Reinforcements and Pantographing in Rubber
Tire Molding.

4.5.6. Modeling Compounding and Mixing

Mixing and compounding are typically internal flows which involve moving parts. Apart from a few
situations, the motion of the moving part is such that the geometric configuration evolves with time.
Typical examples are stirring tanks, single- and twin-screw extruders, pistons. With changing geometric
configuration, the flows are intrinsically transient, with or without entry and exit. With a setup for
mixing and compounding, one typically calculates velocity, pressure, possibly temperature fields
which develop in a confined domain that changes with time: an appropriate treatment of overlapping
meshes is applied for easily generating the changing flow domain.

Figure 4.24: Example of a Geometry for a Single-screw Extruder

Figure 4.24: Example of a Geometry for a Single-screw Extruder (p. 549) displays a sketch of a domain
for the transient calculation of the flow of a viscous material in a short single screw extruder (left)
and a transient temperature field at four instances (right). In the suggested model, the barrel is fixed
while the screw rotates with an angular velocity of 60 rpm (or 2π rad/s). In general, such a calculation
provides useful output such as, but not limited to, pressure field and temperature rise. Important
components are the following:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 549
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

i. the geometry with at least one fluid zone and at least one moving part, and at least one
boundary for a closed domain and three boundaries otherwise (inlet, wall, exit),

ii. appropriate material data,

iii. boundary or operating conditions, such as flow rate, behaviour along the die wall, behaviour
on the moving part.

• Rheological Models

For setting up the calculation of mixing and compounding flow, all generalized Newtonian fluid
models can be invoked, under both isothermal and thermal conditions. Default values are assigned
to the several parameters, but it is always a good idea to check them. There are also material data
files available in the Extrusion and Miscellaneous families in the Library of Materials.

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

The calculation domain must contain at least two zones, one for the fluid and one for the moving
part. Multiple moving parts are possible, and the motion of each individual part is described as a
combination of rotation and translation. The behavior of the fluid along the wall of the moving
part can be specified.

As shown in Figure 4.24: Example of a Geometry for a Single-screw Extruder (p. 549), the calculation
domain for the flow domain for the single-screw extruder is surrounded by at least three boundaries:

– the inlet where a flow rate is usually assigned,

– the fixed barrel wall where slipping can be specified,

– the exit of the calculation domain, and

– a possible internal boundary overlapped by the moving part.

Sometimes, additional boundaries are needed, for example, when distinct fluid behavior
along walls must be specified, or when there are multiple entries or exits.

• Additional Modeling Features

Thermal effects, including conjugated heat transfer with the moving part, can be considered. This
requires selecting appropriate material data such as thermal conductivity, heat capacity, as well as
possible temperature dependence of material properties, in addition to assigning thermal boundary
conditions and specifying appropriate temperature initialization.

• Adaptive Meshing

With the motion of the moving part, the geometric configuration is changing throughout the cal-
culation, and there will never be a precise match between the discretization of zones for fluid and
moving part(s). Instead of selecting at the outset a very fine discretisation for the fluid zone, it is
more efficient to invoke the adaptive meshing, and to specify a refinement condition in the vicinity
of the transition between the zones for fluid and moving part(s). Refinement is based on element
subdivision.

• Additional Information

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
550 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

– To use a template for mixing and compounding applications, see Using the Compounding &
Mixing Template (p. 570).

– For a tutorial that demonstrates compounding and mixing, see Mesh Superposition Technique.

4.5.7. Modeling Film Casting

The film casting process is an important industrial continuous process to produce polymer films, films
that can be made of several layers. As shown in Figure 4.25: Example of Film Casting (p. 551), the
molten polymer is extruded in a film through the thin slit of a flat die. The film contains two free
surfaces and is then drawn in the flow direction by a higher take-up speed. This causes film width
reduction and film edge thickening (so called “neck-in” and “dog-bone” effects), respectively. Both
effects must be suppressed since they reduce process productivity.

Figure 4.25: Example of Film Casting

A film has a thickness that is several orders of magnitude smaller than its other dimensions. It is also
assumed that the film is flat, so that effects due to film curvature are ignored. Consider the problem
of modeling the flow between a die exit and a take-up roll, where entrance and exit effects are ignored.
The problem is truly three-dimensional since the film will show necking along lateral sides as well as
a thickness variation along the principal direction of stretching. However, because of the very small
thickness, a 3D model would not be feasible as it would require a very large mesh, which would result
in a costly computation. Instead, a special 2D model has been developed in the workspace. In this
2D model, all conservation equations are averaged throughout the third dimension (that is, the film
thickness) and thickness-averaged velocity and temperature values are computed. The film thickness
becomes a variable of the flow problem, governed by the mass conservation equation. Pressure is
no longer a variable of the problem and is eliminated from the momentum equations. In the case of
multilayer film, each layer has its own thickness variables.

• Rheological Models

For setting up the simulation of film casting, all generalized Newtonian fluid models and differential
viscoelastic models are available, under isothermal and thermal conditions. However, since the flow

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 551
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

is characterized by elongation, you should consider a model that exhibits some amount of strain
hardening, or at least no thinning in extension. For the viscoelastic simulation, the stresses are
computed, and in the case of multilayer simulation, each layer has its own stress variables.

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

The 2D calculation domain for film problem must be planar and may be composed of several cell-
zones. As shown in Figure 4.25: Example of Film Casting (p. 551), the calculation domain must be
surrounded by at least four boundaries:

– an inlet where a normal velocity, temperature and thickness are imposed,

– a free surface fixed at the inlet, for the temperature, common sense suggests to impose an
insulated thermal condition,

– an outlet where the take-up speed and a vanishing heat flux are imposed,

– a second free surface fixed at the inlet or a plane of symmetry.

Inlet, outlet and symmetry boundaries may be composed of several parts while free surface
boundaries must be in one part.

For non-isothermal simulations, a cooling flux can be applied on the surface of the film.

• Stress Boundary Conditions for DCPP (Double Convected Pom Pom) Viscoelastic Model in
Film Casting

For the particular case of the DCPP model, care is required when imposing the boundary conditions
for the viscoelastic variables at the inlet of the calculation domain. The inlet is the border where
the thickness condition is imposed. There, instead of all components of the orientation tensor, you
will be prompted about anisotropy described in terms of orientation and factor, as well as
stretching amplitude. Imposing boundary conditions for the viscoelastic unknowns (orientation
and stretching) is optional. If conditions are imposed, you will need to provide the following inform-
ation:

– the direction of anisotropy of the orientation tensor (x or y),

– the anisotropy factor ranging between 0 (isotropic) and 1 (anisotropic),

– the inlet stretching.

• Multilayer Films (Coextrusion)

Some film casting applications involve several fluid layers. In view of the model, the fluid layers
may overlap or be adjacent. Several cell zones are necessary if all layers are not defined on the
whole computational domain. The velocity field, as well as the temperature field (for non-isothermal
problems), will be uniquely defined on the computational domain, while an independent thickness
field will be assigned to each fluid layer. Also, for viscoelastic model problems, an independent
extra-stress tensor will be assigned to each fluid layer. The film model does not require an interface
condition between layers.

• Film Problems and Nonlinearity

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
552 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

A film flow problem is characterized by several nonlinearities, such as mesh deformation, rheology,
thermal effects, and boundary conditions. Two important effects leading to convergence difficulties
are the cooling of the film and a take-up speed at the outlet of the computational domain leading
to strong changes in the geometry and/or in the thickness.

When the level of nonlinearities is significant, you should use a continuation scheme for the take-
up speed such that the initial take-up speed equals the inlet velocity and reaches the prescribed
take-up speed at the end of the continuation scheme. For non-isothermal problems with cooling
flux, the cooling flux should start from zero and reach its prescribed value at the end of the con-
tinuation scheme.

• Additional Information

There are additional resources for exploring this type of simulation:

– To use a template for film casting applications, see Using the Film Casting Template (p. 571).

– For an example that demonstrates non-isothermal multilayer film casting with multi-viscoelastic
modes, see Multilayer Film Casting.

4.5.8. Modeling Filling

The filling of a cavity by a molten polymer is a very common process of the polymer industry. The
filling is a transient process where a fluid is introduced into a cavity by a number of inlets. The process
stops when the cavity is filled and air expelled out of it through vents.

In order to simulate such a process, the workspace employs a technique which is inspired from the
Volume of Fluid technique (VOF) model. It is based on a time-dependent approach applied on a fixed
domain where the front of fluid is tracked via the calculation of a transport variable, which allows
the discrimination between both filled and unfilled parts. In the region already filled, you typically
calculate velocity, pressure, and possibly temperature fields which develop from the entry to the
front, and this continues until the cavity is completely filled.

The implemented model formally enables the simulation of flows that would be too complicated for
a deformation-based technique, and can, for example, simulate the splitting and merging of fluid
fronts, under a relatively simple geometric context.

It should be noted that the VOF model is not a replacement for Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE)
methods in all cases. Because the VOF technique relies on partly filled cells (which means that the
location of the free surface does not correspond to an element boundary), it is intrinsically less accurate
than the ALE technique for flows with well defined interfaces, such as extrusion or multiple layer
problems. The ALE method may be more appropriate when searching for a well defined steady-state
free surface through a steady-state (or a continuation on a free surface) algorithm.

Figure 4.26: An Example of Filling (p. 554) displays a sketch of a domain for the calculation of the filling
process together with a possible output result. The geometry is like a test sample generally used in
traction tests. The flow domain has one entry at the bottom and one exit at the top. The filled part
of the cavity is observed at various stages of the process, where the red area corresponds to the zone
when the fluid fraction is above 0.5, indicating the area filled by the polymer (the zone with a fluid
fraction below 0.5 is considered to be empty).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 553
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.26: An Example of Filling

Important components are the following:

i. the geometry with at least one zone and at least three boundaries (inlet, wall, exit),

ii. appropriate material data,

iii. boundary or operating conditions, such as flow rate, behaviour along the cavity wall, condition
at the exit.

The Volume of Fluid technique can be selected in the Calculation Type option in the General
properties of the Setup. The fluid fraction is initialized to zero in the whole domain at the start (the
cavity is initially empty) and set to 1 along all the inlets.

• Rheological Models

All generalized Newtonian fluid models, differential viscoelastic models, as well as the simplified
viscoelastic model can be invoked, under both isothermal and thermal conditions. Default values
are assigned to the several parameters, but it is always a good idea to check them. There are also
material data files available in the Extrusion and Miscellaneous families in the Library of Materials.

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

The calculation domain must contain at least one zone.

As can be seen in Figure 4.26: An Example of Filling (p. 554), the calculation domain for the flow
with entry and exit is surrounded by at least three boundaries:

– the inlet where a flow rate is usually assigned,

– the wall where slipping can be specified, and

– the exit (or vent) of the calculation domain.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
554 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

Sometimes, additional boundaries are needed as this is typically the case when symmetry
planes do exist and are taken into account.

• Additional Modeling Features

There are actually limited possibilities for expanding the model used for calculating the filling.
Thermal effects can be considered, and it requires selecting appropriate material data such as
thermal conductivity, heat capacity, as well as possible temperature dependence of material prop-
erties, in addition to also requiring assigning thermal boundary conditions and specifying appropriate
temperature initialization. Restrictors, moving parts and foaming cannot be combined with the
VOF technique.

• Convergence Strategies

The main source of non-linearity originates from the material properties, from slippage and possibly
from thermal effects. For facilitating the calculation, enabling picard iterations (under Solution >
Methods) and selecting a secant solver (under Solution > Calculation Activities) maybe useful.

Because of the explicit nature of VOF algorithms, a so-called Courant type of limitation always occurs,
and the time step is limited to a fraction of the time it takes to transport information through an
individual element (or cell). It is common to require hundreds of time steps to compute an entire
simulation. Because each of these time steps are performed on a fixed domain with an inexpensive
numerical technique, a VOF model can still require less CPU time than a simulation involving
moving or deforming fluid domain, such as the Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) approach.

Important:

The VOF model does not account for the effect of surface tension on the free surface.
The VOF model has not been tested in combination with other models available in the
workspace due to the nonlinearities and dependencies involved in the various models:
it is not possible to guarantee the convergence and accuracy of problems that combine
VOF with other models. You should attempt such combinations with caution.

• Additional Information

There are additional resources for exploring this type of simulation:

– To use a template for filling applications, see Using the Filling Template (p. 571).

– For an example that demonstrates a filling application, see Filling of a Sample.

4.5.8.1. Theory of Filling

The VOF method employed by the Fluent Materials Processing workspace tracks a liquid fluid on
a domain . A material property variable represents the fluid fraction. is used to identify where
the fluid is present, and is governed by the following transport equation:
(4.3)

where represents the velocity of the fluid. The values for that result from solving the previous
equation are highly discontinuous, and hence difficult to simulate.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 555
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Equation 4.3 (p. 555) is governed by initial and inlet conditions:

• initial conditions

The variable is initialized to zero in the whole domain at the initial time, meaning the flow
domain is empty at the start.

• inlet conditions

The variable is set to 1 along all the inlet boundaries in order to specify that the inflow entering
through this boundary is the fluid being tracked.

A highly accurate and consistent streamline-upwinding technique is used to integrate Equa-

tion 4.3 (p. 555). The interpolation selected for makes use of linear subelements, to maximize nu-
merical accuracy; this is necessary because the integration must be performed over a long time,
and large variations are expected. The calculation of is decoupled from the flow calculation,
so that calculating is not more expensive than computing the flow itself. In fact, the calculation
is cheaper, because Equation 4.3 (p. 555) is linear with regard to . When the flow is known, can
be calculated directly in a single iteration.

Because of the usage of the variable on the domain, the previously described methodology
should more appropriately be called a level set method. The Fluent Materials Processing workspace
calls it a volume of fluid method as a reference to similar techniques in other flow codes.

4.5.8.1.1. Volume Conservation

For VOF and related techniques, an essential accuracy criteria is the conservation of volume (or
mass). When simulating injection, for example, it is important that all of the fluid volume that
enters the domain is reflected in the distribution. Volume loss can be an issue when a simulation
involves many time steps, even with a highly accurate integration of Equation 4.3 (p. 555). This is
because the small volume errors associated with each time step can accumulate to yield a signi-
ficant loss.

In order to minimize the volume loss, time is handled differently in VOF simulations than in an
ordinary time-dependent scheme. First of all, the Fluent Materials Processing workspace attempts
to minimize the number of time steps needed by varying the length of time used for the time
steps ( ). Though you set for the initial time step of your VOF simulation, it is automatically
determined for all subsequent time steps based on the outcome of the previous steps. See the
list below for descriptions of various scenarios.

Another way that VOF simulations minimize volume loss is the manner in which the elapsed time
is calculated. Consider the calculations that are performed at each time step: the flow field (that
is, the values for velocity/pressure and possibly other variables, such as the temperature or a
chemical species concentration) is computed for a time step, followed by an integration of
Equation 4.3 (p. 555). When the new values for the field are available for the domain, a determ-
ination can be made for the subdomains that surround every node (for example, the gray area
in Figure 4.27: A Control Volume Surrounding a Node (p. 557)) as to whether is above the
threshold (which represents a "wet" node condition) or below the threshold (which represents a
“dry" node condition). In this manner, the distribution of wet/dry nodes is known at each time
step.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
556 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

Figure 4.27: A Control Volume Surrounding a Node

Because it is not possible to numerically integrate discontinuous data without dissipation, the
variation in the size of the wet domain is generally lower than the net volume of fluid that entered
the domain through the inlets during the time step. To avoid translating this dissipation into a
volume loss, the Fluent Materials Processing workspace calibrates the elapsed time for a successful
time step based on the amount of fluid that entered the domain, rather than simply equating it
with . Note that this calibration is only performed when the flow rate of fluid entering the
domain is nonzero; when no fluid enters (for example, when no inlet is present), the elapsed time
is set equal to the initially defined value of the time step. For this reason, you should define the
initial time step conservatively.

4.5.8.1.2. Time Step Management

The following is a list of scenarios that can arise during the VOF simulation, and the resulting
impact on the evaluation of and/or the simulation:

• a positive net change in the number of wet nodes does not occur as a result of the time step,
even though the inlet flow rate is not zero

This is an indication that Equation 4.3 (p. 555) has not been integrated over a period of time
that is long enough to allow new nodes of the domain to reach the threshold, and so a larger
time step must be applied. In this case, the time step index is not incremented, is increased
by 50%, and the calculations are run again to compute the field. This process can be repeated
up to 10 times for a particular time step, after which point the simulation is terminated.

• the ordinary flow calculation returns an error (for example, divergence is detected for a nonlinear
problem)

In this case, the time step index is not incremented and the flow calculation is attempted again
using a smaller value of . If no new wet nodes result and the calculation still diverges, the
algorithm will eventually stop.

• the calculations for a time step yields a positive net change in the number of wet nodes

This represents a successful outcome, and so the time step index is incremented. Having
computed a new wet node flag vector (which yielded a new volume of fluid in the domain)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 557
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

as a result of the inlet flow rate , a new value for is calculated for the next time step as
follows:

(4.4)

Here, is a parameter you can set to control the Accuracy of the scheme, and can be specified
in the calculation activities panel (see Calculation Activities Properties (p. 924)). Recommended
values of are on the order of 0.2–0.5. Note that an extremely low value of can reduce the
time step to such a degree that no new nodes become wet; consequently, the time step will
be increased as described previously, and you then run the risk of engaging in an oscillatory
"forward/backwards" marching scheme that calculates several useless iterations without im-
proved accuracy. An inherent limitation of the VOF model is that it cannot process changes
that are smaller than the element size.

Note that if the inlet flow rate for the time step was 0, Equation 4.4 (p. 558) is ignored and
is set to the value you defined for the initial time step.

• the time step index is incremented beyond the maximum number

In this case, the simulation is terminated. The maximum number of time steps is used to stop
simulations that have values for that are too low, and consequently run too long. Because
of the Courant-type limitation described previously, you should expect a complete filling sim-
ulation to take several hundreds time steps and set the maximum accordingly. By default, the
maximum number of time steps is set to 1000.

• is set to a value lower than the minimum

The simulation is terminated when falls below the minimum.

• the total outlet flow rate (integrated over all outlets) is 99% of the nonzero total inlet flow rate
(that is, the flow in the cavity is established, but almost all of the fluid is leaving the domain)

By default, the Fluent Materials Processing workspace stops the simulation in such circumstances,
even if the cavity has not been completely filled. In most cases, it is considered normal to ter-
minate a VOF simulation when the flow exits the domain. The value of 99% is hardcoded in
the Fluent Materials Processing workspace. This constraint is disabled for simulations in which
there are no defined inlets, thereby allowing you to model the emptying of the cavity. You
can also ignore this constraint by turning off the Stop Run When Cavity Full option in the
calculation activities panel (see Calculation Activities Properties (p. 924)).

• the fluid fraction variable exceeds the threshold value (for example, 0.5 when tracking a
single fluid) throughout the entire domain

As stated previously, the fluid is determined to be present wherever is above the threshold
value. Exceeding this value throughout the domain indicates that the volume of fluid has
completely filled the cavity, and so the simulation is stopped by default. You can ignore this
constraint by retaining the default value of 0 for the Filtering Threshold on Fluid Fraction
entry in the calculation activities panel (see Calculation Activities Properties (p. 924)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
558 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

4.5.9. Modeling Foaming

Foamed polymer is extruded to obtain very light insulation parts. Polyethylene with dissolved gas
enters through the inlet section and flows through the converging section and the die land. Next,
throughout the extrudate, the material is free to deform. The workspace does not consider the
chemical aspects of the foaming, but only its physical aspect: as soon as the mixture leaves the die
or at least when the pressure is low enough, the dissolved gas will expand and the bubbles will grow,
leading to a severe diminution of the mixture density. The Arefmanesh model (described in Foaming
Theory (p. 561)) is used for predicting this behavior.

The model of foaming should be considered only with extrusion involving free surfaces (see Modeling
the Determination of Die Lip Shape (Inverse Extrusion) (p. 542) and Modeling the Prediction of Extrudate
Shape (Direct Extrusion) (p. 533) for more information on how to define such cases), as the bubble
growth is generally impaired in confined domains.

Figure 4.28: Extrusion of a Foamed Profile: Domains and Boundaries (p. 559) displays a sketch of a
realistic model for the simulation of an extrusion flow involving foaming. From right to left, the mixture
(grey) enters the die channel, flows through the channel, exits the die, and expands freely (extrudate
in yellow).

Figure 4.28: Extrusion of a Foamed Profile: Domains and Boundaries

Figure 4.29: Extrusion of a Foamed Profile: Die Lip Shape Prediction and Bubble Radius Distribu-
tion (p. 560) displays the foamed profile and the bubble radius distribution for a case where the pre-
diction of the die lip shape was requested.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 559
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.29: Extrusion of a Foamed Profile: Die Lip Shape Prediction and Bubble Radius
Distribution

The mandatory components are the following:

i. the geometry contains at least two zones (one for the flow within the die, one for the extrud-
ate) and at least four boundaries (inlet, wall, free surface, exit),

ii. appropriate material data,

iii. boundary or operating conditions, such as flow rate, behaviour along the die wall, condition
at the exit.

• Rheological Models

Only the generalized Newtonian fluid models can be invoked, under both isothermal and thermal
conditions. Default values are assigned to the several parameters, but it is always a good idea to
check them. There are also material data files available in the Extrusion and Miscellaneous families
in the Library of Materials.

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

The calculation domain must contain at least two zones. One zone is needed for the calculation of
the flow within the die, and another zone is needed for the calculation of the extrudate that deforms
from the die exit until the exit of the calculation domain. A mesh deformation algorithm is applied
on this latter zone. If a die lip prediction is requested, a mesh deformation must be also be defined
on the die domain.

As can be seen in Figure 4.28: Extrusion of a Foamed Profile: Domains and Boundaries (p. 559), the
calculation domain is surrounded by at least four boundaries:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
560 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

– the inlet where a flow rate is usually assigned and where the workspace fixes the bubble
radius,

– the fixed die wall where slipping can be specified,

– the outer border of the extrudate where free surface conditions are imposed, and

– the exit of the calculation domain. On this latter border, a take-up force or velocity can be
imposed, and a stress free condition is also possible.

Sometimes, additional boundaries are needed as this is typically the case when symmetry
planes do exist and are taken into account.

• Additional Modeling Features

There are actually limited possibilities for expanding the model used for calculating the foaming.
Thermal effects can be considered, and require selecting appropriate material data such as thermal
conductivity, heat capacity, as well as possible temperature dependence of material properties that
also requires assigning thermal boundary conditions and specifying appropriate temperature ini-
tialization.

Note that the use of guiding devices with gravity effects also can play a visible role, and it is a good
idea to define a conveyor belt or a roller conveyor, as is most likely present in the actual process.

• Convergence Strategies

From the above description, a model for extrudate shape and or die lip prediction can involve
several non-linearities originating from the geometry, the rheology, and the boundary conditions.
To these non-linearities one can of course add the variable density and the bubble growth model.
For facilitating the calculation, convergence strategies have been implemented and have been
made available. Next to convergence strategy for free surfaces and moving interfaces that is highly
recommended, you can also invoke convergence strategies for thermal flows, for rheology and
slipping. Of course, the convergence strategy for foaming is mandatory. The required convergence
strategies are not set by default, and you must select convergence strategies in accordance with
the setup. Decoupling the computation of species may also help for the convergence.

• Additional Information

There are additional resources for exploring this type of simulation:

– For an example that demonstrates a foaming application, see Extrusion of a Foamed Profile.

4.5.9.1. Foaming Theory

The Arefmanesh model (References (p. 562)) is used for predicting the bubble growth occurring
during the foaming process. The model assumes a purely viscous material, and that the time scale
of gas diffusion is longer than that of bubble expansion. Hence, the diffusion of dissolved gas from
the polymer into the bubble is neglected. The model is such that all physics is lumped in a single
transport equation that dictates the bubble radius R:

(4.5)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 561
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

where pg is the gas pressure and p is the matrix pressure. The parameter plays the role of surface
tension, as it slows down a bit of the bubble growth. The quantity is a macroscopic viscosity of
the (dense) polymer matrix around the bubble. The power index a may add some non-linearities
to the model. Eventually, parameter b is a booster if the foaming is not as large as expected.

A second aspect to consider is the way the density of the mixture depends on the number of
bubbles and their size (assuming that the mass of the gas is negligible compared to the polymer
matrix). The density ρ of the mixture is given by:

(4.6)

where ρp is the density of the polymer matrix (without blowing agent, that is, with R equivalent to
0), and N is the number of cells per unit volume of gas/polymer mixture. Also, while foaming pro-
gresses, the macroscopic viscosity of our mixture decreases since the volume increase results only
from gas expansion. Hence, with the bubble growth, the workspace assumes that the zero-shear
viscosity of the mixture decreases in the same way as the density:

(4.7)

where is the zero-shear viscosity of the polymer matrix (without blowing agent, that is, with R
equivalent to 0).

The model does not necessarily predict an equilibrium bubble size: gas pressure decreases with
increasing bubble radius but does not vanish. In actual cases, however, bubbles do not grow infin-
itely, since the polymer cools down and the extrudate shape freezes.

4.5.9.2. References
A. Arefmanesh, S. G. Advani, and E. E. Michaelides, “A numerical study of bubble growth during low
pressure structural foam molding process”, Polym. Eng. Sci., 30, 1330–1337, 1990.

4.5.10. Modeling Coextrusion

Many consumer products are made of two or more materials, for example to confer them specific
visual, mechanical or chemical properties. The control of the interface between materials with different
properties is therefore important for matching technological or market requirements. The workspace
enables the simulation of coextrusion. Here the interface between adjacent materials is tracked by
means of a transport variable, while velocity, pressure and possibly temperature are evaluated along
the usual procedure. Such calculations can be performed inside a die, but may also involve the pre-
diction of the extrudate shape.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
562 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

Figure 4.30: An Example of Coextrusion

Figure 4.30: An Example of Coextrusion (p. 563) illustrates a coextrusion flow with a relatively simplified
die for the production of coextruded tubing. From left to right, two materials, blue and yellow, enter
the die through individual inlets, merge into the die before being subsequently dragged. In general,
next to the prediction of the interface(s), such calculation provides useful output such as, but not
limited to, velocity, pressure and temperature. Important components are the following:

i. the geometry with at least one zone and four boundaries (two inlets, wall, exit) when focussing
on the internal coextrusion flow only, and at least two zones and five boundaries (two inlets,
wall, free surface, exit) for the prediction of extrudate shape,

ii. appropriate material data for at least two materials,

iii. boundary or operating conditions, such as flow rates, behaviour along the die wall, condition
at the exit.

• Rheological Models

For setting up the calculation of coextrusion flow, all generalized Newtonian fluid models can be
invoked, under both isothermal and thermal conditions. Default values are assigned to the several
parameters, but it is always a good idea to check them. There are also material data files available
in the Extrusion and Miscellaneous families in the Library of Materials.

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

The calculation domain must contain at least two zones when the extrudate shape is predicted,
one for the flow within the channel, and one for the extrudate. A mesh deformation algorithm is
applied on this latter zone, that may significantly deform due to velocity rearrangement as well as
to the take-up velocity or force.

The calculation domain shown in Figure 4.30: An Example of Coextrusion (p. 563) is surrounded by
seven boundaries:

– two inlets where flow rates are assigned,

– the fixed inner and outer channel walls where slipping can be specified,

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 563
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

– the inner and outer free surfaces of the coextruded tubing, and

– the exit of the calculation domain.

On this latter border, a take-up force or velocity can be imposed. Sometimes, additional
boundaries are needed: for example, when symmetry planes do exist and are taken into
account into the model.

• Additional Modeling Features

When the extrudate prediction is involved, the present coextrusion model can be expanded by
adding a few more features. Thermal effects, including conjugated heat transfer with the solid die,
can be considered. This requires specifying appropriate material data such as thermal conductivity,
heat capacity, as well as possible temperature dependence of material properties, it also requires
assigning thermal boundary conditions and specifying appropriate temperature initialization.

Specific features can be added for the extrudate, such as take-up force or velocity, free jet stabiliz-
ation for small profiles, and conveyor belt or rollers for heavy profiles.

The coextrusion model can also be used for die lip shape determination, however, it is important
to remember that the extrudate shape is dictated while the interface between fluid layers cannot
be controlled.

• Convergence Strategies

From the above description, the primary source of non-linearity in the setup for the calculation of
a coextrusion flow originates from the interface prediction. For facilitating the calculation, conver-
gence strategies have been implemented and made available, and you must select them in accord-
ance with the setup. Next to convergence strategy for multiple materials that is often recommended
here, you can also invoke convergence strategies for viscosity and slipping, free surfaces and/or
for thermal flows.

• Additional Information

There are additional resources for exploring this type of simulation:

– To use a template for the calculation of coextrusion flow, see Using the Extrusion Template (p. 568).

– For a tutorial that demonstrates coextrusion, see Multiple Material Coextruded Tubing.

4.5.11. Modeling Fiber Spinning

An important component of the fiber spinning or fiber drawing process occurs where a molten
polymer filament is stretched at a high velocity in order to produce a fiber of very small transverse
dimensions. Typical transverse dimensions of synthetic fibers can be of the order of 10 µm; typical
take-up velocities are often of the order of 100 m/s at some distance from the spinneret, they are
however significantly smaller in the vicinity of the spinneret.

To some extent, modeling fiber spinning process does not significantly differ from profile extrusion.
However, dimensions are much smaller, so that gravity effects can be neglected, while heat transfer
as well as rheology may play a visible role. Without unnecessarily loading a model, stretching, cooling
and strain hardening are three major effects that can be considered, probably with decreasing prior-
ities

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
564 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing Your Simulation Type

Figure 4.31: An Example of Fiber Spinning

Figure 4.31: An Example of Fiber Spinning (p. 565) illustrates a simple model for the spinning simulation
of a non-symmetric tri-lobal fiber (left), together with the distribution of the velocity magnitude at
the inlet, on the inner wall of the spinneret and the fiber free surface (right), presently up to a
downstream length of 20 mm.

From left to right, the melt (light blue) enters a channel of the spinneret (grey), flows through a
channel of the spinneret, exits the channel, and is subsequently pulled at a high take-up force or
velocity. The following components are needed:

i. the geometry contains at least two zones (for the flow within the channel, and for the fiber)
and at least four boundaries (inlet, wall, free surface, exit),

ii. appropriate material data,

iii. boundary or operating conditions, such as flow rate, behavior along the die wall, take-up
force or velocity.

• Rheological Models

For setting up the simulation of fiber spinning, all generalized Newtonian fluid models, differential
viscoelastic models, as well as the simplified viscoelastic model are available, under isothermal and
thermal conditions. However, since elongation of the fiber is presumably more important than
material shear-thinning in the channel, you should consider a model that exhibits some amount
of strain hardening, or at least no thinning in extension.

• Domains and Boundary Conditions

The calculation domain must contain at least two zones, one for the flow within the channel and
one for the fiber. A mesh deformation algorithm is applied on this latter zone, which may significantly
deform due to the take-up velocity or force.

As shown in Figure 4.31: An Example of Fiber Spinning (p. 565), the calculation domain is surrounded
by at least four boundaries:

– the inlet where a flow rate is usually assigned,

– the fixed channel wall where slipping can be specified,

– the free surface of the fiber, and

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 565
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

– the exit of the calculation domain.

On this latter border, a take-up force or velocity is imposed. Sometimes, additional bound-
aries are needed: for example, when symmetry planes do exist and are taken into account
into the model.

• Additional Modeling Features

The present simple model for fiber spinning can be expanded. Primarily, thermal effects can be
considered that require additional material data as well as assigning thermal boundary conditions
and specifying temperature initialization. Conjugated heat transfer with the die is also possible.

Specific features can be selected for the fiber. If moderate draw-down effects are expected, it can
be useful to invoke the free jet stabilization when the profile lacks symmetry. For high draw-down
effects, stabilization is often naturally recovered.

• Convergence Strategies

A model for fiber spinning can involve several non-linearities originating from the geometry, the
rheology, and the boundary conditions. For facilitating the calculation, convergence strategies can
be activated. Next to convergence strategy for free surfaces and moving interfaces which is often
recommended, you can also activate convergence strategies for thermal flows, for rheology and
slipping, as well as for the take-up force or velocity.

• Related Notes

– Avoid using a model intrinsically characterized by strain-thinning behavior. The simplified

viscoelastic model has no real added value in fiber spinning.

– The assigned take-up velocity should never vanish.

– Very thin thermal boundary layers can develop along the fiber surface, due to the combination
of small transverse dimensions and large velocities.

• Additional Information

There are additional resources for exploring this type of simulation:

– To use a template for the prediction of extrudate shape, see Using the Extrusion Template (p. 568).

– For an example that demonstrates the simulation of fiber spinning of a viscoelastic fluid, see
Spinning Simulation of a Non-Symmetric Trilobal Viscoelastic Fiber.

4.6. Choosing a Simulation Template

To use a simulation template in the workspace, click the Use template... button, under the Simulation
category, in the Setup Ribbon. This displays the Simulation Template dialog.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
566 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing a Simulation Template

Figure 4.32: Creating a New Simulation Using the Ribbon

The following laminar flow simulation types are available using templates:

• Internal Flow (Using the Internal Flow Template (p. 567)) - available in 2D and 3D.

• Extrusion (Using the Extrusion Template (p. 568)) - available in 2D and 3D.

• Blow Molding & Thermoforming (Using the Blow Molding & Thermoforming Template (p. 570)) -
available in shell only.

• Pressing (Using the Pressing Template (p. 570)) - available in 2D and 3D.

• Compounding and Mixing (Using the Compounding & Mixing Template (p. 570)) - available in 2D
and 3D.

• Film Casting (Using the Film Casting Template (p. 571)) - available in 2D only.

• Filling (Using the Filling Template (p. 571)) - available in 2D and 3D.

4.6.1. Using the Internal Flow Template

The Internal Flow template helps you quickly set up a simple simulation of internal flow through a
pipe, a die or any hollow object. With this option, several boundary conditions are already provided
for you as part of the template:

• inlet: an open boundary where fluid is entering the physics region.

• outlet: an open boundary where fluid is exiting the physics region.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 567
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• wall: a closed boundary across which fluid cannot flow into or out of the physics region.

Note:

You may also want to take advantage of any symmetry in your simulation. In such cases,
you can choose to add separate boundary condition(s). A symmetry boundary represents
a closed boundary at a plane of symmetry across which fluid is not expected to flow.

1. Specify whether or not to include Thermal considerations.

2. Specify whether or not to include Conjugate Heat Transfer considerations.

When you have made your selections, click Apply to get started. The Outline View will be populated
with elements corresponding to the choices you make in the template. The settings of each element
will then have to be reviewed and completed as necessary.

For additional information on simulating these types of flows in the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace, see Modeling Internal Flows (p. 531).

4.6.2. Using the Extrusion Template

The Extrusion template helps you quickly set up a simulation where you can investigate the extrusion
of materials such as polymer, uncured rubber, molten glass, and food-related materials.

1. Specify the extrusion simulation Goal

• Select Analyze flow within die when you want to investigate the laminar flow within just the
die itself. With this option, several boundary conditions are already provided for you as part of
the template:

– inlet: an open boundary where fluid is entering the physics region.

– outlet: an open boundary where fluid is exiting the physics region.

– wall: a closed boundary across which fluid cannot flow into or out of the physics region.

• Select Predict extrudate shape when you want to determine the shape of the extrudate based
on the geometry of the die, material properties, and operating conditions. With this option,
several objects are already provided for you as part of the template:

– extrudate: the deformation of the extrudate.

– free surface: a boundary that represents the outer surface of the extrudate.

– extrudate exit: an open boundary where the fluid exits at the extremity of the extrudate
region.

– inlet: an open boundary where fluid is entering the physics region.

– wall: a closed boundary across which fluid cannot flow into or out of the physics region.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
568 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing a Simulation Template

• Select Determine die lip shape when you want to determine the shape of the die lip corres-
ponding to the desired cross section of the extrudate. With this option, several objects are
already provided for you as part of the template:

– extrudate: the deformation of the extrudate.

– free surface: a boundary that represents the outer surface of the extrudate.

– die deformation: the deformation of the die.

– extrudate exit: an open boundary where the fluid exits at the extremity of the extrudate
region.

– inlet: an open boundary where fluid is entering the physics region.

– wall: a closed boundary across which fluid cannot flow into or out of the physics region.

Note:

In either case, you may also want to take advantage of any symmetry in your simulation.
In such cases, you can choose to add separate boundary condition(s). A symmetry
boundary represents a closed boundary at a plane of symmetry across which fluid is
not expected to flow.

2. Specify the Number of Fluids. The template allows you to define coextrusion with two or more
different materials: assuming that each material enters through a different inlet. When the number
of fluids is greater than one, then the fluid materials must be designated as Generalized Newtonian
materials.

3. Specify the Number of Restrictors.

Note:

A restrictor is an obstacle, also called a choker, placed within the flow channel to
better control the flow and to obtain the targeted flow distribution, in general to
have a more uniform velocity profile at the exit of the die.

4. Specify whether or not to include Thermal considerations.

5. Specify whether or not to include Conjugate Heat Transfer considerations.

When you have made your selections, click Apply to get started. The Outline View will be populated
with elements corresponding to the choices you make in the template. The settings of each element
will then have to be reviewed and completed as necessary.

For additional information on simulating these types of flows in the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace, see Modeling the Prediction of Extrudate Shape (Direct Extrusion) (p. 533) and Modeling
the Determination of Die Lip Shape (Inverse Extrusion) (p. 542).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 569
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.6.3. Using the Blow Molding & Thermoforming Template

The Blow Molding & Thermoforming template helps you quickly set up a simulation where you can
investigate the blow molding and thermoforming processes, usually for molten polymers.

Note:

A shell mesh is required for this template.

1. Specify the Number of Fixed Molds.

2. Specify the Number of Moving Molds.

3. Specify the Number of Layers.

4. Specify the Duration for the simulation.

5. Specify whether or not to include Thermal considerations.

When you have made your selections, click Apply to get started. The Outline View will be populated
with elements corresponding to the choices you make in the template. The settings of each element
will then have to be reviewed and completed as necessary.

For additional information on simulating these types of flows in the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace, see Modeling Blow Molding and Thermoforming (p. 544).

4.6.4. Using the Pressing Template

The Pressing template helps you quickly set up a transient simulation where you can investigate the
behavior of fluids (often polymer or glass) in a pressing process.

1. Specify the Number of Fixed Molds.

2. Specify the Number of Moving Molds.

3. Specify the Duration for the simulation.

4. Specify whether or not to include Thermal considerations.

5. Specify whether or not to include Conjugate Heat Transfer considerations.

When you have made your selections, click Apply to get started. The Outline View will be populated
with elements corresponding to the choices you make in the template. The settings of each element
will then have to be reviewed and completed as necessary.

For additional information on simulating these types of flows in the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace, see Modeling Pressing (p. 547).

4.6.5. Using the Compounding & Mixing Template

The Compounding & Mixing template helps you quickly set up a transient simulation in which solid
moving parts such as screw extruder(s), mixing blades, piston, etc. interact with the fluid.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
570 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Choosing a Simulation Template

1. Specify the Mode of compounding and mixing simulation

• Select Batch Mixer when you want to perform an analysis in a closed domain.

• Select Extruder when you want to perform an analysis in an open domain with inlet(s) and
outlet(s).

2. Specify the Number of Moving Parts.

3. Specify the Duration for the simulation.

4. Specify whether or nor to include Thermal considerations.

When you have made your selections, click Apply to get started. The Outline View will be populated
with elements corresponding to the choice you make in the template. The settings of each element
will then have to be completed: such as the definition of the initial location and the motion of each
moving part, the flow rate, etc.

For additional information on simulating these types of flows in the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace, see Modeling Compounding and Mixing (p. 549).

For more details, see Flows with Internal Moving Parts in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.6.6. Using the Film Casting Template

The Film Casting template helps you quickly set up a simulation where you can investigate polymer
film casting.

1. Specify the Number of Layers.

2. Specify whether or not to include Thermal considerations.

When you have made your selections, click Apply to get started. The Outline View will be populated
with elements corresponding to the choices you make in the template. The settings of each element
will then have to be reviewed and completed as necessary.

For additional information on simulating these types of flows in the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace, see Modeling Film Casting (p. 551).

4.6.7. Using the Filling Template

The Filling template helps you quickly set up a simulation where you can investigate filling processes.

1. Specify the Number of Inlets.

2. Specify the Number of Vents.

3. Specify the Duration for the simulation.

4. Specify whether or not to include Thermal considerations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 571
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

When you have made your selections, click Apply to get started. The Outline View will be populated
with elements corresponding to the choices you make in the template. The settings of each element
will then have to be reviewed and completed as necessary.

For additional information on simulating these types of flows in the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace, see Modeling Filling (p. 553).

4.7. Using the Simulation Wizard

The workspace provides a convenient way to set up the most common materials processing simulations
through the use of specialized wizards.

1. Start the workspace.

2. Read in a mesh (either a Fluent or a Polyflow mesh file).

Note:

When the Fluent Materials Processing workspace reads in a mesh, all topological
names (later referenced by the wizard) are changed to lower case.

3. Click the Use wizard... button, under the Simulation category, in the Setup Ribbon. This displays
the Wizards dialog.

Figure 4.33: Creating a New Simulation Using the Wizard

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
572 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Simulation Wizard

4. In the Wizards dialog, select an appropriate Type. Depending on the mesh topology, you can
choose from:

4.7.1. Using the Simple Internal Flow Wizard

4.7.2. Using the Simple Direct Extrusion Wizard
4.7.3. Using the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard
4.7.4. Using the Blow Molding / Thermoforming Wizards

4.7.1. Using the Simple Internal Flow Wizard

This wizard is available for you to quickly set up and solve a simple internal flow problem for a given
mesh. The wizard expects a particular topology as described in Expected Topology for the Simple
Internal Flow Wizard (p. 573).

Figure 4.34: The Simple Internal Flow Wizard

1. Specify a Fluid Material.

2. Provide a value for the Mass Flow Rate.

3. Enable the Thermal option if temperatures are important in your simulation, in which case, you
can then provide the Inlet Temperature and the Wall Temperature.

4. Use the Start solver option to automatically start solving the simulation once the simulation has
been set up.

If this option is enabled, once you click Apply and leave the wizard, the workspace takes your
settings and sets up the simulation accordingly and solves the problem automatically. Once the
calculations are completed, you can easily proceed to analyze the results.

4.7.1.1. Expected Topology for the Simple Internal Flow Wizard

The Simple Internal Flow Wizard requires a simple topology which includes an inlet, an outlet, one
or several walls and possibly one or several symmetry planes, as suggested in Figure 4.35: Boundary
Zones for Simple Internal Flow (p. 574).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 573
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.35: Boundary Zones for Simple Internal Flow

As such, when using the wizard, zones are expected to have specific names:

Role in the Wizard Recommended Zone Name

Zones fluid-zone Any zone name
Boundary inlet inlet
Zones outlet Any boundary name(s) containing exit
symmetry Any boundary name(s) containing symm
wall Any boundary name(s) containing wall

4.7.2. Using the Simple Direct Extrusion Wizard

This wizard is available for you to quickly set up and solve a direct extrusion problem for a given
mesh. The wizard expects a particular topology as described in Expected Topology for the Simple
Direct Extrusion Wizard (p. 575).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
574 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Simulation Wizard

Figure 4.36: The Simple Direct Extrusion Wizard

1. Specify a Fluid Material.

2. Provide a value for the Mass Flow Rate.

3. Enable the Thermal option if temperatures are important in your simulation, in which case, you
can then provide the Inlet Temperature and the Wall Temperature.

4. Use the Start solver option to automatically start solving the simulation once the simulation has
been set up.

If this option is enabled, once you click Apply and leave the wizard, the workspace takes your
settings and sets up the extrusion simulation accordingly and solves the problem automatically.
Once the calculations are completed, you can easily proceed to analyze the results.

4.7.2.1. Expected Topology for the Simple Direct Extrusion Wizard

The Simple Direct Extrusion Wizard requires a topology which includes specific zones and bound-
aries: required zones are a die channel and an extrudate; required boundaries include an inlet, an
outlet, one or several walls, free surface(s), and possibly one or several symmetry planes, as suggested
in the following figures:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 575
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.37: Zones for Simple Direct Extrusion

Figure 4.38: Boundary Zones for Simple Direct Extrusion

As such, when using the wizard, zones are expected to have specific names:

Role in the Wizard Recommended Zone Name

Zones die die
extrudate extrudate
Boundary inlet inlet
Zones first symmetry plane symmetry1

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
576 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Simulation Wizard

Role in the Wizard Recommended Zone Name

second symmetry plane symmetry2
die walls wall
free surface freesurface
extrudate-exit exit

Note:

In general, all boundaries containing "symm" will be considered as symmetry boundaries,

all boundaries containing "wall" will be considered as wall boundaries, and all boundaries
containing "freesurf" will be considered as free surface boundaries, however, a single
boundary must be named "exit" for the extrudate exit, and a single boundary must be
named "inlet" for the inlet condition. Symmetry boundaries are, of course, optional, and
while these boundaries may or may not exist, the workspace will use them if present.

4.7.3. Using the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard

This wizard is available for you to quickly set up and solve an inverse extrusion problem for a given
mesh. The wizard expects a particular topology as described in Expected Topologies for the Simple
Inverse Extrusion Wizard (p. 578).

Figure 4.39: The Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard

1. Specify a Fluid Material.

2. Provide a value for the Mass Flow Rate.

3. Specify the Die Type. The wizard requires a specific topology, depending on the specific combin-
ation of included sections. See Expected Topologies for the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard (p. 578)
for more information.

4. Enable the Thermal option if temperatures are important in your simulation, in which case, you
can then provide the Inlet Temperature and the Wall Temperature.

5. Use the Start solver option to automatically start solving the simulation once the simulation has
been set up.

If this option is enabled, once you click Apply and leave the wizard, the workspace takes your
settings and sets up the extrusion simulation accordingly and solves the problem automatically.
Once the calculations are completed, you can easily proceed to analyze the results.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 577
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.7.3.1. Expected Topologies for the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard

The Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard requires a specific topology, depending on the specific com-
bination of included sections.
4.7.3.1.1. Fixed/Adaptive/Constant Sections
4.7.3.1.2. Fixed/Adaptive Sections
4.7.3.1.3. Adaptive/Constant Sections
4.7.3.1.4. Adaptive Sections
4.7.3.1.5. Constant Sections

4.7.3.1.1. Fixed/Adaptive/Constant Sections

For fixed/adaptive/constant section configurations, the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard requires
a topology which includes specific zones and boundaries. Required zones are a die channel made
of a fixed, an adaptive and a constant section, as well as an extrudate. Required boundaries include
an inlet, an outlet, one or several walls, free surface(s), and possibly one or several symmetry
planes, as suggested in the following figures:

Figure 4.40: Zones for Fixed/Adaptive/Constant Sections

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
578 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Simulation Wizard

Figure 4.41: Boundary Zones for Fixed/Adaptive/Constant Sections

As such, when using the wizard, zones are expected to have specific names:

Role in the Wizard Recommended Zone Name

Zones fixed part of the die fixed
adaptive part of the die adaptive
constant part of the die constant
extrudate extrudate
Boundary inlet inlet
Zones first symmetry plane symmetry1
second symmetry plane symmetry2
die walls wall
free surface freesurface
extrudate-exit exit

Note:

In general, all boundaries containing "symm" will be considered as symmetry bound-

aries, all boundaries containing "wall" will be considered as wall boundaries, and all
boundaries containing "freesurf" will be considered as free surface boundaries, however,
a single boundary must be named "exit" for the extrudate exit, and a single boundary
must be named "inlet" for the inlet condition. Symmetry boundaries are, of course,

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 579
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

optional, and while these boundaries may or may not exist, the workspace will use
them if present.

4.7.3.1.2. Fixed/Adaptive Sections

For fixed/adaptive section configurations, the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard requires a topology
which includes specific zones and boundaries. Required zones are a die channel made of a fixed
and an adaptive section, as well as an extrudate. Required boundaries include an inlet, an outlet,
one or several walls, free surface(s), and possibly one or several symmetry planes, as suggested
in the following figures:

Figure 4.42: Zones for Fixed/Adaptive Sections

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
580 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Simulation Wizard

Figure 4.43: Boundary Zones for Fixed/Adaptive Sections

As such, when using the wizard, zones are expected to have specific names:

Role in the Wizard Recommended Zone Name

Zones fixed part of the die fixed
adaptive part of the die adaptive
extrudate extrudate
Boundary inlet inlet
Zones first symmetry plane symmetry1
second symmetry plane symmetry2
die walls wall
free surface freesurface
extrudate-exit exit

Note:

In general, all boundaries containing "symm" will be considered as symmetry bound-

aries, all boundaries containing "wall" will be considered as wall boundaries, and all
boundaries containing "freesurf" will be considered as free surface boundaries, however,
a single boundary must be named "exit" for the extrudate exit, and a single boundary
must be named "inlet" for the inlet condition. Symmetry boundaries are, of course,

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 581
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

optional, and while these boundaries may or may not exist, the workspace will use
them if present.

4.7.3.1.3. Adaptive/Constant Sections

For adaptive/constant section configurations, the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard requires a to-
pology which includes specific zones and boundaries. Required zones are a die channel made of
an adaptive and an constant section, as well as an extrudate. Required boundaries include an
inlet, an outlet, one or several walls, free surface(s), and possibly one or several symmetry planes,
as suggested in the following figures:

Figure 4.44: Zones for Adaptive/Constant Sections

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
582 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Simulation Wizard

Figure 4.45: Boundary Zones for Adaptive/Constant Sections

As such, when using the wizard, zones are expected to have specific names:

Role in the Wizard Recommended Zone Name

Zones adaptive part of the die adaptive
constant part of the die constant
extrudate extrudate
Boundary inlet inlet
Zones first symmetry plane symmetry1
second symmetry plane symmetry2
die walls wall
free surface freesurface
extrudate-exit exit

Note:

In general, all boundaries containing "symm" will be considered as symmetry bound-

aries, all boundaries containing "wall" will be considered as wall boundaries, and all
boundaries containing "freesurf" will be considered as free surface boundaries, however,
a single boundary must be named "exit" for the extrudate exit, and a single boundary
must be named "inlet" for the inlet condition. Symmetry boundaries are, of course,

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 583
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

optional, and while these boundaries may or may not exist, the workspace will use
them if present.

4.7.3.1.4. Adaptive Sections

For adaptive section configurations, the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard requires a topology
which includes specific zones and boundaries. Required zones are a die channel made of an ad-
aptive section, as well as an extrudate. Required boundaries include an inlet, an outlet, one or
several walls, free surface(s), and possibly one or several symmetry planes, as suggested in the
following figures:

Figure 4.46: Zones for Adaptive Sections

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
584 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Simulation Wizard

Figure 4.47: Boundary Zones for Adaptive Sections

As such, when using the wizard, zones are expected to have specific names:

Role in the Wizard Recommended Zone Name

Zones adaptive part of the die adaptive
extrudate extrudate
Boundary inlet inlet
Zones first symmetry plane symmetry1
second symmetry plane symmetry2
die walls wall
free surface freesurface
extrudate-exit exit

Note:

In general, all boundaries containing "symm" will be considered as symmetry bound-

aries, all boundaries containing "wall" will be considered as wall boundaries, and all
boundaries containing "freesurf" will be considered as free surface boundaries, however,
a single boundary must be named "exit" for the extrudate exit, and a single boundary
must be named "inlet" for the inlet condition. Symmetry boundaries are, of course,

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 585
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

optional, and while these boundaries may or may not exist, the workspace will use
them if present.

4.7.3.1.5. Constant Sections

For constant section configurations, the Simple Inverse Extrusion Wizard requires a topology
which includes specific zones and boundaries. Required zones are a die channel made of a constant
section, as well as an extrudate. Required boundaries include an inlet, an outlet, one or several
walls, free surface(s), and possibly one or several symmetry planes, as suggested in the following
figures:

Figure 4.48: Zones for Constant Sections

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
586 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Simulation Wizard

Figure 4.49: Boundary Zones for Constant Sections

As such, when using the wizard, zones are expected to have specific names:

Role in the Wizard Recommended Zone Name

Zones constant part of the die constant
extrudate extrudate
Boundary inlet inlet
Zones first symmetry plane symmetry1
second symmetry plane symmetry2
die walls wall
free surface freesurface
extrudate-exit exit

Note:

In general, all boundaries containing "symm" will be considered as symmetry bound-

aries, all boundaries containing "wall" will be considered as wall boundaries, and all
boundaries containing "freesurf" will be considered as free surface boundaries, however,
a single boundary must be named "exit" for the extrudate exit, and a single boundary
must be named "inlet" for the inlet condition. Symmetry boundaries are, of course,

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 587
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

optional, and while these boundaries may or may not exist, the workspace will use
them if present.

4.7.4. Using the Blow Molding / Thermoforming Wizards

This collection of wizards is available for you to quickly set up and solve blow molding or thermoform-
ing problem for a given mesh. The blow molding and thermoforming wizards, however, require shell
geometries, and otherwise expect a particular topology, as described in Expected Topologies for the
Blow Molding / Thermoforming Wizards (p. 591).

Figure 4.50: An Example of a Blow Molding / Thermoforming Wizard

1. Specify a particular Type of wizard, depending on your requirements. Choices include:

• Blow Molding / Thermoforming: 1 fixed mold

• Blow Molding / Thermoforming: 1 mold driven by force

• Blow Molding / Thermoforming: 1 mold driven by velocity

• Blow Molding / Thermoforming: 2 molds driven by force

• Blow Molding / Thermoforming: 2 molds driven by velocity

2. Specify the Fluid Material.

3. Specify the Duration.

4. Determine the orientation of the mold body.

If the workspace identifies the mesh as a mold using topological names, then arrows are used in
the graphics window to help you visualize the current direction of the mold body orientation.
When using a single mold, use the Flip mold body side check box to change the direction of (or
"flip") the mold body's orientation.

When using two molds, you can choose to use the Flip mold1 body side and/or the Flip mold2
body side check box.

In Figure 4.51: Example of Graphical Indicators of Mold Body Orientation (p. 589), for instance, note
that the darts point in the direction of the single mold cavity. Consequently, you can use the Flip

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
588 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Simulation Wizard

mold body side check box to reverse the orientation of the darts so that they point into the mold
body side.

Figure 4.51: Example of Graphical Indicators of Mold Body Orientation

5. When the Type is set to Blow Molding / Thermoforming: 1 mold driven by force, specify the
mass, maximum displacement of the mold, and the force components acting/applied on it and
its initial velocity:

a. Specify the Mold Mass.

b. Specify the Mold Maximum Displacement

c. Specify the x-, y-, and z-components of the translational force acting/applied on the mold
(Mold Translation Force - Fx, Mold Translation Force - Fy, and Mold Translation Force
- Fz).

d. Specify the x-, y-, and z-components of the mold's initial velocity (Mold Initial Velocity
- Vx, Mold Initial Velocity - Vy, and Mold Initial Velocity - Vz).

6. When the Type is set to Blow Molding / Thermoforming: 1 mold driven by velocity, specify
the velocity components of the mold.

Specify the x-, y-, and z-components of the mold's velocity (Mold Velocity - Vx, Mold Velocity -
Vy, and Mold Velocity - Vz) as either a constant or an expression.

7. When the Type is set to Blow Molding / Thermoforming: 2 molds driven by force set the mass,
maximum displacement of the molds, and force components acting /applied on them, and their
initial velocities:

a. Specify whether the first mold is fixed or not (Mold1 fixed).

b. Specify the mass of the first mold (Mold1 Mass).

c. Specify the maximum displacement of the first mold (Mold1 Maximum Displacement).

d. Specify the x-, y-, and z-components of the translational force acting/applied on the first mold
(Mold1 Translation Force - Fx, Mold1 Translation Force - Fy, and Mold1 Translation Force
- Fz).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 589
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

e. Specify the x-, y-, and z-components of the first mold's initial velocity (Mold1 Initial Velocity
- Vx, Mold1 Initial Velocity - Vy, and Mold1 Initial Velocity - Vz).

f. Specify whether the second mold is fixed or not (Mold2 fixed).

g. Specify the mass of the second mold (Mold2 Mass).

h. Specify the maximum displacement of the second mold (Mold2 Maximum Displacement).

i. Specify the x-, y-, and z-components of the translational force acting/applied on the second
mold (Mold2 Translation Force - Fx, Mold2 Translation Force - Fy, and Mold2 Translation
Force - Fz).

j. Specify the x-, y-, and z-components of the second mold's initial velocity (Mold2 Initial Velocity
- Vx, Mold2 Initial Velocity - Vy, and Mold2 Initial Velocity - Vz).

8. When the Type is set to Blow Molding / Thermoforming: 2 molds driven by velocity, set the
velocity components of the mold(s):

a. Specify whether the first mold is fixed or not (Mold1 fixed).

b. Specify the x-, y-, and z-components of the first mold's velocity (Mold1 Velocity - Vx, Mold1
Velocity - Vy, and Mold1 Velocity - Vz) as either a constant or an expression.

c. Specify whether the second mold is fixed or not (Mold2 fixed).

d. Specify the x-, y-, and z-components of the second mold's velocity (Mold2 Velocity - Vx, Mold2
Velocity - Vy, and Mold2 Velocity - Vz) as either a constant or an expression.

9. Specify the Inflation Pressure. If the workspace identifies the mesh as a parison using topological
names, then arrows are used in the graphics window to help you visualize the direction of the
inflation pressure.

Figure 4.52: Example of Graphical Indicators of the Inflation Pressure (-1000 Pa)

Changing the sign of the value of the inflation pressure changes the orientation of the darts in
the graphics window, and therefore the way the air pushes on the polymer sheet.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
590 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the Simulation Wizard

Figure 4.53: Example of Graphical Indicators of the Inflation Pressure (+1000 Pa)

10. Specify the Time Dependency on Inflation Pressure as either a constant or an expression.

11. Specify the Parison Thickness.

12. Specify the Penetration Accuracy.

13. Enable the Thermal option if temperatures are important in your simulation, in which case, you
can then provide the Mold Temperature, the Parison Temperature, and the Heat Transfer
Coefficient. If you selected a wizard with two molds, you can specify the Mold1 Temperature
and the Mold2 Temperature.

14. Use the Start solver option to automatically start solving the simulation once the simulation has
been set up.

If this option is enabled, once you click Apply and leave the wizard, the workspace takes your
settings and sets up the blow molding/thermoforming simulation accordingly. Once the calculations
are completed, you can easily proceed to analyze the results.

4.7.4.1. Expected Topologies for the Blow Molding / Thermoforming Wizards

The Blow Molding / Thermoforming Wizards require a specific topology, depending on your simu-
lation. As such, when using the wizard, zones are expected to have specific names:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 591
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.54: Zones for Blow Molding / Thermoforming

The following table summarizes the expectations and behavior for how the blow molding / thermo-
forming wizards manage zones for a given topology:

1 1 1 2 2 Original Modified Topology Name

Fixed Mold Mold Molds Molds Topology
Mold - - - - Name
Velocity Force Velocity Force
Driven Driven Driven Driven
Zones "fluid" or <topology-name> included in the
* * * * *
"parison" fluid cell zone name
<topology-name> included in the
* * *
mold cell zone
"mold1" <topology-name> +
* *
"<fixed/moving>-mold1"
"mold2" <topology-name> +
* *
"<fixed/moving>-mold2"
Boundary "fixed" fixed-edges boundary
* * * * *
Zones condition (zero velocity)
"free" free-edges boundary condition
* * * * *
(zero force)
"symm" and symmetry boundary condition,
* * * * *
"nx" with normal = nx

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
592 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

1 1 1 2 2 Original Modified Topology Name

Fixed Mold Mold Molds Molds Topology
Mold - - - - Name
Velocity Force Velocity Force
Driven Driven Driven Driven
"symm" and symmetry boundary condition,
* * * * *
"ny" with normal = ny
"symm" and symmetry boundary condition,
* * * * *
"nz" with normal = nz

Note:

The wizards take action when the topology name contains either "fluid" or "parison" or
"mold1" or "mold2". No action is taken however if, for example, the topology name
contains just "mold" or just "symm".

4.8. Setting Up Your Simulation

The details of your simulation setup depend on the type of template you have chosen, however, you
can use the Outline View or the Ribbon to progress through the setup process. For instance, set your
general simulation properties, followed by material properties, cell zone properties, boundary condition
properties, and solution properties, etc.

• General properties: allow you to define the overall simulation. Here, you can view and adjust
any geometry, mesh, or calculation settings, as well as assorted physics options. See General
Simulation Settings (p. 594) or more information.

• Material properties: allow you to define the chemical and physical properties of a substance in
your simulation. See Materials (p. 594) or more information.

• Cell Zone properties: allow you to categorize various portions of your geometry (mesh). See Cell
Zones (p. 598) or more information.

• Boundary Condition properties: allow you to define the physical conditions at specific bound-
aries in your simulation, depending on the type of simulation you are setting up. See Boundary
Conditions (p. 603) or more information.

If temperature changes are being considered, Thermal Conditions can also be associated at
boundaries.

• Assign Pressures properties: (optional) allows you to set the pressure level for a fluid flow sim-
ulation within a closed domain. See Pressure Assignment (p. 618) or more information.

• Mesh Deformations properties: (optional) allow you to define how the mesh deforms in your
simulation. See Mesh Deformations (p. 619) for more information.

• Adaptive Meshing properties: (optional) allow you to define how the mesh can be adapted as
it changes during your simulation. See Adaptive Meshing (p. 620) for more information.

4.8.1. General Simulation Settings

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 593
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.8.2. Materials
4.8.3. Species
4.8.4. Cell Zones
4.8.5. Boundary Conditions
4.8.6. Assignments
4.8.7. Mesh Deformations
4.8.8. Adaptive Meshing

4.8.1. General Simulation Settings

Use the General node to access general properties of the selected simulation (Figure 4.55: General
Simulation Properties (p. 594)).

Figure 4.55: General Simulation Properties

Here, most of the fields are informational, however, you can go to this page to change the Geometry
Type (that depends on the loaded mesh), Calculation Type, Task Name, or any of the Physics Op-
tions.

By default, the Calculation Type is Steady, however, you may change this and select among Con-
tinuation (useful for specific non-linear calculations), Transient and Volume of fluid. In both of the
latter cases, you are prompted for the Duration of the simulation.

Among the general physical options, you may decide to incorporate thermal effects, fluid inertia,
and/or gravity effects; in the latter case, the components of the gravity vector must be given.

4.8.2. Materials
Use the Materials node to access materials and their properties of the selected simulation (Fig-
ure 4.56: Material Properties (p. 595)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
594 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Figure 4.56: Material Properties

Here, you can change the Name and elect to view and edit all (or a selection) of the material properties
(such as viscoelastic and/or thermal properties) using the View Properties field.

• Use the New... button (available in the property page when no material has yet been created, or
when using the context menu, or in the Setup portion of the ribbon) to create a new object with
its own unique properties. Assign a name and other assorted properties to the new material.

• Use the Import from library button to open the Library of Materials dialog. Here, you can choose
a material Family, and a corresponding Material to use in your simulation.

• Use the Import from file button to browse for and select a separate materials library file and add
it to your simulation. Browse to the location in the Fluent Materials Processing installation where
relevant material data can be found. For example:

C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v241\polyflow\polyflow24.1.0\Material_Data\

Various subdirectories therein contain materials defined using the .mprmat format that is compat-
ible with the Fluent Materials Processing workspace.

• Use the Export button to save a material definition to a separate file using the .mprmat format.

• Use the Fitting button to open Fluent Materials Processing where you can perform a fitting of your
material data.

If you have not already done so, you are required to assign a fluid model to your material fitting
using the Define Fluid Model dialog.

Options include:

• Density Law (p. 827)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 595
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• Thermal Properties (p. 828)

• Elastic Properties (p. 829)

• Viscosity Law (p. 830)

• Simplified Viscoelastic Law Properties (p. 837)

• Differential Viscoelastic Law Properties (p. 845)

• Integral Viscoelastic Law Properties (p. 848)

• Reinforcement Properties (p. 849)

• Foaming Properties (p. 851)

• Viscosity Law in Porous Medium Properties (p. 852)

For more information, see Material Properties in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.2.1. Simplified Viscoelastic Properties

See Simplified Viscoelastic Law Properties (p. 837) for details.

For more information, see Simplified Viscoelastic Model in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.2.2. Differential Viscoelastic Properties

The differential approach to modeling viscoelastic model is appropriate for most practical applica-
tions. Many of the most common models for viscoelastic model are provided in Fluent Materials
Processing, including

• Maxwell (see Upper-Convected Maxwell Model in the Polyflow User's Guide)

• Oldroyd-B (see Oldroyd-B Model in the Polyflow User's Guide)

• Giesekus (see Giesekus Model in the Polyflow User's Guide)

• Phan Thien-Tanner (see Phan-Thien-Tanner Model in the Polyflow User's Guide)

• Fene-P (see FENE-P Model in the Polyflow User's Guide)

• POMPOM (see POM-POM Model [DCPP] in the Polyflow User's Guide)

• Leonov (see Leonov Model in the Polyflow User's Guide)

Appropriate choices for the viscoelastic model and related parameters can yield qualitatively and
quantitatively accurate representations of viscoelastic behavior.

For the Number of Relaxation Modes, when a multi-mode viscoelastic model is used, the total
extra-stress tensor is decomposed into a sum of individual viscoelastic components, and one purely
viscous component.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
596 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

As for Thermal Dependencies, the viscosity in a thermal differential viscoelastic model can be
temperature-dependent. For thermal differential viscoelastic models, the relaxation time is multiplied
by the same temperature shift function. Temperature-dependent functions available for thermal
differential viscoelastic models are as follows, described in Theory and Equations in the Polyflow
User's Guide:

• None

• Approximate Arrhenius

• Arrhenius

• WLF

See Differential Viscoelastic Law Properties (p. 845) for details, or for more information, see Theory
and Equations Extra-Stress Tensor, and Differential Viscoelastic Models in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.2.3. Integral Viscoelastic Properties

For shell models, a multi-mode integral viscoelastic model for blow molding or thermoforming
applications can be used. This method makes use of a membrane element.

See Integral Viscoelastic Law Properties (p. 848) for details.

For more information, see 3D Viscoelastic Blow Molding Simulations in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.2.4. Reinforcement Properties

See Reinforcement Properties (p. 849) for details.

For more information, see Orthotropic Materials in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.2.5. Foaming Properties

For simulations that need to model physical foaming, such as in the inverse die lip shape prediction
for the extrusion of foamed profiles. In such cases, gas is dissolved in the polymer and the gas
bubbles begin to expand as soon as the polymer leaves the die.

See Foaming Properties (p. 851) for details.

Note:

The following limitations are known for the Fluent Materials Processing workspace:

• Foaming cannot be combined with multiple materials and/or transport of species

and/or generalized expressions defined on material properties.

• If an expression is defined on density, you cannot impose a mass flow rate at the
inlets and/or the outlets.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 597
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.8.2.6. Viscosity Laws in Porous Media

See Viscosity Law in Porous Medium Properties (p. 852) for details.

For more information, see Theory in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.3. Species
Use the Species node within the Materials group box to define the transport of species for your
simulation.

Figure 4.57: Species Properties

Here you can define up to 6 species and change the Name and Nick Name of the defined species if
necessary. Clicking on Activation makes the workspace define a transport model for the current
species, and model for which necessary parameters will be requested. The support of the model is
the union of fluid zones. The equation for modeling species transport in the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace is as follows:
(4.8)

where the Source Term and Scalar Diffusivity represent and , respectively. The Advection term
option can be disabled if you do not want to take the affects of into account. Note that is
always equal to 1. The Enable Freezing option can be turned on if you want to freeze the transported
species on a part of the computational domain. Although the Source Term is displayed with [1/s]
unit in the species properties panel, species transport can be defined using variables with units as
well. For example, if the transport of temperature [K] is specified for the source term, the resulting
source term will have units of [K/s], despite the properties panel displaying units of [1/s].

4.8.4. Cell Zones

Use the Cell Zones node to access cell zone definitions for your simulation. Cell zones represent the
domain of your simulation.

• Use the New... button to create a new cell zone object with its own unique properties. Depending
on the type of simulation you are setting up, cell zones can be one of the following types:

– Fluid

– Solid

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
598 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

– Porous media

– Fixed mold (transient simulations only)

– Moving mold (transient simulations only)

– Restrictor part

– Moving part

• Use the Display button to show an existing cell zone in the graphics window.

• Use the Delete button to remove an existing cell zone

4.8.4.1. Fluid Cell Zones

4.8.4.2. Solid Cell Zones
4.8.4.3. Porous Region Cell Zones
4.8.4.4. Fixed Mold Cell Zones
4.8.4.5. Moving Mold Cell Zones
4.8.4.6. Restrictor Part Cell Zones
4.8.4.7. Moving Part Cell Zones

4.8.4.1. Fluid Cell Zones

When the Type is set to Fluid, use the Cell Zones node to access fluid cell zone definitions for
your simulation (Figure 4.58: Fluid Cell Zone Properties (p. 599)).

Figure 4.58: Fluid Cell Zone Properties

Here, you can change the Name, assign Zones, and change the Fluid Model for the fluid zone
(such as Generalized Newtonian, Simplified viscoelastic, Differential viscoelastic, or Integral
viscoelastic), and/or whether your simulation involves coextrusion (that is, involving Multiple
Materials).

Typically, you define a fluid zone when you need to simulate the flow of a material, such as flow
in a die, a free extrudate, a pressing process, coextrusion, blow molding, thermoforming, and so
on.

See Fluid Cell Zone Properties (p. 860) for details.

For more information, see Generalized Newtonian Flow and Viscoelastic Flows in the Polyflow User's
Guide.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 599
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.8.4.2. Solid Cell Zones

When the Type is set to Solid, use the Cell Zones node to access solid cell zone definitions for
your simulation (Figure 4.59: Solid Cell Zone Properties (p. 600)).

Figure 4.59: Solid Cell Zone Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Zones, set the Solid Model as either
Elastic or Inelastic, and assorted Solid Deformation properties, if applicable.

Typically, you define a solid zone when you need to simulate fluid-structure interaction (FSI) or
simulate heat conduction in a solid. For an FSI simulation, Elastic must be selected for the Solid
Model and a fluid-solid interface must be defined if the solid is connected to a fluid region as
outlined in Fluid-Solid Interface Boundary Conditions (p. 616).

See Solid Cell Zone Properties (p. 861) for details.

4.8.4.3. Porous Region Cell Zones

When the Type is set to Porous media, use the Cell Zones node to access porous cell zone
definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.60: Porous Media Cell Zone Properties (p. 600)).

Figure 4.60: Porous Media Cell Zone Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Zones, Fluid Materials, and assorted
Porous Media properties. If thermal effects are taken into account, the Fluid Material(s) and the
Solid Material are required.

See Porous Cell Zone Properties (p. 862) for details.

For more information, see Porous Media in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.4.4. Fixed Mold Cell Zones

When the Type is set to Fixed mold, use the Cell Zones node to access fixed mold cell zone
definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.61: Fixed Mold Cell Zone Properties (p. 601)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
600 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Figure 4.61: Fixed Mold Cell Zone Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Zones, and if applicable, specify
the fixed mold as a Deformable Mold. If thermal effects are taken into account, it is necessary to
specify the Mold Model (Adiabatic, Fixed temperature or Heat conduction). For a fixed mold
that accounts for thermal effects or mold deformation (Deformable Mold option enabled), a Solid
Material must be defined. Note that the Deformable Mold option and the Heat conduction Mold
Model are not supported for 2D shell geometries.

Typically, you define a fixed mold zone when you need to simulate contact between a fluid and a
fixed solid. The thermal impact of contact can also be taken into account.

4.8.4.5. Moving Mold Cell Zones

When the Type is set to Moving mold, use the Cell Zones node to access moving mold cell zone
definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.62: Moving Mold Cell Zone Properties (p. 601)).

Figure 4.62: Moving Mold Cell Zone Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Zones, specify the moving mold as
a Deformable Mold if applicable, and define the Mold Motion properties for the moving mold. If
thermal effects are taken into account, it is necessary to specify the Mold Model (Adiabatic, Fixed
temperature or Heat conduction). Note that the Deformable Mold option and the Heat conduction
Mold Model are not supported for 2D shell geometries.

Next, you have to specify the Motion Type, the Motion Type can be either Translation velocity
imposed, Translation force imposed or General velocity driven motion. Depending on the se-
lection for the motion type, you are prompted for additional parameters, such as velocity compon-
ents, force components, mass of mold, limit of mold displacement, etc.

Typically, you define a moving mold zone when you need to simulate contact between a fluid and
a moving solid. Mold deformation or the thermal impact of contact can also be taken into account.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 601
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.8.4.6. Restrictor Part Cell Zones

Allows you to set mesh superposition options for restrictor part cell zones in your simulation.

A restrictor is an obstacle placed in the flow channel to better control the pressure drop and/or
the flow balance. Taking advantage of the Mesh Superposition Technique allows you to easily ex-
periment and optimize the size and location of the restrictor.

When the Type is set to Restrictor part, use the Cell Zones node to access restrictor cell zone
definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.63: Restrictor Cell Zone Properties (p. 602)).

Figure 4.63: Restrictor Cell Zone Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Zones, specify the restrictor as a
Deformable Part if applicable, and define the assorted Mesh Superposition properties for the
restrictor. When the restrictor is defined as a deformable part, or if thermal effects are taken into
account, it is necessary to specify a Solid Material for the restrictor part.

See Restrictor Zone Properties (p. 869) for more details.

For more information, see Flows with Internal Moving Parts in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.4.7. Moving Part Cell Zones

Allows you to set mesh superposition properties on any moving part cell zones in your simulation.

A moving part represents a moving solid part such as the rotating screw in an extruder, an impeller
in a mixing device, a piston in an injection machine, etc.

When the Type is set to Moving part, use the Cell Zones node to access moving part cell zone
definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.64: Moving Part Cell Zone Properties (p. 603)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
602 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Figure 4.64: Moving Part Cell Zone Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Zones, specify the moving part as
a Deformable Part if applicable, and define the assorted Mesh Superposition properties for the
moving part. When the moving part is defined as a deformable part, or if thermal effects are taken
into account, it is necessary to specify a Solid Material for the moving part.

See Moving Part Zone Properties (p. 867) for details.

For more information, see Flows with Internal Moving Parts in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.5. Boundary Conditions

This section describes the various boundary conditions available in the Fluent Materials Processing
workspace. If temperature changes are being considered, then there can be Thermal Conditions
associated at the boundaries as well.

Use the New... button to create a new boundary condition object with its own unique properties.
Depending on the type of simulation you are setting up, boundary conditions can be one of the fol-
lowing types:

• Inflow

• Outflow

• Wall

• Symmetry

• Free surface

• Extrudate exit

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 603
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• Vent

• Zero velocity

• Zero force

• Porous wall

• etc.

The following sections describe the boundary conditions in more detail:

4.8.5.1. Fluid Boundary Conditions
4.8.5.2. Solid Boundary Conditions
4.8.5.3. Porous Media Boundary Conditions
4.8.5.4. Contact Boundary Conditions
4.8.5.5. Mold Boundary Conditions
4.8.5.6. Part Boundary Conditions
4.8.5.7. Interface Boundary Conditions
4.8.5.8. Guiding Device Boundary Conditions

4.8.5.1. Fluid Boundary Conditions

Specify conditions for the fluid material(s) and, if applicable, their thermal conditions at the various
boundaries in your simulation (Figure 4.65: Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 604)).

Figure 4.65: Fluid Boundary Properties

4.8.5.1.1. Inflow Fluid Boundary

4.8.5.1.2. Outflow Fluid Boundary
4.8.5.1.3. Wall Fluid Boundary
4.8.5.1.4. Symmetry Fluid Boundary
4.8.5.1.5. Free Surface Fluid Boundary
4.8.5.1.6. Extrudate Exit Fluid Boundary
4.8.5.1.7. Vent Fluid Boundary
4.8.5.1.8. Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary
4.8.5.1.9. Zero Force Fluid Boundary
4.8.5.1.10. Porous Wall Fluid Boundary
4.8.5.1.11. Force Fluid Boundary
4.8.5.1.12.Thermal Conditions for Fluid Boundaries
4.8.5.1.13. Species Conditions for Fluid Boundaries

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
604 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

4.8.5.1.1. Inflow Fluid Boundary

Inlets define conditions where flow is expected to enter the solution domain.

When the Type is set to Inflow, use the Fluid Boundary Zone node to access inflow boundary
definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.66: Inflow Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 605)).

Figure 4.66: Inflow Fluid Boundary Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, and assorted
Inflow Condition properties for the inflow fluid boundary. There are several ways of defining an
inflow boundary condition. You can:

• Impose a volume or mass flow rate, and the solver will calculate the corresponding velocity
profile on the basis of the flow rate, the rheology and the geometry of the inlet. Here, you can
also specify whether this calculation is performed before or in conjunction with the main sim-
ulation, or simply leave the choice to the solver. Note that imposing a flow rate is the recom-
mended choice for viscoelastic models.

• Assign a constant normal velocity value, possibly combined with a free or a zero tangential
velocity component.

• Read a profile using a CSV file.

See Inflow Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 871) for more details.

For additional information, see Inflow Condition, Inflow Calculation for Generalized Newtonian
Flow, and Inflow Calculation for Viscoelastic Flow in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.5.1.2. Outflow Fluid Boundary

Outlets define conditions where flow is expected to leave the solution domain.

When the Type is set to Outflow, use the Fluid Boundary Zone node to access outflow
boundary definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.67: Outflow Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 605)).

Figure 4.67: Outflow Fluid Boundary Properties

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 605
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, and assorted
Outflow Condition properties for the outflow fluid boundary. There are several ways to define
an outflow boundary condition. You can:

• Assign an exit pressure on the selected outlet.

• Impose a volume or mass flow rate, and the solver will calculate the corresponding velocity
profile on the basis of the flow rate, the rheology and the geometry of the outlet. Here, you
can also specify whether this calculation is performed before or in conjunction with the main
simulation, or simply leave the choice to the solver. Note that imposing an exit flow rate is
often a recommended choice for viscoelastic models within a die.

• Assign a constant normal velocity value.

In each case, you can specify whether the resulting normal velocity profile is combined with a
free or a zero tangential velocity component.

In addition, you can also read a pre-defined velocity profile using a CSV file.

For polymer extrusion simulations, when the outlet represents an actual exit from which the fluid
can freely flow, tangential velocities at the outlet could be allowed (such as a die exit). However,
when the outlet is at the end of the computation domain, but not at the end of the channel in
which the fluid flows, tangential velocities at outlets should preferably not be allowed because
the fluid is still confined after the outlet.

See Outflow Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 872) for more details.

For additional information, see Outflow Condition, Outflow Condition for Generalized Newtonian
Flow, and Outflow Condition for Viscoelastic Flow in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.5.1.3. Wall Fluid Boundary

Wall boundaries assigned to surfaces of a fluid region prevent flow through those surfaces. The
conditions that best describe the forces applied to a wall are summarized below.

When the Type is set to Wall, use the Fluid Boundary Zone node to access wall boundary
definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.68: Wall Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 606)).

Figure 4.68: Wall Fluid Boundary Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, and assorted
Wall Condition properties for the wall fluid boundary.

The Slip Specification includes the following options:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
606 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

• No slip: the fluid sticks to the wall. If the wall is moving, the fluid moves with the same
velocity as the wall. For additional information, see Zero Wall Velocity Condition in the
Polyflow User's Guide.

• Partial slip: the fluid partially slips to the wall, that is, the relative velocity between the
fluid and the wall is a function of the tangential stress at the wall. Several slipping functions
are available: Navier’s law, generalized Navier’s law, threshold and generalized threshold
laws, and an asymptotic law where the growth of the tangential stress versus the tangential
velocity is asymptotically bounded to a given value. For additional information, see Slip
Condition in the Polyflow User's Guide.

• Free slip: a frictionless wall. For additional information, see Slip Condition in the Polyflow
User's Guide. Also, for additional information about the wall velocity, see Cartesian Velocity
Condition in the Polyflow User's Guide.

See Wall Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 873) for more details.

4.8.5.1.4. Symmetry Fluid Boundary

A symmetry boundary imposes constraints that mirrors the expected pattern of the flow or thermal
solution on either side of it. On a flat surface, a symmetry boundary is equivalent to imposing
zero values for the normal velocity and tangential force for the motion equation and/or a vanishing
heat flux for the energy equation.

When the Type is set to Symmetry, use the Fluid Boundary Zone node to access symmetry
boundary definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.69: Symmetry Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 607)).

Figure 4.69: Symmetry Fluid Boundary Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, and select the appropriate Boundary Zone for the
symmetry fluid boundary. See Symmetry Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 876) for more details.

For additional information, see Symmetry Condition in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.5.1.5. Free Surface Fluid Boundary

In an extrusion problem, where the shape of the extrudate is not known in advance, a free surface
is used to represent the outer surface of the extrudate. More generally, a free-surface problem
involves a boundary whose position is computed as part of the solution, since it is not known in
advance.

When the Type is set to Free surface, use the Fluid Boundary Zone node to access free surface
boundary definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.70: Free Surface Fluid Boundary Proper-
ties (p. 608)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 607
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.70: Free Surface Fluid Boundary Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, and assorted
Free Surface Condition properties for the free surface fluid boundary. A free surface usually
starts at a point/line where it is fixed. It is even required in steady state calculations. In an extrusion
case, the free surface obviously starts at the die exit, so that the intersecting line between the
die exit and the free surface is the actual fixed part. A non-zero pressure can also be applied on
the free surface. See Free Surface Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 877) for more details.

For additional information, see Free Surfaces and Kinematic Condition in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.5.1.6. Extrudate Exit Fluid Boundary

For extrusion simulations, you can specify two types of extrudate exit conditions. The first condition
applies to the edges of the extrudate exit. If all edges are free, the setup corresponds to the cal-
culation of an extrudate shape. If some or all edges are fixed, the setup corresponds to the calcu-
lation of die lips shapes (Figure 4.71: Extrudate Exit Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 608)).

In addition to this, a take-up velocity, a take-up force or force density can also be applied on the
extrudate exit surface. This is typically the case in fiber spinning where a usually large take-up
force or force density is applied, but sometimes also in a simple extrusion situation, where a small
force may help stabilizing the process. Note that when die lips shapes are calculated, imposing
a take-up force is strongly recommended instead of a take-up velocity.

Figure 4.71: Extrudate Exit Fluid Boundary Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, and assorted
Extrudate Exit properties for the extrudate exit fluid boundary. See Extrudate Exit Fluid Boundary
Properties (p. 877) for more details.

For additional information, see Global Force Condition in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.5.1.7. Vent Fluid Boundary

A vent boundary condition is typically the boundary condition that can be invoked in a volume
of fluid (VOF) simulation where a specific pressure applies at an orifice where the air contained
within a mold escapes, until the fluid (polymer) reaches that exit. By extension, the fluid (polymer)
can also escape, and this boundary condition can also be used in a classical flow simulation. The
gauge pressure is specified, and you may specify whether a zero tangential velocity is imposed.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
608 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

When the Type is set to Vent, use the Fluid Boundary Zone node to access vent boundary
definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.72: Vent Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 609)).

Figure 4.72: Vent Fluid Boundary Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, and assorted
Vent Condition properties for the vent fluid boundary. See Vent Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 878)
for more details.

For additional information, see Normal and Tangential Force Condition and Normal Force and
Tangential Velocity Condition in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.5.1.8. Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary

The zero velocity fluid boundary condition simply implies that the normal and tangential velocity
components on the boundary are set to zero.

When the Type is set to Zero velocity, use the Fluid Boundary Zone node to access zero velocity
fluid boundary definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.73: Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary Proper-
ties (p. 609)).

Figure 4.73: Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, and select the appropriate Boundary Zone for the zero
velocity fluid boundary.

4.8.5.1.9. Zero Force Fluid Boundary

The zero force fluid boundary condition simply implies that the normal and tangential force
components on the boundary are set to zero.

When the Type is set to Zero force, use the Fluid Boundary Zone node to access zero force
fluid boundary definitions for your simulation (Figure 4.74: Zero Force Fluid Boundary Proper-
ties (p. 609)).

Figure 4.74: Zero Force Fluid Boundary Properties

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 609
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Here, you would typically set the Name, and select the appropriate Boundary Zone for the zero
force fluid boundary.

4.8.5.1.10. Porous Wall Fluid Boundary

Porous wall conditions are used to model permeable walls. Such walls let some fluid to seep
through them and the flow rate will depend on the pressure as in porous medium. Examples of
uses for the porous wall condition include screens and filters.

For the porous wall condition (Figure 4.75: Porous Wall Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 610)), a zero
tangential velocity component is imposed simultaneously with one of three relationships between
the normal force density and the normal velocity. See Porous Wall Condition in the Polyflow
User's Guide for details.

Figure 4.75: Porous Wall Fluid Boundary Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, and assorted
Porous Wall Condition properties for the porous wall fluid boundary.

Porous wall Options include:

• Linear: represents a linear relationship between the normal force density and the normal
velocity with a constant permeability.

• Threshold: represents a porous definition based on two different permeabilities and a

critical stress threshold value.

• Asymptotic : represents a definition where the growth of the normal force density versus
normal velocity is asymptotically bounded to a given value.

See Porous Wall Fluid Boundary Properties (p. 879) for more details.

For additional information, see Porous Wall Condition and Normal Force Calculation in the Polyflow
User's Guide.

4.8.5.1.11. Force Fluid Boundary

A force boundary condition should be used when one actually wants to impose a force and not
a force density. A force can be typically applied at the exit boundary for an extrusion or fiber
spinning simulation, when you want to model a take-up mechanism. Another application is the
modelling of a filament stretching experiment. In general, a value is assigned to all three cartesian
components of the force. However, only one of them will remain (Figure 4.76: Force Fluid
Boundary Properties (p. 611)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
610 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Figure 4.76: Force Fluid Boundary Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, and assorted
Force Condition properties for the force fluid boundary. See Force Fluid Boundary Proper-
ties (p. 880) for more details.

For additional information, see Global Force Condition in the Polyflow User's Guide.

4.8.5.1.12. Thermal Conditions for Fluid Boundaries

Each of the fluid boundary types include thermal considerations, including an option to select
an insulated boundary, to impose a heat flux in different forms, to use an imposed temperature,
specify an incoming temperature (for example, restricted to an incoming material) or by using a
comma-separated value file. See Thermal Condition Properties (p. 880) for more details.

4.8.5.1.13. Species Conditions for Fluid Boundaries

Each of the fluid boundary types include species considerations which can be defined by selecting
the condition for species from the Option drop-down list. The option for species at the fluid
boundary will be selected by default, depending on the type of fluid boundary condition. The
default option for species for the various fluid boundary types is selected as follows:

• Species imposed for Inflow boundary conditions.

• Free for Outflow, extrudate exit, and vent boundary conditions.

• Symmetry for Symmetry boundary conditions.

• Insulated for all other fluid boundary conditions.

When Free, Symmetry, or Insulated are selected, the condition for species at the boundary does
not require any user input. However, when Species imposed, Flux, Convection, Flux and con-
vection, or Species profile are selected, additional input is necessary to define the species
condition. For more information on defining species conditions see Species Properties (p. 853) as
well as Species Condition Properties (p. 881).

4.8.5.2. Solid Boundary Conditions

Specify conditions for the solid material(s) at the various boundaries in your simulation (Fig-
ure 4.77: Solid Boundary Properties (p. 612)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 611
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.77: Solid Boundary Properties

Here you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, any Thermal
Condition properties if applicable, and for elastic solid zones, specify the solid boundary zone Type.
For a solid cell zone that has been defined as elastic, boundary zone types can be defined as Fixed,
Free, Symmetry, Normal Displacement, Normal Force Density, Cartesian Displacement, and
Force.

For the Normal Displacement and Cartesian Displacement solid boundary zone types, displacement
settings for a solid boundary zone can be defined. Similarly, for the Normal Force Density and
Force solid boundary zone types, settings can be defined for the force conditions on a solid
boundary zone.

The available thermal boundary conditions include an imposed temperature or a temperature

profile (using in a CSV file), insulated and symmetry conditions, heat flux, convection, and a com-
bination of both latter ones as well. When appropriate, corresponding parameters are also asked
by the program.

For additional information, see Heat Flux Boundary Conditions in the Polyflow User's Guide.

See Solid Boundary Zone Properties (p. 882) for details.

4.8.5.3. Porous Media Boundary Conditions

Specify conditions for the porous media at the various boundaries in your simulation (Figure 4.78: Por-
ous Media Boundary Properties (p. 612)).

Figure 4.78: Porous Media Boundary Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, the Type, and, if
applicable, any Thermal Condition properties for the porous media boundary.

The Type can include: Pressure, Normal velocity, Wall, and Symmetry.

The Pressure boundary condition should be used at inlets and/or outlets; the Normal velocity
condition should preferably be used at inlets; the Wall condition should be used along watertight
boundaries; and the Symmetry condition should be used along planes of symmetry.

See Porous Boundary Zone Properties (p. 885) for details.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
612 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

4.8.5.4. Contact Boundary Conditions

Use the properties of the Contact Boundary Condition (Figure 4.79: Contact Boundary Condition
Properties (p. 613)) to describe how and where the fluid and mold come into contact with each
other in your simulation.

In blow molding, thermoforming and pressing applications, a fluid, usually polymer or glass, pro-
gressively enters into contact with a mold or a plunger or any other solid part involved in the process;
this solid part can be either fixed or moving. The occurrence of contact in time and space is a priori
unknown. A detection algorithm is invoked, the purpose of which is to detect whether a fluid ma-
terial point has entered into contact with a solid part or not. As long as a fluid material point is not
detected in contact with a solid part, it is free to move in accordance with the forces applied. Once
the material point is detected in contact, it acquires the velocity of the solid part. The solver takes
care of this treatment, and a penalty mechanism is invoked. Also, when the contact occurs, you
may still specify whether the fluid sticks or slips on the contact wall.

Eventually, under some circumstances, contact release is invoked. This is typically the case when a
plunger moves back to its former position once it has performed a required action. In the calculation,
the contact release indeed occurs when the adhesion force is no longer sufficient for maintaining
the contact, in industrial processes, adhesion forces are kept as low as possible to prevent undesirable
deformations.

You should specify the surfaces that will enter in contact with each other (fluid surface and solid
surface), other quantities must be entered when appropriate.

Figure 4.79: Contact Boundary Condition Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Fluid zone and its Fluid Zone of
Contact, the Mold zone, and its Mold Zone of Contact, and any Contact Condition (and, if applic-
able, any Thermal Condition) properties for the contact boundary.

For additional information, see Working of Contact Detection, Theory and Equations, Penalty
Technique for Detecting Contact, and Contact Release in the Polyflow User's Guide.

See Contact Boundary Zone Properties (p. 888) for details.

4.8.5.5. Mold Boundary Conditions

Specify conditions for a fixed or moving deformable mold at the various boundaries in your simu-
lation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 613
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.80: Mold Boundary Condition Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, and the Type.

The Type can include: Fixed, Free, Symmetry, Normal Displacement, Normal Force Density, and
Contact with Fluid.

For a deformable mold simulation to be valid, at least one mold boundary zone with the Type set
to Contact with Fluid must be defined. Note that Contact with Fluid is a Post Processor and the
simulation of mold deformation is decoupled from the mold-fluid contact simulation.

For the Normal Displacement and Normal Force Density boundary types, conditions can be
defined for the displacement and the force density, respectively.

See Mold Boundary Zone Properties (p. 886).

4.8.5.6. Part Boundary Conditions

Specify conditions for a restrictor or moving deformable part at the various boundaries in your
simulation.

Figure 4.81: Part Boundary Condition Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, select the appropriate Boundary Zone, and the Type.

The Type can include: Fixed, Free, Symmetry, Normal Displacement, Normal Force Density, and
Immersed in Fluid.

For the Normal Displacement and Normal Force Density boundary types, conditions can be
defined for the displacement and the force density, respectively.

See Part Boundary Zone Properties (p. 887).

4.8.5.7. Interface Boundary Conditions

Use the properties of the Interface Boundary Condition object (Figure 4.82: Interface Boundary
Condition Properties (p. 615)) to describe the interaction between adjacent fluids, solids, or porous
regions in your simulation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
614 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Figure 4.82: Interface Boundary Condition Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, the Type, and select the appropriate Interface Zone for
the interface boundary.
4.8.5.7.1. Fluid-Fluid Interface Boundary Conditions
4.8.5.7.2. Fluid-Solid Interface Boundary Conditions

The options available for the interface Type are as follows:

For a Conformal Interface:

• If two or more fluid cell zones exist, a Fluid-Fluid conformal interface may be defined.

• If two or more solid cell zones exist, a Solid-Solid conformal interface may be defined.

• If two or more porous media cell zones exist, a Porous-Porous conformal interface may be
defined.

• If one or more fluid cell zone exists and one or more solid cell zones exist, a Fluid-Solid conformal
interface may be defined.

• If one or more fluid cell zone exists and one or more porous media cell zones exist, a Fluid-
Porous conformal interface may be defined.

• If one or more solid cell zone exists and one or more porous media cell zones exist, a Solid-
Porous conformal interface may be defined.

For a non-conformal interface (Conformal Interface option disabled):

• If two or more fluid cell zones exist, a Fluid-Fluid non-conformal interface may be defined.

• For thermal simulations, if two or more inelastic solid cell zones exist, a Solid-Solid non-conformal
interface may be defined.

• For thermal simulations, if one or more inelastic solid cell zone exists and one or more fluid cell
zones exists, a Fluid-Solid non-conformal interface may be defined.

Note that if the interface types described in the above lists are available despite the relevant
boundary zone/zones having not been defined, you must change the topology of your mesh
within the mesher.

See Interface Boundary Zone Properties (p. 890) for details.

4.8.5.7.1. Fluid-Fluid Interface Boundary Conditions

Use the properties of the Fluid-Fluid Interface Boundary Condition object (Figure 4.83: Fluid-
Fluid Interface Boundary Condition Properties (p. 616)) to describe the interaction between fluids
in your simulation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 615
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.83: Fluid-Fluid Interface Boundary Condition Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, the Type, and select the appropriate Interface Zone
for the interface boundary, along with Fluid-Fluid Interface conditions.

Typically, you define a fluid-fluid interface boundary condition between two fluid zones. This in-
terface can be conformal or not. A conformal interface can be a fixed or a moving interface. A
fixed interface simulates a gap through which the same fluid can, by default, flow freely between
zones. A moving interface simulates a deforming surface separating two fluids.

For more information regarding conformal interfaces, see Kinematic Condition in the Polyflow
User's Guide. For more information regarding non-conformal interfaces, see Non-Conformal
Boundaries in the Polyflow User's Guide.

See Fluid-Fluid Interface Boundary Zone Properties (p. 892) for details.

4.8.5.7.2. Fluid-Solid Interface Boundary Conditions

Use the properties of the Fluid-Solid Interface Boundary Condition object (Figure 4.84: Fluid-
Solid Interface Boundary Condition Properties (p. 616)) to describe the interaction between an
adjacent fluid and solid in your simulation.

Figure 4.84: Fluid-Solid Interface Boundary Condition Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, the Type, and select the appropriate Interface Zone
for the interface boundary, along with Fluid-Solid Interface (wall) conditions. The settings are
similar to the wall fluid boundary condition (see Wall Fluid Boundary (p. 606) for further details).

Typically, you define a fluid-solid interface boundary condition between a fluid and a solid zone.
This interface can be conformal or not. When simulating fluid-structure interaction (FSI), a Fluid-
Solid interface must be defined for any elastic solid zone that is connected to a fluid region.

For more information regarding non-conformal interfaces, see Non-Conformal Boundaries in the
Polyflow User's Guide.

See Fluid-Solid Interface Boundary Zone Properties (p. 894) for details.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
616 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

4.8.5.8. Guiding Device Boundary Conditions

Use the properties of the Guiding Device Boundary Condition object (Figure 4.85: Guiding Device
Boundary Condition Properties (p. 617)) to describe the interaction between a Guiding Device and
a Free surface in your simulation.

Figure 4.85: Guiding Device Boundary Condition Properties

As explained in Understanding Guiding Devices (p. 535), you can define one or more guiding devices
to assist in profile extrusion. A guiding device can be a conveyor belt or a rotating roller. The
Guiding Device boundary condition is available for 2D planar and 3D cases after gravity has been
specified and at least one free surface has been defined.

Geometric details are discarded when defining the model, and the guiding device is instead defined
by its role in the extrusion process. A conveyor belt is represented as a plane and is defined by
means of a conveniently selected point and a vector normal to the plane in the outward direction;
a translation velocity oriented towards the direction of extrusion is also specified. A rotating roller
is represented as a cylinder and is defined by a radius and an oriented axis passing through a given
point; a rotation velocity around the axis is also specified.

The position of the extrudate on the guiding device results from the equilibrium between gravity
in the downward direction and the reaction from the device acting upwards. For more complex
extrusion cases involving guiding devices, modeling conflicts can occur between the kinematic
equation dictating the extrudate shape and the specified position requirement for the guiding
device. Such conflicts can be resolved by applying an evolution function to gravity, which will in-
crease the gravitational acceleration as the solution progresses. For example, defining Gy with the
expression -9.81 * time for a gravitational acceleration of 9.81 in the negative Y-direction.
Additionally, using an expression to define both the slipping coefficient and the penalty coefficient
can improve convergence.

For more information, see Understanding Guiding Devices (p. 535) as well as Guiding Device
Boundary Zone Properties (p. 897).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 617
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.8.6. Assignments
Depending on the type of simulation you are setting up, it may be necessary to describe a fixed
pressure to your enclosed flow domain or a fixed displacement on an elastic solid, deformable mold,
or deformable part.

The following sections describe the pressure assignments and displacement assignments in more
detail:
4.8.6.1. Pressure Assignment
4.8.6.2. Displacement Assignment

4.8.6.1. Pressure Assignment

Use the properties of the Assign Pressures object (Figure 4.86: Assign Pressure Properties (p. 618))
to describe a fixed pressure to apply to your enclosed flow domain.

Use the New... button to create a new pressure assignment object with its own pressure value and
its own location point.

Figure 4.86: Assign Pressure Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, the specific Search Zone or region, the Pressure value
for the assignment, along with distinct Point values where the pressure will be assigned.

Note:

Pressure assignment is not required when the pressure can be naturally set (such as
when a free surface, an inflow/outflow, or an extrudate exit is detected). While the
workspace adds a pressure assignment to your simulation automatically if it does not
detect an entry, exit, or free surface boundary condition, there are occasions when the
pressure assignment is made available but is not necessary (such as when a fluid zone
is connected to an adjacent porous or fluid zone).

A pressure assignment is only necessary for flows in a closed domain surrounded only
by walls and/or symmetry boundaries, such as flow in a batch mixer, in which case a
single pressure assignment is needed at a location that is never overlapped by any
moving parts.

See Assign Pressure Properties (p. 899) for details.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
618 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

4.8.6.2. Displacement Assignment

Use the properties of the Displacement object (Assign Displacement Properties (p. 900)) to describe
a fixed displacement to apply on an elastic solid, deformable part, or deformable mold.

Use the New... button to create a new displacement object with a fixed displacement value at a
specified location point.

Figure 4.87: Displacement Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, the specific Search Zone or region, the values for the fixed
Displacement to be assigned in the x, y, and/or z directions, along with distinct Point values where
the displacement will be assigned.

Typically, you would assign a displacement at a point to prevent unwanted rigid translation or ro-
tation that has not been specified through a boundary condition.

See Assign Displacement Properties (p. 900) for details.

4.8.7. Mesh Deformations

Use the properties of the Mesh Deformation object (Figure 4.88: Mesh Deformation Properties (p. 620))
to describe which region deforms during the simulation, and how it deforms.

Note:

A mesh deformation entry must be created when there is a free surface or a moving inter-
face whose motion changes the computational domain.

Use the New... button to create a new mesh deformation object. There are different types of mesh
deformations: Extrudate, Constant Die Section, Adaptive Die Section, and Lagrangian.

• The Extrudate type of deformation is invoked for the deformation of the free jet in extrusion
related applications; here you may choose among several deformation methods. Next to the
zone, you must also specify its inlet and outlet sections.

• The Constant Die Section type of deformation is invoked to deform the die in an extrusion
simulation in order to obtain the desired shape of the extrudate while maintaining a constant
cross-section in the considered part of the die. This can be combined with the Adaptive Die
Section type.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 619
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• The Adaptive Die Section type of deformation is invoked to deform the outlet cross-section
of the considered die part while keeping its original inlet cross-section, the goal being to obtain
the desired shape of the extrudate. This can be combined with the Constant Die Section type.

• The Lagrangian type of deformation is invoked for transient simulations (blow molding,
thermoforming, pressing) where mesh nodes are treated as material points. The zone has to
be specified.

Figure 4.88: Mesh Deformation Properties

Here, you would typically set the Name, the Type of mesh deformation, select the Zones involved.

For more information, see Remeshing in the Polyflow User's Guide.

See Deformation Properties (p. 901) for details.

4.8.8. Adaptive Meshing

In a transient simulation of a shaping process (blow molding, thermoforming, or pressing), the de-
formations undergone by the fluid are mirrored into the finite element mesh, so that a mesh that
was acceptable at the start of the simulation may no longer be adequate later on. Also, for steady
and transient cases involving fixed restrictors or moving parts (for example, screws), it is sometimes
desirable to locally increase the discretization in order for the fluid to capture the solid part as smoothly
as possible. Using the adaptive meshing technique can address these issues.

Depending on the particular context, adaptive meshing features and options are available for the
following types of simulations:

• Adaptive meshing for blow molding and thermoforming simulations using the shell model, including
conditions;

• Adaptive meshing for 2D and 3D pressing cases, including conditions and refinement zones;

• Adaptive meshing for 2D and 3D simulations involving restrictors or moving parts, including con-
ditions and refinement zones.

In all cases, adaptive meshing requires the selection of general parameters and conditions. In addition,
adaptive meshing for 2D and 3D pressing cases allow you to define local refinements.
4.8.8.1. Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming Simulations Using the Shell Model
4.8.8.2. Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases
4.8.8.3. Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Restrictors and Moving Parts

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
620 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

4.8.8.1. Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming Simulations

Using the Shell Model
For blow molding and thermoforming simulations using the shell model, adaptive meshing is based
on anticipative element subdivision in order to properly capture the details of the mold shape.
4.8.8.1.1. General Properties of Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming Simulations Using
the Shell Model
4.8.8.1.2. Conditions for Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming Simulations Using the
Shell Model
4.8.8.1.3. Contact Conditions Based on Angle and Curvature
4.8.8.1.4. Contact Conditions Based on Curvature
4.8.8.1.5. Contact Conditions Based on Distance

4.8.8.1.1. General Properties of Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermo-
forming Simulations Using the Shell Model
To display general adaptive meshing properties, in the Outline View, under Setup, select Adaptive
Meshing.

Setup → Adaptive Meshing

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.89: Properties of Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming Simulations
Using the Shell Model (p. 621)).

Figure 4.89: Properties of Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming
Simulations Using the Shell Model

The following properties are available:

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to use adaptive meshing. By default, adaptive meshing is enabled
(the check box is checked). You may disable it by clearing the box; this can be useful for a
preliminary trial simulation. When enabled, additional properties are available.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 621
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Number of Steps

Indicate the number of time steps to use for adaptive meshing. A value of 1 indicates that
adaptive meshing will take place at each time step. Adaptive meshing is invoked after every
sequence of N successful steps, by default N = 5. This is a recommended value as a good
compromise between the need of best mesh quality (frequent adaptive meshing) and the
necessity of speeding up the calculation (less frequent adaptive meshing). For transient cases,
the value should preferably never be less than 4.

Maximum Number of Subdivisions

Specify the number of times a primitive element. That is, an element of the initial mesh, as
created in the mesh generator) can be subdivided recursively.

Adaptive Meshing at Start

Indicate whether or not to use adaptive meshing at the start of the calculations. That is, for
blow molding and thermoforming simulations that involve both contact and adaptive
meshing, you can specify that an additional adaptive meshing step is performed before the
start of the transient simulation. Adaptive meshing is not enabled at the start of the calculation,
by default the check box is cleared. It is assumed that the initial finite element mesh is of
acceptable quality, so that an initial adaption step is often not needed. If the initial mesh is
of insufficient quality, you may ask for an initial mesh adaption.

Conformalization

Indicate whether or not to use conformalization on the mesh. For 2D and shell meshes that
use the recursive subdivision technique, you can enable conformalization for the mesh. For
shells only, conformalization of elements is invoked by default. Adjacent elements are not
always subdivided up to the same level, and two smaller elements may be adjacent to a less-
subdivided element. A non-conformal situation is created where a middle mesh node may
miss a contribution from the adjacent large element. This is internally solved with appropriate
constraints. Alternatively, you can invoke mesh conformalization.

4.8.8.1.2. Conditions for Adaptive Meshing for Blow Molding and Thermoforming
Simulations Using the Shell Model
To create a new condition for adaptive meshing, select the Add a Condition button at the bottom
of the Adaptive Meshing properties panel.

Setup → Adaptive Meshing

Initially, properties of a condition include:

Name

Specify a name for the condition, or keep the default value (condition-1).

Zones

Choose the zone(s) of the fluid region where the specified condition(s) will be applied..

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
622 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

For blow molding and thermoforming, elements in the fluid region are subdivided based on the
shape of the mold in front of them; larger elements can be accepted in regions that are in contact
with the flat sections of the mold, while smaller elements are needed in regions where the mold
is curved. A condition can be defined on the basis of angle and curvature found on the mold,
on the basis of curvature only, or on the basis of distance with respect to the mold.

4.8.8.1.3. Contact Conditions Based on Angle and Curvature

By default, a contact condition is based on angle and curvature. It refines the fluid mesh as it
approaches the mold, based on either the angle between neighboring mold elements at a mold
node, or on the local curvature of mold elements around a node.

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.90: Contact Condition Properties of Adaptive Meshing Based on Angle and
Curvature (p. 623)).

Figure 4.90: Contact Condition Properties of Adaptive Meshing Based on Angle and Curvature

The following properties are available:

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to consider the condition on contact in order to trigger adaptive
meshing. Once a contact condition is enabled (the check box is checked) additional properties
are available and you may disable it by clearing the box; note that at least one condition
must be enabled.

Mold Surfaces of Contact

Select the contact zone(s) of the mold to consider for the present contact condition.

Method

The default method for the condition is based on angle and curvature.

Minimum Size

Specify the minimum size for newly created elements close to the mold boundary surface.
This is the minimum side length of newly created elements, necessary for preventing the
creation of a mesh that is too dense. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is of
the order of a tenth of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 623
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Maximum Size

Specify the maximum size for newly created elements far from the mold boundary surface.
This is the maximum side length of newly created elements, necessary for preventing the
creation of a mesh that is too coarse. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is of
the order of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Tolerance

For the angle and curvature method, this value defines the tolerance for the contact. This is
the maximum distance you would ideally like between any node of the mold and the nearest
fluid element. This tolerance is used to locally calculate an ideal fluid element size, in that it
could approach the mold within the stated tolerance.

Critical Distance

For the angle and curvature method, this value has units of length, and is typically 10 percent
of the typical size of the segments in the mesh. Note that a larger value results in larger areas
of the fluid where the elements are subdivided, which produces higher element counts. On
the other hand, if you choose a value that is too small, there may not be sufficient meshing
iterations to reduce the elements to an appropriate size. To ensure that is not too small, you
must account for the meshing frequency and the velocity of the parison / preform / sheet.
The default for this parameter is one percent of the medium diagonal of the axis-aligned
minimum box bounding the whole geometry. The critical distance corresponds to an anticip-
ation distance from which mold angles and curvature will have a growing effect on the fluid
mesh discretization. It is important to anticipate the contact, for having smaller elements
before contact occurrence.

4.8.8.1.4. Contact Conditions Based on Curvature

A condition can be defined that is based on only the mold curvature. The condition refines the
fluid mesh as the mesh approaches the mold, based on the local curvature of mold elements
around a node.

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.91: Contact Condition Properties of Adaptive Meshing Based on Curvature (p. 624)).

Figure 4.91: Contact Condition Properties of Adaptive Meshing Based on Curvature

The following properties are available:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
624 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to consider the condition on contact in order to trigger adaptive
meshing. Once a contact condition is enabled (the check box is checked) additional properties
are available and you may disable it by clearing the box; note that at least one condition
must be enabled.

Mold Surfaces of Contact

Select the contact zone(s) of the mold to consider for the present contact condition.

Method

The method for the present condition is based on curvature.

Minimum Size

Specify the minimum size for newly created elements close to the mold boundary surface.
This is the minimum side length of newly created elements, necessary for preventing the
creation of a mesh that is too dense. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is of
the order of a tenth of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Fraction of Radius of Curvature

For the curvature method, this value is dimensionless, and its default value is 0.2. Sufficiently
close to the contact mold, element size will be a given fraction of the local radius of curvature,
unless it hits the minimum size as lower bound. The selected default value of 0.2 suggests
that about 5 fluid elements can be created for matching 1 radian (57 degrees) of a curved
mold portion.

Typical Distance to Mold

For the curvature method, this value has the units of length, and is the typical size of segments
of the mesh. This is the distance between a fluid element and the mold below which mesh
refinement begins. It is important to anticipate the contact, for having smaller elements before
contact occurrence. By default, the value is a fraction of a typical geometric length of the input
mesh.

Coefficient of Proportionality

For the curvature method, this value has units of length. This coefficient may be interpreted
as the intended size of the fluid elements when the contact occurs along a flat portion of the
mold. For avoiding undesired interferences, either the Fraction of Radius of Curvature or
the Coefficient of Proportionality should vanish.

4.8.8.1.5. Contact Conditions Based on Distance

A condition can be defined on the basis of the local distance with respect to the mold only. The
condition refines the fluid mesh as the mesh approaches the mold, based on the distance to the
mold surface.

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.92: Contact Condition Properties of Adaptive Meshing Based on Distance (p. 626)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 625
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.92: Contact Condition Properties of Adaptive Meshing Based on Distance

With this method, you only need to specify a simple ramp function that dictates the desired fluid
element size versus the distance with respect to the mold. The ramp function specifies a minimum
size for fluid elements below a given distance to the mold, a maximum size for fluid elements
beyond a given distance to the mold, and a linearly growing size in between.

The following properties are available:

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to consider the condition on contact in order to trigger adaptive
meshing. Once a contact condition is enabled (the check box is checked) additional properties
are available and you may disable it by clearing the box; note that at least one condition
must be enabled.

Mold Surfaces of Contact

Select the contact zone(s) of the mold to consider for the present contact condition.

Method

The method for the present condition is based on distance.

Minimum Size

Specify the minimum size for newly created elements close to the mold boundary surface.
This is the minimum side length of newly created elements, necessary for preventing the
creation of a mesh that is too dense. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is of
the order of a tenth of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Minimum Distance

Specify the minimum distance below which the minimum size is applied. This is the distance
between fluid zone and mold below which new fluid elements will be created with the spe-
cified minimum size. By default, the minimum distance is set to 0.

Maximum Size

Specify the maximum size for newly created elements far from the mold boundary surface.
This is the maximum side length of newly created elements, necessary for preventing the

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
626 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

creation of a mesh that is too coarse. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is of
the order of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Maximum Distance

Specify the maximum distance beyond which the maximum size is applied. This is the distance
between fluid zone and mold beyond which new fluid elements will be created with the
specified maximum size. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is of the order of
the average edge length in the input mesh.

4.8.8.2. Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases

For 2D and 3D simulations of pressing cases using volume elements, adaptive meshing is based
on mesh triangularization (or tetrahedrization).
4.8.8.2.1. General Properties of Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases
4.8.8.2.2. Conditions for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases
4.8.8.2.3. Refinement Zones for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases

4.8.8.2.1. General Properties of Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases

In the Outline View, under Setup, select Adaptive Meshing to display general properties.

Setup → Adaptive Meshing

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.93: Properties of Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases (p. 627)).

Figure 4.93: Properties of Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases

The following properties are available:

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to use adaptive meshing. By default, adaptive meshing is enabled
(the check box is checked). You may disable it by clearing the box; this can be useful for a
preliminary trial simulation. When enabled, additional properties are available.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 627
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Number of Steps

Indicate the number of time steps to use for adaptive meshing. A value of 1 indicates that
adaptive meshing will take place at each time step. Adaptive meshing is invoked after every
sequence of N successful steps, by default N = 5. This is a recommended value as a good
compromise between the need of best mesh quality (frequent adaptive meshing) and the
necessity of speeding up the calculation (less frequent adaptive meshing). For transient cases,
the value should preferably never be less than 4.

Adaptive Meshing at Start

Indicate whether or not to use adaptive meshing at the start of the calculations. That is, for
blow molding and thermoforming simulations that involve both contact and adaptive
meshing, you can specify that an additional adaptive meshing step is performed before the
start of the transient simulation. Adaptive meshing is not enabled at the start of the calculation,
by default the check box is cleared. It is assumed that the initial finite element mesh is of
acceptable quality, so that an initial adaption step is often not needed. If the initial mesh is
of insufficient quality, you may ask for an initial mesh adaption.

Triangulation

Indicate whether to use partial or full triangulation for the mesh. If Full triangulation is used,
when one element is selected for remeshing, the whole moving domain. That is, the domain
for which there are local criteria activated) will be remeshed. With big meshes, the cost of
this operation could be too high. Partial triangulation is when one element is selected for
remeshing, a zone defined upon the neighbors of this element will be remeshed (and not
the entire mesh), and is preferable for large meshes. By default, full triangulation is invoked,
and is recommended unless otherwise specified. Full or partial triangulation can be invoked,
respectively depending whether the adaptive meshing is applied on the entire fluid mesh or
only on portions surrounding elements of bad quality.

Angle Conservation

Enables angle conservation on the border of the remeshed zone(s). A sequence of adaptive
meshing tends to erode sharp borders or edges of a fluid domain. It is especially visible on
convex borders. By default, angles are not preserved. Enable this option if you want angles
above a given value to be preserved and enter the value. The angle between two adjacent
boundary elements is defined as the angle between vectors normal to these elements.

Angle [deg]

Specify a value for the minimum angle that should be conserved.

Subsequently, settings can be specified for the Mapping, that is, a technique which consists of
properly relocating on the contact surface nodes that were already in contact with the mold.

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to use mapping for the adaptive meshing. A mapping technique is
used that projects the nodes along the local normal to the free surface, since the remeshing
algorithm used for triangular / tetrahedral element generation builds a new mesh on the
basis of the old mesh, rather than the original geometry.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
628 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Planes of Symmetry Taken into Account

Indicate whether or not to account for symmetry planes. A specific mapping treatment is
applied in order to preserve planes of symmetry and not geometrically distort them. By default,
the option is not enabled and it is recommended unless otherwise specified.

Threshold Value

This field triggers the mapping of the nodes. The contact algorithm uses internal fields that
are named contact_field and are defined on the free surface. This field stores the contact in-
formation for each node and initially has a value of either 0 or 1. If a node of the free surface
is in contact, the field value is 1, otherwise the value is 0. However, after a remeshing step,
the contact_field values must be interpolated onto the newly generated mesh. After this in-
terpolation, the contact_field values are no longer limited to being either 0 or 1, but can be
intermediate values. (For example, 0.3). If a node of the free surface has a contact_field value
greater than the threshold, the node is assumed to be in contact and will be mapped. The
default value of the threshold is 0.8.

Scaling Factor

This parameter is used to determine if a point on the free surface is in the vicinity of the mold
surface. The distance between the free surface point and the mold surface must be less than
typical_size*scaling_factor, where typical_size is the maximum size of a face (or a segment in
2D) of the mold surface. By default, the threshold is set to 0.6.

Maximum Displacement Mode

Allows you to set the method for determining the maximum displacement of surface nodes
during the mapping stage of the adaptive meshing as either Program controlled or User
Value. It is the upper bound of the displacement applied to nodes that are mapped onto the
contact surface. By default, the value is Program Controlled. You can change this and specify
a User Value when prompted.

User Displacement

In order to avoid highly distorted elements in the layer of elements adjacent to the free surface,
the displacement of the mapped nodes is limited to this value. A good practice is to define
the maximum displacement as 10 to 25 percent of the minimum element size imposed in
the adaptive meshing setup. The default value is calculated from the typical mesh size.

Penetration Tolerance

This parameter is used to provide a tolerance level for the distance between the free surface
and the mold surface. If a point on the free surface is located inside the mold at a distance
from the mold surface below this tolerance, the point will not be moved; otherwise the pos-
ition of the point is corrected. Three options are available: a value of max displacement sets
the penetration tolerance to be equivalent to the maximum displacement; a value of penet-
ration accuracy sets the penetration tolerance to be equivalent to the minimum of the pen-
etration accuracies; a value of user input allows you to provide your own value for the toler-
ance.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 629
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

User Value

Specify a value for the penetration tolerance, where it is recommended to keep the penetration
tolerance to be less than or equal to the penetration accuracy.

4.8.8.2.2. Conditions for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases

To create a new condition for adaptive meshing, select the Add a Condition button at the bottom
of the Adaptive Meshing properties panel.

Setup → Adaptive Meshing

Initially, properties of a condition include:

Name

Specify a name for the condition, or keep the default value (condition-1).

Zones

Choose the zone(s) of the fluid region where the condition(s) below will be applied..

For pressing cases, elements in the fluid region are remeshed with a triangulation algorithm. For
this, a quality criterion decreasing from 1 (very good) to 0 (very bad) is evaluated. Elements that
do not match a specified quality requirement or whose size does not match a given value are
ticked for remeshing. In addition to this, specific conditions at the contact boundary can be
defined.

Three conditions and their parameters are available where you must enable and define one or
both conditions.
4.8.8.2.2.1. Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Conditions Based on Mesh Quality
4.8.8.2.2.2. Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based on Curvature
4.8.8.2.2.3. Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based on Distance

4.8.8.2.2.1. Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Conditions Based on Mesh Quality

A quality criterion decreasing from 1 (very good) down to 0 (very bad) is evaluated, and which
incorporates geometric features such as aspect ratio, internal angles, skewness and bending.
Elements that do not match a specified quality requirement or do not match an assigned size
are ticked for remeshing.

The following properties are available:

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to consider the condition on the mesh quality in order to trigger
adaptive meshing. You may disable it by clearing the box; this can be useful for a preliminary
trial simulation.

Quality

Specify a value for the expected quality of the mesh. A quality criterion decreasing from 1
(very good) down to 0 (very bad) is evaluated, and which incorporates geometric features

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
630 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

such as aspect ratio, internal angles, skewness and bending. Fluid elements which do not
match the required quality will be adapted. By default, a quality of 0.8 is required.

Size

Specify a value for the expected element size of the mesh. Fluid elements which do not
match the assigned size will be adapted. A default value is evaluated as a fraction of the
overall geometric dimension of the mesh. It can be changed.

4.8.8.2.2.2. Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based on Curvature

A condition can be defined on the basis of the mold curvature only, as is the default method.
The condition refines the fluid mesh as the mesh approaches the mold, based on the local
curvature of mold elements around a node.

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.94: Properties of Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based on
Curvature (p. 631)).

Figure 4.94: Properties of Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based

on Curvature

The following properties are available:

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to consider the condition on contact in order to trigger adaptive
meshing. Once a contact condition is enabled (the check box is checked) additional prop-
erties are available and you may disable it by clearing the box; note that at least one con-
dition must be enabled.

Mold Surfaces of Contact

Select the contact zone(s) of the mold to consider for the present contact condition.

Method

The selected method for the present condition is based on curvature.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 631
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Fraction of Radius of Curvature

For the curvature method, this value is dimensionless, and its default value is 0.2. Sufficiently
close to the contact mold, element size will be a given fraction of the local radius of
curvature, unless it hits the minimum size as lower bound. The selected default value of
0.2 suggests that about 5 fluid elements can be created for matching 1 radian (57 degrees)
of a curved mold portion.

Minimum Size

Specify the minimum size for newly created elements close to the mold boundary surface.
This is the minimum side length of newly created elements, necessary for preventing the
creation of a mesh that is too dense. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is
of the order of a tenth of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Typical Distance to Mold

For the curvature method, this value has the units of length, and is the typical size of seg-
ments of the mesh. This is the distance between a fluid element and the mold below which
mesh refinement begins. It is important to anticipate the contact, for having smaller elements
before contact occurrence. By default, the value is a fraction of a typical geometric length
of the input mesh.

Coefficient of Proportionality

For the curvature method, this value has units of length. This coefficient may be interpreted
as the intended size of the fluid elements when the contact occurs along a flat portion of
the mold. For avoiding undesired interferences, either the Fraction of Radius of Curvature
or the Coefficient of Proportionality should vanish.

4.8.8.2.2.3. Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based on Distance

A condition can be defined on the basis of the local distance with respect to the mold only.
The condition refines the fluid mesh as the mesh approaches the mold, based on the distance
to the mold surface.

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.95: Properties of Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based on
Distance (p. 633)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
632 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Figure 4.95: Properties of Pressing-Related Adaptive Meshing Contact Conditions Based

on Distance

With this method, you only need to specify a simple ramp function that dictates the desired
fluid element size versus the distance with respect to the mold. The ramp function specifies a
minimum size for fluid elements below a given distance to the mold, a maximum size for fluid
elements beyond a given distance to the mold, and a linearly growing size in between.

The following properties are available:

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to consider the condition on contact in order to trigger adaptive
meshing. Once a contact condition is enabled (the check box is checked) additional prop-
erties are available and you may disable it by clearing the box; note that at least one con-
dition must be enabled.

Mold Surfaces of Contact

Select the contact zone(s) of the mold to consider for the present contact condition.

Method

The selected method for the present condition is based on distance.

Minimum Size

Specify the minimum size for newly created elements close to the mold boundary surface.
This is the minimum side length of newly created elements, necessary for preventing the
creation of a mesh that is too dense. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is
of the order of a tenth of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Minimum Distance

Specify the minimum distance below which the minimum size is applied. This is the distance
between fluid zone and mold below which new fluid elements will be created with the
specified minimum size. By default, the minimum distance is set to 0.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 633
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Maximum Size

Specify the maximum size for newly created elements far from the mold boundary surface.
This is the maximum side length of newly created elements, necessary for preventing the
creation of a mesh that is too coarse. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is
of the order of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Maximum Distance

Specify the maximum distance beyond which the maximum size is applied. This is the dis-
tance between fluid zone and mold beyond which new fluid elements will be created with
the specified maximum size. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is of the
order of the average edge length in the input mesh.

4.8.8.2.3. Refinement Zones for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Pressing Cases
To create a new refinement zone for adaptive meshing, select the Add a Refinement Zone
button at the bottom of the Adaptive Meshing properties panel.

Setup → Adaptive Meshing

Initially, properties of a refinement zone include:

Name

Specify a name for the refinement zone, or keep the default value (refinement-zone-
1).

Type

Specify the method in which you want to define the refinement zone: along boundaries,
box, or sphere. For 2D cases, the box and the sphere are respectively reduced to rectangle
and circle.

Pressing applications involve large deformations of the mesh; the distortion mainly appears in
some localized zones of the mesh. It is therefore interesting to define refinement zones,that is,
local regions where the size of the elements must be smaller to catch details of a geometry. Re-
finement zones can be fixed (in a given region of the space) or moving (defined along a boundary).
4.8.8.2.3.1. Defining Box-Based Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones
4.8.8.2.3.2. Defining Sphere-Based Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones
4.8.8.2.3.3. Defining Boundary-Based Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones

4.8.8.2.3.1. Defining Box-Based Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones

You can choose the Type of refinement zone to be a box, defined by two points: a lower-left-
front point and a upper-right-back point. Minimum and maximum values of the X, Y and Z-
coordinates are required. For 2D cases, Z-coordinates may be set to 0.

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.96: Properties of a Box-Based Refinement Zone (p. 635)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
634 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Figure 4.96: Properties of a Box-Based Refinement Zone

The following properties are available:

Xmin

Specify a value for the minimum position on the X axis for the refinement zone box (the
X-coordinate of the lower-left-front point). The default value is 0.

Ymin

Specify a value for the minimum position on the Y axis for the refinement zone box (the
Y-coordinate of the lower-left-front point). The default value is 0.

Zmin

Specify a value for the minimum position on the Z axis for the refinement zone box (the
Z-coordinate of the lower-left-front point). The default value is 0.

Xmax

Specify a value for the maximum position on the X axis for the refinement zone box (the
X-coordinate of the upper-right-back point). The default value is 0.

Ymax

Specify a value for the maximum position on the Y axis for the refinement zone box (the
Y-coordinate of the upper-right-back point). The default value is 0.

Zmax

Specify a value for the maximum position on the Z axis for the refinement zone box (the
Z-coordinate of the upper-right-back point). The default value is 0.

Inside the defined box, the Element Size distribution is specified as an affine function of the
coordinates. The Size is equivalent to A + B * x + C * y + D * z. You should ensure that the
size never becomes negative.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 635
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Specify the length of the element.

A coefficient for the element size (a coefficient of the affine size function), 0 by default.

A coefficient for the element size (a coefficient of the affine size function), 0 by default.

A coefficient for the element size (a coefficient of the affine size function), 0 by default.

4.8.8.2.3.2. Defining Sphere-Based Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones

You can choose the Type of refinement zone to be a sphere, defined by the coordinates of
its center and a diameter. For 2D cases, the Z-coordinate of the center may be set to 0.

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.97: Properties of a Sphere-Based Refinement Zone (p. 636)).

Figure 4.97: Properties of a Sphere-Based Refinement Zone

The following properties are available:

Xc

Specify the X coordinate of the center of the sphere. The default value is 0.

Yc

Specify the Y coordinate of the center of the sphere. The default value is 0.

Zc

Specify the Z coordinate of the center of the sphere. The default value is 0.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
636 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Diameter

Specify a value for the sphere diameter. The default value is 0.

Inside the defined sphere, the Element Size distribution is specified as an affine function of
the distance with respect to the center. The Size is equivalent to A + B * r. You should ensure
that the size never becomes negative.

A constant coefficient for the element size in the spherical refinement zone. The default
value is 0.

A coefficient for the affine function for the dependence of the element size with respect
to the distance from the center of the spherical refinement zone. The default value is 0.

4.8.8.2.3.3. Defining Boundary-Based Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones

Having selected the refinement zone Type to be along boundaries, the following properties
are available:

Boundary

Specify a boundary for the refinement zone. For moving zones, specify the free surface on
which you want to attach the moving zone.

Method

Specify the method of refinement along the boundary: distance, or curvature Specifying
the size is similar to contacts.

Depending on the selected Method, additional inputs are required.

4.8.8.2.3.3.1. Setting Boundary Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones Based on Curvature
4.8.8.2.3.3.2. Setting Boundary Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones Based on Distance

4.8.8.2.3.3.1. Setting Boundary Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones Based on Curvature

By default, the refinement method along boundaries is based on the local curvature. It refines
the fluid mesh as the local boundary curvature increase (or as the local radius decreases).

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.98: Properties of a Boundary Refinement Zone Based on Curvature (p. 638)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 637
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.98: Properties of a Boundary Refinement Zone Based on Curvature

The following properties are available:

Minimum Size

Specify the minimum size for elements close to the mold boundary. This sets the minimum
size for newly created elements close to the selected boundary. By default, this parameter
is assigned a value that is of the order of a tenth of the average edge length in the input
mesh.

Fraction of Radius of Curvature

For the curvature method, this value is dimensionless, and its default value is 0.2. Sufficiently
close to the selected boundary, element size will be a given fraction of the local radius of
curvature, unless it hits the minimum size as lower bound. The selected default value of
0.2 suggests that about 5 fluid elements can be created for matching 1 rad (57°) of a curved
boundary portion.

Typical Distance to Boundary

For the curvature method, this value has the units of length. The typical depth of the zone
adjacent to the boundary where elements can be remeshed based on the local curvature.
By default, the value is a fraction of a typical geometric length of the input mesh.

Coefficient of Proportionality

For the curvature method, this value has units of length. This coefficient may be interpreted
as the intended size of the fluid elements along a flat portion of the selected boundary.
For avoiding undesired interferences, either the Fraction of Radius of Curvature or the
Coefficient of Proportionality should vanish.

4.8.8.2.3.3.2. Setting Boundary Adaptive Meshing Refinement Zones Based on Distance

The refinement method along boundaries can be based on the distance with respect to the
selected boundary only. Elements close to the selected boundary will be refined.

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.99: Properties of a Boundary Refinement Zone Based on Distance (p. 639)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
638 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

Figure 4.99: Properties of a Boundary Refinement Zone Based on Distance

With this method, you only need to specify a simple ramp function that dictates the desired
fluid element size versus the distance with respect to the boundary. The ramp function specifies
a minimum size for fluid elements below a given distance to the selected boundary, a maximum
size for fluid elements beyond a given distance to the selected boundary, and a linearly growing
size in between.

The following properties are available:

Minimum Size

Specify the minimum size for elements close to the mold boundary. This sets the minimum
size for newly created elements close to the selected boundary. By default, this parameter
is assigned a value that is of the order of a tenth of the average edge length in the input
mesh.

Minimum Distance

Specify the minimum distance below which the minimum size is applied. This is the distance
between fluid points and selected boundaries below which new fluid elements will be
created with the specified minimum size. By default, the minimum distance is set to 0.

Maximum Size

Specify the maximum size for elements far from the mold boundary. This sets the maximum
size for newly created elements beyond a given distance to the selected boundary. By de-
fault, this parameter is assigned a value that is of the order of the average edge length in
the input mesh.

Maximum Distance

Specify the maximum distance beyond which the maximum size is applied. This is the dis-
tance between fluid point and selected boundary beyond which new fluid elements will
be created with the specified maximum size. By default, this parameter is assigned a value
that is of the order of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 639
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.8.8.3. Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Restrictors and Moving Parts

For steady and transient cases involving restrictors or moving parts, adaptive meshing is based on
element subdivision in order to properly capture the details of the restrictors or moving parts. For
this, elements are recursively split into sub-elements.
4.8.8.3.1. General Properties for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Restrictors and Moving Parts
4.8.8.3.2. Overlapping Conditions for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Restrictors and Moving Parts

4.8.8.3.1. General Properties for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Restrictors and
Moving Parts
By default, adaptive meshing for cases involving restrictors or moving parts is disabled and must
be activated by checking the Enabled checkbox.

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.100: General Properties for Adaptive Meshing Cases Involving Restrictors and Moving
Parts (p. 640)).

Figure 4.100: General Properties for Adaptive Meshing Cases Involving Restrictors and
Moving Parts

Once enabled, additional properties are available:

Maximum Number of Subdivisions

Specify the number of times a primitive element. That is, an element of the initial mesh, as
created in the mesh generator) can be subdivided recursively.

Conformalization

Indicate whether or not to use conformalization on the mesh. For 2D and shell meshes that
use the recursive subdivision technique, you can enable conformalization for the mesh. For
shells only, conformalization of elements is invoked by default. Adjacent elements are not
always subdivided up to the same level, and two smaller elements may be adjacent to a less-
subdivided element. A non-conformal situation is created where a middle mesh node may
miss a contribution from the adjacent large element. This is internally solved with appropriate
constraints. Alternatively, you can invoke mesh conformalization.

Now, an overlapping condition can be created and applied to the adaptive meshing scheme.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
640 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Your Simulation

4.8.8.3.2. Overlapping Conditions for Adaptive Meshing for 2D and 3D Restrictors

and Moving Parts
To create a new condition for adaptive meshing, select the Add a Condition button at the bottom
of the Adaptive Meshing properties panel.

Setup → Adaptive Meshing

Initially, properties of a condition include:

Name

Specify a name for the condition, or keep the default value (condition-1).

Zones

Choose the zone(s) of the fluid region where the condition(s) below will be applied..

At least one Condition for Overlapping must be Enabled and defined.

In this case, available properties are displayed in the corresponding Properties page (as shown
in Figure 4.101: Properties of an Overlapping Condition for Adaptive Meshing Cases Involving
Restrictors and Moving Parts (p. 641)).

Figure 4.101: Properties of an Overlapping Condition for Adaptive Meshing Cases Involving
Restrictors and Moving Parts

Once enabled, additional options are available:

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to apply the current condition on overlapping parts for adaptive
meshing. When multiple conditions are defined, they may by enabled or disabled at will.
Once enabled, additional options are available.

Overlapping Parts

Select the overlapping part(s) that will be used for mesh adaption in the fluid zone.

Unrefinement Threshold

Specify the required threshold for local mesh unrefinement. A so-called inside function (or
overlapping function) is used to determine whether a fluid element is overlapped by a restrictor

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 641
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

or a moving part, or not. It then received the value 1 or 0, respectively. For fluid elements far
from the transition stripe, the function exhibits nearly no variation, and they can be selected
for unrefinement if the variation is below the threshold value. By default, the threshold value
is set to 0.01. The operating mode depends on the cell selection method. For the cell selection
method based on inside field variation: when an element of the fluid zone is far enough from
the border of the overlapping part. That is, when the corresponding overlapping or inside
field exhibits small or no variation), the element can be selected for unrefinement. For the
cell selection method based on average inside field values: when an element of the fluid zone
is far enough from the overlapping part. That is, when the corresponding overlapping or inside
field exhibits small values), the element can be selected for unrefinement.

Refinement Threshold

Specify the required threshold for local mesh refinement. A so-called inside function (or
overlapping function) is used to determine whether a fluid element is overlapped by a restrictor
or a moving part, or not. It then received the value 1 or 0, respectively. For fluid elements
located near or in the transition stripe, the function exhibits variation, and they can be selected
for refinement if the variation is above the threshold value. By default, the threshold value is
set to 0.05. The operating mode depends on the cell selection method. For the cell selection
method based on inside field variation: when an element of the fluid zone is close enough
to the border of the overlapping part. That is, when the corresponding overlapping or inside
field exhibits large variation), the element can be selected for refinement. For the cell selection
method based on average inside field values: when an element of the fluid zone is close
enough to the overlapping part or overlapped. That is, when the corresponding overlapping
or inside field exhibits large values), the element can be selected for refinement.

Cell Selection Method

Specify whether the cell selection method for refinement/unrefinement is based on the vari-
ations or on the values of the overlapping or inside field. By default, the selection method
for refinement and unrefinement checks the Variation of inside field versus both thresholds.
Another method consists of checking the Average of inside field versus both thresholds.
The behavior differs since elements overlapped by the solid part will also be refined.

4.9. Setting Solution Options

The Solution section of the Outline View and the Ribbon allow you access to common solution-specific
controls, such as:
4.9.1.Temperature Initialization
4.9.2. Species Initialization
4.9.3. Creating Solution Probes
4.9.4. Generating Derived Quantities From Your Solution
4.9.5. Accessing Solution Outputs
4.9.6. Accessing Solution Monitors
4.9.7. Running the Calculation

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
642 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

4.9.1. Temperature Initialization

It is necessary to initialize the temperature wherever it is defined. Temperature fields can be initialized
either by specifying the components of the temperature initialization equation or by importing a CSV
file of a temperature profile. The temperature initialization equation is T = A * ( 1 + B * x
+ C * y ) for 2D meshes, and T = A * ( 1 + B * x + C * y + D * Z ) for 2D
shell/3D meshes. For steady or continuation calculation types, temperature initialization should be
as close as possible to the targeted solution to facilitate convergence.

Figure 4.102: Properties of Initialization (Temperature)

See Temperature Initialization Properties (p. 911) for details.

4.9.2. Species Initialization

It is necessary to initialize species transport equations wherever they are defined. Species transport
can be initialized either by specifying the components of the species initialization equation or by
importing a CSV file of a species profile. The species initialization equation is S = A * ( 1 + B
* x + C * y ) for 2D meshes and S = A * ( 1 + B * x + C * y + D * Z ) for
3D meshes. For steady or continuation calculation types, species initialization should be as close as
possible to the targeted solution to facilitate convergence.

Figure 4.103: Properties of Initialization (Species)

See Species Properties (p. 853) for details.

4.9.3. Creating Solution Probes

Use the Probes task to create discretely located points in your domain to monitor your simulation.

Use the New... button to create a new point object (Figure 4.104: Properties of Probe (p. 644)). Once
you specify the x, y, and Z coordinates, you can indicate whether the point will a Moving node (the
field values will be extracted at a material point that can move with time), or a Fixed geometric
location (field values will be extracted at the provided coordinates whatever the motion of the ma-
terial).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 643
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.104: Properties of Probe

Here, you would typically set the Name, and the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the solution probe.

See Probe Properties (p. 913) for details.

4.9.4. Generating Derived Quantities From Your Solution

Use the Derived Quantities task to determine which of the available derived quantities you want to
create an output field for within your simulation.

Figure 4.105: Properties of Derived Quantities

The choices for Derived Quantities can include:

Table 4.10: Available Derived Quantities

Quantity Availability Default

Setting
Shear Rate (p. 647) - local shear rate in the flow Available if the domain is not Enabled.
domain. shell and if there is at least one
fluid cell zone
Viscosity (p. 647) - local viscosity in the flow Available if the domain is not Enabled.
domain. a shell and if there is at least
one fluid cell zone with a
Generalized Newtonian fluid
model or with a Simplified
Viscoelastic model.
Viscous Heating (p. 647) - local viscous heating Available if the domain is not Enabled
in the flow domain, friction heating along walls a shell and if there is at least by
(if partial slippage is defined), dissipated power. one fluid cell zone with a default if
Generalized Newtonian fluid the
model or with a Simplified simulation
Viscoelastic model. is

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
644 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

Quantity Availability Default

Setting
thermal,
otherwise
it is
disabled.
Stress (p. 647) - local stress in the flow domain, Available if the domain is not Disabled.
includes the evaluation of eigenvalues, N1 and shell and if there is at least one
vTv. fluid cell zone.
Volume of Liquid (p. 648) - volume of the flow Available if the domain is not Enabled
domain. shell and if there is at least one and
fluid cell zone. read-only
if VOF
simulation,
otherwise
disabled.
Tracking of Material Points (p. 648) - tracking Available if the domain is not Disabled.
initial position of fluid points in transient shell, if the simulation is
simulations. transient and if there is at least
one fluid cell zone.
Vorticity (p. 649) - local vorticity tensor Available if the domain is not Disabled.
a shell and if there is at least
one fluid cell zone.
Mixing Index (p. 649) - local mixing index Available if the domain is not Disabled.
a shell and if there is at least
one fluid cell zone.
Rate of Deformation Tensor (p. 650) - local tensor Available if the domain is not Disabled.
D shell and if there is at least one
fluid cell zone.
Force (p. 650) - resulting force on each fluid Available if the domain is not Disabled.
boundary condition will be written in the shell and if there is at least one
transcript. fluid cell zone.
Flow Rate (p. 650) - resulting volumetric flow rate Available if the domain is not Enabled.
on each fluid boundary condition. a shell, if there is at least one
fluid cell zone.
Heat Flux (p. 651) - resulting heat flux on each Available if the domain is not Enabled.
fluid, solid, porous boundary condition will be shell, the simulation is thermal
written in the transcript file. and if there is at least one cell
zone of type fluid, solid or
porous.
Flow Balance (p. 651) - quantification of die Available if the flow rate Disabled.
balancing. postprocessor is available and
enabled.
Convective Heat (p. 651) - transported heat on Available if the domain is not Enabled.
each fluid boundary condition. a shell, the simulation is
thermal and if there is at least
one fluid cell zone.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 645
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Quantity Availability Default

Setting
Residence Time (p. 652) - residence time of fluid Available if the domain is not Disabled.
points entering the fluid domain. shell and if there is at least one
inlet fluid boundary condition.
You must specify the fluid
boundaries where it will be
initialized and provide the
initial value.
Tracking of a Material Property (p. 653) - tracking Available if the domain is not Disabled.
a property of fluid points entering the fluid a shell, if the simulation is
domain. transient and if there is at least
one fluid cell zone
Extension (p. 654) - Area Ratio: for each Available if the domain is a shell. Enabled.
evaluation of the face of the fluid
extension domain, ratio of the
components for blow face surface to the
molding and initial face surface
thermoforming Track Vectors: local Disabled.
simulations. deformations of
specified vectors
Self Contact (p. 655) - contact detection of the Available if the domain is a Disabled.
polymer sheet with itself. shell.
Estimated Thickness (p. 655) - evaluation of the Available if the domain is not Disabled.
thickness of a product. a shell and not a film, and if
the simulation is transient with
no restrictors or moving parts.

Note:

Depending on the type of simulation (blow molding, extrusion, etc.), relevant quantities
are already enabled, and you can disable them if desired. For instance, Shear Rate in
transient simulations may be too computationally expensive, and Flow Balance, Residence
Time, and Tracking of Material Points require additional information.

Once selected, when a solution is generated, these quantities will be available for postprocessing
(see Postprocessing Results (p. 664)).

Note:

Some derived quantities/fields are created automatically, such as those for mesh quality
whenever you have a deforming mesh. See Analysing Mesh Quality (p. 656) for more in-
formation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
646 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

4.9.4.1. Shear Rate

The workspace can calculate the local shear rate ( ) on the part of the domain where the velocity
field has been calculated. The shear rate is given by
(4.9)

Properties include:

Shear Rate

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the shear rate.

4.9.4.2. Viscosity
For generalized Newtonian fluids and simplified viscoelastic fluids, the workspace can calculate the
local value of the viscosity, which can depend on the shear rate and/or the temperature. The vis-
cosity will appear as a scalar field while postprocessing.

Properties include:

Viscosity

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the viscosity.

4.9.4.3. Viscous Heating

For generalized Newtonian models and simplified viscoelastic fluids, the workspace can calculate
the heat generation per unit time and per unit volume (or per unit area for a 2D planar case) that
is generated under the given flow conditions. The heat generation originates from the work of in-
ternal forces. In addition to the viscous and wall friction heating, the workspace evaluates the dis-
sipated power, which is the integral of the viscous and wall friction heating over the flow domain.
When wall slippage is defined, the calculation of the dissipated power also considers the contribution
originating from the slipping force, and results are provided for the volume dissipated power and
the heat generated from slipping.

It is not necessary to solve a nonisothermal problem in order to compute the viscous and wall
friction heating. The workspace can calculate the viscous dissipation that occurs without actually
solving the energy equation. Also, the workspace can calculate the viscous and wall friction heating
even if it has been neglected in the main nonisothermal flow problem.

Properties include:

Viscous Heating

Enable this option to create an output field containing the local intensity of viscous dissipation
(heat generation by friction of fluid layers and slipping)

4.9.4.4. Stress
For generalized Newtonian model, the workspace can calculate the extra-stress tensor on the
part of the domain where the velocity field has been calculated. Three components of the inelastic

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 647
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

stress tensor will be calculated for 2D planar cases, four components for 2D axisymmetric cases,
and six components for all other cases.

For differential or simplified flow problems, the workspace can calculate the total extra-stress tensor
in the domain. The total extra-stress tensor is the sum of the viscous (or the (generalized) Newtonian)
components and the viscoelastic components. If more than one relaxation time has been defined,
the viscoelastic component is the sum of the viscoelastic components for all modes.

Properties include:

Stress

Enable this option to create an output field containing the stress tensor (stresses in the fluid
due to fluid deformation)

4.9.4.5. Volume of Liquid

With this postprocessor, you can evaluate the volume of the flow domain. If the flow domain contains
overlapping internal restrictor or moving parts, the calculation of the volume will remove the part
of the flow domain overlapped by these parts, in order to provide the actual volume occupied by
the fluid.

Properties include:

Volume of Liquid

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the volume of the flow domain.

4.9.4.6. Tracking of Material Points

In time-dependent calculations, it is sometimes necessary to calculate the trajectory of material
points, the workspace is not a Lagrangian code (that is, it does not use a description and formulation
following the particles), and nodes do not correspond, in general, to material particles. Therefore,
a postprocessor is provided to track these material points. Typically this is useful in blow molding
simulations, when remeshing is not of the Lagrangian type, although it can be very useful in many
other situations also.

Tracking of Material Points

Enable this option to create an output field for tracking material particles.

This is available if the domain is not a shell and if there is at least one inlet fluid boundary condition
. In addition, you should specify the fluid boundaries where it will be initialized and specify the
initial value.

Properties include:

Enable

Activates the tracking of material particles.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
648 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

4.9.4.6.1. Calculation for Tracking Material Points

A material particle’s initial position is tracked according to
(4.10)

where is the initial position of the material particle (that is, the original position before deform-
ation occurs). When the material points postprocessor is used, the workspace will keep track of
the initial position of each material point, as well as the final position of that same material point.
This allows you, for example, to determine the source on the parison of a flaw that occurs at a
particular location on the final product. This post-processor is valid for transient cases defined
on a material volume, i.e. without entry and exit.

4.9.4.7. Mixing Index

(4.11)

The mixing index is defined as

where is the equivalent shear rate defined as

(4.12)

In a purely rotational flow, the mixing index is zero. The mixing index is not defined everywhere
in the flow problem; singular values arise in regions where the denominator is zero (for example,
along the axis of symmetry of a Poiseuille flow).

and is the magnitude of the vorticity vector. For a shear flow, the mixing index is equal to 0.5,
whereas its value is 1 in a purely elongational flow.

The mixing index will appear as a scalar during postprocessing.

Properties include:

Mixing Index

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the mixing index lambda (λ)

4.9.4.8. Vorticity
The workspace can calculate the vorticity vector for the flow. Vorticity is a measure of the rotation
of a fluid element as it moves in the flow field, and is defined as the curl of the velocity vector:
(4.13)

This quantity is a vector representation of twice the antisymmetric part of the velocity gradient
tensor given by
(4.14)

For 3D flows, the vorticity vector is given in component form by

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 649
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

(4.15)

For 2D planar and axisymmetric flows, the vorticity has one non-zero component only, and it is
displayed as a signed scalar quantity. For 2D 1/2 flows, the magnitude of the vorticity vector is
displayed, while it will appear as a vector while postprocessing for 3D flows.

Properties include:

Vorticity

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the vorticity.

4.9.4.9. Rate of Deformation Tensor

The workspace can calculate the rate-of-deformation tensor on the part of the domain where
the velocity field has been computed. Three components of the rate-of-deformation tensor will be
calculated for 2D planar cases, four components for 2D axisymmetric cases, and six components
for all other cases.

Furthermore, the components are based on the selected reference frame (Cartesian for 2D planar
and 3D cases, cylindrical for axisymmetric cases). In many cases, the calculation of the local shear
rate (see Shear Rate (p. 647)) is preferred if only a (generalized) scalar kinematics quantity is needed.

Properties include:

Rate of Deformation Tensor

Activates the calculation of the rate-of-deformation tensor D in the flow domain.

4.9.4.10. Force
The workspace can calculate the resulting forces applied from the fluid to the several boundaries.
The result is evaluated independently for each boundary and is printed in the transcript. Enabling
this option allows you to know the corresponding force needed for satisfying the imposed flow
boundary condition.

Properties include:

Force

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the force.

4.9.4.11. Flow Rate

The workflow automatically integrates the total volumetric flow rate along all boundary sets. Results
are displayed as numerical values in the transcript (search for the word Flow rates to find them).

Properties include:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
650 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

Flow Rate

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the flow rate.

4.9.4.12. Heat Flux

For thermal cases, the workspace can calculate the resulting heat fluxes which leaves the domain
through the several boundaries. The result is evaluated independently for each boundary and is
printed in the transcript. Enabling this option allows you to know the corresponding heat flux
needed for satisfying the imposed temperature boundary condition.

Properties include:

Heat Flux

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the heat flux.

4.9.4.13. Flow Balance

Die balancing is a major challenge for the die designer. To help address this challenge, the workspace
can compute a measure of the die balancing based on the deviation of the normal velocity with
respect to the average velocity along the die exit:

(4.16)

where is the velocity, is the flow rate across the boundary set, is the surface of the boundary
set, and is the outward normal along the boundary set.

A perfectly balanced die with a uniform velocity at the exit leads to a measure of the die balancing
equal to zero. This measure is not absolute; you have to compare the die balancing measure for
different die geometries to determine which is the best one (that is, the one with the smallest value
for the die balancing measure). Results are displayed as numerical values in the workspace transcript
(search for the words Flow balance to find them).

Properties include:

Enable

Activates the evaluation of the uniformity of the velocity field at specified boundary(ies)

Useful Borders

Select the boundary(ies) where the flow balance will be evaluated.

4.9.4.14. Convective Heat

This postprocessor is available for boundaries of fluid zones in thermal simulations. Only boundaries
with non-zero normal velocity should be considered. Indeed, along walls or plane of symmetries,
the convected heat should be zero.

The convected heat postprocessor computes the integral along selected boundaries of ,
where is the temperature.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 651
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Convected Heat

Activates the evaluation of the convected heat field. Convected heat is evaluated automatically
for each fluid boundary condition.

4.9.4.15. Residence Time

The workspace can calculate the residence time distribution in the part of the domain where a ve-
locity field has been calculated. The residence time distribution can be calculated in 2D and 3D
calculations in steady-state and time-dependent modes. This postprocessor differs from individual
time integration along a trajectory, where the result is obtained for a single material point only.
With this postprocessor, a residence time distribution value is obtained over the whole domain.

Enable

Activates the evaluation of the residence time in the flow domain.

4.9.4.15.1. Residence Time Condition

Inlet Boundary

Select the boundary(ies) where the residence time is imposed.

Law

Select the law for imposing the residence time such as Constant or Polynomial.

Specify a value for the constant coefficient of the residence time function at the inlet
boundary.

Specify a value for the X coefficient of the polynomial function for the residence time function
at the inlet boundary.

Specify a value for the Y coefficient of the polynomial function for the residence time function
at the inlet boundary.

Specify a value for the Z coefficient of the polynomial function for the residence time function
at the inlet boundary.

4.9.4.15.2. Calculation of Residence Time

Consider a simple steady-state free surface flow, where the flow enters from the upper left part
of the domain. Assuming that the residence time distribution is zero in the entry section, the
workspace will calculate the residence time distribution in the domain. An example of contour
lines of the residence time distribution is shown in Figure 4.106: Contour: Residence Time Distri-
bution for a Steady-State Free Surface Problem (p. 653).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
652 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

Figure 4.106: Contour: Residence Time Distribution for a Steady-State Free Surface Problem

The workspace computes the residence time distribution using the equation
(4.17)

where at time , and the boundary conditions along the entry sections are taken into
account. is the residence time, and is the material derivative of the residence time.

Equation 4.17 (p. 653) states that the residence time increases as the absolute time for particles
along their path increases. It is a hyperbolic equation, and it requires boundary conditions (as
well as initial conditions for time-dependent problems). The value of the residence time must be
set along all entry sections.

Usually you will set a value of zero. On all sections on which an inflow boundary condition has
been applied for the momentum equation, the residence time is set to zero by default. You can
add boundary conditions on entry sections where a different type of condition has been selected.

For time-dependent calculations, the workspace imposes as an initial condition. In this case,
the time-dependent problem is well-posed provided that has been imposed on all entry sections.
For steady-state problems, Equation 4.17 (p. 653) does not define a well-posed problem in recircu-
lating zones (vortices) and along walls where .

This is not usually important, since the residence time distribution is meaningless in these regions,
and you can easily exclude these corresponding contour lines from the display in your graphical
postprocessing program.

Another possibility for calculating the residence time distribution in the presence of steady-state
vortices is to define a time-dependent problem that uses a steady-state velocity field that has
already been calculated.

4.9.4.16. Tracking of a Material Property

For flow problems, you can track particles by assigning a value of a material property (a conventional
scalar field named for "color") in the flow domain and integrating the pure advection of this
property in the flow domain:
(4.18)

Equation 4.18 (p. 653) is subject to inlet boundary conditions that can be defined separately on each
inlet section. This postprocessor is typically used to calculate the transport of the property in the
flow. Each separate entry has a different color represented by a separate value of the property
along the inlet. The flow transports the property and you can locate the color at each position in
the flow domain.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 653
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The continuous interpolation used in the numerical scheme will produce some interpolation error,
so intermediate values will also be displayed in the flow domain. However, provided you select
distinct values of the property along inlets (such as 1 and 10, for example), you can easily identify
regions of the flow during postprocessing.

Properties include:

Inlet Boundary

Select the boundary(ies) where the material property is imposed.

Law

Select the law for imposing the material property such as Constant or Polynomial.

Specify a value for the constant coefficient of the material property function at the inlet
boundary.

Specify a value for the X coefficient of the polynomial function for the material property function
at the inlet boundary.

Specify a value for the Y coefficient of the polynomial function for the material property function
at the inlet boundary.

Specify a value for the Z coefficient of the polynomial function for the material property function
at the inlet boundary.

4.9.4.17. Extension
Evaluation of the extension components is available for blow molding and thermoforming simula-
tions. This is available if the domain is a shell. Two kinds of extensions can be evaluated:

Area Stretch Ratio

Indicate whether or not to evaluate the distribution of area stretch ratio undergone by the
fluid zone, that is, the ratio of local area after deformation to initial area.

Track Vectors

Activates the evaluation of the deformations of specified vectors in the flow domain.

You must specify the Initial Orientations of the vectors: initially parallel to the direction
D, initially perpendicular to the direction D, initially radial from point P, initially circumfer-
ential around point P (where more than one can be selected at once). You must then
specify the coordinates of the reference point P and orientation of the vector D.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
654 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

4.9.4.17.1. Reference Point P

You must specify the coordinates of the reference point P.

Px

Specify the x-coordinate of the reference point P.

Py

Specify the y-coordinate of the reference point P.

Pz

Specify the z-coordinate of the reference point P.

4.9.4.17.2. Reference Direction D

You must specify the orientation of the vector D.

Dir-x

Specify the x-component of the reference direction D.

Dir-y

Specify the y-component of the reference direction D.

Dir-z

Specify the z-component of the reference direction D.

4.9.4.18. Self Contact

For blow molding and thermoforming processes in shell models, there are times when self-contacts
such as folds or knit-lines can occur in the blown part. In such cases, the self-contact postprocessor
can simply detect self-contact of the parison.

Enable

Activates the detection of folds or knit-lines that can occur in a blown/thermoformed part.

Action

Select the action to be taken when self-contact is detected such as No action, Warning or
Stop. No action simply allows to postprocess the self-contact field. Warning generates a message
in the transcript. Stop halts the calculation.

4.9.4.19. Estimated Thickness

In 2D as well as in 3D simulations of blow molding and pressing, you can compute the thickness
of the final object (as well as during shaping). In industrial processing, the thickness has to be un-
derstood as the distance between two arbitrary surfaces; it is therefore subjected to an appropriate
definition. Also, from the point of view of modeling, it would require the identification of preferably

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 655
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

distinct topological entities; however this cannot always be achieved. A technique has been imple-
mented, which matches a reasonable industrial definition as much as possible: at a given point, it
basically consists of evaluating the distance with respect to the closest opposite surface. A topolo-
gical object has to be constructed for the thickness evaluation, and a few parameters for geometric
tolerances have to be given. In 3D, the thickness is evaluated on the selected boundary; planes of
symmetry can be discarded from the domain of evaluation. Note that in 2D, a similar scenario applies;
however, since the display of a quantity along a line is not easy, the evaluation is expanded onto
the domain via a Laplace equation.

Typically, the thickness at the end of the process is of interest. Hence, it is not necessary to perform
a thickness evaluation at each time step. Also, since the thickness at a point is evaluated as a distance
measured along a line perpendicular to the surface at this point, it is preferable to bound its value.

Zones

Select the zone(s) where the derived quantity must be calculated.

Useful Borders

Specify the border that is used as the basis for the evaluation of the thickness; it may consist
of one or several boundaries, but typically symmetry planes and lines are not considered.

Activation Time

Specify a value for the activation time. The thickness evaluation will be performed only when
the simulation time is greater than or equal to the activation time.

Tolerance

Specify a value for the geometric tolerance. The thickness at a point is evaluated as a distance
between the point and the opposite surface, measured along a line perpendicular to the surface
at this point. The algorithm involves a search of geometric intersection (between the perpen-
dicular line and boundary elements). A geometric tolerance is needed in order to compensate
for round-off errors.

4.9.4.20. Analysing Mesh Quality

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace automatically creates mesh quality fields when the mesh
deforms during the calculation. These fields allow you to analyze the mesh and identify distorted
elements.

The mesh quality fields are:

• MAX_ANGLE: the widest angle found between two successive edges of (a face of ) an element

• MIN_ANGLE: the narrowest angle found between two successive edges of (a face of ) an element

• MAX_ASPECT_RATIO: the ratio of the lengths of the longest edge to that of the shortest edge
of an element

• MAX_BEND: evaluated as one minus the cross product between unit normal directions defined
at two opposite vertices of a quadrilateral.

• MAX_SKEW: see Element Distortion Check (p. 657) for more information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
656 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

The best way to evaluate mesh quality in the Fluent Materials Processing workspace is to create
isosurfaces of the mesh quality fields to locate distorted elements. The minimum and maximum
values displayed in the iso-surface property panel also allow you to gauge mesh distortion.

4.9.4.20.1. Element Distortion Check

An interior angle is defined as the angle between two adjacent edges at a vertex. For example,
the interior angles of a square are of 90 degrees, while the angles of an equilateral triangle are
of 60 degrees. By default, the minimum and maximum angles are set to 5 and 170 degrees, re-
spectively.

The aspect ratio of an element is defined as the ratio of the lengths of the longest edge to that
of the shortest edge. By default, a maximum aspect ratio of 10 is set.

The bend is evaluated based on the cross product between unit normal directions and
defined at two opposite vertices of a quadrilateral defined in the plane or in the space. More
precisely, it is defined as . Obviously for a triangular face, the bend is always zero and
consequently a tetrahedron is never bent. A regular quadrilateral face has also a zero bend;
however, the bend of a quadrilateral in the space may equal 1 or 2 when an edge is rotated by
90 or 180 degrees out of the plane of the quadrilateral, respectively. The element displayed in
Figure 4.107: Bent Quadrilateral and Unit Normal Directions at Vertices (p. 657) is obtained by
lifting one vertex of a square element in the upward direction over a distance that corresponds
to 70% of the side length; it exhibits a bend of 0.33. If that same vertex was placed above the
diagonally opposite one, at a distance corresponding to the side length, the bend would have
been of 1.58. By default, a maximum bend of 0.8 is set.

Figure 4.107: Bent Quadrilateral and Unit Normal Directions at Vertices

For evaluating the skewness of an element, the transformation that relates the element con-
sidered in the -space and a parent element in the -space is invoked. Let J denote the Jacobian
of the transformation. The skewness can be evaluated as follows:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 657
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

(4.19)

If the transformation is regular, or if J does not vanish, the previous equation is equivalent to

(4.20)

where and are the volume of the element in the -space and of the corresponding
parent element in the -space, respectively. The skewness of a triangle and of a tetrahedron
always vanishes.

For illustrating the skewness of a deformed hexahedron, consider three deformation scenarios
applied to the initially cubic element displayed in Figure 4.108: Three Deformation Scenarios (p. 658).
Note that these three deformation scenarios are applied to an initially cubic element for evaluating
the skewness.

Figure 4.108: Three Deformation Scenarios

In the first scenario, the segment AB is moved along the x-direction; in the second scenario, the
segment AB is moved along the 0xy-bisector; in the third scenario, vertex B moves along the
central line of the 0xyz-trihedron. The first two scenarios also apply to a square. Figure 4.109: Skew-
ness Values vs. Element Shape (p. 659) displays the skewness values as a function of the element
shape dictated by the segment AB according to the selected scenario of Figure 4.108: Three De-
formation Scenarios (p. 658).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
658 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

Figure 4.109: Skewness Values vs. Element Shape

4.9.4.21. Accessing Solution Methods

Use the Methods task to determine specific solution techniques that can be applied to your simu-
lation.

Figure 4.110: Properties of Methods

The choice of numerical methods can influence the simulation's rate of convergence as well as the
solution's accuracy and stability, however, the default settings applied in the workspace are adequate
most of the time.

See Methods Properties (p. 919) for details.

4.9.4.22. Accessing Calculation Activities

Use the Calculation Activities task to determine what, if any, activities will be performed during
the calculation of the solution.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 659
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.111: Properties of Calculation Activities

In most cases, the default settings are adequate. However, information on the AMF and AMF +
secant solver types are outlined in AMF Direct Solver (p. 660) and AMF Direct Solver + Secant (p. 660).

See Calculation Activities Properties (p. 924) for details.

4.9.4.22.1. AMF Direct Solver

The default solver is the algebraic multifrontal (AMF) direct solver (rather than mesh-based) where
the critical variable ordering is based on the assembled equations, having the advantage of taking
into account more sparsity in many systems of equations (for example, in multimode viscoelastic
models where stress modes are uncoupled).

Factors are, by default, stored in memory. It is also possible to force the storage of those factors
onto disk by entering IPONDISK for Solver Keywords. In such a case, the location on disk is
dictated by the TMP (Linux) or TEMP (Windows) environment variable.

4.9.4.22.2. AMF Direct Solver + Secant

In many nonlinear problems, it is possible to take advantage of the system regularity between
iterations in order to factorize the system matrix only from time to time. This is referred to as the
secant, or modified Newton, iterative process. This technique is known to work in most problems
with potentially significant savings (as the CPU-dominant system solution step is performed less
frequently and system assembly can be done at a reduced cost), however, in very rare cases, the
secant iteration may direct iterations along a wrong path, therefore, this option is not the default.
Note that this technique requires slightly more disk space for storing the factors than is the case
for the pure Newton-Raphson scheme, so do not expect memory savings from this technique.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
660 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

4.9.4.22.3. MUMPS Solver

The Fluent Materials Processing workspace provides the MUMPS (Multifrontal Massively Parallel
Solver) for shared memory.

You can specify the MUMPS solver within the Calculation Activities properties panel by selecting
MUMPS direct solver from the Solver Type drop-down list.

MUMPS is a package for solving systems of linear equations of the form Ax=b, where A is a square
sparse matrix. As the AMF solver, MUMPS implements a direct method based on a multifrontal
approach which performs a Gaussian factorization
(4.21)

where is a lower triangular matrix and an upper triangular matrix.

Similarly to the AMF solver, the system is solved in three main steps:

1. Analysis

During the analysis, Mumps creates the elimination tree (variables elimination order) and es-
timates the number of operations and the memory necessary for the factorization and the
solution.

2. Factorization

The factorization computes the and matrices and stores them in double precision. They
can be stored in core memory or on disk.

3. Solution

The solution is obtained through a forward elimination step:

(4.22)

followed by a backward elimination step

(4.23)

4.9.4.22.3.1. Recommendations for the MUMPS Solver

In terms of continuation/transient steps and iterations, the AMF and MUMPS solvers behave
similarly. Extensive testing on approximately one thousand cases has shown that any conver-
gence issues only occurred in about 1% of cases. For most cases, the MUMPS solver is recom-
mended.

If the CPU time is dominated by the system resolution (large 3D extrusion problems or large
3D problems with contact), MUMPS can reduce the CPU time by about 25 - 30% with peak
value up to 50%. The additional memory requirement can reach 200 - 300%. If Out-Of-Core
storage is invoked, this additional memory requirement is only 10 to 20% with a CPU penalty
of a few percent on fast disks.

If the CPU time is not dominated by the solver (2D problems, problems with contact evaluation,
problems with mesh refinement) the benefit of MUMPS in term of CPU is around 10% with
peak value up to 20%. Usually, for these kind of problems, the memory is not an issue.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 661
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

To activate the Out-Of-Core (OOC) storage of the factor's matrix, that is, storage on disk, you
can enter the following command for Solver Keywords within the Launch Options group of
the Calculation Activities panel
MUMPS_AUTO_SWITCH_OOC_MEMORY NNN

where NNN is the in-core (IC) memory value (in MB) to be used before switching to OOC memory
for the MUMPS solver. For example, entering MUMPS_AUTO_SWITCH_OOC_MEMORY 500
specifies the MUMPS solver to use 500 MB of in-core memory before switching to out-of-core
memory. If the estimated memory evaluated by MUMPS is greater than the value of NNN, then
the Out-Of-Core storage will be used by MUMPS.

4.9.4.22.4. MUMPS Solver + Secant

Just as for the AMF Direct Solver, the secant iterative process can be selected for the MUMPS
solver. The secant approach has the same advantages and disadvantages with MUMPS as with
AMF, as described in AMF Direct Solver + Secant (p. 660). You can specify the MUMPS solver +
secant within the Calculation Activities properties panel by selecting MUMPS direct solver +
secant from the Solver Type drop-down list.

4.9.5. Accessing Solution Outputs

Use the Outputs task properties (Figure 4.112: Properties of Outputs (p. 663)) to configure any output-
specific settings that will accompany the solution.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
662 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Solution Options

Figure 4.112: Properties of Outputs

In most cases, the default settings are adequate.

See Outputs Properties (p. 929) for details.

4.9.6. Accessing Solution Monitors

Use the Monitors task properties (Figure 4.113: Properties of Monitors (p. 663)) to configure any
monitors that will describe the solution's convergence.

Figure 4.113: Properties of Monitors

Depending on the type of simulation (blow molding, extrusion, etc.) some convergence criteria are
already enabled by default.

In most cases, the default settings are adequate.

See Monitors Properties (p. 930) for details.

4.9.7. Running the Calculation

Once you have set up the simulation, use the Run Calculation task in the Outline View to access
the Figure 4.114: Properties of Run Calculation (p. 663).

Figure 4.114: Properties of Run Calculation

This task includes options to:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 663
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• Check the setup of your simulation.

Click the Check button to check the setup of your simulation. Any relevant messages are dis-
played in the console window, and you are notified if and when the solver can be started.

• Calculate a solution.

Once you have checked your simulation setup, click the Calculate button to start the solver.

• Interrupt the calculation.

Once you have started your calculation, click the Interrupt button to pause the solver.

• Stop the calculation.

Once you have started your calculation, click the Stop button to halt the solver.

• View Listing of your calculations.

Once your calculation is complete, click the View Listing button for instructions about viewing
the solution transcript, available as a docked tab next to the graphics window.

4.10. Postprocessing Results

You can review your results in the graphics window using objects such as contours, vectors, pathlines,
particle tracks and XY plots. You can also create surfaces for further exploring the results.

These different postprocessing tools are discussed in the following sections:

4.10.1. Surfaces
4.10.2. Reports
4.10.3. Graphics Objects
4.10.4. Material Assignment
4.10.5. Using Plots

4.10.1. Surfaces
You can create different types of surfaces to visualize your results, including points, lines, rakes, planes,
and iso-surfaces.

Note:

To ensure updated surface definitions (for example, if you change the location of a line)
are properly shown when included in a scene or other graphics object, display the surface
before re-displaying the containing object.

Refer to the following sections for more details:

4.10.1.1. Point Surfaces
4.10.1.2. Line Surfaces
4.10.1.3. Rake Surfaces

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
664 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing Results

4.10.1.4. Plane Surfaces

4.10.1.5. Iso-Surfaces
4.10.1.6. Iso-Clip Surfaces
4.10.1.7. Creating Multiple Planes
4.10.1.8. Creating Multiple Iso-Surfaces

4.10.1.1. Point Surfaces

You may be interested in displaying results at a single point in the domain. For example, you may
want to monitor the value of some variable or function at a particular location. To do this, you must
first create a "point" surface, which consists of a single point. When you display node-value data
on a point surface, the value displayed is a linear average of the neighboring node values. If you
display cell-value data, the value at the cell in which the point lies is displayed.

Results → Surfaces New → Point

To create a point surface, use the Figure 4.115: Properties of a Point Surface (p. 665).

Figure 4.115: Properties of a Point Surface

Here, you would typically set the Name, and the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the point.

See Point Properties (p. 931) for details.

4.10.1.2. Line Surfaces

A line is a straight segment that extends up to and includes the specified endpoints; data points
will be located where the line intersects the faces of the cell, and consequently may not be equally
spaced.

Results → Surfaces New → Line

To create a line surface, use the Figure 4.116: Properties of a Line Surface (p. 666).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 665
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.116: Properties of a Line Surface

Here, you would typically set the Name, and various Line Settings, such as the X, Y, and Z coordin-
ates of the First Point and the Second Point of the line surface.

See Line Properties (p. 931) for details.

4.10.1.3. Rake Surfaces

A rake consists of a specified number of points equally spaced between two specified endpoints.

Results → Surfaces New → Rake

To create a rake surface, use the Figure 4.117: Properties of a Rake Surface (p. 666).

Figure 4.117: Properties of a Rake Surface

Here, you would typically set the Name, and various Rake Settings, such as the X, Y, and Z coordin-
ates of the Start Point and the End Point of the rake surface.

See Rake Properties (p. 932) for details.

4.10.1.4. Plane Surfaces

To display flow-field data on a specific plane in the domain, you will use a plane surface. You can
create surfaces that cut through the solution domain along arbitrary planes.

Results → Surfaces Plane...

To create a plane surface, use the Figure 4.118: Properties of a Plane Surface (p. 667).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
666 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing Results

Figure 4.118: Properties of a Plane Surface

Here, you would typically set the Name, and various Plane Settings of the plane surface.

There are three types of plane surfaces that you can create (via the Creation Mode):

• Coordinate system-based—the plane is created in the YX, ZX, or XY directions, bounded by the
extents of the domain. You can move the plane to the desired location in the domain using the
plane tool. For example, if you are using the YZ Plane method, you can drag the plane in the
(+) or (-) X direction.

• Point and normal—the plane orientation is determined by selecting a point and specifying a
direction normal to that point. The extents of the plane are the edges of the domain. You have
the option to control the orientation of the plane using the plane tool or you can compute the
normal from a surface.

• Three points—the plane orientation and extents are bounded by three points that you can select.
You also have the option to manipulate the points and orientation of the plane directly in the
graphics window using the plane tool.

See Plane Properties (p. 933) for details.

4.10.1.5. Iso-Surfaces
If you want to display results on cells that have a constant value for a specified variable, you will
need to create an iso-surface of that variable. For example, generating an iso-surface based on x-
, y-, or z- coordinate will give you an x, y, or z cross-section of your domain; generating an iso-surface
based on pressure will enable you to display data for another variable on a surface of constant
pressure. You can create an iso-surface from an existing surface or from the entire domain. Further-
more, you can restrict any iso-surface to a specified cell zone.

Important:

Note that you cannot create an iso-surface until you have initialized the solution, per-
formed calculations, or read a data file.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 667
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Results → Surfaces New → Iso-Surface

To create an iso-surface, use the Figure 4.119: Properties of an Iso-Surface (p. 668).

Figure 4.119: Properties of an Iso-Surface

Here, you would typically set the Name, and various Iso-Surface Settings of the iso-surface.

Click Display at the bottom of the iso-surface properties panel to display the iso-surface in the
graphics window.

Click Delete at the bottom of the iso-surface properties panel to delete an iso-surface.

Instead of creating plane surfaces one at a time as described above, you have the option to create
multiple plane surfaces at once using the Figure 4.121: Create Multiple Planes Dialog Box (p. 669).

See Iso-Surface Properties (p. 934) for details.

4.10.1.6. Iso-Clip Surfaces

Iso-clip surfaces are clipped surface that consist of those points on the selected surface where the
scalar field values are within the specified range.

Results → Surfaces New → Iso-Clip

To create an iso-clip surface, use the Figure 4.120: Properties of an Iso-Clip Surface (p. 668).

Figure 4.120: Properties of an Iso-Clip Surface

Here, you would typically set the Name, and various Iso-Clip Settings of the iso-clip surface.

Click Display at the bottom of the iso-clip properties panel to display the iso-clip in the graphics
window.

Click Delete at the bottom of the iso-clip properties panel to delete an iso-clip.

See Iso-Clip Properties (p. 935) for details.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
668 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing Results

4.10.1.7. Creating Multiple Planes

Instead of creating plane surfaces one at a time as described above, you have the option to create
multiple plane surfaces at once using the Figure 4.121: Create Multiple Planes Dialog Box (p. 669).

Results → Surfaces Create Multiple Planes...

Figure 4.121: Create Multiple Planes Dialog Box

To use the Create Multiple Planes dialog box:

1. (Optional) Provide a format for naming the plane surfaces in the Name Format field.

2. Specify how many planes will be created in the Number of Planes field.

3. Select the method for how you want to create the planes in the Option drop-down list.

• Point and Normal—similarly to the process described earlier in this section, you must provide
a point and the direction normal to that point to define the first plane.

• First and Last Point—you define the coordinates for the first and last point, which determines
the orientation of the planes. The spacing is determined by how many planes you specify in
the Number of Planes field.

4. (Point and Normal only) Specify the direction normal (perpendicular) to the plane in the Normal
Specification drop-down list.

5. (Point and Normal only) Specify how far apart the planes are from each other in the Spacing
field.

6. Provide the coordinate for the location of the first plane in the Point on First Plane group box.

7. (First and Last Point only) Provide the coordinates for the location of the last plane in the
Point on Last Plane group box.

8. Click Create to create the new plane surfaces.

The new plane surfaces created using the Create Multiple Planes dialog box are added to the
Outline View tree under the Surfaces branch and are now eligible for editing individually. Once
created, the multiple planes cannot be edited as a group.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 669
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.10.1.8. Creating Multiple Iso-Surfaces

Instead of iso-surfaces one at a time as described above, you have the option to create multiple
iso-surfaces at once using the Figure 4.122: Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces Dialog Box (p. 670).

Results → Surfaces Create Multiple Iso-surfaces...

Figure 4.122: Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces Dialog Box

To use the Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces dialog box:

1. (Optional) Provide a format for naming the iso-surfaces in the Name Format field.

2. Select the field that you want to use for creating the iso-surfaces from the Field drop-down list.
The availability of fields depends on the calculation. The following is a sample:

• local shear rate—value of the local shear rate.

• velocity-magnitude—magnitude of the velocity.

• x-coordinate—value of the x-coordinate.

• y-coordinate—value of the y-coordinate.

• z-coordinate—value of the z-coordinate.

• x-velocity—x-component of the velocity.

• y-velocity—y-component of the velocity.

• z-velocity—z-component of the velocity.

• viscosity—value of the viscosity.

• pressure—value of the pressure.

• density—value of the density.

3. Specify the method you want to use for creating iso-surfaces in the Specify By drop-down list.

• First Value, Last Value and Steps—using this method you must specify the First Value for
the quantity that you selected in the Field drop-down list, specify how many iso-surfaces you
want created by entering the number of Steps, and provide the final value for the selected
quantity in the Last Value field.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
670 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing Results

• First Value, Last Value and Increment—using this method you must specify the First Value
for the quantity that you selected in the Field drop-down list, specify the size of the increments
between the first and last value, which determines the number of iso-surfaces to be created,
and provide the final value for the selected quantity in the Last Value field.

• First Value, Increment and Steps—using this method you must specify the First Value for
the quantity that you selected in the Field drop-down list, specify the size of the increments
from the first value, and provide the total number of steps in the Steps field, which determines
the total number of iso-surfaces to be created.

• Last Value, Decrement and Steps—using this method you must specify the size of the
decrement (negative increment) in the Decrement field, which will go backwards from the
Last Value, provide the total number of steps in the Steps field, which determines the total
number of iso-surfaces, and provide the final value for the selected quantity in the Last Value
field.

4. Click Create to create the new iso-surfaces.

The new iso-surfaces created using the Create Multiple Iso-Surfaces dialog box are added to the
Outline View tree under the Surfaces branch and are now eligible for editing individually. Once
created, the multiple iso-surfaces cannot be edited as a group.

4.10.2. Reports
Static reports are available for computation of various postprocessing quantities.

Results → Reports → New...

Once a report is created, click Print Report and the result is printed in the Console. Click Save Report
and the result is saved to a file and location of your choice. Click Plot Report and the result is printed
in the Graphics window.

See Report Properties (p. 935) for details.

4.10.2.1. Printing Reports
4.10.2.2. Saving Reports
4.10.2.3. Plotting Reports

4.10.2.1. Printing Reports

Reports can be printed in the workspace using the Print Report dialog box, accessible from the
relevant report object property page.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 671
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The following options are available when printing your reports:

Timestep Selection

Indicate specific details of the time step (Current, First, Last, All, or specify the starting point,
the ending point and a particular increment.

4.10.2.2. Saving Reports

Reports can be saved in the workspace using the Save Report dialog box, accessible from relevant
report object property page.

The following options are available when saving your reports:

Filename

Specify the name and location of the report that you want to save.

Timestep Selection

Indicate specific details of the time step (Current, First, Last, All, or specify the starting point,
the ending point and a particular increment.

4.10.2.3. Plotting Reports

Reports can be plotted in the workspace using the Plot Report dialog box, accessible from relevant
report object property page.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
672 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing Results

The following options are available when plotting your reports:

Title

Specify the title you want to apply to the plot report

X Axis

Specify the variable you want to apply to the x-axis for the plot report.

X Axis Label

Specify the title you want to apply to the x-axis for the plot report.

Y Axis Label

Specify the title you want to apply to the y-axis for the plot report.

Timestep Selection

Indicate specific details of the plot report time step (Current, First, Last, All, or specify the
starting point, the ending point and a particular increment.

4.10.3. Graphics Objects

Postprocessing graphics objects are available for visualizing the results of your simulation. You can
display the mesh, contours, vectors, pathlines, and scenes. Scenes allow you to combine multiple
graphics objects within a single graphics window.

Note:

Only field variables that are appropriate and compatible for the specific workspace simula-
tions are available in the Field dialog box.

Once you have created your graphics objects and/or made changes to their properties, you can:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 673
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• Click Display to visualize the object in the graphics window.

• Click Save Image to open the Save Image dialog box and proceed to save an image file of
the object in the graphics window.

The available graphics objects are described in greater detail in the following sections:
4.10.3.1. LIC Settings
4.10.3.2. Mesh Plots
4.10.3.3. Contour Plots
4.10.3.4. Vector Plots
4.10.3.5. Pathline Plots
4.10.3.6. Display Settings
4.10.3.7. Scenes
4.10.3.8. Mirror Planes

4.10.3.1. LIC Settings

The Line Integral Convolution algorithm allows you to integrate a vector over a part surface. It can
be used to provide a uniform visualization of the flow of a vector over a surface. The settings used
for drawing the LIC including the velocity field can be specified under LIC Settings in the Outline
View.

Results → Graphics → LIC Settings

Line integral convolution can be drawn as part of contour objects or mesh objects in which faces
are displayed. To draw LIC on a contour or mesh object, enable the Display LIC option within their
respective property panels as outlined in Mesh Properties (p. 938) and Contour Properties (p. 939).

See LIC Settings Properties (p. 937) for details.

4.10.3.2. Mesh Plots

Mesh plots allow you to visualize and inspect the mesh.

To create a mesh plot, right-click Meshes in the Outline View tree and select New....

Results → Graphics → Meshes New...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
674 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing Results

Once you have made your property settings, click Display to visualize the object in the graphics
window. You can also click Save Image to save an image file of the object in the graphics window.

See Mesh Properties (p. 938) for details.

4.10.3.3. Contour Plots

Contour plots are a valuable postprocessing tool that allow you to use color to represent the values
of the specified field variable on the selected surfaces.

To create a contour plot, right-click Contours in the Outline View tree and select New....

Results → Graphics → Contours New...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 675
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Once you have made your property settings, click Display to visualize the object in the graphics
window. You can also click Save Image to save an image file of the object in the graphics window.

See Contour Properties (p. 939) for details.

4.10.3.4. Vector Plots

You can draw vectors in the entire domain, or on selected surfaces. By default, one vector is drawn
at the center of each cell (or at the center of each facet of a data surface), with the length of the
arrows represented by the selected vector field (typically the velocity) and the color of the arrows
represented by the selected scalar field. The spacing, size, and coloring of the arrows can be mod-
ified, along with several other vector plot settings. Note that cell-center values are always used for
vector plots; you cannot plot node-averaged values.

To create a vector plot, right-click Vectors in the Outline View tree and select New...

Results → Graphics → Vectors New...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
676 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing Results

Once you have made your property settings, click Display to visualize the object in the graphics
window. You can also click Save Image to save an image file of the object in the graphics window.

See Vector Properties (p. 941) for details.

4.10.3.5. Pathline Plots

Pathlines are used to visualize the flow of massless particles in the problem domain. The particles
are released from one or more surfaces that you have created as described in Surfaces (p. 664). A
line or rake surface (see Line Surfaces (p. 665) and Rake Surfaces (p. 666)) is most commonly used.

To create a pathline plot, right-click Pathlines in the Outline View tree and select New....

Results → Graphics → Pathlines New...

Once you have made your property settings, click Display to visualize the object in the graphics
window. You can also click Save Image to save an image file of the object in the graphics window.

See Pathlines Properties (p. 943) for details.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 677
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.10.3.6. Display Settings

Use the Display Settings properties panel to change various attributes of the graphics window
display.

Results → Display Settings

See Display Settings Properties (p. 946) for details.

4.10.3.7. Scenes
Scenes can be used to display multiple graphics plots within a single window. For example, you
could overlay contours of pressure across a valve with velocity vectors and the mesh at the same
location. Scenes allow you to modify the transparency of each plot so that you can emphasize a
particular plot or view.

To create a new scene, right-click Scenes in the Outline View tree and select New....

Results → Graphics → Scenes New...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
678 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing Results

1. (Optional) Enter a Title for the scene.

2. Under Graphical Objects, select whether or not to include graphics objects in a scene by en-
abling or disabling the Active check box for the corresponding Object in the list.

3. Set the transparencies for the selected graphics objects by clicking the Transparencies field.

Once you have made your property settings, click Display to visualize the object in the graphics
window. You can also click Save Image... to save an image file of the object in the graphics window,
or click Save Animation... to save an animation.

4.10.3.7.1. Saving Animations

Animations can be saved in the workspace using the Save Animations dialog box, accessible
from relevant graphics objects (contours, vectors, etc.).

The following options are available when saving your animations:

Format

Allows you to specify the saved animation format as either MP4 (default), AVI, MOV, PNG,
TIF, JPEG, or PPM.

Options

Contains general animation options.

Frame rate

Specify rate of the frames (in frames per second, fps) to be set for the animation to be
recorded. Generally, the default is 30fp (for MP4, AVI, or MOV formats).

Anti-aliasing passes

Specify the number of anti-aliasing passes required to smooth out edges and distortions.

Format-specific Options

Contains options that are specific to the chosen animation format.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 679
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Quality

(MP4) Allows you to control the quality and resolution for the animation sequence.

H.264 encoding

(MP4) Allows you to control the encoding for the animation sequence.

Bit rate

(AVI and MOV) Allows you to control the bit rate for the animation sequence.

Compression

(AVI, PNG, TIF) Allows you to control the compression method for the animation sequence.

JPEG Quality

(JPEG) Allows you to control the compression rate (0-100) for the animation sequence.

PPM Format

(PPM) Allows you to save the animation files as Binary (Default) or ASCII.

Appearance

Specifies the general look of the saved animation.

Use White Background

Allows you to save animations with a white background and a black foreground.

Orientation

Controls the orientation of the animation as either Landscape or Portrait

Resolution

Use Window Resolution

Uses the resolution of the current graphics window when the image is saved.

4.10.3.8. Mirror Planes

Mirror planes allow you to define a symmetry plane for a non-symmetric domain for use with your
graphics objects.

To use mirror planes, open the Results tab of the Ribbon and, under Graphics, select Mirror
Planes... to open the Mirror Planes dialog.

Results → Graphics → Mirror Planes...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
680 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing Results

1. Specify whether the mirror plane will be oriented in the X, Y, or Z plane(s).

2. Specify the distance from the origin in the x, y, or z directions Use the X Origin, Y Origin, or Z
Origin fields.

You can visualize your changes as you make them in the dialog, and adjust the settings accordingly.

4.10.4. Material Assignment

You can assign specific materials to specific surfaces in your simulation.

To use material assignments, open the Results tab of the Ribbon and, under Graphics, select Mater-
ial Assignment... to open the Assign Material To Surface dialog.

Results → Graphics → Material Assignment...

1. Specify one or more surfaces from the Surfaces list.

2. Specify a material from the Material list.

3. Click Assign to assign the selected material to the surface(s).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 681
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.10.5. Using Plots

Postprocessing plot objects are available for visualizing the data from the results of your simulation.
You can display the standard XY plots, or specialized plots for transient simulations.

The available graphics objects are described in greater detail in the following sections:
4.10.5.1. XY Plots
4.10.5.2.Transient Plots

4.10.5.1. XY Plots
XY plots are a valuable postprocessing tool that allow you to plot variables related to your simulation.

To create an XY plot, right-click XY Plots in the Outline View tree and select New....

Results → Plots → XY Plots New...

Once you have set your properties:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
682 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing Results

• Click Plot to display the plot in the graphics window.

• Click Export Data to save the plot in another format.

• Click Save Image... to save the plot as an image.

• Click Delete to remove the plot.

See XY Plot Properties (p. 947) for more details.

4.10.5.2. Transient Plots

Transient plots are a valuable postprocessing tool that allow you to use study time-dependant aspects
of your simulation.

To create a transient plot, right-click Transient Plots in the Outline View tree and select New....

Results → Plots → Transient Plots New...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 683
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Once you have set your properties:

• Click Print to create a hard copy of the plot.

• Click Plot to display the plot in the graphics window.

• Click Export to save the plot in another format.

• Click Delete to remove the plot.

• Click Save Image... to save the plot as an image.

• Click Manage Report Files... to pick and choose the reports files that your plot is comprised
of.

See Transient Plot Properties (p. 951) for more details.

4.11. Rheometry
The Rheometry section of Fluent Materials Processing allows you to display the rheological properties
curves of the selected model and to perform parameters fitting for a selected model. Additional inform-
ation on curve display and on viscoelastic models is also provided.
4.11.1. Material Data Parameters
4.11.2. Rheological Properties
4.11.3. Fitting Material Parameters
4.11.4. Defining and Plotting Curves
4.11.5. Guidelines for Viscoelastic Models

4.11.1. Material Data Parameters

This chapter describes the fluid models available in Fluent Materials Processing, including details
about the related material data parameters for each.
4.11.1.1. Overview of Fluid Properties and Flow Characteristics
4.11.1.2. Generalized Newtonian Model
4.11.1.3. Differential Viscoelastic Model
4.11.1.4. Integral Viscoelastic Model
4.11.1.5. Simplified Viscoelastic Model

4.11.1.1. Overview of Fluid Properties and Flow Characteristics

The proper selection of a fluid model is one of the most important aspects in the simulation of a
flow. You need to always consider both the fluid and the flow. A particular constitutive equation
is valid for a given fluid in a given flow.

To determine an appropriate model for your problem, you need to first collect as much data as
possible about the fluid properties. Typical information includes the following:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
684 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

• Steady viscometric properties (shear viscosity and first normal-stress difference ). These data
characterize the fluid in the presence of large deformations.

• Oscillatory viscometric properties (storage and loss moduli and ), also known as linear vis-
coelastic data because they correspond to small deformations.

• Elongational viscosity. Although obtaining data on elongation is difficult and not very frequent,
knowledge of the elongational viscosity can be of interest if the process involves a visible
elongation component, for example, fiber spinning. This may be useful in choosing the appropriate
constitutive equation and estimating the values of the various parameters.

These data are not enough to evaluate the relevance of viscoelasticity in a given process. It is also
necessary to characterize the flow itself and compare a characteristic time of the material to a
characteristic time of the flow. In many situations, the flow can be characterized by a typical shear
rate, which can be understood as a wall shear rate in a region of high gradients. For example, in a
fiber-spinning process, a typical shear rate will occur at the wall in the vicinity of the die exit. In a
contraction or expansion flow (for example, Figure 4.123: Contraction and Expansion Flow (p. 685)),
consider the shear rate in the narrow section.

Figure 4.123: Contraction and Expansion Flow

In a planar flow (Figure 4.123: Contraction and Expansion Flow (p. 685) a),
(4.24)

where is a typical distance.

In an axisymmetric flow (Figure 4.123: Contraction and Expansion Flow (p. 685) b),
(4.25)

where is a typical radius.

You also need to determine the elasticity level of the fluid. This can be accomplished by evaluation
of the fluid’s characteristic relaxation time. When the oscillatory functions and are available,
their intersection (occurring at a shear rate , as shown in Figure 4.124: Storage and Loss
Moduli Curves (p. 686)) is often a reasonable choice for selecting a typical relaxation time. Indeed,

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 685
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

flows characterized by a typical shear rate lower than are essentially dominated by viscous forces,
while viscoelastic effects may play an important role in flows characterized by a shear rate higher
than .

Note that, due to the technological limitations of some rheometry equipment, it is not always
possible to obtain viscoelastic data in the range of shear rates (or angular frequencies) where the
process operates. In this case, your only option is to extrapolate experimental data for higher shear
rates or angular frequencies. The selection of a particular model for such a case will be more qual-
itative.

Figure 4.124: Storage and Loss Moduli Curves

A typical dimensionless number used to estimate the viscoelastic character of a flow is the Weissen-
berg number , which is the product of the relaxation time and a typical shear rate :
(4.26)

When is low, generalized Newtonian models are sufficient to describe the flow; only at higher
values of are viscoelastic models required to characterize memory effects.

Note that the Weissenberg number is probably not the best indicator for viscoelastic models with
several relaxation times or if there is shear thinning in the flow. In such cases, a useful dimensionless
number is the recoverable shear , defined as the ratio of the first normal-stress difference to
twice the steady shear stress :

(4.27)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
686 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

The recoverable shear gives the level of elasticity of a flow: if >1, the viscoelastic character of
the flow is important, and a viscoelastic model is required.

The different fluid models are studied in different flows described in Rheological Properties (p. 768).

• Steady Simple Shear Flow. See Steady Simple Shear Flow (p. 769) for more details.

• Steady Extensional Flow. See Steady Extensional Flow (p. 771) for more details.

• Oscillatory Shear Flow. See Oscillatory Shear Flow (p. 774) for more details.

• Transient Shear Flow. See Transient Shear Flow (p. 774) for more details.

• Transient Extensional Flow. See Transient Extensional Flow (p. 776) for more details.

Plots the rheometric curves for different models and flows. Carefully investigate the scales used for
those plots as logarithm scales, linear scales for the logarithm of the quantities or a mixed of linear
and logarithm scales can be used.

4.11.1.2. Generalized Newtonian Model

This section describes the following topics:
4.11.1.2.1. Introduction
4.11.1.2.2. Shear Rate Dependence of Viscosity
4.11.1.2.3.Temperature Dependence of Viscosity

4.11.1.2.1. Introduction
4.11.1.2.1.1. Equations

For a generalized Newtonian fluid, the constitutive equation has the form
(4.28)

where is the extra-stress tensor, is the rate-of-deformation tensor, and is the viscosity,
which can depend upon both the second invariant of and the temperature .

The general form for the viscosity is written as

(4.29)

where is the local shear rate. Therefore, and represent the shear-rate and tem-
perature dependence of the viscosity, respectively.

4.11.1.2.1.2. Inputs

To specify a newtonian model, you need to first select Generalized Newtonian model.

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Model Type

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 687
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Specify an appropriate Fluid Name.

Choose the Shear Rate Dependence and Temperature Dependence law.

See Non-Automatic Fitting and Automatic Fitting for information about where and how the
material data specification occurs in the non-automatic and automatic fitting procedures, re-
spectively.

See Shear Rate Dependence of Viscosity (p. 688) and Temperature Dependence of Viscosity (p. 704)
for details about the parameters and characteristics of each fluid model.

4.11.1.2.2. Shear Rate Dependence of Viscosity

There are currently 10 laws available for .

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence

4.11.1.2.2.1. Constant

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence → Constant

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
688 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

For Newtonian fluids, a constant viscosity

(4.30)

is the default setting. is referred to as the Newtonian or zero-shear-rate viscosity, and its
default value is 1.

The units for and its name in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are as follows:

Parameter Name in MatPro Rheometry Mass Length Time

tool
Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1

Figure 4.125: Constant (Shear-Rate-Independent) Viscosity (p. 689) shows a plot of a constant
.

Figure 4.125: Constant (Shear-Rate-Independent) Viscosity

4.11.1.2.2.2. Bird-Carreau Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence → Bird-Carreau

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 689
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The Bird-Carreau law for viscosity is

(4.31)

where is the infinite-shear-rate viscosity, is the zero-shear-rate viscosity, is natural time

(that is, inverse of the shear rate at which the fluid changes from Newtonian to power-law be-
havior) and is the power-law index.

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in MatPro Rheometry Mass Length Time

tool
Zero Shear Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Infinite Shear Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Time Constant [s] 1
Power Law Index – – –

By default, and are equal to 1, and and are equal to 0. Figure 4.126: Bird-Carreau Law
for Viscosity (p. 691) shows a plot of a for the Bird-Carreau law.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
690 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.126: Bird-Carreau Law for Viscosity

The Bird-Carreau law is commonly used when it is necessary to describe the low-shear-rate
behavior of the viscosity. It differs from the Cross law primarily in the curvature of the viscosity
curve in the vicinity of the transition between the plateau zone and the power law behavior.

4.11.1.2.2.3. Power Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence → Power

The power law for viscosity is

(4.32)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 691
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

where is the consistency factor, is the natural time, and is the power-law index, which
is a property of a given material.

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in MatPro Rheometry Mass Length Time

tool
Consistency Factor [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Time Constant [s] 1
Power Law Index – – –

By default, , , and are equal to 1. Figure 4.127: Power Law for Viscosity (p. 692) shows a
plot of for the power law.

Figure 4.127: Power Law for Viscosity

The power law is commonly used for the algebraic simplicity of its formulation. Although it
can be a good candidate for describing the behavior of polyethylene or rubber for shear rates
spanning over 2 or 3 decades, it does not predict any plateau for low shear rates. Consequently,
it can be a convenient choice for the analysis of internal flow, but it should preferably be
avoided when analyzing extrusion flows.

4.11.1.2.2.4. Bingham Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence → Bingham

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
692 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

The Bingham law for viscosity is

(4.33)

where is the yield stress and is the critical shear rate, beyond which Bingham’s constitutive
equation is applied. For shear rates less than , the behavior of the fluid is normalized in order
to mimic as much as possible a solid body and to guarantee appropriate continuity properties
in the viscosity curve.

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in MatPro Rheometry Mass Length Time

tool
Plastic Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Yield Stress Threshold [Pa] 1 –1 –2
Critical Shear Rate [s^-1] – – –1

By default, , , and are equal to 1. Figure 4.128: Bingham Law for Viscosity (p. 694) shows
a plot of for the Bingham law.

The Bingham law is commonly used to describe materials such as concrete, mud, dough, and
toothpaste, for which a constant viscosity after a critical shear stress is a reasonable assumption,
typically at rather low shear rates.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 693
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.128: Bingham Law for Viscosity

4.11.1.2.2.5. Modified Bingham Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence → modified

Bingham

A modified Bingham law for viscosity is also available:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
694 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

(4.34)

where .

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Rheometry Tool Mass Length Time

Plastic Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Yield Stress Threshold [Pa] 1 –1 –2
Critical Shear Rate [s^-1] – – –1

By default, , , and are equal to 1. Figure 4.129: Modified Bingham Law for Viscosity (p. 695)
shows a plot of for the modified Bingham law.

Figure 4.129: Modified Bingham Law for Viscosity

Compared to the standard Bingham law, the modified Bingham law is an analytic expression,
which means that it may be easier for Fluent Materials Processing to calculate, leading to a
more stable solution. The value has been selected so that the standard and modified
Bingham laws exhibit the same behavior above the critical shear rate, .

4.11.1.2.2.6. Herschel-Bulkley Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence → Herschel-

Bulkley

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 695
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The Herschel-Bulkley law for viscosity is

(4.35)

where is the yield stress, is the critical shear rate, is the consistency factor, and is the
power-law index.

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Rheometry Tool Mass Length Time

Yield Stress Threshold [Pa] 1 –1 –2
Consistency Factor [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Critical Shear Rate [s^-1] – – –1

Power Law Index – – –

By default, , , , and are equal to 1. Figure 4.130: Herschel-Bulkley Law for Viscosity (p. 697)
shows a plot of for the Herschel-Bulkley law.

Like the Bingham law, the Herschel-Bulkley law is commonly used to describe materials such
as concrete, mud, dough, and toothpaste, for which a constant viscosity after a critical shear
stress is a reasonable assumption. In addition to the transition behavior between a flow and
no-flow regime, the Herschel-Bulkley law exhibits a shear-thinning behavior that the Bingham
law does not.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
696 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.130: Herschel-Bulkley Law for Viscosity

Note:

An oblique arrow on the right of a symbol indicates how the symbol changes, and
vertical/horizontal arrows indicate how the curve transforms as the symbol changes.

4.11.1.2.2.7. Modified Herschel-Bulkley Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence → modified

Herschel-Bulkley

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 697
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

A modified Herschel-Bulkley law is also available:

(4.36)

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Rheometry Tool Mass Length Time

Yield Stress Threshold [Pa] 1 –1 –2
Consistency Factor [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Critical Shear Rate [s^-1] – – –1

Power Law Index – – –

By default, , , , and are equal to 1. Figure 4.131: Modified Herschel-Bulkley Law for Vis-
cosity (p. 699) shows a plot of for the modified Herschel-Bulkley law.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
698 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.131: Modified Herschel-Bulkley Law for Viscosity

Compared to the standard Herschel-Bulkley law, Figure 4.130: Herschel-Bulkley Law for Viscos-
ity (p. 697), the modified Herschel-Bulkley law is an analytic expression, which means that it
may be easier for Fluent Materials Processing to calculate, leading to a more stable solution.
The integer value 3 that appears in the argument of the exponential term has been selected
so that the standard and modified Herschel-Bulkley laws exhibit the same behavior above the
critical shear rate, .

4.11.1.2.2.8. Cross Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence → Cross

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 699
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The Cross law for viscosity is

(4.37)

where is the zero-shear-rate viscosity, is the natural time (that is, inverse of the shear rate
at which the fluid changes from Newtonian to power-law behavior) and is the Cross-law index
(= 1– for large shear rates).

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Mass Length Time

Materials
Processing
Zero Shear Vis- 1 –1 –1
cosity [Pa s]
Time Constant 1
[s]
Cross Law Index – – –

By default, is equal to 1, and and are equal to 0. Figure 4.132: Cross Law for Viscos-
ity (p. 701) shows a plot of for the Cross law.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
700 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.132: Cross Law for Viscosity

Like the Bird-Carreau law, the Cross law is commonly used when it is necessary to describe the
low-shear-rate behavior of the viscosity. It differs from the Bird-Carreau law primarily in the
curvature of the viscosity curve in the vicinity of the transition between the plateau zone and
the power law behavior.

4.11.1.2.2.9. Modified Cross Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence → modified

Cross

A modified Cross law for viscosity is also available:

(4.38)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 701
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Zero Shear Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Time Constant [s] 1
Cross Law Index – – –

By default, is equal to 1, and and are equal to 0. Figure 4.133: Modified Cross Law for
Viscosity (p. 702) shows a plot of for the Cross law.

Figure 4.133: Modified Cross Law for Viscosity

This law can be considered a special case of the Carreau-Yasuda viscosity law (Equa-
tion 4.39 (p. 703)), where the exponent has a value of 1.

4.11.1.2.2.10. Carreau-Yasuda Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Shear Rate Dependence → Carreau-

Yasuda

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
702 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

The Carreau-Yasuda law for viscosity is:

(4.39)

where is the zero-shear-rate viscosity, is the infinite-shear-rate viscosity, is the natural

time (that is, inverse of the shear rate at which the fluid changes from Newtonian to power-
law behavior), is the index that controls the transition from the Newtonian plateau to the
power-law region and is the power-law index.

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Zero Shear Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Infinite Shear Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Time Constant [s] 1
Power Law Index – – –
Plateau Index – – –

By default, , , and are equal to 1, and and are equal to 0. Figure 4.134: Carreau-Yasuda
Law for Viscosity (p. 704) shows a plot of for the Carreau-Yasuda law.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 703
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.134: Carreau-Yasuda Law for Viscosity

The Carreau-Yasuda law is a slight variation on the Bird-Carreau law (Equation 4.31 (p. 690)).
The addition of the exponent allows for control of the transition from the Newtonian plateau
to the power-law region. A low value ( < 1) lengthens the transition, and a high value ( >1)
results in an abrupt transition.

4.11.1.2.3. Temperature Dependence of Viscosity

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Temperature Dependence

As discussed in Introduction (p. 687), the general form for the viscosity can be written as the
product of functions of shear rate and temperature. There are two ways in which this relationship
can be expressed:
(4.40)

(4.41)

where and represent the shear-rate and temperature dependence of the viscosity,
respectively.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
704 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

In Equation 4.40 (p. 704), the temperature scales the viscosity so there is only a vertical shift on
the model curves vs. temperature. Four of the temperature-dependent laws follow this
format:

• Arrhenius approximate law

• Arrhenius law

• Fulcher law

• WLF law

In Equation 4.41 (p. 704), the time-temperature equivalence is introduced by also scaling the shear
rate by temperature. Therefore, there is a horizontal shift in addition to the vertical shift on the
model curves vs. temperature. Three of the temperature-dependent viscosity laws follow
this format:

• Arrhenius approximate law

• Arrhenius law

• WLF law

By default, there is no temperature dependence of the viscosity (that is, ).

4.11.1.2.3.1. Arrhenius Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Temperature Dependence → Arrhenius

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 705
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The Arrhenius law is given as

(4.42)

where is the ratio of the activation energy to the perfect gas constant and is a reference
temperature for which .

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in MatPro Rheometry Mass Length Time Temperature

Tool
Ea/R [K] – – – 1
Reference Temperature [K] – – – 1

By default, Ea/R is set to 0 and the Reference Temperature to 300 [K]. Figure 4.135: Arrhenius
Law for the Temperature Dependence of the Viscosity With Vertical Shift Only (p. 707) shows a
plot of for the Arrhenius law.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
706 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.135: Arrhenius Law for the Temperature Dependence of the Viscosity With Vertical
Shift Only

When the Arrhenius law is selected for the temperature dependence of the viscosity, you have
the option of selecting the shift that is applied such as a vertical shift only or a combination
of both vertical and horizontal shifts. If the vertical shift is selected, the viscosity curve will be
shifted vertically, downwards or upwards, subsequently to a temperature increase or decrease,
respectively. Figure 4.135: Arrhenius Law for the Temperature Dependence of the Viscosity With
Vertical Shift Only (p. 707) suggests a vertical shift only, where Equation 4.40 (p. 704) is used.
Figure 4.136: Approximate Arrhenius Law for the Temperature Dependence of the Viscosity
With Both Vertical and Horizontal Shifts (p. 709) suggests a combination of both vertical and
horizontal shifts, where Equation 4.41 (p. 704) is applied.

4.11.1.2.3.2. Approximate Arrhenius Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Temperature Dependence → Arrhenius

approximate

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 707
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The approximate Arrhenius law is obtained as the first-order Taylor expansion of the Arrhenius
law (Equation 4.42 (p. 706)):
(4.43)

where is the ratio of the activation energy to the perfect gas constant and is a reference
temperature for which H(T) = 1. The behavior described by Equation 4.43 (p. 708) is similar to
that described by Equation 4.42 (p. 706) in the neighborhood of . Equation 4.43 (p. 708) is
valid as long as the temperature difference is not too large.

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in MatPro Rheometry Mass Length Time Temperature

Tool
Ea/R [K] – – – 1
Reference Temperature [K] – – – 1

By default, Ea/R is set to 0 and the Reference Temperature is set to 300 [K]. Figure 4.136: Ap-
proximate Arrhenius Law for the Temperature Dependence of the Viscosity With Both Vertical
and Horizontal Shifts (p. 709) shows a plot of ( ) for the approximate Arrhenius law.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
708 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.136: Approximate Arrhenius Law for the Temperature Dependence of the Viscosity
With Both Vertical and Horizontal Shifts

When the approximate Arrhenius law is selected for the temperature dependence of the viscosity,
you have the option of selecting the shift that is applied such as a vertical shift only or a
combination of both vertical and horizontal shifts. If the vertical shift is selected, the viscosity
curve will be shifted vertically, downwards or upwards, subsequently to a temperature increase
or decrease, respectively. Figure 4.135: Arrhenius Law for the Temperature Dependence of the
Viscosity With Vertical Shift Only (p. 707) suggests a vertical shift only, where equation (Equa-
tion 4.40 (p. 704)) is used. Figure 4.136: Approximate Arrhenius Law for the Temperature Depend-
ence of the Viscosity With Both Vertical and Horizontal Shifts (p. 709) suggests a combination
of both vertical and horizontal shifts, where equation (Equation 4.41 (p. 704)) is applied.

4.11.1.2.3.3. Fulcher Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Temperature Dependence → Fulcher

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 709
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Another definition for comes from the Fulcher law 5 (p. 954):
(4.44)

where , , and are the Fulcher constants. The Fulcher law is used mainly for glass.

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in MatPro Rheometry Mass Length Time Temperature

Tool
F1 – – – –

F2 [K] – – – 1

F3 [K] – – – 1

By default, , and are equal to 0.

Although the Fulcher temperature dependence law can be combined with a non-constant
shear-rate dependence, it is originally developed for modelling the temperature dependence
of the viscosity for molten glass. Hence, it is usually combined with a constant (unity) viscosity
factor. You can give the following interpretation for the three coefficients , and .

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
710 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

As illustrated in Figure 4.137: Typical Viscosity Curve vs. Temperature (p. 711), very high temper-
ature are encountered. You start with , which corresponds to the temperature where the
viscosity is infinite. The law can no longer be applied if the fluid temperature is lower than .
For preventing issues, a cut-off has been introduced so that the calculation is not hindered
when temperatures less than are encountered.

If increases, the overall viscosity curve decreases. Eventually, an increase of leads to a

more visible dependence of the viscosity curve with respect to the temperature.

Figure 4.137: Typical Viscosity Curve vs. Temperature

In the image above, the blue line is obeying the Fulcher Law and the viscosity can be bounded
to prevent numerical issues (orange line).

In Figure 4.137: Typical Viscosity Curve vs. Temperature (p. 711), you plot the Fulcher viscosity
curve vs. temperature. Very high values are obtained at low temperatures. The law as such
does not permit considering temperatures below the value of . To prevent numerical diffi-
culties which may originate from very high values, an upper bound of 1014 has been assigned
to the viscosity by default. That value is sufficient for mimicking the behavior of a body which
is partly solidified.

4.11.1.2.3.4. WLF Law

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Viscosity Law → Temperature Dependence → WLF

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 711
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The Williams-Landel-Ferry (WLF) equation is a temperature-dependent viscosity law that fits

experimental data better than the Arrhenius law for a wide range of temperatures, especially
close to the glass transition temperature:

(4.45)

where and are the WLF constants, and and are reference temperatures.

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in MatPro Rheometry Tool Mass Length Time Temperature

C1 – – – –
C2 [K] – – – 1
Reference Temperature [K] – – – 1
Reference Temperature Difference [K] – – – 1

Figure 4.138: Effect of Increasing c2 on the WLF Law for Viscosity (p. 713) and Figure 4.139: Effect
of Increasing c1 or Ta on the WLF Law for Viscosity (p. 713) show the impact of each parameter
on the viscosity curves. A large value of will enhance the decrease of the viscosity with respect

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
712 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

to temperature, while a larger value of will spread out the viscosity dependence with respect
to temperature when it is around the reference temperature value.

It is important to note that the quantity must remain positive in a flow simulation.

Figure 4.138: Effect of Increasing c2 on the WLF Law for Viscosity

Figure 4.139: Effect of Increasing c1 or Ta on the WLF Law for Viscosity

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 713
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

When the WLF law is selected for the temperature dependence of the viscosity, you have the
option of selecting the shift that is applied such as a vertical shift only or a combination of
both vertical and horizontal shifts. If the vertical shift is selected, the viscosity curve will be
shifted vertically, downwards, or upwards, subsequently to a temperature increase or decrease,
respectively. Figure 4.136: Approximate Arrhenius Law for the Temperature Dependence of the
Viscosity With Both Vertical and Horizontal Shifts (p. 709) suggests a vertical shift only, where
equation (Equation 4.40 (p. 704)) is used.

4.11.1.3. Differential Viscoelastic Model

This section describes the following topics:
4.11.1.3.1. Introduction
4.11.1.3.2. Differential Viscoelastic Models
4.11.1.3.3.Temperature Dependence of Viscosity and Relaxation Time
4.11.1.3.4. Multiple Relaxation Times for Differential Viscoelastic Models

4.11.1.3.1. Introduction
The differential approach to modeling viscoelastic model is appropriate for most practical applic-
ations. Many of the most common constitutive models for viscoelastic model are provided in
Fluent Materials Processing, including Maxwell, Oldroyd, Phan-Thien-Tanner, Giesekus, FENE-P,
POM-POM, and Leonov models. Appropriate choices for the viscoelastic model and related
parameters can yield qualitatively and quantitatively accurate representations of viscoelastic be-
havior.

Improved accuracy is possible if you use multiple relaxation times to better fit the viscoelastic
behavior at different shear rates.

Note:

While differential viscoelastic models are compatible with 2D and 3D models, they are
not compatible with the shell model.

4.11.1.3.1.1. Equations

For a differential viscoelastic model, the constitutive equation for the extra-stress tensor is
(4.46)

(the viscoelastic component) is computed differently for each type of viscoelastic model.
(the purely viscous component) is an optional component, which is always computed from
(4.47)

where is the rate-of-deformation tensor and is the viscosity factor for the Newtonian (that
is, purely viscous) component of the extra-stress-tensor referred to as the additional viscosity.

4.11.1.3.1.2. Inputs

To specify a viscoelastic model, you need to first select Differential Viscoelastic model.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
714 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Model Type

Specify an appropriate Fluid Name.

Choose the Model and specify Number of Relaxation Modes and Additional Viscosity [Pa
s].

For each Mode, specify Relaxation Time [s], Partial Viscosity [Pa s] and Alpha.

Finally, select the law and parameters for the Thermal Dependency.

See Non-Automatic Fitting and Automatic Fitting for information about where and how the
material data specification occurs in the non-automatic and automatic fitting procedures, re-
spectively.

See Differential Viscoelastic Models (p. 715) and Temperature Dependence of Viscosity and Re-
laxation Time (p. 757) for details about the parameters and characteristics of each fluid model.

4.11.1.3.2. Differential Viscoelastic Models

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Differential Viscoelastic Properties → Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 715
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

There are currently eight differential models:

• Maxwell and Oldroyd-B:

These are the simplest viscoelastic constitutive equations, although in many situations they
are the most numerically cumbersome. Both models exhibit a constant viscosity and a quadratic
first normal-stress difference. They should be selected either when very little information is
known about the fluid, or when a qualitative prediction is sufficient. For fluids exhibiting a very
high extensional viscosity, the Oldroyd-B model is preferred over the Maxwell model.

• Phan-Thien-Tanner, Johnson-Segalman, and Giesekus:

These models are the most realistic. They exhibit shear thinning and a non-quadratic first normal-
stress difference at high shear rates. These properties are controlled by their respective mater-
ial parameters ( , , and ), as described in the model description below. Also, the selection
of nonzero values for and will lead to a bounded steady extensional viscosity.

For stability reasons in a simple shear flow, a non-zero additional viscosity must be selected.
This is true for the Johnson-Segalman and Phan-Thien-Tanner models when is nonzero,
and for the Giesekus model when >0.5. The addition of a purely viscous component to the
extra-stress tensor affects the viscosity, but not the first normal-stress difference. Shear thinning
is still present, but the viscosity curve also shows a plateau zone at high shear rates.

Poor control of the shear viscosity is the usual drawback of the Johnson-Segalman and Phan-
Thien-Tanner models used with a single relaxation time, especially toward high shear rates.

Important:

Note that you cannot explicitly select the Johnson-Segalman model in the Fluent
Materials Processing interface. It is obtained by selecting the Phan-Thien-Tanner
model and setting the value of to 0.

• FENE-P:

A single mode of the FENE-P model requires only three parameters ( , and the length ratio
for the spring), yet it predicts a realistic shear thinning of the fluid and a first normal-stress
difference that is quadratic for low shear rates and has a lower slope for high shear rates. It

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
716 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

has been observed in practice that viscometric properties of several fluids can often be accurately
modeled. The FENE-P model is well suited for simulating the rheological behavior of dilute
solutions.

• POM-POM:

The pom-pom molecule consists of a backbone to which arms are connected at both extremit-
ies. In a flow, the backbone may orient in a Doi-Edwards reptation tube consisting of the
neighboring molecules, while the arms may retract into that tube. The concept of the pom-
pom macromolecule makes the model suitable for describing the behavior of branched polymers.
The approximate differential form of the model is based on the equations of macromolecular
orientation and macromolecular stretching in connection with changes in orientation. In this
construction, the pom-pom molecule is allowed only a finite extension, which is controlled by
the number of dangling arms. In particular, the strain hardening properties are dictated by the
number of arms. Beyond that, the model predicts realistic shear thinning behavior, as well as
a first and a possible second normal stress difference.

• Leonov:

This model has been developed for the simultaneous prediction of the behavior of trapped
and free macromolecular chains for filled elastomers with carbon black and/or silicate. From
the point of view of morphology, macromolecules at rest are trapped by particles of carbon
black, via electrostatic van der Waals forces. Under a deformation field, electrostatic bonds can
break, and macromolecules become free, while a reverse mechanism may develop when the
deformation ceases. You can therefore be facing a macromolecular system consisting of trapped
and free macromolecules, with a reversible transition from one state to the other one.

This model involves two tensor quantities and a scalar one. The tensors focus respectively on
the behavior of the free and trapped macromolecular chains of the elastomer, while the scalar
variable quantifies the degree of structural damage (debonding factor). The model exhibits a
yielding behavior. It is intrinsically nonlinear, as the nonlinear response develops and is observ-
able at early deformations.

Details about each model are provided below.

4.11.1.3.2.1. Maxwell Model

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Differential Viscoelastic Properties → Model → Maxwell

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 717
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The Maxwell model is one of the simplest viscoelastic constitutive equations. It exhibits a con-
stant viscosity and a quadratic first normal-stress difference. Due to its simplicity, it is recom-
mended only when little information about the fluid is available, or when a qualitative prediction
is sufficient. Even in this case, the Oldroyd-B model, which can include a purely viscous com-
ponent, is preferable for numerical reasons.

4.11.1.3.2.1.1. Equations

The equation for the Maxwell model is the upper-convected Maxwell model, in which the purely
viscous component of the extra-stress tensor ( ) is equal to zero. For single-mode, the vis-
coelastic component ( ) is computed from
(4.48)

where is a model-specific relaxation time, is the rate-of-deformation tensor, and is a

model-specific viscosity factor for the viscoelastic component of . The relaxation time is
defined as the time required for the shear stress to be reduced to half of its original equilibrium
value when the strain rate vanishes. A high relaxation time indicates that the memory retention
of the flow is high. A low relaxation time indicates significant memory loss, gradually approaching
Newtonian flow (zero relaxation time).

4.11.1.3.2.1.2. Inputs

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Partial Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Relaxation Time [s] – – 1

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
718 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

By default, is set to 1 and to 10-16.

Additionally, by default, Number of Relaxation Modes is set to 1. You can select multiple re-
laxation modes, in which case multiple sets of parameters will have to be specified ( , ).

4.11.1.3.2.1.3. Behavior Analysis

Figure 4.140: Maxwell Model for a Shear Flow (p. 719) shows the viscometric functions of the
Maxwell model in a simple shear flow. In this example (where =1 s and =1000 Pa-s), is
constant, is linear, is quadratic, is zero, is constant, is zero, and is linear,
showing non-asymptotic behavior.

Figure 4.140: Maxwell Model for a Shear Flow

Figure 4.141: Maxwell Model for an Extensional Flow (p. 720) shows the behavior of the Maxwell
model in a simple extensional flow.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 719
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.141: Maxwell Model for an Extensional Flow

In this example (where =1 s and =1000 Pa-s), , , and are unbounded for ,
and
(4.49)
(4.50)
(4.51)
(4.52)

Figure 4.142: Maxwell Model for a Transient Shear Flow (p. 721) shows the behavior of the
Maxwell model in a transient shear flow.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
720 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.142: Maxwell Model for a Transient Shear Flow

In this example (where =1 s, =1000 Pa-s, and s-1), there is no stress overshoot and the
transient phase depends upon the relaxation time.

4.11.1.3.2.2. Oldroyd-B Model

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Differential Viscoelastic Properties → Model → Oldroyd-

B

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 721
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The Oldroyd-B model, like the Maxwell model, is one of the simplest viscoelastic constitutive
equations. It is slightly better than the Maxwell model, because it allows for the inclusion of
the purely viscous component of the extra stress, which leads to better behavior of the numer-
ical scheme. Oldroyd-B is a good choice for fluids that exhibit a very high extensional viscosity.

4.11.1.3.2.2.1. Equations

For the Oldroyd-B model, is computed from Equation 4.48 (p. 718), and is computed
(optionally) from Equation 4.47 (p. 714). from Equation 4.48 (p. 718) is the partial viscosity,
while in Equation 4.47 (p. 714) is the additional viscosity

4.11.1.3.2.2.2. Inputs

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Partial Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Relaxation Time [s] – – 1
Additional Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1

By default, is set to 1 while is set to 10-16. is set to 0.

Additionally, by default, Number of Relaxation Modes is set to 1. You can select multiple re-
laxation modes, in which case multiple sets of parameters will have to be specified ( , ).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
722 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

4.11.1.3.2.2.3. Behavior Analysis

Figure 4.143: Oldroyd-B Model for a Shear Flow (p. 723) shows the viscometric functions of the
Oldroyd-B model in a simple shear flow. In this example, =1 s and (with the viscosity ratio
equal to 0.15) =850 Pa-s and =150 Pa-s. In the resulting curves, is constant, is linear,
is quadratic, is zero, is constant, is zero, and is linear, showing non-asymptotic
behavior. Notice that the curves are moved down in comparison to the Maxwell model; this is
due to the Newtonian part of the model (nonzero value for ), which reduces the viscoelastic
effects ( , , , and ).

Figure 4.143: Oldroyd-B Model for a Shear Flow

Figure 4.144: Oldroyd-B Model for a Transient Shear Flow (p. 724) shows the behavior of the
Oldroyd-B model in a transient shear flow. In this example, =1 s, =1000 Pa-s, and s–1.
Notice that there is an instantaneous response of the shear stress to the applied shear rate;
this is due to the Newtonian part of the model originating from the additional viscosity whose
value was set to 150 Pa.s. Otherwise, the Oldroyd-B model exhibits the same behavior as the
Maxwell model.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 723
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.144: Oldroyd-B Model for a Transient Shear Flow

4.11.1.3.2.3. Phan-Thien-Tanner Model

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Differential Viscoelastic Properties → Model → Phan-

Thien-Tanner

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
724 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

The Phan-Thien-Tanner model is one of the most realistic differential viscoelastic models. It
exhibits shear thinning and a non-quadratic first normal-stress difference at high shear rates.

4.11.1.3.2.3.1. Equations

The PTT model computes from

(4.53)

and is computed (optionally) from Equation 4.47 (p. 714). in Equation 4.53 (p. 725) is the
partial viscosity, while in Equation 4.47 (p. 714) is the additional viscosity.

and are material properties that control, respectively, the shear viscosity and elongational
behavior. A nonzero value for leads to a bounded steady extensional viscosity.

4.11.1.3.2.3.2. Inputs

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Partial Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Relaxation Time [s] – – 1
Additional Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Epsilon – – –

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 725
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Xi – – –

By default, is set to 1 while is set to 10-16. is set to 0. and are also set to 0 by default.

Additionally, by default, Number of Relaxation Modes is set to 1. You can select multiple re-
laxation modes, in which case multiple sets of parameters will have to be specified ( , , ,
).

4.11.1.3.2.3.3. Behavior Analysis

In a simple shear flow (Figure 4.145: PTT Model for a Shear Flow (p. 727)), for >0, you can see
a shear-thinning effect and a non-quadratic behavior for the first normal-stress difference .
You will also notice that, for >0, the elasticity level remains finite for increasing shear rate
(asymptotic behavior).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
726 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.145: PTT Model for a Shear Flow

The parameter also affects the extensional viscosities, as shown in Figure 4.146: PTT Model
for a Steady Extensional Flow (p. 728). The steady extensional viscosities are finite, and tend
toward the Newtonian component of the extensional viscosity (that is, they are uniaxial) for
large extension rates. For small values of , there is extension thickening and thinning; for large
values, there is only extension thinning.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 727
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.146: PTT Model for a Steady Extensional Flow

Important:

For a single-mode PTT model, if the parameter is not zero, then the additional
viscosity must be at least 1/8 of the Partial Viscosity in order to ensure the stability
of the shear flow. However, this value may decrease when does not vanish. The
slope of the shear stress vs. shear rate curve must be positive everywhere, contrary
to what is shown on the left in Figure 4.147: Effect of ξ on the PTT Model for a Shear
Flow (p. 729) with =0.1.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
728 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.147: Effect of ξ on the PTT Model for a Shear Flow

The parameter has almost no effect on extensional viscosity, as shown in Figure 4.148: Effect
of ξ on the PTT Model for a Steady Extensional Flow (p. 730). The maximum of the extensional
viscosities decreases when increases.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 729
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.148: Effect of ξ on the PTT Model for a Steady Extensional Flow

In a transient shear flow (Figure 4.149: PTT Model in a Transient Shear Flow (p. 731)), a moderate
stress overshoot is observed. The stress overshoot increases as shear rate increases. Shear
thinning is observed, and the normal stress is non-quadratic. The transient phase is reduced
as the shear rate increases.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
730 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.149: PTT Model in a Transient Shear Flow

4.11.1.3.2.4. Giesekus Model

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Differential Viscoelastic Properties → Model → Giesekus

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 731
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Like the PTT model, the Giesekus model is one of the most realistic differential viscoelastic
models. It exhibits shear thinning and a non-quadratic first normal-stress difference at high
shear rates.

4.11.1.3.2.4.1. Equations

The Giesekus model computes from

(4.54)

and is computed (optionally) from Equation 4.47 (p. 714). in Equation 4.54 (p. 732) is the
partial viscosity, while in Equation 4.47 (p. 714) is the additional viscosity.

is the unit tensor and is a material constant that controls the extensional viscosity and the
ratio of the second normal-stress difference to the first. For low values of shear rate,
(4.55)

For the majority of fluids, this ratio is between 0.1 and 0.2.

4.11.1.3.2.4.2. Inputs

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Partial Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Relaxation Time [s] – – 1
Additional Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Alpha – – –

By default, is set to 1 while is set to 10-16. is set to 0. Additionally, is also set to 0 and
Number of Relaxation Modes to 1. You can select multiple relaxation modes, in which case
multiple sets of parameters will have to be specified ( , , ).

4.11.1.3.2.4.3. Behavior Analysis

In a simple shear flow (Figure 4.150: Giesekus Model for a Shear Flow (p. 733)), controls the
shear-thinning effect. The first normal-stress difference is non-quadratic, and the cut-off appears
earlier if increases. If >0.5, you should specify a non-zero Additional Viscosity [Pa s] in
order to avoid instabilities.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
732 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.150: Giesekus Model for a Shear Flow

Figure 4.151: Effect of α on the Giesekus Model for an Extensional Flow (p. 734) shows the be-
havior of the Giesekus fluid in an extensional flow.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 733
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.151: Effect of α on the Giesekus Model for an Extensional Flow

In this case, the steady extensional viscosities are finite. For small values of extension thick-
ening occurs, and for large values extension thinning occurs.

In a transient shear flow (Figure 4.152: Giesekus Model for a Transient Shear Flow (p. 735)), the
stress overshoot is less severe than for the PTT model; there are fewer oscillations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
734 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.152: Giesekus Model for a Transient Shear Flow

The duration of the transient phase depends on the imposed shear rate (the same behavior as
for the PTT model). For a high shear rate, you can observe stress overshoots during the transient
phase. With increasing shear rate, the overshoot increases while the final value of the displayed
properties decreases. The duration of the transient phases decreases as the shear rate increases.

4.11.1.3.2.5. FENE-P Model

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Differential Viscoelastic Properties → Model → Fene-P

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 735
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The FENE-P model is derived from molecular theories and assumes that the polymer macro-
molecules are idealized as dumbbells linked with an elastic connector or spring and suspended
in a Newtonian solvent of viscosity . Unlike in the Maxwell model, however, the springs are
allowed only a finite extension, so that the energy of deformation of the dumbbell becomes
infinite for a finite value of the spring elongation. This model predicts a realistic shear thinning
of the fluid and a first normal-stress difference that is quadratic for low shear rates and has a
lower slope for high shear rates.

4.11.1.3.2.5.1. Equations

The FENE-P model computes from

(4.56)

where the configuration tensor is computed from

(4.57)

and is the ratio of the maximum length of the spring to its length at rest:

(4.58)

is an equilibrium length that corresponds to rigid motion (in this case, =0 and the tension
in the connector equals the Brownian forces). is the maximum allowable dumbbell length.
Figure 4.153: Dumbbell Definitions for the FENE-P Model (p. 737) shows how the distance between
dumbbells is based on the relative position of both ends.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
736 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.153: Dumbbell Definitions for the FENE-P Model

is always greater than 1. As becomes infinite, the FENE-P model reduces to the upper-
convected Maxwell model.

is computed (optionally) from Equation 4.47 (p. 714). in Equation 4.56 (p. 736) is the partial
viscosity, while in Equation 4.47 (p. 714) is the additional viscosity.

The motion of the dumbbells is the result of hydrodynamic, Brownian, and spring forces.
represents the tension in the spring (spring forces) and the Brownian motion. represents
the Newtonian (hydrodynamic) forces.

See 1 (p. 954) for additional information about the FENE-P model.

4.11.1.3.2.5.2. Inputs

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Partial Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Relaxation Time [s] – – 1
Additional Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
L^2 – – –

By default, is set to 1 while is set to 10-16. is set to 1.1 and to 0. Additionally, by de-
fault, Number of Relaxation Modes is set to 1. You can select multiple relaxation modes, in
which case multiple sets of parameters will have to be specified ( , , ).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 737
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.11.1.3.2.5.3. Behavior Analysis

The behavior of the FENE-P model with small values of for a simple shear flow is illustrated
in Figure 4.154: Effect of Small Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Shear Flow (p. 739). Shear
thinning occurs with this model, and for large values of shear rate, the slope is –2/3. Therefore
the addition of a Newtonian viscosity component is not required for stability. The first normal-
stress difference is non-quadratic, and the second normal-stress difference is 0. The cut-off
appears sooner when decreases, down to a value of 3. No asymptotic behavior is observed.
For low values of shear rate, decreases as decreases.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
738 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.154: Effect of Small Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Shear Flow

The behavior of the FENE-P model with large values of for a simple shear flow is illustrated
in Figure 4.155: Effect of Large Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Shear Flow (p. 740).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 739
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.155: Effect of Large Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Shear Flow

For large values of , the FENE-P model is observed to exhibit Maxwellian behavior: quadratic
first normal-stress difference and close to . For close to 1, Newtonian behavior is ob-
served: quadratic but small first normal-stress difference, tends toward 0, cut-off occurs at
high shear rates. For low shear rates,
(4.59)

For extensional flows, controls the extensional viscosity. As shown in Figure 4.156: Effect of
L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Extensional Flow (p. 741), the extensional viscosities are finite. For
large values of , the FENE-P model is observed to exhibit Maxwellian behavior: the extensional
viscosities are very high for . For close to 1, Newtonian behavior is observed: the
extensional viscosities are constant.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
740 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.156: Effect of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Extensional Flow

The behavior of the FENE-P model for a transient shear flow is shown in Figure 4.157: Effect of
Large Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Transient Shear Flow (p. 742) and Figure 4.158: Effect
of Mid-Range Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Transient Shear Flow (p. 743). For high
shear rates, the stress overshoots in the transient phase. When the shear rate increases, the final
value and the transient phase decrease while the overshoot increases. For large values of ,
the FENE-P model is observed to exhibit Maxwellian behavior: no stress overshoots. For mid-
range values of , the stress overshoots increase and the transient phase decreases as de-
creases. For close to 1, Newtonian behavior is observed: no stress overshoots and a short
transient phase even for high values of shear rate.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 741
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.157: Effect of Large Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Transient Shear Flow

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
742 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.158: Effect of Mid-Range Values of L^2 on the FENE-P Model for Transient Shear
Flow

4.11.1.3.2.6. POMPOM Model [DCPP]

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Differential Viscoelastic Properties → Model → POMPOM

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 743
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

In the POMPOM model, the pom-pom molecule consists of a backbone to which arms are
connected at both extremities. In a flow, the backbone may orient in a Doi-Edwards reptation
tube consisting of the neighboring molecules, while the arms may retract into that tube. The
concept of the pom-pom macromolecule makes the model suitable for describing the behavior
of branched polymers. The approximate differential form of the model is based on equations
of macromolecular orientation, and macromolecular stretching in relation to changes in orient-
ation.

The model, referred to as DCPP (2 (p. 954), 8 (p. 954)), allows for a nonzero second normal stress
difference. The DCPP model computes from an orientation tensor, and a stretching scalar
(states variables), on the basis of the following algebraic equation:
(4.60)

where is the shear modulus and is a nonlinear material parameter (the nonlinear material
parameter will be introduced later on). The state variables and are computed from the
following differential equations:
(4.61)

(4.62)

In these equations, and are the relaxation times associated with the orientation and
stretching mechanisms respectively. In the last equation, characterizes the number of dangling
arms (or priority) at the extremities of the pom-pom molecule or segment. It is an indication
of the maximum stretching that the molecule can undergo, and therefore of a possible strain

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
744 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

hardening behavior. can be obtained from the elongational behavior. is a nonlinear para-
meter that has enabled the introduction of a non-vanishing second normal stress difference
in the DCPP model.

A multi-mode DCPP model can also be defined. Each contribution will involve an orientation
tensor and a stretching variable . A few guidelines are required for the determination of
the several linear and nonlinear parameters.

Consider a multi-mode DCPP model characterized by modes sorted with increasing values
of relaxation times (increasing seniority). The linear parameters and characterizing the
linear viscoelastic behavior of the model can be determined with the usual procedure.

Then the relaxation times ( ) for stretching should be determined. Depending on the average
number of entanglements of backbone section, the ratio should be within the range of 2
to 10. For a completely unentangled polymer segment, you may accept the physical limit of
= . should also satisfy the constraint , since sets the fundamental diffusion
time for the branch point controlling the relaxation of polymer segment ( ).

The parameter indicating the number of dangling arms (or priority) at the extremities of a
pom-pom segment , also indicates the maximum stretching that can be undergone by that
segment, and therefore its possible strain hardening behavior. For a multi-mode DCPP model,
both seniority and priority are assumed to increase together towards the inner segments; hence
should also increase with . The parameter can be obtained from the elongational beha-
vior.

is a fifth set of nonlinear parameters that control the ratio of second to first normal stress
differences. The value of parameter should range between 0 and 1. For moderate values,
corresponds to twice the ratio of the second to the first normal stress difference, and may de-
crease with increasing seniority.

As for other viscoelastic models, a purely viscous component can be added to the viscoelastic
component , in order to get the total extra-stress tensor:
(4.63)

where
(4.64)

where is the rate-of-deformation tensor and is the additional (Newtonian) viscosity.

4.11.1.3.2.6.1. Inputs

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Additional Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Relaxation Time for Orientation [s] - - 1

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 745
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Shear Modulus [Pa] 1 –1 –2
Relaxation Time for Stretching [s] - - 1
Number of Arms - - -
Xi - - -

By default, the shear modulus and the relaxation time for orientation are respectively initialized
to 1 and 10-16. The relaxation time for stretching and xi are initialized to 0 while Number of
Arms is initialized to 2. Additionally, by default, Number of Relaxation Modes is set to 1. You
can select multiple relaxation modes, in which case multiple sets of parameters will have to be
specified ( , , , , ).

4.11.1.3.2.6.2. Behavior Analysis

Figure 4.159: Effect of Parameter ξ for Steady Shear Flow (p. 747) shows the steady viscometric
behavior of a single mode DCPP fluid model for various values of the parameter . For the
present illustration, the shear modulus equals 1000, while the relaxation times for orientation
and stretching have been assigned the values 1 and 0.5, respectively. As can be seen, constant
viscosity and quadratic first normal stress difference are obtained at low shear rates. Nonlinear
behavior is found beyond . We also find that an increasing value of enforces the nonlinear
behavior, while it also generates a non-vanishing second normal stress difference. The other
nonlinear parameters and have actually a negligible influence on the viscometric properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
746 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.159: Effect of Parameter ξ for Steady Shear Flow

In Figure 4.160: Effect of Parameter q on Steady Elongation Viscosity (p. 748), the steady elong-
ation viscosity of a single mode DCPP fluid model for increasing values of is displayed. For
the continuous curves, the shear modulus equals 1000, while the relaxation times for orientation
and stretching have been assigned the values 1 and 0.5, respectively. Also, the nonlinear
parameter is equal to 0.1. As is known for the DCPP model, and more generally for pom-pom
models, the parameter is an indication of branching, and therefore of strain hardening in
elongation. As can be seen from Figure 4.160: Effect of Parameter q on Steady Elongation Vis-
cosity (p. 748), the elongation viscosity increases when the strain rate is larger than , and
the strain hardening is enhanced for increasing values of . The figure also shows the steady
elongation viscosity obtained for as well as for . As can be seen, the influence of
these parameters on the steady elongation viscosity remains moderate as compared to that of
parameter .

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 747
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.160: Effect of Parameter q on Steady Elongation Viscosity

Finally, Figure 4.161: Effect of Parameter q on Transient Elongation Viscosity for Different Values
of the Elongation Rate (p. 749) shows the transient elongation viscosity of various single-mode
DCPP fluid model characterized by different branching levels ( ), at elongation rates success-
ively equal to 0.1, 1 and 10. We find that all curves collapse at low strain rate (0.1), while they
markedly differ at high strain rate (10).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
748 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.161: Effect of Parameter q on Transient Elongation Viscosity for Different Values
of the Elongation Rate

4.11.1.3.2.7. Leonov Model

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Differential Viscoelastic Properties → Model → Leonov

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 749
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Elastomers are usually filled with carbon black and/or silicate. From the point of view of mor-
phology, macromolecules at rest are trapped by particles of carbon black, via electrostatic van
der Waals forces. Under a deformation field, electrostatic bonds can break, and macromolecules
become free, while a reverse mechanism may develop when the deformation ceases. You can
therefore be facing a macromolecular system consisting of trapped and free macromolecules,
with a reversible transition from one state to the other one.

Leonov and Simhambhatla have developed a rheological model (9 (p. 954), 3 (p. 954)) for the
simultaneous prediction of the behavior for trapped and free macromolecular chains. This
model for filled elastomers involves two tensor quantities and a scalar one. These tensor
quantities focus respectively on the behavior of the free and trapped macromolecular chains
of the elastomer, while the scalar quantity quantifies the degree of structural damage (debonding
factor). The model exhibits a yielding behavior. It is intrinsically nonlinear, as the nonlinear re-
sponse develops and is observable at early deformations.

In a single-mode approach, the total stress tensor can be decomposed as the sum of free
and trapped contributions as follows:
(4.65)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
750 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

As for other viscoelastic models, a purely viscous component is added to the viscoelastic
components in order to get the total extra-stress tensor:
(4.66)

where is the rate-of-deformation tensor and is the viscosity.

In Equation 4.65 (p. 750), subscripts and respectively refer to the free and trapped parts.
Each of these contributions obeys its own equation. In particular, they invoke their own deform-
ation field described by means of Finger tensors.

An elastic Finger tensor is defined for the free chains, which obeys the following equation:

(4.67)

where is the relaxation time, is the unit tensor, while and are the first invariant of
and , respectively, defined as
(4.68)
(4.69)

The implemented material function that appears in Equation 4.67 (p. 751) is written as
follows:
(4.70)

The parameter must be and increases slightly the amount of shear thinning.

Similarly, an elastic Finger tensor is defined for the trapped chains, which obeys the following
equation:
(4.71)

where and are the first invariant of and , respectively, defined as

(4.72)
(4.73)

In the equation for the trapped chains, the variable quantifies the degree of structural damage
(debonding factor), and is the fraction of the initially trapped chains that are debonded from
the filler particles during flow. The function is a structural damage dependent scaling
factor for the relaxation time and is referred to as the “mobility function".

A phenomenological kinetic equation is suggested for :

(4.74)

In Equation 4.74 (p. 751), is the local shear rate while is the yielding strain. Also, is a di-
mensionless time factor, which may delay or accelerate debonding.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 751
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

For the mobility function appearing in Equation 4.71 (p. 751), the following form has been
implemented:
(4.75)

The above selection for the mobility function endows the rheological properties with a yielding
behavior. When is large (or unbounded), the algebraic term dominates the constitutive
equation for (Equation 4.71 (p. 751)), and the solution is expected to be . When is
vanishing, becomes governed by a purely transport equation; this may lead to numerical
troubles when solving a complex steady flow with secondary motions (vortices). This situation
can occur if parameter is set to zero and under no-debonding situation ( ). Therefore,
you should impose a small (but nonzero) value for parameter (by default, we suggest the
value 0.05, which is a reasonable compromise between rheological properties and solver stabil-
ity). Based on this, parameter can be understood as the value of the mobility function under
no-debonding.

Finally, in order to relate the Finger tensors to the corresponding stress tensor, potential func-
tions are required. For and , the following expressions are suggested:

(4.76)

(4.77)

with and . It is interesting to note that has no effect on the shear viscosity, while
it contributes to a decrease of the elongational viscosity. On the other hand, the parameter
increases both shear and elongational viscosities. From there, stress contributions from free
and trapped chains in Equation 4.65 (p. 750) are respectively given by:

(4.78)

(4.79)

where parameter is the initial ratio of free to trapped chains in the system. A vanishing value
of indicates that all chains are trapped at rest, while a large value of indicates a system
that essentially consists of free chains.

4.11.1.3.2.7.1. Inputs

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are
as follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Additional Viscosity [Pa s] 1 –1 –1
Relaxation Time [s] - - 1
Shear Modulus [Pa] 1 –1 –2

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
752 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Alpha - - -
Beta - - -
N - - -
M - - -
Nu - - -
K - - -
Q - - -
Gamma* - - -

By default, is set to 0, is set to 10-16, and are set to 1, , and are set to 0, is set
to 2, is set to 0, is set to 1 and is set to 2. Additionally, by default, Number of Relaxation
Modes is set to 1. You can select multiple relaxation modes, in which case multiple sets of
parameters will have to be specified ( , , , , , , , , , ).

4.11.1.3.2.7.2. Identification of Model Parameters and Functions

From the point of view of rheology and numerical simulation, for single- and multi-mode fluid
models, a purely viscous contribution must be added to the total extra-stress tensor. Actually,
this is largely motivated by the fact that the matrix of the discretized system can be singular
when all fields are initialized to values that correspond to the solution at rest. Hence, the first
or only mode will always be accompanied by a Newtonian contribution, whose corresponding
viscosity value received a unit default value. This value can be modified you.

Also, as suggested above, a non-vanishing value should be selected for the mobility function
under no-debonding.

As can be seen, next to parameters and controlling the linear properties, the model involves
two functions and several nonlinear parameters. In a single mode approach, the influence of
these parameters on the viscometric and elongational properties can be easily identified, and
appropriate values can be selected accordingly. By default, the nonlinear parameters are assigned
values that are relevant from the point of view of rheology. In a multi-mode approach, in order
to facilitate the definition of a flow case, corresponding nonlinear parameters should preferably
be identical for each mode.

4.11.1.3.2.7.3. Behavior Analysis

In simple shear flow, the Leonov model exhibits shear thinning, which is slightly affected by
some parameters. Figure 4.162: Shear Viscosity of the Leonov Model with Parameters G=1000,
λ=1, q=1, β=0, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, k=n=m=0 (continuous lines). (p. 754) shows that an increase
of the parameter (initial ratio of free to trapped chains) slightly decreases the shear viscosity
at low shear rates. This can be easily understood if you consider, for example, that when =0,
the material consists only of trapped chains at rest. The figure also shows that parameter
increases the shear viscosity at high shear rates, while parameter has a very limited influence.
Finally, as can be seen in Figure 4.162: Shear Viscosity of the Leonov Model with Parameters
G=1000, λ=1, q=1, β=0, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, k=n=m=0 (continuous lines). (p. 754), shear viscosity
curves do not show a plateau at low shear rates. This is the fingerprint of the yielding behavior

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 753
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

of the fluid model, which is controlled by the value of the mobility function under no-debonding
(parameter ). If increases, the viscosity curves exhibit a plateau at low shear rates. However,
as can be seen in the insert, this does not affect the behavior at high shear rates, while it may
improve the stability of the solver.

Figure 4.162: Shear Viscosity of the Leonov Model with Parameters G=1000, λ=1, q=1,
β=0, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, k=n=m=0 (continuous lines).

Dashed and dashed-dotted lines show the viscosity for the value of the parameters as indicated.
The insert shows the viscosity curves obtained for various values of the mobility function under
no-debonding (parameter k).

Figure 4.163: First Normal Stress Difference of the Leonov Model with Parameters G=1000, λ=1,
q=1, β=0, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, k=n=m=0 (continuous lines). (p. 755) shows that similar trends
are found for the first normal stress difference. Figure 4.163: First Normal Stress Difference of
the Leonov Model with Parameters G=1000, λ=1, q=1, β=0, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, k=n=m=0
(continuous lines). (p. 755) shows that an increase of the parameter slightly decreases the
first normal stress difference at all shear rates. The figure also shows that parameter increases
the first normal stress difference at all shear rates, while parameter decreases it at high shear
rates. Finally, as can be seen, the first normal stress difference shows a plateau at low shear
rates; this is a counterpart of the yielding behavior of the fluid model, which is also controlled
by the value of the mobility function under no-debonding (parameter ). If increases, the
first normal stress difference exhibit a quadratic behavior at low shear rates; however, as can
be seen in the insert, this does not affect the behavior at high shear rates, while it may improve
the stability of the solver.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
754 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.163: First Normal Stress Difference of the Leonov Model with Parameters G=1000,
λ=1, q=1, β=0, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, k=n=m=0 (continuous lines).

Dashed, dashed-dotted and dotted lines show the first normal stress difference for the value
of the parameters as indicated. The insert shows the curves of first normal stress difference
obtained for various values of the mobility function under no-debonding (parameter ).

In simple elongation flow, the Leonov model exhibits marked strain thinning at low strain rates;
it is slightly affected by some parameters. Figure 4.164: Elongation Viscosity of the Leonov
Model with Parameters G=1000, λ=1, q=1, n=1, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, β=k=m=0 (continuous
lines). (p. 756) shows that an increase of the parameter (initial ratio of free to trapped chains)
slightly decreases the elongation viscosity at low strain rates. This can be easily understood if
you consider, for example, that when =0, the material consists only of trapped chains at rest.
The figure also shows that parameter increases the elongation viscosity at high strain rates,
while parameters and decrease the elongation viscosity. Finally, as can be seen in Fig-
ure 4.164: Elongation Viscosity of the Leonov Model with Parameters G=1000, λ=1, q=1, n=1,
ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, β=k=m=0 (continuous lines). (p. 756), elongation viscosity curves do not
show a plateau. This is the fingerprint of the yielding behavior of the fluid model, which is
controlled by the value of the mobility function under no-debonding (parameter ). Actually,
if increases, the elongation viscosity curves exhibit a plateau at low strain rates. However, as
can be seen in the insert of Figure 4.164: Elongation Viscosity of the Leonov Model with Para-
meters G=1000, λ=1, q=1, n=1, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, β=k=m=0 (continuous lines). (p. 756), this
does not really affect the behavior at high strain rates while it may improve the stability of the
solver.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 755
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.164: Elongation Viscosity of the Leonov Model with Parameters G=1000, λ=1,
q=1, n=1, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, β=k=m=0 (continuous lines).

Dashed, dashed-dotted and dotted lines show the elongation viscosity for the value of the
parameters as indicated. The insert shows the curves of the steady elongation viscosity obtained
for various values of the mobility function under no-debonding (parameter ).

Figure 4.165: Transient Shear Viscosity of the Leonov Model Versus Time, at Shear Rates Ranging
from 10^-2 to 10, With Parameters G=1000, λ=1, q=1, n=1,, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1, β=k=m=n=0,
(continuous lines). (p. 757) shows the transient shear viscosity versus time at shear rates ranging
from 10-2 to 10, for various values of parameters and . At first, as can be seen, the transient
shear viscosity exhibits an overshoot before reaching the steady value. It is also interesting to
note that the response time decreases when the shear rate increases. This actually results from
the increasing mobility function under increasing shear rates. Eventually, we find that parameter
decreases the elongation viscosity, while the other parameters have a somewhat less marked
influence.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
756 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.165: Transient Shear Viscosity of the Leonov Model Versus Time, at Shear Rates
Ranging from 10^-2 to 10, With Parameters G=1000, λ=1, q=1, n=1,, ν=2, γ*=2, and α=1,
β=k=m=n=0, (continuous lines).

Dashed and dotted lines show the viscosity for the value of the parameters as indicated.

4.11.1.3.3. Temperature Dependence of Viscosity and Relaxation Time

The viscosity in a non-isothermal differential viscoelastic model can be temperature-dependent.
As described in Introduction (p. 687), the viscosity will be multiplied by a temperature shift function
. For non-isothermal differential viscoelastic models, the relaxation time is multiplied by
the same temperature shift function. Temperature-dependent functions available for non-isothermal
differential viscoelastic models are the Arrhenius law, the Arrhenius approximate law, and the
WLF law, all described in Temperature Dependence of Viscosity (p. 704).

4.11.1.3.4. Multiple Relaxation Times for Differential Viscoelastic Models

If you define multiple relaxation modes for your differential viscoelastic fluid, all modes will obey
the same constitutive law. Non-linear parameters can be identical or independently specified for
each mode, there is no strong argument for one or the other option. For multiple relaxation
modes, the viscoelastic stress is written as follows:

(4.80)

A purely viscous component can also be added.

Consider, for example, a fluid being modeled with two relaxation modes as follows:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 757
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• mode 1: PTT model, =0.1 s, Pa-s, =0.2,

• mode 2: PTT model, =1 s, Pa-s, =0.2,

Figure 4.166: Simple Shear Flow with Multiple Relaxation Times (p. 758) shows the viscometric
behavior for this fluid in a simple shear flow. Here, the cut-off is controlled by the larger relaxation
time, and the slopes of the curves (for shear rates between 1/ and 1/ ) are affected.

Figure 4.166: Simple Shear Flow with Multiple Relaxation Times

Figure 4.167: Extensional Flow with Multiple Relaxation Times (p. 759) shows the viscometric be-
havior for this fluid in an extensional flow. The slopes of the curves (for extension rates between
1/ and ) are affected.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
758 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.167: Extensional Flow with Multiple Relaxation Times

Figure 4.168: Transient Shear Flow with Multiple Relaxation Times (p. 760) shows the viscometric
behavior for this fluid in a transient shear flow. The multiple relaxation modes have an effect on
the transient phase. In this case, the length of the transient phase depends upon the larger relax-
ation time. The multiple relaxation modes also affect the overshoot magnitude.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 759
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.168: Transient Shear Flow with Multiple Relaxation Times

4.11.1.4. Integral Viscoelastic Model

This section describes the following topics:
4.11.1.4.1. Introduction
4.11.1.4.2. Integral Viscoelastic Models
4.11.1.4.3.Temperature Dependence of Viscosity

4.11.1.4.1. Introduction
While the differential models are reasonably suited for 2D and 3D applications, integral constitutive
models can be invoked for describing the behavior of melts in applications where the shell
model can be used, such as blow molding and thermoforming. These processes are characterized
by an elongation kinematics with relatively limited extension deformation.

Note:

The integral approach to modeling viscoelastic model is limited to shell models.

4.11.1.4.1.1. Equations

For an integral viscoelastic constitutive equation, the extra-stress tensor is computed at time
from the following equation:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
760 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

(4.81)

where is the model-specific memory (kernel) function , is the Cauchy-Green strain

tensor , is the current time and is the metric for time integrals.

For non-isothermal flows, can be computed from the isothermal constitutive equation
(Equation 4.81 (p. 761)), provided that a modified time scale is used for evaluating the strain
history:

(4.82)

The modified time scale is related to through the following equation:

(4.83)

where is the shift function, which can be obtained from steady-state shear-viscosity curves
at different temperatures. This is the principle of time-temperature equivalence.

4.11.1.4.1.2. Inputs

To specify an integral viscoelastic model, select Integral viscoelastic model.

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Model Type

Specify an appropriate Fluid Name.

Specify Number of Relaxation Modes and Additional Viscosity [Pa s].

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 761
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Specify Relaxation Time [s] and the Partial Viscosity [Pa s].

Finally, select the law and parameters for the Thermal Dependency.

See Non-Automatic Fitting and Automatic Fitting for information about where and how the
material data specification occurs in the non-automatic and automatic fitting procedures, re-
spectively.

See Integral Viscoelastic Models (p. 762) and Temperature Dependence of Viscosity (p. 762) for
details about the parameters and characteristics of each fluid model.

4.11.1.4.2. Integral Viscoelastic Models

The Integral viscoelastic model is primarily dedicated for the simulation of processes like blow
molding and thermoforming. These processes involve a kinematics characterized by extension
with a bounded deformation amplitude, while shear is absent. Therefore, damping functions are
discarded. Linear properties are often sufficient for characterizing the behavior of the melt in
such processes. The linear spectrum already allows the prediction of strain hardening and since
deformation involved in the shaping processes are often bounded to Hencky strain up to 1 or 2,
it is not necessary to mimic the behavior beyond these values.

4.11.1.4.3. Temperature Dependence of Viscosity

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Thermal Dependency → Temperature Dependence

Three models are available for the temperature shift function in Equation 4.83 (p. 761): the
Arrhenius law, the Arrhenius approximate law, and the WLF law, all described in Temperature
Dependence of Viscosity (p. 704). It is also possible to eliminate the temperature dependence using
a temperature shift function equal to 1.

4.11.1.5. Simplified Viscoelastic Model

One of the interesting features of viscoelastic model simulations is the prediction of extrudate
swelling, which can be larger than their Newtonian counterparts. Running complex 3D flows with
a rheologically sophisticated model, however, can be computationally expensive. Therefore, a more
simplified approach is needed: one in which you can qualitatively predict the extrudate free surface.
This approach is referred to as the “simplified viscoelastic model" or the “light viscoelastic model".

This section describes the following topics:

4.11.1.5.1. Equations
4.11.1.5.2. Identification of Model Parameters and Functions
4.11.1.5.3. Inputs

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
762 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

4.11.1.5.4. Behavior Analysis

4.11.1.5.1. Equations
It is known that the first normal stress difference is mainly responsible for enhanced extrudate
swell in extrusion flow. This is typically a viscoelastic property. With respect to this, the simplified
viscoelastic model is an extension of existing Newtonian fluid models, where a normal stress
difference has been incorporated into the force balance. That is, in simple shear flow along the
first axis and with a shear rate , the total extra-stress tensor is given by:

(4.84)

In this tensor, is the shear stress component, which involves the shear rate dependent
viscosity . Several laws are available for describing the shear viscosity (see Generalized
Newtonian Model (p. 687) for more details), for instance, the constant law (Equation 4.30 (p. 689)),
the Bird-Carreau law (Equation 4.31 (p. 690)), the Power law (Equation 4.32 (p. 691)), the Cross law
(Equation 4.37 (p. 700)), the modified Cross law (Equation 4.38 (p. 701)), and the Carreau-Yasuda
law (Equation 4.39 (p. 703)).

The first normal stress is given by . This quantity involves the viscoelastic variable , a
quantity that can be referred to as the first normal viscosity, and a weighting coefficient
.

The viscoelastic variable obeys a transport equation that involves a characteristic or relaxation
time and is given by:
(4.85)

The equation is such that you recover the solution in simple shear flow. The first normal
viscosity found in Equation 4.84 (p. 763) is described by means of functions similar to those
available for the shear viscosity , where is presently replaced by . In order to facilitate
the set up of a flow simulation involving the simplified viscoelastic model, identical dependences
for and are considered by default. However, it is important to note that different
functions can be selected for the shear and first normal viscosities.

Three algebraic models are available for the relaxation time function:

• Constant relaxation

• Bird-Carreau law

• Power law

Finally, for non-isothermal flows, temperature dependence laws can be selected for the shear
and first normal viscosities (see Temperature Dependence of Viscosity (p. 704) for more details).
For instance, there is the Arrhenius law Equation 4.42 (p. 706)), the approximate Arrhenius law
(Equation 4.43 (p. 708)), and the WLF law (Equation 4.45 (p. 712)).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 763
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

When defining a non-isothermal case, a single function is used to describe the temperature de-
pendence of the material functions , , , and optionally of .

4.11.1.5.2. Identification of Model Parameters and Functions

The simplified viscoelastic model is mainly an empirical construction. The key ingredient is the
normal stress property that is introduced for the prediction of swelling. Although it is possible
to qualitatively relate the swelling and the first normal stress difference, a quantitative relationship
is not obvious. Methodologies have to be identified and developed for the determination of
material functions and parameters. A stepwise technique is recommended for this purpose.

Note that the simplified viscoelastic model has been developed and implemented mainly for the
simulation of 3D extrusion flows, therefore including the prediction of extrudate swelling.
Therefore, it is acceptable to use cylindrical extrudate swelling data for the identification of the
specific model properties.

As seen above, the simplified viscoelastic model involves three material functions and a parameter:
the shear viscosity , the first normal viscosity , the relaxation time , and a
weighting coefficient . Typically, usual viscosity data should be used for identifying the shear
viscosity function. In most situations, shear thinning is experimentally observed, and algebraic
relationships such as power law, Bird-Carreau, or Cross laws will be good candidates. However,
it is recommended that you consider a law that exhibits a zero-shear plateau if regions of no-
deformation are expected over the flow domain.

Important:

The parameters of the shear viscosity can be fitted automatically in Fluent Ma-
terials Processing based on experimental steady shear viscosity curve(s), as for a gen-
eralized Newtonian model. The other parameters of the model cannot be fitted in
Fluent Materials Processing. Note that if rheometric curves are drawn in the chart, only
the Newtonian part of the model is seen.

Next, a function and material parameters should be selected for the first normal viscosity .
By default, a relationship identical to the selected shear viscosity is considered, as this appears
to be a reasonable choice, at least at first. Of course, this default selection can be revised sub-
sequently. The power law, which exhibits unbounded values under zero deformation, should be
avoided if large regions of no deformation are expected. Instead, functions that exhibit a plateau,
such as the Bird-Carreau laws, should be preferred.

Eventually, for the relaxation time and the weighting coefficient , it is suggested to perform
a fast 2D simulation of axisymmetric extrudate swelling, where the effects of the remaining degrees
of freedom are examined. Typically, the weighting coefficient will control the swelling intensity
versus the flow rate, while the relaxation time function will control the development of the
extrudate diameter along the jet, and may have a possible influence also on the developed ex-
trudate geometric attributes. Usually, a constant value or a Bird-Carreau law can be selected for
the relaxation time; the value or zero-shear value should preferably be in agreement with the
typical times involved in the flow. On the other hand, a series of calculations should be performed
with various values of the weighting coefficient , where the development of extrudate versus
the flow rate is examined, via an evolution scheme. A comparison with experimental data on

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
764 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

swelling should enable the selection of an appropriate numerical value for the weighting coefficient
.

4.11.1.5.3. Inputs

To specify an simplified viscoelastic model, select Simplified viscoelastic model.

Rheometry → Fluid Model → Model Type

The units for the parameters and their names in the Fluent Materials Processing interface are as
follows:

Parameter Name in Fluent Materials Mass Length Time

Processing
Viscosity Law [Pa s] 1 –1 –1

First Normal Viscosity Law [Pa s] 1 –1 –1

Relaxation Time Law [s] - - 1

Weighting Coefficient - - -

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 765
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

By default, the viscosity, the first normal viscosity, and the relaxation time functions are constant
and set to 1. The weighting coefficient is also set to 1.

4.11.1.5.4. Behavior Analysis

The simplified viscoelastic model involves three material functions and a parameter: the shear
viscosity , the normal viscosity , the relaxation time , and a weighting coefficient
. Considering the empirical construction of the simplified viscoelastic model, it is probably more
relevant to inspect the behavior from the point of view of extrusion flow, in particular from the
point of extrudate swelling. As will be seen, the various ingredients may have opposite effects,
and enter in competition with each other.

As is known, shear thinning decreases the extrudate swelling. However, the other ingredients
will usually enhance the swelling. Consider that the normal and shear viscosities are the same
function of their respective dependence variable; the weighting coefficient and the relaxation
time are to be considered. Actually, selecting a normal viscosity independently with respect to
the shear viscosity will mainly make the analysis more complex without significantly affecting
the general conclusions. The weighting coefficient adjusts the intensity of the first normal
stress difference, and will essentially enhance the extrudate swelling. This is shown in Fig-
ure 4.169: Example of axisymmetric extrusion simulation for the simplified viscoelastic fluid
model through a cylindrical tube with a unit radius. (p. 767), which plots the curve of swelling
versus the flow rate for various simplified viscoelastic fluid models. The continuous lines show
the swelling for various values of the weighting coefficient. Note that the amount of swelling can
significantly be affected. In Figure 4.170: Example of axisymmetric extrusion simulation for the
simplified viscoelastic fluid model through a cylindrical tube with a unit radius. (p. 768), note the
development of the free surface versus the axial distance, for various values of . Note that the
development versus the position is not significantly affected be a specific choice of . The relax-
ation time appears in the transport equation for the viscoelastic variable; consequently it
will at first affect the development of the swelling along the flow direction. This is visible in Fig-
ure 4.170: Example of axisymmetric extrusion simulation for the simplified viscoelastic fluid
model through a cylindrical tube with a unit radius. (p. 768), where the dashed lines indicate the
development of swelling versus the axial distance: the development distance increases with the
relaxation time, while actually the amount of swelling is less affected by the relaxation time. As
can be seen in Figure 4.169: Example of axisymmetric extrusion simulation for the simplified vis-
coelastic fluid model through a cylindrical tube with a unit radius. (p. 767), the overall swelling is
less affected by the value of the relaxation time.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
766 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.169: Example of axisymmetric extrusion simulation for the simplified viscoelastic
fluid model through a cylindrical tube with a unit radius.

Swelling of an extrudate versus the flow rate, for various values of (continuous lines) at =0.5
and for various values of (dashed lines) at . Note that these curves are not obtained
from Fluent Materials Processing's Rheometry tool but rather from Fluent Materials Processing cal-
culations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 767
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.170: Example of axisymmetric extrusion simulation for the simplified viscoelastic
fluid model through a cylindrical tube with a unit radius.

Development of an axisymmetric extrudate versus the axial distance at a flow rate of 10 (see also
Figure 4.169: Example of axisymmetric extrusion simulation for the simplified viscoelastic fluid
model through a cylindrical tube with a unit radius. (p. 767)), for various values of (continuous
lines) at =0.5 and for various values of (dashed lines) at =1.2. Note that these curves are
not obtained from Fluent Materials Processing's Rheometry tool but rather from Fluent Materials
Processing calculations.

4.11.2. Rheological Properties

Depending on the kinematics of the system you are modeling (steady shear flow, steady extensional
flow, oscillatory shear flow, and so on), it is possible to compute and plot several viscometric properties
in Fluent Materials Processing as they appear under:

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

and

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Transient Curves

which enables you to mimic several rheometry experiments:

The following sections describe various kinematics properties, along with the name of each property
as it appears in Fluent Materials Processing.
4.11.2.1. Steady Simple Shear Flow

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
768 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

4.11.2.2. Steady Extensional Flow

4.11.2.3. Oscillatory Shear Flow
4.11.2.4.Transient Shear Flow
4.11.2.5.Transient Extensional Flow

4.11.2.1. Steady Simple Shear Flow

Steady simple shear flow is characterized by a horizontal velocity field, illustrated in Fig-
ure 4.171: Steady Simple Shear Flow (p. 769) and defined as follows:

(4.86)

where , , and are the velocity components in the , , and directions, respectively, and
is the constant shear rate, which is equal to .

Figure 4.171: Steady Simple Shear Flow

On the basis of this flow field, the following properties can be computed:

• steady shear stress:

(4.87)

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

Click Shear Stress.

• steady shear viscosity:

(4.88)

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 769
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Click Shear Viscosity.

• first normal-stress difference:

(4.89)

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

Click First Normal Stress Difference.

• second normal-stress difference:

(4.90)

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

Click Second Normal Stress Difference.

• first normal-stress coefficient:

(4.91)

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

Click First Normal Stress Coefficient.

• second normal-stress coefficient:

(4.92)

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

Click Second Normal Stress Coefficient.

• recoverable stress:

(4.93)

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

Click Stress Ratio Sr.

• estimated relaxation time:

(4.94)

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
770 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Click Lambda = Sr / Shear-rate.

Note:

Properties given by Equation 4.87 (p. 769) to Equation 4.94 (p. 770) have nonzero values
only for viscoelastic fluids. For this reason, these properties are not available in Fluent
Materials Processing for generalized Newtonian fluids.

To compute each of these curves, you will need to specify a minimum and maximum shear rate
( and ), and the number and distribution of sampling points. By default, 100 points are
selected between shear rates of 0.001 and 1000, with a logarithmic distribution. When thermal de-
pendence is considered, you need to select the temperature. Note that several temperatures can
be selected. These curves parameters can be specified under:

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Curves parameters

See Defining Numerical Parameters (p. 791) for information about specifying numerical parameters
for viscometric property curves. See Specifying the Curves to be Calculated (p. 783) for information
about specifying which curves you want to compute and plot. (Note that, if you use the automatic
fitting method, Fluent Materials Processing will automatically compute and plot the curves for all
properties for which experimental data curves have been defined.)

4.11.2.2. Steady Extensional Flow

Steady extensional flow can be uniaxial, biaxial, or planar. Uniaxial extensional flow is illustrated in
Figure 4.172: Uniaxial Extensional Flow (p. 772) and defined as follows:

(4.95)

where is a constant elongational strain rate.

The corresponding stress distribution can be written as

(4.96)
(4.97)

where is the uniaxial extensional viscosity.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 771
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Figure 4.172: Uniaxial Extensional Flow

Biaxial extensional flow is illustrated in Figure 4.173: Biaxial Extensional Flow (p. 772) and defined
as follows:

(4.98)

where is a constant elongational strain rate.

Figure 4.173: Biaxial Extensional Flow

The corresponding stress distribution can be written as

(4.99)
(4.100)

where is the biaxial extensional viscosity.

Planar extensional flow is illustrated in Figure 4.174: Planar Extensional Flow (p. 773) and defined as
follows:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
772 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

(4.101)

where is a constant elongational strain rate.

Figure 4.174: Planar Extensional Flow

The corresponding stress distribution can be written as

(4.102)

where is the planar extensional viscosity.

For extensional flow fields, the uniaxial, biaxial, and planar extensional viscosity curves ( , ,
and ) can be computed. Select Uniaxial Extensional Viscosity, Biaxial Extensional Viscosity
and/or Planar Extensional Viscosity, if you want one or more of these curves to be calculated.
These options can be found under:

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

To compute each of these curves, you will need to specify a minimum and maximum extensional
strain rate ( and ), and the number and distribution of sampling points.

By default, 100 points are selected between strain rates of 0.001 and 1000, with a logarithmic dis-
tribution. When thermal dependence is considered, you need to select the temperature. Note that
several temperatures can be selected. These curves parameters can be specified under:

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Curves parameters

See Defining and Plotting Curves (p. 796) for information about specifying numerical parameters
for viscometric property curves. See Specifying the Curves to be Calculated (p. 783) for information
about specifying which curves you want to compute and plot. (Note that, if you use the automatic
fitting method, Fluent Materials Processing will automatically compute and plot the curves for all
properties for which experimental data curves have been defined.)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 773
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.11.2.3. Oscillatory Shear Flow

It is often interesting to examine the response of a viscoelastic material to a small-amplitude oscil-
latory shear rate. This flow allows you to investigate the linear viscoelastic behavior of the material,
and yields the storage and loss moduli, and . Since small amplitude deformations are considered,
storage and loss moduli for differential and integral models are evaluated as:

(4.103)

For oscillatory shear flow fields, the property curves for the storage and loss moduli ( and )
can be computed. Select Storage Modulus G1 and Loss Modulus G2 if you want Fluent Materials
Processing to compute these curves.

Note:

In the Fluent Materials Processing graphical interface, G' and G" are referred to as G1
and G2, respectively.

These options can be found under:

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady and Oscillatory Curves

To compute each of these curves, you will need to specify a minimum and maximum angular fre-
quency ( and ), and the number and distribution of sampling points.

By default, 100 points are selected between angular frequencies of 0.001 and 1000, with a logarithmic
distribution. When thermal dependence is considered, you need to select the temperature. Note
that several temperatures can be selected. These curves parameters can be specified under:

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Curves parameters

See Defining and Plotting Curves (p. 796) for information about specifying numerical parameters
for viscometric property curves. See Specifying the Curves to be Calculated (p. 783) for information
about specifying which curves you want to compute and plot. (Note that, if you use the automatic
fitting method, Fluent Materials Processing will automatically compute and plot the curves for all
properties for which experimental data curves have been defined.)

4.11.2.4. Transient Shear Flow

You can calculate the response of a viscoelastic material to one or more instantaneous variations
of shear rate. Two types of transient shear flows can be considered: one can perform an experiment
with multiple constant shear rate per interval, or one can simultaneously perform multiple experi-
ments at constant shear rate. The first type allows you to define several types of transient shear
flows:

• start-up (two time intervals):

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
774 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

(4.104)

• stop (two time intervals):

(4.105)

• start-up and stop (three time intervals):

(4.106)

• double-step (five time intervals):

(4.107)

The double-step flow is used to assess the irreversible character of the viscoelastic material.

Figure 4.175: Transient Shear Flows

The second type of transient shear flow allows you to define one or multiple transient shear exper-
iments, each being performed with constant shear rate.

For transient shear flow fields, the transient property curves for the properties defined by Equa-
tion 4.87 (p. 769) – Equation 4.94 (p. 770) can be computed.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 775
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Select Transient Shear Rate, Transient Shear Stress, Transient Shear Viscosity, Transient 1st
Normal Stress Difference, Transient 2nd Normal Stress Difference, Transient 1st Normal Stress
Coefficient, and/or Transient 2nd Normal Stress Coefficient if you want Fluent Materials Pro-
cessing to compute one (or more) of these curves.

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Transient Curves

To compute each of these curves for experiments with multiple constant shear rate per interval,
you will need to define the desired number of time intervals during which a constant shear rate is
applied. The time interval is bounded by the time values and . All times must be included
between the specified minimum and maximum times, ( and ). To compute these curves for
multiple simultaneous transient shear experiments with constant shear rate, you only need to
specify the number of experiments and their corresponding shear rate. The number of sampling
points per time interval must also be specified.

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Curves parameters

See Defining and Plotting Curves (p. 796) for information about specifying numerical parameters
for viscometric property curves. See Specifying the Curves to be Calculated (p. 783) for information
about specifying which curves you want to compute and plot. (Note that, if you use the automatic
fitting method, Fluent Materials Processing will automatically compute and plot the curves for all
properties for which experimental data curves have been defined.)

4.11.2.5. Transient Extensional Flow

You may also want to calculate the response of a viscoelastic material to one or more instantaneous
variations of strain rate. Three types of transient extensional flows can be considered: one can
perform an extensional experiment with a constant stretch velocity, one can perform an extensional
experiment with multiple constant strain rate per time interval, or one can simultaneously perform
multiple experiments at constant strain rate.

The first type corresponds to a startup elongation experiment where a sample of initial length L0
is stretched at a constant velocity . The only required input is the ratio / .

The second and third types of transient extensional flows correspond to the types of transient shear
flows described in Transient Shear Flow (p. 774) and illustrated by Figure 4.175: Transient Shear
Flows (p. 775) (with the extensional strain rate substituted for the shear rate ). The velocity field
for a transient extensional flow obeys the same definition as for the corresponding steady exten-
sional flow given in Steady Extensional Flow (p. 771).

In a transient uniaxial extensional flow, the stress difference is

(4.108)

In a biaxial or planar extensional flow, the stress difference is

(4.109)

For transient extensional flow fields, the transient property curves for the properties defined in
Steady Extensional Flow (p. 771) can be computed. Select Transient Extensional Rate, Uniaxial
Extensional Stress vs. Strain, Uniaxial Extensional Stress vs. Time, Uniaxial Extensional Viscosity
vs. Time, Biaxial Extensional Stress vs. Strain, Biaxial Extensional Stress vs. Time, Biaxial Ex-

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
776 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

tensional Viscosity vs. Time, and/or Planar Extensional Stress vs. Strain , Planar Extensional
Stress vs. Time, Planar Extensional Viscosity vs. Time if you want Fluent Materials Processing to
compute these curves.

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Transient Curves

To compute each of these curves, you will need to define the desired number of time intervals
during which a constant extensional strain rate is applied. The time interval is bounded by the
time values and . All times must be included between the specified minimum and maximum
times, ( and ). The number of sampling points per time interval must also be specified. See
Defining Numerical Parameters (p. 791) for information about specifying numerical parameters for
viscometric property curves. See Specifying the Curves to be Calculated (p. 783) for information
about specifying which curves you want to compute and plot. (Note that, if you use the automatic
fitting method, Fluent Materials Processing will automatically compute and plot the curves for all
properties for which experimental data curves have been defined.)

4.11.3. Fitting Material Parameters

This section explains how to use the automatic and non-automatic fitting methods available in Fluent
Materials Processing.
4.11.3.1. Introduction
4.11.3.2. Reading and Writing Files
4.11.3.3. Non-Automatic Fitting
4.11.3.4. Automatic Fitting

4.11.3.1. Introduction
Fluent Materials Processing offers two types of fitting for material data: an automatic method and
a non-automatic method. The automatic method is useful for cases where you are primarily interested
in directly obtaining the material parameters for a given fluid model. The non-automatic method
allows you to perform an in-depth analysis of the properties of a fluid model. If you use the non-
automatic method, you can evaluate the sensitivity of the basic viscometric and elongational
properties with respect to model parameters. It can also be used when experimental data are ob-
tained on the basis of measurements which are not necessarily accessible via the automatic method
(such as transient shear or elongation involving multiple interval with constant shear or strain, re-
spectively). On occasion, the non-automatic method is invoked for fine tuning of automatically fitted
parameters. Fluent Materials Processing will try to best fit the parameters of a model without taking
solver issues into account. Therefore, it is sometimes necessary to adjust some parameters and fine-
tune the fitting to obtain a model which simultaneously mimics the experimental data while being
suitable for a complex flow simulation.

Both methods are available for almost all types of models: generalized Newtonian, differential vis-
coelastic, integral viscoelastic, and simplified viscoelastic. However, for the simplified viscoelastic
model, only the viscous part can be fitted. The rheometric curves evaluated by Fluent Materials
Processing do not take the additional viscoelastic term of the model into account.

The procedures you need to follow to use the non-automatic and automatic methods are presented
in Non-Automatic Fitting (p. 782) and Automatic Fitting (p. 788), respectively. Details about the inputs
for individual fluid models (for example, Bird-Carreau law) are provided in Material Data Paramet-
ers (p. 684), descriptions of the rheological properties for which you can perform fitting are provided

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 777
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

in Rheological Properties (p. 768), and information about controlling the graphical display of the
data curves is provided in Defining and Plotting Curves (p. 796).

4.11.3.2. Reading and Writing Files

This section describes the different types of files that are used during an Fluent Materials Pro-
cessing session.
4.11.3.2.1. Files Written or Read by Fluent Materials Processing
4.11.3.2.2. Reading Experimental Data
4.11.3.2.3. Saving Calculated Rheometric Curves
4.11.3.2.4. Reading and Writing Material Data

4.11.3.2.1. Files Written or Read by Fluent Materials Processing

During an Fluent Materials Processing session, you will generally need to read and write several
kinds of files. Table 4.11: Files Written and Read by Fluent Materials Processing (p. 778) lists the
files that Fluent Materials Processing can read and/or write. You can use this table to get an
overview of the files you may be using, to find out which codes write a particular file, and to see
where to look for more information on each file.

Table 4.11: Files Written and Read by Fluent Materials Processing

File Type Created By Used By Default References

Name or
Suffix
Experimental External source Fluent Materials .csv Reading
data Processing Experimental
curve (Rheometry) (.crv) Data (p. 778)
Calculated Fluent Materials Fluent Materials .csv Saving Calculated
property Processing Processing Rheometric
curve (Rheometry) (Rheometry) Curves (p. 780)
Material data Fluent Materials Fluent Materials .mprmat Reading and
Processing (Setup – Processing (Setup – Writing Material
possibly with Rheometry via Data (p. 781)
export from import from Setup)
Rheometry)

4.11.3.2.2. Reading Experimental Data

This section describes the following topics:
4.11.3.2.2.1. Reading Experimental Data Curves for the Non-Automatic Fitting Method
4.11.3.2.2.2. Reading Experimental Data Curves for the Automatic Fitting Method

4.11.3.2.2.1. Reading Experimental Data Curves for the Non-Automatic Fitting Method

If you are using the non-automatic fitting method in Fluent Materials Processing, you will need
to read a file containing the curve data. Refer to Files Written or Read by Fluent Materials Pro-
cessing (p. 778) for more details.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
778 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

4.11.3.2.2.2. Reading Experimental Data Curves for the Automatic Fitting Method

You will need to read your experimental curve data directly into Fluent Materials Processing
when using the automatic fitting procedure. The format of the curve file is provided in Reading
Experimental Data Curves for the Non-Automatic Fitting Method (p. 778).

Rheometry → Fitting → Experimental Curves New...

In the Properties - Experimental Curves panel, specify a Name, Filename, Curve Type and
the Temperature [K].

Note:

You will need to define at least three types of curves for a viscoelastic model.

1. Steady Shear Viscosity

2. Storage Modulus

3. Loss Modulus

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 779
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

You can also define an optional transient uniaxial extensional viscosity curve as well
as steady first normal stress difference. You can specify the curves in any order and
the type of the curve you import is defined in the Properties panel.

If the file imported contains the viscosity vs. shear-rate curve, click Steady Shear Viscosity. If
it contains the storage modulus vs. angular frequency curve, click Storage Modulus G1. If it
contains the loss modulus vs. angular frequency, click Loss Modulus. If it contains the transient
extensional viscosity curve, click Transient Extensional Flow. Lastly, if it contains the first
normal stress difference vs. shear rate curve, click 1st Normal Stress Difference.

For a Transient Extensional Flow, you must specify some flow characteristics:

• The Mode (Uniaxial, Biaxial, Planar).

• The Type, for example, whether the curve is extensional viscosity vs. time or stress vs. strain
( ), where is the initial length of the sample and is its current length.

• The Regime, for example, whether the sample is stretched at a constant extensional strain
rate or constant extensional velocity.

• The Constant Strain Rate or the Initial Strain Rate is required when the sample is stretched
at a constant extensional strain rate or at constant extensional velocity. The initial strain
rate is defined as the ratio of the constant extensional velocity to the initial
sample length .

4.11.3.2.3. Saving Calculated Rheometric Curves

Calculated rheometric curves are saved in a Rheometry subfolder located in the Fluent Materials
Processing project folder. The filename explicitly refers to the type of property as well as the
evaluation ID when Charts Display is set to addition mode.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
780 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

4.11.3.2.4. Reading and Writing Material Data

The Rheometry tool primarily communicates outside of Fluent Materials Processing via Setup
→ Materials.

In input mode, it can import a rheological model from a material data file read or created via
Setup → Materials. It can also directly use data entered via Rheometry → Fluid Model.
In output mode, it can export the created, fitted or modified rheological model into Setup
→ Materials. To accomplish this, select:

Rheometry Import/Export

When importing, you can specify the Source Material and Fluid Model to Import.

When exporting, you can specify the Target Material and Exported Fluid Model.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 781
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Once the rheological model is configured, you can save the corresponding material data file on
disk. For this, right-click the material source in:

Setup → Materials Export

A Select File dialog will open allowing you to specify the Material File name and location where
it will be written.

4.11.3.3. Non-Automatic Fitting

This section explains how to use the non-automatic fitting method in Fluent Materials Processing.
4.11.3.3.1. Steps for Non-Automatic Fitting
4.11.3.3.2. Specifying the Curves to be Calculated
4.11.3.3.3. Defining Curves Parameters
4.11.3.3.4. Selecting the Type of Fluid Model
4.11.3.3.5. Specifying the Chart Parameters
4.11.3.3.6. Performing the Fitting Analysis
4.11.3.3.7. Exporting the Results of the Fitting

4.11.3.3.1. Steps for Non-Automatic Fitting

The steps for non-automatic fitting are as follows:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
782 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

1. Read the experimental data curve(s) or define the experimental data curve(s) in the Fluent
Materials Processing. See Working with Curves (p. 798).

2. Specify which curves you want to calculate (shear viscosity, shear stress, and so on). See
Specifying the Curves to be Calculated (p. 783) for details. As mentioned, the non-automatic
fitting allows considering experimental data obtained on the basis of measurements which
are not necessarily accessible via the automatic method (such as transient shear or elongation
involving multiple interval with constant shear or strain, respectively).

3. Define the numerical parameters for the curve calculation. See Defining Numerical Paramet-
ers (p. 791) for details.

4. Select the fluid model that matches your experimental data best, and define initial values
for the associated material parameters. See Selecting the Type of Fluid Model (p. 787) for
details.

5. Modify the value of one material parameter at a time and draw the resulting data curve,
until you find the combination that results in a curve most similar to your experimental
curve. See Performing the Fitting Analysis (p. 787) for details.

6. When you are satisfied with the curve fitting, export the result of the fitting to the setup.
From there, it can be used for the definition of the simulation and exported into a material
data file as well. See Exporting the Results of the Fitting (p. 788) for details.

4.11.3.3.2. Specifying the Curves to be Calculated

After you have read or defined your experimental data curve(s), you will need to specify which
curves you want Fluent Materials Processing to calculate during the fitting. See Rheological
Properties (p. 768) for details about the types of curves that are available. To select the required
properties to be calculated and select each of the curves you want:

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Steady And Oscillatory Curves

or

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Transient Curves

4.11.3.3.3. Defining Curves Parameters

Next, you will need to set some parameters that will be used by Fluent Materials Processing when
it calculates the specified curves during the fitting process. For this, select:

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves → Curve Parameters

In the Properties - Curves Parameters panel, you can specify the number of points used to
represent a curve, whether or not to use a linear or logarithmic distribution of points, the range
of shear rates for steady properties, the range of angular frequency for the oscillatory properties,
the temperature(s), as well as the type of transient shear and elongational flows and the corres-
ponding parameters, as described below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 783
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• Number of Points

The rheometric curves are discretized into a set of points. Using more points results in a better
representation of the curves. The default number of points is 100, which is acceptable for most
cases.

• Point Distribution For Steady Curves (this also applies to oscillatory curves) - logarithmic
or linear

This parameter indicates how the calculated points are distributed along the X axis: equidistant
between successive x values in linear mode, or equidistant between successive log x values in
the logarithmic mode.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
784 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

• Point Distribution For Transient Curves - linear or logarithmic

This parameter indicates how the calculated points are distributed along the X axis: equidistant
between successive x values in linear mode, or equidistant between successive log x values in
the logarithmic mode.

• Shear Rate Minimum and Shear Rate Maximum [s^-1] (Range of Shear Rates)

If you want to compare rheological curves obtained for a steady shear flow, you will need to
specify the minimum and maximum values of shear rate for the curves so that they will all be
consistent. In the Properties - Curves Parameters panel, you can specify the values for the
Shear Rate Minimum [s^-1] and Shear Rate Maximum [s^-1].

• Extensional Strain Rate Minimum and Extensional Strain Rate Maximum [s^-1]

If you want to compare rheological curves obtained for a steady extensional flow, you will need
to specify the minimum and maximum values of extensional strain rate for the curves so that
they will all be consistent. In the Properties - Curves Parameters panel, you can specify the
values for the Extensional Strain Rate Minimum and Extensional Strain Rate Maximum [s^-
1].

• Time Minimum and Time Maximum [s]

If you want to compare rheological curves obtained for a transient flow, you will need to specify
the minimum and maximum values of time for the curves so that they will all be consistent.
In the Properties - Curves Parameters panel, you can specify the values for the Time Minimum
[s] and Time Maximum [s].

• Angular Frequency Minimum and Angular Frequency Maximum [rad/s]

If you want to compare rheological curves obtained for an oscillatory shear flow, you will need
to specify the minimum and maximum angular frequencies for the curves so that they will all
be consistent. In the Properties - Curves Parameters panel, you can specify the values for
the Angular Frequency Minimum [rad/s] and Angular Frequency Maximum [rad/s].

• Temperatures

For a fluid model involving thermal dependence, you will need to provide at least one temper-
ature. You can also specify that the selected rheological properties be calculated for a series
of temperatures. In the Properties - Curves Parameters panel, select the Number of Temper-
atures (up to 5) and specify the values of the temperatures (First Temperature [K], Second
Temperature [K], etc...). For each temperature, the rheological curves will be calculated for
comparison with experimental data.

• Transient Shear Flow

Two modes of transient shear flows can be defined:

1. A mode involving multiple intervals with a constant shear rate per interval

– Constant Shear Rate per Interval

You have to specify the number of intervals and the start time of each interval and
the corresponding shear rate.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 785
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

2. A mode involving multiple transient shear flows with constant shear rate.

– Multiple Experiments at Constant Shear Rate

You have to specify the number of independent experiments and the corresponding
shear rate.

When you request a curve of the transient shear viscosity, Fluent Materials Processing actually
computes the shear stress. When the shear rate is constant, the shear viscosity can be obtained
by dividing the shear stress by the shear rate; when the shear rate is not constant, this calculation
is not always valid. For being able to calculate the transient shear viscosity obtained in a mode
involving constant shear rate per interval, such as in a transient shear start-and-stop experiment,
we consider the ratio of the shear stress to the shear rate when the latter one is non vanishing,
and we arbitrarily select a vanishing viscosity when the shear rate vanishes. For such an exper-
iment, instead of the transient shear viscosity, it is probably more practical to examine the
transient shear stress which is no affected by any specific treatment.

• Transient Extensional Flow

Three modes of transient extensional flows can be defined:

1. A mode involving constant stretch velocity

– Constant Stretch Velocity

In this mode, a sample of initial length Lo is stretched at a constant stretching velocity

V. You have to specify the initial stretch rate given by V/Lo.

2. A mode involving multiple intervals with a constant strain rate per interval

– Constant extension rate per interval

In this mode, you specify the number of intervals and the start time of each interval
and the corresponding strain rate.

3. A mode involving multiple transient strain flows with constant strain rate

– Multiple experiments at constant strain rate

You have to specify the number of independent experiments and the corresponding
strain rate.

When you request a curve of the transient extensional viscosity, Fluent Materials Processing
actually computes the extensional stress. When the extensional strain rate is constant, the ex-
tensional viscosity can be obtained by dividing the extensional stress by the extensional strain
rate; when the extensional strain rate is not constant, this calculation is not always valid. For
being able to calculate the transient extension viscosity obtained in a mode involving constant
strain rate per interval, such as in a transient strain start-and-stop experiment, we consider the
ratio of the extension stress to the strain rate when the latter one is non vanishing, and we
arbitrarily select a vanishing viscosity when the strain rate vanishes. For such an experiment,
instead of the transient extension viscosity, it is probably more practical to examine the transient
extension stress which is no affected by any specific treatment

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
786 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

4.11.3.3.4. Selecting the Type of Fluid Model

To specify the type of fluid model, select:

Rheometry → Fluid Model

In the Properties - Fluid Model panel, you can choose generalized Newtonian, simplified vis-
coelastic, differential viscoelastic or integral viscoelastic model. Once you have selected the
model type to which you can assign a name, you can select the viscosity law or the constitutive
law, and specify a temperature dependence or not. You can then enter initial values for the sev-
eral material parameters.

If you plan to perform fitting for the temperature dependence of the rheological properties, you
will need to supply several experimental data curves at different temperatures.

4.11.3.3.5. Specifying the Chart Parameters

Some global properties of the chart can be modified. Select: Rheometry → Rheometric
Curves → Charts Parameters. In the Properties - Charts Parameters panel, you can modify
Charts Display and flip between replacement and addition mode. For example, you can specify
whether newly calculated rheometric curves will replace the previous ones or will be added to
the chart. The latter is set by default. You can also modify the axes attributes and specify
whether a linear or a logarithmic scale is used for the display. By default, steady and oscillatory
curves are displayed with logarithmic scales, while transient properties are displayed on the basis
of a linear scale.

4.11.3.3.6. Performing the Fitting Analysis

Now that you have defined initial values for all the relevant material parameters for your model,
you can begin the process of determining the values that best fit your experimental data. To ac-
complish this, follow the steps below.

1. Fluent Materials Processing will use your initial values to compute the curves you selected
and will draw them in the chart, select:

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves Draw

Alternatively, you can select Rheometry → Rheometric Curves and press Draw within
the Properties - Rheometric Curves panel.

2. Fill out the necessary values within the Properties - Experimental Curve panel.

Rheometry → Fitting → Add Experimental Curves New...

Fill out the necessary values within the Properties - Fitting panel. Repeat the procedure for
reading additional experimental curves.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 787
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

3. Return to Rheometry → Fluid Model and change the values of the material parameters
in the Properties - Fluid Model panel. See Material Data Parameters (p. 684) for more inform-
ation on fluid models.

Note:

It is often easier to vary the material parameters one at a time, so that you can
analyze the effects of each of them before trying to actually fit the model.

4. Update the plot in the chart to show the new curve (as well as the old one and the experi-
mental curve).

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves Draw

To compare with previously calculated curves, you should make sure that Charts Display is
set to addition mode.

5. Repeat the previous two steps until the computed curve(s) are close enough to the experi-
mental curves.

6. If you are varying one parameter at a time, return to Rheometry → Fluid Model and
change the value of one of the other material parameters. If not, skip to the end of this
procedure.

7. Update the plot with the newly computed curve.

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves Draw

8. Continue to change the value of the second parameter and update the plot until you find
the best value for this parameter as well.

9. Repeat the previous three steps until you have found the best values for all parameters.

4.11.3.3.7. Exporting the Results of the Fitting

Once the fitting is complete, you can export the values for all the relevant rheological parameters
into the setup.

Rheometry Export

The most recent values of the parameters will be exported into the setup. From there it is then
also possible to export the complete material data into a file.

4.11.3.4. Automatic Fitting

This section explains how to use the automatic fitting method in Fluent Materials Processing:
4.11.3.4.1. Steps for Automatic Fitting

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
788 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

4.11.3.4.2. Selecting the Type of Fluid Model

4.11.3.4.3. Fixing Values for Selected Material Parameters
4.11.3.4.4. Reading Experimental Curves
4.11.3.4.5. Defining Numerical Parameters
4.11.3.4.6. Drawing the Experimental Curves
4.11.3.4.7. Performing the Automatic Fitting Analysis
4.11.3.4.8. Exporting the Results of the Fitting

4.11.3.4.1. Steps for Automatic Fitting

The steps for automatic fitting are as follows:

1. Select the fluid model that matches your experimental data best.

2. Fix values for any of the associated material parameters that you want to remain constant
during the fitting calculation. See Selecting the Type of Fluid Model (p. 789) and Fixing Values
for Selected Material Parameters (p. 789) for details.

3. Read the experimental data curve(s) into Fluent Materials Processing. See Reading Experi-
mental Curves (p. 791) for information about reading a data curve. The data must be provided
in a .csv or a .crv file format

4. Define the numerical parameters for the curves calculation. See Defining Numerical Paramet-
ers (p. 791) for details.

5. Draw the experimental curve(s). See Drawing the Experimental Curves (p. 793) for details.

6. Run the automatic fitting, as described in Performing the Automatic Fitting Analysis (p. 794).

7. Export the results of the automatic fitting and subsequently saving it to disk to be used in
a calculation.

4.11.3.4.2. Selecting the Type of Fluid Model

To specify the type of fluid model, select:

Rheometry → Fluid Model

In the Properties - Fluid Model panel, you can choose generalized Newtonian, simplified vis-
coelastic, differential viscoelastic or integral viscoelastic model. Once you have selected the
model type to which you may assign a name, you can select the viscosity law or the constitutive
law, and you may specify whether you consider a temperature dependence. Next you enter initial
values for the several material parameters.

4.11.3.4.3. Fixing Values for Selected Material Parameters

In some cases, you may want to fix the values of some of the material parameters so that they
do not vary during the fitting calculation.

Once you have specified the type of fluid model you want to fit (as described in Selecting the
Type of Fluid Model (p. 787)), you can simply fix the value of any material parameters that you

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 789
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

want to keep constant during the fitting calculation. For example, the value of a parameter may
be fixed due to physical requirements. The reference temperature for the Arrhenius law is a
parameter that is commonly fixed.

In the Properties - Fluid Model panel, locate the parameter you want to fix, enter the required
value, and click the Fitting button next to the parameter. A dialog box opens where you can
modify the attribute of the parameter, as shown in the figure below.

1. Once done, click Apply. A similar procedure can be used to initialize a parameter to a spe-
cific value.

2. Repeat the previous three steps to define fixed values for any other parameters that you do
not want changed during the fitting calculation.

3. For verification purposes, a summary of the parameters being fixed or (user-) initialized will
be displayed in the Properties - Fitting panel. A typical example is shown below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
790 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

4.11.3.4.4. Reading Experimental Curves

Within the context of the automatic fitting procedure in Fluent Materials Processing, you will
need to read your experimental curve data directly into Fluent Materials Processing. Both .crv
and .csv formats can be read.

To load an experimental curve, select:

Rheometry → Fitting → Experimental Curves New...

Alternatively, you can select Rheometry → Fitting → Experimental Curves and press New...
within the Properties - Experimental Curves panel.

In the Properties - Experimental Curves panel:

You enter a Name, which will be used for you to identify the curve in the data set.

Using Browse... under Filename, locate the experimental curve file and click Open to apply the
file.

Specify the Curve Type of experimental curve. For a generalized Newtonian model, only steady
shear viscosity curves can be loaded. For a viscoelastic fluid model, experimental curves can
contain data on the steady shear viscosity, storage modulus G1 or loss modulus G2 vs angular
frequency, transient extensional flow, or first normal stress difference N1 vs. shear rate.

Specify the corresponding temperature for thermal rheological fluid models under Temperature
[K].

Note:

If you plan to perform fitting for the temperature dependence of the rheological
properties, you will need to supply several experimental data curves at different tem-
peratures.

For the transient extensional flow, additional attributes need to be specified. The mode can be
uniaxial, biaxial or planar. The type of data can be the viscosity vs time or the stress vs. (Hencky)
strain . The regime can be a constant extensional strain rate and the corresponding strain
rate is required, or constant extensional velocity and the initial strain rate is required.

Repeat these steps if you have additional experimental curves to load.

To delete an experimental curve, right-click it in the Outline View and select Delete.

4.11.3.4.5. Defining Numerical Parameters

You will need to set some parameters that will be used by Fluent Materials Processing when it
calculates the curve(s) during the fitting process. To access the Fitting Parameters, select:

Rheometry → Fitting → Fitting Parameters New...

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 791
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

In the Properties - Fitting Parameters panel, you can specify the range of shear rates and sev-
eral other parameters, as described below. The list of Fitting Parameters depends on the selected
model.

• Maximum Number of Iterations

In general, 50 iterations (the default) are enough to get converged results. In some cases, more
iterations are needed, especially for fitting viscoelastic models when large number of modes
are involved.

• Update Graphics After Each Fitting Run

This is activated by default and Ansys suggest to keep it unchanged. This allows you to check
whether further improvements are reported after a new series of iterations.

• Enable Fitting of Relaxation Times

By default, relaxation times are not fitted. Rather, they are distributed at a regular interval in
the range specified (logarithmic scale) for the relaxation times (see below). However, it is possible
to optimize the distribution of the relaxation times. This sometimes helps to obtain a better
fit.

When activating the fitting of relaxation times, the range of relaxation times defined can be
affected. The acceptable range of relaxation times is from (0.999*min_relax_time) to
(1.001*max_relax_time). When this option is activated, the fitting can become more complex,
requiring a few more iterations and increasing the calculation time to achieve a converged
solution. By default, you do not fit the relaxation times.

• Link Non-linear Parameters

When a multi-mode differential viscoelastic model is selected, all modes obey the same con-
stitutive equation. Despite this, a multi-mode model may involve a long series of linear and
non-linear parameters, which need to be identified on the basis of a few data only. You can
activate the option to Link Non-linear Parameters, so that parameters of a given type will be
assigned the same value for all modes. This may improve the fitting procedure by increasing
the sensitivity of the model properties with respect to parameters.

• Relaxation Times Range

By default, relaxation times are not fitted but are distributed at regular intervals in the specified
range (logarithmic scale). You can enter the values respectively in the boxes next to Relaxation
Time Minimum and Relaxation Time Maximum.

• Window of Shear Rates

If you want to compare rheological curves obtained for a steady shear flow, you will need to
specify the minimum and maximum values of shear rate for the curves so that they will all be
consistent. You can enter the values respectively in the boxes next to Shear Rate Minimum
and Shear Rate Maximum [s^-1].

• Window of Times

If you want to compare rheological curves obtained for a transient flow, you will need to specify
the minimum and maximum values of time for the curves so that they will all be consistent.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
792 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

You can enter the values respectively in the boxes next to Time Minimum and Time Maximum
[s]

• Window of Angular Frequencies

If you want to compare rheological curves obtained for an oscillatory shear flow, you need to
specify the minimum and maximum angular frequencies for the curves so that they are all
consistent. You can enter the values respectively in the boxes next to Angular Frequency
Minimum and Angular Frequency Maximum [rad/s]

• Weight of the Shear Viscosity Curves

The weighting allows you to assign more importance to one or more curves compared to
others. For example, in the fitting of a viscoelastic model, if you are not interested in fitting
the shear viscosity, you could set the weighting for the shear viscosity curves to a much lower
value than the others.

To set the weighting for the shear viscosity curves, enter the desired value in the box next to
the item Shear Viscosity Curves. The default value is 1.

• Weight of the Moduli G1 and G2 Curves

The weighting allows you to assign more importance to one or more curves compared to
others. To set the weighting for the storage and loss moduli curves, enter the desired value
under Moduli G1 and G2 Curves. The default value is 1.

• Weight of the Extensional Viscosity Curves

The weighting allows you to assign more importance to one or more curves compared to
others. For example, in the fitting of a viscoelastic model for a flow that is mainly extensional
(fiber spinning), the fitting of the extensional viscosity must be better than the fitting of the
other curves, so you should set the weighting for the extensional viscosity curves to a higher
value than the others.

To set the weighting for the extensional viscosity curves, enter the desired value in Extensional
Viscosity Curves. The default value is 1.

• Weight of the First Normal Stress Difference N1 Curves

The weighting allows you to assign more importance to one or more curves compared to
others. To set weighting for the first normal stress difference curves, enter the desired value
in First Normal Stress Difference N1 Curves. The default value is 1..

4.11.3.4.6. Drawing the Experimental Curves

To draw the experimental data curves in the chart, select:

Rheometry → Fitting → Experimental Curves Draw

See Modifying Curve Display Attributes (p. 799) for information about changing the appearance
of the curves.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 793
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.11.3.4.7. Performing the Automatic Fitting Analysis

When you have completed the setup of your fitting problem, begin the calculation by selecting:

Rheometry → Fitting Run Fitting

Fluent Materials Processing will automatically compute curves corresponding to all of the specified
experimental data curves. When the automatic fitting calculation is complete, Fluent Materials
Processing will save the results. You can export the rheological model to the setup at any time.
See Exporting the Results of the Fitting (p. 788).

Fluent Materials Processing will automatically update the chart with the computed curve(s) and
the experimental curve(s). The steady shear viscosity, storage and loss moduli, and the first normal
stress difference will be plotted on the same log-log graph. A second chart will display the exten-
sional viscosity curve(s), using a linear scale for both the extensional viscosity and the time, unless
otherwise specified. See Modifying Curve Display Attributes (p. 799) for information about changing
the appearance of the curves.

If you want to plot curves other than those that were directly calculated, you can select them by
clicking Rheometry → Rheometric Curves and specifying the required curves in the Prop-
erties - Rheometric Curves panel.

In an automatic fitting for a viscoelastic model, steady shear viscosity, storage modulus, and loss
modulus are the mandatory curves whereas, first normal stress difference and extensional viscosity
are the optional curves. For a generalized Newtonian model, the steady shear viscosity is a
mandatory curve. After an automatic fitting, it is possible to pursue fitting, if necessary.

Click Rheometry → Fitting and select Pursue Fitting.

This option is available when at least one fitting is complete. Fitting is continued with the values
of the parameters of the initialized model using the values obtained at the previous fitting step.
The fixed parameters will not change. You do not have to change any flag associated to the
parameter under Setup → Materials as Fluent Materials Processing automatically makes
these changes.

4.11.3.4.7.1. Evaluating the Automatic Fitting

Calculations are stopped when the maximum number of iterations is reached, or if the following
distances are adequately reduced:

• The distance between two successive solutions.

• The distances between the solution and the experimental points.

4.11.3.4.7.1.1. Evaluating the Distance Between Two Successive Solutions

Given the assumption that a fluid model has n parameters to fit:

(4.110)

If you compare the value of these parameters for two successive iterations i and i+1, respectively:
(4.111)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
794 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

(4.112)

The distance for parameter j becomes:

(4.113)

where = 10-6.

The global distance D is calculated as:

(4.114)

4.11.3.4.7.1.2. Evaluating the Distance Between Solution and Experimental Points

In this case, assume you are comparing a single experimental curve to its calculated counterpart,
at iteration i.

The experimental curve is composed of a set of P points:

(4.115)

If is the shear rate and if the shear rate range is defined as , the subset of points
having in that interval is taken.

At iteration i, you can evaluate the model curve knowing the value of the parameters at that
iteration:
(4.116)

For the set of abscissas , the model curve is composed of a set of P points:

(4.117)

The distance for point j can be defined as:

(4.118)

such that
(4.119)

Note:

When there are several experimental curves, the distance printed in the listing will
be the weighted sum of the distances of each curve.

Subsequently to an automatic fitting, you are encouraged to check the physical and
numerical relevance of the calculated parameters. In addition, you always have the
possibility to perform a subsequent manual parameter fitting.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 795
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.11.3.4.8. Exporting the Results of the Fitting

Once the fitting completed, you can export the values for all the relevant rheological parameters

into the setup. This can be done by selecting Rheometry Export. The most recent values
of the parameters will be exported into the setup. From there it is then also possible to export
the complete material data into a file.

4.11.4. Defining and Plotting Curves

This chapter describes how to visualize the rheological properties of various fluid models and to fit
them to experimental data, by defining or reading experimental data curves and plotting curves
graphically using Fluent Materials Processing.
4.11.4.1. Overview
4.11.4.2. Working with Curves
4.11.4.3. Cleaning and Modifying Chart

4.11.4.1. Overview
You can calculate property curves in Fluent Materials Processing or load .csv files previously created.
For information about calculating and loading curves, see Rheological Properties (p. 768) and
Working with Curves (p. 798) respectively. These curves are automatically displayed in the chart and
become accessible when at least one curve is calculated. You can manipulate the display using
your mouse and the various graphical user interface controls. Each curve can have different attributes
(color, line). Curves that are calculated are saved in a sub-folder of the Fluent Materials Processing
project folder.

When you click the Draw button under the Properties - Rheometric Curves panel,

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
796 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

The curves that were selected will be updated and added to the chart. This allows you to compare
several models or fine tune a fitting. See Non-Automatic Fitting (p. 782) for details.

Note:

You will not need to click Draw and Rheometry if you use Rheometry →
Fitting as Fluent Materials Processing will automatically update the chart for you
after it completes the fitting calculation.

4.11.4.1.1. Definitions of Terms

The following terms are used throughout this chapter:

axis

is a segment of a chart. Each axis has a range of values, and an interval (called a gap). You
add a name to the axis, modify the format and precision of the printed numbers, and modify
the range and the type of scaling (linear or logarithmic). See Modifying the Axis Attrib-
utes (p. 803) for details about modifying axis parameters.

chart

is a window where curves are displayed. The chart is automatically created upon the first in-
quiry of a curve display. Multiple curves can be plotted on the same chart.

curve

is a set of (x,y) pairs of values. The parameters of a curve include whether the data points are
connected by a line, the color and thickness of the line, and the markers for the data points.
See Working with Curves (p. 798) for information about selecting and modifying curves.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 797
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

plots

is a tab with a window where curves are displayed. Curve names are also listed next or under
the chart. Right-clicking the Plots window provides access to the properties of axes, curves
and charts.

4.11.4.2. Working with Curves

This section describes the following topics:
4.11.4.2.1. Format of Experimental Data Curves
4.11.4.2.2. Reading Curve Files
4.11.4.2.3. Deleting a Curve
4.11.4.2.4. Saving a Curve
4.11.4.2.5. Modifying Curve Display Attributes

4.11.4.2.1. Format of Experimental Data Curves

The first format is .csv, and has the following structure:

The first line displays the separator used, the second line is mainly intended for you, the user,
and the subsequent lines contain the data. It is important that the last data line ends with <CR>.

The second format is .crv, a legacy file format with the following structure:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
798 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

The first five lines do not contain any rheological data. Instead, the second line contains useful
information. The actual data is read from the sixth line. Again, it is important that the last data
line ends with <CR>.

At least two data points are needed to draw a curve. Fluent Materials Processing can read files
that contain many data points.

4.11.4.2.2. Reading Curve Files

For information on reading curve files, see Reading Experimental Data Curves for the Automatic
Fitting Method (p. 779).

4.11.4.2.3. Deleting a Curve

If you want to delete an experimental data curve, select the curve in question under Rheometry
→ Fitting → Experimental Curves and select Delete. If you want to delete a curve calculated
by Fluent Materials Processing, unselect it from the list of rheometric curves

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves

and click Clean plots followed by Draw.

4.11.4.2.4. Saving a Curve

Curves are automatically saved in a Rheometry subfolder within your project folder.

4.11.4.2.5. Modifying Curve Display Attributes

You can modify how a curve is displayed in the chart by selecting it in the curve list and using
the curve settings.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 799
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

To change the color of a curve, right-click the Plots window and select Set curve color...:

A dialog box opens where you can select the targeted curve:

When selecting a curve, a new dialog box opens where you can specify the color by selecting in
the Basic colors section. You can choose to make a more general selection via the palette, the
HSV/RGB values or via its HTML code.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
800 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Click OK. The chart is automatically updated.

To change the line of a curve, right-click the Plots window and select Set curve type...:

A dialog box opens where you can select the targeted curve:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 801
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Upon curve selection, a new dialog box opens where you can select the type of line:

Click OK. The chart is automatically updated.

4.11.4.3. Cleaning and Modifying Chart

Information about cleaning and modifying charts is presented in the following subsections.
4.11.4.3.1. Cleaning a Chart
4.11.4.3.2. Modifying the Title and Legend
4.11.4.3.3. Modifying the Axis Attributes

4.11.4.3.1. Cleaning a Chart

A chart may contain many curves, resulting, for example, from the successive evaluation of
model properties. To clean a chart:

Select

Rheometry → Rheometric Curves

in the Outline View and click Clean plots in the Properties - Rheometric Curves panel, or

Select

Fitting → Experimental Curves

in the Outline View and click Clean plots in the Properties - Experimental Curves panel.

Experimental curves will still be available for display, while rheometric curves corresponding to
the most recent set of model parameters will be reevaluated upon request.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
802 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

4.11.4.3.2. Modifying the Title and Legend

To modify the chart title, right-click the Plots window and select Set Title. Enter the title in the
dialog box that opens and click OK.

Drawn curves are identified by a color and are accompanied by a legend. By default legends are
displayed to the left of the chart. Legends can also be displayed below the chart. You can specify
the location by right-clicking the Plots window and selecting Legend Left/Bottom.

4.11.4.3.3. Modifying the Axis Attributes

There are several attributes of the axes that you can modify such as the range, the precision of
the numbers attached to axis markers and the display of grids. All of these attributes are inde-
pendently accessible for both vertical and horizontal axes (respectively Y- and X-axis) by right-
clicking the Plots window.

To modify the range of values along the x-axis, right-click the Plots window, and select X Axis
→ Custom range.

A dialog box will open allowing you to specify the lower and upper bound of the X-axis, along
with the syntax min, max:

The chart is automatically updated.

Right-click the Plots window and select Auto range to restore the calculated min and max values.

For changing the number of gridlines along the x-axis, right-click the Plots window and select
X Axis → Gridlines....

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 803
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

A dialog box opens where you can specify the number of gridlines:

The chart is automatically updated.

Note:

The usual number of gridlines is 9 for a log scale.

To modify the precision of the numbers along the x-axis, right-click the Plots window and select
X Axis → Label format....

A dialog box opens where you can specify the precision along with the syntax %.ne, where n
indicates the number of digits. For example %.1e if one digit is required:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
804 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

You can repeat the same operations for the y-axis by right-clicking the Plots window and selecting
the Y-axis. Two additional options will appear allowing you to select a linear or a log scale:

4.11.5. Guidelines for Viscoelastic Models

This section presents some guidelines for selecting an appropriate model and fitting the related
parameters for several common applications.
4.11.5.1. Introduction
4.11.5.2.The Weissenberg Number
4.11.5.3. Viscometric and Rheometric Measurements
4.11.5.4. General Strategy for Fitting
4.11.5.5. Guidelines for Extrusion
4.11.5.6. Guidelines for Fiber Spinning
4.11.5.7. Guidelines for Film Casting
4.11.5.8. Guidelines for Blow Molding and Thermoforming
4.11.5.9. Guidelines for Pressing
4.11.5.10. Empirical Rules and Principles

4.11.5.1. Introduction
There are several viscoelastic models available in Fluent Materials Processing, as described in Ma-
terial Data Parameters (p. 684). These models involve linear and nonlinear parameters, which in turn
carry viscometric and extensional properties. It can often be a difficult task to select the best con-
stitutive equation with the most appropriate material parameters. The task can be more easily ad-
dressed if it is broken into three smaller parts such as:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 805
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• The number of modes.

• Which constitutive equation are being used.

• The parameter settings.

These parts implicitly assume that everything is known about the material being modeled and that
all properties are equally important, which is usually not the case. Indeed, in actual industrial
practice, only some of the information is known and assumptions are therefore necessary.

The purpose of this section is to suggest useful guidelines for the selection of a constitutive model
and associated parameters. Two approaches are possible such as evaluating the numerical values
of parameters to match some experimental data in a given range, or trying to fit all viscometric
(and possibly elongational) measured data over a broad range. These two approaches lead more
or less to the selection of a rheological model for a flow and to the selection of a rheological
model for a fluid, respectively.

Although you may prefer one of these two approaches, useful guidelines can be found in both.
Therefore, the guidelines that follow will be presented on the basis of the flow being simulated.
For example, the kinematics involved in profile extrusion is significantly different from that in blow
molding or thermoforming. Swelling during extrusion results from a velocity rearrangement and
normal stress difference developed in a shear flow, while blow molding involves an elongational
component with a strain-hardening or strain-thinning response from the melt.

Recommendations will be given for the four most-commonly encountered types of flow:

• Extrusion (Guidelines for Extrusion (p. 811)).

• Fiber spinning (Guidelines for Fiber Spinning (p. 813)).

• Film casting (Guidelines for Film Casting (p. 816)).

• Blow molding/thermoforming processes (Guidelines for Blow Molding and Thermoform-

ing (p. 816)).

4.11.5.2. The Weissenberg Number

Consider a flow whose typical kinematics is given by , and λ is the relaxation time of the fluid.
The Weissenberg number is given by
(4.120)

This number indicates the elasticity involved in a flow.

The Weissenberg number is sometimes understood as the ratio between a normal-stress difference
and a shear stress. Such an interpretation raises questions about the relevance of Weissenberg

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
806 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

numbers as high as 20 or even 100. Indeed, this would involve a very high normal stress, and besides
a few biological fluids, the majority of macromolecular fluids would not sustain such a high stress.

Important:

Note that a polymer melt is characterized by a relaxation spectrum, rather than by a

single relaxation time. Hence, when evaluating , it is important to consider an ad-
equate relaxation time λ.

4.11.5.3. Viscometric and Rheometric Measurements

In general, you should obtain rheological measurements for the melt in the following order of im-
portance: oscillatory properties (storage and loss moduli), steady-state shear viscosity, first normal-
stress difference and/or transient uniaxial elongational viscosity. Of course, it is not always possible
to obtain such an extensive range of measurements, which can often be costly.

This section describes the following topics:

4.11.5.3.1. Oscillatory Properties
4.11.5.3.2. Steady-State Shear Viscosity
4.11.5.3.3. First Normal-Stress Difference
4.11.5.3.4.Transient Uniaxial Elongational Viscosity

4.11.5.3.1. Oscillatory Properties

The oscillatory properties (storage and loss moduli, represented by and , respectively) should
always be provided. For most polymer melts, the measurement of the oscillatory properties is
easy. Storage and loss moduli are usually obtained over several decades. The most typical
measurement device is the cone-plate rheometer. Measurements can be taken at one temperature
if an isothermal model is being considered, or at various temperatures if a thermal model is being
considered.

In general, measurements can be taken at various temperatures in order to obtain master curves
of and at a suitably selected temperature. For this, the time-temperature equivalence can
be used in order to properly shift the curves. By doing so, it is possible to expand the range of
experimental data for the linear properties, provided that the material exhibits visible temperature
dependence. See Empirical Rules and Principles (p. 820) for details.

4.11.5.3.2. Steady-State Shear Viscosity

The steady-state shear viscosity is also always needed. When possible, it should also be measured
using capillary rheometry, and the data for shear viscosity vs. true shear rate should be obtained.
If such an experiment is not feasible, you can instead extract information about shear viscosity
from the empirical Cox-Merz rule [4] (p. 954) , assuming that the modulus of the complex viscosity
can be obtained from dynamic data. Alternatively, you can extract information about shear vis-
cosity from the empirical mirror relationship of Gleissle [6] (p. 954), which suggests that the steady
shear viscosity curve is a mirror image of the transient shear viscosity measured at a low shear
rate. This assumes that transient viscosity measurements are indeed possible. See Empirical Rules
and Principles (p. 820) for details.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 807
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Even though the knowledge of the shear viscosity is not important for all processes, the automatic
fitting procedure requires it. Extrapolating from measured quantities can provide additional data,
but data should not be extrapolated over more than one decade.

4.11.5.3.3. First Normal-Stress Difference

If available, the steady data of the first normal-stress difference is also useful. Data can be acquired
using a cone-plate rheometer or using a technique based on the hole pressure. It is also possible
to estimate the first normal-stress difference on the basis of capillary extrudate swell, by using
an empirical formula suggested by Tanner [11] (p. 955).

If such data cannot be acquired, you can instead extract information about the steady first normal-
stress difference using the empirical Cox-Merz rule [4] (p. 954) (p. 201), assuming that the storage
modulus can reveal a good indication about the first normal-stress difference. See Empirical Rules
and Principles (p. 820) for details.

Even though the knowledge of the first normal-stress difference is not important for all processes,
the automatic fitting procedure can benefit from it. While extrapolating from measured quantities
can provide additional data, data should not be extrapolated over more than one decade.

4.11.5.3.4. Transient Uniaxial Elongational Viscosity

If available, transient uniaxial elongational viscosity data are also useful. Data should be obtained
by measuring at a constant strain rate or constant stretching velocity, which can be accomplished
using equipment involving the EVF technology or of the Münstedt type (for example, filament
stretching).

4.11.5.4. General Strategy for Fitting

This section describes the following topics:
4.11.5.4.1. Weighting Measured Data
4.11.5.4.2. Assigning a Value to a Parameter
4.11.5.4.3. Using Identical or Independent Nonlinear Parameters
4.11.5.4.4. Relaxation Time vs. Relaxation Spectrum in Extrusion, Fiber Spinning, and Film Casting
4.11.5.4.5. Relaxation Time vs. Relaxation Spectrum in Blow Molding and Thermoforming
4.11.5.4.6. Relaxation Time vs. Relaxation Spectrum in Pressing

4.11.5.4.1. Weighting Measured Data

Once you have obtained the data described in Viscometric and Rheometric Measurements (p. 807),
you can weigh their importance within Fluent Materials Processing, as described in Defining Nu-
merical Parameters (p. 791). This is useful if, for example, there is some uncertainty about the data
for a particular property, or if some data have been measured at a different temperature.

4.11.5.4.2. Assigning a Value to a Parameter

Material parameters are specified within a range of acceptable values. For example, viscosity
factors must be positive. If the automatic fitting method is used, each material parameter can
have three types of status: subject to fitting, initial value, or fixed value. By default, all parameters
are subject to fitting, meaning that Fluent Materials Processing will compute the best value based

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
808 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

on the experimental data. If you have a priori knowledge of the value of a parameter, you can
speed up the fitting calculation by assigning a fixed value to it.

Since there may be many parameters for a model, and there may be only a limited amount of
experimental data available, it can be difficult to compute the best set of parameters. In this case,
it is preferable to assign a fixed value to one or more parameters, so that they will not change
during the fitting calculation.

If the model involves only one relaxation time, its value can be either assigned or computed by
Fluent Materials Processing. For a multi-mode model, however, you will need to specify the
spectrum of relaxation times yourself, or let it computed by Fluent Materials Processing. In that
last case, you have just to specify the minimum and maximum possible relaxation times.

Next, there are nonlinear parameters for the models. For the PTT model (described in Phan-Thien-
Tanner Model (p. 724)), the parameters ε and ξ control the elongational viscosity and viscometric
properties, respectively: an increasing ε reduces or even cancels the strain hardening, while ξ affects
shear-thinning properties as well as the amount of second normal-stress difference. Based on
your needs, knowledge, or available experimental data, you may want to fix these values. Typically,
strain hardening occurs for to , and disappears for . For example, low values
for ε should be specified for a LDPE, while moderate values are appropriate for a LLDPE or a
HDPE. On the other hand, shear thinning occurs for nonzero values of ξ, which usually is set to
about 0.2. For practical purposes, it can be given a value of 0.5 or even as high as 1.

The Giesekus model (described in Giesekus Model (p. 731)) involves the parameter α, which sim-
ultaneously increases shear thinning and the second normal-stress difference while it reduces
the strain-hardening property. Again, based on your needs, knowledge, or available experimental
data, you can fix the value of α. When viscometric properties are relevant for the flow, values of
α ranging from 0.2 to 0.8 are common. If elongational properties are needed, α plays a role
similar to ε in the PTT model, and very low values (10-3 to 10-2) should be considered if strain
hardening is needed.

For a PTT model with a nonzero value of ξ or a Giesekus model with α>0.5, as well as for the
DCPP and the Leonov models, in both single- and multi-mode models, it is important to check
whether the shear stress remains a monotonically increasing function of shear rate. A non-increas-
ing shear stress can be corrected by adding a purely Newtonian component to the stress tensor.
For single mode PTT model with a zero value of ε and for single mode Giesekus model with α =
1, the viscosity of this component is at least 1/8 of the viscosityfactor of the only mode. For single
mode PTT model with a non-zero value of ε, for single mode Giesekus model with α less than 1,
as well as for multi-mode models, the viscosity of this component can be lower.

The DCPP model (described in Differential Viscoelastic Models (p. 715)) involves the parameter ξ,
which simultaneously increases shear thinning and the second normal-stress difference while the
parameter q increases the strain-hardening property. You can fix the value of ξ and q, based on
your requirements, knowledge, or available experimental data. When viscometric properties are
relevant for the flow, values of ξ ranging around 0.2 are reasonable. If elongational properties
are needed, and in particular if strain hardening is needed, the parameter q should be increased.
It reflects the number of branches of the POM-POM macromolecule and therefore affects the
behavior in elongation.

The Leonov model (described in Differential Viscoelastic Models (p. 715)) involves several nonlinear
parameters, affecting either the viscometric behavior or the elongation properties. You assign
values to some of these nonlinear parameters, based on your requirements, knowledge, or

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 809
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

available experimental data. Parameters q and affect the transition from trapped to free con-
figuration of macromolecular chains. When viscometric properties are relevant for the flow, it is
interesting to note that enhances the shear thinning property, while increases the viscosity.
Parameter has no effect on the shear viscosity, while it contributes to a decrease of the
elongational viscosity. If elongational properties are needed it can be noted that increases the
strain hardening, while and decrease it.

It is possible that the fitting calculation yields values for nonlinear parameters that are unusual,
although within the limits of accuracy. In this case, you should set these parameters to more
appropriate fixed values, and rerun the fitting calculation. This will yield another set of parameters
with the expected properties.

In general, the fitting calculation will determine parameter values on the basis of the available
experimental data. However, the available data do not necessarily include the operating conditions,
as measurement techniques do not always allow for reaching the conditions present in the actual
process. Fiber spinning is a typical example, where the melt is processed at strain rates much
higher than those available for rheometric measurement. For such cases, you can extrapolate
from available data.

4.11.5.4.3. Using Identical or Independent Nonlinear Parameters

When a multi-mode differential viscoelastic model is selected, all modes obey the same constitutive
equation. Despite this, a multi-mode model may involve a long series of linear and nonlinear
parameters, which need to be identified based on some data only. You have the option of spe-
cifying that nonlinear parameters of a given type will be assigned the same value for all modes.
This may sometimes improve the fitting procedure by increasing the sensitivity of the model
properties with respect to nonlinear parameters.

Using identical values for nonlinear parameters of a given type is not a requirement; by default,
the nonlinear parameters are independent. It is interesting to note that the time-temperature
equivalence is advocated for using identical values for nonlinear parameters of a given type, al-
though that argument does not formally hold for nonlinear properties. See Empirical Rules and
Principles (p. 820) for details.

4.11.5.4.4. Relaxation Time vs. Relaxation Spectrum in Extrusion, Fiber Spinning,

and Film Casting
When a large amount of data is available, it can be tempting to build a rheological model involving
a broad relaxation spectrum, even ranging up to 100 s or beyond. In most cases, this will be im-
practical and not very useful. Indeed, in a cessation of steady shear flow, measurements reveal
that the relaxation mechanism occurs with a time scale on the order of , where is a typical
shear rate involved in the experiment.

This observation allows for the identification of a typical time scale for the description of mech-
anisms occurring in steady flow processes, such as extrusion, fiber spinning, or film casting. An
extrusion flow is characterized by a typical wall shear rate , while fiber spinning and film
casting are characterized by a typical elongation rate . Consequently, if a single-mode constitutive
equation is selected, the corresponding relaxation time should be specified as about or
, respectively. For a multi-mode model, the relaxation times should be selected in the vicinity
of or , respectively. This is quite important, since it enables the setup of a model that
is in agreement with the typical time scales involved in the simulation. Note that the above

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
810 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

comments also raise questions about the relevance of Weissenberg numbers as high as 10 or
100.

For most applications, the computational domain is open, with fluid entry and exit. The residence
time of fluid particles in the computational domain usually remains moderate, so extremely long
relaxation times are not usually effective. Fluid particles trapped in vortices usually do not affect
the main flow; they are instead a consequence of it. Finally, in extrusion, the extruded material
solidifies long before the effects of these long relaxation times become visible.

4.11.5.4.5. Relaxation Time vs. Relaxation Spectrum in Blow Molding and Thermo-
forming
Typical time scales for blow molding and thermoforming are rather short: from on the order of
a tenth of a second for a milk bottle, to on the order of a few seconds for a gas tank. Hence,
starting from a reasonable assumed initial rest state, stresses develop within that time interval.
Although the deformation speed (and therefore the strain rate) is usually unknown, deformations
remain moderate. Consequently, dynamic or linear measurements alone provide a good charac-
terization of the melt for blow molding and thermoforming.

The selected spectrum of the rheological model may, of course, involve very short times and very
long times. Actually, very short time scales (that is, those smaller than the typical process time)
can be replaced by a purely Newtonian contribution. Similarly, long times (that is, much longer
than the process time) probably do not have the opportunity to develop their own contribution
to the stresses, and can be omitted, if necessary.

4.11.5.4.6. Relaxation Time vs. Relaxation Spectrum in Pressing

Pressing applications are very similar to simple squeeze flows. Typical time scales for pressing
applications are rather short: they range from on the order of a tenth of a second up to a few
seconds. With the exception of rheometric measurements, they depend more or less on the
geometrical size of the melt sample. Hence, starting from an initial rest state, stresses develop
within that time interval. Although the rate of deformation can be large, deformations remain
moderate. Consequently, dynamic or linear measurements alone provide a good characterization
of the melt for pressing.

The selected spectrum of the rheological model may, of course, involve very short times and very
long times. Actually, very short time scales (that is, those smaller than the typical process time)
can be replaced by a purely Newtonian contribution. Similarly, long times (that is, much longer
than the process time) probably do not have the opportunity to develop their own contribution
to the stresses, and can be omitted if necessary.

4.11.5.5. Guidelines for Extrusion

Transient and steady-state situations can be considered for 2D viscoelastic extrusion simulations,
while it is reasonable to essentially consider steady-state flow situations in 3D. Transient extrusion
processes are encountered in parison production, while steady-state conditions are met for profile
extrusion. The guidelines in this section focus on steady-state cases.

This section describes the following topics:

4.11.5.5.1. Important Effects
4.11.5.5.2. Recommended Experimental Data

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 811
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.11.5.5.3. Recommended Models and Parameters

4.11.5.5.1. Important Effects

4.11.5.5.1.1. 2D Extrusion

In 2D extrusion flows, swelling at the die exit is caused by both the velocity rearrangement
and the relaxation of the normal stresses. The velocity profile in the channel results mainly
from viscous forces, while the normal stress is a viscoelastic effect connected to the shear rate.
The material may also exhibit properties such as strain thinning and strain hardening, but these
effects in extrusion are negligible.

4.11.5.5.1.2. 3D Extrusion

In 3D extrusion flows, the normal-stress difference also plays a role in the swelling, but velocity
rearrangements in 3D generate much more dramatic effects than in 2D. Indeed, a 3D cross-
section may be such that the resulting velocity distribution is strongly non-uniform. Typically,
low velocities are encountered in narrow cross-sections and tiny details, while high velocities
are encountered in wide-open regions. At the die exit,the local lack of flow rate, i.e. of extruded
material, is responsible for significant deformations which develop in order to obtain a uniform
velocity distribution in the extrudate. Quite obviously, this leads to a further reduction of the
previously narrow cross-sections.

Therefore, more so in 3D than in 2D, an appropriate flow balancing inside the die (based on
stresses, velocity, pressure, and so on) may improve the flow. Finally, as in 2D, the effects of
the elongational properties are negligible, compared to those resulting from velocity rearrange-
ment and normal-stress difference, and they can therefore be neglected.

4.11.5.5.2. Recommended Experimental Data

The linear properties and nonlinear shear viscosity provide good insight into the viscoelastic
character of the material being extruded. Also, if the nonlinear shear viscosity is not available, it
can often be estimated using the Cox-Merz rule [4] (p. 954) or the Gleissle mirror relationship
[6] (p. 954) (see Empirical Rules and Principles (p. 820) for details). When feasible, this set of exper-
imental data can be usefully completed with first normal-stress difference data. For most materials,
measurement of linear properties for angular frequencies ranging from 0.01 to 100 rad/s , or
perhaps up to 1000 rad/s is achievable. If you consider a typical wall shear rate in the extrusion
process, it is usually included within this range of measurements. Otherwise, extrapolation should
be considered.

For 3D flows, it is practical to select a “computationally light" rheological model, to reduce the
computational cost of the Fluent Materials Processing simulation. Hence, it is useful to identify a
typical shear rate for the flow, and obtain viscometric data one decade on each side of this
shear rate. Doing this implicitly reinforces the idea of a constitutive equation for a flow (rather
than for a fluid). Consequently the fitted model for a given shear-rate decade will probably not
be the best one for another shear-rate decade.

4.11.5.5.3. Recommended Models and Parameters

Consider the typical wall shear rate in the extrusion process. If a constant viscosity is observed
around , the Maxwell or Oldroyd-B model is recommended. If shear thinning occurs around

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
812 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

, the PTT or Giesekus model is recommended. If qualitative information on the macromolecular

behavior is required, it can also be interesting to consider using the DCPP model.

For filled materials, such as rubber, the Leonov model can also be considered, but the large
number of unknowns involved warns against having unrealistic modeling ambitions.

Both single- and multi-mode models are acceptable for a 2D model, but a single-mode model is
strongly recommended for a 3D model.

For a single-mode model, select a relaxation time on the order of . For a two-mode model,
select one relaxation time < and one > , with no more than one decade between
relaxation times. For a three-mode (or more) model, select relaxation times < and > ,
preferably with no more than one decade between relaxation times.

For a strain-hardening material (for example, LDPE), a low value can be specified for the PTT
model’s ε or the Giesekus model’s α. Values of 10-3 to 10-2 are typical. For strain-thinning or
moderate strain-hardening materials (for example, LLDPE or HDPE), a higher value—typically
about 0.1—can be specified. Also, for strain hardening materials, the DCPP model can be used
with a large enough value of q (number of arms).

For the simulation of the flow of filled materials, the use of the Leonov model can be a good
idea. The model involves several parameters, and have received reasonable default values. It is
worth mentioning that the Leonov model involves the calculation of several tensors, and that
the use of a multi-mode model can be computationally expensive.

Finally, for very large flow simulations, it may be relevant to consider the simplified viscoelastic
model suggested in Simplified Viscoelastic Model (p. 762), suited for extrusion simulation. Here,
the identification of parameters is based on rheometric information, such as viscosity and swelling
versus the flow rate. Typically, the first normal viscosity involved in the model equals the shear
viscosity by default, while a relaxation time value or function and a weighting factor must be
identified in order to reproduce the swelling behavior. That is, a 2D axisymmetric flow simulation
is required for parameters identification.

In the automatic fitting procedure, it is preferable to consider the data in the range of shear rates
of interest, typically one decade above and one below. If data extrapolation is necessary, it should
be done over no more than one decade. Also, use appropriate weighting factors (see Weighting
Measured Data (p. 808)) if some data are more reliable than others.

The whole shear viscosity curve for the model may differ from measurements at low shear rates,
but this can generally be disregarded. Indeed, low shear rates are encountered only in a few
areas of the flow, and involve usually a fraction of the total flow rate, such that the total impact
on the momentum is negligible.

4.11.5.6. Guidelines for Fiber Spinning

Transient and steady-state situations can be considered for 2D viscoelastic fiber-spinning simulations,
while it is reasonable to essentially consider steady-state flow situations in 3D. Fiber spinning is a
continuous process, so primarily steady-state simulations are relevant. The guidelines in this section
will therefore focus on steady-state cases.

This section describes the following topics:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 813
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.11.5.6.1. Important Effects

4.11.5.6.2. Recommended Experimental Data
4.11.5.6.3. Recommended Models and Parameters

4.11.5.6.1. Important Effects

4.11.5.6.1.1. 2D Fiber Spinning

Several mechanisms are involved in 2D fiber spinning. First, a take-up velocity is assigned at
the end of the computational domain. This velocity leads to significant geometric changes and
to the development of the free surface. A swelling may develop at the die exit, but it is usually
not a critical feature; it is quickly hindered or annihilated by the take-up (pulling) velocity.

The take-up velocity plays a dominant role in the free jet. A transverse velocity gradient exists
in the die, while the free jet is endowed with an axial velocity gradient. The occurrence of a
significant strain rate is typical for fiber spinning. Many melts involved in fiber spinning exhibit
a more-or-less pronounced strain-hardening behavior, as this property is known to enhance
the stability of the process.

A moderate take-up velocity is sometimes applied in continuous extrusion processes (for ex-
ample, for guiding or stabilizing the extrudate). Here, the draw ratio is close to 1, which means
that the elongation rate involved is often negligible; such cases should be regarded as extrusion
instead of fiber spinning.

4.11.5.6.1.2. 3D Fiber Spinning

To some extent, 3D fiber spinning combines the effects encountered in 2D fiber spinning with
some of those seen in 3D extrusion. That is, the flow has a strong elongational component due
to the take-up velocity, and is affected by the velocity rearrangement in the 3D geometry. This
take-up velocity leads to significant geometric changes. A swelling may develop at the die exit,
but it is usually not a critical feature; it is quickly hindered or annihilated by the take-up (pulling)
velocity.

The kinematics of 3D fiber spinning involves a transverse velocity gradient in the die, while the
fiber itself is endowed with an axial velocity gradient. Consequently, the aspect ratio of some
details in a cross-section of the fiber may differ significantly from the corresponding aspect
ratio found at the die exit.

4.11.5.6.2. Recommended Experimental Data

The elongational viscosity is important, perhaps even more so than the shear viscosity. This
property can be measured for moderate strain rates (usually up to 10 s-1 using an elongational
rheometer equipped with the EVF device), although the material is often processed at a much
higher strain rate. This apparent difficulty can be overcome by considering the following heuristic
argument. For a given melt, all curves of transient uniaxial elongational viscosity follow the same
lower linear envelope, up to a Hencky strain of 1 or 2. It is therefore reasonable to believe that
a similar behavior occurs at higher strain rates, regardless of whether the melt is strain-hardening
or strain-thinning. This is a qualitative extrapolation, which results from a speculative extension
of the Gleissle mirror relationship to the transient elongational viscosity.

The minimum experimental data needed for successful fitting are the linear properties and the
nonlinear shear viscosity (possibly obtained from the Cox-Merz rule [4] (p. 954) or the Gleissle

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
814 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

mirror relationship [6] (p. 954) (see Empirical Rules and Principles (p. 820) for details). If data for
the transient elongational viscosity are available, they should also be used. When all the properties
are available, you can allocate a low weighting to the shear viscosity and a high weighting to
the elongational properties (as described in Defining Numerical Parameters (p. 791)), since the
elongational component in the fiber is more important.

4.11.5.6.3. Recommended Models and Parameters

The PTT and Giesekus models recommended for extrusion are also recommended for fiber spinning.
The Oldroyd-B and Maxwell models are also good choices, especially for highly strain-hardening
materials. If qualitative information on the macromolecular behavior is required, it can also be
interesting to consider using the DCPP model.

Both single- and multi-mode models are acceptable for a 2D model, but a single-mode model is
strongly recommended for a 3D model. For a 2D model, three modes are recommended, with
the relaxation times no more than one decade apart.

The flow involves a typical shear rate in the die and a typical elongation rate in the fiber
itself. Two or more orders of magnitude may exist between these quantities. It is worth mentioning
that the actual deformation in shear evolves linearly with the shear rate, while the actual deform-
ation in elongation evolves exponentially with the elongation rate. Therefore, although values
for the typical shear rate in the die can be larger than the values of the elongation rate in the
fiber, the actual corresponding deformation will be significantly larger in the fiber. Consequently,
you should focus on the elongation character more carefully.

For a single-mode model, select a relaxation time of about . For a multi-mode model, select
one relaxation time < and one > , preferably with no more than one decade between
relaxation times.

For a strongly strain-hardening material (for example, LDPE), use the Maxwell or Oldroyd-B
model when the strain-rate is moderate. Otherwise, consider a low value of ε (typically 10-3 to
10-2) with the PTT model, or a low value of α with the Giesekus model (typically 10-3 to 10-2). For
strain-thinning or moderate strain-hardening materials (for example, LLDPE or HDPE), use the
PTT or Giesekus model with a higher value—typically about 0.1 or more—for ε or α. Also, for
strain hardening materials, the DCPP model can be used with a large enough value of q (number
of arms). Currently, the Leonov model and the “simplified viscoelastic model" are not recommended
for fiber spinning simulations.

If data on elongational viscosity are available, they should be used for the fitting. If the resulting
values of the fitting for the nonlinear parameters are not in agreement with the expected beha-
vior of the melt, they can be fixed as noted in Assigning a Value to a Parameter (p. 808).

In the automatic fitting procedure, it is preferable to consider the data in the range of angular
frequencies and shear rates of interest, typically one decade below and one above. If data extra-
polation is necessary, it should be done over no more than one decade. Also, use appropriate
weighting factors (see Weighting Measured Data (p. 808)) if some data are more reliable than
others.

The shear viscosity curve for the model may differ from measurements, but this can generally be
disregarded, since elongation is the main component of the flow.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 815
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.11.5.7. Guidelines for Film Casting

This section describes the following topics:
4.11.5.7.1. Important Effects
4.11.5.7.2. Recommended Experimental Data
4.11.5.7.3. Recommended Models and Parameters

4.11.5.7.1. Important Effects

Film casting processes exhibit features that are very similar to those encountered in fiber spinning
(described in Guidelines for Fiber Spinning (p. 813)). That is, the extension results from a take-up
velocity, which is significantly higher than the velocity at the die exit. An appropriate modeling
approach for film casting in Fluent Materials Processing involves the use of a flat membrane ele-
ment. Such an approach focuses on the development of the extruded film only, not on the flow
inside the die.

4.11.5.7.2. Recommended Experimental Data

Elongation is the component that dominates the flow, and a proper description of the elonga-
tional behavior of the material is needed, although draw ratios are usually lower than in fiber
spinning. The comments about experimental data for fiber spinning are valid for film casting as
well.

4.11.5.7.3. Recommended Models and Parameters

The PTT and Giesekus models recommended for fiber spinning are also recommended for film
casting. The Oldroyd-B model is another acceptable choice, especially for melts characterized by
a significant strain hardening behavior. The DCPP model can also be used, especially if a qualit-
ative description of the macromolecular behavior is required. The Leonov model, however, is not
available for film casting applications. In addition, the simplified viscoelastic model is not suited
for the simulation of film casting.

If no experimental data are available for the elongational viscosity, the nonlinear parameters
should be fixed on the basis of known melt properties. Therefore, for a strain-thinning or weakly
strain-hardening melt, high values for the nonlinear parameters are selected (typically for
a PTT model or for a Giesekus model). For a strain-hardening melt, lower values should
be used for the nonlinear parameters. If the DCPP model is used, a relatively large number of
branches ( in Equation 4.62 (p. 744)) should be considered for strain-hardening materials such
as LDPE, while a unit or low number of branches should be selected for strain-thinning or weakly
strain-hardening melts such as LLDPE.

4.11.5.8. Guidelines for Blow Molding and Thermoforming

Any prediction of blow molding or thermoforming is based on a transient calculation. The melt
undergoes deformations in time, and the process conditions (such as the closing speed of the mold
and the inflation pressure) may also vary with time.

In 2D, an axisymmetric geometry is often used in the Fluent Materials Processing calculation, although
a planar description can also be used. Such a representation enables calculation through the
thickness, and therefore prediction of the possible local shear effects. This is also the case when
running an actual 3D calculation. For thin 3D objects in 3D, a membrane element is used, since it

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
816 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

allows for calculation of complex shapes at a moderate cost. This representation is suited for
elongation-like deformations but is unable to report shear deformations across the thickness.

This section describes the following topics:

4.11.5.8.1. Important Effects
4.11.5.8.2. Recommended Experimental Data
4.11.5.8.3. Recommended Models and Parameters

4.11.5.8.1. Important Effects

In blow molding and thermoforming, extension is the dominating component of the deformation.
Extension develops in two main directions, and is accompanied by a reduction in thickness. The
magnitudes of the extensions in the main directions may differ, and they depend on the geometry.
For example, inflating a cylinder involves an azimuthal extension field, while inflating a sphere
involves an isotropic extension field.

Since extension is the main component in this process, knowledge of the extensional response
of the material is usually necessary. However, although the extension rates can be high, the
overall deformation often remains moderate. The Hencky strains are typically on the order of 1
or 2, which correspond to Cauchy strains up to 7.

4.11.5.8.2. Recommended Experimental Data

Since the processes involve important strain rates and moderate extensions, knowledge of the
transient linear extensional response is enough for the description of the melt rheology. That is,
knowledge of the linear properties is a good starting point. If extensional data are available, they
can be used (either in the automatic fitting calculation, or for checking the results of the automatic
fitting). The extensional viscosity can be measured for moderate strain rates (usually up to 10 s-1
using an elongational rheometer equipped with the EVF device), although the material can be
processed at a higher strain rate.

Although shear is usually not an important component of the total deformation, shear viscosity
is needed in the fitting procedure. This can be obtained from the Cox-Merz rule [4] (p. 954) (see
Empirical Rules and Principles (p. 820)), and can be assigned a zero weight (see Weighting Measured
Data (p. 808)).

4.11.5.8.3. Recommended Models and Parameters

Several modeling approaches can be considered. The constant-viscosity Newtonian model is the
simplest approach, and this is recommended if no rheological data are available. The use of a
(shear-thinning) generalized Newtonian fluid model should not be considered for blow molding
or thermoforming, since such a model will lead to unrealistically high velocities due to strain
thinning.

Further modeling recommendations for 2D and 3D simulations are provided below.

4.11.5.8.3.1. 2D and 3D Blow Molding and Thermoforming

In addition to the constant-viscosity Newtonian model, differential viscoelastic models (Maxwell,

Oldroyd-B, PTT, Giesekus, FENE-P, DCPP, and Leonov) are available for blow molding and ther-
moforming. Although multi-mode simulations are available, for reasons of computational cost

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 817
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

in Fluent Materials Processing, single-mode transient viscoelastic calculations are suggested,

at least in first instance.

The flow involves a typical time scale τ, corresponding to the inflation time. The relaxation
time should be of the same order of magnitude as this time scale.

For the viscosity factor, select a value corresponding to the shear viscosity as obtained for a
shear rate of 1/τ.

For a strongly strain-hardening material (for example, LDPE), you can use the Maxwell or
Oldroyd-B model when the strain rate remains moderate. Alternatively, you can use a low value
of ε (typically 10–3 to 10–2) with the PTT model, a low value of α with the Giesekus model
(typically 10–3 to 10–2), or a high value of q for the DCPP model. For strain-thinning or moderate
strain-hardening materials (for example, LLDPE or HDPE), use the PTT or Giesekus model with
a higher value—typically about 0.1 or more respectively for ε or α or the DCPP model with a
low value of q.

If data on elongational viscosity are available, they should be used for the fitting. If the resulting
values of the fitting for the nonlinear parameters are not in agreement with the expected be-
havior of the melt, they can be fixed as noted in Assigning a Value to a Parameter (p. 808).

In the automatic fitting procedure, it is preferable to consider the data in the range of angular
frequencies and deformation rates of interest, typically one decade above and one below the
value 1/τ. If data extrapolation is necessary, it should be done over no more than one decade.
Also, use appropriate weighting factors (see Weighting Measured Data (p. 808)) if some data
are more reliable than others.

A purely Newtonian contribution can be added to the model. This corresponds to that part of
the spectrum associated with very short times, and the response of which is shorter than the
process time τ itself.

The shear viscosity curve for the model may differ from measurements, but this can generally
be disregarded, since elongation is the main component of the flow.

4.11.5.8.3.2. Blow Molding and Thermoforming with Shell Models

For computational reasons, the use of the shell element (membrane element) is recommended
for blow molding or thermoforming simulations that involve objects that are thin and have
geometrically complex shapes. In addition to the constant-viscosity Newtonian model, the in-
tegral viscoelastic KBKZ model with a relaxation spectrum is also a good choice since a Lag-
rangian representation is used. No damping is considered due to the moderate deformations
involved in the process, and the model reduces to the Lodge-Maxwell equation. The Lodge-
Maxwell model predicts strain hardening up to a level that is experimentally observed.

Based on the oscillatory properties, a spectrum of 4 to 8 relaxation times is recommended. If

you use a low number of relaxation times, they should be selected around the typical process
(inflation) time τ. If you use a high number of relaxation times, they can spread to values as
short as 10–4 and as long as 104 s.

Oscillatory data should be considered in the range of angular frequencies as covered by the
range of reciprocal relaxation times. Viscosity factors should be identified based on linear oscil-
latory properties and shear viscosity as needed by the fitting tool in Fluent Materials Processing.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
818 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

A very low weighting can be used for the shear viscosity. If available, data on alongational
viscosity should be used.

A purely Newtonian contribution can be added to the model. This corresponds to that part of
the spectrum associated with very short times, and the response of which is shorter than the
process time τ itself.

The shear viscosity curve for the model may differ from measurements, but this can generally
be disregarded, since elongation is the main component of the flow.

4.11.5.9. Guidelines for Pressing

Any prediction of pressing is based on a transient calculation. The melt undergoes deformations
in time in the same manner as a simple squeeze flow. The process conditions (such as mold or plug
motion) may also vary with time.

In terms of geometry, 2D planar, axisymmetric, and 3D modeling can be employed in the Fluent
Materials Processing calculation. Such a representation enables a calculation through the thickness,
and therefore it is possible to predict the local shear effects, as well as the elongation effects. For
the former, 2D modeling can certainly make sense from a computational point of view.

This section describes the following topics:

4.11.5.9.1. Important Effects
4.11.5.9.2. Recommended Experimental Data
4.11.5.9.3. Recommended Models and Parameters

4.11.5.9.1. Important Effects

In pressing, shear is the dominating component of the deformation, but it is often accompanied
by a significant level of extension. The balance between shear and extension depends on the
geometry, as well as on the boundary conditions. For example, shear will often dominate under
the adhesion condition, while elongation may play a significant role under full slipping.

Since shear is often the main deformation component that develops in this process, knowledge
of the shear viscosity of the material is necessary. While shear rates can be high, the overall de-
formation usually remains moderate. A Cauchy strain of the order of ten is a reasonable order of
magnitude.

4.11.5.9.2. Recommended Experimental Data

Since the processes are so affected by shear rates, obtaining information about the shear viscosity
is the first step. Data acquisition via a direct capillary measurement is a good idea, although
other techniques are acceptable. Linear properties and elongation data can also be used (either
in the automatic fitting calculation or for checking the results of the automatic fitting), if they
are available.

The extensional viscosity can be measured for moderate strain rates, usually up to 10 s-1 using
an elongational rheometer equipped with the Extensional Viscosity Fixture (EVF).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 819
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.11.5.9.3. Recommended Models and Parameters

As a first comment, it is worth noting that kinematic constraints imposed in the process do not
really enable a full development of viscoelastic effects.

Several modeling approaches can be considered. The constant-viscosity Newtonian and generalized
Newtonian models are the simplest approaches, and these are recommended when only the
viscosity data is available. The generalized Newtonian fluid model is an obvious choice, because
shear is an important component of the flow.

In addition to the Newtonian and generalized Newtonian models, differential viscoelastic models
(Maxwell, Oldroyd-B, PTT, Giesekus, FENE-P, DCPP, and Leonov) are all good candidates for
pressing simulations. Although multi-mode simulations are available, single mode transient vis-
coelastic calculations are recommended (at least in first instance) because of the computational
cost in Fluent Materials Processing.

The flow involves a typical time scale corresponding to the pressing. The relaxation time should
be of the same order of magnitude as this time scale. For the viscosity factor, select a value cor-
responding to the shear viscosity, as obtained for a shear rate that is typical for the process.

For a strongly strain-hardening material (for example, LDPE), you can use the Maxwell or Oldroyd-
B model, as long as the strain rate remains relatively low and therefore prevents the development
of high stresses. Alternatively, if you use the PTT or the Giesekus model, you should consider
specifying a low value for or , respectively: typically, between 10-3 to 10-2. You can also use
the DCPP model with a large number of branches ( ). For filled materials, the Leonov model
could be recommended, although it is computationally expensive.

You can use data on the elongational viscosity if it is available. If the resulting values for the
nonlinear parameters are not in agreement with the expected behavior of the melt, they can be
fixed as noted in Assigning a Value to a Parameter (p. 808).

4.11.5.10. Empirical Rules and Principles

It is often helpful during fitting to be able to estimate property values when experimental data is
unavailable. For some materials, there are rules that link properties together; such rules are often
empirical and must be handled with care, as there is no theoretical proof that validates their results.
Frequently, these rules are applicable to polymer melts, such as polyethylenes and polystyrenes.

For information about some empirical rules and principles, see the following sections:
4.11.5.10.1. Cox-Merz Rule
4.11.5.10.2. Gleissle Mirror Relationships
4.11.5.10.3. First Normal Stress Difference Relationships
4.11.5.10.4.Time-Temperature Equivalence

4.11.5.10.1. Cox-Merz Rule

For many materials, linear data and is relatively easy to measure for various angular frequen-
cies (rad/s). When applicable, the shear viscosity can be estimated by applying the Cox-Merz
[4] (p. 954) empirical rule. This empirical rule states that the modulus of the complex viscosity
matches the nonlinear shear viscosity, as shown in the following equation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
820 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

(4.121)

A Cox-Merz rule also exists for the first normal stress difference; it is an approximation for low
shear rates and is written as follows:
(4.122)

4.11.5.10.2. Gleissle Mirror Relationships

When performing a shear startup experiment for several values of the shear rate, you measure
the shear stress as a function of time; the transient shear viscosity is obtained as the ratio of the
shear stress and the (constant) shear rate. In general, the measured curves exhibit an initial de-
velopment of the transient viscosity that matches the linear behavior , and subsequently
departs from the linear response. The departure from the linear response is delayed when a low
shear rate is considered.

The Gleissle mirror relationship [6] (p. 954) is empirical and relates the linear transient viscosity,
with the nonlinear steady shear viscosity, as follows:
(4.123)

There is a graphical mirror relationship between the transient shear viscosity and the nonlinear
steady shear viscosity. This relationship has been observed for oils, as well as polymeric melts
such as polyisobutylenes and polyethylenes. It also provides a useful tool for validating measure-
ments obtained via various techniques.

A second Gleissle mirror relationship concerns the first normal stress coefficient, . It is
given by:
(4.124)

Again, there is a graphical mirror relationship between the transient first normal stress coefficient
and the corresponding nonlinear steady property.

When necessary, it may be possible to extend the Gleissle mirror relationship for obtaining pre-
liminary information on the transient elongation viscosity.
(4.125)

4.11.5.10.3. First Normal Stress Difference Relationships

The Cox-Merz rule for the first normal stress difference is only valid for a limited range of shear
rates. Laun [7] (p. 954) has proposed an empirical rule that is valid over a larger interval of shear
rates, and is given by the following:

(4.126)

Equation 4.126 (p. 821) is found to be valid for polyethylenes. Similar relationships can be created
for other families of polymers.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 821
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Using an elastic recoil mechanism, Tanner [11] (p. 955) proposed a simple expression that relates
the extrudate diameter to the first normal stress difference, as follows:

(4.127)

where and are the diameters of the extrudate and of the die, respectively, and is
the wall shear stress in the capillary die.

4.11.5.10.4. Time-Temperature Equivalence

Time-temperature equivalence (or superposition) can be applied, for example, in the measurements
of linear properties and . Usually, devices allow a measurement within a given interval of
angular frequencies. However, when performing measurements at different temperatures, it is
possible to expand the interval of angular frequencies. If the relationship between linear properties
and temperature is unknown, it is reasonable to assume that the dependence is the same for
and . Therefore, the ratio , when plotted against the angular frequency, will
typically have the same shape for different temperatures, though the curves will shift along the
horizontal axis. That is, an experiment performed at a lower temperature corresponds to an ex-
periment at a higher temperature within a higher interval of angular frequencies. You can then
combine the data by shifting the curves and thereby expand the interval of angular frequencies,
possibly beyond the technological limits of the measurement device. Simultaneously, the identi-
fication of the corresponding shift factor will characterize the dependence with respect to tem-
perature for subsequent analysis; this is relevant, for example, for the complex viscosity. It is
therefore possible to acquire information on the temperature dependence of the properties, as
well as to expand the knowledge of linear properties.

To illustrate how time-temperature equivalence can be used, consider the following figure, which
shows the measurement of linear properties (thick lines) and (thin lines) for angular frequen-
cies ranging from 10–2 to 102. The data is measured at four temperatures, represented here in
black, blue, magenta, and red.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
822 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rheometry

Figure 4.176: G' and G" vs. Angular Frequency [rad/s]

The next figure shows the properties , for each temperature ranging from black to
red. The blue temperature is the reference temperature that will be used to build the master
curves.

Figure 4.177: G"/G' vs. Angular Frequency [rad/s]

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 823
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

The curves from the previous figure can be combined into a single curve, as shown in the following
figure. The black curve is shifted to the right, while the magenta and red curves are shifted to
the left; the shift factors are kept for further evaluation of the temperature dependence of the
properties. Combining these four curves into the dashed line enables you to expand the interval
of angular frequencies.

Figure 4.178: Combining G"/G' Curves

The shift factors obtained in the previous step can be applied to the linear properties and ,
in order to obtain the master curves in the figure that follows.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
824 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Figure 4.179: Master Curves for G' and G" vs. Angular Frequency [rad/s]

The applicability of the time-temperature equivalence depends on the material considered, and
is affected by the actual temperature dependence of the properties. Experience and specialized
literature can provide further information.

4.12. Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

This section contains a listing of the contents for the various property panels available in the Fluent
Materials Processing workspace.
4.12.1. Simulation Setup
4.12.2. Solution Properties
4.12.3. Results Properties

4.12.1. Simulation Setup

4.12.1.1. General Properties

General property settings are used to define the overall simulation. Here, you can view and adjust
any geometry, mesh, or calculation settings, as well as assorted physics options.

Controls

Mesh file

Indicates the location and name of the mesh file. For more information, see Meshes in the
Polyflow documentation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 825
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Mesh length unit

Indicates the unit of length used in the mesh file. For more information, see Units in the Polyflow
documentation.

Mesh Format

Indicates the format of the mesh file

Box Size

Describes the dimensions of the mesh.

Geometry Type

Indicates the dimensionality of the geometry to be represented by the mesh file. If the mesh
is a 2D plane, the simulation may be planar (Vz equal to 0), channel (Vz not equal to 0),
axisymmetric (Y axis being the axis of symmetry + Vw = 0), swirling (axisymmetric, with the Y
axis being the axis of symmetry + Vw not equal to 0) and film (planar + thickness(es)). Note:
Vw is the rotation velocity around the Y axis.

Calculation Type

Indicates the specific type of calculation to be performed. Calculations can be Steady, Continu-
ation, Transient, or Volume of Fluid when you want to perform a transient simulation of a
filling process.

Task name

Specify a name for the task.

Duration

For a transient or volume of fluid calculation, specify the overall length of time interval.

4.12.1.1.1. Physics Options

Include thermal effects

Enable this option if you want to model fluid flow in which temperature plays a role.

Include inertia effects

Enable this option if you want to model fluid flow in which inertia plays a role. For blow
molding simulations, inertia effects are always included.

Include viscous dissipation effects

Enable this option if you want to model the heat generated by internal forces and friction
along slipping walls.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
826 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Include gravity effects

Enable this option if you want to model fluid flow in which gravity plays a role. When
selected, for the Gravity definition, enter the X, Y, and Z components of the gravitational
acceleration.

Gx

Specify the value of the x-component of the gravitational acceleration. Using the drop-
down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

Gy

Specify the value of the y-component of the gravitational acceleration. Using the drop-
down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

Gz

Specify the value of the z-component of the gravitational acceleration. Using the drop-
down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

4.12.1.2. Material Properties

Material property settings for your simulation.

View properties

Indicate whether or not to display material properties.

Options include:

• Density Law (p. 827)

• Thermal Properties (p. 828)

• Elastic Properties (p. 829)

• Viscosity Law (p. 830)

• Simplified Viscoelastic Law Properties (p. 837)

• Integral Viscoelastic Law Properties (p. 848)

• Differential Viscoelastic Law Properties (p. 845)

• Reinforcement Properties (p. 849)

• Viscosity Law in Porous Medium Properties (p. 852)

4.12.1.2.1. Density Law

All that is required here is to specify a value for the density for the material used in the simulation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 827
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Density

Specify the density of the material. Using the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant
value, or a valid expression.

4.12.1.2.2. Thermal Properties

This section contains settings for thermal-related properties such as thermal expansion, thermal
conductivity and heat capacity. For additional information, see Basic Equations in the Polyflow
User's Guide.

Thermal Expansion

Thermal expansion can be equated to the Boussinesq approximation that can be used instead
of a constant density. For additional information, see Boussinesq Approximation for Density in
Nonisothermal Flows in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Coefficient of thermal expansion

Coefficient of thermal expansion used within the context of the Boussinesq approximation,
that is, the effect is applied only on the volume forces (gravity)

Reference temperature

Within the context of the Boussinesq approximation for the thermal expansion: temperature
at which thermal expansion vanishes, that is, at which the density is equal to the specified
Density value.

Thermal Conductivity

Select a constant thermal conductivity (K) or a third-order, temperature-dependent, polyno-

mial expression.

When the thermal conductivity law is set to Constant, specify a constant value for the thermal
conductivity, or a valid expression. Otherwise, when the law is set to Polynomial, specify the
primary coefficient of the thermal conductivity polynomial expression; it may not vanish.

The coefficient of the linear term in the temperature-dependent thermal conductivity polyno-
mial expression.

The coefficient of the quadratic term in the temperature-dependent thermal conductivity

polynomial expression.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
828 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

The coefficient of the cubic term in the temperature-dependent thermal conductivity polyno-
mial expression.

Reference temperature

Specify the temperature at which the thermal conductivity is constant and is equal to the
primary coefficient A.

Heat Capacity

Cp

Select a constant heat capacity per unit mass or a third-order, temperature-dependent,

polynomial expression.

When the heat capacity per unit mass law is set to Constant, specify a constant value for the
heat capacity per unit mass, or a valid expression. Otherwise, when the law is set to Polyno-
mial, specify the primary coefficient of the polynomial expression for the heat capacity per
unit mass.

The coefficient of the linear term in the temperature-dependent heat capacity per unit mass
polynomial expression.

The coefficient of the quadratic term in the temperature-dependent heat capacity per unit
mass polynomial expression.

The coefficient of the cubic term in the temperature-dependent heat capacity per unit mass
polynomial expression.

Reference temperature

Specify the temperature at which the heat capacity per unit mass is constant and is equal to
the primary coefficient A.

4.12.1.2.3. Elastic Properties

This section contains descriptions of a material's elastic properties. For additional information,
see Theory in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Young Modulus

Specify a value for E, the Young modulus.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 829
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Poisson Coefficient

Mu

Specify a value for mu, for the Poisson coefficient.

Lineic Dilatation Coefficient

Alpha

For linear thermo-elasticity, specify a value for alpha, the lineic dilitation coefficient.

Reference temperature

For linear thermo-elasticity, specify the temperature at which lineic dilatation vanishes.

4.12.1.2.4. Viscosity Law

This section holds details pertaining to a material's viscosity definition.

Shear-rate dependency model

Specify the shear-rate dependence model.

Options include:

• Constant (p. 831)

• Power Law (p. 831)

• Bird-Carreau Law (p. 831)

• Carreau-Yasuda Law (p. 832)

• Bingham Law (p. 832)

• Modified Bingham Law (p. 833)

• Herschel-Bulkley Law (p. 833)

• Modified Herschel-Bulkley Law (p. 834)

• Cross Law (p. 834)

• Modified Cross Law (p. 835)

Temperature dependency model

Choose the model for the temperature dependence.

Options include:

• None

• Arrhenius Law (p. 835)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
830 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

• Arrhenius Approximate Law (p. 835)

• Fulcher (p. 836)

• WLF (p. 836)

4.12.1.2.4.1. Constant

Allows you to specify a constant value for the viscosity. For additional information, see Constant
in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Viscosity

Specify a value for the viscosity. Using the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant
value, or a valid expression.

4.12.1.2.4.2. Power Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Power Law viscosity model. For additional information,
see Power Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Consistency factor

The viscosity at shear-rate equal to the inverse of the Time Constant.

Time constant

The inverse of the shear-rate at which the viscosity is equal to the Consistency Factor.

Power law index

An index ranging between 0 and 1; it quantifies the rate of shear thinning. On a log-log
diagram, the index corresponds to the slope of shear stress curve versus shear rate. A value
of 1 corresponds to a constant viscosity Newtonian fluid, while values lower than 1 indicate
shear thinning.

4.12.1.2.4.3. Bird-Carreau Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Bird-Carreau Law viscosity model. For additional
information, see Bird-Carreau Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Zero shear viscosity

The viscosity at zero shear-rate.

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the shear rate at which the fluid changes from a Newtonian
to a power-law behavior.

Power law index

An index ranging between 0 and 1; it quantifies the rate of shear thinning that occurs
beyond a shear rate equal to the inverse of the time constant. A value of 1 corresponds to

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 831
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

a constant viscosity Newtonian fluid, while the amount of shear thinning increases when
the power index decreases down to 0.

Infinite shear viscosity

The asymptotic value of the shear viscosity at very high shear rate.

4.12.1.2.4.4. Carreau-Yasuda Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Carreau-Yasuda Law viscosity model. For additional
information, see Carreau-Yasuda Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Zero shear viscosity

Viscosity at zero shear-rate.

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the shear rate at which the fluid changes from Newtonian
to power-law behavior.

Power law index

An index ranging between 0 and 1; it quantifies the rate of shear thinning that occurs
beyond a shear rate equal to the inverse of the time constant. A value of 1 corresponds to
a constant viscosity Newtonian fluid, while the amount of shear thinning increases when
the power index decreases down to 0.

Infinite shear viscosity

The asymptotic value of the shear viscosity at very high shear rate.

Plateau index

Parameter that controls the rate of transition from the Newtonian viscosity plateau at low
shear rate to the shear thinning behavior. A value between 0 and 1 leads to a rather smooth
transition, while higher values lead to a sharp transition.

4.12.1.2.4.5. Bingham Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Bingham Law viscosity model. For additional inform-
ation, see Bingham Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Plastic viscosity

On a linear diagram, the plastic viscosity indicates the slope of the shear stress curve versus
shear rate beyond the yield stress threshold. It also corresponds to the asymptotic value
of the shear viscosity at very high shear rate.

Yield stress threshold

Ideally, the yield stress threshold is the minimum amount of stress that is needed to apply
a deformation to the material. In the CFD context, it corresponds to the stress level below
which very little deformation is exhibited by the fluid.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
832 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Critical shear rate

The critical shear rate controls the rate of transition between the no-flow behavior when
the local stress level is less than the yield stress threshold and the fluid response when the
stress is large enough. The rate of transition increases when the critical shear rate decreases.

4.12.1.2.4.6. Modified Bingham Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Modified Bingham Law viscosity model. For addi-
tional information, see Modified Bingham Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Plastic viscosity

On a linear diagram, the plastic viscosity indicates the slope of the shear stress curve versus
shear rate beyond the yield stress threshold. It also corresponds to the asymptotic value
of the shear viscosity at very high shear rate.

Yield stress threshold

Ideally, the yield stress threshold is the minimum amount of stress that is needed to apply
a deformation to the material. In the CFD context, it corresponds to the stress level below
which very little deformation is exhibited by the fluid.

Critical shear rate

The critical shear rate controls the rate of transition between the no-flow behavior when
the local stress level is less than the yield stress threshold and the fluid response when the
stress is large enough. The rate of transition increases when the critical shear rate decreases.

4.12.1.2.4.7. Herschel-Bulkley Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Herschel-Bulkley Law viscosity model. For additional
information, see Herschel-Bulkley Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Yield stress threshold

Ideally, the yield stress threshold is the minimum amount of stress that is needed to apply
a deformation to the material. In the CFD context, it corresponds to the stress level below
which very little deformation is exhibited by the fluid.

Consistency factor

On a linear diagram, the consistency factor indicates the shear stress growth versus shear
rate beyond the yield stress threshold.

Power law index

On a linear diagram, the power law index indicates the change of slope of the shear stress
growth versus shear rate beyond the yield stress threshold. The rate of shear thinning in-
creases when the index decreases down to 0.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 833
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Critical shear rate

The critical shear rate controls the rate of transition between the no-flow behavior when
the local stress level is less than the yield stress threshold and the fluid response when the
stress is large enough. The rate of transition increases when the critical shear rate decreases.

4.12.1.2.4.8. Modified Herschel-Bulkley Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Modified Herschel-Bulkley Law viscosity model. For
additional information, see Modified Herschel-Bulkley Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Yield stress threshold

Ideally, the yield stress threshold is the minimum amount of stress that is needed to apply
a deformation to the material. In the CFD context, it corresponds to the stress level below
which very little deformation is exhibited by the fluid.

Consistency factor

On a linear diagram, the consistency factor indicates the shear stress growth versus shear
rate beyond the yield stress threshold.

Power law index

On a linear diagram, the power law index indicates the change of slope of the shear stress
growth versus shear rate beyond the yield stress threshold. The rate of shear thinning in-
creases when the index decreases down to 0.

Critical shear rate

The critical shear rate controls the rate of transition between the no-flow behavior when
the local stress level is less than the yield stress threshold and the fluid response when the
stress is large enough. The rate of transition increases when the critical shear rate decreases.

4.12.1.2.4.9. Cross Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Cross Law viscosity model. For additional information,
see Cross Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Zero shear viscosity

Viscosity at zero shear-rate.

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the shear rate at which the fluid changes from a Newtonian
to a power-law behavior.

Cross law index

Index that controls the rate at which the viscosity decreases with increasing shear-rate. A
value of 0 corresponds to a Newtonian fluid (no shear thinning), a value of 1 corresponds
to a viscosity that decreases rapidly (important shear thinning)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
834 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

4.12.1.2.4.10. Modified Cross Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Modified Cross Law viscosity model. For additional
information, see Modified Cross Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Zero shear viscosity

The viscosity at zero shear-rate.

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the shear rate at which the fluid changes from a Newtonian
to a power-law behavior.

Cross law index

Index that controls the rate at which the viscosity decreases with increasing shear-rate. A
value of 0 corresponds to a Newtonian fluid (no shear thinning), a value of 1 corresponds
to a viscosity that decreases rapidly (important shear thinning)

4.12.1.2.4.11. Arrhenius Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Arrhenius Law temperature dependency viscosity
model. For additional information, see Arrhenius Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Activation energy

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference temperature

Specify the temperature at which the function describing the temperature dependence is
one. It often corresponds to the temperature of the master curve.

Shift

Dictates how the viscosity will change with temperature: a vertical shift means that the
viscosity curve is simply shifted downwards in a viscosity/shear-rate diagram when temper-
ature increases, a vertical and horizontal shift means that the viscosity curve is shifted
downwards and to the right when temperature increases.

4.12.1.2.4.12. Arrhenius Approximate Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Arrhenius Approximate Law temperature dependency
viscosity model. For additional information, see Approximate Arrhenius Law in the Polyflow
User's Guide.

Activation energy

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference temperature

Specify the temperature at which the function describing the temperature dependence is
one. It often corresponds to the temperature of the master curve.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 835
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Shift

Dictates how the viscosity will change with temperature: a vertical shift means that the
viscosity curve is simply shifted downwards in a viscosity/shear-rate diagram when temper-
ature increases, a vertical and horizontal shift means that the viscosity curve is shifted
downwards and to the right when temperature increases.

4.12.1.2.4.13. Fulcher

Allows you to specify the properties of the Fulcher temperature dependency viscosity model.
For additional information, see Fulcher Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

F1

Coefficient that can be used for applying an overall vertical shift of the viscosity curve
versus temperature. It is redundant with the zero shear viscosity.

F2

Coefficient that affects the slope of the decay of the viscosity curve with increasing temper-
ature.

F3

Temperature corresponding to the vertical asymptote of the viscosity curve versus temper-
ature. In other words, it is the temperature at which the model would predict an infinite
viscosity, suggesting fusion or solidification.

4.12.1.2.4.14. WLF

Allows you to specify the properties of the WLF temperature dependency viscosity model. For
additional information, see WLF Law in the Polyflow User's Guide.

C1

Empirical constant of the Williams-Landel-Ferry (WLF) law, which dictates the intensity of
the temperature dependence.

C2

Empirical constant of the Williams-Landel-Ferry (WLF) law, which dictates the intensity of
the temperature dependence.

Reference temperature

A temperature parameter which is sometimes related to the glass transition temperature

of the material.

Reference temperature difference

A temperature shift applied when considering another reference temperature. (For example,
when considering another temperature for the master curve)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
836 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Shift

Dictates how the viscosity will change with temperature: a vertical shift means that the
viscosity curve is simply shifted downwards in a viscosity/shear-rate diagram when temper-
ature increases, a vertical and horizontal shift means that the viscosity curve is shifted
downwards and to the right.

4.12.1.2.5. Simplified Viscoelastic Law Properties

This section holds details pertaining to a material's properties when using the Simplified Viscoelastic
model. For additional information, see Simplified Viscoelastic Model in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Weighting Coefficient

At the first approximation, it controls the swelling intensity versus flow rate. Use swelling-
based experimental data to fine-tune the values for this property.

4.12.1.2.5.1. Viscosity Law

This section holds details pertaining to a material's viscosity definition when using the Simplified
Viscoelastic model.

Shear-rate dependency model

Specify the shear-rate dependence model.

Options include:
4.12.1.2.5.1.1. Constant
4.12.1.2.5.1.2. Power Law (Shear)
4.12.1.2.5.1.3. Bird-Carreau (Shear)
4.12.1.2.5.1.4. Carreau-Yasuda (Shear)
4.12.1.2.5.1.5. Cross Law (Shear)
4.12.1.2.5.1.6. Modified Cross Law (Shear)

4.12.1.2.5.1.1. Constant

Allows you to specify a constant value for the viscosity when using the Simplified Viscoelastic
model.

Viscosity

Specify a value for the viscosity. Using the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant
value, or a valid expression.

4.12.1.2.5.1.2. Power Law (Shear)

Allows you to specify a Power shear law when using the simplified viscoelastic model.

Consistency factor

The viscosity at shear-rate equal to the inverse of the Time Constant.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 837
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Time constant

The inverse of the shear-rate at which the viscosity is equal to the Consistency Factor.

Power law index

An index ranging between 0 and 1; it quantifies the rate of shear thinning. On a log-log
diagram, the index corresponds to the slope of shear stress curve versus shear rate. A value
of 1 corresponds to a constant viscosity Newtonian fluid, while values lower than 1 indicate
shear thinning.

4.12.1.2.5.1.3. Bird-Carreau (Shear)

Allows you to specify a Bird-Carreau shear law when using the simplified viscoelastic model.

Zero first normal viscosity

The viscosity at zero shear-rate.

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the shear rate at which the fluid changes from a Newtonian
to a power-law behavior.

Power law index

An index ranging between 0 and 1; it quantifies the rate of shear thinning that occurs
beyond a shear rate equal to the inverse of the time constant. A value of 1 corresponds to
a constant viscosity Newtonian fluid, while the amount of shear thinning increases when
the power index decreases down to 0.

Infinite first normal viscosity

The asymptotic value of the shear viscosity at very high shear rate.

4.12.1.2.5.1.4. Carreau-Yasuda (Shear)

Allows you to specify a Carreau-Yasuda shear law when using the simplified viscoelastic model.

Zero first normal viscosity

Viscosity at zero shear-rate.

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the shear rate at which the fluid changes from Newtonian
to power-law behavior.

Power law index

An index ranging between 0 and 1; it quantifies the rate of shear thinning that occurs
beyond a shear rate equal to the inverse of the time constant. A value of 1 corresponds to
a constant viscosity Newtonian fluid, while the amount of shear thinning increases when
the power index decreases down to 0.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
838 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Infinite first normal viscosity

The asymptotic value of the shear viscosity at very high shear rate.

Plateau index

Parameter that controls the rate of transition from the Newtonian viscosity plateau at low
shear rate to the shear thinning behavior. A value between 0 and 1 leads to a rather smooth
transition, while higher values lead to a sharp transition.

4.12.1.2.5.1.5. Cross Law (Shear)

Allows you to specify a Cross shear law when using the simplified viscoelastic model.

Zero first normal viscosity

Viscosity at zero shear-rate.

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the shear rate at which the fluid changes from a Newtonian
to a power-law behavior.

Cross law index

Index that controls the rate at which the viscosity decreases with increasing shear-rate. A
value of 0 corresponds to a Newtonian fluid (no shear thinning), a value of 1 corresponds
to a viscosity that decreases rapidly (important shear thinning)

4.12.1.2.5.1.6. Modified Cross Law (Shear)

Allows you to specify a modified Cross shear law when using the simplified viscoelastic model.

Zero first normal viscosity

The viscosity at zero shear-rate.

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the shear rate at which the fluid changes from a Newtonian
to a power-law behavior.

Cross law index

Index that controls the rate at which the viscosity decreases with increasing shear-rate. A
value of 0 corresponds to a Newtonian fluid (no shear thinning), a value of 1 corresponds
to a viscosity that decreases rapidly (important shear thinning)

4.12.1.2.5.2. First Normal Viscosity Law

Allows you to specify the first normal viscosity when using the simplified viscoelastic model.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 839
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Shear-rate dependency model

Specify the law for the dependence of the first normal viscosity with respect to the pseudo
shear-rate.

You can choose to use the same law as shear viscosity, or you can select from the following:
4.12.1.2.5.2.1. Constant (FNS)
4.12.1.2.5.2.2. Power Law (FNS)
4.12.1.2.5.2.3. Bird-Carreau (FNS)
4.12.1.2.5.2.4. Carreau-Yasuda (FNS)
4.12.1.2.5.2.5. Cross Law (FNS)
4.12.1.2.5.2.6. Modified Cross Law (FNS)

4.12.1.2.5.2.1. Constant (FNS)

Allows you to specify a constant first normal viscosity law when using the simplified viscoelastic
model.

Viscosity

The normal viscosity at any pseudo shear rate.

4.12.1.2.5.2.2. Power Law (FNS)

Allows you to specify a Power first normal viscosity law when using the simplified viscoelastic
model.

Consistency factor

The viscosity at pseudo shear-rate equal to the inverse of the Time Constant.

Time constant

The inverse of the pseudo shear-rate at which the normal viscosity is equal to the Consist-
ency Factor.

Power law index

An index ranging between 0 and 1; it quantifies the rate of shear thinning. On a log-log
diagram, the index corresponds to the slope of shear stress curve versus pseudo shear rate.
A value of 1 corresponds to a constant normal viscosity Newtonian fluid, while values lower
than 1 indicate shear thinning.

4.12.1.2.5.2.3. Bird-Carreau (FNS)

Allows you to specify a Bird-Carreau first normal viscosity law when using the simplified vis-
coelastic model.

Zero first normal viscosity

The normal viscosity at zero pseudo shear-rate.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
840 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the pseudo shear rate at which the fluid changes from a
Newtonian to a power-law behavior.

Power law index

An index ranging between 0 and 1; it quantifies the rate of shear thinning that occurs
beyond a pseudo shear rate equal to the inverse of the time constant. A value of 1 corres-
ponds to a constant normal viscosity Newtonian fluid, while the amount of shear thinning
increases when the power index decreases down to 0.

Infinite first normal viscosity

The asymptotic value of the normal viscosity at very high pseudo shear rate.

4.12.1.2.5.2.4. Carreau-Yasuda (FNS)

Allows you to specify a Carreau-Yasuda first normal viscosity law when using the simplified
viscoelastic model.

Zero first normal viscosity

The normal viscosity at zero pseudo shear-rate.

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the pseudo shear rate at which the fluid changes from
Newtonian to power-law behavior.

Power law index

An index ranging between 0 and 1; it quantifies the rate of shear thinning that occurs
beyond a pseudo shear rate equal to the inverse of the time constant. A value of 1 corres-
ponds to a constant normal viscosity Newtonian fluid, while the amount of shear thinning
increases when the power index decreases down to 0.

Infinite first normal viscosity

The asymptotic value of the normal viscosity at very high pseudo shear rate.

Plateau index

Parameter that controls the rate of transition from the Newtonian normal viscosity plateau
at low pseudo shear rate to the shear thinning behavior. A value between 0 and 1 leads
to a rather smooth transition, while higher values lead to a sharp transition.

4.12.1.2.5.2.5. Cross Law (FNS)

Allows you to specify a Cross first normal viscosity law when using the simplified viscoelastic
model.

Zero first normal viscosity

The normal viscosity at zero pseudo shear-rate.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 841
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the pseudo shear rate at which the fluid changes from a
Newtonian to a power-law behavior.

Cross law index

Index that controls the rate at which the normal viscosity decreases with increasing pseudo
shear-rate. A value of 0 corresponds to a Newtonian fluid (no shear thinning), a value of 1
corresponds to a normal viscosity that decreases rapidly (important shear thinning)

4.12.1.2.5.2.6. Modified Cross Law (FNS)

Allows you to specify a modified Cross first normal viscosity law when using the simplified
viscoelastic model.

Zero first normal viscosity

The viscosity at zero shear-rate.

Time constant

Natural time. That is, inverse of the pseudo shear rate at which the fluid changes from a
Newtonian to a power-law behavior.

Cross law index

Index that controls the rate at which the normal viscosity decreases with increasing pseudo
shear-rate. A value of 0 corresponds to a Newtonian fluid (no shear thinning), a value of 1
corresponds to a viscosity that decreases rapidly (important shear thinning)

4.12.1.2.5.3. Relaxation Time Law

Allows you to specify the relaxation time law when using the simplified viscoelastic model.

Shear-rate dependency model

Specify the model for the shear rate dependence.

Options include:
4.12.1.2.5.3.1. Constant (Relaxation Time)
4.12.1.2.5.3.2. Power Law (Relaxation Time)
4.12.1.2.5.3.3. Bird-Carreau (Relaxation Time)

4.12.1.2.5.3.1. Constant (Relaxation Time)

Allows you to specify a constant relaxation time law when using the simplified viscoelastic
model.

Facr

It affects the speed at which the pseudo shear rate changes subsequent to a change in the
local shear rate. Additionally, in first approximation, it affects the speed at which the extrud-

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
842 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

ate swelling develops. Use swelling-based experimental data to fine-tune the values for
this property.

4.12.1.2.5.3.2. Power Law (Relaxation Time)

Allows you to specify a Power relaxation time law when using the simplified viscoelastic model.

Facr

The relaxation time at shear-rate equal to the inverse of the Time Constant.

Tnatr

The inverse of the shear-rate at which the relaxation time is equal to the Consistency Factor.

Expor

An index that controls the rate at which the relaxation time decreases with increasing shear-
rate. A value of 1 corresponds to a constant relaxation time, a low value corresponds to a
relaxation time that decreases rapidly.

4.12.1.2.5.3.3. Bird-Carreau (Relaxation Time)

Allows you to specify a Bird-Carreau relaxation time law when using the simplified viscoelastic
model.

Facr

The relaxation time at zero shear-rate.

Tnatr

Natural time. That is, inverse of the shear-rate at which the relaxation time starts to decrease
with an increasing shear-rate.

Expor

An index that controls the rate at which the relaxation time decreases with increasing shear-
rate. A value of 1 corresponds to a constant relaxation time, a low value corresponds to a
relaxation time that decreases rapidly.

4.12.1.2.5.4. Thermal Dependency

Allows you to specify the material's thermal dependency properties when using the Simplified
Viscoelastic model.

Temperature dependency model

Choose the model for the temperature dependence.

Options include:

• None

• Arrhenius Law (p. 844)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 843
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

• Arrhenius Approximate Law (p. 844)

• WLF (p. 844)

Thermal dependency applied on relaxation time

By default, the temperature dependence is applied only on the viscosity and first normal
viscosity laws. Optionally it can also be applied on the relaxation time.

4.12.1.2.5.4.1. Arrhenius Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Arrhenius Law temperature dependency viscosity
model when using the Simplified Viscoelastic model.

Activation energy

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference temperature

Specify the temperature at which the function describing the temperature dependence is
one. It often corresponds to the temperature of the master curve.

Shift

Dictates how the viscosity will change with temperature: a vertical shift means that the
viscosity curve is simply shifted downwards in a viscosity/shear-rate diagram when temper-
ature increases, a vertical and horizontal shift means that the viscosity curve is shifted
downwards and to the right when temperature increases.

4.12.1.2.5.4.2. Arrhenius Approximate Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Arrhenius Approximate Law temperature dependency
viscosity model when using the Simplified Viscoelastic model.

Activation energy

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference temperature

Specify the temperature at which the function describing the temperature dependence is
one. It often corresponds to the temperature of the master curve.

Shift

Dictates how the viscosity will change with temperature: a vertical shift means that the
viscosity curve is simply shifted downwards in a viscosity/shear-rate diagram when temper-
ature increases, a vertical and horizontal shift means that the viscosity curve is shifted
downwards and to the right when temperature increases.

4.12.1.2.5.4.3. WLF

Allows you to specify the properties of the WLF temperature dependency viscosity model when
using the Simplified Viscoelastic model.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
844 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

C1

Empirical constant of the Williams-Landel-Ferry (WLF) law, which dictates the intensity of
the temperature dependence.

C2

Empirical constant of the Williams-Landel-Ferry (WLF) law, which dictates the intensity of
the temperature dependence.

Reference temperature

A temperature parameter which is sometimes related to the glass transition temperature

of the material.

Reference temperature difference

A temperature shift applied when considering another reference temperature. (For example,
when considering another temperature for the master curve)

Shift

Dictates how the viscosity will change with temperature: a vertical shift means that the
viscosity curve is simply shifted downwards in a viscosity/shear-rate diagram when temper-
ature increases, a vertical and horizontal shift means that the viscosity curve is shifted
downwards and to the right.

4.12.1.2.6. Differential Viscoelastic Law Properties

This section holds details pertaining to a material's properties when using the Differential Vis-
coelasticity model.

Model

Choose a differential viscoelastic model: Maxwell, Oldroyd-B, Giesekus, Phan Thien-Tanner,

Fene-P, POMPOM, or Leonov.

Number of Relaxation Modes

Specify the number of relaxation modes, with a maximum of eight modes.

Additional viscosity

It is the viscosity value of the purely Newtonian (inelastic) contribution to the total extra-stress
tensor.

Thermal Dependency

Choose the model for the temperature dependence. Available models are Arrhenius approx-
imate, Arrhenius, Fulcher, and WLF.

4.12.1.2.6.1. Mode n

This section holds details pertaining to a material's nth mode (1-8) properties when using the
Differential Viscoelasticity model.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 845
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Relaxation Time

Specify the relaxation time of the current mode

Partial Viscosity

Specify the zero shear rate viscosity factor of the current mode.

Alpha

Nonlinear parameter of the current mode. Alpha controls the shear thinning as well as the
ratio of second to first normal stress difference for the current mode of the Giesekus model.
Typical values can be in the order of 0.2 to 0.5.

Epsilon

Nonlinear parameter of the current mode. Epsilon primarily controls the asymptotic value
of the transient elongation viscosity for the current mode of the Phan-Thien-Tanner model.
Strain hardening is obtained for very low values of Epsilon. A typical value is of the order
of 0.01 for a strain hardening material.

Xi

Nonlinear parameter of the current mode. Xi primarily controls the shear thinning as well
as the ratio of second to first normal stress difference for the current mode of the Phan-
Thien-Tanner model. Typical values can be in the order of 0.2 to 0.5.

L^2

Specify the upper limit of the relative elongation undergone by the FENE macromolecules
associated with the current mode. A large value leads to a large extensibility and tends
towards the behavior of the Oldroyd-B model.

Relaxation Time for Orientation

Specify the relaxation time associated with the orientation changes undergone by the chain
segments of the POMPOM macromolecules associated with the current mode.

Relaxation Time for Stretching

Specify the relaxation time associated with the stretching undergone by the chain segments
of the POMPOM macromolecules associated with the current mode. It is usually 2 to 10
times smaller than the relaxation time for orientation.

Shear Modulus

Weight of the current mode. Typically, the value is often identified from dynamic data G
prime and G double-prime.

Number of Arms

A POMPOM macromolecule consists of a backbone and a sequence of arms. The number

of arms increases with decreasing relaxation times, and contributes to the strain hardening
of the macromolecule.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
846 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Xi

Nonlinear parameter of the current mode. Xi primarily controls the shear thinning as well
as the ratio of second to first normal stress difference for the current mode of the POMPOM
model. Typical values can be in the order of 0.2 to 0.5.

Shear Modulus

Weight of the current mode. Typically, the value is often identified from dynamic data G
prime and G double-prime.

Alpha

Specify the initial ratio of free to trapped chains in the system.

Beta

Specify the coefficient in the potential function that connects the Finger strain tensor to
the extra-stress tensor for the current mode.

Nu

Specify the power index in the potential function that connects the Finger strain tensor to
the extra-stress tensor for the current mode.

Specify the coefficient of a material function used in the constitutive equation for free
chains of the current mode.

Nu

Specify the power index used in the mobility function used in the constitutive equation
for trapped chains of the current mode.

Specify the value of the mobility function under no-debonding, that is, when no trapped
chain is de-bonded from the filler.

Specify the dimensionless time factor which may delay or accelerate de-bonding in a flow.

Gamma*

Specify the generalized shear at which yield occurs.

4.12.1.2.6.2. Thermal Dependency

This section holds details pertaining to a material's thermal dependency properties when using
the Differential Viscoelasticity model.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 847
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Temperature Dependence

For temperature dependent differential viscoelastic models, the viscosity and the relaxation
time will be multiplied by the same temperature shift function H(T). Available shift functions
are the Arrhenius approximate, Arrhenius, or WLF law.

Activation Energy Ratio

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference Temperature

Specify the temperature at which the function describing the temperature dependence is
one.

C1

Empirical constant of the Williams-Landel-Ferry (WLF) law, which dictates the intensity of
the temperature dependence.

C2

Empirical constant of the Williams-Landel-Ferry (WLF) law, which dictates the intensity of
the temperature dependence.

Reference Temperature Difference

Empirical constant of the Williams-Landel-Ferry (WLF) law, (Tr-Ta) with Tr being based on
the glass transition temperature and Ta being an arbitrary reference temperature.

4.12.1.2.7. Integral Viscoelastic Law Properties

In addition to the differential approach to solving viscoelastic model (described in Differential
Viscoelastic Law Properties (p. 845)), there is also support for an integral approach. This section
holds details pertaining to a material's properties when using the Integral Viscoelasticity model.
See Integral Viscoelastic Models for more information.

Number of Relaxation Modes

Specify the number of relaxation modes, with a maximum of eight modes

Additional viscosity

It is the viscosity value of the purely Newtonian (inelastic) contribution to the total extra-stress
tensor.

4.12.1.2.7.1. Mode n

This section holds details pertaining to a material's nth (1-8) mode properties when using the
Integral Viscoelastic Law.

Relaxation Time

Specify the relaxation of the current mode.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
848 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Partial Viscosity

Specify the zero shear rate viscosity factor of the current mode.

4.12.1.2.7.2. Thermal Dependency

This section holds details pertaining to a material's thermal dependency properties when using
the Integral Viscoelasticity model .

Temperature Dependence

Choose a temperature-dependency model: None, Arrhenius approximate, Arrhenius, or

WLF

Activation energy ratio

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference temperature

A temperature parameter which is sometimes related to the glass transition temperature

of the material.

C1

Empirical constant of the Williams-Landel-Ferry (WLF) law, which dictates the intensity of
the temperature dependence.

C2

Empirical constant of the Williams-Landel-Ferry (WLF) law, which dictates the intensity of
the temperature dependence.

Reference temperature difference

A temperature shift applied when considering another reference temperature. (For example,
when considering another temperature for the master curve)

4.12.1.2.8. Reinforcement Properties

This section holds details pertaining to a material's properties when using the reinforcements.

Number of reinforcements

Specify the number of reinforcements, with a maximum of three.

4.12.1.2.8.1. Reinforcement 1

This section holds details pertaining to a material's first reinforcement properties when using
the Integral Viscoelastic Law.

Magnitude

Magnitude of the reinforcement. It has the same units as the viscosity, and it is typically
100 to 1000 times the viscosity of the matrix.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 849
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Orientation

Select the way of describing the reinforcement orientation. A Cartesian description of the
reinforcement is better suited for flat objects, while a cylindrical description is recommended
for objects with a symmetry axis. (For example, rubber tire)

X -component of reinforcement

Specify the x-component of the first reinforcement in the Cartesian orientation.

Y -component of reinforcement

Specify the y-component of the first reinforcement in the Cartesian orientation.

Z -component of reinforcement

Specify the z-component of the first reinforcement in the Cartesian orientation.

Cylinder axis

Specify the symmetry axis for the reinforcement.

Angle of reinforcement

Specify the angle of the first reinforcement with respect to a plane perpendicular to the
axis given above. The angle is positive for a reinforcement suggesting a helix along the
axis direction when rotating clockwise.

4.12.1.2.8.2. Reinforcement 2

This section holds details pertaining to a material's second reinforcement properties when using
the Integral Viscoelastic Law.

Magnitude

Magnitude of the reinforcement. It has the same units as the viscosity, and it is typically
100 to 1000 times the viscosity of the matrix.

Orientation

Select the way of describing the reinforcement orientation. A Cartesian description of the
reinforcement is better suited for flat objects, while a cylindrical description is recommended
for objects with a symmetry axis. (For example, rubber tire)

X -component of reinforcement

Specify the x-component of the second reinforcement in the Cartesian orientation.

Y -component of reinforcement

Specify the x-component of the second reinforcement in the Cartesian orientation.

Z -component of reinforcement

Specify the x-component of the second reinforcement in the Cartesian orientation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
850 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Cylinder axis

Specify the symmetry axis for the reinforcement.

Angle of reinforcement

Specify the angle of the first reinforcement with respect to a plane perpendicular to the
axis given above. The angle is positive for a reinforcement suggesting a helix along the
axis direction when rotating clockwise.

4.12.1.2.8.3. Reinforcement 3

This section holds details pertaining to a material's third reinforcement properties when using
the Integral Viscoelastic Law.

Magnitude

Magnitude of the reinforcement. It has the same units as the viscosity, and it is typically
100 to 1000 times the viscosity of the matrix.

Orientation

Select the way of describing the reinforcement orientation. A Cartesian description of the
reinforcement is better suited for flat objects, while a cylindrical description is recommended
for objects with a symmetry axis. (For example, rubber tire)

X -component of reinforcement

Specify the x-component of the third reinforcement in the Cartesian orientation.

Y -component of reinforcement

Specify the x-component of the third reinforcement in the Cartesian orientation.

Z -component of reinforcement

Specify the x-component of the third reinforcement in the Cartesian orientation.

Cylinder axis

Specify the symmetry axis for the reinforcement.

Angle of reinforcement

Specify the angle of the first reinforcement with respect to a plane perpendicular to the
axis given above. The angle is positive for a reinforcement suggesting a helix along the
axis direction when rotating clockwise.

4.12.1.2.9. Foaming Properties

This section holds details pertaining to a material's foaming properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 851
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Initial Bubble Radius

Specify a value for the initial radius of the foam bubbles. This value will be used to initialize
the bubble radius in the fluid zone and is usually the bubble radius at inlet.

Initial Gas Pressure

Specify a value for the initial gas pressure in the bubbles.

Number of Cells per Unit Volume

Specify the number of cells (or bubbles) per volume unit of gas/polymer mixture. This number
remains the same during foaming, bubbles grow but are not created nor disappear.

Surface Tension

Specify a value for the bubble surface tension. The default value is 0. A positive surface tension
slows down the bubble growth.

Viscosity

Specify a value for the consistency factor of viscosity that must be considered for the bubble
growth. This viscosity is always modelled by a power law and can be slightly different than
the fluid viscosity.

Power Index

Specify the power law index of the viscosity that must be considered for the bubble growth.
A power law index must range between 0 and 1. A value of 1 is used by default.

Booster

Controls the growth of bubbles in the foam. By default, it is set to 1 but can be increased if
the foaming does not provide enough swelling of the extrudate.

4.12.1.2.10. Viscosity Law in Porous Medium Properties

This section holds details pertaining to a material's viscosity properties when using porous media.

Viscosity

Specify a value for the viscosity. Viscosity for porous medium simulation should be constant
as the actual shear-rate cannot be calculated (flow inside narrow channels of the porous
medium)

4.12.1.2.10.1. Thermal Dependency

This section holds details pertaining to thermal dependencies when considering viscosity and
porous media .

Temperature Dependence

Choose the model for the temperature dependence. Available models are None, Arrhenius
approximate, or Arrhenius, Fulcher and WLF.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
852 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

4.12.1.2.10.1.1. Arrhenius Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Arrhenius Law temperature dependency when
considering viscosity and porous media

Activation Energy

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference Temperature

Specify the temperature at which the function describing the temperature dependence is
one.

4.12.1.2.10.1.2. Arrhenius Approximate Law

Allows you to specify the properties of the Arrhenius Approximate Law temperature dependency
when considering viscosity and porous media.

Activation Energy

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference Temperature

Specify the temperature at which the function describing the temperature dependence is
one.

4.12.1.3. Species Properties

Species property settings for your simulation.

Transport

Specify the species transport settings for your simulation.

Activation

Enable to turn on the transport equation for the current species.

Source Term

Specify the source term. Using the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid
expression.

Scalar Diffusivity

Specify the scalar diffusivity term. Using the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value,
or a valid expression.

Advection term

Disabling the Advection term option will not take advection into account in the species
transport equation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 853
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Enable Freezing

The Enable Freezing option can be turned on if you want to freeze the transport equation on
a part of the computational domain. The species will keep the initial field value on the freezing
zone defined by species-initialization, which is defined under the Solution node.

Freezing Zones

Choose the zones where the transport equation should be frozen.

4.12.1.4. Cell Zone Properties

Cell zones represent the domain of your simulation, identified by the following Types:

• Fluid (Fluid Cell Zone Properties (p. 860))

• Solid (Solid Cell Zone Properties (p. 861))

• Porous media (Porous Cell Zone Properties (p. 862))

• Fixed mold (Fixed Mold Cell Zone Properties (p. 863))

• Moving mold (Moving Mold Zone Properties (p. 863))

• Restrictor part (Restrictor Zone Properties (p. 869))

• Moving part (Moving Part Zone Properties (p. 867))

In addition, you can use the following command buttons when working with cell zones:

• Use the New... button to create a new object with its own unique properties.

• Use the Display button to show the cell zone in the graphics window.

• Use the Delete button to remove a cell zone

Cell zone property settings for your simulation:

Type

Choose the type of cell zone, such as fluid, solid, porous media, moving mold, etc.

Zones

Select one or more zones to apply to this cell zone.

Multiple Materials

Enable coextrusion modeling via transport of concentrations of different fluid materials.

Fluid material(s)

Select a fluid material for the cell zone.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
854 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Solid material

Specify a solid material for the cell zone.

Deformable Mold

Enable this option to allow deformation of the mold.

Deformable Part

Enable this option to allow deformation of the part.

Fluid model

Specify a model for the fluid zone. You can choose from Generalized Newtonian, Simplified
Viscoelastic, or Differential Viscoelastic.

Solid model

Specify whether the solid is being modeled as Elastic or Inelastic.

Mold model

Specify the type of model to use for the mold: Adiabatic, Fixed temperature, or Heat conduc-
tion.

Heat source per unit volume

For fluid or solid thermal cell zones, specify the heat source per unit volume. Using the drop-
down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

4.12.1.4.1. Mesh Superposition

4.12.1.4.1.1. Initial Displacement

Dx

Specify the X component of the initial displacement of the part.

Dy

Specify the Y component of the initial displacement of the part.

Dz

Specify the Z component of the initial displacement of the part.

4.12.1.4.2. Solid Motion

Activation

Enable or disable solid motion considerations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 855
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.12.1.4.2.1. Solid Translation Velocity

Vx

Specify a value for the X-component of the translational velocity of the solid motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

Vy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the translational velocity of the solid motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

Vz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the translational velocity of the solid motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

4.12.1.4.3. Mold Motion

Motion type

Specify the type of mold motion as Translation velocity imposed, Translation force imposed
or General velocity driven motion.

4.12.1.4.3.1. Mold Translational Velocity

Vx

Specify a value for the X-component of the translational velocity of the mold motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

Vy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the translational velocity of the mold motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

Vz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the translational velocity of the mold motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

4.12.1.4.3.2. Initial Velocity

Vx

Specify a value for the X-component of the initial velocity of the mold motion.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
856 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Vy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the initial velocity of the mold motion.

Vz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the initial velocity of the mold motion.

4.12.1.4.3.3. Mold Translation Force

Fx

Specify a value for the X-component of the translational force of the mold motion.

Fy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the translational force of the mold motion.

Fz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the translational force of the mold motion.

Mass of the mold

Specify a value for the mass of the mold: corresponding to the total mass of the mold and
of the moving part connected to the mold.

Limit mold motion

Indicate whether or not you want to apply a limit to the mold motion.

Max displacement

Specify a value for the maximum displacement. The value corresponds to the maximum
admissible displacement along the direction specified by the force. The mold motion will
continue until either the maximum displacement is reached, the specified time duration is
reached, or the solution diverges.

4.12.1.4.3.4. General Motion

4.12.1.4.3.4.1. Initial Displacement

Dx

Specify a value for the X-component of the initial displacement of the mold motion.

Dy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the initial displacement of the mold motion.

Dz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the initial displacement of the mold motion.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 857
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.12.1.4.3.4.2. Initial Rotation

Alpha [deg]

Specify a value for the initial rotation angle for the mold motion.

4.12.1.4.3.4.3. Point

Xo

Specify a value for the X-component of the point of local rotation.

Yo

Specify a value for the Y-component of the point of local rotation.

Zo

Specify a value for the Z-component of the point of local rotation.

4.12.1.4.3.4.4. Orientation

Dir-x

Specify a value for the X-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis. Note that
for 2D flows, the rotation axis is perpendicular to the XY plane.

Dir-y

Specify a value for the Y-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis. Note that
for 2D flows, the rotation axis is perpendicular to the XY plane.

Dir-z

Specify a value for the Z-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis. Note that
for 2D flows, the rotation axis is perpendicular to the XY plane.

4.12.1.4.3.4.5. Angular Velocity

Omega [rps]

Specify a value for the angular velocity for the general mold motion. Using the drop-down
menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient simulations only)

4.12.1.4.3.4.6. Translation Velocity

Vx

Specify a value for the X-component of the angular velocity. Using the drop-down menu,
you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient simulations only)

Vy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the angular velocity. Using the drop-down menu,
you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient simulations only)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
858 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Vz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the angular velocity. Using the drop-down menu,
you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient simulations only)

4.12.1.4.4. Volume Conservation

Activation

Specify the volume conservation as: Program controlled, User controlled, or Disabled

Initial fluid volume

Using the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value for the initial fluid volume, or a
valid expression (for transient simulations only)

Initial fluid volume info

The initial fluid volume conservation is dictated by the solver.

4.12.1.4.5. Inflation Pressure

Inflation Pressure

Specify a value for the inflation pressure, or keep the default value.

Time Dependency

Using the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

4.12.1.4.6. Normal Flow Rate

Volume Flow Rate

Specify the normal volume flow rate. Using the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant
value, or a valid expression (for transient or continuation simulations only)

4.12.1.4.7. Surface Heat Source

Option

Specify an optional heat source on the surface of the film.

Heat Flux

Specify a value for the constant heat flux on the surface of the film.

Heat Transfer Coefficient

Specify a value for the heat transfer coefficient for the convection heat flux on the surface of
the film. Using the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 859
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Convection Temperature

Specify a value for the heat transfer coefficient for the convection heat flux on the surface of
the film. Using the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

4.12.1.5. Fluid Cell Zone Properties

Fluid cell zone property settings for your simulation.

Type

Choose the type of cell zone, such as fluid, solid, porous media, moving mold, etc.

Zones

Select one or more zones to apply to this cell zone.

Fluid model

Specify a model for the fluid zone. You can choose from Generalized Newtonian, Simplified
Viscoelastic, or Differential Viscoelastic.

• The Generalized Newtonian model is described in Generalized Newtonian Flow.

• The Simplified Viscoelastic model is described in Simplified Viscoelastic Model.

• The Differential Viscoelastic model is described in Differential Viscoelastic Models.

• The Integral Viscoelastic model is described in Integral Viscoelastic Models.

Multiple Materials

Enable coextrusion modeling via transport of concentrations of different fluid materials.

Fluid material(s)

Select a fluid material for the cell zone.

4.12.1.5.1. Matrix Reinforcement for Fluid Cell Zones

Some manufacturing processes may consist of fluid materials that contain reinforcing media (for
example, fibers), embedded in a matrix. In such cases matrix reinforcement is available and can
be activated for fluid cell zones when you have:

• Transient flows

• 2D shell or 3D meshes

• Generalized Newtonian fluid model

• Lagrangian mesh deformation(s)

• No inlets or outlets defined

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
860 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

When using matrix reinforcement, note the additional material properties that can be found in
the material attached to the fluid cell zone (see Reinforcement Properties (p. 849)).

4.12.1.5.2. Foaming Properties for Fluid Cell Zones

Some manufacturing processes may consist of fluid materials that exhibit bubbling or foaming.
Such processes can only be modeled when you have:

• Generalized Newtonian fluid model

• No transient or VOF flows

• No 2D shells

• No multiple materials defined

If you want to extrude several fluids involving foaming, you must define one fluid cell zone per
fluid material, define the interface between these fluids, and eventually activate the foaming on
the cell zone where it exists.

When using foaming, note the additional material properties that can be found in the material
attached to the fluid cell zone (see Foaming Properties (p. 851))..

Activate

Enable this option to activate the foaming properties of the fluid cell zone.

Not Available

Displays a message describing when this feature is available.

Enable Freezing

Enable this option to freeze the bubble radius on some parts of your fluid domain. Freezing
the bubble radius in the die is common practice as foaming should not occur in a well tuned
extrusion die.

Freezing Zones

Select one or more zones where the bubble radius must be frozen.

4.12.1.6. Solid Cell Zone Properties

Allows you to set properties of your solid cell zones in your simulation, specifically any aspects of
the motion of the solid.

4.12.1.6.1. Solid Motion

Solid cell zone motion property settings for your simulation.

Activation

Enable or disable solid motion considerations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 861
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.12.1.6.1.1. Transport Velocity

Define the components of the solid's transport velocity.

Vx

Specify a value for the X-component of the translational velocity of the solid motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

Vy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the translational velocity of the solid motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

Vz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the translational velocity of the solid motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

4.12.1.6.2. Solid Deformation

Solid cell zone deformation settings for your simulation.

Update coordinates

When this option is disabled, coordinates of the solid mesh will not be updated during de-
formation.

4.12.1.7. Porous Cell Zone Properties

Allows you to set the properties of the porous media in your simulation.

4.12.1.7.1. Porous Media

For a porous media cell zone, describe the nature of the porous media in the simulation.

Void fraction

Specify a value for the void fraction of the porous media.

Mode

Choose how to specify the porosity. For instance, as a scalar or tensor.

Permeability

Specify a value for the scalar permeability.

4.12.1.7.1.1. Tensor Permeability

Specify the tensor (non-scalar) properties for the porous media definition.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
862 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Pxx

Specify the positive-definite X-X Cartesian components of the tensor permeability.

Pxy

Specify the positive-definite X-Y Cartesian components of the tensor permeability.

Pxz

Specify the positive-definite X-Z Cartesian components of the tensor permeability.

Pyy

Specify the positive-definite Y-Y Cartesian components of the tensor permeability.

Pyz

Specify the positive-definite Y-Z Cartesian components of the tensor permeability.

Pzz

Specify the positive-definite Z-Z Cartesian components of the tensor permeability.

4.12.1.8. Fixed Mold Cell Zone Properties

Allows you to specify the properties of the fixed mold for your simulation.

Zone

Specify the zone to be designated as the fixed mold.

4.12.1.9. Moving Mold Zone Properties

Allows you to set the properties of any moving mold cell zones in your simulation.

4.12.1.9.1. Mold Body Side

For a moving mold cell zone, describe the characteristics of the mold body.

Flip Darts Orientation

Change the direction of the darts, as shown in the graphics window: whether they are
pointing toward the mold body or toward the mold cavity.

4.12.1.9.2. Mold Motion

For a moving mold cell zone, describe the motion of the cell zone assigned to the mold.

Motion type

Specify the type of mold motion as Translation velocity imposed, Translation force imposed
or General velocity driven motion.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 863
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.12.1.9.2.1. Translation Velocity

When translational velocity is imposed for a moving mold, define the properties of the mold's
translational velocity.

Vx

Specify a value for the X-component of the translational velocity of the mold motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

Vy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the translational velocity of the mold motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

Vz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the translational velocity of the mold motion. Using
the drop-down menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient
simulations only)

4.12.1.9.2.2. Initial Velocity

When translational force is imposed for a moving mold, define the properties of the mold's
initial velocity.

Vx

Specify a value for the X-component of the initial velocity of the mold motion.

Vy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the initial velocity of the mold motion.

Vz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the initial velocity of the mold motion.

4.12.1.9.2.3. Translation Force

When translational force is imposed for a moving mold, define the properties of the mold's
translational force.

Fx

Specify a value for the X-component of the translational force of the mold motion.

Fy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the translational force of the mold motion.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
864 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Fz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the translational force of the mold motion.

Mass of the mold

Specify a value for the mass of the mold: corresponding to the total mass of the mold and
of the moving part connected to the mold.

Limit mold motion

Indicate whether or not you want to apply a limit to the mold motion.

Max displacement

Specify a value for the maximum displacement. The value corresponds to the maximum
admissible displacement along the direction specified by the force. The mold motion will
continue until either the maximum displacement is reached, the specified time duration is
reached, or the solution diverges.

4.12.1.9.2.4. General Motion

When general velocity-driven motion is imposed for a moving mold, describe the properties
of the mold's general motion.

4.12.1.9.2.4.1. Initial Displacement

Define the properties of the mold's initial displacement.

Dx

Specify a value for the X-component of the initial displacement of the mold motion.

Dy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the initial displacement of the mold motion.

Dz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the initial displacement of the mold motion.

4.12.1.9.2.4.2. Initial Rotation

Define the properties of the mold's initial rotation.

Alpha [deg]

Specify a value for the initial rotation angle for the mold motion.

4.12.1.9.2.4.3. Local Rotation Axis Origin

Define the properties of the mold's initial rotation axis point of origin.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 865
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Xo

Specify a value for the X-component of the point of local rotation.

Yo

Specify a value for the Y-component of the point of local rotation.

Zo

Specify a value for the Z-component of the point of local rotation.

4.12.1.9.2.4.4. Local Rotation Axis Direction

Define the properties of the mold's initial rotation axis direction.

Dir-x

Specify a value for the X-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis. Note that
for 2D flows, the rotation axis is perpendicular to the XY plane.

Dir-y

Specify a value for the Y-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis. Note that
for 2D flows, the rotation axis is perpendicular to the XY plane.

Dir-z

Specify a value for the Z-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis. Note that
for 2D flows, the rotation axis is perpendicular to the XY plane.

4.12.1.9.2.4.5. Angular Velocity

Define the properties of the mold's angular velocity.

Omega [rps]

Specify a value for the angular velocity for the general mold motion. Using the drop-down
menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient simulations only)

4.12.1.9.2.4.6. Translation Velocity

Define the properties of the mold's translation velocity.

Vx

Specify a value for the X-component of the angular velocity. Using the drop-down menu,
you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient simulations only)

Vy

Specify a value for the Y-component of the angular velocity. Using the drop-down menu,
you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient simulations only)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
866 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Vz

Specify a value for the Z-component of the angular velocity. Using the drop-down menu,
you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for transient simulations only)

4.12.1.10. Moving Part Zone Properties

Allows you to set mesh superposition properties on any moving part cell zones in your simulation.

4.12.1.10.1. Mesh Superposition

For moving parts or restrictor cell zones, define the properties of the part motion.

4.12.1.10.1.1. Motion

For cell zones assigned as moving parts, describe the motion of any moving parts in your
simulation, as well as their initial location (an initial displacement and/or rotation may be applied
if the moving part location in the mesh file is not the actual initial location in the simulation).

4.12.1.10.1.1.1. Initial Displacement

Define the initial displacement of the moving part(s).

Dx

Specify the X component of the initial displacement of the moving part.

Dy

Specify the Y component of the initial displacement of the moving part.

Dz

Specify the Z component of the initial displacement of the moving part.

4.12.1.10.1.1.2. Initial Rotation

Define the initial rotation of the moving part(s).

Alpha [deg]

Specify a value for the initial rotation of the moving part.

4.12.1.10.1.1.3. Rotation Axis Origin

Define the origin's position of the moving part(s) rotation axis.

Xo

Specify the X coordinate of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

Yo

Specify the Y coordinate of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 867
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Zo

Specify the Z coordinate of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

4.12.1.10.1.1.4. Rotation Axis Direction

Define the direction of the moving part(s) rotation axis.

Dir-x

Specify the X-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

Dir-y

Specify the Y-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

Dir-z

Specify the Z-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

4.12.1.10.1.1.5. Angular Velocity

Define the angular velocity for the moving part(s).

Omega [rpm]

Specify the angular velocity of the moving part.

4.12.1.10.1.1.6. Translation Velocity

Define the translational velocity for the moving part(s).

Vx

Specify the X component of the translational velocity of the moving part.

Vy

Specify the Y component of the translational velocity of the moving part.

Vz

Specify the Z component of the translational velocity of the moving part.

4.12.1.10.1.1.7. Flow Condition

Define the flow conditions for the moving part(s).

Condition

Specify whether the flow condition for the cell zone is to be Stick or Slip.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
868 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Max. slipping stress

Specify the maximum slipping stress for the cell zone. Below this value, a full stick condition
is assumed; otherwise, a slip condition is modeled with this value (and no higher value)
applied.

4.12.1.10.1.1.8. Thermal Condition

Define the thermal conditions for the moving part(s).

Condition

Specify whether the thermal condition for the cell zone is to be Heat conduction or Tem-
perature distribution.

Tp

Specify the components of the temperature distribution. You can specify that the temper-
ature distribution is defined as a linear function of the coordinates: f() - A+Bx+Cy+Dz

Constant for the temperature distribution.

Constant for the temperature distribution.

Constant for the temperature distribution.

Constant for the temperature distribution.

4.12.1.11. Restrictor Zone Properties

Allows you to set mesh superposition options for restrictor cell zones in your simulation.

4.12.1.11.1. Mesh Superposition

For moving parts or restrictor cell zones, define the properties of the part motion.

4.12.1.11.1.1. Initial Displacement

Define the initial displacement of the part(s).

Dx

Specify the X component of the initial displacement of the part.

Dy

Specify the Y component of the initial displacement of the part.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 869
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Dz

Specify the Z component of the initial displacement of the part.

4.12.1.11.1.2. Motion

For cell zones assigned as restrictors, describe the initial displacement (or translation) and/or
rotation to locate the restrictor to its actual initial location.

4.12.1.11.1.2.1. Initial Displacement

Define the initial displacement of the moving part(s).

Dx

Specify the X component of the initial displacement of the moving part.

Dy

Specify the Y component of the initial displacement of the moving part.

Dz

Specify the Z component of the initial displacement of the moving part.

4.12.1.11.1.2.2. Initial Rotation

Define the initial rotation of the moving part(s).

Alpha [deg]

Specify a value for the initial rotation of the moving part.

4.12.1.11.1.2.3. Rotation Axis Origin

Define the origin's position of the moving part(s) rotation axis.

Xo

Specify the X coordinate of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

Yo

Specify the Y coordinate of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

Zo

Specify the Z coordinate of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

4.12.1.11.1.2.4. Rotation Axis Direction

Define the direction of the moving part(s) rotation axis.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
870 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Dir-x

Specify the X-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

Dir-y

Specify the Y-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

Dir-z

Specify the Z-component of the orientation of the local rotation axis for the moving part.

4.12.1.12. Fluid Boundary Zone Properties

Fluid boundary zone property settings for your simulation. Typically, you will change the following
properties:

Type

Specify the type of boundary (inlet, outlet, wall, etc.)

Boundary zone

Specify one or more surfaces to assign to this boundary.

Fluid boundary types consist of the following:

4.12.1.12.1. Inflow Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.2. Outflow Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.3. Wall Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.4. Symmetry Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.5. Free Surface Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.6. Extrudate Exit Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.7. Vent Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.8. Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.9. Zero Force Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.10. Porous Wall Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.11. Force Fluid Boundary Properties
4.12.1.12.12.Thermal Condition Properties
4.12.1.12.13. Species Condition Properties

4.12.1.12.1. Inflow Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.1.1. Inflow Properties

Properties related to the inflow fluid boundary condition.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 871
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Flow specification

Select the flow conditions at the inlet boundary. You can choose to impose a mass flow
rate, a volume flow rate, or a velocity.

Velocity profile

You can choose to pre-compute the velocity profile corresponding to the given flow rate
(fully developed), to compute it with the main flow (computed dynamically) or let the
program decide automatically (program controlled)

Incoming material

Specify the material that flows through the inlet.

Volume flow rate

Provide the flow rate in terms of the volume of material that flows through the inlet.

Mass flow rate

Provide the flow rate in terms of the mass of material that flows through the inlet.

CSV Filename

Specify the name and location of the comma separated file that contains the inflow velocity
profile.

Field Name

Specify the field variable from the CSV file that you want to apply to the inflow velocity
profile.

Normal velocity

Provide the velocity of material that flows through the inlet.

Allow non-zero tangential velocity

Deselecting this option forces the velocity to be strictly normal to the inlet.

4.12.1.12.1.1.1. Foaming Inflow Conditions

Bubble Radius

Specify a value for the radius of the foam bubbles. This value is usually the same as the
initial bubble radius in the fluid zone.

4.12.1.12.2. Outflow Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.2.1. Outflow Properties

Properties related to the outflow fluid boundary condition.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
872 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Flow specification

Select the flow conditions at the outlet boundary. You can choose to impose a mass flow
rate, a volume flow rate, or a pressure (default)

Volume flow rate

Provide the flow rate in terms of the volume of material that flows through the outlet.

Mass flow rate

Provide the flow rate in terms of the mass of material that flows through the outlet. you
can enter a constant value, or a valid expression (for volume of fluid, transient or continu-
ation simulations only)

Gauge static pressure

Provide the pressure that you want to impose at the outlet. That pressure will determine
the actual flow rate if pressure is imposed at inlet(s) or the level of pressure in the die if
flow rate is imposed at inlet(s)

CSV Filename

Specify the name and location of the comma separated file that contains the outflow velocity
profile.

Field Name

Specify the field variable from the CSV file that you want to apply to the outflow velocity
profile.

Normal velocity

Provide the velocity of material that flows through the outlet.

Allow non-zero tangential velocity

Deselecting this option forces the velocity to be strictly normal to the outlet.

4.12.1.12.3. Wall Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.3.1. Wall Properties

Properties related to the wall fluid boundary condition.

For more information, see Boundary Conditions in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Slip specification

Select the flow conditions at the wall boundary. You can choose whether to impose a zero
velocity (no slip), a friction force (partial slip), or no friction (free slip)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 873
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Wall velocity

Indicate whether the wall boundary is a stationary wall, or a moving wall with an associated
velocity.

Slip model

For slip conditions, specify how the shear force is calculated with respect to the tangential
relative velocity.

Friction coefficient (Navier)

Specify the friction coefficient for the Navier law slip conditions.

Friction coefficient (Navier)

Specify the friction coefficient for the Generalized Navier law slip conditions.

Scaling factor (Generalized Navier)

Specify the scaling factor for the Generalized Navier law slip conditions.

Exponent (Generalized Navier)

Specify the exponent for the Generalized Navier law slip conditions.

First friction coefficient

Specify the first friction coefficient for the slip conditions.

Second friction coefficient

Specify the second friction coefficient for the slip conditions.

Friction coefficient (Asymptotic)

Specify the friction coefficient for the asymptotic slip conditions.

Scaling factor

A scaling factor with the dimensions of the velocity. It affects the slope of the slip-velocity
curve.

Critical stress

The critical force density at which the friction coefficient changes. When this stress is ex-
ceeded, the second friction component is used.

First Friction Coefficient

Specify the first friction coefficient for the generalized threshold law slip conditions.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
874 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

First Scaling Factor

Specify the first scaling factor for the generalized threshold law slip conditions. This scaling
factor has the dimensions of the velocity, and it affects the slope of the first part the slip-
velocity curve.

Second Friction Coefficient

Specify the second friction coefficient for the generalized threshold law slip conditions.

Second Scaling Factor

Specify the second scaling factor for the generalized threshold law slip conditions. This
scaling factor has the dimensions of the velocity, and it affects the slope of the second part
the slip-velocity curve.

Exponent

Specify the exponent for the generalized threshold law slip conditions.

Temperature dependence

Specify whether the thermal dependency is a constant, or it obeys a first-order approximation

of the Arrhenius law, or it obeys the Arrhenius law.

Activation energy ratio

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference temperature

A reference temperature for which the thermal dependency function H(T) is 1.

Pressure dependence

Specify the wall pressure dependency as either exponential or linear.

Alpha

Specify a value for the linear pressure dependency.

Beta

Specify a value for the exponential pressure dependency.

4.12.1.12.3.1.1. First Point of Axis

Define the axis of rotation by specifying the coordinates for the first of two points.

X1

Specify the X component of the rotation axis for the first point.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 875
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Y1

Specify the Y component of the rotation axis for the first point.

Z1

Specify the Z component of the rotation axis for the first point.

4.12.1.12.3.1.2. Second Point of Axis

Define the axis of rotation by specifying the coordinates for the second of two points.

X2

Specify the X component of the rotation axis for the second point.

Y2

Specify the Y component of the rotation axis for the second point.

Z2

Specify the Z component of the rotation axis for the second point.

4.12.1.12.3.1.3. Angular Velocity

Represents the angular velocity for the rotating wall.

Omega [rad/s]

Specify the magnitude of the angular velocity at which the wall is rotating about the axis
defined by the two points Pt1 and Pt2.

4.12.1.12.3.1.4. Translation Velocity

Represents the translational velocity for the wall boundary.

Vx

Specify the X component of the translational velocity for the wall boundary.

Vy

Specify the Y component of the translational velocity for the wall boundary.

Vz

Specify the Z component of the translational velocity for the wall boundary.

4.12.1.12.4. Symmetry Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.4.1. Symmetry Properties

Properties related to the symmetry fluid boundary condition.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
876 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Plane of symmetry

Specify the type of symmetry plane as either normal in the X, Y, or Z direction, or in an ar-
bitrary normal direction.

Nx

Specify the X value for the arbitrary normal direction of the symmetry plane.

Ny

Specify the Y value for the arbitrary normal direction of the symmetry plane.

Nz

Specify the Z value for the arbitrary normal direction of the symmetry plane.

4.12.1.12.5. Free Surface Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.5.1. Free Surface Properties

Properties related to the free surface fluid boundary condition.

Fixed part

Specify one or more surfaces to which the free surface is attached/fixed.

Gauge Pressure

Specify the pressure applied on the free surface.

Direction of Displacement

Although not recommended in general cases, the direction of displacement of the free
surface can be constrained in some circumstances (to better control the mesh deformation,
for example)

4.12.1.12.6. Extrudate Exit Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.6.1. Extrudate Exit Properties

Properties related to the extrudate exit fluid boundary condition.

Fixed edges of extrudate exit

Specify whether to fix all edges of the free-jet exit in the frame of a die lip shape design,
to fix none of the edges, or to specify your own surfaces.

Free surfaces with fixed edges

Specify the applicable surfaces.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 877
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Flow specification

Specify the flow conditions at the free-jet exit. You can choose to impose a take-up force,
a take-up velocity or a take-up force per unit area when the extrudate is pulled by the ex-
trusion line. Take-up force(velocity) if the force(velocity) applied at the end of the free-jet
to reach an extrusion speed. It can been seen as a model simulating the rolls or transport-
ation belt of the extrusion line.

Take-up force per unit area

Specify a value for the take-up force per unit area.

4.12.1.12.6.1.1. Take Up Velocity

The take-up velocity is the velocity applied at the end of the extrudate to reach an extrusion
speed. It can been seen as a model simulating the rolls or transportation belt of the extrusion
line.

Vx

Specify the X component of the take-up velocity.

Vy

Specify the Y component of the take-up velocity.

Vz

Specify the Z component of the take-up velocity.

4.12.1.12.6.1.2. Take Up Force

The take-up force is the force applied at the end of the extrudate to reach an extrusion speed.
It can been seen as a model simulating the rolls or transportation belt of the extrusion line.

Fx

Specify the X component of the take-up force.

Fy

Specify the Y component of the take-up force.

Fz

Specify the Z component of the take-up force.

4.12.1.12.7. Vent Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.7.1. Vent Properties

Properties related to the vent fluid boundary condition.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
878 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Gauge static pressure

Specify the pressure applied on the vent.

Allow non-zero tangential velocity

Deselecting this option forces the velocity to be strictly normal to the vent.

4.12.1.12.8. Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.8.1. Zero Velocity Fluid Boundary Properties

Properties related to the zero-velocity fluid boundary condition.

Type

Specify the type of boundary (inlet, outlet, wall, etc.)

Boundary zone

Specify one or more surfaces to assign to this boundary.

4.12.1.12.9. Zero Force Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.9.1. Zero Force Fluid Boundary Properties

Properties related to the zero-force fluid boundary condition.

Type

Specify the type of boundary (inlet, outlet, wall, etc.)

Boundary zone

Specify one or more surfaces to assign to this boundary.

4.12.1.12.10. Porous Wall Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.10.1. Porous Wall Properties

Properties related to the porous wall fluid boundary condition.

Option

Indicate how you would like to calculate the normal force on the porous boundary: using
the linear law, the threshold law, or the asymptotic law.

Permeability

Specify the permeability for the linear law.

First permeability

Specify a value for the first permeability for the threshold law.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 879
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Second permeability

Specify a value for the second permeability for the threshold law.

Critical stress

Specify a value for the critical force density for the threshold law.

Permeability

Specify a value for the permeability using the asymptotic law.

Scaling factor

Specify a value for the scaling factor.

Temperature dependence

Choose how the temperature dependency is managed. You can choose one, or either of
the Arrhenius laws.

Activation energy ratio

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference temperature

A reference temperature for which the thermal dependency function H(T) is 1.

4.12.1.12.11. Force Fluid Boundary Properties

4.12.1.12.11.1. Force Properties

Properties related to the force fluid boundary condition.

Fx

Specify the X component of the force.

Fy

Specify the Y component of the force.

Fz

Specify the Z component of the force.

4.12.1.12.12. Thermal Condition Properties

Thermal considerations for your simulation. When temperature effects are included in your simu-
lation, each of the fluid boundary conditions will have Thermal Condition properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
880 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Option

Specify the thermal conditions at this wall boundary. You can choose an insulated wall, or
impose a heat flux (constant and/or convective), or impose the temperature of the wall, and
provide the parameters of the selected energy boundary condition.

Temperature

Specify the temperature at the boundary.

Heat flux

Specify the heat flux that is independent of temperature. This heat flux is constant on the
whole boundary.

Heat transfer coefficient

Specify the heat convection coefficient. The convection heat flux will be evaluated at a given
location of the boundary by multiplying the difference between the calculated local temper-
ature and the reference temperature by the convection coefficient. Using the drop-down
menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

Convection temperature

Specify the heat convection temperature at the boundary. Using the drop-down menu, you
can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

CSV Filename

Specify the name and location of the CSV file containing the temperature-related data.

Field Name

Identifies the temperature-related data to be loaded from the specified CSV file.

4.12.1.12.13. Species Condition Properties

Species considerations for your simulation. When species transport is included in your simulation,
each of the fluid boundary conditions will have Species Condition properties.

Species Name

List the species for fluid boundary conditions to be specified.

Option

Select the transport condition for species on the boundary condition. By default, the species
option is specified as Species imposed for inflow boundaries, Free for outflow, extrudate exit,
and vent boundaries, symmetry for the symmetry boundary, and insulated for all other con-
ditions.

CSV File

When Species profile is selected for the option, specify the CSV File for the species profile.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 881
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Species Value

Specify the species value to be imposed.

Flux Value

Specify a constant flux value to impose on the entire boundary (natural boundary condition)

Transfer Coefficient

Specify the value of the species transfer coefficient for convection on the entire boundary
(natural boundary condition)

Reference Species

Specifies the reference species for convection on the whole boundary.

4.12.1.13. Solid Boundary Zone Properties

Solid boundary zone property settings for your simulation.

Boundary Zone

Specify one or more surfaces to assign to this boundary.

Type

Choose the type of solid boundary zone as Fixed, Free, Symmetry, Normal Displacement, Normal
Force Density, Cartesian Displacement, or Force.

4.12.1.13.1. Normal Displacement Condition

Type

Specify the normal displacement of the solid as constant or by importing a displacement

profile.

Normal Displacement

Specify the normal displacement of the solid.

CSV File

Specify the name and location of the CSV file containing the displacement-related data.

Field Name

Identifies the displacement-related data to be loaded from the specified CSV file.

Allow Non-Zero Tangential Displacement

Deselecting this option forces the displacement to be strictly tangential to the solid.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
882 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Normal Displacement Condition

Specify the normal displacement of a boundary of an elastic solid.

4.12.1.13.2. Normal Force Density Condition

Normal Force Density

Specify the normal force density applied on the solid surface.

Allow Non-Zero Tangential Displacement

Deselecting this option forces the displacement to be strictly tangential to the solid.

4.12.1.13.3. Cartesian Displacement Condition

Specify the Cartesian coordinates for the solid displacement.

4.12.1.13.3.1. First Point of Axis

Define the axis of rotation by specifying the coordinates for the first of two points.

X1

Specify the X component of the rotation axis for the first point.

Y1

Specify the y component of the rotation axis for the first point.

Z1

Specify the Z component of the rotation axis for the first point.

4.12.1.13.3.2. Second Point of Axis

Define the axis of rotation by specifying the coordinates for the second of two points.

X2

Specify the X component of the rotation axis for the second point.

Y2

Specify the Y component of the rotation axis for the second point.

Z2

Specify the Z component of the rotation axis for the second point.

4.12.1.13.3.3. Angular Displacement

Represents the angular displacement for the rotating solid.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 883
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Angular Displacement

Specify the angular displacement at which the solid is rotating about the axis defined by
the two points Pt1 and Pt2.

4.12.1.13.3.4. Translation Displacement

Tx

Specify the x-component of displacement of the solid due to translation.

Ty

Specify the y-component of displacement of the solid due to translation.

Tz

Specify the z-component of displacement of the solid due to translation.

4.12.1.13.4. Force Condition

Fx

Specify the x-component of force acting on the solid surface as constant or using an expression.

Fy

Specify the y-component of force acting on the solid surface as constant or using an expression.

Fz

Specify the z-component of force acting on the solid surface as constant or using an expression.

4.12.1.13.5. Thermal Condition

Thermal considerations for your solid boundary.

For additional information, see Heat Flux Boundary Conditions in the Polyflow User's Guide.

Option

Specify the thermal conditions at this wall boundary. You can choose an insulated wall, or
impose a heat flux (constant and/or convective), or impose the temperature of the wall, and
provide the parameters of the selected energy boundary condition.

Temperature

Specify the temperature at the boundary.

Heat flux

Specify the heat flux that is independent of temperature. This heat flux is constant on the
whole boundary.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
884 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Heat transfer coefficient

Specify the heat convection coefficient. The convection heat flux will be evaluated at a given
location of the boundary by multiplying the difference between the calculated local temper-
ature and the reference temperature by the convection coefficient. Using the drop-down
menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

Convection temperature

Specify the heat convection temperature at the boundary. Using the drop-down menu, you
can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

CSV Filename

Specify the name and location of the CSV file containing the temperature-related data.

Field Name

Identifies the temperature-related data to be loaded from the specified CSV file.

4.12.1.14. Porous Boundary Zone Properties

Porous boundary zone property settings for your simulation.

Type

Specify the type of porous boundary (pressure or velocity)

Boundary zone

Specify one or more surfaces to assign to this boundary.

4.12.1.14.1. Pressure Condition

Pressure-related conditions for the porous boundary zone. A classical boundary condition for
porous media simulation is pressure imposed. The pressure difference between inlet and outlet
creates the flow of fluid through the porous medium.

Specify the pressure at the porous boundary.

4.12.1.14.2. Normal Velocity Condition

Normal velocity-related conditions for the porous boundary zone. Another classical boundary
condition for porous media simulation is normal velocity imposed. The porous media does not
allow tangential velocity at boundaries.

Vn

Specify the velocity normal to the porous boundary.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 885
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.12.1.14.3. Thermal Condition

Thermal considerations for your simulation.

Option

Specify the thermal conditions at this wall boundary. You can choose an insulated wall, or
impose a heat flux (constant and/or convective), or impose the temperature of the wall, and
provide the parameters of the selected energy boundary condition.

Temperature

Specify the temperature at the boundary.

Heat flux

Specify the heat flux that is independent of temperature. This heat flux is constant on the
whole boundary.

Heat transfer coefficient

Specify the heat convection coefficient. The convection heat flux will be evaluated at a given
location of the boundary by multiplying the difference between the calculated local temper-
ature and the reference temperature by the convection coefficient. Using the drop-down
menu, you can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

Convection temperature

Specify the heat convection temperature at the boundary. Using the drop-down menu, you
can enter a constant value, or a valid expression.

CSV Filename

Specify the name and location of the CSV file containing the temperature-related data.

Field Name

Identifies the temperature-related data to be loaded from the specified CSV file.

4.12.1.15. Mold Boundary Zone Properties

Mold boundary zone property settings for your simulation.

Boundary Zone

Specify one or more surfaces to assign to this boundary.

Type

Choose the type of boundary zone for the mold as Fixed, Free, Symmetry, Normal Displacement,
Normal Force Density, or Contact with Fluid.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
886 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

4.12.1.15.1. Normal Displacement Condition

Specify the normal displacement condition for the mold.

Normal Displacement

Specify the displacement of the mold normal to the surface.

Allow Non-Zero Tangential Displacement

Deselecting this option forces the displacement to be strictly tangential to the mold.

4.12.1.15.2. Normal Force Density Condition

Normal Force Density

Specify the normal force density of the boundary on the mold surface.

Allow Non-Zero Tangential Displacement

Deselecting this option forces the displacement to be strictly tangential to the mold.

4.12.1.15.3. Thermal Condition

Temperature

Specify the imposed temperature at this boundary.

Field Name

Enter the name found in the CSV File for the temperature profile.

CSV File

Click the Load Temperature Profile button to select the CSV file for the temperature profile.

Option

Specify the thermal conditions at this mold boundary. You can choose an insulated wall, or
impose a heat flux (constant and/or convective), or impose the temperature of the wall, and
provide the parameters of the selected energy boundary condition.

4.12.1.16. Part Boundary Zone Properties

Part boundary zone property settings for your simulation.

Boundary Zone

Specify one or more surfaces to assign to this boundary.

Type

Choose the type of boundary zone for the part as Fixed, Free, Symmetry, Normal Displacement,
Normal Force Density, or Immersed in Fluid.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 887
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.12.1.16.1. Normal Displacement Condition

Normal Displacement

Specify the displacement of the part normal to the surface.

Allow Non-Zero Tangential Displacement

Deselecting this option forces the displacement to be strictly tangential to the part.

4.12.1.16.2. Normal Force Density Condition

Normal Force Density

Specify the normal force density of the boundary on the part surface.

Allow Non-Zero Tangential Displacement

Deselecting this option forces the displacement to be strictly tangential to the part.

4.12.1.17. Contact Boundary Zone Properties

The workspace can detect contact between a free surface and a wall that occurs over time. The
wall is typically a mold for blow molding and thermoforming simulations, although the contact
detection feature can be applied to other processes. The contact detection algorithm is applicable
only for time-dependent problems. For more details, see Working of Contact Detection.

The following are contact boundary zone property settings for your simulation.

Fluid

Specify the fluid cell zone involved with the contact boundary.

Fluid zone of contact

Specify one or more surfaces that is adjacent to the fluid side of the contact boundary.

Mold

Specify the mold cell zone involved with the contact boundary.

Mold zone of contact

Specify one or more surfaces that is adjacent to the mold side of the contact boundary.

4.12.1.17.1. Contact Condition

It sometimes necessary to handle the contact between a free surface and a wall that occurs over
time. The wall is typically a mold for blow molding and thermoforming simulations, although the
contact detection feature can be applied to other processes. After a free surface and wall have
come into contact, it is possible to simulate their detachment (that is, contact release). Contact
release typically takes place when the motion of a mold is reversed, or when the forming pressure
results in the material being pulled away from a mold.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
888 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Allow contact release

Choose whether or not to allow the simulation of releasing the contact, for example, when
the motion of a mold is reversed, or when the material is pulled away from a mold

Adhesion force per unit area

Specify a value for the adhesion force, dependant on the deformed melt and the material of
the plug.

Heat transfer coefficient

Specify a value for the heat transfer coefficient.

Slipping coefficient

Specify a value for the slipping coefficient. If the slip coefficient and the penalty coefficient
have the same value, then it is assumed that the fluid sticks to the mold when it comes into
contact. Full slippage at the contact boundary is assumed if the slip coefficient is zero.

Penalty coefficient

Specify a value for the penalty coefficient, which enforces the condition that the fluid velocity
must be equal to the wall velocity in the normal direction.

Darts are pointing to

Determine the direction of the contact, using darts in the graphics window: whether they are
pointing toward the mold body or toward the mold cavity.

4.12.1.17.1.1. Heat Transfer Coefficient vs Contact Time

The following are temperature-dependant properties related to contact detection. In some

cases, it is necessary to make the heat transfer coefficient to vary to model more realistically
the actual heat exchange with the solid. Indeed, the cooling of the material in contact with
the solid usually decreases the global heat conductivity at the interface. This change of the
transfer coefficient can be modeled via a function of the contact time.

Activation

Enables heat transfer coefficient dependency upon contact time.

4.12.1.17.1.1.1. Dependency Function

The following allow you to determine the form and function of the heat transfer dependency.
The dependency function allows to define the way the heat transfer coefficient varies as a
function of the contact time.

Function

Specify the type of dependency function to use: either Ramp or Smoothed ramp. Start_ct
must be lower than End_ct and Fct(start_ct) must be different from Fct(end_ct).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 889
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Field

Displays the contact time.

Start_ct

Specify the x-component of the first point of the (smoothed) ramp dependency function.

Fct(start_ct)

Specify the y-component of the first point of the (smoothed) ramp dependency function.

End_ct

Specify the x-component of the second point of the (smoothed) ramp dependency function.

Fct(end_ct)

Specify the y-component of the second point of the (smoothed) ramp dependency function.

4.12.1.18. Interface Boundary Zone Properties

Interface boundary zone property settings for your simulation.

Conformal Interface

Enable this option if the interface is conformal, that is, the two cell zones share the same mesh
nodes along the interface.

Type

Specify the type of interface such as Fluid-Solid, Fluid-Fluid, Solid-Solid, Fluid-Porous and Solid-
Porous.

Interface Zone

Select the zone(s) that represents the conformal interface.

Cell Zone 1

Specify the cell zone on the first side of the (non-conformal) interface.

Boundary Zone 1

Specify the boundary of cell zone 1 that participates in the (non-conformal) interface.

Cell Zone 2

Specify the cell zone on the second side of the (non-conformal) interface.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
890 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Boundary Zone 2

Specify the boundary of cell zone 2 that participates in the (non-conformal) interface

Interface Geometries Match

If interface geometries match, all nodes of both boundaries must be part of the interface. Do
not select if boundaries do not fully overlap.

Momentum Transfer

Choose the way momentum is transferred through the interface, such as Program controlled,
Bidirectional, Unidirectional, Complementary, or Filtered. Bidirectional means that constraints
are written from the primary side to the secondary side and inversely. Unidirectional means
that constraints are written from the primary side to the secondary side only. Complementary
means that constraints are created from the secondary side to the primary side only if necessary
to complement the ones written from the primary to the secondary side. Filtered means that
a heuristic is used to limit the number of constraints to the necessary.

Thermal Transfer

Choose the way thermal information is transferred through the interface, such as Program
controlled, Bidirectional, Unidirectional, Complementary, or Filtered. Bidirectional means that
constraints are written from the primary side to the secondary side and inversely. Unidirectional
means that constraints are written from the primary side to the secondary side only. Comple-
mentary means that constraints are created from the secondary side to the primary side only
if necessary to complement the ones written from the primary to the secondary side. Filtered
means that a heuristic is used to limit the number of constraints to the necessary.

Species Transfer

Choose the way species information is transferred through the interface, such as Program
controlled, Bidirectional, Unidirectional, Complementary, or Filtered. Bidirectional means that
constraints are written from the primary side to the secondary side and inversely. Unidirectional
means that constraints are written from the primary side to the secondary side only. Comple-
mentary means that constraints are created from the secondary side to the primary side only
if necessary to complement the ones written from the primary to the secondary side. Filtered
means that a heuristic is used to limit the number of constraints to the necessary.

Spreading Factor

Do not change this parameter unless requested by customer support.

Thermal Smoothing Factor

Do not change this parameter unless requested by customer support.

Species Smoothing Factor

Sets the numerical diffusivity included within the connected boundaries to avoid non-physical
behavior. Do not change this parameter unless requested by customer support.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 891
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Primary Side

Select the primary side of the interface for the creation of constraints. It ideally should be the
side with the coarser mesh.

Face Extension Factor

Specify a value for the face extension factor that defines the expansion of each face of the
source boundary to detect the corresponding face on the target boundary. The default value
is set according to the dimensions of the mesh, and it is generally not needed to modify it.

Normal Tolerance Factor

Specify a value for the geometrical tolerance dictating the search for correspondent nodes
across the interface.

Typical Shear Rate

Specify a value for a typical shear-rate in the modelled flow. It will be used to tune the mo-
mentum transfer.

Typical Temperature

Specify a value for a typical temperature in the model. It will be used to tune the thermal
transfer.

4.12.1.19. Fluid-Fluid Interface Boundary Zone Properties

Fluid-fluid interface boundary zone property settings for your simulation.

Conformal Interface

Enable this option if the interface is conformal, that is, the two cell zones share the same mesh
nodes along the interface.

Type

Specify the type of interface such as Fluid-Solid, Fluid-Fluid, Solid-Solid, Fluid-Porous and Solid-
Porous.

Interface Zone

Select the zone(s) that represents the conformal interface.

Cell Zone 1

Specify the cell zone on the first side of the (non-conformal) interface.

Boundary Zone 1

Specify the boundary of cell zone 1 that participates in the (non-conformal) interface.

Cell Zone 2

Specify the cell zone on the second side of the (non-conformal) interface.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
892 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Boundary Zone 2

Specify the boundary of cell zone 2 that participates in the (non-conformal) interface

Intersection Control

Interface Geometries Match

If interface geometries match, all nodes of both boundaries must be part of the interface.
Do not select if boundaries do not fully overlap.

Momentum Transfer

Choose the way momentum is transferred through the interface, such as Program controlled,
Bidirectional, Unidirectional, Complementary, or Filtered. Bidirectional means that constraints
are written from the primary side to the secondary side and inversely. Unidirectional means
that constraints are written from the primary side to the secondary side only. Complementary
means that constraints are created from the secondary side to the primary side only if ne-
cessary to complement the ones written from the primary to the secondary side. Filtered
means that a heuristic is used to limit the number of constraints to the necessary.

Thermal Transfer

Choose the way thermal information is transferred through the interface, such as Program
controlled, Bidirectional, Unidirectional, Complementary, or Filtered. Bidirectional means
that constraints are written from the primary side to the secondary side and inversely. Uni-
directional means that constraints are written from the primary side to the secondary side
only. Complementary means that constraints are created from the secondary side to the
primary side only if necessary to complement the ones written from the primary to the
secondary side. Filtered means that a heuristic is used to limit the number of constraints
to the necessary.

Species Transfer

Choose the way species information is transferred through the interface, such as Program
controlled, Bidirectional, Unidirectional, Complementary, or Filtered. Bidirectional means
that constraints are written from the primary side to the secondary side and inversely. Uni-
directional means that constraints are written from the primary side to the secondary side
only. Complementary means that constraints are created from the secondary side to the
primary side only if necessary to complement the ones written from the primary to the
secondary side. Filtered means that a heuristic is used to limit the number of constraints
to the necessary.

Spreading Factor

Do not change this parameter unless requested by customer support.

Thermal Smoothing Factor

Do not change this parameter unless requested by customer support.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 893
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Species Smoothing Factor

Sets the numerical diffusivity included within the connected boundaries to avoid non-
physical behavior. Do not change this parameter unless requested by customer support.

Primary Side

Select the primary side of the interface for the creation of constraints. It ideally should be
the side with the coarser mesh.

Face Extension Factor

Specify a value for the face extension factor that defines the expansion of each face of the
source boundary to detect the corresponding face on the target boundary. The default
value is set according to the dimensions of the mesh, and it is generally not needed to
modify it.

Normal Tolerance Factor

Specify a value for the geometrical tolerance dictating the search for correspondent nodes
across the interface.

Typical Shear Rate

Specify a value for a typical shear-rate in the modelled flow. It will be used to tune the
momentum transfer.

Typical Temperature

Specify a value for a typical temperature in the model. It will be used to tune the thermal
transfer.

Fixed Part

For conformal fluid-fluid interfaces, specify the fixed part from the list of adjacent boundaries.

Moving Interface

For conformal fluid-fluid interfaces, indicate whether the interface is in motion or not.

Allow Non-Zero Normal Velocity

Deselecting this option forces the normal velocity to be null along the interface.

Allow Non-Zero Tangential Velocity

Deselecting this option forces the tangential velocity to be null along the interface.

4.12.1.20. Fluid-Solid Interface Boundary Zone Properties

Fluid-solid interface boundary zone property settings for your simulation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
894 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Conformal Interface

Enable this option if the interface is conformal, that is, the two cell zones share the same mesh
nodes along the interface.

Type

Specify the type of interface such as Fluid-Solid, Fluid-Fluid, Solid-Solid, Fluid-Porous and Solid-
Porous.

Interface Zone

Select the zone(s) that represents the conformal interface.

Cell Zone 1

Specify the cell zone on the first side of the (non-conformal) interface.

Boundary Zone 1

Specify the boundary of cell zone 1 that participates in the (non-conformal) interface.

Cell Zone 2

Specify the cell zone on the second side of the (non-conformal) interface.

Boundary Zone 2

Specify the boundary of cell zone 2 that participates in the (non-conformal) interface

Wall Condition

Slip specification

Select the flow conditions at the wall boundary. You can choose whether to impose a zero
velocity (no slip), a friction force (partial slip), or no friction (free slip)

Slip model

For slip conditions, specify how the shear force is calculated with respect to the tangential
relative velocity.

Friction coefficient

Specify the friction coefficient for the Navier law slip conditions.

Friction coefficient

Specify the friction coefficient for the Generalized Navier law slip conditions.

Scaling factor

Specify the scaling factor for the Generalized Navier law slip conditions.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 895
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Exponent

Specify the exponent for the Generalized Navier law slip conditions.

First Friction Coefficient

Specify the first friction coefficient for the slip conditions.

Second Friction Coefficient

Specify the second friction coefficient for the slip conditions.

Critical stress

The critical force density at which the friction coefficient changes. When this stress is ex-
ceeded, the second friction component is used.

First Friction Coefficient

Specify the first friction coefficient for the generalized threshold law slip conditions.

First Scaling factor

Specify the first scaling factor for the generalized threshold law slip conditions. This scaling
factor has the dimensions of the velocity, and it affects the slope of the first part the slip-
velocity curve.

Second Friction Coefficient

Specify the second friction coefficient for the generalized threshold law slip conditions.

Second Scaling factor

Specify the second scaling factor for the generalized threshold law slip conditions. This
scaling factor has the dimensions of the velocity, and it affects the slope of the second part
the slip-velocity curve.

Exponent

Specify the exponent for the generalized threshold law slip conditions.

Friction Coefficient

Specify the friction coefficient for the asymptotic slip conditions.

Scaling Factor

A scaling factor with the dimensions of the velocity. It affects the slope of the slip-velocity
curve.

Temperature Dependence

Specify whether the thermal dependency is a constant, or it obeys a first-order approximation

of the Arrhenius law, or it obeys the Arrhenius law.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
896 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Ea / R

Specify the ratio of the activation energy to the thermodynamic constant.

Reference Temperature

A reference temperature for which the thermal dependency function H(T) is 1.

Pressure Dependence

Specify the pressure dependency of the slip model along the interface as either exponential
or linear.

Alpha

Specify a value for the linear pressure dependency.

Beta

Specify a value for the exponential pressure dependency.

4.12.1.21. Guiding Device Boundary Zone Properties

Guiding device boundary zone property settings for your simulation.

Type

Specify the guiding device type as a Conveyor belt or a Single roller.

Enable Contact

This option is enabled by default and enables contact between the free surface and the guiding
device. When disabled, the guiding device will be deactivated without deleting the guiding
device boundary zone. Disabling this option can be useful as a starting point when setting up
a more complex case.

Point of Plane

Specifies the location of the conveyor belt plane.

Px

Specify the x-coordinate of the conveyor belt plane.

Py

Specify the y-coordinate of the conveyor belt plane.

Pz

Specify the z-coordinate of the conveyor belt plane.

Normal to Plane

Specify the normal to plane coordinates.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 897
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Nx

Specify the x-component of the normal direction to the conveyor belt plane.

Ny

Specify the y-component of the normal direction to the conveyor belt plane.

Nz

Specify the z-component of the normal direction to the conveyor belt plane.

Translational Velocity

Specify the velocity vector for the conveyor belt.

Vx

Specify a value for the x-component of the translational velocity of the conveyor belt.

Vy

Specify a value for the y-component of the translational velocity of the conveyor belt.

Vz

Specify a value for the z-component of the translational velocity of the conveyor belt.

Radius

Specify the radius of the conveyor roller.

Rotation-Axis Origin

Specify the coordinates of the rotation axis for the conveyor roller.

Xo

Specify the x-coordinate of the rotation-axis origin point.

Yo

Specify the y-coordinate of the rotation-axis origin point.

Zo

Specify the z-coordinate of the rotation-axis origin point.

Rotation-Axis Extremity

Specify the coordinates that define the extremities of the conveyor roller rotation axis.

Xe

Specify the x-coordinate for the rotation axis extremity.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
898 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Yo

Specify the y-coordinate for the rotation axis extremity.

Zo

Specify the z-coordinate for the rotation axis extremity.

Omega

Specify the angular velocity of the conveyor roller.

Contact Condition

Specify the contact conditions.

Free Surfaces

Specify the free surfaces that will be in contact with the guiding device.

Penetration Accuracy

Specify the penetration accuracy. If the penetration of a point into the guiding device is
greater than the penetration accuracy, the time step will be rejected. The calculation will
then be restarted from the previous time step with a smaller time-step increment. The default
value is set according to the dimensions of the mesh, and you will generally not need to
modify it.

Slipping Coefficient

Specify a value or an expression for the slipping coefficient. If the slip coefficient and penalty
coefficient have the same value and if that value is very large, then it is assumed that the
fluid sticks to the guiding device when it comes into contact. Full slippage at the contact
boundary is assumed if the slip coefficient is zero.

Penalty Coefficient

Specify a value or an expression for the penalty coefficient, which enforces the condition
that the fluid velocity must be equal to the guiding device velocity in the normal direction.

4.12.1.22. Assign Pressure Properties

Point-specific pressure property settings for your simulation.

Search Zone

Select the cell zone(s) in which the point closest to the coordinates provided below must be
located.

Pressure

Specify a value for the pressure that must be imposed at the desired point.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 899
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Specify a value for the x-coordinate of the desired point for the assigned pressure.

Specify a value for the y-coordinate of the desired point for the assigned pressure.

Specify a value for the z-coordinate of the desired point for the assigned pressure.

4.12.1.23. Assign Displacement Properties

Point-specific displacement property settings for your simulation.

4.12.1.23.1. Displacement
Specify the components to be fixed at a specified point and their fixed displacement values.

Search Zone

Select the cell zone(s) in which the point closest to the coordinates provided below must be
located.

Fix Dx

Enable this option to set a fixed displacement value for the x-coordinate of the solid at the
desired point.

Dx

Specify a value for the x-coordinate of the fixed displacement at the desired point.

Fix Dy

Enable this option to set a fixed displacement value for the y-coordinate of the solid at the
desired point.

Dy

Specify a value for the y-coordinate of the fixed displacement at the desired point.

Fix Dz

Enable this option to set a fixed displacement value for the z-coordinate of the solid at the
desired point.

Dz

Specify a value for the z-coordinate of the fixed displacement at the desired point.

4.12.1.23.2. Point
Specify the point where the fixed displacement will be applied

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
900 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Specify a value for the x-coordinate of the desired point for the assigned displacement.

Specify a value for the y-coordinate of the desired point for the assigned displacement.

Specify a value for the z-coordinate of the desired point for the assigned displacement.

4.12.1.24. Deformation Properties

In polymer extrusion simulations, you can specify the type of deformation to be applied to the ex-
trudate. To cope with the displacement of free surfaces, a local mesh deformation method must
be applied to the volume representing the extrudate. The purpose of a remeshing technique is to
relocate internal nodes according to the displacement of boundary nodes. Remeshing techniques
control mesh deformations in order to avoid unacceptable element shapes.

For polymer extrusion simulations that include a determination of the die lip shape, you can describe
how the die will be deformed in the simulation using a die deformation condition. The die deform-
ation condition is applied to a specific volume or body in the simulation that corresponds to the
die. The die deformation condition applies localized remeshing to the die volume in addition to
the extrudate, because the die shape is unknown beforehand and will be computed based on the
given extrudate shape. Remeshing must be applied to the extrudate as well, because only the exit
shape is known.

Mesh deformation methods include:

• Optimesh: The Optimesh algorithm is based on a "minimum energy" rule and belongs to
the family of elliptic remeshing rules and, as such, handles internal nodal displacements as
variables. Optimesh is often more robust because the angular deformation of each individual
element is under control of the remeshing rule.

For 3D extrusion problems, the domain is sliced in the direction of extrusion, generating a
series of 2D meshes on which the Optimesh rule can be applied.

• Program Controlled: Allow Fluent to choose the most appropriate remeshing technique
based on the specific nature of the simulation settings.

• Streamwise: The Streamwise algorithm assumes a regularity of the domain, which can be
seen as a series of mesh lines emitted from the die lip section.

Along these mesh lines, which can be on the boundary, on the interface between coextruded
fluids, or inside the domain, the streamwise method aligns the mesh with the local velocity
vector. The method is useful in situations where large isotropic deformations occur. A typical
example is 3D fiber spinning with large drawdown ratios.

• Elastic: This remeshing technique belongs to the family of elliptic remeshing schemes and
has the advantage of complete topological generality, since no regular organization of the
mesh is required.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 901
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

In the interior of the domain, a nonlinear small displacement pseudo-elastic problem is

solved in the deformed configuration and not on the original domain.

This technique should not be used when the extrudate is not maintained in the extrusion
direction by planes of symmetry, slipping surfaces, or rigid insert(s).

• Elastic with torsion control: This is a version of the Elastic method, but with a torsion factor
that adds a rotation stiffness with respect to the initial configuration. This avoids deforming
elements too much with respect to their initial shape.

Property settings for the deformation zones in your simulation.

Zones

Select the zones that belong to the same fluid cell zone where the deformation method should
be applied.

Type

Allows you to choose from a list of available deformation zones types.

Extrudate Deformation Method

Select the deformation method to use for the extrudate such as Planes, Optimesh-3D,
Streamwise, Elastic or Elastic with torsion control.

Die Deformation Method

Select the deformation method to use for the die such as Program controlled, Sliceable (semi-
structured) or Not sliceable (unstructured).

Inlet Section

Choose a boundary for the inlet section of the extrudate remeshing zone.

Outlet Section

Choose a boundary for the outlet section of the extrudate remeshing zone.

Inlet Section (Constant or Adaptive Die)

For constant or adaptive die sections, specify a boundary for the inlet section of the extrudate.

Outlet Section (Constant or Adaptive Die)

For constant or adaptive die sections, specify a boundary for the outlet section of the extrudate.

Free Displacement on Section

Allows you to choose a list of boundary zones where mesh deformation will be free (no con-
straints of any type)

No Displacement on Section

Allows you to choose a list of boundary zones where no mesh deformation will take place.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
902 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

4.12.1.25. Adaptive Remeshing Properties

The following are properties related to adaptive remeshing.

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to use adaptive meshing. By default, adaptive meshing is enabled (the
check box is checked). You may disable it by clearing the box; this can be useful for a preliminary
trial simulation. When enabled, additional properties are available.

Number of Steps

Indicate the number of time steps to use for adaptive meshing. A value of 1 indicates that ad-
aptive meshing will take place at each time step. Adaptive meshing is invoked after every se-
quence of N successful steps, by default N = 5. This is a recommended value as a good com-
promise between the need of best mesh quality (frequent adaptive meshing) and the necessity
of speeding up the calculation (less frequent adaptive meshing). For transient cases, the value
should preferably never be less than 4.

Maximum Number of Subdivisions

Specify the number of times a primitive element. That is, an element of the initial mesh, as
created in the mesh generator) can be subdivided recursively.

Adaptive Meshing at Start

Indicate whether or not to use adaptive meshing at the start of the calculations. That is, for
blow molding and thermoforming simulations that involve both contact and adaptive meshing,
you can specify that an additional adaptive meshing step is performed before the start of the
transient simulation. Adaptive meshing is not enabled at the start of the calculation, by default
the check box is cleared. It is assumed that the initial finite element mesh is of acceptable
quality, so that an initial adaption step is often not needed. If the initial mesh is of insufficient
quality, you may ask for an initial mesh adaption.

Conformalization

Indicate whether or not to use conformalization on the mesh. For 2D and shell meshes that use
the recursive subdivision technique, you can enable conformalization for the mesh. For shells
only, conformalization of elements is invoked by default. Adjacent elements are not always
subdivided up to the same level, and two smaller elements may be adjacent to a less-subdivided
element. A non-conformal situation is created where a middle mesh node may miss a contribution
from the adjacent large element. This is internally solved with appropriate constraints. Alternat-
ively, you can invoke mesh conformalization.

Triangulation

Indicate whether to use partial or full triangulation for the mesh. If Full triangulation is used,
when one element is selected for remeshing, the whole moving domain. That is, the domain
for which there are local criteria activated) will be remeshed. With big meshes, the cost of this
operation could be too high. Partial triangulation is when one element is selected for remeshing,
a zone defined upon the neighbors of this element will be remeshed (and not the entire mesh),
and is preferable for large meshes. By default, full triangulation is invoked, and is recommended
unless otherwise specified. Full or partial triangulation can be invoked, respectively depending

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 903
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

whether the adaptive meshing is applied on the entire fluid mesh or only on portions surround-
ing elements of bad quality.

Angle Conservation

Enables angle conservation on the border of the remeshed zone(s). A sequence of adaptive
meshing tends to erode sharp borders or edges of a fluid domain. It is especially visible on
convex borders. By default, angles are not preserved. Enable this option if you want angles
above a given value to be preserved and enter the value. The angle between two adjacent
boundary elements is defined as the angle between vectors normal to these elements.

Angle [deg]

Specify a value for the minimum angle that should be conserved.

Mapping

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to use mapping for the adaptive meshing. A mapping technique
is used that projects the nodes along the local normal to the free surface, since the
remeshing algorithm used for triangular / tetrahedral element generation builds a new
mesh on the basis of the old mesh, rather than the original geometry.

Planes of Symmetry Taken into Account

Indicate whether or not to account for symmetry planes. A specific mapping treatment is
applied in order to preserve planes of symmetry and not geometrically distort them. By
default, the option is not enabled and it is recommended unless otherwise specified.

Threshold Value

This field triggers the mapping of the nodes. The contact algorithm uses internal fields that
are named contact_field and are defined on the free surface. This field stores the contact
information for each node and initially has a value of either 0 or 1. If a node of the free
surface is in contact, the field value is 1, otherwise the value is 0. However, after a remeshing
step, the contact_field values must be interpolated onto the newly generated mesh. After
this interpolation, the contact_field values are no longer limited to being either 0 or 1, but
can be intermediate values. (For example, 0.3). If a node of the free surface has a contact_field
value greater than the threshold, the node is assumed to be in contact and will be mapped.
The default value of the threshold is 0.8.

Scaling Factor

This parameter is used to determine if a point on the free surface is in the vicinity of the
mold surface. The distance between the free surface point and the mold surface must be
less than typical_size*scaling_factor, where typical_size is the maximum size of a face (or a
segment in 2D) of the mold surface. By default, the threshold is set to 0.6.

Maximum Displacement Mode

Allows you to set the method for determining the maximum displacement of surface nodes
during the mapping stage of the adaptive meshing as either Program controlled or User
Value. It is the upper bound of the displacement applied to nodes that are mapped onto

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
904 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

the contact surface. By default, the value is Program Controlled. You can change this and
specify a User Value when prompted.

User Displacement

In order to avoid highly distorted elements in the layer of elements adjacent to the free
surface, the displacement of the mapped nodes is limited to this value. A good practice is
to define the maximum displacement as 10 to 25 percent of the minimum element size
imposed in the adaptive meshing setup. The default value is calculated from the typical
mesh size.

Penetration Tolerance

This parameter is used to provide a tolerance level for the distance between the free surface
and the mold surface. If a point on the free surface is located inside the mold at a distance
from the mold surface below this tolerance, the point will not be moved; otherwise the
position of the point is corrected. Three options are available: a value of max displacement
sets the penetration tolerance to be equivalent to the maximum displacement; a value of
penetration accuracy sets the penetration tolerance to be equivalent to the minimum of
the penetration accuracies; a value of user input allows you to provide your own value for
the tolerance.

User Value

Specify a value for the penetration tolerance, where it is recommended to keep the penet-
ration tolerance to be less than or equal to the penetration accuracy.

Criterion

Quality

Warning

Provides a message for defining a condition when activating an adaptive meshing cri-
terion.

Warning

Provides a message for activating an adaptive meshing criterion.

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to consider the condition on the mesh quality in order to trigger
adaptive meshing. You may disable it by clearing the box; this can be useful for a pre-
liminary trial simulation.

Quality

Specify a value for the expected quality of the mesh. A quality criterion decreasing from
1 (very good) down to 0 (very bad) is evaluated, and which incorporates geometric
features such as aspect ratio, internal angles, skewness and bending. Fluid elements
which do not match the required quality will be adapted. By default, a quality of 0.8 is
required.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 905
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Size

Specify a value for the expected element size of the mesh. Fluid elements which do not
match the assigned size will be adapted. A default value is evaluated as a fraction of
the overall geometric dimension of the mesh. It can be changed.

Contact

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to consider the condition on contact in order to trigger adaptive
meshing. Once a contact condition is enabled (the check box is checked) additional
properties are available and you may disable it by clearing the box; note that at least
one condition must be enabled.

Mold Surfaces of Contact

Select the contact zone(s) of the mold to consider for the present contact condition.

Method

Specify the method for the local criterion: distance, curvature, or angle and curvature.

Minimum Size

Specify the minimum size for newly created elements close to the mold boundary surface.
This is the minimum side length of newly created elements, necessary for preventing
the creation of a mesh that is too dense. By default, this parameter is assigned a value
that is of the order of a tenth of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Minimum Distance

Specify the minimum distance below which the minimum size is applied. This is the
distance between fluid zone and mold below which new fluid elements will be created
with the specified minimum size. By default, the minimum distance is set to 0.

Maximum Size

Specify the maximum size for newly created elements far from the mold boundary sur-
face. This is the maximum side length of newly created elements, necessary for prevent-
ing the creation of a mesh that is too coarse. By default, this parameter is assigned a
value that is of the order of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Maximum Distance

Specify the maximum distance beyond which the maximum size is applied. This is the
distance between fluid zone and mold beyond which new fluid elements will be created
with the specified maximum size. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is
of the order of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Fraction of Radius of Curvature

For the curvature method, this value is dimensionless, and its default value is 0.2. Suffi-
ciently close to the contact mold, element size will be a given fraction of the local radius

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
906 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

of curvature, unless it hits the minimum size as lower bound. The selected default value
of 0.2 suggests that about 5 fluid elements can be created for matching 1 radian (57
degrees) of a curved mold portion.

Typical Distance to Mold

For the curvature method, this value has the units of length, and is the typical size of
segments of the mesh. This is the distance between a fluid element and the mold below
which mesh refinement begins. It is important to anticipate the contact, for having
smaller elements before contact occurrence. By default, the value is a fraction of a typ-
ical geometric length of the input mesh.

Coefficient of Proportionality

For the curvature method, this value has units of length. This coefficient may be inter-
preted as the intended size of the fluid elements when the contact occurs along a flat
portion of the mold. For avoiding undesired interferences, either the Fraction of Radius
of Curvature or the Coefficient of Proportionality should vanish.

Tolerance

For the angle and curvature method, this value defines the tolerance for the contact.
This is the maximum distance you would ideally like between any node of the mold
and the nearest fluid element. This tolerance is used to locally calculate an ideal fluid
element size, in that it could approach the mold within the stated tolerance.

Critical Distance

For the angle and curvature method, this value has units of length, and is typically 10
percent of the typical size of the segments in the mesh. Note that a larger value results
in larger areas of the fluid where the elements are subdivided, which produces higher
element counts. On the other hand, if you choose a value that is too small, there may
not be sufficient meshing iterations to reduce the elements to an appropriate size. To
ensure that is not too small, you must account for the meshing frequency and the velocity
of the parison / preform / sheet. The default for this parameter is one percent of the
medium diagonal of the axis-aligned minimum box bounding the whole geometry. The
critical distance corresponds to an anticipation distance from which mold angles and
curvature will have a growing effect on the fluid mesh discretization. It is important to
anticipate the contact, for having smaller elements before contact occurrence.

Overlap

Enabled

Indicate whether or not to apply the current condition on overlapping parts for adaptive
meshing. When multiple conditions are defined, they may by enabled or disabled at
will. Once enabled, additional options are available.

Overlapping Parts

Select the overlapping part(s) that will be used for mesh adaption in the fluid zone.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 907
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Unrefinement Threshold

Specify the required threshold for local mesh unrefinement. A so-called inside function
(or overlapping function) is used to determine whether a fluid element is overlapped
by a restrictor or a moving part, or not. It then received the value 1 or 0, respectively.
For fluid elements far from the transition stripe, the function exhibits nearly no variation,
and they can be selected for unrefinement if the variation is below the threshold value.
By default, the threshold value is set to 0.01. The operating mode depends on the cell
selection method. For the cell selection method based on inside field variation: when
an element of the fluid zone is far enough from the border of the overlapping part.
That is, when the corresponding overlapping or inside field exhibits small or no variation),
the element can be selected for unrefinement. For the cell selection method based on
average inside field values: when an element of the fluid zone is far enough from the
overlapping part. That is, when the corresponding overlapping or inside field exhibits
small values), the element can be selected for unrefinement.

Refinement Threshold

Specify the required threshold for local mesh refinement. A so-called inside function (or
overlapping function) is used to determine whether a fluid element is overlapped by a
restrictor or a moving part, or not. It then received the value 1 or 0, respectively. For
fluid elements located near or in the transition stripe, the function exhibits variation,
and they can be selected for refinement if the variation is above the threshold value.
By default, the threshold value is set to 0.05. The operating mode depends on the cell
selection method. For the cell selection method based on inside field variation: when
an element of the fluid zone is close enough to the border of the overlapping part. That
is, when the corresponding overlapping or inside field exhibits large variation), the ele-
ment can be selected for refinement. For the cell selection method based on average
inside field values: when an element of the fluid zone is close enough to the overlapping
part or overlapped. That is, when the corresponding overlapping or inside field exhibits
large values), the element can be selected for refinement.

Cell Selection Method

Specify whether the cell selection method for refinement/unrefinement is based on the
variations or on the values of the overlapping or inside field. By default, the selection
method for refinement and unrefinement checks the Variation of inside field versus
both thresholds. Another method consists of checking the Average of inside field
versus both thresholds. The behavior differs since elements overlapped by the solid part
will also be refined.

Refinement Zone

Type

Specify the method in which you want to define the refinement zone: along boundaries,
box, or sphere. For 2D cases, the box and the sphere are respectively reduced to rectangle
and circle.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
908 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Along Boundaries

Boundary

Specify a boundary for the refinement zone. For moving zones, specify the free surface
on which you want to attach the moving zone.

Method

Specify the method of refinement along the boundary: distance, or curvature Specifying
the size is similar to contacts.

Minimum Size

Specify the minimum size for elements close to the mold boundary. This sets the min-
imum size for newly created elements close to the selected boundary. By default, this
parameter is assigned a value that is of the order of a tenth of the average edge length
in the input mesh.

Minimum Distance

Specify the minimum distance below which the minimum size is applied. This is the
distance between fluid points and selected boundaries below which new fluid elements
will be created with the specified minimum size. By default, the minimum distance is
set to 0.

Maximum Size

Specify the maximum size for elements far from the mold boundary. This sets the
maximum size for newly created elements beyond a given distance to the selected
boundary. By default, this parameter is assigned a value that is of the order of the average
edge length in the input mesh.

Maximum Distance

Specify the maximum distance beyond which the maximum size is applied. This is the
distance between fluid point and selected boundary beyond which new fluid elements
will be created with the specified maximum size. By default, this parameter is assigned
a value that is of the order of the average edge length in the input mesh.

Fraction of Radius of Curvature

For the curvature method, this value is dimensionless, and its default value is 0.2. Suffi-
ciently close to the selected boundary, element size will be a given fraction of the local
radius of curvature, unless it hits the minimum size as lower bound. The selected default
value of 0.2 suggests that about 5 fluid elements can be created for matching 1 rad
(57°) of a curved boundary portion.

Typical Distance to Boundary

For the curvature method, this value has the units of length. The typical depth of the
zone adjacent to the boundary where elements can be remeshed based on the local
curvature. By default, the value is a fraction of a typical geometric length of the input
mesh.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 909
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Coefficient of Proportionality

For the curvature method, this value has units of length. This coefficient may be inter-
preted as the intended size of the fluid elements along a flat portion of the selected
boundary. For avoiding undesired interferences, either the Fraction of Radius of
Curvature or the Coefficient of Proportionality should vanish.

Box

Xmin

Specify a value for the minimum position on the X axis for the refinement zone box
(the X-coordinate of the lower-left-front point). The default value is 0.

Ymin

Specify a value for the minimum position on the Y axis for the refinement zone box
(the Y-coordinate of the lower-left-front point). The default value is 0.

Zmin

Specify a value for the minimum position on the Z axis for the refinement zone box
(the Z-coordinate of the lower-left-front point). The default value is 0.

Xmax

Specify a value for the maximum position on the X axis for the refinement zone box
(the X-coordinate of the upper-right-back point). The default value is 0.

Ymax

Specify a value for the maximum position on the Y axis for the refinement zone box
(the Y-coordinate of the upper-right-back point). The default value is 0.

Zmax

Specify a value for the maximum position on the Z axis for the refinement zone box
(the Z-coordinate of the upper-right-back point). The default value is 0.

Element Size

Size

The dimensions of the element can be either a constant or linear function of coordin-
ates: A + B * x + C * y + D * z

Specify the length of the element.

A coefficient for the element size (a coefficient of the affine size function), 0 by de-
fault.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
910 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

A coefficient for the element size (a coefficient of the affine size function), 0 by de-
fault.

A coefficient for the element size (a coefficient of the affine size function), 0 by de-
fault.

Sphere

Xc

Specify the X coordinate of the center of the sphere. The default value is 0.

Yc

Specify the Y coordinate of the center of the sphere. The default value is 0.

Zc

Specify the Z coordinate of the center of the sphere. The default value is 0.

Diameter

Specify a value for the sphere diameter. The default value is 0.

Element Size

Size

The function A+Br dictates the size of the elements in that sphere versus the distance
r with respect to the center.

A constant coefficient for the element size in the spherical refinement zone. The
default value is 0.

A coefficient for the affine function for the dependence of the element size with
respect to the distance from the center of the spherical refinement zone. The default
value is 0.

4.12.2. Solution Properties

4.12.2.1. Temperature Initialization Properties

Properties related to temperature initialization.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 911
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Cell Zones

Specify one or more cell zones to which to assign this temperature initialization.

Option

Specifies the temperature initialization method. Select f(X,Y,Z) to specify the components of
the temperature initialization equation. To initialize the temperature field using a CSV file con-
taining a temperature profile, select Temperature profile.

CSV File

Click the Load Temperature Profile button to select the CSV file for the temperature profile.

Field Name

Enter the name found in the CSV File for the temperature profile.

Temperature T

Specify the components of this temperature initialization equation.

The first component of the temperature initialization equation.

The second component of the temperature initialization equation.

The third component of the temperature initialization equation.

The fourth component of the temperature initialization equation.

4.12.2.2. Species Transport Initialization Properties

Properties related to species initialization.

Cell Zones

Specify one or more cell zones to which to assign this species initialization.

Option

Specifies the species initialization method. Select f(X,Y,Z) to specify the components of the
species initialization equation. To initialize the species field using a CSV file containing a species
profile, select Species profile.

CSV File

Click the Load Species Profile button to select the CSV file for the species profile.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
912 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Field Name

Enter the name found in the CSV File for the species profile.

Species S

Specify the components of this species initialization equation.

The first component of the species initialization equation.

The second component of the species initialization equation.

The third component of the species initialization equation.

The fourth component of the species initialization equation.

4.12.2.3. Probe Properties

There may be cases where you want to keep track of the value of one or more solution fields at a
specific point in the domain (or at several points). You can do this by defining a probe. The probe
definition will be used by the solver to save field values at specified intervals during the calculation.

Specify the X-component of the probe location.

Specify the Y-component of the probe location.

Specify the Z-component of the probe location.

Mode

Specify whether the probe is located on a moving node, or at a fixed location.

4.12.2.4. Derived Quantities Properties

Derived quantities are fields whose calculation requires the results of a previous calculation as their
input. For example, the calculation of vorticity based on the known velocity field can be performed
in a postprocessor.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 913
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Shear Rate

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the shear rate.

Viscosity

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the viscosity.

Viscous Heating

Enable this option to create an output field containing the local intensity of viscous dissipation
(heat generation by friction of fluid layers and slipping)

Stress

Enable this option to create an output field containing the stress tensor (stresses in the fluid
due to fluid deformation)

Volume of Liquid

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the volume of the flow domain.

Vorticity

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the vorticity.

Mixing Index

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the mixing index lambda (λ)

Rate of Deformation Tensor

Activates the calculation of the rate-of-deformation tensor D in the flow domain.

Force

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the force.

Flow Rate

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the flow rate.

Heat Flux

Enable this option to create an output field to evaluate the heat flux.

Convected Heat

Activates the evaluation of the convected heat field. Convected heat is evaluated automatically
for each fluid boundary condition.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
914 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

4.12.2.4.1. Flow Balance

Enable

Activates the evaluation of the uniformity of the velocity field at specified boundary(ies)

Useful Borders

Select the boundary(ies) where the flow balance will be evaluated.

4.12.2.4.2. Extension
Evaluation of the extension components is available for 3D blow molding and thermoforming
simulations. Two kinds of extensions can be evaluated:

• Area Stretch Ratio: for each face of the fluid domain, this is the ratio of the face surface
over the initial face surface (enabled by default).

• Track Vectors: the local deformations of specified vectors (disabled by default).

You must specify the Initial Orientations of the vectors: initially parallel to the direction D, initially
perpendicular to the direction D, initially radial from point P, initially circumferential around point
P (where more than one can be selected at once). You must then specify the coordinates of the
reference point P and orientation of the vector D. This is available if the domain is a shell.

Enable

Indicate whether or not to activate the calculation of several technological measures of fluid
zone deformation.

Area Stretch Ratio

Indicate whether or not to evaluate the distribution of area stretch ratio undergone by the
fluid zone, that is, the ratio of local area after deformation to initial area.

Track Vectors

Activates the evaluation of the deformations of specified vectors in the flow domain.

4.12.2.4.2.1. Reference Point P

The reference point for the extension derived quantity. You must specify the coordinates of
the reference point P.

Px

Specify the x-coordinate of the reference point P.

Py

Specify the y-coordinate of the reference point P.

Pz

Specify the z-coordinate of the reference point P.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 915
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

4.12.2.4.2.2. Reference Direction D

The reference vector direction for the extension derived quantity. You must specify the orient-
ation of the vector D.

Dir-x

Specify the x-component of the reference direction D.

Dir-y

Specify the y-component of the reference direction D.

Dir-z

Specify the z-component of the reference direction D.

4.12.2.4.3. Self Contact

For blow molding and thermoforming processes in shell models, there are times when self-contacts
such as folds or knit-lines can occur in the blown part. In such cases, the self-contact postprocessor
can simply detect self-contact of the parison.

Enable

Activates the detection of folds or knit-lines that can occur in a blown/thermoformed part.

Action

Select the action to be taken when self-contact is detected such as No action, Warning or
Stop. No action simply allows to postprocess the self-contact field. Warning generates a
message in the transcript. Stop halts the calculation.

4.12.2.4.4. Convected Heat

This postprocessor is available for boundaries of fluid zones in thermal simulations. Only bound-
aries with non-zero normal velocity should be considered. Indeed, along walls or plane of sym-
metries, the convected heat should be zero.

The convected heat postprocessor computes the integral along selected boundaries of ,
where is the temperature.

Convected Heat

Activates the evaluation of the convected heat field. Convected heat is evaluated automatically
for each fluid boundary condition.

4.12.2.4.5. Residence Time

Residence time of fluid points entering the fluid domain (disabled by default). This is available if
the domain is not shell and if there is at least one inlet fluid boundary condition. You must specify
the fluid boundaries where it will be initialized and provide the initial value.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
916 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Enable

Activates the evaluation of the residence time in the flow domain.

4.12.2.4.5.1. Residence Time Condition

Inlet Boundary

Select the boundary(ies) where the residence time is imposed.

Law

Select the law for imposing the residence time such as Constant or Polynomial.

Specify a value for the constant coefficient of the residence time function at the inlet
boundary.

Specify a value for the X coefficient of the polynomial function for the residence time
function at the inlet boundary.

Specify a value for the Y coefficient of the polynomial function for the residence time
function at the inlet boundary.

Specify a value for the Z coefficient of the polynomial function for the residence time
function at the inlet boundary.

4.12.2.4.6. Tracking of a Material Property

This is available if the domain is not a shell and if there is at least one inlet fluid boundary condition
. In addition, you should specify the fluid boundaries where it will be initialized it and specify the
initial value.

Enable

Activates the tracking of material particles.

4.12.2.4.6.1. Material Property Condition

Inlet Boundary

Select the boundary(ies) where the material property is imposed.

Law

Select the law for imposing the material property such as Constant or Polynomial.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 917
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Specify a value for the constant coefficient of the material property function at the inlet
boundary.

Specify a value for the X coefficient of the polynomial function for the material property
function at the inlet boundary.

Specify a value for the Y coefficient of the polynomial function for the material property
function at the inlet boundary.

Specify a value for the Z coefficient of the polynomial function for the material property
function at the inlet boundary.

4.12.2.4.7. Estimated Thickness

Evaluation of the thickness of a product. This is available if the domain is not a shell and not a
film, and if the simulation is transient with no restrictors or moving parts. (disabled by default)

In 2D as well as in 3D simulations of blow molding and pressing, you can compute the thickness
of the final object (as well as during shaping). In industrial processing, the thickness has to be
understood as the distance between two arbitrary surfaces; it is therefore subjected to an appro-
priate definition. Also, from the point of view of modeling, it would require the identification of
preferably distinct topological entities; however this cannot always be achieved. A technique has
been implemented, which matches a reasonable industrial definition as much as possible: at a
given point, it basically consists of evaluating the distance with respect to the closest opposite
surface. A topological object has to be constructed for the thickness evaluation, and a few para-
meters for geometric tolerances have to be given. In 3D, the thickness is evaluated on the selected
boundary; planes of symmetry can be discarded from the domain of evaluation. Note that in 2D,
a similar scenario applies; however, since the display of a quantity along a line is not easy, the
evaluation is expanded onto the domain via a Laplace equation.

Typically, the thickness at the end of the process is of interest. Hence, it is not necessary to perform
a thickness evaluation at each time step. Also, since the thickness at a point is evaluated as a
distance measured along a line perpendicular to the surface at this point, it is preferable to bound
its value.

Zones

Select the zone(s) where the derived quantity must be calculated.

Useful Borders

Specify the border that is used as the basis for the evaluation of the thickness; it may consist
of one or several boundaries, but typically symmetry planes and lines are not considered.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
918 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Activation Time

Specify a value for the activation time. The thickness evaluation will be performed only when
the simulation time is greater than or equal to the activation time.

Tolerance

Specify a value for the geometric tolerance. The thickness at a point is evaluated as a distance
between the point and the opposite surface, measured along a line perpendicular to the
surface at this point. The algorithm involves a search of geometric intersection (between the
perpendicular line and boundary elements). A geometric tolerance is needed in order to
compensate for round-off errors.

4.12.2.5. Methods Properties

Numerical methods affect your simulation's convergence speed as well as accuracy and stability of
the solution.

Upwinding in energy equation

Activates the upwinding numerical method on the energy equation to aid in solution conver-
gence.

Upwinding on free surfaces

Activates the upwinding numerical method on free surfaces to aid in solution convergence.

Upwinding on Species

Activates the upwinding numerical method on species to aid in solution convergence.

Decouple computation of temperature

Decouples the calculation of temperature to produce a stabilizing effect in some cases.

Decouple Computation of Viscoelastic Stresses

Decouples the calculation of viscoelastic stress to produce a stabilizing effect in some cases
(the solver updates the viscoelastic stresses fields after calculation of the velocities)

Decouple computation of free surfaces

Decouples the calculation of free surfaces to produce a stabilizing effect in some cases.

Decouple Computation of Species

Decouples the calculation of species to produce a stabilizing effect in some case.

Integration method on free surfaces

Choose the type of integration for the free surface: program controlled, line integration, or
surface integration.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 919
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Integration Rule for Transient Terms

Allows you to select standard or hybrid integration rule for transient terms. The hybrid integration
rule is recommended for transient thermal flow or heat conduction problems involving thermal
shocks. (For example, a glass pressing problem)

Picard iterations

Assists in the robustness of the calculation. Recommended when the selected viscosity model
exhibits important variations.

Pressure stabilization

Smooths the pressure over elements by introducing a slight compressibility of the fluid. Man-
datory when using linear interpolation of velocities.

Relative compression factor

The amount of compressibility for the pressure stabilization. A factor that is too small will intro-
duce pressure peaks. If the factor is too large, the fluid is too compressible and all pressure
gradients will be smoothed out, leading to an unrealistically low pressure prediction.

Fluid fractions diffusivity

Specify the diffusivity for the fluid fractions.

Overlap threshold

Specify a value of the overlap threshold that is used to separate the nodes that are inside and
outside the moving parts. In general, there is no reason to modify the default value that is 0.6.

Allow Multiple Overlapping

Allows overlapping of moving parts, a fluid node may then be inside more than one moving
part.

Slip stabilization factor

A stabilization factor for slip conditions that helps resolve problems that arise from conflicting
boundary conditions.

Advanced Volume Conservation

Enable this to enhance volume conservation in the calculations involving adaptive meshing.

4.12.2.5.1. DEVSS
The DEVSS method consists of adding a purely viscous term into the momentum equation that
is expressed in terms of velocity unknowns, and removing an equivalent contribution expressed
in terms of rate-of-deformation unknowns. Such a formulation keeps the constitutive equation
unchanged.

Numerical Parameters for DEVSS

Allows you to switch between Program controlled and User specified numerical parameters.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
920 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Numerical Viscosity for DEVSS

Specify a value for the numerical viscosity which can possibly be adjusted in order to com-
pensate for the discarded stress components.

4.12.2.5.2. Interpolation
The interpolation of a field defines the way it is represented. One can have one value per ele-
ment/cell, one value per node in case of linear interpolation, or one value per node/edge/face/cell
in case of quadratic interpolation.

The different interpolations for the different fields cannot be chosen completely arbitrarily. The
Fluent Materials Processing workspace proposes only sensible choices.

Coordinates

Choose the interpolation of the coordinates field. This interpolation should be linear.

Thickness

Choose the interpolation type used to calculate the thickness field.

Velocity (V) and pressure (P)

Choose a combination of velocity-pressure interpolations. The default is linear velocity with

constant-per-element (stabilized) pressure (usually the least computationally expensive com-
bination) . The quadratic velocity with linear pressure is the most computationally accurate
and expensive.

Stress

Choose an interpolation type used to calculate the stress field.

Temperature

Choose an interpolation type used to calculate the temperature field, based on the Péclet
number or expected temperature gradients.

Species

Choose an interpolation type used to calculate the species field.

Pressure at slip wall

Choose an interpolation type used to calculate the pressure applied along a slipping wall to
enforce the zero normal velocity condition.

Displacement

Choose an interpolation type used to calculate the displacement of an elastic solid.

4.12.2.5.3. FSI Parameters

Numerics settings related to calculating the solution for fluid-structure interaction (FSI).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 921
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Penalty Coefficient

Specify a value for the fluid-structure interaction penalty coefficient. This enforces the condition
that the fluid velocity must be equal to the wall velocity of the elastic solid, in the normal
direction. The value for the penalty coefficient should only be changed to account for fluid
slip on the solid surface.

Stability Coefficient

This value should only be changed if the fluid sticks to the solid surface. The stability coefficient
can be modified to prevent problems from occurring during the calculation when the fluid
sticks to the solid surface at points where the velocity is already imposed. The stability coef-
ficient is dimensionless and the value must be small with respect to 1.

4.12.2.5.4. Free Jet Parameters

Numerics settings related to free jet stabilization.

Stabilization

Select the method for stabilizing the free jet as Program Controlled, Whole, Partial, or No.
Program controlled is the default method and is sufficient for most cases. Program controlled
will automatically determine if it is necessary and possible to stabilize the free jet. Additionally,
values of the numerical parameters involved are determined automatically as well. When
Whole is selected, the whole free jet will be stabilized. When Partial is selected, only the
portion of the free jet that is adjacent to the extrudate exit will be stabilized. For both the
Whole and Partial stabilization methods, if stabilization is not possible or not necessary, sta-
bilization will be cancelled and a message will be printed in the console during the calculation.
When No is selected, the free jet will not be stabilized. This can lead to unphysical deformations
of the free jet if the flow field in the die end is not well balanced. However, including gravity
effects and guiding device boundary conditions may resolve instability.

Relative Tolerance on Distance

This parameter determines if the vertex of a boundary is located or not in a plane for the
Whole and Partial stabilization methods. This parameter should not be modified unless re-
quested by customer support.

Tolerance on Plane Coefficient

This parameter allows for the coefficients of an equation of a plane to be rounded to zero
for the Whole and Partial stabilization methods. This parameter should not be modified unless
requested by customer support.

Relative Starting Coordinate

When using the partial stabilization method, specify the portion of the free jet that will not
be stabilized. The range must be between 0 and 1 and is set to 0.5 by default. A value of 0.25
will not stabilize 25 percent of the free jet (the portion adjacent to the die end), while a value
of 0.75 will stabilize 25 percent of the free jet (the part adjacent to the extrudate exit)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
922 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

4.12.2.5.5. Contact Penetration

The way contact is managed in the solver, a fluid node always slightly enters into the solid/mold.
Parameters are set to correctly detect and limit this penetration.

Penetration Accuracy

If the penetration of a point into the mold is greater than the penetration accuracy, the time
step will be rejected. The calculation will then be restarted from the previous time step with
a smaller time-step increment. The default value is set according to the dimensions of the
mesh, and you will generally not need to modify it.

Element Dilatation

This option allows for expansion of each finite element of the mold in order to help the
contact detection algorithm. Some numerical errors can cause a point to "miss" the mold. A
typical case can occur when a point of the fluid domain is supposed to come into contact
with a mold at the location of the symmetry line of the mold. A small expansion of the finite
elements fixes the problem. The default value is set according to the dimensions of the mesh,
and you will generally not need to modify it.

Search Settings

You have the choice of five predefined groups of search settings. The groups can be “faster”.
That is, result in faster computation times for the search) or “safer”. That is, conduct searches
that are more thorough but require more computation time). By default, a fast group of settings
is selected, as this group is appropriate for a relatively broad range of cases.

Search Sector Divisions per Axis

Allows you to modify the search sector division along each Cartesian axis. In order to speed
up the search of contact, the search zone is divided into N sectors along each Cartesian axis,
that is, the search zone is divided into N^3 search sectors. The actual search occurs in the
sector that contains the point of interest. The larger sector divisions, the faster search in a
specific sector but a greater risk of missing something.

Expansion of Search Zone

Allows you to modify the expansion of the search zone. This expansion is a increment to the
dimension of the Cartesian box that surrounds the whole mold. This increment is expressed
in a percentage of the largest dimension of that box.

Overlap of Sectors

Allows you to modify the overlap of search sectors. Using overlapping sectors decreases the
risk of overlooking (large) finite elements on the border of contiguous sectors. The larger the
overlap, the safer search but a more expensive search in a given sector.

4.12.2.5.6. Distortion Check

Action if Limits Exceeded

Specify what actions to take if local element distortion limits are exceeded.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 923
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Minimum Angle [deg]

Specify a value for the minimum interior angle to avoid local distortions to the mesh.

Maximum Angle [deg]

Specify a value for the maximum interior angle to avoid local distortions to the mesh.

Maximum Aspect Ratio

Specify a value for the maximum aspect ratio to avoid local distortions to the mesh.

Maximum Bend

Specify a value for the maximum bend to avoid local distortions to the mesh.

Maximum Skew

Specify a value for the maximum skew to avoid local distortions to the mesh.

Reduction Rate of Time Step

For transient calculations, specify a value for the time step reduction rate. This is a factor that
multiplies the current time step when a significant risk of element distortion is detected.

4.12.2.6. Calculation Activities Properties

Controls the convergence and divergence criteria and the numerical progression of the polymer
simulation.

Iterations Criterion

Allows you to switch between Program controlled and User specified parameter.

Maximum Number of Iterations

Specify a value for the maximum number of solver iterations in a given equations system resol-
ution.

Convergence criterion

Controls when the convergence to a stable solution is assumed. Allows the program to check
convergence of the solution, or define your own criterion.

Convergence tolerance

Specify the tolerance for when the solution is converging. When the relative variation of the
solution is smaller that the provide tolerance, convergence is assumed.

Divergence criterion

Controls the solution when divergence is assumed. Allows the program to check divergence of
the solution, or define your own criterion.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
924 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Divergence tolerance

Specify the maximum value for the relative variation of the solution at which the solver assumes
divergence and stops the iterations.

Use double-precision buffer

Determine whether or not to use double-precision buffering in your solution.

Solver unit system

Sets the units in which all data will be converted before being passed to the solver. Setting this
avoids very large or very small numbers in the solver and enhances accuracy.

Solver type

Sets the method for solving the system of equations. Program controlled is the default, which
uses the AMF direct solver for most cases. The MUMPS direct solver can be selected for large
cases, such as large 3D extrusion problems or large 3D problems with contact. The AMF direct
solver + secant or the MUMPS direct solver + secant options can be selected to use the secant
technique: this technique has shown to work for most problems with potentially significant
savings. However, in rare cases, the secant iteration may direct iterations along a wrong path
and therefore this technique is not the default.

Restart Options

Restart Type

Allows you to select the restart option such as No previous solution, Restart from an old
result file, Restart from an old CSV file or Restart from old result and restart files (non
steady calculations only). When there is no previous solution, the initial state is all fields is
set to zero except for those with an explicit initialization as to the temperature. An old
result file is a Polyflow format file that must be topologically compatible. A CVS file that
contains a cloud of data points does not require such compatibility. A restart file contains
time derivatives that permit to pursue the time integration.

RES Filename

Specify the pathname of the file containing calculation results in a Polyflow format.

CSV Filename

Specify the pathname of the file containing calculation results in a CSV format.

RST Filename

Specify the pathname of the file containing time derivatives of a previous calculation.

Launch Options

Solver arguments

Advanced command-line options (should not be used unless recommended by ANSYS

Customer Support)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 925
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Solver keywords

Advanced options (should not be used unless recommended by ANSYS Customer Support)

Number of processors

Indicate the number of processes to use in the calculation. By default, the solver uses 4
processors.

GPU

Allows you to activate usage of Graphical Processor Unit(s) that speed(s) up the calculation.

Number of GPUs

Specify the number of GPUs to be used in the calculation. More than one GPU allows you
to balance the load in a parallel calculation.

Transient Controls

Initial time step

Specify a value for the initial time step size for the transient calculations.

Minimum time step

Specify a value for the minimum time step size for the transient calculations.

Maximum time step

Specify a value for the maximum time step size for the transient calculations.

Integration scheme

Choose an integration scheme for the transient calculations: Zero order, Implicit Euler,
Galerkin, or Crank-Nicolson

Tolerance

Specify a tolerance value for the transient calculations.

Use velocity for precision evaluation

Determine whether or not you want to use velocity prediction.

VOF Transient Controls

Initial Time Step

Specify a value for the initial time step size for the volume of fluid transient calculations.

Minimum Time Step

Specify a value for the minimum time step size for the volume of fluid transient calculations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
926 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Maximum Time Step

Specify a value for the maximum number of time steps for the volume of fluid transient
calculations.

Maximum Number of Time Steps

Specify a value for the maximum number of time steps for the transient calculations.

Accuracy

Controls the accuracy of the scheme. Recommended values of are on the order of 0.2-0.5.
Note that an extremely low value of this parameter can reduce the time step to such a degree
that the fluid front does not progress anymore. Consequently, the time step will be increased
and you then run the risk of engaging in an oscillatory forward/backwards marching scheme
that calculates several useless iterations without improved accuracy. An inherent limitation
of the VOF model is that it cannot process changes that are smaller than the element size.

Filtering Threshold on Fluid Fraction

Some variations of the fluid fraction in the wet zone (far from interface with dry zone) may
be filtered with this parameter: all variations higher than this threshold will be smoothed.
The variations smaller than the threshold will be unchanged. For example, with a threshold
of 0.1, if the local value of the Fluid Fraction is 0.95 (instead of 1.0 ideally), then the variation
= 0.05 (= 1.0 - 0.95) is below the threshold. Consequently, the value is unchanged. However,
for a value of 0.89 (instead of 1.0 ideally), then the variation = 0.11 (= 1.0 - 0.89) is above
the threshold. Consequently, the value will be filtered (value reset to 1.0)

Stop Run When Cavity Full

By default, the VOF calculation is stopped when the geometry is completely covered by the
fluid or when the net flow rate (volume of fluid entering the geometry per unit of time
minus volume of fluid exiting the geometry per unit of time) is zero. Disabling this criterion
lets the run to reach the final time.

Continuation Controls

Initial Value

Specify a value for the first step of the continuation calculations.

Upper Limit

Specify a value for the final step of the continuation calculations.

Initial step size

Specify a value for the initial continuation step size.

Minimum step size

Specify a value for the minimum continuation step size.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 927
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Maximum step size

Specify a value for the maximum continuation step size.

Maximum number of steps

Specify a value for the maximum number of continuation steps.

Integration scheme

Choose an integration scheme for the continuation calculations: Zero order, Implicit Euler,
Galerkin, or Crank-Nicolson

Convergence Strategies

Multiple Materials

Enable this option to assist converging flows with more than one material.

Free Surfaces and Moving Interfaces

Enable this option to assist converging free surface flows involving a pulling component,
such as take-up velocity, take-up force or gravity.

Viscosity and Slip

Enable this option to assist converging flows with non-linear viscosity and/or slipping.

Viscoelasticity

Enable this option to assist converging flows with viscoelastic non-linearities that often
originate from the combination of high stress values developing in the vicinity of geometric
singularities and of transport mechanisms inherent to viscoelasticity.

Thermal Effects

Enable this option to assist converging flows when temperatures are important.

Flow at Inlet

Enable this option to assist converging flows based on the flow at the inlet. Linearly increases
the mass flow rate/volume flow rate/normal velocity, starting from 0 to reach the assigned
value at the end of the continuation scheme.

Flow at Outlet

Enable this option to assist converging flows based on the flow at the outlet. Linearly in-
creases the mass flow rate/volume flow rate/normal velocity, starting from 0 to reach the
assigned value at the end of the continuation scheme.

Take-Up at Extrudate Exit

Enable this option to assist converging flows based on a take-up velocity/force/force density
applied on an extrudate exit. Linearly increases the velocity/force/force density, starting
from 0 to reach the assigned value at the end of the continuation scheme.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
928 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Foaming

Enable this option to assist converging flows based on foaming.

Fluid Structure Interaction (FSI)

Enable this option to assist converging flows with fluid-structure interaction.

4.12.2.7. Outputs Properties

Indicate specifics for the output of the material processing simulation. For example, you can specify
how verbose you would like the output transcript to be, along with specifying various derived
quantities that the simulation can provide.

Output at Initial State

Specify how you will save the initialized state of the simulation (state prior to beginning the
calculation). This allows you to check the initialization state of an old results file and is useful
for both transient and continuation type simulations.

Output Frequency (continuation)

Specify how often the output will be generated for continuation calculations.

Output Frequency (transient)

Specify how often the output will be generated for transient calculations.

Number of Steps

Specify the number of steps after which the output will be generated.

Time Interval

Specify the time interval for the output generation.

Step Interval

Specify the step interval for the output generation.

Transcript Verbosity

Specify how verbose you would like the output transcript to be.

Fields Visualization

Specify whether to include special output fields along with standard output fields.

STL

Creates output containing the facets describing the boundaries of the domains of the geometry,
such that each boundary of each region corresponds to a STL solid.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 929
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

CFD-Post

Creates output that contains the geometry and the computed fields for use with ANSYS CFD-
Post.

Polyflow

Creates output files (res.msh, res) that contain the mesh and the computed fields for use with
ANSYS Polyflow. This format can also be read into the Fluent Materials Processing workspace.

CSV

Creates this output file (csv) is a common format for tabulated data that can be read into
spreadsheet programs as Excel. It can also be read in ANSYS Polyflow for initial or boundary
conditions.

EnSight

Creates output that contains the geometry and the computed fields for use with EnSight. By
default, results are always available in this format as they are required by the workspace for
visualizing results.

FieldView

Creates output that contains the geometry and the computed fields for use with FieldView.

Ansys Mapper

Creates output that contains the geometry and the computed fields for use with Ansys Mapper.

4.12.2.8. Monitors Properties

Velocity convergence

Monitor the convergence of the velocity residuals.

Pressure convergence

Monitor the convergence of the pressure residuals.

Temperature convergence

Monitor the convergence of the temperature residuals.

Species convergence

Monitor the convergence of the species residuals.

Stress convergence

Monitor the convergence of the stress residuals.

Thickness convergence

Monitor the convergence of the thickness residuals.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
930 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Coordinates Convergence

Monitor the convergence of the coordinates residuals.

Fluid Fraction Convergence

Monitor the convergence of the fluid fraction residuals.

Density Convergence

Monitor the convergence of the fluid density in foaming flows.

Bubble Radius Convergence

Monitor the convergence of the bubble radius in foaming flows.

Displacement Convergence

Monitor the convergence of the displacement residuals.

4.12.3. Results Properties

4.12.3.1. Surfaces
4.12.3.1.1. Point Properties
Allows you to create a new point surface.

Specify the x-component of the point location.

Specify the y-component of the point location.

Specify the z-component of the point location.

4.12.3.1.2. Line Properties

Allows you to create a new line surface.

First Point

Specify the x-component of the first point of the line.

Specify the y-component of the first point of the line.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 931
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Specify the z-component of the first point of the line.

Second Point

Specify the x-component of the second point of the line.

Specify the y-component of the second point of the line.

Specify the z-component of the second point of the line.

4.12.3.1.3. Rake Properties

Allows you to create a new rake surface.

Number of Points

Specify the number of points to have as part of the rake surface.

Start Point

Specify the x-coordinate of the starting point of the rake surface.

Specify the y-coordinate of the starting point of the rake surface.

Specify the z-coordinate of the starting point of the rake surface.

End Point

Specify the x-coordinate of the ending point of the rake surface.

Specify the y-coordinate of the ending point of the rake surface.

Specify the z-coordinate of the ending point of the rake surface.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
932 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

4.12.3.1.4. Plane Properties

Allows you to create a new plane surface.

Creation Mode

Choose how the plane should be created. A plane can be created using Three Points, using
a Point and Normal vector, or by specifying the XY, YZ, or ZX planes.

Bounded

Select to have your plane bounded by the extents of the domain.

Specify the x-coordinate of the point in the plane creation.

Specify the y-coordinate of the point in the plane creation.

Specify the z-coordinate of the point in the plane creation.

Point 0

Specify the x-coordinate of the first point in the plane creation.

Specify the y-coordinate of the first point in the plane creation.

Specify the z-coordinate of the first point in the plane creation.

Point 1

Specify the x-coordinate of the second point in the plane creation.

Specify the y-coordinate of the second point in the plane creation.

Specify the z-coordinate of the second point in the plane creation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 933
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Point 2

Specify the x-coordinate of the third point in the plane creation.

Specify the y-coordinate of the third point in the plane creation.

Specify the z-coordinate of the third point in the plane creation.

Normal

Specify the x-component of the vector in the plane creation.

Specify the y-component of the vector in the plane creation.

Specify the z-component of the vector in the plane creation.

4.12.3.1.5. Iso-Surface Properties

Allows you to create a new iso-surface.

Field

Select the field variable that you want to use for creating the iso-surface.

Iso Value

Specify a value to apply to the iso-surface.

Minimum

The minimum value of the selected field.

Maximum

The maximum value of the selected field.

Restrict To Specific Surfaces

Select to restrict the iso-surface to a particular surface.

Surfaces

Select the surface(s) that you want to restrict to the iso-surface.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
934 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Restrict To Specific Zones

Select to restrict the iso-surface to a particular zone.

Zones

Select the zone(s) that you want to restrict to the iso-surface.

4.12.3.1.6. Iso-Clip Properties

Allows you to create a new iso-clip.

Field

Select the field variable that you want to use for creating the iso-clips.

Surfaces

Select the surface(s) that you want to apply to the iso-clip.

Minimum

Specify a minimum iso-clip value.

Maximum

Specify a maximum iso-clip value.

4.12.3.2. Reports
4.12.3.2.1. Report Properties
Allows you to set properties for your report definitions.

Name

Specify a name for the report, or use the default name.

Type

Choose the type of report as either a surface report or a volume report.

Quantity

Choose the surface or volume quantity that you want to report.

Field

Select the field variable to be used in the surface or volume integrations.

Surfaces

Select the surfaces used in computing the report definition.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 935
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Volumes

Select the volumes used in computing the report definition.

Per Surface

Select to include individual surfaces or volumes.

4.12.3.2.1.1. Surface Reports

When the Type is set to Surface, you can obtain a report for selected surfaces of various
quantities of a specified field variable

Surface reports can be created for a specific Quantity, including:

• Area—area of the selected surfaces.

• Area Average—area-weighted average of the specified variable over the selected sur-
face(s).

• Facet Average—facet average of the specified variable over the selected surface(s).

• Facet Minimum—facet minimum of the specified variable over the selected surface(s).

• Facet Maximum—facet maximum of the specified variable over the selected surface(s).

• Flow Rate—flow rate of the specified variable over the selected surface(s).

• Surface Integral—surface integral of the specified variable over the selected surface(s).

• Surface Mass Average—mass average of the specified variable over the selected sur-
face(s).

• Mass Flow Rate—mass flow rate of the specified variable over the selected surface(s).

• Standard Deviation—standard deviation of the specified variable over the selected

surface(s).

• Surface Sum—sum of the specified variable over the selected surface(s).

• Vertex Average—vertex average of the specified variable over the selected surface(s).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
936 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

• Vertex Minimum—vertex minimum of the specified variable over the selected surface(s).

• Vertex Maximum—vertex maximum of the specified variable over the selected surface(s).

• Volume Flow Rate—volume flow rate of the specified variable over the selected sur-
face(s).

4.12.3.2.1.2. Volume Reports

When the Type is set to Volume, you can obtain a report for selected volumes of various
quantities of a specified field variable

Volume reports can be created for a specific Quantity, including:

• Average—averaged value of the specified variable across the domain.

• Volume Integral—volume integral of the specified variable over domain.

• Volume Mass Average—volume-averaged value of the specified variable across the

domain.

• Mass Integral—mass-weighted integral of the specified variable across the domain.

• Volume—volume of the domain.

• Maximum—maximum value of the specified variable over the domain.

• Minimum—minimum value of the specified variable over the domain.

• Volume Sum—sum of the specified variable over the domain.

• Mass—mass of the entire domain.

4.12.3.3. Graphics
4.12.3.3.1. LIC Settings Properties
Allows you to create new, or edit existing LIC settings objects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 937
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Vector Field

Choose an existing vector variable to display on the surface.

Contrast

Select to do a pass of image contrast enhancement.

Length

Specify a maximum length of 20 pixel units in the positive and negative directions. Length
is a scaling factor of this 20 pixels. Range is 0 to 1.

Integration Step

Specify the step size in pixel units for each integration step. Range is 0 to 1.

Brightness

Specify the surface brightness. Range is 0 to 1.

4.12.3.3.2. Mesh Properties

Allows you to create new, or edit existing mesh objects.

Shrink Factor

Specify a value for the mesh shrink factor. To distinguish individual faces or cells in the display,
enlarge the space between adjacent faces or cells by increasing this value.

Surfaces

Select the surface(s) where you want to display the mesh.

Display LIC

Select to display the line integral convolution.

Options

Nodes

Select to include nodes in the mesh display.

Edges

Select to include edges in the mesh display.

Faces

Select to include faces in the mesh display.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
938 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Edge Options

Type

Choose how the edges will be displayed, all edges, edges within a specific feature
angle, or just the outline.

Feature Angle

Specify a value for the edge feature angle to control how you can display certain
features in complex geometries.

Coloring

Automatic

Select to use automatic mesh coloring, where the coloring is automatically determined
by either boundary type or ID. If disabled, you can color faces, edge, and node inde-
pendently.

Color By

Specify whether to automatically color the mesh by boundary type or by boundary

ID.

Color Faces By

Specify a color to apply to faces.

Color Edges By

Specify a color to apply to edges.

Color Nodes By

Specify a color to apply to nodes.

4.12.3.3.3. Contour Properties

Allows you to create new, or edit existing contour objects.

Field

Select the field variable that you want to use for creating the contour plot.

Surfaces

Select the surface(s) where you want to display the contour plot.

Display Filled Contour

Select to visualize the contour plot using filled contours.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 939
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Display LIC

Select to display the line integral convolution.

Contour Lines

Select to visualize the contour plot using just contour lines.

Coloring

Choose whether you want a smooth, transitional display of contours or a delineated, banded
display of contours.

Draw Mesh

Enable to draw the mesh with the contours.

Range

Auto-Compute Range

Select to automatically determine the range of contour values.

Global Range

Select to have the contour display use data from the entire domain.

Clip To Range

Select to have the contour display use data from a specific portion of the domain
defined by specified minimum and maximum values.

Minimum Value

Specify a minimum value for the contour data.

Maximum Value

Specify a maximum value for the contour data.

Color Map

Visible

Select to have the color key displayed along with the contour display.

Size

Specify the number of distinct color intervals in the color scale (especially applicable
for banded contour displays) or keep the default value. Values from 2 to 100 are ac-
ceptable, where increments of 10 are recommended.

Color Map

Select a particular contour color map scheme, or keep the default selection.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
940 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Use Log Scale

Select to have the contour display use a logarithmic scale.

Position

Choose the position of the contour color map in the graphics window, or use the
default value.

Type

Choose the contour color map presentation of data as general, exponential, or float.

Precision

Specify the numerical precision for the contour color map data.

Automatically Skip Labels

Select to skip a certain number of labels (or show all) in the contour color map.

Skip

Specify the number of color levels to include in the contour color map.

4.12.3.3.4. Vector Properties

Allows you to create new, or edit existing vector objects.

Vector Field

Select the vector quantity to be plotted.

Field

Select the field variable that you want to use for creating the vector plot.

Surfaces

Select the surface(s) where you want to display the vector plot.

Skip

Specify the number of levels to include in the vector plot.

Style

Select a particular style for your vector markers.

Draw Mesh

Enable to draw the mesh with the vectors.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 941
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Range

Auto-Compute Range

Select to automatically determine the range of vector values.

Global Range

Select to have the vector display use data from the entire domain.

Clip To Range

Select to have the vector display use data from a specific portion of the domain
defined by specified minimum and maximum values.

Min Value

Minimum Value

Max Value

Maximum Value

Color Map

Visible

Select to have the color key displayed along with the vector display.

Size

Specify the number of distinct color intervals in the color scale or keep the default
value. Values from 2 to 100 are acceptable, where increments of 10 are recommended.

Color Map

Select a particular vector color map scheme, or keep the default selection.

Use Log Scale

Select to have the vector display use a logarithmic scale.

Position

Choose the position of the vector color map in the graphics window, or use the default
value.

Type

Choose the vector color map presentation of data as general, exponential, or float.

Precision

Specify the numerical precision for the vector color map data.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
942 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Automatically Skip Labels

Select to skip a certain number of labels (or show all) in the vector color map.

Skip

Specify the number of color levels to include in the vector color map.

Vector Options

In Plane

Select to display the vector in the plane normal to the flow.

Fixed Length

Select to have all of the vectors displayed with the same length.

X Component

Select to include the x-component of the vector.

Y Component

Select to include the y-component of the vector.

Z Component

Select to include the z-component of the vector.

Head Scale

Specify a value that can control the size of the arrowhead for the vector display.

Color

Choose a color for the vector arrows.

Scale

Auto Scale

Select to use automatic scaling in the vector display.

Scale

Specify a value in order to increase or decrease the vector scale from the default
auto scale value.

4.12.3.3.5. Pathlines Properties

Allows you to create new, or edit existing pathline objects.

Vector Field

Select the vector quantity to be plotted.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 943
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Steps

Specify the maximum number of steps a particle can advance. A particle will stop when it
has traveled this number of steps or when it leaves the domain.

Path Density

Specify the density of pathlines for better visualization.

Color by

Select the field variable to be used to color the pathlines.

Release from Surfaces

Select the surface(s) from which the pathlines will be originating.

Draw Mesh

Enable to draw the mesh with the pathlines.

Options

Oil Flow

Select to display pathlines that are constrained to lie on a particular boundary.

Reverse

Select to reverse the direction of the pathlines display.

Node Values

Select to use values that have been interpolated to the nodes, or computed cell-
center values in the pathlines plot.

Relative

Display the pathlines relative to the rotating reference frame.

Range

Auto-Compute Range

Select to automatically determine the range of pathline values.

Minimum Value

Specify a minimum value for the pathline data.

Maximum Value

Specify a maximum value for the pathline data.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
944 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Style

Style

Choose from a variety of styles to apply to your pathline display.

Line Width

Specify the width of an individual pathline.

Arrow Space

Specify the space between the line-arrow pathlines.

Arrow Scale

Specify the size of the line-arrow pathline.

Marker Size

Specify the size of the marker when using marker pathlines.

Diameter

Specify the diameter of the sphere when using sphere pathlines.

Radius

Specify the radius of the sphere when using sphere pathlines.

Width

Specify the thickness of pathlines.

Accuracy Control

Accuracy Control On

Select to mitigate any potential accuracy issues for pathline calculations when using
large time step sizes.

Minimum Steps

Specify the minimum number of steps a particle can advance.

Maximum Steps

Specify the maximum number of steps a particle can advance.

Maximum Angle

Specify the maximum angle of a particle.

Maximum Rotation

Specify the maximum rotation of a particle.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 945
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Step Size

Specify the steps size used to control accuracy.

Tolerance

Control the error when using large time steps for the calculation.

Color Map

Visible

Select to have the color key displayed along with the pathline display.

Size

Specify the number of distinct color intervals in the color scale or keep the default
value. Values from 2 to 100 are acceptable, where increments of 10 are recommended.

Color Map

Select a particular pathline color map scheme, or keep the default selection.

Use Log Scale

Select to have the pathline display use a logarithmic scale.

Position

Choose the position of the pathline color map in the graphics window, or use the
default value.

Type

Choose the pathline color map presentation of data as general, exponential, or float.

Precision

Specify the numerical precision for the pathline color map data.

Automatically Skip Labels

Select to skip a certain number of labels (or show all) in the pathline color map.

Skip

Specify the number of color levels to include in the pathline color map.

4.12.3.3.6. Display Settings Properties

Allows you to set general properties for the graphics window display.

Axis Triad

Show or hide the axis triad in the graphics window.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
946 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Logo

Show or hide the Ansys logo/version in the graphics window.

Lighting

Select to apply light sources to your viewport.

Active Viewport

Select the viewport that you want to be currently active.

Linked Viewport

Lists any viewports that are linked.

Boundary Markers

Visible

Show or hide boundary markers in the graphics window.

Fraction

Specify the number of boundary markers as a fraction.

Scale

Specify the size of the boundary markers.

4.12.3.4. Plots
4.12.3.4.1. XY Plot Properties
Allows you to create new, or edit existing XY plot objects.

Lines

Choose a surface for the XY plot

Y Axis Function

Position On Y Axis

Enable to plot position on the y-axis.

Field

Select the field to plot on the y-axis.

X Axis Function

Position On X Axis

Enable to plot position on the x-axis.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 947
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Plot Direction

X Component

Specify the x-component of the plot direction.

Y Component

Specify the y-component of the plot direction.

Z Component

Specify the z-component of the plot direction.

Axes

X Axis

Label

Select the label for the x-axis

Options

Log

Enable to have the axis on a logarithmic scale.

Auto Range

Enable to automatically adjust the range.

Major Rules

Enable to have tick marks at major increments.

Minor Rules

Enable to have tick marks at minor increments.

Number Format

Type

Select how the x-axis values will be displayed.

Precision

Specify the precision of x-axis values.

Range

Minimum

(If "Auto Range" is disabled) Specify the Minimum value for the axis.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
948 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Maximum

(If "Auto Range" is disabled) Specify the Maximum value for the axis.

Major Rules

Color

Select the color of major tick marks.

Weight

Specify the thickness of major tick marks.

Minor Rules

Color

Select the color of minor tick marks.

Weight

Specify the thickness of minor tick marks.

Y Axis

Label

Select the label for the Y-axis.

Options

Log

Enable to have the axis on a logarithmic scale.

Auto Range

Enable to automatically adjust the range.

Major Rules

Enable to have tick marks at major increments.

Minor Rules

Enable to have tick marks at minor increments.

Number Format

Type

Select how the Y-axis values will be displayed.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 949
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Precision

Specify the precision of Y-axis values.

Range

Minimum

(If "Auto Range" is disabled) Specify the Minimum value for the axis.

Maximum

(If "Auto Range" is disabled) Specify the Maximum value for the axis.

Major Rules

Color

Select the color of major tick marks.

Weight

Specify the thickness of major tick marks.

Minor Rules

Color

Select the color of minor tick marks.

Weight

Specify the thickness of minor tick marks.

Curves

Line Style

Pattern

Choose a line style for the curve line.

Color

Choose a color for the curve line.

Marker Style

Weight

Choose a thickness for the curve line.

Symbol

Choose a symbol to apply to the curve marker.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
950 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Color

Choose a color to apply to the curve marker.

Size

Choose a size to apply to the curve marker.

4.12.3.4.2. Transient Plot Properties

Allows you to create new, and edit existing, plot objects for transient simulations.

Reports

Select the reports you wish to include in the transient plot.

Title

Specify the title for the transient plot.

X Axis

Select the variable you want to apply to the x-axis for the transient plot.

X Axis Label

Specify the x-axis label for the transient plot.

Y Axis Label

Specify the y-axis label for the transient plot.

Reports

Select the reports you wish to include in the transient plot.

Timestep Selection

Option

Choose the timestep selection option for plotting, printing to console or exporting
to file.

Axes

X Axis

Options

Log

Enable to have the axis on a logarithmic scale.

Auto Range

Enable to automatically adjust the range.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 951
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Major Rules

Enable to have tick marks at major increments.

Minor Rules

Enable to have tick marks at minor increments.

Number Format

Type

Select how the x-axis values will be displayed.

Precision

Specify the precision of x-axis values.

Y Axis

Options

Log

Enable to have the axis on a logarithmic scale.

Auto Range

Enable to automatically adjust the range.

Major Rules

Enable to have tick marks at major increments.

Minor Rules

Enable to have tick marks at minor increments.

Number Format

Type

Select how the x-axis values will be displayed.

Precision

Specify the precision of x-axis values.

Curves

Line Style

Pattern

Choose a line style for the curve line.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
952 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

Color

Choose a color for the curve line.

Weight

Choose a thickness for the curve line.

Marker Style

Symbol

Choose a symbol to apply to the curve marker.

Color

Choose a color to apply to the curve marker.

Size

Choose a size to apply to the curve marker.

4.12.3.4.2.1. Exporting Report Files

Transient report data can be exported using the Export dialog, accessible from the relevant
transient report property page.

For the Filename, use the Browse... button or enter the name and location of the relevant
report file(s) that you want to export.

4.12.3.4.2.2. Managing Report Files

Data from any number of report files can be added to and removed from a transient plot using
the Report Files dialog, accessible from the relevant transient report property page.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 953
Fluent Materials Processing Workspace

Use the Import... button to load report files (indicated in the Filenames field) into the Files
column. Relevant data therein is listed in the Columns, with its default Label that can be
changed accordingly. Use the Remove button to remove a selected file(s) from the report.

Bibliography
[1] R. B. Bird, P. J. Dotson, and N. L. Johnson. Polymer solution rheology based on a finitely extensible
bead-spring chain model. J Non-Newtonian Fluid Mech. 7(2/3). 213-235. 1980.

[2] N. Clemeur, R. P. G. Rutgers, and B. Debbaut. On the Evaluation of Some Differential Formulations
for the Pom-Pom Constitutive Model. Rheol Acta. 42(1). 217–231. 2003.

[3] P. Coussot, A. I. Leonov, and J. M. Piau. Rheology of Concentrated Dispersed Systems in a Low Mo-
lecular Weight Matrix. J Non-Newtonian Fluid Mech. 46. 179–217. 1993.

[4] W. P. Cox and E. H. Merz. Correlation of dynamic and steady flow properties. J Polym Sci. 28:. 619-
622. 1958.

[5] G. S. Fulcher. Analysis or recent measurements of the viscosity of glasses.. J Am Ceram Soc. 8(6).
339–355. 1925.

[6] W. Gleissle. "Two simple time-shear rate relations combining viscosity and first normal stress coefficient
in the linear and non-linear flow range". Rheology, Vol. 2 Fluids. G. Astarita, G. Marrucci, and L.
Nicolais, editors. Plenum, New York. 457-462. 1980.

[7] H. M. Laun,. Prediction of elastic strains of polymer melts in shear and elongation. J Rheology. 30.
459–501. 1986.

[8] T. C .B. McLeish and R. C. Larson. Molecular Constitutive Equations for a Class of Branched Polymers
The Pom-Pom Polymer. J Rheo. 42(1). 82–112. 1998.

[9] M. Simhambhatla. The Rheological Modeling of Simple Flows of Unfilled and Filled Polymers. PhD
Thesis University of Akron. 1994.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
954 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent Materials Processing Workspace Reference Guide

[10] M. Simhambhatla and A. I. Leonov. On the Rheological Modeling of Filled Polymers with Particle-
Matrix Interactions. Rheol Acta. 34. 329–338. 1995.

[11] R. I. Tanner. Engineering Rheology. Oxford University Press. 1985.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 955
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
956 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.